Lane Avenue Redevelopment, LLC. New Building for
Lane Avenue Mixed Use 1600 Lane Avenue Columbus, Ohio 43220
Project Manual 13 January 2012 Bid & Permit Set - Volume 1 Job Number: 10207
775 Yard Street, Suite 325 Columbus, Ohio 43212 USA
phone fax
614 764 0407 614 764 0237
www.ma-architects.com
Lane Avenue Redevelopment, LLC. New Building for
Lane Avenue Mixed Use 1600 Lane Avenue Columbus, Ohio 43220
Project Manual 13 January 2012 Bid & Permit Set – Volume 2 Job Number: 10207
775 Yard Street, Suite 325 Columbus, Ohio 43212 USA
phone fax
614 764 0407 614 764 0237
www.ma-architects.com
PROJECT MANUAL for Lane Avenue Mixed Use Columbus, Ohio 43220 M+A ARCHITECTS 775 YARD STREET, SUITE 325 COLUMBUS, OHIO 43212 (614) 764-0407 (614) 764-0237 - FAX CIVIL ENGINEERS E.P. FERRIS & ASSOCIATES, INC. 880 KING AVENUE COLUMBUS, OHIO 43212 (614) 299-2999 (614) 299-2992 - FAX LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTS ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT, INC. 8220 INDUSTRIAL PARKWAY PLAIN CITY, OHIO 43064 (614) 876-9988 (614) 876-9986 - FAX STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS KORDA 1650 WATERMARK DRIVE COLUMBUS, OHIO 43215-7010 (614) 487-1650 (614) 487-8981 - FAX MECHANICAL - ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS KORDA 1650 WATERMARK DRIVE COLUMBUS, OHIO 43215-7010 (614) 487-1650 (614) 487-8981 - FAX DEVELOPER LANE AVENUE REDEVELOPMENT, LLC. 550 METRO PLACE, SUITE 600 DUBLIN, OHIO 43017 (614) 335-2020
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS NOTICE TO BIDDERS INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS BID FORMS DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 013100 013200 013233 013300 014000 014533 015000 016000 017300
SUMMARY PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES QUALITY REQUIREMENTS CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS EXECUTION
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS Not Used DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 033000 035413
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY 042000 047200 047300
UNIT MASONRY CAST STONE MASONRY MANUFACTURED STONE MASONRY
DIVISION 05 - METALS 051200 053000 054000 055000 055133
STRUCTURAL STEEL METAL DECKING COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING METAL FABRICATIONS METAL LADDERS
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES 061000 061100 061713 064013 064023
ROUGH CARPENTRY STRUCTURAL LUMBER AND SHEATHING LAMINATED VENEER LUMBER EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC-1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 071326 071413 071900 072100 073113 074113 074243 074600 075423 076200 077200 078100 078413 079200 079500
SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING WATER REPELLENTS THERMAL INSULATION ASPHALT SHINGLES METAL ROOF PANELS COMPOSITE WALL PANELS FIBER-CEMENT PANELS AND TRIM POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM ROOF ACCESSORIES APPLIED FIREPROOFING PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING JOINT SEALANTS EXPANSION CONTROL
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 081113 081213.23 081416 083113 083323 084113 085313 086200 087111 087113 088000 088300
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PREFINISHED HOLLOW METAL FRAMES FLUSH WOOD DOORS ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES OVERHEAD COILING DOORS ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS VINYL WINDOWS AND DOORS UNIT SKYLIGHTS DOOR HARDWARE AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS GLAZING MIRRORS
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 092116.23 092216 092900 093000 096400 096513 096516.23 096519 096813 096816 097733 099100
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING GYPSUM BOARD TILING WOOD FLOORING RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES RESILIENT ACOUSTIC UNDERLAYMENT RESILIENT TILE FLOORING TILE CARPETING SHEET CARPETING FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS (FRP) PAINTING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC-2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 101300 101400 102800 103100 104400 105500 105623
DIRECTORIES SIGNAGE TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES POSTAL SPECIALTIES WIRE STORAGE SHELVING
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 113100
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 122413 123530.13 123640 129300
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES KITCHEN CASEWORK STONE COUNTERTOPS SITE FURNISHINGS
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Not Used DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT 142100 149182
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS TRASH CHUTES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC-3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
DIVISION 20 – GENERAL SECTIONS FOR PLUMBING, FIRE PROTECTION & HVAC 200501 200505 200510 200515 200520 220523 200525 200530 200535 200540 200545 200550 200555 200560 200561 200565 200575 200580 200599
INTRODUCTORY STATEMENT PLUMBING, FIRE PROTECTION, AND HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS COORDINATION BETWEEN TRADES SUBMITTALS RECORD AND INFORMATION BOOKLETS PLUMBING VALVES EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, AND PROTECTION OF UTILITIES CONCRETE BASES AND SUPPORTS SLEEVES, SEALS AND FIRESTOPS PIPING EXPANSION, NOISE AND VIBRATION ISOLATION HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND INSERTS (NON-SEISMIC) GENERAL PIPING REQUIREMENTS VALVE TAGGING LUBRICATION AND PACKING POWER FACTOR CORRECTION EQUIPMENT, PIPING AND DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION ACCESS PANELS VIBRATION ISOLATORS REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTRACT COMPLETION
DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION 210501 210502 210523 211201 211228 211313 211316 211317 213113
FIRE PROTECTION FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES FIRE PROTECTION VALVES STANDPIPE SYSTEM FIRE VALVE CABINETS WET SPRINKLER PIPING SYSTEM DRY SPRINKLER PIPING SYSTEM AIR COMPRESSORS ELECTRIC FIRE PUMP
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 220501 220502 220701 221116 221126 221316 221329 221413 221429 223313 223337 224201 227102
PLUMBING PLUMBING SPECIALTIES PLUMBING INSULATION INTERIOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM VARIABLE SPEED WATER BOOSTER PUMPS INTERIOR SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM SEWAGE EJECTORS INTERIOR STORM DRAIN SYSTEM SUMP PUMPS POINT-OF-USE ELECTRIC WATER HEATER ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS PLUMBING FIXTURES INTERIOR NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC-1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 230501 230595 230705 230933 230993 233110 233113 233313 233315 233417 233713 234105 237414 237416 238117 238127 238239
HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING HVAC SYSTEMS BALANCING HVAC INSULATION TEMPERATURE CONTROL (ELECTRIC-ELECTRONIC) SEQUENCES OF OPERATION LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST DUCTWORK DAMPERS FIRE DAMPERS EXHAUST FANS GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS FILTERS ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS PACKAGED TERMINAL AIR CONDITIONER DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONER CABINET UNIT HEATERS
DIVISION 25 - INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 260000 260005 260010 260015 260020 260025 260030 260055 260075 260099 260510 260526 260529 260533 260534 260535 260543 260553 260610 260710 260711 260712 260840 260923 260926 262420
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL INTRODUCTORY STATEMENT DIVISION 26 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS COORDINATION BETWEEN TRADES SUBMITTALS RECORD AND INFORMATION MANUALS EXCAVATION, BACKFILL AND PROTECTION OF UTILITIES CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS, SUPPORTS AND ENVELOPES SLEEVES, SEALS, AND FIRESTOPS ACCESS PANELS REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTRACT COMPLETION WIRE AND CABLE GROUNDING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS CONDUIT AND FITTINGS OUTLET BOXES PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES UNDERGROUND RACEWAYS ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION CABLE TRAY (WIRE BASKET) VOICE/DATA SYSTEMS RACEWAYS AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEMS RACEWAYS SECURITY SYSTEM RACEWAYS ELECTRICAL TESTS, ADJUSTMENTS, INSPECTION ELECTRICAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM PANELBOARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC-2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 262422 262714 262726 262813 262816 262817 262819 262913 263210 263623 264113 264313 265113 268111 269900
01/13/12
DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS-CIRCUIT BREAKER TYPE DISTRIBUTION METER CENTER-CIRCUIT BREAKER TYPE WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES FUSES SAFETY SWITCHES ELEVATOR SAFETY SWITCHES CIRCUIT BREAKERS MOTOR CONTROLLERS EMERGENCY GENERATOR (DIESEL OUTSIDE) AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION LUMINAIRES, LAMPS AND BALLASTS FIRE ALARM SYSTEM ELECTRICAL ALTERNATES
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS 270000 270001 270515 270526 270529 275123
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS INTRODUCTORY STATEMENT GENERAL REQUIREMENTS CABLE TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS RESIDENT CALL INTERCOM SYSTEM
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 280000 282630
DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY INTRODUCTORY STATEMENT AREA OF RESCUE ASSISTANCE INTERCOM
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK 311000 312000 314100
SITE CLEARING EARTH MOVING SHORING AND BRACING
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 321216 321313 321400 321723 323119 329200 329300
ASPHALT PAVING CONCRETE PAVEMENT UNIT PAVING PAVEMENT MARKINGS DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES TURF AND GRASSES PLANTS
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES 334600
SUBDRAINAGE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC-3
01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
1.2 A.
Work covered by the Contract Documents. Work phases and sequence. Work covered under other contracts. Use of premises. Owner's occupancy requirements. Specification formats and conventions.
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Project Identification: Project Location:
Lane Avenue Mixed Use
1600 Lane Avenue, Columbus, Ohio 43220.
B.
Owner:
Lane Avenue Redevelopment, LLC.
C.
Owner's Representative:
D.
Architect:
Vern Hoying.
M+A Architects. 775 Yard Street, Suite 325 Columbus, Ohio 43212 (614) 764-0407, Fax (614) 764-0237
E.
Project Manager:
Tom Linzell or Nelson Yoder (614) 764-0407, Fax (614) 764-0237
F.
Contractor: Brackett Builders, Inc.
G.
The Work consists of the following: 1.
1.3 A.
The Work includes limited site preparation and new multi-story office and residential building with below grade parking garage.
WORK SEQUENCE Work Sequence: In general, the Work shall be completed in accordance with generally accepted construction practices and sequences in order to ensure effective and efficient completion of the Work. No work is to be started until completion of related or
SUMMARY
011000 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
supporting work in the area or until work that is to be covered by subsequent work is completed. General sequencing of the Work shall be as follows: 1. 2. 1.4 A.
Underground utilities, foundations and site preparations. New building construction including underground garage work.
USE OF PREMISES General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including use of Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. 1.
Storage and Access: Minimize the use of the premises within contract limits for all work and storage. All construction traffic, parking, and storage are restricted to locations approved by the Owner prior to the start of the work. Coordinate use of premises under direction of the Architect. a.
2.
3.
1.5 A.
Security: General Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products under this contract stored on the site. The Owner will not provide security during the Project. Roadway Maintenance: General Contractor shall control and minimize the quantity of dirt, mud and debris deposited on adjacent roadways. Such material shall be removed on a regular basis and at the request of local governing authorities
SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 49-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat 2004" numbering system. 1.
B.
Move any stored products, under contractor's control, that interfere with operations of the Owner or separate contractor.
Division 01: Sections in Division 01 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.
Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1.
2.
SUMMARY
Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be
011000 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. a.
The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 011000
SUMMARY
011000 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
B.
1.2 A.
1.3 A.
Coordination. Construction schedule. Coordination drawings. Project meetings. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs).
Refer to the Supplemental Conditions for all requirements that will override any conflicts with this section. DEFINITIONS RFI: Requests For Interpretation, requests from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents. COORDINATION Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service and repair. Coordinate location and distribution of temporary facilities, utilities and controls. Refer to Division 01 Section “Temporary Facilities and Controls.” Verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to property survey and existing benchmarks, before laying out the Work. Coordinate location of all chases, openings, ducts, lines, fixtures and equipment. Refer to Division 01 Section “Execution”. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013100 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 8.
01/13/12
Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water and materials. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work.
B.
Project Superintendent: Provide a qualified full time, on-site project superintendent to coordinate, schedule and supervise all subcontracts and tradespersons, and monitor the pace, quality and thoroughness of the Work. Superintendent shall be on site each working day during all construction hours. The same person shall remain so employed until the Work is completed and shall not be reassigned or replaced without written approval by the Owner.
C.
Cooperation: Contractor and subcontractors shall fully cooperate and coordinate their work with each other to ensure efficient and orderly execution of each part of the Work. Each trade shall afford other trades every reasonable opportunity for installation of their work and for storage of their material. In no case will a subcontractor be permitted to exclude from the premises or work any other subcontractor or his employees, or interfere with any subcontractor in the execution or installation of his work. Each subcontractor shall: 1.
Obtain complete dimensional data at the site and inspect surfaces, components or elements which are to receive their work before proceeding to fabricate, install or incorporate their work and materials. a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Be solely responsible for accuracy of measurements and layout of their work; correct errors or defects due to faulty measurements taken, information obtained, layout, or failure to report discrepancies. All official information relative to the projects requirements shall be obtained from the Contract Documents approved by the authorities having jurisdiction and in possession of the Contractor. Work of previous contracts found to be unacceptable to receive work under this contract shall be reported to the project superintendent by the contractor/subcontractor prior to beginning of the work.
Give due notice and proper information to other subcontractors of any special provisions necessary for the placing or setting of their work coming into contact with the work of other subcontractors. Failing to do so in proper time will result in the subcontractor being held responsible and shall pay for any and all alterations and/or repairs necessitated by such neglect. Perform their work in proper sequence in relation to that of other trades and as approved by the project superintendent. Any cost caused by defective or ill timed work shall be borne by the Contractor. Arrange their work and dispose of their materials so as not to interfere with the work or material storage of other subcontractors, and shall join their work to that of others in accordance with the intent of the drawings. Coordinate their work with all contractors to fit their piping, ductwork, conduit, etc., into the structure as job conditions may demand. The General Contractor and all subcontractors shall participate in the preparation of coordinated supplemental drawings in areas of congestion as required to eliminate and/or minimize interference. The priority of the systems to be installed shall be as follows:
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013100 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE a. b. c. d. e. f. 6. D.
Plumbing (waste piping) Fire Protection (sprinkler head locations) Electric (lighting locations) Mechanical (ducts and air devices) Plumbing (pressure piping, including sprinkler system), Electric (conduit). All final decisions as to the right of way made by the General Contractor.
Monitor the sequence and progress of the Work to ensure proper preparation for installation of each trade’s work.
Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
8. 9. 10. E.
01/13/12
Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. Delivery and processing of submittals. Progress meetings. Preinstallation conferences. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. Project closeout activities. Startup and adjustment of systems. Project closeout activities.
Drawings, Technical Specifications and General Conditions Coordination: 1.
The Drawings, Technical Specifications and General Conditions, as amended, are essential parts of the Contract Documents and the Contract. A requirement occurring in one is binding as though occurring in all. They are intended to be complimentary and to describe and provide for a complete Project. In case of a discrepancy between the Contract Document components, the governing ranking will be: a.
For work related to the construction of the Project: 1) 2) 3)
b.
Referenced or applicable standard, code or regulation. Technical Specifications. Drawings, Standard Construction Details.
For conflicts related to the administration and performance under the provisions of the Contract for Construction: 1) 2) 3)
Referenced Federal Regulations, Standard Terms or Conditions. Supplemental Conditions/Requirements of the Owner. General Conditions as amended.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013100 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2.
3. 1.4
01/13/12
Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Contractor shall not take advantage of any apparent error or omission in the Contract Documents and shall in general provide the better quality or quantity of labor or materials or comply with the more stringent requirement. If the Contractor discovers an error or omission, the Architect shall be promptly notified. The Architect will make corrections and interpretations as necessary to fulfill the intent of the Contract Documents. Scaled measurements shall not be used.
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A.
Coordinate and prepare the overall construction schedule. Refer to Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" and General Conditions of the Contract, as amended, Paragraph 3.10 “Contractor’s Construction Schedules” for construction schedule format and requirements.
B.
Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.
C.
Revise and resubmit schedule as Project conditions require or when requested by the Owner.
1.5 A.
COORDINATION DRAWINGS Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. 1.
Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: a. b.
2. 3. 4.
Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. Indicate dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and make specific note of dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect for resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.
Sheet Size: At least 8½" x 11" but no larger than 30" x 40". Number of Copies: Submit two (2) opaque copies of each submittal. Architect will return one (1) copy. Refer to individual Sections for Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those Sections.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013100 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1.6 A.
PROJECT MEETINGS General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. 1.
2. 3.
B.
01/13/12
Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute agenda to all invited attendees. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three (3) days of the meeting.
Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than fifteen (15) days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 1.
2.
Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturer and supplier representatives; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r. s. t. u. v. w. x.
Identification of subcontractors, equipment and material suppliers. Tentative construction schedule. Phasing. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. Designation of key personnel and their duties. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. Procedures for RFIs. Procedures for testing and inspecting. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. Distribution of Contract Documents. Submittal procedures. Preparation of Record Documents. Use of the premises. Work restrictions. Owner's occupancy requirements. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. Construction waste management and recycling. Parking availability. Office, work and storage areas. Equipment deliveries and priorities. First aid. Security. Progress cleaning. Working hours.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013100 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 3. C.
Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes.
Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1.
2.
Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r. s. t. u. v. w. x. y.
3. 4. 5.
D.
01/13/12
The Contract Documents. Options. Related RFIs. Related Change Orders. Purchases. Deliveries. Submittals. Review of mockups. Possible conflicts. Compatibility problems. Time schedules. Weather limitations. Manufacturer's written recommendations. Warranty requirements. Compatibility of materials. Acceptability of substrates. Temporary facilities and controls. Space and access limitations. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. Testing and inspecting requirements. Installation procedures. Coordination with other work. Required performance results. Protection of adjacent work. Protection of construction and personnel.
Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 1.
Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier and other entity concerned with current
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013100 - 6
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
2.
progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1)
b.
5.
Review schedule for next period.
Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13) 14) 15) 16) 17) 18) 19) 20)
3. 4.
01/13/12
Interface requirements. Sequence of operations. Status of submittals. Deliveries. Off-site fabrication. Access. Site utilization. Temporary facilities and controls. Work hours. Hazards and risks. Progress cleaning. Quality and work standards. Status of correction of deficient items. Field observations. RFIs. Status of proposal requests. Pending changes. Status of Change Orders. Pending claims and disputes. Documentation of information for payment requests.
Minutes: Record meeting minutes. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013100 - 7
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1.7 A.
REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs) Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. 2.
B.
10. 11.
Project name. Date. Name of Contractor. Name of Architect and Construction Manager/ Owner. RFI number, numbered sequentially. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. Contractor's signature. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.
Hard-Copy RFIs: 1.
D.
RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will be returned with no response. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.
Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
C.
01/13/12
Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number.
Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow seven (7) working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1.
The following RFIs will be returned without action: a. b. c. d. e. f.
2.
Requests for approval of submittals. Requests for approval of substitutions. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.
Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will start again.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013100 - 8
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 3.
01/13/12
Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 01 Section "Contract Modifications Procedures." a.
If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within ten (10) days of receipt of the RFI response.
E.
On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven (7) days if Contractor disagrees with response.
F.
RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Project name. Name and address of Contractor. Name and address of Architect. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. RFI description. Date the RFI was submitted. Date Architect's response was received. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive and Proposal Request, as appropriate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 013100
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013100 - 9
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Contractor's Construction Schedule. Submittals Schedule. Daily construction reports. Field condition reports.
B.
See Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values.
C.
See Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation" for construction photographic requirements and submittals.
1.2 A.
DEFINITIONS Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. 2. 3.
Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.
B.
CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.
C.
Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
D.
Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1.
E.
Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date.
Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for greater detail.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013200 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE F.
1.3 A.
01/13/12
Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction element. SUBMITTALS Submittals Schedule: Submit four (4) copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular format: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Scheduled date for first submittal. Specification Section number and title. Submittal category (action or informational). Name of subcontractor. Description of the Work covered. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
B.
Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit two (2) opaque copies, large enough to show entire network for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities.
C.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit four (4) opaque copies of initial schedule, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period.
D.
CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit four (4) copies of each of the following computer-generated reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days. (Verify report requirements with the Owner). 1. 2.
3.
Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float.
E.
Daily Construction Reports: Submit four (4) copies at weekly intervals. (Verify report requirements with the Owner).
F.
Field Condition Reports: Submit four (4) copies at time of discovery of differing conditions.
1.4
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.
B.
Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests and other required schedules and reports.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013200 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1. 2.
01/13/12
Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. 1. 2.
2.2 A.
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to dates of Substantial and Final Completion. 1.
B.
Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. 2.
Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than twenty (20) days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication and delivery. a.
3.
4. 5.
Roof top mechanical units.
Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than seven (7) days for startup and testing. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013200 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE C.
01/13/12
Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. 2.
Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.
3.
Coordination with existing construction. Limitations of continued occupancies. Uninterruptible services. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. Use of premises restrictions. Provisions for future construction. Seasonal variations. Environmental control.
Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work.
D.
Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion and Final Completion.
E.
Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule.
2.3
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE)
A.
General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format.
B.
Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date established for commencement of the Work. Outline significant construction activities for the first 60 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities.
C.
CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's Construction Schedule using a computerized, time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work. 1.
Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 30 days after date established for commencement of the Work. a.
Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013200 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2.
3. D.
Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. Use "one workday" as the unit of time. Include list of nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule.
CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the preliminary network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths. 1.
Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i.
2.
3.
4.
Preparation and processing of submittals. Mobilization and demobilization. Purchase of materials. Delivery. Fabrication. Utility interruptions. Installation. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. Testing and commissioning.
Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, timescaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges. a.
E.
01/13/12
Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path.
Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a list of straight "early start-total float" sort. Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. Description of activity. Principal events of activity. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. Early and late start dates. Early and late finish dates. Activity duration in workdays. Total float or slack time. Average size of workforce.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013200 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE F.
Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
2.4 A.
Identification of activities that have changed. Changes in early and late start dates. Changes in early and late finish dates. Changes in activity durations in workdays. Changes in the critical path. Changes in total float or slack time. Changes in the Contract Time.
REPORTS Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
B.
01/13/12
List of subcontractors at Project site. Equipment at Project site. Material deliveries. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. Accidents. Stoppages, delays, shortages and losses. Meter readings and similar recordings. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. Services connected and disconnected. Equipment or system tests and startups.
Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a request for interpretation. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1.
2.
3.
Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013200 - 6
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE B.
01/13/12
Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 1. 2.
Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.
END OF SECTION 013200
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013200 - 7
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 013233 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. 2.
1.2
Preconstruction photographs. Periodic construction photographs.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph. Indicate elevation or story of construction. Include same label information as corresponding set of photographs.
B.
Construction Photographs: Submit prints of each photographic view within seven (7) days of taking photographs. 1.
Digital Images: Submit a complete set of digital image electronic files as a Project Record Document on CD-R. Identify electronic media with date photographs were taken. Submit images that have same aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped. a.
2.
Identification: On back of each print, provide an applied label or rubber-stamped impression with the following information: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
1.3 A.
Aerial Photographs: Provide only if requested by the Owner.
Name of Project. Name of Architect. Name of Contractor. Name and address of photographer. Date photograph was taken if not date stamped by camera. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction. Unique sequential identifier.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Photographer Qualifications: An individual who has been regularly engaged as a professional photographer of construction projects for not less than three (3) years.
PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
013233 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1.4 A.
1.5 A.
1.6 A.
01/13/12
COORDINATION Auxiliary Services: Cooperate with photographer and provide auxiliary services requested, including access to Project site and use of temporary facilities, including temporary lighting required to produce clear, well-lit photographs without obscuring shadows. USAGE RIGHTS Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Owner for unlimited reproduction of photographic documentation. EXTRA PRINTS Negatives: Photographer shall retain photographic negatives for three (3) years after date of Substantial Completion. During this period, photographer shall fill orders by Architect or Owner for extra prints. Photographer shall price extra prints at prevailing local commercial prices.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA Digital Images: Provide images in uncompressed TIFF format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor size of 3.1 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 1600 by 1200 pixels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
A.
Photographer: Engage a qualified commercial photographer to take construction photographs.
B.
General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted. 1.
C.
Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic location.
Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software. 1.
Date and Time: Include date and time in filename for each image.
PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
013233 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2.
D.
01/13/12
Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images on CD-R in the field office at Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify images same as for those submitted to Architect.
Preconstruction Photographs: Before commencement of excavation or starting construction, take color, digital photographs of Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points, as directed by Architect. 1. 2. 3.
Flag excavation areas and construction limits before taking construction photographs. Take as many photographs as required to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting the Work. Take as many photographs as required of existing buildings either on or adjoining property to accurately record physical conditions at start of construction.
E.
Periodic Construction Photographs: Take digital color photographs monthly, coinciding weekly, with timing each month adjusted to coincide with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken.
F.
Additional Photographs: Architect may issue requests for additional photographs, in addition to periodic photographs specified. Additional photographs will be paid for by Change Order and are not included in the Contract Sum. 1. 2. 3.
Three days notice will be given, where feasible. In emergency situations, take additional photographs within 24 hours of request. Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.
Special events planned at Project site. Immediate follow-up when on-site events result in construction damage or losses. Photographs to be taken at fabrication locations away from Project site. These photographs are not subject to unit prices or unit-cost allowances. Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of the Work. Extra record photographs at time of final acceptance. Owner's request for special publicity photographs.
END OF SECTION 013233
PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
013233 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and other submittals.
B.
See Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule.
C.
See Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting construction photographs.
D.
See Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports and for mockup requirements.
1.2
DEFINITIONS
A.
Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.
B.
Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
1.3 A.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. 2.
Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals and related activities that require sequential activity. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. Begin no work requiring submittal until such time as the submittal has been returned reviewed and/or approved by the Architect. a.
b.
Submit materials in groups containing all associated items (i.e. carpet, tile, base, paint, etc.) to allow installation coordination, and color and finish selections. Partial submittals will not be reviewed until all required items have been received. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 3.
01/13/12
Maintain an accurate submittal log for the duration of the Work showing current status of all submittals at all times. Submittal log shall be available to the Architect and Owner for their review upon request.
B.
Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities.
C.
Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1.
2. 3. D.
Initial Review: Allow fourteen (14) days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. Resubmittal Review: Allow fourteen (14) days for review of each resubmittal.
Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. 2. 3.
Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. Provide a space approximately 6" x 8" on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.
Project name. Date. Name and address of Architect. Name and address of Contractor. Name and address of subcontractor. Name and address of supplier. Name of manufacturer. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 1)
i. j. k. l. E.
Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 061000.01.A).
Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. Other necessary identification.
Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1. F.
Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action taken and will be returned.
Transmittals: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than Contractor. 1.
H.
Modify submittals to delete information which is not applicable to the Project.
Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. 1.
G.
01/13/12
Transmittal Form: Use AIA Document G810. A copy of this form is contained within the Project Manual under "Standard Forms".
Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. 2. 3.
Note date and content of previous submittal. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. Resubmit submittals until they are marked "Reviewed" or "Reviewed as Noted" with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.
I.
Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators and installers, authorities having jurisdiction and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
J.
Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating "Reviewed" or "Reviewed as Noted" with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.
K.
Delivery: Deliver submittals to Architect's office, prepaid. 1.
2.
L.
Upon review by the Architect, any submittal, sample or mock-up that is not being delivered to the Owner for their use shall be retrieved by the Contractor or supplier within two (2) weeks of Contractor being informed of its availability. If the sample is not picked up within that time period or other arrangements made with the Architect, the sample shall be deemed abandoned and become the property of the Architect for disposal as they see fit.
Electronic Submittal: Provide electronic file copy of the original shop drawings (in lieu of paper copies - provided only when necessary) transmitted by email to the following address. a. b. c.
File Format: Adobe PDF electronic file, notify the Architect of the intent to send email submissions ahead of sending them. Send Files to:
[email protected] or
[email protected]. Return Files: Will be returned via same email to the address sent by the Contractor.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1.4 A.
01/13/12
CONTRACTOR'S USE OF ARCHITECT'S CAD FILES General: At Contractor's written request, copies of Architect's CAD files will be provided to Contractor for Contractor's use in connection with Project, subject to the following conditions: 1.
2.
The contractor shall complete an indemnification form provided by the Architect which will hold the Architect harmless for use of drawings other than to which the architect has direct supervision or control over. A fee is charged for the files provided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.
B.
Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. 2. 3.
If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. Include the following information, as applicable: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i.
4.
C.
Manufacturer's written recommendations. Manufacturer's product specifications. Manufacturer's installation instructions. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. Printed performance curves. Operational range diagrams. Compliance with specified referenced standards. Testing by recognized testing agency.
Number of Copies: Submit two (2) copies for Architect's use, plus additional copies required by Contractor for Project Record Documents, material suppliers, installers or other parties. Architect will mark up and retain two (2) copies, and mark up and return additional copies.
Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal of Architect's CAD Drawings is otherwise permitted. 1.
Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. 2. 3.
D.
01/13/12
Dimensions. Identification of products. Fabrication and installation drawings. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. Templates and patterns. Schedules. Notation of coordination requirements. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and fieldinstalled wiring. Additional information indicated in specific materials Sections.
Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8½" x 11" but no larger than 30" x 40". Number of Copies: Submit two (2) copies for Architect's use, plus additional copies required by Contractor for Project Record Documents, material suppliers, installers or other parties. Architect will mark up and retain two (2) copies, and mark up and return additional copies.
Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. 2.
Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. b. c. d.
3.
4.
Generic description of Sample. Product name and name of manufacturer. Sample source. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a.
Number of Samples: Submit two (2) full sets of available choices where color, pattern, texture or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return one (1) set of submittals with options selected.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 5.
Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: Partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a.
E.
01/13/12
Number of Samples: Submit two (2) sets of Samples. Architect will retain one (1) Sample set; remainder will be returned.
Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. 1.
Number of Copies: Submit two (2) copies for Architect's use, plus additional copies required by Contractor for Project Record Documents, material suppliers, installers or other parties. Architect will mark up and retain two (2) copies, and mark up and return additional copies.
F.
Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."
G.
Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures."
H.
Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures."
I.
Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. 1.
2.2 A.
Number of Copies: Submit three (3) copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two (2) copies.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. 1. 2.
3.
Number of Copies: Submit two (2) copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 6
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
B.
Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
C.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."
D.
Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
E.
Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.
F.
Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
G.
Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.
H.
Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
I.
Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
J.
Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
K.
Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
L.
Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project.
M.
Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.
N.
Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 7
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. O.
Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
P.
Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."
Q.
Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.
R.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address and telephone number of manufacturer.
S.
Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factoryauthorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable: 1. 2. 3.
Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements.
T.
Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.
U.
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to Architect. Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return them for resubmittal.
2.3 A.
DELEGATED DESIGN Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 8
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1. B.
01/13/12
If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.
Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit three (3) copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1.
Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A.
Contractor's Review: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B.
Notify Architect, in writing, at the time of submission, of deviations in submittals from the requirements of the Contract Documents.
C.
Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 1.
D.
3.2
By affixing the Contractor’s stamp of approval and signature to each submittal, the Contractor certifies that the submission is in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and the General Conditions Subparagraph 3.12.6. Submittals without the Contractors stamp and signature will not be considered and will be returned immediately for resubmittal.
Contractor's responsibility for errors or omissions in the submittal is not relieved by the Architects review of the submittals. ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A.
General: Architect will not review submittals without the Contractor's stamp and signature, and will return them immediately for resubmittal without action.
B.
Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows:
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 9
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1.
Action Submittals: Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows: a. b. c.
2.
3.
01/13/12
Reviewed. Resubmit. Reviewed as Noted.
Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded.
C.
Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.
D.
Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review.
E.
Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.
END OF SECTION 013300
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300 - 10
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control, and the following: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1.
2.
3. C.
1.2
Contractor provided testing. Manufacturer's field services. Mockups
Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. See remainder of specification Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.
See Division 01 Section "Code-Required Special Inspections and Procedures" for third party testing and inspection services provided by the Owner. DEFINITIONS
A.
Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five (5) previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.
C.
Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application and similar operations. 1.
Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014000 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name. D.
Laboratory Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed at testing facility to verify performance characteristics.
E.
Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.
F.
Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.
G.
Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards.
H.
Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.
I.
Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.
J.
Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory or shop.
K.
Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
L.
Third Party Testing and Inspection Agency: An established and recognized agency regularly engaged in conducting tests and/or furnishing inspection services, when such agency has been approved in accordance with the rules of the Ohio Board of Building Standards, and hired by the Owner.
1.3
CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
B.
Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014000 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
B.
Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.
C.
1.5
Date of issue. Project title and number. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. Identification of product and Specification Section. Complete test or inspection data. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B.
Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
C.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014000 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
D.
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
E.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or products that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design and extent.
F.
Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1.
G.
Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing the Work.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. 2.
NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program.
H.
Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
I.
Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
J.
Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. Notify Architect seven (7) days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.
Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified in individual specification Sections.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014000 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1.6 A.
QUALITY CONTROL Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1.
2.
B.
01/13/12
Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.
Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 1.
Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. a.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.
Notify testing agencies at least twenty-four (24) hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. Provide protected storage areas for test specimens. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.
C.
Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures."
D.
Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
E.
Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. 2.
Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014000 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 3. 4. 5. 6. F.
4. 5. 6. 7.
Access to the Work. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site.
Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required qualityassurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1.
1.7
Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor. Do not release, revoke, alter or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. 2. 3.
G.
01/13/12
Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A.
Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as specifically noted in Division 01 Section "Code-Required Special Inspections and Procedures".
B.
All other tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction are the responsibility of the Contractor.
C.
Contractor to coordinate and schedule the Owner’s testing and inspection agency’s work. Provide minimum three (3) days notice prior to required testing and inspection work.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014000 - 6
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.
REPAIR AND PROTECTION General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1.
Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.
B.
Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C.
Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION 014000
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014000 - 7
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 014533 - CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY Pursuant to Ohio Building Code (OBC) Chapter 17, Section 1704 "Special Inspections", the Owner will provide third party testing and inspection for the following portions of the work: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Steel Construction: OBC §1704.3. Concrete Construction: OBC §1704.4. Masonry Construction: OBC §1704.5. Wood Construction: OBC §1704.6. Pier Foundations: OBC §1704.9. (seismic categories C, D, E or F only) Wall Panels and Veneers: OBC §1704.10. (seismic categories E or F only) Sprayed-Fire Resistant Materials: OBC §1704.11. Smoke Control Systems: OBC §1704.14.
B.
Tests and inspections shall be performed in accordance with noted OBC requirements, specific referenced standards, or in the absence thereof, applicable industry standards approved by authorities having jurisdiction. These tests and inspections are in addition to and separate from testing and inspections provided by the Contractor.
C.
The General Contractor shall coordinate the Owner's testing and inspection agency's work with the overall construction schedule to ensure sufficient notification of Owner's testing agency, and allow proper completion of required testing and inspections.
D.
Third Party Testing and Inspection Agency: An established and recognized agency regularly engaged in conducting tests and/or furnishing inspection services, when such agency has been approved in accordance with the rules of the Ohio Board of Building Standards, and hired by the Owner.
E.
Special testing and inspections provided under this Section do not negate or supercede testing and inspection requirements contained within individual material Sections, or those required by legal authorities having jurisdiction over the entire scope of the Work. 1. 2. 3.
1.2
Refer to Division 02 through 49 Sections for testing and inspections provided under that Section. Refer to local regulations regarding type and frequency of inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction. Refer to individual sections and Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for additional information.
SUBMITTALS
CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
014533 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
A.
Testing and Inspection Agency: Owner to submit to the General Contractor the testing and inspection agency's name, contact person, address, phone number and other pertinent data he may request to allow the General Contractor to properly coordinate his work with that of the Owner's testing and inspection agency's work.
B.
Testing and Inspection Schedule: General Contractor to prepare and submit to Owner, Architect and agency a proposed schedule of testing and inspection dates for the various portions of the Work. General Contractor to submit updated schedules each month.
C.
Testing and Inspection Agency Reports: Agency shall submit reports in accordance with the requirements of OBC §1704.1.2. and the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
One (1) copy to the Building Official (plans examiner). One (1) copy to the Owner, Architect and General Contractor. One (1) copy of Final report to the Building Official (plans examiner), Owner, Architect and General Contractor. One copy of all reports contained in a 3-ring binder to the Owner at the completion of the Project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
TESTING AND INSPECTION REPORTS Regular Reports: Prepare separate reports on each item noted in Part 1.1. A above. 1.
Reports to state work inspected or tested was in compliance with approved Construction Documents (Drawings and Specifications), or contains noted discrepancies.
B.
Final Report: Prepare final reports on each item inspected or tested. Include correction of discrepancies and other pertinent data.
C.
Reports Binder: Assemble all reports into a heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, looseleaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8½" x 11" paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. 1.
2.
Organization: Organize each manual into separate sections for each item inspected or tested. Within each section, place reports in chronological order. Provide a title page and table of contents. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information: a. b. c. d. e.
Date of submittal. Subject matter included in manual. Name and address of Project. Name and address of Owner. Name and address of Agency.
CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
014533 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE f. g. h. 3.
01/13/12
Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. Name, address, and telephone number of Installer for each product and system inspected or tested. Name and address of Architect.
Identify binder on front and spine, with printed title "TESTING AND INSPECTION MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXECUTION
A.
The General Contractor to coordinate and schedule the Owner's testing and inspection agency's work. Provide minimum three (3) days notice prior to required testing and inspection work.
B.
Testing and inspection agency to perform testing and inspections required by the Ohio Building Code (OBC) Chapter 17, Section 1704 "Special Inspection" for the following portions of the Work.
C.
Steel Construction: OBC §1704.3. 1.
2. 3.
Special inspections not required where fabrication processes and workman qualifications comply with OBC exceptions 1704.3.1 and 1704.3.2. If fabrication processes and workman qualifications comply with noted exceptions, Owner's testing and inspection agency's to obtain copies of fabrication processes and workman qualifications provided by General Contractor's subcontractor, and submit them with report stating such. Inspected Materials: Steel framing members in accordance with OBC Table 1704.3, Welding and Bolts. Performed Inspections: In accordance with the following: a. b. c. d.
D.
Concrete Construction: OBC §1704.4. 1.
2. 3. E.
Steel Framing Members: OBC §1704.3 and Table 1704.3. Welding: OBC §1704.3.1. Details: OBC §1704.3.2. High Strength Bolts: OBC §1704.3.3 as applicable.
Special inspections not required for conditions noted in OBC §1704.4.1 thru .5. If any or all conditions comply with noted exceptions, Owner's testing and inspection agency's to note conditions not requiring special inspections and submit with report stating such. Inspected Materials: Concrete, steel and accessory materials noted in OBC Table 1704.4, Required Verification and Inspection of Concrete. Performed Inspections: In accordance with OBC Table 1704.4.
Masonry Construction: OBC §1704.5.
CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
014533 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1.
2. 3. F.
Special inspections not required for conditions noted in OBC §1704.5.1 and .2. If any or all conditions comply with noted exceptions, Owner's testing and inspection agency's to note conditions not requiring special inspections and submit with report stating such. Inspected Materials: Concrete unit masonry, steel reinforcement and accessory materials noted in OBC Tables 1704.5.1 and 1704.5.3. Performed Inspections: In accordance with OBC Tables 1704.5.1 and 1704.5.3 and as determined by building classification, structure or occupancy.
Wood Construction, Structural Elements: OBC §1704.6 and 1704.2. 1.
2. 3.
Special inspections not required where fabricator is approved in accordance with OBC §1704.2.2. If fabricator is approved, Owner's testing and inspection agency's to obtain copies of approvals provided by General Contractor's subcontractor, and submit them with report stating such. Inspected Materials: Wood structural elements. Performed Inspections: a. b.
G.
Performed Inspections: In accordance with OBC § 1616.3.
Wall Panels and Veneers: OBC §1704.10. (seismic categories E or F only) 1.
Performed Inspections: a. b.
I.
In accordance with OBC § 1616.3. Masonry Veneer: Special inspection in accordance with OBC § 1704.5.
Sprayed-Fire Resistant Materials: OBC §1704.11. 1. 2.
Inspected Materials: Sprayed-fire resistant materials. Performed Inspections: a. b. c. d. e.
J.
Detailed fabrication and quality control procedure verification. Inspection control of workmanship, conformance to approved construction documents and referenced standards.
Pier Foundations: OBC §1704.9. (seismic categories C, D, E or F only) 1.
H.
01/13/12
Surface conditions. Materials application. Materials thickness. Materials density. Bond strength.
Smoke Control Systems: OBC §1704.14. 1. 2.
Inspected Materials: Ductwork and detection and control devices. Performed Inspections: a.
Ductwork During Erection: Leakage testing and device location recording.
CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
014533 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE b.
01/13/12
Prior to Occupancy: Pressure difference testing, flow measurements, and detection and control verification.
END OF SECTION 014533
CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND PROCEDURES
014533 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes requirements for temporary materials, facilities, equipment, utilities and miscellaneous facilities.
B.
See Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning requirements.
C.
See Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for products in those Sections.
1.2 A.
1.3
DEFINITIONS Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures. USE CHARGES
A.
General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities indicated shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies and authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Utility Costs: The cost of all local utility company supplied water, natural gas and electricity paid for by the Contractor. The cost of all other utilities, fuels and materials, and the cost of all utility installations and maintenance paid for by Contractor.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel.
B.
Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.
1.5 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE B.
1.6 A.
Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. PROJECT CONDITIONS Installation and Coordination: Contractor shall coordinate installation and maintenance of noted temporary utilities. All applications, permits and inspections obtained and paid for prior to installation. 1.
2. 3.
4.
5. B.
Use of permanent services and facilities during construction shall not establish the start of required warranty periods. Warranty periods shall begin on the date Substantial Completion and acceptance of the Work by Owner and Architect.
Compliance: Comply with following entity requirements 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
D.
Utilities installed and maintained in safe and proper operating condition, and shall comply with the Ohio Building Code, OSHA and applicable local utility code requirements. Distribution of utilities shall provide proper working conditions for execution of all portions of the Work. Obtain from the Owner the appropriate billing address and additional information required by the respective utility companies in order to connect the temporary utilities to the site. Temporary Utility Reports: Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings, and similar procedures performed on temporary utilities to the Owner on a monthly basis. Temporary Utility Removal: At earliest feasible time, when acceptable to Owner, change over from use of temporary service to use of permanent service.
Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. 1.
C.
01/13/12
Local health and safety regulations. Local utility company regulations. Local police, fire department and rescue squad rules. Environmental protection regulations. OSHA safety provisions and procedures.
Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facilities by all parties engaged in the Work: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat. Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work. Operate in safe and efficient manner. Take necessary fire prevention measures. Do not overload facilities or permit them to interfere with progress of the Work. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, unsanitary or public nuisance conditions to develop or persist.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Pavement: Comply with Division 32 Sections "Asphalt Paving" and "Concrete Pavement."
B.
Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2", 0.148" thick, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8" OD line posts and 2-7/8" OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8" OD top rails as required.
C.
Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2", 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8" OD line posts and 2-7/8" OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8" OD top and bottom rails. Provide galvanized steel bases for supporting posts as required.
D.
Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry". 1. 2.
Exterior Applications: Preservative treated. Interior Applications: Fire-retardant treated.
E.
Gypsum Board: Minimum 1/2" thick by 48" wide by maximum available lengths; regular-type panels with tapered edges. Comply with ASTM C 36.
F.
Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.
G.
Tarpaulins: Waterproofed, fire-resistive, UL labeled with flame-spread rating of 15 or less. Provide translucent nylon reinforced laminated polyethylene or polyvinyl chloride fire retardant tarpaulins at temporary enclosures.
2.2 A.
FACILITIES Field Offices: Prefabricated or mobile units, insulated, weathertight, heated and airconditioned with serviceable finishes, temperature controls and foundations adequate for normal loading. 1. 2.
3. 4.
Permits: Secure and pay for any required building and/or zoning permits. Use: Common-use field office for use by all personnel engaged in construction activities; of sufficient size to accommodate required office personnel and meetings. Furnishings: Desk, meeting table, chairs, four-drawer file cabinets, plan table, plan rack and bookcases required for project meetings and storage needs. Services: Provide temporary services throughout construction period for use by all personnel engaged in construction activities. a.
Telephone: Telephone with answering machine.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE b. c. d. e. 5.
b.
2.
3. 4.
A.
Provide suitable, weathertight, containerized metal units or site-constructed structures using fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood framing, sheathing and siding. Storage and fabrication areas within weatherproofed and conditioned portions of the completed building are permitted when approved by Owner, and shall comply with OSHA, fire safety, and emergency egress requirements. The weight of stored materials shall not exceed the designed load capacity of the floor system. Temporary Services: Each contractor responsible for extending required temporary services. Security: Each contractor responsible for their own security.
EQUIPMENT Fire Protection: Contractor to install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. 1.
Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. a.
B.
Telephone, fax and electrical services and installation costs paid for by each contractor. Location and placement of field offices coordinated through Contractor.
Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. 1.
2.3
Fax Machine: Dedicated telephone line. Cellular Phone: For project superintendent. Internet Access: At Contractor’s option. Electric: As required for field office equipment.
Individual Contractor Field Offices: Other contractors may provide field offices at their option. a.
B.
01/13/12
Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by location and class of fire exposure.
HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control, and ventilation units. 1.
Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. a. b.
Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters or salamandertype heating units is prohibited. Provide ducted exhausts for units in areas of curing concrete or underlayment.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2.
Ventilation and Humidity Control Units: Fan units listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. a.
2.4
01/13/12
Natural Ventilation: Operable windows and doors may be used to provide ventilation when exterior temperatures are above 50 degrees F and air movement provides required ventilation.
UTILITIES
A.
Drinking-Water: Provide drinking-water fountains, containerized tap-dispenser, or bottled-water drinking-water units, including paper cup supply.
B.
Temporary Water: Provide temporary water in accordance with project requirements. Connect to new / adjacent existing water system and extend to central location on site. 1.
C.
Self-Contained Toilet Units: Contractor to provide single-occupant, chemical type, vented units; fully enclosed with a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material. Units shall be acceptable to local public health authorities. 1.
2. D.
Hoses: ¾” heavy-duty, abrasion-resistant, flexible rubber hoses with adjustable shut-off nozzles discharge. Provide hoses of sufficient length and quantity to reach all construction areas
Disposable Supplies: Provide toilet tissue, paper towels and similar disposable materials for each facility. Maintain adequate supply. Provide covered waste containers for disposal of used material. Provide regularly scheduled cleaning and waste removal services. Maintain in clean, sanitary condition and remove when directed.
Electrical Outlets: Provide properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- to 120-V plugs into higher-voltage outlets; equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button and pilot light. 1.
System: Minimum 200 amp and 110-220 volt single phase service unless project conditions require higher service and/or three phase power.
E.
Lighting: Provide exterior and interior lighting in quantity and location required to provide adequate illumination for construction operations, traffic conditions and signage visibility when the Work is being performed.
F.
Drainage: Provide temporary pumps at building until permanent systems are inspected, approved and operational. Direct discharge water to inspected, approved and operational permanent systems. 1.
When permanent systems are operational, provide adequate protection at floor drains and sump pit openings to prevent rocks and debris from entering sump systems.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2.5 A.
01/13/12
MISCELLANEOUS Construction Waste Disposal: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes and numbers adequate to handle waste from all construction and final cleaning operations. Provide regularly scheduled pick-up and disposal services from a licensed operator. 1. 2.
Containerize and clearly label hazardous, dangerous or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. If required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide separate containers, clearly labeled, for each type of waste material to be deposited.
B.
Barricades, Warning Signs and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erecting structurally adequate barricades to inform personnel and public of possible hazards.
C.
Enclosures and Partitions: Exterior and interior partitions for protection of openings in in-progress construction from exposure to foul weather, hot or cold temperatures, and for existing and new construction from exposure to dust, noise, operations and activities. 1. 2.
3. 4.
Exterior Closures: Nominal 2" thick wood or metal stud framing with reinforced plastic sheets, tarpaulins or fire-retardant-treated plywood. Interior Dust-Proof Partitions: Nominal 2” thick wood or metal stud framing, 5/8” gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and ½” fire-retardant plywood on construction side, or 2 layers of 3-mil polyethylene sheets on occupied side and unfaced, full wall thickness fiberglass blankets on construction side. Seal edges, cracks and openings to prevent the passage of air, dust and noise. Equip closures and partitions with self-closing, dustproof doors and security locks where project conditions require.
D.
Floor Protection: 2 layers of 3-mil polyethylene sheets with one layer ¾” fire-retardant plywood.
E.
Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide Project identification and other temporary signs indicated. Obtain and pay for all required permits and approvals. 1.
Project Identification Sign: Single faced, approximately 8' x 4' in size with text, design, layout and colors as directed by Architect. a.
b. 2.
3.
Materials: ¾” exterior MDO grade plywood for sign face with pine or fir trim. Provide structural members of sufficient size, strength, and quantity to securely brace and hold sign against wind pressure. Architect will provide an electronic AutoCAD 2006 file of the proposed sign layout for the fabricator’s use.
Directional Signs: Signs to provide directional information to construction personnel and visitors. Type, design, quantity and locations as directed by the Contractor. Engage an experienced sign painter to apply graphics for Project identification signs. Comply with details provided.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 6
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 4.
01/13/12
Locate signs in full compliance with local zoning requirements. Maintain signs until project completion.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.
B.
Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
C.
Temporary Utility Installation: Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing service. Where utility company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with utility company recommendations. 1. 2.
3.2 A.
TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. 1.
B.
Connect temporary systems to municipal system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction.
Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction. 1. 2.
C.
Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. Provide temporary utilities with adequate capacity for each stage of construction.
Sterilize temporary water piping before use. Protect exposed temporary water service from damage and freezing throughout construction.
Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets and wash facilities for use of construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 1.
Shield toilets to ensure privacy.
D.
Drinking-Water Facilities: Provide water fountains, containerized tap-dispensers or bottled-water units. Protect water from damage and freezing throughout construction.
E.
Heating: Provide temporary heating required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 7
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. 1. 2. F.
Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. 1.
G.
3.
Install temporary electric power service overhead, unless otherwise indicated. Install temporary lighting and receptacle circuits along a route least objectionable to the construction work, as determined by Contractor. Power cords and extensions the responsibility of each contractor.
Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections and traffic conditions. 1. 2.
I.
Natural Ventilation: Operable windows and doors may be used to provide ventilation when exterior temperatures are above 50 degrees F, and air flow through construction area is adequate to provide required ventilation.
Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. 1. 2.
H.
Requirements: Maintain temperature minimum 50 degrees F. Provide number of units required to provide environmental requirements for material installation as indicated by manufacturer's installation instructions.
Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. Install temporary lighting along a route least objectionable to the construction work, as determined by Contractor.
Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install number of telephone lines as determined by the Contractor. 1.
Provide additional telephone lines for the following as determined by the Contractor: a.
2.
3.
Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and computer in each field office.
At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers including police and fire departments, Contractor's home office, Architect's office, Owner's office and subcontractors' field and home offices. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone for use when away from field office.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 8
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE J.
3.3 A.
Electronic Communication Service: Provide temporary electronic communication service, including electronic mail in field office as determined by the Contractor. SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION General: Comply with the following: 1. 2.
B.
Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.
Field Offices: 1.
2. C.
01/13/12
Maintain copies of all permits, contract drawings and specifications, approved shop drawings, revisions, addenda, field revisions, Change Orders, reports, photographs and project meeting notes within the office. Such items shall be available to the Architect upon request. Maintain record Drawings and Specifications marked up to date with all revisions and installed field conditions.
Storage and Fabrication Sheds: 1.
2.
Outdoor storage of materials permitted when such storage is approved by the material manufacturer, and will not effect the performance and/or appearance of the material. Contractor shall coordinate storage and fabrication activities, and shall direct the relocation of units, structures, or materials that interfere with the progress of the Work, create a hazard, or interfere with the Owner's use of the site or occupied portions of the building.
D.
Parking: Provide temporary, on-site parking areas for construction personnel.
E.
Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations and construction free of water. 1. 2.
F.
Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.
Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide Project identification and other signs required by Contractor. Install signs where required to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. 2. 3.
Locate signs in full compliance with local zoning requirements. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 9
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE G.
Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.
2. 3. 4. H.
01/13/12
Place construction materials, debris, and other non-hazardous waste materials in containers. Do not dispose of volatile or hazardous wastes such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner in containers. If required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide separate containers, clearly labeled, for each type of waste material to be deposited. Contractors, subcontractors and material suppliers responsible for placing their trash and debris into waste-collection containers provided. Comply with Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning requirements, and Division 01 Section “Closeout Procedures” final cleaning requirements.
Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1.
Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.
I.
Temporary Elevator Use: Refer to Division 14 Sections "Electric Traction Elevators" and/or "Hydraulic Elevators" for temporary use of new elevators.
J.
Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate.
K.
Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Cover finished, permanent stairs with protective covering of plywood or similar material so finishes will be undamaged at time of acceptance.
3.4
SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.
B.
Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Stormwater Control: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains.
D.
Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding and erosion.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 10
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE E.
01/13/12
Site Enclosure Fence (as required): Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1.
2. 3. 4.
Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined by Contractor sufficient to accommodate construction operations. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. Set fence posts in compacted mixture of gravel and earth or in concrete bases. Provide gates in sizes and at locations necessary to accommodate delivery vehicles and other construction operations. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. Provide Owner with one set of keys.
F.
Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.
G.
Barricades, Warning Signs and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. Where appropriate and needed, provide flashing red or amber lights.
H.
Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. 2.
I.
Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241. 1. 2.
3.
4.
J.
Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate and seal temporary enclosures. Equip closures with self-closing, weatherproof doors and security locks where project conditions require.
Prohibit smoking in construction areas. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. Provide temporary hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.
Temporary Floor Protection: Install 2 layers of 3-mil polyethylene sheets, extending sheets 18” up the side walls. Overlap and tape joints full length. Cover sheets with ¾” fire-retardant plywood.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 11
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 3.5
01/13/12
OPERATION, TERMINATION AND REMOVAL
A.
Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B.
Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1.
2.
Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, humidity control, ventilation and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. Prevent water-filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect from damage during excavation operations.
C.
Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D.
Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1.
2.
Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period.
END OF SECTION 015000
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
015000 - 12
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.
B.
See Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract closeout.
C.
See Division 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted.
1.2 A.
DEFINITIONS Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system" and terms of similar intent. 1.
2.
3.
Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.
B.
Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
C.
Voluntary Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment and methods of construction from those required or listed in the Contract Documents that use alternative materials and/or methods of construction required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor during the Bidding period. Voluntary substitutions are listed on the Bid Forms. Such substitutions may not be used to prepare bid or alternate amounts and do not require the Architect's review or preapproval. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any such substitute proposed.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
016000 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE D.
1.3 A.
01/13/12
Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers. SUBMITTALS Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. 2.
Substitution Request Form: Use form provided by Owner. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. b.
c.
d. e. f. g. h.
i.
j. k.
l.
Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. Samples, where applicable or requested. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution is capable of being installed under conditions indicated without significant modification or adjustment to these conditions (appearance, framing, support systems, material thickness, warranties, etc.).
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
016000 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE m.
3.
Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within fifteen (15) days of receipt of request, or seven (7) days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. b.
1.4 A.
1.5
Form of Acceptance: Change Order. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated.
Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1.
C.
Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.
Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven (7) days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within fifteen (15) days of receipt of request, or seven (7) days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. b.
B.
01/13/12
Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. QUALITY ASSURANCE Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Delivery and Handling: 1.
Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
016000 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2.
3.
4. C.
2. 3.
4. 5. 6. 7.
A.
Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.
2.
Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner.
Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. 1. 2. 3.
C.
Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation and weather-protection requirements for storage. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
PRODUCT WARRANTIES
1.
B.
Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft and other losses. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
Storage: 1.
1.6
01/13/12
Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed. Refer to Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.
Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
016000 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation. 1. 2.
3. 4. 5. 6. B.
Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products.
Product Selection Procedures: 1. 2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
016000 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
9.
of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. a.
10.
If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for proposal of product.
Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements. a.
b.
2.2
01/13/12
Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within thirty (30) days after commencement of the Work. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.
B.
Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1.
2. 3. 4.
5.
Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. Requested substitution is capable of being installed under shown conditions without significant modification or adjustment to these conditions (appearance, framing, support systems, material thickness, warranty issues, etc.). Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
016000 - 6
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. C.
2.3 A.
01/13/12
Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
Voluntary Substitution Requests: For products not listed in the Contract Documents or in an Addenda, list the material and associated cost information on the Substitution Sheet contained within the Bid Forms. Voluntary substitutions shall not be used to prepare Bid Sums or Alternate amounts and do not require the Architect's review or pre-approval. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any proposed Voluntary substitution. Refer to the Instructions to Bidders for additional information. COMPARABLE PRODUCTS Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1.
2.
3. 4. 5.
Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. Samples, if requested.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 016000
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
016000 - 7
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
B.
1.2
Construction layout. General installation of products. Progress cleaning. Starting and adjusting. Protection of installed construction. Correction of the Work.
Refer to Division 01 Section “Temporary Facilities and Controls” and Division 02 Demolition Sections for demolished material removal and cleaning requirements for demolished building and site areas. SUBMITTALS
A.
Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements.
B.
Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.
1.3 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.
EXAMINATION Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work.
EXECUTION
017300 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1. B.
2.
Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer and water-service piping; and underground electrical services. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.
Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. 2. 3. 4.
3.2
Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.
Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work. 1.
C.
01/13/12
Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
C.
Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.
D.
Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
EXECUTION
017300 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 3.3
01/13/12
CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A.
Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.
B.
General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.
D.
Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.
E.
Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect.
3.4
FIELD ENGINEERING
A.
Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations.
B.
Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two (2) permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1.
C.
Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.
Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles and elevations of construction and sitework.
EXECUTION
017300 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 3.5 A.
01/13/12
INSTALLATION General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. 2. 3.
Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.
C.
Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D.
Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E.
Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
F.
Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.
G.
Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. 1. 2. 3.
Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
H.
Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
I.
Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.
EXECUTION
017300 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 3.6 A.
01/13/12
PROGRESS CLEANING General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. 2. 3.
Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
B.
Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C.
Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. 2.
Remove liquid spills promptly. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate.
D.
Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E.
Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F.
Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G.
Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. 1. 2.
H.
Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers, and remove from premises daily. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
EXECUTION
017300 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
I.
Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.
J.
Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.7
STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A.
Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
B.
Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation.
C.
Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."
3.8
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
3.9 A.
CORRECTION OF THE WORK Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. 1.
Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.
B.
Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.
C.
Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair.
D.
Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.
E.
Remove and replace chipped, scratched and broken glass or reflective surfaces.
EXECUTION
017300 - 6
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
END OF SECTION 017300
EXECUTION
017300 - 7
03
CONCRETE
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 1.01
GENERAL
SUMMARY A.
Basic Specification: Perform work of this Section according to ACI 301-05, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," except as specifically modified herein. Numbers in parentheses (0.00) indicate a related paragraph of ACI 301.
B.
Section Includes: All cast-in-place concrete shown on the Drawings and required by these Specifications. Allow for the installation of cast-in-place items furnished under other Sections. Install anchor bolts for structural steel. Provide and install grout under steel column base plates and beam bearing areas.
C.
The Engineer has designed a project which will be safe after full completion. The Engineer has no expertise in, and takes no responsibility for, construction means and methods or job site safety during construction, which are exclusively the Contractor's responsibility. Processing and/or approving submittals made by the Contractor which may contain information related to construction methods or safety issues, or participation in meetings where such issues might be discussed, shall not be construed as voluntary assumption by the Engineer of any responsibility for safety procedures.
D.
Provide concrete pads, piers, curbs, and bases required for equipment of all trades. Coordinate dimensions and details with requirements of equipment being supplied, prior to placing concrete.
E.
Coordinate the work of other trades who will provide and install items (sleeves, piping, conduit, inserts, etc.) to be cast in the concrete. Place no concrete until all such items are in place.
F.
Dimensions of chases and openings, and details of connections and supports related to equipment as shown on the Drawings are for bidding only. Verify sizes, locations, and details prior to placing concrete.
G.
Inspection and testing services required by this Section are to be performed by an agency retained by the Contractor. This includes not only the services required to establish mix designs, but also includes all field sampling and testing required by the Field Quality Control article of this Section (1.6.2 through 1.6.4).
H.
Related Sections: Carefully examine all other Sections and all Drawings for related work which includes but is not limited to: 1. Division 04, Masonry 2. Section 05 12 00, "Structural Steel" 3. Section 05 30 00, "Metal Decking" 4. Division 07, Sealants 5. Division 07, Moisture Protection
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 1.02
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.03
1.04
01-13-2012
Reference Standards: 1. ACI 117-06 Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. 2. ACI Detailing Manual, SP66(04). 3. CRSI "Placing Reinforcing Bars," 2006, 8th edition. 4. WRI "Manual of Standard Practice" July 2001, 6th edition.
SUBMITTALS A.
Submit for approval the name of the agency proposed for the required inspection and testing services. All of the required field testing and sampling is to be performed by personnel employed by the proposed agency.
B.
Submit a mix design for each class of concrete required (1.6.3.2.e). Submittals to comply with appropriate methods in ACI 301-05 (4.2.3). Indicate whether mixes have been designed for pumping.
C.
Submit shop drawings for all reinforcing. Indicate strength, size, and details of all bar reinforcing, and style and specification of all welded wire fabric (3.1.1). Notwithstanding any other requirements specified elsewhere in these specifications, three (3) sets of prints and one (1) set of reproducible shop drawings shall be submitted for approval. The reproducible set will be returned to the Contractor, who will make and distribute as many copies as needed. Only prints with the approval stamp printed on them shall be permitted on the site.
D.
Submit, on request only, product literature for admixtures and curing compounds proposed for use.
E.
Submit reports of all required testing and inspection.
F.
Submit, on request only, mill test certificates for reinforcing.
G.
Submit test data for aggregates proposed for use, indicating source and compliance with Specification requirements. Date of test to be no more than 90 days prior to submittal. Resubmit in advance of any proposed change in source.
H.
Submit for approval proposed spacing and location of construction and/or control joints in concrete slabs on grade.
FIELD REFERENCE MANUALS A.
Provide at least one (1) copy of the ACI Field Reference Manual, SP-15(05), and one (1) copy of CRSI's "Placing Reinforcing Bars" in the field office at all times (1.3.3).
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING PART 2 2.01
01-13-2012
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS A.
Cementious Material (4.2.1.1): 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150-07, Type I, II or III. 2. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag (GGBF): ASTM C989-06, Grade 100 or higher. GGBF can be substituted for Portland cement up to a maximum of 30% by mass. 3. Fly Ash or Pozzolans: ASTM C618-08, Class F. Maximum loss on ignition 3%. 4. Silica Fume: ASTM C1240-05. Acceptable products include but are not limited to: a. Elkein Microsilica by Elkem Materials. b. Force 10,000 D by W.R. Grace and Company. c. Sikacrete 950DP by Sika Corporation. d. Rheomac SF100 by BASF.
B.
Water: Potable, conforming to ASTM C94/C94M-09 (4.2.1.3).
C.
Aggregates: 1. Conform to ASTM C33-07 (4.2.1.2). 2. Use crushed limestone for coarse aggregate in Class III. 3. Coarse Aggregate Size: a. No. 57 unless otherwise indicated. b. In Class V, use size No. 8. c. In Class VII, use 1 inch to 1/2 inch gradation (maximum). 4. For Class VIII: a. Use single source of uniform quality throughout. b. Improve aggregate by an approved process to reduce deleterious substances by 50%.
D.
Admixtures (where required or permitted) (4.2.1.4): 1. Water-Reducing: ASTM C494/C494M-08a, Type A and D. 2. Superplasticizer: ASTM C494/C494M-08a, Type F or G. Acceptable products include, but are not limited to: a. Eucon 37 by Euclid Chemical Company. b. Sikament 300 by Sika Corporation. c. Rheobuild 1000 by BASF. d. Daracem 19 by W.R. Grace. e. ADVA 100 by W.R. Grace. f. Catexol 1000 SP-MN by Axim. 3. Superplasticizer (Polycaboxylates): ASTM C494/C494M-08a, Type A and F. Acceptable products include, but are not limited to: a. Duraflux 33, 66 and 77 by Axium. b. Plastol 341 by Euclid. c. Adva 140M by W.R. Grace. d. ViscoCrete 4100 by Sika. e. Glenium 3030 NS by BASF. 4. Air-Entraining: ASTM C260-06.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
5. Accelerating: ASTM C494/C494M-08a, Type C or E, containing no more chlorides than are present in municipal drinking water. Acceptable products include, but are not limited to: a. Accelguard 80 by Euclid. b. Pozzutec 20+ by BASF. c. Plastocrete 161FL by Sika Corporation. d. PolarSet by W.R. Grace. e. Catexol 2000 R.H.E. by Axim. 6. Synthetic Fiber Reinforcement: ASTM C1116/C1116M-08a. Acceptable products include, but are not limited: a. Nycon RC Nylon Fibers by Nycon. b. Nylo-Mono Nylon Fibers or Mighty-Mono Polypropylene Fibers by Forta c. Fibermesh 150 Polypropylene Fibers by Propex. d. Polypropylene Fibers or Polypropylene Microfibers by Grace e. Fiberstrand 150 or Fiberstrand 150 ML by Euclid. f. Fibrasol or Fibrasol IIP by Axim. 7. Calcium chloride is NOT permitted (4.2.1.4). 8. Upon request only, provide a qualified full-time representative to assure proper use of admixtures. 9. Use of admixtures other than listed above will be permitted only when approved prior to use. E.
Reinforcing (3.2.1): 1. Deformed Bars: ASTM A615/A615M-08a, A996/A996M-06a or A706/A706M-08a. Minimum yield strength to be 60 ksi. 2. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185-07. Provide in sheet form (not rolls). Where this is used, except in slabs on grade, it is designed as load-carrying reinforcement (3.2.1.6).
F.
Preformed Expansion Joint Filler: ASTM D1751-04(2008) (2.2.1.4). 1. Acceptable products include, but are not limited to: a. Fibre or Ceramar by W.R. Meadows. b. A.P.S. Fiber Board by A.P.S. c. Fiber XJ by Iko.
G.
Curing Compound: Comply with ASTM C309-07, Type 1, Class B (clear). Compound shall comply with EPA's VOC requirements. Must be compatible with adhesive specified for floor finishes.
H.
Curing and Sealing Compound: Comply with ASTM C1315-08. Type I Class A (clear) Compound shall comply with EPA's VOC requirements. Apply at the manufacturer's written recommended application rate. Must be compatible with adhesive specified for floor finishes.
I.
Grout for Masonry Core Fill: ASTM C476-08, coarse type or fine type, per ACI 530.1-08, Table 5.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
J.
Non-shrink Grout under Bearing Elements: Conform to Corps of Engineers Specification CRD-C621-83 and ASTM C1107/C1107M-08 Grade B or C. Acceptable products include, but are not limited to: 1. Crystex by L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 2. NS Grout and Tammsgrout Supreme by Euclid. 3. Sikagrout 212 by Sika. 4. Multipurpose Construction Grout by Dayton Superior. 5. SureGrout by Kaufman Products, Inc. 6. Kemset Grout by ChemMasters. 7. Conspec 100 Non-Shrink Non-Metallic Grout by Dayton Superior.
K.
Dovetail Slots: Galvanized steel, 24 gauge minimum.
L.
Hardener: Dry shake type. Minimum 50 lbs. per 100 square feet (5.3.4.2.e). Acceptable products include, but are not limited to: 1. Surflex by Euclid. 2. Quartzplate FF by L & M. 3. Conshake 500 Natural by Dayton Superior.
M.
Bonding Agent: No thinner than 75 square feet per gallon. Acceptable products include, but are not limited to: 1. Euco #452MV by Euclid. 2. Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod by Sika. 3. Sure-Poxy HM by Kaufman Products. 4. Spec-Bond 100 by Dayton Superior
N.
Underslab Vapor Barrier: Multi-ply reinforced polyethylene sheet, ASTM E 1745, Class A, not less than 15 mils thick with a permeance as tested before and after mandatory conditioning (ASTM E 1745 Section 7.1 and sub-paragraphs 7.1.1 - 7.1.5) less than 0.01 Perms. 1. Tape: Pressure sensitive polyethylene or product recommended by named manufacturers. 2. Mastic: At contractor's option to Manufacturer's tape, the mastic product recommended by named manufacturers may be used. 3. Underslab Vapor Retarders: Stego Wrap (15 mils, Class A) by Stego Industries, LLC forms the basis-of-design. Products with comparable materials and performance characteristics by manufactures listed are also acceptable. a. Moistop Ultra, 15 mils, Class A, by Fortifiber Building Systems Group. b. Vaporguard, 15 mils, Class A, by Reef Industries, Inc.
O.
Sealer: Clear membrane-forming compound which will not yellow. Must be formulated for the intended application, either interior or exterior and applied per the manufacturer's written recommendations. Must comply with EPA's VOC requirements and be compatible with the curing compound used.
P.
Joint Sealant: Use 1-component polyurethane conforming to ASTM C920-08, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. Use with backer rod as required. Acceptable products include, but are not limited to: 1. Eucolastic I by Euclid. 2. Sikaflex-1a by Sika. 3. Dymonic by Tremco.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 5
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING Q.
2.02
01-13-2012
Paper Curing Membranes Conforming to ASTM C171-07: 1. Orange Label Sisalkraft by Fortifiber 2. Blue Shield 3560 by Holland.
MIXES A.
The following classes of concrete are required (4.2.2.8.b): 1. Class I - Footings. Minimum f'c=3000 psi. 2. Class II - Interior slabs on grade, fill on composite floor deck, fill over metal centering, and all interior concrete not otherwise identified. Minimum f'c=3500 psi, waterreducer required. Minimum cementitious material content 517 lbs. per cubic yard. Maximum water-cementitious material ratio 0.45. All Class II concrete used for interior slabs on grade shall have synthetic fiber reinforcement. 3. Class III - Exterior slabs on grade, retaining walls, basement walls, piers and columns placed integrally with basement walls, and all exterior concrete not otherwise identified. Minimum f'c=4000 psi, air-entraining admixture and water-reducer required. Minimum cementitious material content 564 lbs. per cubic yard. Maximum water-cementitious material ratio 0.45, air content 6+1, -1.5% (4.2.2.4). Slabs on grade in the parking structure will have welded wire fabric. 4. Class IV - Backfill below footings. Minimum f'c=1500 psi (lean mix). 5. Class V - Fill in stair pans and treads. Minimum f'c=3500 psi, with water-reducer, superplasticizer, #8 coarse aggregate, and synthetic fiber reinforcement. Minimum cementitious material content 611 lbs. per cubic yard. Maximum water-cementitious ratio 0.45. 6. Class VI- Columns, beams, framed slabs. Minimum f'c=5000 psi. Silica fume, air-entraining admixture and water-reducer and/or superplasticizer are required. Minimum cementitious material content 611 lbs. per cubic yard. Minimum silica fume solids content 45 lbs. per cubic yard. Maximum water-cement ratio 0.40 (based on cement only). Air content 6 +1, -1.5% (4.2.2.4).
B.
The following special requirements apply to silica fume mixes: 1. Water-reducers and/or superplasticizers will be required to control setting time, provide workability, extend slump life, etc. 2. The silica fume manufacturer is to cooperate with and assist the concrete supplier in preparation of the silica fume concrete mix design. The concrete supplier is responsible for producing a mix that can be conveyed, placed, consolidated, and finished, in addition to satisfying all other specified requirements. 3. The concrete supplier is to inform the General Contractor in writing of any special handling or finishing techniques that will be required.
C.
Pozzolans are permitted in all Classes.
D.
Class IV concrete may be site mixed; all other concrete is to be ready-mixed (4.3.1). All admixtures are to be added at the batch plant, except that superplasticizer, if used, is to be added at the site. Superplasticizer/retarder can be added at the batch plant.
E.
Concrete used for floors (Classes II, V, and VI) is to have a minimum three (3) day compressive strength of 1800 psi.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 6
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING F.
Slump: 1. Design concrete mixes for a maximum slump of 4 inches, unless a superplasticizer is to be used. 2. If a superplasticizer is to be used, design mixes for a slump of 2 inches - 4 inches before its addition; maximum slump permitted after its addition is 8 inches.
G.
Synthetic fiber reinforcement shall be used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Dosage rate shall be as recommended by the manufacturer, but not less than 1 lb. per cubic yard.
H.
No air entraining admixture is required unless an air content is specified (4.2.2.4).
I.
Concrete mixes shall not contain any deleterious or other reactive aggregates or materials that can initiate and promote alkali silica reaction (ASR).
PART 3 3.01
EXECUTION
ERECTION A.
3.02
01-13-2012
This structure is designed to be self-supporting and stable after the building is fully completed. It is solely the Contractor's responsibility to determine erection procedures and sequence, and to ensure the stability of the building and its component parts, and the adequacy of temporary or incomplete connections, during erection. This includes the addition of any shoring, sheeting, temporary guys, bracing or tie-downs that might be necessary. Such material is not shown on the Drawings. If applied, they shall be removed as conditions permit, and shall remain the Contractor's property.
SURFACE CONDITIONS A.
Verify that excavations are free of water and ice, are of the required dimensions, and have been approved by the E & T firm (see Section 31 00 01) prior to placing concrete (5.3.1).
A.
Verify that excavations are free of water and ice, are of the required dimensions, and have been approved by the testing agency responsible for soils inspection, prior to placing concrete (5.3.1).
B.
Determine field conditions by actual measurement.
C.
Notify the Architect not less than 24 hours in advance of placing concrete. Place concrete only when the Architect is present, unless this requirement is specifically waived.
D.
Prior to application of sealer, remove any synthetic fiber reinforcement projecting above the top surface of slabs which remain exposed.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 7
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 3.03
3.04
FORMWORK AND REINFORCING A.
Footings may be cast against earth cuts when soil conditions permit (2.2.2.3).
B.
Provide camber of 1/4 inch per 16 feet of span in forms for non-post-tensioned beams, joists, slabs and lintels which span more than 12 feet. This camber is to compensate for structural deflection after forms are removed, and is to be in addition to the camber required for formwork deflection.
C.
Reinforcing: 1. Welding of reinforcing is prohibited. 2. Use plastic-tipped bar supports for surfaces exposed to view in finished structure. 3. Provide support bars and other devices as required to maintain alignment of scheduled reinforcing. Note that such supports are not generally shown on the Drawings, but are the Contractor's responsibility, and are to be included in the bid. They are not to be counted as satisfying any part of the requirement for "contingency" reinforcing (see Structural Notes on Drawings).
D.
Removal of Forms and Shoring: 1. Remove no forms within first 12 hours for columns and walls. 2. When structure is to be reshored, forms will remain until the concrete attains 100% of its design strength. 3. Shoring is to remain in place until concrete reaches its design strength 4. Remove all shoring prior to constructing masonry walls supported by the structure.
EMBEDDED ITEMS A.
3.05
01-13-2012
Install embedded conduit, pipes, sleeves and anchor bolts subject to the following limitations: 1. Do not embed aluminum without prior approval of coating material. 2. Do not displace reinforcing steel. 3. In slabs, walls, and beams, limit outside dimension of conduits and pipes to 1/3 member thickness. For slabs over metal decks, thickness is measured from the top of the metal deck. 4. In columns, limit total area of pipes and conduit to 4% of column area. 5. Maintain a center-to-center spacing of at least 3 diameters of conduit, pipe or sleeve. 6. Install anchor bolts for base plates of steel elements according to tolerances of AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, March 18, 2005, Paragraph 7.5.
DELIVERY AND PLACEMENT A.
Preparation Before Placement: 1. Remove all debris from forms and deck. Clean steel deck of grease, oil, and other substances which would reduce bond to concrete. 2. Do not use additives or salts to remove ice. 3. In cold weather, maintain temperature of forms and reinforcing such that concrete temperature can be kept within the specified range.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 8
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
3.06
01-13-2012
B.
Delivery: 1. Conform to ASTM C94/C94M-09. 2. Delivery tickets to contain the following, in addition to the information required by C94: a. Reading of revolution counter at first addition of water. b. Type and brand of cement. c. Amount of cement. d. Total water content by producer. e. Maximum size of aggregate. 3. Secure the Architect's written approval if non-agitating type equipment is to be used for transportation. 4. Water may be added at the site only with the Architect's prior approval. Secure the Architect's signature on the delivery ticket which indicates the quantity of water added. NOTE: WATER MAY NOT BE ADDED TO SILICA FUME CONCRETE AT THE SITE UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES. 5. ASTM C94 requires discharge within 1 1/2 hours or 300 revolutions, whichever occurs first, after the introduction of water to cement and aggregates, or the introduction of cement to the aggregates (4.3.2.2). The Architect may require an earlier discharge during hot weather or when high-early strength cement is being used. 6. Place concrete at the maximum slump for which the mix was designed with a tolerance of up to 1 inch above the maximum for one (1) batch in any five (5) consecutive batches tested (4.3.2.1).
C.
Conveying: Keep delivery carts and buggies on runways; do not allow them to bear on reinforcing or uncured concrete.
D.
Placement: 1. Place within 6 feet of final position. Spreading with vibrators is prohibited. 2. In walls and columns, deposit concrete in uniform horizontal layers with a maximum depth of 5 feet (2 feet for Architectural Concrete). 3. Maximum free fall without chutes or elephant trunks to be 5 feet (2 feet for Architectural Concrete). 4. Place Architectural Concrete continuously to a designated joint.
E.
Records: Keep a complete log of pours, including date, location, quantity, weather, and identification of test cylinders, for each pour.
JOINTING A.
Interior Slabs on Grade: 1. Locate control and construction joints as shown on the Drawings. In the absence of information on the Drawings, locate at openings, walls, columns, grid lines, inside corners, and at 15 feet on center generally. Schedule slab pours and sawcutting operations such that sawing is completed prior to onset of shrinkage cracking. Complete saw cutting within 12 hours after placement (5.3.5). 2. Provide isolation joints at columns (1/4 inch thick) and at walls (1/4 inch thick). Where isolation joint will be exposed to view, set top of joint filler below top of slab a distance equal to the filler thickness to receive sealant. Where not exposed to view, set top of filler flush with top of slab. 3. Where joints are exposed to view in the finished building, provide joint sealant.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 9
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING B.
3.07
3.08
01-13-2012
Exterior Slabs on Grade: Locate joints as shown on the Drawings. In the absence of information on the Drawings, provide the following: 1. Expansion Joints: Full depth, with 1/2 inch joint filler, where slabs abut vertical surfaces, at intersections of sidewalks, at abrupt changes in width, and at a spacing not exceeding 30 feet. 2. Control Joints: Tooled, 7/8 inch deep, 4 feet to 6 feet on center between expansion joints.
FINISHES A.
Schedule of finishes on flatwork is as follows: 1. Troweled finish: typical interior floor areas to receive adhesive-applied finish, or carpet, or to remain exposed (5.3.4.2.c). 2. Floated finish: interior floor areas to receive finish in cementitious setting bed (5.3.4.2.b). 3. Broom finish: exterior slabs (5.3.4.2.d). 4. All driving and parking areas: light broom finish (5.3.4.2.d). 5. Areas indicated on Drawings: a. Hardener - per the manufacturer's instructions, under direction of the manufacturer's representative (5.3.4.2.e).
B.
Schedule of finishes on formed surfaces is as follows: 1. Rough form finish: beams, slabs, joists, and other surfaces not otherwise specified. (5.3.3.3.a). 2. Smooth form finish surface class A: walls, columns, and other surfaces exposed to public view or scheduled to receive waterproofing: (5.3.3.3.b).
FINISHING TOLERANCES A.
Conform to F-number requirements noted below and as described in ASTM E115596(2008) for all interior slabs (5.3.4.3.c): 1. All interior slabs on grade and: FF-25/FL-20 minimum overall for composite of all measured values; FF-18/FL-13 minimum for any individual floor section. 2. All other interior slabs: FF-25 minimum overall for composite of all measured values; FF-18 minimum for any individual section.
B.
Take remedial measures if flatness and levelness testing indicates either of the following conditions exist: 1. The entire floor composite value, when installation is complete, measures less than either of the specified overall F-numbers. 2. Any individual floor section measures less than either of the specified minimum section F-numbers.
C.
Individual floor sections for floor tolerance testing purposes shall be bound by the following that provide the smallest sections: construction joints, control joints, column lines and half-column lines.
D.
Obtain written approval of the Architect and Engineer of remedial measures proposed before implementing measures.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 10
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
3.09
3.10
3.11
01-13-2012
E.
All exterior slabs shall be finished to a 1/2 inch in 10 foot tolerance.
F.
All driving and parking areas shall be finished to a 1/4 inch in 10 foot tolerance.
CURING AND PROTECTION A.
Temperature: 1. When air temperature during placement is less than 40 degrees F, or will be within 24 hours, temperature of concrete as placed is to be between 50 and 90 degrees F (55 and 90 degrees F for sections less than 12 inches thick). Maintain concrete temperature within these limits for the full curing period of seven (7) days (or three (3) days for high-early-strength concrete) (4.2.2.7). 2. The temperature of concrete as delivered shall not exceed 90 degrees F (4.2.2.7).
B.
Curing: 1. Interior slab areas which will receive finish in cementitious setting bed or to receive adhesive applied finishes are to be cured using paper curing membranes without the use of a curing compound (5.3.6.4.a through 5.3.6.4.d). 2. Surfaces which are to receive penetrating sealer are to be moist-cured without the use of a curing compound or cured using paper curing membranes (5.3.6.4.a through 5.3.6.4.d). 3. All other slab areas may be either moist-cured or receive an application of curing compound (5.3.6.4.e). 4. Whichever curing method is used, it is to commence immediately after disappearance of water sheen and continue for at least seven days. Cure high-early-strength concrete for a minimum of three (3) days (5.3.6.1). Do not allow curing to be delayed overnight. Note that silica fume concrete requires continuous fogging to prevent rapid drying and plastic shrinkage cracking. A minimum of two (2) fogging sprayers must be in continuous use during the finishing operations. 5. Prevent excessive moisture loss from formed surfaces (5.3.6.3). If forms are removed before seven (7) days have elapsed, cure the formed surfaces by moist-curing or application of curing compound for the remainder of the curing period. 6. All exterior slabs are to receive an application of sealer prior to completion of construction. This does not apply to slabs of silica fume concrete. 7. Interior slabs which remain exposed are to receive an application of sealer prior to the completion of construction.
GROUTING A.
Grout below bearing plates, setting plates, and column base plates is to be installed only after the steel is plumbed. The use of leveling plates at column bases is prohibited.
B.
Install grout per the recommendations of the manufacturer.
CLEANING AND PATCHING A.
Repair any slabs which do not meet the finish requirements. The Architect will determine whether grinding, filling of cracks or patching and leveling procedures are required.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 11
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
3.12
3.13
01-13-2012
B.
For slabs which are dusting or showing other signs of improper curing, any corrective measures attempted will be subject to prior approval of the Architect and will be performed at the Contractor's expense. These may include additional applications of sealer or liquid hardener, or grinding, or covering with a topping.
C.
Immediately prior to final acceptance, remove from all interior and exterior surfaces which are exposed to view, any stain-producing elements, such as pyrites, nails, wire, reinforcing steel and form ties.
D.
Remove all stains completely. Use of weak acids or patented cleaners is acceptable, but surface is to be completely neutralized after use.
ACCEPTANCE A.
Concrete work with serious honeycombing, form misalignment, or other deviation from Contract requirements is subject to rejection (1.7).
B.
When observations or tests indicate that the Contract requirements have not been met, the Contractor is to bear the costs of any additional testing and analysis to determine acceptability and also the cost of removal and replacement, if such is required (1.7.1.5).
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Obtain concrete for required tests at point of placement (1.6.4.2).
B.
For each concrete class, except Class IV, perform one strength test for each 50 yards, or fraction thereof, placed in any one day (1.6.4.2.d and 1.6.4.2.e).
C.
Determine slump for each strength test (1.6.4.2.f).
D.
Air Content: 1. Determine air content for each strength test of air-entrained concrete per ASTM C23108c, C173/C173M-08a or C138/138M-08 (1.6.4.2.h). 2. At first strength test of air-entrained flatwork in any one day, calibrate a hand-held air indicator with a sample from the same batch. 3. At least twice each day when air-entrained flatwork is being placed, monitor the air content using the hand-held indicator, after floating. If air content of slab is more than 1/2% lower than at the chute, revise finishing procedure to correct the situation.
E.
Determine concrete temperature for each strength test when air temperature is less than 40 degrees, or will be within 24 hours (1.6.4.2.g).
F.
Do not place concrete when slump, air content, or temperature vary from allowable.
G.
Test interior floor slab finished surfaces for flatness and levelness in accordance with ASTM E1155-96(2008)(5.3.4.3.c).
H.
Individual floor sections for floor tolerance testing purposes shall be bound by the following that provide the smallest sections: construction joints, control joints, column lines and half-column lines.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 12
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
I.
Each individual floor cast in a single day shall meet the composite flatness requirements.
J.
Floor tolerance tests shall typically be performed (and all defective areas identified) within 24 hours after slab placement and reported to all parties as soon as possible, but not later than 72 hours after installation. At areas cured with a paper curing membrane, floor tolerance tests shall be performed immediately following its removal. Shored elevated slabs shall be tested prior to removal of shoring.
K.
Visual inspections: 1. Periodically inspect reinforcing steel for size, location and placement. 2. Continuously inspect anchor bolts cast into concrete. 3. Periodically verify the use of the required design mix. 4. Continuously inspect the placement of the concrete for proper techniques. Periodically inspect for maintenance of specified curing temperature and techniques. 5. Periodically inspect concrete formwork for shape, location and dimensions of members.
L.
Maintain records of all tests, indicating exact location of the structure represented by each test. END OF SECTION
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03 30 00 - 13
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 035413 - GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes gypsum cementitious underlayment and the following: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Sealing Materials: Materials provided under this Section shall be compatible with finish flooring adhesives and setting materials provided in other Sections. 1.
1.2 A.
Product Data and Reports:
4.
Product data for each type of product indicated. Material Certificates: For each material, signed by manufacturers. Installer's Qualifications: Certification that installer has been trained and approved by underlayment materials and is currently an approved applicator. System manufacturer’s representative periodic and final inspections, and qualitycontrol test reports.
Shop Drawings: Plans indicating substrates, locations and average depths of underlayment based on survey of substrate conditions. 1.
1.3
If compatible curing compounds are not available, this contractor shall moisture cure affected areas, or apply and remove noncompatible curing compounds as required by adhesive, setting material and coating manufacturers' requirements.
SUBMITTALS
1. 2. 3.
B.
Primers and sealers. Slump tests and field samples. Field quality control inspections and test reports.
Include manufacturer's standard details for openings, construction joints, floorwall conditions, terminations and other conditions.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer's Qualifications: An applicator who is trained and approved by underlayment materials manufacturer, and who uses approved mixing and pumping equipment and installation techniques.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain all products through one source from a single manufacturer.
C.
Mockups: Build mockups to set quality standard for material installation and procedures.
GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
035413 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1. 2.
3.
D.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
A.
Size and Location: An area of approximately 500 s.f. in a location determined by the Construction Manager. Sealing Materials: Apply sealing material to 50% of the mock-up area for the testing of finish flooring installation materials by others. The underlayment system manufacturer’s representative shall observe the testing and confirm in writing that the sealing material is acceptable or unacceptable for proposed finish flooring installation materials. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups, unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Notify participants at least five (5) working days before conference. 1.
1.4
01/13/12
Meet with the Owner’s representative, Construction Manager, Architect; underlayment installer; underlayment system manufacturer's representative, subflooring installer, and subcontractors whose work interfaces with or affects underlayment installation, including floor penetrations, accessories and floor mounted equipment. Establish trade-related job schedules, including installation of floor penetrations and equipment, and material curing requirements. Establish work schedules and methods that will prevent installed underlayment damage. Establish areas on the job site designated as work and storage areas. Establish weather and working temperature conditions, interior and exterior. Establish temporary heat and ventilation requirements, and mechanical equipment type and locations. Establish provisions for protecting installed underlayment areas during the remainder of the Project. Establish manufacturer’s warranty inspection requirements and schedule.
PROJECT CONDITIONS Installation Limitations: Proceed with underlayment installation only when application areas are enclosed, weathertight and comply with required environmental requirements. 1. 2.
3.
Environmental Requirements: Before, during and after underlayment installation, application areas to be maintained at a temperature above 50 degrees F. Ventilation: Operable windows and doors may be used to provide ventilation when exterior temperatures are above 50 degrees F, and air movement provides required ventilation. Mechanical Temporary Heat and Ventilation: The Construction Manager will provide temporary heat and ventilation when conditions require. a. b.
Temporary Heat: Fuel fired heaters not permitted within application areas or areas where heater exhaust may enter application or installed areas. Ventilation: Comply with underlayment manufacturer's ventilation requirements for application areas.
GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
035413 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE B.
01/13/12
Field Quality Control Inspections: Underlayment manufacturer’s representative to conduct inspections in accordance with material manufacturer's requirements for compliance with mixing and installation procedures, contract documents requirements and system warranty requirements. Manufacturer's representative to periodically visit the installation to verify system materials and application techniques comply with manufacturer’s written requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
MANUFACTURERS Gypsum cementitious underlayment by Maxxon forms the basis-of-design. Products with comparable materials and performance characteristics by manufactures listed are also acceptable. 1. 2.
2.2 A.
Hacker Industries. United States Gypsum Co.
GYPSUM CEMENTITIOUS UNDERLAYMENT System: "Acousti-Mat 3" gypsum cement underlayment, self-leveling. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Sand Aggregate: 1/8" or less, washed masonry or plaster sand, meeting requirements of Maxxon Corporation Sand Specifications 101. Mix Water: Potable, free from impurities. Mix Designs: Proportions and methods in strict compliance with manufacturer's written recommendations. Nominal Thickness: 1½". Slump: Measured as underlayment material is being pumped using, a 2" x 4" cylinder and resulting in a patty size of 8" plus or minus 1" in diameter. Characteristics: a. b. c. d.
Compressive Strength: Up to 2000 psi. Dry Density: 100 lbs per cu. ft. Point Loading: Minimum 550 lbs. on a 1" diameter disc. Surface Burning Characteristics: 1) 2) 3)
B.
Flame Spread: 0. Fuel Contributed: 0. Smoke Density: 0.
Sound Deadening Pad: "Acousti-Mat 3", nylon core of fused, entangled filaments attached to a non-woven fabric. 1. 2. 3.
Thickness: Nominal: 0.8". Density: 2.66 lbs per cu. ft. Flammability ASTM E-84:
GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
035413 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE a. b. c.
01/13/12
Fuel Contribution: 0 Smoke Density: NFPA Class A Flame Spread: NFPA Class A
C.
Metal Mesh Reinforcement: Galvanized diamond metal lath, 3.4 lbs per sq. yd.
D.
Fiber Mesh Reinforcement: "Maxxon Crack Suppression Mat", nylon core of fused, entangled filaments and geotextile fabric bonded to one side.
E.
Subfloor Primer: "Maxxon Floor Primer".
F.
System Sealer: "Maxxon Overspray".
G.
Crack and Void Fillers: Manufacturers recommended quick setting patching and caulking materials.
H.
Perimeter Isolation Material: "Acousti-Mat Isolation Material", 1/8" thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.
INSTALLATION Examine substrates, areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation requirements, tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Begin application only after building is enclosed, temporary heat and ventilation are available when required, satisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry and proper installation conditions are achieved. Close application areas to traffic during underlayment installation and for curing time period after application. Subfloor Condition and Cleaning: Verify subfloor to be structurally sound, clean and free of dust, mud, oil, grease and other contaminates. Leak Prevention: Fill cracks and voids with quick setting patching or caulking material where leakage of underlayment materials could occur. Arrange for system manufacturer’s representative periodic and final inspections, and quality-control test reports. Installation of gypsum cement underlayment indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
B.
Install full depth isolation material at perimeter all perimeter locations.
C.
Install sound deadening pads butt jointed over flooring substrate. Offset pad joints from substrate joints. Install fiber mesh reinforcement over sound deadening pads with offset joints.
D.
Priming: Prime subfloor in compliance with manufacturer's recommended requirements for substrate materials. Provide multiple coats when required.
GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
035413 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
E.
Install underlayment in continuous pours at thickness indicated over wood subflooring. Spread and screed material to a smooth, self-leveled surface. Avoid placing slurry against underlayment material that has obtained its initial set except at manufacturer's specifically detailed joints.
F.
Curing: Coordinate requirement for continuous natural or mechanical ventilation and adequate heat in each area until underlayment is properly cured. 1.
G.
Sealing: Seal all floor areas in compliance with underlayment manufacturer's written requirements. 1.
H.
3.2 A.
Testing: Perform dryness tests in each area as often as required to determine underlayment is considered dry.
Floor areas where the surface has been damaged shall be cleaned and sealed regardless of floor covering to be used. Where floor goods manufacturers require special adhesive or installation systems, their requirements supersede these recommendations.
Prior to installation of finish flooring materials, patch, repair and seal damaged areas to match and align with adjacent surfaces. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Underlayment system manufacturer's technical personnel to periodically inspect installation to review installation procedures. Submit reports to Architect and Construction Manager. 1.
2.
Slump Tests: Underlayment mixes tested for slump as it's being pumped. Comply with underlayment manufacturer's requirements for allowable slump and test frequency. Field Samples: At least one set of three (3) molded cube samples taken from each day's pour during underlayment installation. Cubes tested as recommended by underlayment manufacturer in accordance with modified ASTM C 472. Test results shall be available to Architect and Construction Manager.
END OF SECTION 035413
GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
035413 - 5
04
MASONRY
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
B.
Standard concrete masonry units (CMUs). Concrete and masonry lintels. Face brick. Thin brick. Mortar and grout materials. Masonry accessories and flashing. Steel vertical reinforcing. Perimeter foundation wall, unit masonry and cavity wall insulation. Setting various items and bearing points in contact with, supported on, or enclosed by masonry which are furnished by others. Setting steel lintels provided under Division 05 Section “Metal Fabrications”. Setting elevator rail anchors. Initial masonry surface cleaning.
Special Inspections: The Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality-control testing in compliance with 2011 Ohio Building Code (OBC), Chapter 17, Section 1704. This testing is in addition to and separate from testing and inspections provided by the Contractor. 1.
Refer to Division 01 Section "Code-Required Special Inspections and Procedures".
C.
Refer to “General Structural Notes” on Structural Drawings for additional requirements.
D.
Refer to Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing" for installing anchor sections of adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structural frame.
E.
Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for furnishing steel lintels and shelf angles for unit masonry.
F.
Refer to Division 14 Section “Hydraulic Elevators” for rail anchor installation. Rail anchors provided by elevator manufacturer.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For reinforcing steel. Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show elevations of reinforced walls.
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
C.
Samples for each type of exposed masonry units and mortars.
D.
Material Certificates: For each type of product indicated. Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within standards. 1. 2. 3.
E.
Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1.
2.
1.3
For masonry units include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. Include fire-resistance rating test data for concrete masonry units in rated wall assemblies. Factory Insulated Units: Include insulation material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.
Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.
B.
Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Payment for these services will be made by Owner. 1. 2. 3.
Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, per ASTM C 140. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, per ASTM C 780. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, per ASTM C 1019.
C.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. 1. 2. 3.
Build sample panels for each type of exposed unit masonry construction in sizes approximately 48" long by 48" high. Multiple masonry materials may be combined into one sample panel. Build panel using selected materials, mortar, bond patterns, joint tooling and cleaning materials. Show full range of color, texture and workmanship proposed for the work. Remove and rebuild unacceptable work as required to achieve an acceptable panel.
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 4. 5. 6. 1.4 A.
The approved sample panel may not form a portion of the work. Make panel available to other trades for their use. Maintain the approved panel without alteration, for the duration of the project.
PROJECT CONDITIONS Concrete Unit Masonry: Comply with hot- and cold-weather construction and protection requirements contained in NCMA TEK 3-1B. 1.
2. B.
01/13/12
Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with coldweather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
Brick Masonry: Comply with hot- and cold-weather construction and protection requirements contained in BIA Technical Note 1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
STANDARD CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMUs)
A.
Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90.
B.
Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 1900 psi.
C.
Weight Classification: Concrete oven-dry density, lbs per cubic foot. 1.
Normal Weight. 125.
D.
Sizes: Standard sizes noted on Drawings.
E.
Shapes: Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding and other special conditions. 1.
Provide bullnose units at exposed corners and jambs.
F.
Rated Units: Provide rated units complying with listed UL wall assembly designs where noted on Drawings.
G.
Factory Insulated Units: See masonry core wall insulation within this Section.
H.
Mortar: 1. 2.
Types: Refer to "Mortar and Grout Materials" this Section. Color: Natural gray, uncolored.
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE I.
Bond Pattern: Running.
J.
Joints: 1. 2.
2.2 A.
Face Brick by the manufacturer as listed below forms the basis of design. Products with comparable materials, performance characteristics, texture and color by other manufacturers are also acceptable: Belden Brick Company. Glen-Gary Brick.
Exterior Face Brick: ASTM C 216, Grade SW, Type FSB for facing brick exposed to severe weather. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
6. 7.
8. C.
Tooled at exposed locations. Struck at concealed locations or locations covered by other materials.
BRICK
1. 2. B.
01/13/12
Brick B-1: Bowerston Brick, Modular, “Olde Windsor”. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 5040 psi. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 20 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated "not effloresced." Surface Coating: Brick with colors or textures produced by application of coatings shall withstand 50 cycles of freezing and thawing per ASTM C 67 with no observable difference in the applied finish when viewed from 10 feet. Size (Actual Dimensions): To be determined based on brick option chosen. Special Shapes: a. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished. b. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view. 1) Rabbeted Lip Soldier to fit over and conceal steel angles at openings. 2) 4” solid corners at locations as required.. Mortar for B-1: Flamingo Brixment, color to be determined.
Exterior Thin Brick: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Brick: Bowerston Brick, Modular, “Olde Windsor”. Bond Pattern: Running. Joint Profile: Same as face brick. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color and texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing. Includes: a.
UNIT MASONRY
Outside corner units.
042000 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 5. 6. 7.
8.
2.3
01/13/12
Metal Lath: Galvanized or stainless steel self-furring metal lath. Mortar: Same as face brick. Manufacturer Applications: Thin brick to be applied with strict instructions and details set forth by the brick manufacturer and the BIA for each substrate. Brick to be applied in straight rows with tolerances similar to the face brick. Thin Brick Systems: Thin brick systems may be permitted if approved by the Architect.
CONCRETE AND MASONRY LINTELS
A.
General: Provide either concrete or masonry lintels, at Contractor's option, complying with requirements below.
B.
Precast Concrete Lintels: ASTM C 1623, 2500 or 3500 psi concrete with Grade 60 steel reinforcing. Size and lengths as indicated. Provide minimum 8” bearing minimum at each end unless noted otherwise. 1. 2.
C.
2.4 A.
Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam CMU units with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS Site Mixed Mortar and Grout Materials: 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
Reinforcing Bars: Size and number indicated or required to support loads indicated. Provide exposed lintels with simulated vertical joints at 16” o.c.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.
Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. 2.
For joints less than ¼" thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color.
C.
Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
D.
Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated. Products by following manufacturer's are acceptable:
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1. 2. 3. E. 2.5 A.
01/13/12
Euclid Chemical Company; Accelguard 80. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Morset. Sonneborn Products, BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Trimix-NCA.
Water: Potable, free of alkalis, acids and organic material. MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES General: Do not use admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. 3.
Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. Limit cementitious materials in mortar for exterior and reinforced masonry to portland cement and lime. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.
B.
Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270 Property Specification.
C.
Proportion Specification for Masonry Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270. 1.
Loose materials measured by either volume or weight. Measurement by shovel not permitted. The following material weights are assumed. a. b. c.
Portland and Other Cements: 94 lbs./cu. ft. Hydrated Lime: 40 lbs./cu. ft. Sand: Damp and loose, 80 lbs./cu. ft.
D.
Property Specification for Masonry Mortar: Comply with manufacturer’s written mixing instructions.
E.
Mortar Mixes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
F.
Type M Mortar: 2500 psi minimum compressive strength at 28 days. Use for masonry foundation walls below grade. Type N Mortar: 750 psi minimum average compressive strength at 28 days. Use for above grade masonry veneer. Type S Mortar: 1800 psi minimum average compressive strength at 28 days. Use for load-bearing masonry and at locations not noted otherwise. Provide natural colored mortar for standard concrete unit masonry work. Provide colored mortar for brick veneer and decorative concrete unit masonry, and natural colored mortar for standard concrete unit masonry work. No anti-freeze additives, either liquid or powder, or air entraining admixture shall be incorporated in the mix to lower the freezing point of the mortar.
Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 1.
Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 6
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE a. b. 2. 3.
2.6
01/13/12
Use fine grout in grout spaces less than 2" in horizontal dimension, unless otherwise indicated. Use coarse grout in grout spaces 2" or greater in least horizontal dimension, unless otherwise indicated.
Compressive Strength: 2500 psi minimum. Slump: Provide grout with a slump of 8" to 11" ASTM C 143.
as measured according to
REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORS
A.
Reinforcing Bars: Uncoated steel, ASTM A 615/ A 615M or ASTM A 996/ A 996M, Grade 60.
B.
Masonry Joint Reinforcement, Attachments and Accessories: Products by Dur-O-Wall Inc form the basis of design. Products with comparable materials, performance characteristics and finishes by Heckman, and Hohmann & Barnard are also acceptable. 1. 2.
Materials: ASTM A 951/ A 951M, Class 3 mill galvanized at interior walls, and ASTM A 153, Class B-2, hot-dip galvanized at exterior walls. Single Wythe Horizontal Joint Reinforcement: a.
b. c. d. 3.
Multiple Wythe Adjustable Horizontal Joint Reinforcement a.
b.
c. d. 4.
Non-Reinforced Walls: "Truss DA 3100", prefabricated galvanized #9 gauge, parallel, deformed steel rods and a continuous, diagonally oriented, #9 gauge, smooth steel cross rod forming a truss design. Vertically Reinforced Walls: "DA 3200 Ladur Design", prefabricated, galvanized, #9 gauge, parallel, deformed steel rods. Assemblies 1-5/8" to 2" less than the wall thickness in which it is used. Provide matching prefabricated corner and tee units.
Non-Reinforced Walls: "DA 3700 Dur-O-Eye", prefabricated galvanized #9 gauge, parallel, deformed steel rods with #9 gauge smooth steel cross rod forming a truss design and adjustable 3/16 wire pintle sections at 16” o.c. Vertically Reinforced Walls: "DA 3600 Ladur Eye Design", prefabricated galvanized #9 gauge, parallel, deformed steel rods with adjustable 3/16 wire pintle sections at 16” o.c. Assemblies 1-5/8" to 2" less than the wall thickness in which it is used. Provide prefabricated corner and tee units.
Veneer Anchors for Face Brick, Concrete Block and Rough Stone Veneer Masonry: Galvanized "DA 210 Veneer Anchor Screw-On Plate”, 14 gauge with galvanized “DA 700” series triangular ties or “DA 750” trapezoid ties, and “Standard Veneer Screw-Corrosion Resistant" fasteners with washers. a. b. c.
UNIT MASONRY
Metal Framing Backup Fasteners: Two (2) "DA 807”. Wood Framing Backup Fasteners: Two (2) “DA 808”. Masonry Fasteners: DA5410 and DA5610 Masonry Expansion Anchors
042000 - 7
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE d. e. 5.
2.7 A.
Unit Masonry Intersecting Wall Anchors: “DA 301Z” rigid, galvanized, 12 gauge steel, 1½” wide by 24” long x ¼" thick anchor with 2” bends at each end.
Prefabricated Metal Flashing and Accessories: Products by Dur-O-Wall Inc form the basis of design. Products with comparable materials, performance characteristics, and finishes by Heckman and Hohmann & Barnard are also acceptable. Drip Edge Flashing: “DA 1525-Drip Edge Stainless Steel Flashing”, 1½ “ wide, 26 gage Type 304 stainless steel with 3/8” closed hemmed edge and 2B-2D finish.
Fabricated Metal Flashing and Accessories: Comply with material and method requirements specified in Division 07 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim". 1.
Cavity Wall Base Flashing: Similar to SMACNA Fig. 4-2. Width equal to full depth of shelf (veneer + air cavity + insulation). a. b.
2.
Material: 24 gauge, G90 galvanized steel with 3/8” closed hemmed edge Material: 26 gauge Type 304 stainless steel with 3/8” closed hemmed edge and 2B-2D finish.
Wall Coping Flashing: Similar to SMACNA Fig. 4-3A, 3D and 3E. a.
C.
Ties: 3/16” galvanized wire, size and shape selected to meet field conditions. Corrugated wall ties not permitted.
FLASHING MATERIALS
1. B.
01/13/12
Material: 24 gauge, G90 galvanized steel with deformed pattern.
Contractor’s Option for Concealed Flashing: For flashing not exposed to the exterior, use one of the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1.
Copper-Laminated Flashing: 5-oz./sq. ft. copper sheet bonded with asphalt between 2 layers of glass-fiber cloth. Products by the following manufacturers are acceptable. a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
2.
Advanced Building Products Inc.; Copper Fabric Flashing. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Copper Fabric Thru-Wall Flashing. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; H & B C-Fab Flashing. Phoenix Building Products; Type FCC-Fabric Covered Copper. Polytite Manufacturing Corp.; Copper Fabric Flashing. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Copper Fabric Flashing. York Manufacturing, Inc.; Multi-Flash 500 Flashing.
Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable, adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, crosslaminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040". Products by the following manufacturers are acceptable.
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 8
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 3.
01/13/12
Advanced Building Products Inc.; Peel-N-Seal. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Dur-O-Barrier Thru-Wall Flashing. Fiberweb, Clark Hammerbeam Corp.; Aquaflash 500. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Perm-ABarrier Wall Flashing. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 82 Rubberized-Asphalt ThruWall Flashing. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Textroflash. W. R. Meadows, Inc.; Air-Shield Thru-Wall Flashing. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Polyguard 300. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Sando-Seal. Williams Products, Inc.; Everlastic MF-40.
EPDM Flashing: Sheet flashing product made from ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer, complying with ASTM D 4637, 0.040" thick. a. b. c. d. e.
Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; Pre-Kleened EPDM Thru-Wall Flashing. Firestone Building Products; FlashGuard. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 81 EPDM Thru-Wall Flashing. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Epra-Max EPDM Thru-Wall Flashing. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; EPDM Flashing.
D.
Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
E.
Adhesives, Primers and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates.
2.8 A.
FOUNDATION WALL, MASONRY CORE WALL INSULATION Perimeter Wall Foundation Insulation: Extruded, closed cell polystyrene plastic board “Styrofoam Square Edge (SE)” by Dow Chemical forms the basis of design. Products with comparable materials and performance criteria by Owens Corning, Pactiv Building Products and Tenneco are also acceptable. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Thermal Value: R @ 5.0 per inch. Density: 1.6 pcf, minimum. Compressive Strength: 25 psi, minimum. Compliance: ASTM C578, Type IV. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer. a. b.
B.
“Contech Brand PL300 Foam Board Adhesive” by ChemRex, Inc. “Foamgrab PS” by Dacar Products, Inc.
Concrete Unit Masonry Molded-Polystyrene Insulation Units: Factory insulated cores “Korfil” U-shaped expanded polystyrene units by Concrete Block Insulating Systems
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 9
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
forms the basis-of-design. Products with comparable materials and performance criteria by other manufacturers may be submitted to the Architect for review at least ten (10) days prior to the bid date. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
2.9
Product: “Korfil” U-shaped expanded polystyrene units. Product: “Korfil ICON" I-shaped expanded polystyrene units Thermal Value: R @ 4.17 per inch @ 40 degrees F. Density: 1.0 lbs. per cu. ft. Compliance: ASTM C 578, Type 1 Specification for Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.
MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A.
Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).
B.
Miscellaneous masonry accessories by Dur-O-Wall Inc form the basis of design. Products with comparable materials and performance characteristics by noted manufacturers are also acceptable. 1.
b. c.
4.
C.
felt
complying
with
Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.
Vertical Movement Control Joints: a.
3.
roofing
Acceptable Manufacturers: a. b.
2.
organic
Concrete Block: “DA 2001, 2003, 2005 Series Rubber Control Joint” with shear keys designed to fit sash block grooves. Brick: “DA 2015 Expansion Joint”, closed cell neoprene rubber, 3/8” thickness. Sizes: Provide style and size required by each installation condition.
Horizontal Movement Control Joints: “DA 2010 Rapid Soft Joint”, closed cell neoprene rubber with adhesive on one side. Thickness: ¼”. Grout Stop: ”DA 1015 Dur-O-Stop” fabricated from monofilament screen nylon with ½” mesh designed for controlling grout while maintaining positive bond in mortar joint.
Weep/Vent Products: Use one of the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2.
Rectangular Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Clear butyrate, 3/8" by 1½" by 3½" long. Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8" less than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard. a.
Products: 1) 2)
UNIT MASONRY
Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Maze weep vent. Blok-Lok Limited; Cell-Vent.
042000 - 10
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 3) 4) 5) 6) 3.
Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Cell Vents. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 85 Cell Vent. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Quadro-Vent. Wire-Bond; Cell Vent.
Mesh Weep/Vent: Free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8" less than depth of outer wythe; in color selected from manufacturer's standard. a.
2.10
01/13/12
Products: Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net Weep Vents.
MASONRY CLEANERS
A.
Final cleaning of decorative concrete masonry and brick surfaces to be treated with water repellent coatings provided under Division 07 Section “Water Repellents” which requires the cleaning and sealing materials to be provided by the same manufacturer.
B.
Final cleaning of decorative concrete masonry and brick surfaces to be sealed under Division 07 Section “Water Repellents” may be provided under this Section provided selected cleaning material is acceptable to sealing material manufacturer. Provide cleaning material manufacturer's written letter of acceptable prior to cleaning masonry surfaces.
C.
Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains from new masonry without damaging masonry. Use product approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 1.
Manufacturers: a. b. c.
Diedrich Technologies, Inc. EaCo Chem, Inc. ProSoCo, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
The structure is designed to be self-supporting and stable after the building is fully completed. It is the Contractor's sole responsibility to determine erection procedure and sequence and to insure stability of the building and its component parts during erection. This includes the addition of any temporary bracing that might be necessary. Such material is not shown on the drawings. If used, they shall be removed as determined by the Contractor's erection procedure, and shall remain the Contractor's property.
B.
Prior to installation, inspect substrates, structure and adjacent construction. Begin work after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 11
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
C.
Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required, cut units with motordriven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
D.
Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures.
E.
Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying.
F.
Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following: 1.
2. G.
For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8" in 10 feet, ¼" in 20 feet, or ½" maximum. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8" in 10 feet, ¼" in 20 feet, or ½" maximum.
Concrete Masonry Installation Tolerances: Comply with NCMA TEK 3-8A, and the following: 1.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than ¼” in 20 feet, nor ½” maximum. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as exposed lintels, sills, parapets and reveals, do not vary from level by more than ¼” in 20’, nor ½” maximum. Collar Joints, Grout Spaces and Cavity Widths: May vary by -¼" to + 3/8”. Mortar Joint Tolerances: May vary by ± ½” maximum from level provided joint does not slope more than ± ¼” in 10 feet. Bearing Wall Top Surface: Level within a slope of ± ¼” in 10 feet, but no more than ± ½”. Two Story Columns and Walls: a. b.
H.
Load Bearing: May vary in alignment by ± ½”. Non-loadbearing: May vary in alignment by ± 3/4”.
Brick Masonry Installation Tolerances: Comply with tolerances in BIA TEK Note 1D. 1.
2. 3.
4.
Maximum variation from plumb in vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arrises: ¼” in 10 ft., 3/8” in a story height not to exceed 20 ft., ½” in 40 ft or more. Maximum variation from plumb for external corners, expansion joints and other conspicuous lines: ¼” in any story or 20 ft. maximum, ½” in 40 ft. or more. Maximum variation from level of grades for exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines: ¼” in any bay or 20 ft., ½” in 40 ft. or more. Maximum variation from plan location of related portions of columns, walls and partitions: ½” in any bay or 20 ft., 3/4” in 40 ft. or more.
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 12
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 5.
3.2
01/13/12
Maximum variation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns and thicknesses of walls from dimensions shown on drawings: Minus ¼”, plus ½”.
LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A.
Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs and, where possible, at other locations.
B.
Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4" horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
C.
Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
D.
Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24" under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Provide vertical expansion, control and isolation joints in masonry where shown. Rake out mortar for application of joint sealants. Build in control joint fillers and flanges of expansion joints where indicated. 1. 2.
3.3 A.
When not indicated, at maximum 30’-0” on center. Locate control joints at points of natural weakness in masonry and acceptable to Architect.
MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4.
With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted.
B.
Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.
C.
Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 13
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE D.
3.4
01/13/12
Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive direct-applied finishes (other than paint), unless otherwise indicated. CAVITY WALLS
A.
Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into cavity.
B.
Apply air barrier per Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry."
C.
Installing Cavity-Wall Insulation: Place small dabs of adhesive, spaced approximately 12 inches o.c. both ways, on inside face of insulation boards, or attach with plastic fasteners designed for this purpose. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other confining obstructions in cavity, with edges butted tightly both ways. Press units firmly against inside wythe of masonry or other construction as shown.
3.5 A. 3.6
MASONRY-CELL INSULATION Install molded-polystyrene insulation units into masonry unit cells before laying units. MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A.
General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches.
B.
Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.
D.
Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
3.7 A.
ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following: 1.
2. 3.
Provide an open space not less than 2 inch wide (or as shown on the Drawings) between masonry and structural steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches o.c. horizontally.
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 14
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 3.8
01/13/12
FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS
A.
General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install vents at shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, and where indicated.
B.
Install flashing as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing as recommended by flashing manufacturer. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches to form end dams. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination.
Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1. 2. 3.
Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. Cover cavity side of weep holes with plastic insect screening at cavities insulated with loose-fill insulation.
D.
Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in Part 2 "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.
E.
Install vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated. weep/vent products to form vents. 1.
3.9 A.
Use specified
Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated. Install through-wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking.
REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1.
Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 15
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2.
01/13/12
Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction.
B.
Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
C.
Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure. 1. 2.
3.10 A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Inspectors: Owner will engage qualified independent inspectors to perform inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. 1.
B.
Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches.
Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement.
Special Inspections: Owner's testing agency will perform field quality-control testing in compliance with 2011 Ohio Building Code (OBC), Chapter 17, Section 1704. This testing is in addition to and separate from testing and inspections provided by the Contractor. 1.
2.
Installation of cast-in-place concrete, bolts, reinforcing, concrete material sampling and maintenance of specified cutting temperature requirements and application techniques. Prepare test and inspection reports.
C.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections indicated below and prepare test reports:
D.
Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof.
E.
Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, per ASTM C 140 for compressive strength.
F.
Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): according to ASTM C 780.
G.
Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, per ASTM C 780. Test mortar for compressive strength.
H.
Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, per ASTM C 1019.
UNIT MASONRY
For each mix provided,
042000 - 16
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 3.11
01/13/12
CLEANING
A.
In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
B.
Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
3.12 A.
Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces.
MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. 2.
Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 042000
UNIT MASONRY
042000 - 17
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 047200 - CAST STONE MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes standard and custom cast stone items for the following applications: 1. 2.
B.
1.2 A.
Refer to Division 07 Section "Water Repellents" for final cleaning of cast stone masonry surfaces to be treated with water repellent coatings. SUBMITTALS Data and Reports: 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
A.
Include design mix and attained compressive strength. Include design calculations for elements acting as load bearing units or supported by connections.
Samples: 1. 2.
1.3
Product Data: For cast stone units. Include dimensions of individual components. Qualification Data: For cast stone manufacturer. Include lists of completed projects with names and addresses of Architects and Owners. Material test reports. Certifications: Provide manufacturer's standard certificates of compliance with Cast Stone Institute standards.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for cast stone units. Include dimensions; details of reinforcement and anchorages, if any; and indication of finished faces. 1. 2.
C.
Exterior stone bases, watertable, lintels, sills and bands. Installation accessories.
For each color and texture of cast stone required. Colored Mortar Samples: For each mortar color required.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer Qualifications: A current producer member of the Cast Stone Institute with a minimum five (5) years experience in manufacturing cast stone units similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to manufacture required units.
CAST STONE MASONRY
047200 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
B.
Installer Qualifications: Minimum of 5 years' successful experience in handling and installing cast stone units on projects of comparable size and scope.
C.
Fabrication and Installation Standards: Cast Stone Institute Technical Manual.
D.
Mockups: Build samples into masonry sample panels provided under Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for each type of exposed cast stone assembly, or provide separate sample panels for each type of exposed cast stone assembly to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. 1. 2. 3.
Provide materials in sizes required by sample panel construction. Refer to the Drawings. Size: 4' wide x 6' high (minimum). Build panels using selected materials, mortar, bond pattern, joint tooling and cleaning requirements. a. b.
4. 5. 6. 7.
Show full range of color, texture, and workmanship proposed for the work. Include accessories, mounting devices and flashings.
Remove and rebuild unacceptable work as required to achieve an acceptable panel. The approved sample panels may not form a portion of the work. Make panels available to other trades for their use. Maintain the approved panels without alteration, for the duration of the project.
E.
Cast Stone Structural Elements: Elements acting as load bearing units or supported by connections to be designed by a structural engineer to withstand imposed dead and live loads, applicable snow loads, and other loads calculated in accordance with the 2011 Ohio Building Code, Chapter 16. Calculations prepared and sealed by a Structural Engineer registered in the state of the project.
F.
Color Range and Finish Textures: Consistent in all materials as represented by the sample submittals.
G.
Welders: Qualified in accordance with the American Welding Society Structural Welding Code AWS D1.1-96.
H.
Textured-Face Wall Units: Meet or exceed ASTM-C90 Grade N, Type 1 specifications.
I.
Stone Set During Hot or Cold Weather: Follow installation recommendations of the following Cast Stone Institute Technical Bulletins: 1. 2.
1.4 A.
Cold Weather Setting Practices: Technical Bulletin # 41. Hot Weather Setting Practices: Technical Bulletin # 48.
WARRANTY Provide cast stone manufacturer's standard written warranty stating products to be free from manufacturing defects within accepted industry standards for a period of one (1) year after the date of Substantial Completion.
CAST STONE MASONRY
047200 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
B.
At their option, manufacturer may patch and repair, or replace defective material at no additional cost.
C.
Patching, repairs and replacement of defective material shall be acceptable to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
MANUFACTURERS Cast stone shapes by Continental Cast Stone Manufacturing, Inc. form the basis-ofdesign. Products with comparable designs, materials, performance characteristics, textures and colors by the following manufacturers are also acceptable: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Architectural Cast Stone Corp. Architectural Cast Stone, Inc. Architectural Concrete Co., Inc. Edwards Precast Concrete Co. Dallas Cast Stone Co., Inc. Kerckhoff, D. C. Co.
B.
Shapes: Bases, watertable, lintels, sills and bands, refer to the Drawings for specific shapes.
C.
Materials: 1. 2. 3.
Cement: ASTM C 150, Portland, Type I or III, white and/or grey as required to attain indicated colors and textures. Coarse and Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, graded and washed natural gravel with gradation required to attain indicated textures and finishes. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 40 or 60. a. b.
4. 5.
Steel Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 82. Welded Wire Fabric: Comply with ASTM A 185 or ASTM A 497 where applicable. a.
6. 7. 8. 9.
Epoxy coated when embedment is less than 2" for #6 or larger bars, or 1½" for #5 or smaller bars. Galvanized where embedment is less than 2" for #5 bars or greater; 1½" for #4 bars or smaller.
Welded wire fabric reinforcing not permitted in dry cast products.
Steel Bar or Rod Mat Reinforcement: Comply with ASTM A 184 where applicable. Admixtures: Comply with ASTM C 494. Water: Potable, free of impurities. Air Entrainment: Comply with ASTM C 260, entrainment materials, and ASTM C 1364, cast stone applications.
CAST STONE MASONRY
047200 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE a. b. 10. 11.
Colors: To be determined. Texture: Fine-grained resembling Indiana limestone.
Mortar Mixes: Comply with requirements in Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for mortar mixes. 1.
Setting Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. a. b. c.
2.
3.
Provide Type S at load-bearing locations. Provide Type N at non-load bearing veneer locations. Limit cementitious materials to Portland cement and lime.
Jointing Mortar: a.
Pigmented Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Colors selected from manufacturer’s standard palette to match cast stone units.
Products by the following manufacturers are acceptable. a. b. c. d. e. f.
E.
Wet-cast Mixtures: Between 5-7 percent air entrainment where surfaces are exposed to freeze-thaw conditions. Dry-cast (zero slump mixes): Not required.
Color Pigments: ASTM C 979, inorganic natural or synthetic iron oxide pigments, lime-proof. Cement grade carbon black pigment not permitted. Colors and Textures: Selected from manufacturer's standard palette. a. b.
D.
01/13/12
Blue Circle Cement; Magnolia Masonry Cement. Essroc Materials, Inc.; Brixment-in-Color. Holcim (US) Inc.; Rainbow Mortamix Custom Color Masonry Cement. Lafarge Corp.; Centurion Colorbond. Riverton Corp.; Flamingo Color Masonry Cement. Cemex; Richcolor Masonry Cement.
Accessories 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Clips, Plates and Miscellaneous Anchors: ASTM Type 304 or 316 stainless steel for items in direct contact with cast stone, unless specifically indicated otherwise. Anchoring veneer to miscellaneous substrates: Stainless steel angles and splittail anchors. Anchors to concrete or concrete masonry backup: Bolts with expansion shields. Corners: Cramp anchors for anchoring stones together. Bolts: ASTM A 307, galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153. Other Fasteners: Stainless steel or steel galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 123. Setting Buttons, Shims and Sheet: Lead or resilient plastic, nonstaining, thickness to suit joint thickness. For pointed joints, sized to avoid interference with pointing operation.
CAST STONE MASONRY
047200 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE F.
Fabrication: Provide cast stone units complying with ASTM C 1364 and Cast Stone Institute recommended fabricating practices. 1. 2.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
2.2 A.
01/13/12
Design Mix: Mix to attain compressive strength of 6,500 psi at 28 days when tested in accordance with referenced requirements. Exterior Units: Provide units resistant to freezing and thawing as determined by laboratory testing according to ASTM C 666, Procedure A, as modified by ASTM C 1364. Slope exposed horizontal surfaces at least 1:12, unless otherwise indicated. Provide raised fillets at backs of sills and at ends indicated to be built into jambs. Provide drips on projecting elements, unless otherwise indicated. Cure units in totally enclosed curing room under dense fog and water spray at 95 percent relative humidity for 24 hours, or yard cure for 350 F degree-days. Acid etch units to remove cement film from surfaces to be finished to attain indicated textures.
ACCESSORIES Clips, Plates and Miscellaneous Anchors: ASTM Type 304 or 316 stainless steel for items in direct contact with cast stone, unless specifically indicated otherwise. 1. 2. 3.
Anchoring veneer to miscellaneous substrates: Stainless steel angles and splittail anchors. Anchors to concrete or concrete masonry backup: Bolts with expansion shields. Corners: Cramp anchors for anchoring stones together.
B.
Bolts: ASTM A 307, galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153.
C.
Sealants: Provided under Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants".
D.
Provide the following materials in compliance with Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry". 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Miscellaneous masonry accessories. Grout mixes. Embedded flashing materials. Ties and anchors. Reinforcing.
E.
Initial Cleaner: Water or mild cleaning compounds containing no caustic or abrasives.
F.
Final Cleaner and Sealer: Provided under Division 07 Section "Water Repellents". 1.
Textured-face wall units manufactured with integral water repellent additive. Field applied water repellent not required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
CAST STONE INSTALLATION
CAST STONE MASONRY
047200 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
A.
Prior to installation, examine surfaces to receive cast stone work and conditions under which materials will be installed. Proceed with installation after surfaces and conditions have been corrected and meet requirements for acceptable installation.
B.
Clean stone surfaces prior to setting, using only water or mild cleaning compounds containing no caustic or abrasives.
C.
Drench all stone units thoroughly with water just before setting.
D.
Set units in full bed of mortar with full head joints, unless otherwise indicated. Build anchors and ties into mortar joints as units are set. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
7.
8. E.
Rake out joints to depths of not less than 3/4". Rake joints to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides. Scrub faces of units to remove excess mortar as joints are raked. 1. 2.
F.
Install backer rod and sealant to form uniform concave joint. Remove excess sealant immediately. Tool exposed joints slightly concave.
Provide expansion, control and pressure-relieving joints of widths and at locations indicated. 1. 2.
G.
Fill dowel holes and anchor slots with mortar. Fill collar joint solid as units are set. Build concealed flashing into mortar joints as units are set. Leave head joints open in coping and other units with exposed horizontal surfaces. Keep joints clear of mortar and rake out to receive sealant. Where an open cavity is indicated between cast stone and backup material, keep cavity free of mortar and grout. Install anchors, supports, fasteners and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure stonework in place. Attach anchors securely to stone and to supporting surfaces. Place anchors and dowels firmly and fill holes with mortar or non-shrink grout. Set cast stone accurately, in patterns and locations indicated, with uniform joint dimensions, and with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances. Shim and adjust anchors, supports and accessories. Set stones supported on solid structural members on setting buttons, shims or sheets, or a combination of setting buttons and mortar.
Sealing joints is specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." Keep joints free of mortar and other rigid materials.
Installation Tolerances: 1. 2. 3.
Variation from Plumb: Do not exceed 1/8" in 10 feet or ¼" in 20 feet or more. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8" in 10 feet, ¼" in 20 feet, or 3/8" maximum. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/8" in 36" or onefourth of nominal joint width, whichever is less.
CAST STONE MASONRY
047200 - 6
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 4.
3.2 A.
01/13/12
Variation in Plane Between Adjacent Surfaces (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/16" difference between planes of adjacent units or adjacent surfaces indicated to be flush with units.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING In-Progress Cleaning: Clean cast stone as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. 1. 2.
After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. Use no wire brushes, acid-type cleaning agents, cleaning compounds with caustic or harsh fillers, or other materials or methods that could damage, discolor or etch surfaces or joints.
B.
Inspections: Verify that on-going and completed cast stone work meets specified tolerance and appearance requirements. Remove and replace work that is broken, chipped, stained or otherwise damaged; work that does not match approved samples or approved mock-up; and work containing defective joints.
C.
Remove and replace stained and otherwise damaged units and units not matching approved Samples. Cast stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by the Owner. 1.
D.
Replace units in a manner that results in cast stone matching approved Samples, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.
Final cleaning and sealing for shapes and decorative elements provided under Division 07 Section "Water Repellents".
END OF SECTION 047200
CAST STONE MASONRY
047200 - 7
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 047300 - MANUFACTURED STONE MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
1.2 A.
SUBMITTALS Data and Reports: 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
Product Data: For stone units and accessories. Include dimensions of individual components. Qualification Data: For stone manufacturer. Include lists of completed projects with names and addresses of architects and owners. Material test reports. Certificates: Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.
Samples: 1. 2. 3.
1.3
Manufactured stone masonry for exterior walls. Mortar. Installation accessories. Temporary installation protection.
For each color and texture of stone required. For each color of mortar required. Sample warranty.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing simulated stone units similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to manufacture required units.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Minimum of five (5) years successful experience in handling and installing simulated stone units on projects of comparable size and scope.
C.
Materials: Zero flame spread and smoke developed rating when tested by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., UL 723.
D.
Installation Weather Conditions: Follow masonry construction recommendations of the International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council.
MANUFACTURED STONE MASONRY
047300 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE E.
Mockups: Build samples into masonry sample panels provided under Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry", or provide separate sample panels for each type of exposed simulated stone assembly to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. 1. 2. 3.
Provide materials in sizes required by sample panel construction. Size: 4' wide x 6' high (minimum). Build panel using selected materials, mortar, bond pattern, joint tooling, cleaning and sealing requirements. a. b.
4. 5. 6. 7. 1.4
01/13/12
Show full range of color, texture and workmanship proposed for the work. Include accessories, mounting devices and flashings.
Remove and rebuild unacceptable work as required to achieve an acceptable panel. The approved sample panel may not form a portion of the work. Make panels available to other trades for their use. Maintain approved panels without alteration, for the duration of the project.
WARRANTY
A.
Provide simulated stone manufacturer's standard written warranty stating products to be free from manufacturing defects within accepted industry standards for a period of fifty (50) years after the date of Substantial Completion.
B.
At their option, manufacturer may patch and repair, or replace defective material at no additional cost.
C.
Patching, repairs and replacement of defective material shall be acceptable to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
MANUFACTURERS Manufactured stone masonry by Dutch Quality Stone forms the basis-of-design. Products with comparable designs, materials, performance characteristics, textures and colors by the following manufacturers are also acceptable: 1. 2.
2.2 A.
Cultured Stone. Eldorado Stone.
MANUFACTURED STONE UNITS Shapes, Patterns and Joints: 1.
Shapes: "Great Lakes Limestone", random shaped, roughly rectangular.
MANUFACTURED STONE MASONRY
047300 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE a. b. 2. 3. 4. 2.3
01/13/12
Units less than 4" high to form less than 10% of any 100 square foot wall area. Delete units designed to project beyond the face of adjacent units, or back butter thinner units to roughly align with thicker units.
Corners: Prefabricated, one-piece, 90 degree units. Pattern: Coursed random ashlar. Joints: Buttered.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Anchors: Hot-dip galvanized steel.
B.
Metal Lath: 2.5 lb. flat diamond or rib mesh, galvanized on exterior applications and rust-inhibitive on interior.
C.
Fasteners: Galvanized nails or staples of proper length to penetrate framing 1" minimum.
D.
Stone Cleaner and Sealer: Provided under Division 07 Section "Water Repellents".
E.
Secondary Moisture Barrier: Provided under Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry".
F.
Temporary Installation Protection: Corner boards and tarps.
2.4
MORTAR MIXES
A.
Comply with requirements in Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for mortar mixes. Antifreeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar not permitted.
B.
Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, Type N. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Limit cementitious materials to Portland cement and lime. Portland cement, ASTM C150, Type I or masonry cement, ASTM C91. Masonry sand. Lime: ASTM C207. Color Additive: Iron oxide pigments.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Prior to installation, inspect surfaces to receive stone materials. Verify asphalt felts are properly installed and in tact. Verify the location and size of penetrations. Proceed after discrepancies are corrected.
B.
Surface Preparation:
MANUFACTURED STONE MASONRY
047300 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1.
2.
01/13/12
New Sheathed Surfaces: Install one (1) layer of weather resistant barrier with lap joints 4" shingle fashion. Apply code approved metal lath, attach with galvanized nails or staples which penetrate a minimum of 1". Apply 6" on center vertically and 16" on center horizontally. New Concrete and Masonry Surfaces, Clean and Untreated: Examine newly poured concrete closely to ensure that its finished surface contains no releasing agents (form oil). If found, remove using one or more of the following methods: a. b.
Etch surface with muriatic acid, rinse thoroughly and/or score with a wire brush. Use high pressure water or sandblasting.
C.
Install metal lath with galvanized fasteners at 16" o.c. horizontally, and 6" o.c. vertically. Stop lath 1" from finished edges. Wrap metal lath a minimum of 16" around outside and inside corners.
D.
Spread out stone units to provide a variety of sizes, shapes and colors from which to select. Plan for variety and contrast in the overall installation.
E.
Install stone work in selected pattern, joint style and color range. Set units in full bed of mortar. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
9.
Apply ½" to 3/4" setting mortar to metal lath and press each stone into setting bed firmly enough to squeeze some mortar out around each edge. Install corner pieces with long and short legs alternating on each course. Maintain consistent joint lines. Vary pattern, texture and color of installed units. Lay rectangular units with long dimensions horizontal. Do not install units less than 4" high over an area that exceeds 10% of any 100 square foot wall area. Do not install units designed to project beyond the face of adjacent units. Back butter thinner units to roughly align with thicker units. Cutting: Perform necessary cutting with proper tools to provide uniform edges; take care to prevent breaking unit corners or edges. Grout mortar joints full and tool to provide selected joint. Avoid excess mortar on stone surface. Remove only after it has become crumbly, using a dry bristle brush. Do not use a wet or wire brush. Remove loose mortar with dry bristle brushes on a daily basis. Do not allow mortar to set up on face of units.
F.
Provide and maintain corner boards and tarps as required to protect installation materials from weather and construction damage.
G.
Final cleaning and application of water repellent coating provided under Division 07 Section "Water Repellents".
END OF SECTION 047300
MANUFACTURED STONE MASONRY
047300 - 4
05
METALS
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 1.01
1.02
GENERAL
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: All labor and materials required to furnish and install the structural steel shown on the Drawings and required by these Specifications, including that shown on mechanical or electrical Drawings, or required in their Specification Sections.
B.
The Engineer has designed a project which will be safe after full completion. The Engineer has no expertise in, and takes no responsibility for, construction means and methods or job site safety during construction, which are exclusively the Contractor's responsibility. Processing and/or approving submittals made by the Contractor which may contain information related to construction methods or safety issues, or participation in meetings where such issues might be discussed, shall not be construed as voluntary assumption by the Engineer of any responsibility for safety procedures.
C.
Related Sections: Carefully examine all other Sections and all Drawings for related work, which includes but is not limited to: 1. Section 03 30 00, "Cast-in-Place Concrete" 2. Section 05 30 00, "Metal Decking" 3. Section 05 30 00, "Shear Connectors for Composite Beams" 4. Division 7, "Sprayed Fireproofing" 5. Division 9, "Finish Painting"
D.
Work Furnished but Installed Under Other Sections: Anchor bolts, loose bearing and base plates, and loose lintels.
E.
Work Affected by Others: Framing, loads, openings, and structure in any way related to plumbing, HVAC, or electrical requirements is shown for bidding purposes only. Responsibility for coordinating the work of this Section with these requirements is solely that of the Contractor. Contractor's review of shop Drawings will be taken to indicate that this coordination has been accomplished.
F.
Inspection and testing required by this Section to be at the Contractor's expense.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Reference Standards: 1. By the American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): a. Specification for Structural Steel Buildings (March 9, 2005). b. Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 bolts (June 30, 2004). c. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges (March 18, 2005). 2. By the American Welding Society (AWS): a. Structural Welding Code – Steel AWS D1.1/D1.1M:2008, Paragraph 6.6.5 specifically excluded. b. Symbols for Welding and Non-Destructive Testing AWS A2.4:2007.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05 12 00 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
1.03
1.04
01-13-2012
B.
Fabricator's Qualifications: 1. Minimum five (5) years' continuous experience in the fabrication of steel for projects of similar quality and scope. 2. Certification Standard for Steel Building Structures (STD) in accordance with the American Institute of Steel Construction.
C.
Erector's Qualifications: Minimum five (5) years' continuous experience in similar steel erection.
D.
Welders' Qualifications: Personnel and procedures are to be qualified in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M:2008.
E.
Inspection Agency's Qualifications: Minimum three (3) years' experience in similar steel inspection, and approval of the Architect.
SUBMITTALS A.
Certification of Experience: Submit, on request only, written summary of personnel, projects, and equipment which document the experience and qualifications required of the fabricator, inspection agency, erector, and welders.
B.
Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate all shop and erection details, including cuts, copes, connections, holes, threaded fasteners, and welds. Include layout plan of all items to be embedded into concrete. 2. Indicate material specifications and finishes. 3. Indicate shop and field welds with symbols per AWS A2.4:2007. 4. Notwithstanding any other requirements specified elsewhere in these Specifications, three (3) sets of prints and one (1) set of reproducible shop Drawings shall be submitted for approval. The reproducible set will be returned to the Contractor, who will make and distribute as many copies as needed. Only prints with the approval stamp printed on them shall be permitted on the site.
C.
Proof of Compliance for Materials: Submit the following upon request only: 1. Mill reports for properly identified material for: a. Structural steel shapes. b. High strength threaded fasteners.
D.
Inspection Reports: Submit reports for the inspection specified.
PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE A.
Delivery: 1. Comply with A6/A6M-08a. Non-compliance will be cause for rejection. 2. Deliver anchor bolts and other items to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete or masonry prior to the start of that work. Provide setting drawings, templates, or instructions required for the installation of such items.
B.
Storage: 1. Store steel at site above ground on platforms, skids or other supports. 2. Protect steel from damage.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05 12 00 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING PART 2 2.01
01-13-2012
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS A.
Structural Steel Wide Flange Shapes: 1. Fy=50 ksi Steel: ASTM A572/A572M-07 or ASTM A992/A992M-06a.
B.
Structural Steel Channels, Angles, Plates, Bars, Etc.: 1. Fy=36 ksi Steel: ASTM A36/A36M-08.
C.
Structural Steel Tubing: 1. Fy=35 ksi Round Tubing: ASTM A501-07, or ASTM A53/A53M-07, Grade B. 2. Fy=46 ksi Square and Rectangular Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M-07, Grade B.
D.
Anchor Bolts, Standard Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A307-07b, or ASTM A36/A36M-08. Provide washers and heavy nuts for anchor bolts (both ends).
E.
High Strength Threaded Fasteners: 1. Bolts: ASTM A325-07a, A325M-08, A490-08a or A490M-04ae1. All bolts are to be cold-forged with rolled threads. 2. Nuts: ASTM A194/A194M-08b, Type 2 or 2H, or ASTM A563-07a or A563M-07, Type C, C3, D, DH, D3 or DH3. No other nuts are acceptable; nuts must show manufacturer's name and the 2H symbol. 3. Washers: ASTM F436-07a or F436M-04.
F.
Welding Electrodes: 1. For Carbon Steels: Conform to requirements of AWS D1.1/D1.1M:2008, using Series E70 electrodes, appropriate for the materials being welded.
G.
Shop Paint Primer: 1. For bare steel, use modified alkyd or alkyd-oil primers, equal in quality to 10-99 Tnemec Primer, 10-99W Tnemec Primer, or 4-55 Versare Primer by Tnemec Company, Inc. 2. For galvanized steel to be painted, use epoxy primer, equal in quality to Series 27 F.C. Typoxy by Tnemec Company, Inc. 3. Primer to be compatible with finish paint.
H.
Grating: All steel, 1 1/2 inches deep, with 3/16 inch bearing bars. May be welded, pressure-locked or riveted. The following are acceptable: 1. Types GW or GAA by McNichols. 2. Type W/B or B by Borden Metal Products Company 3. Type WB or Type BS by IKG Industries. Attachment may be by tack welding or saddle clips.
I.
Headed Studs: ASTM A108-07, Grades 1010 through 1020, inclusive, either semi-killed or killed deoxidization.
J.
Masonry Anchors: 11 gauge channel slots or 3/16 inch diameter wires, shop welded to structural steel.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05 12 00 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING K.
2.02
01-13-2012
Deformed Bar Anchors: Flux-filled deformed bar anchors to be welded to structural steel. Material shall conform to ASTM A496/A496M-07; Acceptable products include Nelson D2L by Nelson Stud Welding.
FABRICATION A.
Conform to applicable provisions of the reference standards listed in Part 1 of this Section, as modified herein.
B.
Connection Design: 1. Select connections per AISC standards for the full uniform load capacity of the member and for composite beams select connection for 1.5 x full uniform load capacity of the steel member. 2. Connections of beams framing into a girder from one side only, such as at spandrel girders, shall be made with double angle connections. Unless indicated otherwise, all other connections may be double angle connections or single plate shear connections. 3. Connection details on the Drawings are to illustrate location, type, and general arrangement only, and to establish minimum requirements. 4. Shop connections may be welded or bolted, unless shown otherwise. 5. Field connections shall be bolted, unless shown otherwise. 6. Standard bolts and nuts are permitted only for connections of secondary members, unless noted otherwise. High strength threaded fasteners are required for all other bolted connections.
C.
Sweep: Fabricate exterior spandrel beams with natural sweep toward the interior of the building.
D.
Finishing: Ends of members in direct contact bearing, such as columns at their bases and splices, are to be "finished," as defined in the Code of Standard Practice.
E.
Bearing and Base Plates: Column base plates are to be shop attached. Beam bearing plates may be attached or loose.
F.
Holes: Drill or punch holes in members as required for passage of conduit and piping, and attachment of joists, nailers, etc. Burning such holes is not permitted. If opening is not shown on structural Drawings, obtain prior approval.
G.
Cleaning: 1. Remove oil, dirt, loose mill scale, or other material which would impair welding, performance of slip critical connections, or adherence of concrete or sprayed fireproofing. 2. For steel that is to be painted, cleaning techniques are to be as required by the appropriate SSPC paint Specification listed below.
H.
Shop Painting: 1. Shop-paint steel exposed to view in the finished structure, except that to be galvanized, with primer as follows: a. Prepare surface by commercial blast cleaning (SSPC - SP6) and apply one (1) coat of primer. b. Minimum dry film thickness shall be 2.0 mils. The primer shall be applied in a manner to assure no runs or sags in the coating and an overall uniform application.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05 12 00 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
c. Do not paint surfaces to be encased in concrete or to receive sprayed fireproofing, or contact surfaces in slip-critical connections, or surfaces to be field welded, or top surfaces of crane rails. 2. Steel not exposed to view in the finished structure need not be painted, except columns and portions of beams other than lintels embedded in or built within exterior walls, which shall be painted with two (2) coats of primer per the requirements in #1 above, for a total dry film thickness of 4.0 mils. 3. Paint all lintels in interior walls with one (1) coat of primer per the requirements in #1 above. 4. See the Architectural Drawings and Section 09 90 00 for galvanized steel items to be painted. Prepare the galvanized surface of galvanized steel that is to be painted by solvent cleaning (SSPC-SP1) or by high-pressure detergent cleaning to remove soluble contaminants. Use SSPC-SP2 Hand Tool Cleaning or SSPC-SP3 Power Tool Cleaning to remove insoluble contaminants such as white rust, if present. Complete the cleaning process with SSPC-SP7 Brush Off Blast Cleaning, using the proper abrasive and care to prevent removal of the galvanizing. Prime paint with primer to be used for galvanized steel. I.
PART 3 3.01
3.02
Galvanizing: 1. Galvanizing is to conform to ASTM A123/A123M-08, Grade 100, or ASTM A153/A153M-05, Class C. Follow all recommendations of the American Galvanizers Association. 2. Except for bolts, nuts, washers, and anchors, perform all galvanizing after fabrication. 3. Prior to galvanizing, clean steel of foreign substances per ASTM A385-08. 4. Do not treat galvanized finish with a stain-inhibiting chromate treatment. 5. After final erection, touch-up all abrasions with a cold galvanizing compound, Z.R.C. Cold Galvanizing Compound or Z.R.C Galuilite Galvanizing Repair by Z.R.C Worldwide, or equal. 6. Galvanize all shelf angles, lintels in exterior walls, all exterior steel exposed to the elements, and all items indicated on the Drawings as "galvanized."
EXECUTION
SURFACE CONDITIONS A.
Prior to beginning work of this Section, verify that the installed work of other trades is complete and correct to the extent necessary for the proper execution of the work of this Section. This includes locations of anchor bolts, and lines and grades of bearing areas.
B.
In the event of discrepancies, immediately notify the Architect. Do not proceed with work affected by the discrepancies until they have been resolved.
ERECTION A.
Conform to the applicable provisions of the reference standards listed in Part 1 of this Section, as modified herein.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05 12 00 - 5
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
3.03
01-13-2012
B.
This structure is designed to be self-supporting and stable after the building is fully completed. It is solely the Contractor's responsibility to determine erection procedures and sequence, and to ensure the stability of the building and its component parts, and the adequacy of temporary or incomplete connections, during erection. This includes the addition of any shoring, sheeting, temporary guys, bracing or tie-downs that might be necessary. Such material is not shown on the Drawings. If applied, they shall be removed as conditions permit, and shall remain the Contractor's property.
C.
Safety: It is solely the Contractor's responsibility to follow all applicable safety codes and regulations governing this work.
D.
Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces in permanent contact, prior to assembly.
E.
Splices are permitted only where indicated.
F.
Field corrections of fabrication errors by gas cutting is not permitted in structural members without prior approval of the Architect.
G.
The use of leveling plates or leveling nuts at column bases is prohibited. Grout below column base plates is to be installed only after the steel is plumbed.
H.
Touch-up Painting: After erection, touch-up field connections and abrasions in the shop coat with same paint used for shop coat. Do not paint welds until they have been cleaned in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M:2008.
I.
Remove galvanizing prior to welding. Touch-up with ZRC cold galvanizing compound by ZRC Products Company.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Inspection agency shall perform the following: 1. Review qualifications of welders, operators, and welding procedures submitted by the Contractor. 2. Review materials' proofs of compliance. Identify markings of structural steel shapes to conform to ASTM standards specified. Review structural steel shapes certificates of compliance. 3. Inspect bolted connections, per the requirements of the AISC Specification for Structural Joints. Periodically identify markings of bolts to conform to ASTM standards specified. Periodically inspect bearing type bolts. Continuously inspect slipcritical connections. Review bolt manufacturer’s certificates of compliance. 4. Inspect welded connections per the requirements of AWS D1.1/D1.1M:2008, Chapter 6. Identify markings of weld filler materials to conform to AWS specifications specified. Review weld filler materials certificates of compliance. Continuously inspect and test complete and partial penetration groove welds by other than visual methods. Continuously inspect and test multipass fillet welds using other than visual methods. Periodically inspect and test single pass fillet welds by visual methods. 5. Inspect installation of stud welding, per the requirements of AWS D1.1/D1.1M:2008, Articles 7.7 and 7.8. 6. Periodically inspect bracing and stiffening details of the steel frame for compliance with the construction documents. 7. Periodically inspect member locations of the steel frame.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05 12 00 - 6
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
8. Inspect the application of joint details at each connection for compliance with the construction documents. B. 3.04
Inspection agency shall be directly responsible to the Architect.
ADDITIONAL TESTING A.
The Owner reserves the right to perform non-destructive testing other than visual on any shop or field weld. The Owner shall be responsible for all associated costs including handling, surface preparation and non-destructive testing if welds are found to be acceptable, per AWS D1.1, Section 6, Part C. If the welds are not found to be acceptable the Contractor shall be responsible for the repair of discontinuities and all associated costs including those listed above. END OF SECTION
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05 12 00 - 7
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
05 30 00 METAL DECKING
PART 1 1.01
1.02
GENERAL
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: All labor and materials required to furnish and install metal decking and accessories including shear connectors, closures, hanger devices, edge filler plates, pour stops, and end closure angles, where shown on the Drawings and/or required for a complete installation.
B.
The Engineer has designed a project which will be safe after full completion. The Engineer has no expertise in, and takes no responsibility for, construction means and methods or job site safety during construction, which are exclusively the Contractor's responsibility. Processing and/or approving submittals made by the Contractor which may contain information related to construction methods or safety issues, or participation in meetings where such issues might be discussed, shall not be construed as voluntary assumption by the Engineer of any responsibility for safety procedures.
C.
Related Sections: Carefully examine all other Sections and all Drawings for related work, which includes but is not limited to: 1. Section 03 30 00, "Cast-In-Place Concrete" 2. Section 05 12 00, "Structural Steel" 3. Division 7, "Sprayed Fireproofing" 4. Division 9, "Finish Painting"
D.
Inspection Agency shall be the same agency retained under Section 05 12 00, "Structural Steel."
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Reference Standards: 1. North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members, 2007 Edition, by the American Iron and Steel Institute. 2. Design Manual No. 31 for Composite Decks, Form Decks and Roof Decks, November 2007, by the Steel Deck Institute. 3. Diaphragm Design Manual, Third Edition (DDM03) September 2004, by the Steel Deck Institute.
B.
Manufacturer's Qualifications: Regularly engaged in the manufacture of similar decking.
C.
Erector's Qualifications: Minimum five (5) years' experience in installation of similar decking.
D.
Welder's Qualifications: Personnel and procedures are to be qualified per the requirements of the American Welding Society, as given in AWS D1.3/D1.3M-2008.
METAL DECKING
05 30 00 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 1.03
1.04
SUBMITTALS A.
Certification of Experience: Submit, on request only, written summary of personnel, projects, and equipment which document the experience and qualifications required of the manufacturer, erector, and welders.
B.
Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate mark, number, type, finish, and location of all deck units. 2. Indicate method of connection to supporting members. Provide literature from the fastener and/or deck manufacturers verifying compliance with the minimum required diaphragm shear strengths and stiffnesses. 3. Indicate details and installation instructions for all accessories. 4. Indicate sequence of installation, where critical. 5. Notwithstanding any other requirements specified elsewhere in these Specifications, three (3) sets of prints and one (1) set of reproducible shop drawings shall be submitted for approval. The reproducible set will be returned to the Contractor, who will make and distribute as many copies as needed. Only prints with the approval stamp printed on them shall be permitted on the site.
C.
Manufacturer's Certification: 1. Certify compliance with structural criteria. Published load tables and literature are usually acceptable. Provide design calculations on request only. 2. Certify compliance with finish criteria, with test reports as required. 3. Furnish evidence of listing by Underwriters' Laboratory for the specified fire resistance rating. 4. Submit, on request only, mill test reports and certificates of compliance for shear connectors. 5. Submit the manufacturer's certification of compliance with SDI Design Manual and AISI Specification.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Prevent damage to deck or finish during handling and storage.
B.
Store on blocking or platforms, off the ground, with one end elevated for drainage.
C.
Protect from rusting with waterproof covering, or storage under roof.
PART 2 2.01
01-13-2012
PRODUCTS
DESIGN CRITERIA A.
Metal Centering (in floor construction): 1. Type: 9/16 inch deep, 28 gauge minimum, corrugated. 2. Finish: Galvanized. 3. Acceptable products include, but are not limited to: a. Type .6C28 by Vulcraft Division of Nucor Corporation. b. Tensilform 50 by Wheeling Corrugating Company. c. S-Dek by Consolidated Systems, Inc. d. 0.6 inch Form Deck by Cordeck Building Solutions.
METAL DECKING
05 30 00 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
B.
Composite Floor Deck: 1. Type: 3 inches deep, 20 gauge minimum. 2. Finish: Galvanized. 3. Fire Resistance: Deck units must bear the Underwriters' Laboratory Classification for a Design No. having a restrained assembly rating of one (1) hour, with the concrete strength and thickness shown on the Drawings. 4. Structural Criteria: a. Bare deck is to support wet load of concrete (including excess due to deflection of deck and beams) plus 20 psf. Maximum deflection under this load is not to exceed L/180. Increase gage of deck where this would be exceeded. b. Composite slab is to support the live load shown on the Drawings, plus a superimposed dead load of 15 psf. Maximum deflection under this load is not to exceed L/360. Increase gage of deck where this would be exceeded. 5. Acceptable products include, but are not limited to: a. QL-99 by H.H. Robertson Company. b. 3.0 SB by Wheeling Corrugating Company. c. CFD-3 by Consolidated Systems, Inc. d. 3 VLI by Vulcraft. e. 3 inch Composite Floor Deck by Cordeck Building Solutions. 6. Other: Number of headed stud shear connectors shown on the Drawings is based on the capacity available using deck with a 6 inch average rib width 12 inches on center. All manufacturers not meeting this criteria must adjust the number of studs as required to provide an equivalent capacity. All costs for additional studs, and their design, are to be borne by the Contractor.
C.
Composite Floor Deck: 1. Type: 2 inches deep, 20 gauge minimum. 2. Finish: Galvanized. 3. Fire Resistance: Deck units must bear the Underwriters' Laboratory Classification for a Design No. having a restrained assembly rating of one (1) hour, with the concrete strength and thickness shown on the Drawings. 4. Structural Criteria: a. Bare deck is to support wet load of concrete (including excess due to deflection of deck and beams) plus 20 psf. Maximum deflection under this load is not to exceed L/180. Increase gage of deck where this would be exceeded. b. Composite slab is to support the live load shown on the Drawings, plus a superimposed dead load of 15 psf. Maximum deflection under this load is not to exceed L/360. Increase gage of deck where this would be exceeded. 5. Acceptable products include, but are not limited to: a. QL-66 by H.H. Robertson Company. b. 2.0 SB by Wheeling Corrugating Company. c. CFD-2 by Consolidated Systems, Inc. d. 2 VLI by Vulcraft. e. 2 inch Composite Floor Deck by Cordeck Building Solutions. 6. Other: Number of headed stud shear connectors shown on the Drawings is based on the capacity available using deck with a 6 inch average rib width 12 inches on center. All manufacturers not meeting this criteria must adjust the number of studs as required to provide an equivalent capacity. All costs for additional studs, and their design, are to be borne by the Contractor.
METAL DECKING
05 30 00 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING D.
2.02
01-13-2012
1 1/2 Inch Composite Floor Deck: 1. Type: 1 1/2 inches deep, 20 gauge minimum. 2. Structural Criteria: a. Bare deck is to support wet load of concrete (including excess due to deflection of deck and beams) plus 20 psf. Maximum deflection under this load is not to exceed L/180. Increase gage of deck where this would be exceeded. b. Composite slab is to support the live load shown on the Drawings, plus a superimposed dead load of 15 psf. Maximum deflection under this load is not to exceed L/360. Increase gage of deck where this would be exceeded. 3. Acceptable products include, but are not limited to: a. EC150 by Epic Metals Corporation. b. 1.5 SB by Wheeling Corrugating Company. c. CFD-1.5 by Consolidated Systems, Inc. d. 1.5 VLI by Vulcraft. e. 1.5 inch Composite Floor Deck by Cordeck Building Solutions. 4. Other: Number of headed stud shear connectors shown on the Drawings is based on the capacity available using deck with a 2 1/4-inch average rib width 6 inches on center. All manufacturers not meeting these criteria must adjust the number of studs as required to provide an equivalent capacity. All costs for additional studs, and their design, are to be borne by the Contractor.
MATERIALS AND FINISHES A.
Materials: Steel sheet conforming to ASTM A653/A653M-08 or A1008/A1008M-08a.
B.
Finishes: 1. Galvanized: Conform to ASTM A653/A653M-08, G60.
C.
Accessories: Same material and finish as deck units, except that interior closures may be of compressible material.
D.
Hangers: Provide a system of hangers with composite floor deck, as follows: 1. Hangers may consist of sidelap lip hangers, integral tabs, dovetail slots and hangers, slots and pigtail wires, or other devices. 2. Allowable working load to be 100 lbs. per hanger, minimum. 3. Maximum spacing is to be 24 inches in either direction.
E.
Field Touch-Up Paint: 1. For galvanized deck, use zinc chromate paint.
F.
Shear Connectors: Headed studs conforming to ASTM A108-07, Grades 1010 through 1020, inclusive, either semi-killed or killed deoxidation.
G.
Welding Electrodes: Conform to requirements of AWS D1.3/D1.3M-2008 using Series E60 electrodes, appropriate for the materials being welded, with welding washers as required.
METAL DECKING
05 30 00 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
2.03
H.
Driven Fasteners: Manufactured from AISI 1061, 1062 or 1065 steel austempered to a minimum core hardness of 50-56 RC, and zinc-plated in accordance with ASTM B633-07 or ASTM B695-04 to a minimum thickness of 0.0002 inches. Acceptable manufacturers include, but are not limited to: 1. Hilti Fastening Systems 2. ITW Buildex 3. Pneutek, Inc.
I.
Self-drilling Fasteners: Heat-treated and zinc-plated with fluted drill point. Acceptable products include, but are not limited to: 1. Traxx screws by ITW Buildex. 2. Kwik-Pro by Hilti Fastening Systems.
FABRICATION A.
Units are to be continuous over at least three (3) spans, where possible. Where units are single or double span, use heavier gage if required for stress or deflection control. End laps (2 inches minimum) are to occur over supports. (End laps not required for composite floor deck.)
B.
Units are to have nested side laps.
PART 3 3.01
3.02
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
SURFACE CONDITIONS A.
Prior to beginning work of this Section, verify that the installed work of other trades is complete and correct to the extent necessary for the proper execution of the work of this Section.
B.
In the event of discrepancies, immediately notify the Architect. Do not proceed with work affected by the discrepancies until they have been resolved.
ERECTION A.
Install decking in accordance with approved placing Drawings.
B.
Tolerance: Align adjacent units within 1/4 inch in 40 feet.
C.
Connection to Supporting Members: Connect to supports from top side only. Welds which burn holes in decking or supporting members will be rejected. Erector shall select the method of connecting the deck to the supports, including the connector type and spacing, and also the method of sidelap fastening, including the connector type and spacing, to provide the following minimum diaphragm shear strengths and stiffnesses, in accordance with the SDI Diaphragm Design Manual: Deck Type Composite floor deck (including concrete fill)
METAL DECKING
Shear Strength (plf) 1600
Stiffness (k/in) 2400 05 30 00 - 5
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
Submit for approval the proposed method of connecting the deck and information verifying compliance with the above requirements. Additional minimum requirements for connections are as follows: 1. Composite Floor Deck: Connections may include thru-welded shear connectors. Connections shall occur at all ribs (12 inch spacing). 3. Metal Centering: Use the manufacturer's standard welding washers for welded connections. Connections shall occur at 10 inch spacing. 4. Miscellaneous: Connection spacing shall be the same for all supports (both interior and end lap supports). D.
Shear Connectors: 1. Space studs equally along beam length, to the extent possible (unless other distribution is noted on the Drawings). 2. Where number of studs on a beam exceeds the number of available ribs in the deck, the ribs with multiple studs are to be those nearest the ends of the beam. 3. Where a rib contains one stud, locate the stud directly over the beam web; where it contains more than one stud, arrange them symmetrically about the beam web. Maintain minimum center-to-center spacing of 4 1/2 inches along length of beam, and 3 inches transverse to beam.
E.
Sidelap Fastening: Spacing shall not exceed 3 feet. Decrease spacing if required for UL fire resistance design. Button punching is not permitted.
F.
Closures: Install in deck flutes over supports or other construction at building perimeter and at perimeters of interior rooms. Set in a true even line, flush with construction below, eliminating any shelf or pocket. Closures are to be accurately shaped and installed, to provide a tight fit.
G.
Openings: Field cut small openings, bevels, miters, etc., as required. Provide reinforcing for openings which interrupt ribs.
H.
Hanging Loads: Do not hang items from the underside of metal centering, unless specifically approved by the Architect. Hang items from concrete floors formed with composite floor deck no sooner than seven (7) days after concrete is placed.
I.
Construction Loads: Do not use deck as storage or working platform until it has been permanently attached to supports. Assure that construction loads do not exceed the carrying capacity of the deck.
J.
Repair and Touch-Up: 1. Where deck will be exposed to view, remove and replace any units with damage or defects which cannot be concealed by painting. 2. Where deck will not be exposed to view, repair any cuts and holes with plate of same gage as deck. 3. Touch up all damaged areas of finish, on both top and bottom sides of deck.
METAL DECKING
05 30 00 - 6
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 3.03
01-13-2012
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Inspection shall include visual examination of deck and its attachment to the supporting structure, including quantity of connectors and/or fusion welds and the quality of the connections to the supporting structure.
B.
Inspect installation of welded stud shear connectors for composite beams per the requirements of AWS D1.1/D1.1M:2008, Articles 7.7 and 7.8. END OF SECTION
METAL DECKING
05 30 00 - 7
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 1.01
1.02
1.03
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: All labor and materials required to furnish and install light gauge steel studs and tracks (in all exterior walls and soffits), bridging and related accessories, where shown on the Drawings and/or required for a complete installation.
B.
Related Sections: Carefully examine all other Sections and all Drawings for related work, which includes but is not limited to: 1. Division 04, Masonry Anchors 2. Division 07, Insulating Sheathing 3. Division 09, Gypsum Drywall 4. Division 09, Other Light Gage Framing
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Reference Standards: 1. North American specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members, 2007 Edition, by the American Iron and Steel Institute. 2. Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel (AWS D1.3/D1.3M-2008) by the American Welding Society.
B.
Welders' Qualifications: Personnel and procedures are to be qualified, per the requirements of the American Welding Society, for the type of welding being performed.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A.
1.04
GENERAL
Manufacturer to confirm size and gage of materials suitable for application shown and loaded as follows: 1. Dead Load, vertical: Attached materials. 2. Lateral Load, horizontal load perpendicular to wall in either direction. a. Interior Partitions: 5 psf. b. Exterior Walls: 30 psf. 3. Deflection: a. At exterior brick veneer applications: Not to exceed L/600. b. At interior and exterior applications with non-rigid facing: Not to exceed L/360. 4. All exterior studs which act as backup for brick veneer shall be 16 gauge (minimum).
SUBMITTALS A.
Shop Drawings: Show detail, length and location of all light gage materials, including any subassemblies to be shop fabricated. Show all welds whether shop or field and indicate all connections to steel frame, concrete and masonry portions of the work. 1. Show schematic framing elevations indicating stud spacing, stud gage, double or multiple studs, slip joints, bracing and bridging. 2. Indicate number and size of fasteners and/or size and length of weld.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
05 40 00 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
3. Include color code identification for gage of members. 4. For prefabricated framing (if any), show individual panel drawings for each condition including configuration, dimensions, materials, attachments and panel locations. 5. Notwithstanding any other requirements specified elsewhere in these Specifications, three (3) sets of prints and one (1) set of reproducible shop drawings shall be submitted for approval. The reproducible set will be returned to the Contractor, who will make and distribute as many copies as needed. Only prints with the approval stamp printed on them shall be permitted on the site.
1.05
B.
Manufacturer's Certification: 1. Certify compliance with structural criteria. Published load tables and literature are usually acceptable. Provide design calculations on request only.
C.
Mill Certificates: Submit upon request only.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Prevent damage to material or finish during handling and storage.
B.
Store on blocking or platforms, off the ground.
C.
Protect from rusting with waterproof covering, or storage under roof.
PART 2 2.01
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A.
2.02
PRODUCTS
Provide materials manufactured by one of the following: 1. Clark/Western 2. Marino-Ware 3. Dietrich Industries, Inc. 4. Steel Network.
MATERIALS A.
General: 1. Provide the light gage steel materials conforming with requirements of AISI Specifications. a. Exterior Framing: Galvanized finish. b. Interior Framing: Galvanized finish. 2. Galvanized Members: G60 galvanized coating on steel members conforming to ASTM A653/A653M-08 in the following grades: a. 16 gauge and heavier: Grade 50 (Class 1 or 2), minimum Fy = 50,000 psi. b. 18 gauge and lighter: Grade 33, minimum Fy = 33,000 psi.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
05 40 00 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING B.
01-13-2012
Studs: Provide punched members in types, depths and gages as shown or scheduled; "C" studs, minimum 1 5/8 inch flange with return typical unless otherwise specified. 1. Exterior Soffit Framing: "C" studs. properties scheduled below: Depth
Gage
3 5/8 inch
18
Members to meet or exceed the physical
Ix (Net Moment of Inertia)
Mr (Allowable Resisting Moment)
0.69 in.4
8.0 in -kips
2. Exterior "C" studs for exterior walls and parapets: Members to meet or exceed the physical properties scheduled below: 6" depth typical.
2.03
Depth
Gage
6 inch
16
Ix (Net Moment of Inertia)
Mr (Allowable Resisting Moment)
2.80 in.4
29.7 in -kips
C.
Tracks: Unpunched steel to match stud quality and finish. 1. Deep leg, 1 5/16 inch minimum, 16 gauge. 2. "Deflection Track" Special deep leg, 2 inch minimum, 14 gauge; use where studs "float" in track to accommodate vertical deflection of structure. 3. No attachments shall be made to "Slip Tracks" which would impair their ability to permit unrestrained vertical movement of the building structure.
D.
Miscellaneous 1. Stud Wall Bridging: Cold rolled channel, 1 5/16 inch minimum x 16 gauge. 2. Clip Angles: 14 gauge minimum galvanized LB by the Steel Network, Frame Rite UA by Marino Ware or Easy Clip E-Series by Dietrich. 3. Side Vertical Slide Clips: 14 gauge galvanized steel SLB by the Steel Network, Frame Rite WSU-1000 by Marino Ware or Fast Clip by Dietrich Industries or similar device to secure studs to structure and permit vertical movement of the structure without loading the stud. 4. Top Vertical Slide Clips: 14 gauge galvanized steel SL by Steel Network, Frame Rite DEFLEX CLIP by Marino Ware, Fast Top Clip by Dietrich Industries. 5. Touch-up paint: Zinc Rich Cold Galvanizing Aerosol by Sherwin Williams or approved equal. 6. Screw Fasteners: Size suitable for the conditions; subject to approval by Structural Engineer. Cadmium plated meeting requirements of Federal Specification QQ-P 416A, Type II, Class #1; 0.0005 inch thick. Minimum size of screw fasteners shall be #10-16.
E.
Identification: All members to receive painted identification stripe (nominal 1 inch wide) at approximately 1/3 points on both flanges. Provide separate and distinct color for each gauge member delivered to job. All identification marking to be done at the mill.
FABRICATION A.
Fabricate all components of framing systems in strict accordance with standard Specifications; cut to accurate sizes and lengths as required for satisfactory erection as shown on Drawings.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
05 40 00 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
2.04
B.
Studs: 1. Provide full bearing against inside track webs, before attaching stud to track. 2. Do not splice studs. 3. Bridging shall be solidly connected to each stud in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
C.
Prefabricated Panels (may be used at the Contractor's option): 1. Attach components so as to prevent racking. 2. Insure that panels are square. 3. Cut framing members squarely for attachment of perpendicular members, or as required for an angular fit against abutting members. 4. Hold members positively in place until properly fastened. 5. In double jambs and double headers which would be inaccessible after panel assembly, provide and install insulation equivalent to that specified elsewhere for the same assembly.
D.
Welding equipment and welder's qualifications to meet the requirements of AWS D1.3/D1.3M-2008. Qualify all welders. Evidence of questionable weld quality will be cause to reject all welding and require certification of all welds by an independent testing laboratory. Cost of testing to be borne by Contractor.
SPECIAL FEATURES A.
Cripple Studs: Provide studs between bottom track and window sills, between lintels or headers and top track, and elsewhere as required for support of attached materials and equipment.
B.
Blocking: Provide blocking in framing for all wall-mounted items, including door stops, equipment or casework.
PART 3 3.01
3.02
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
SURFACE CONDITIONS A.
Prior to beginning work of this Section, verify that the installed work of other trades is complete and correct to the extent necessary for the proper execution of this Section.
B.
In the event of discrepancies, immediately notify the Architect. Do not proceed with work affected by the discrepancies until they have been resolved.
ERECTION A.
Walls: 1. Erect framing and panels level, plumb, and square. 2. Handle members and panels so as to avoid distortion. 3. Securely anchor track to the supporting structure. Attach to concrete or masonry with 1/2 inch diameter anchor bolts at 4 feet c/c or approved equal.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
05 40 00 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
4. At track butt joints, securely anchor both pieces to a common supporting element, or butt weld or splice track pieces together. 5. Plumb and align studs and securely attach to the flange or webs of both upper and lower tracks. 6. Install cripple studs below window sills, above door and window heads, at freestanding stair rails, and elsewhere as required. 7. Install bridging as required to prevent stud rotation. Use the manufacturer's recommendations for spacing, except that the maximum spacing is to be 5 feet for all walls, in the absence of supporting data. Provide an additional row of bridging within 12 inches of all "deflection track" applications. 8. Provide headers and supporting studs at all wall openings. 9. Provide temporary bracing until erection is completed. 10. Stud spacing shall be 16 inch c/c unless otherwise shown on structural Drawings. 11. Heads of openings shall consist of stud or joist sections sufficient to carry the weight of the wall above. Jamb sections shall consist of heavier gage studs, multiple studs, or both as required to resist the wind load form the adjacent door or window. Multiple jamb studs shall be connected together at 12" o.c. 12. Frame both sides of expansion joints with separate studs. Do not bridge the joint with components of the stud system. B.
Deflection: Install "Vertical Slide Clips" or "Deflection Tracks" at all attachments to structure subject to live load deflection in accordance with the manufacturer's standard details. Wall panels in "Deflection Track" condition shall stop 3/4 inch below the underside of the structure above to allow for vertical movement and not be rigidly attached to "Deflection Track." Wall panels must engage "Deflection Track" a minimum of 1 inch. Structures subject to live load deflection include supported roof and floor systems.
C.
All field abrasions and welds to be coated/touched up with cold applied zinc primer specified in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
D.
Connections: 1. All metal-to-metal connections shall be screwed or welded. 2. Welded connections to be as specified under "Fabrication." Attach metal studs to steel frame of building with 2 inches of 1/8 inch fillet weld at each stud or equivalent capacity. 3. Track: Attach to concrete or masonry with 1/2 inch diameter anchor bolts at 4 feet c/c or approved equal. 4. Detail all connections on shop drawings.
E.
Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows: 1 Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. END OF SECTION
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
05 40 00 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
B. 1.2 A.
Loose steel lintels and shelf angles. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports. Loose bearing and leveling plates. Steel stairs, handrails and guardrails. Exterior aluminum guardrails and handrails. Elevator pit ladders and hoist beams. Concrete filled metal bollards. Area well frames and grates.
See Division 14 Section "Hydraulic Elevators" for elevator sill support angles. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For the following: 1.
Grout.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, dimensions and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
C.
Stair Shop Drawings: Include plans, detailed fabrication and installation of steel stairs, elevations, sections, dimensions and details of steel stairs and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchors and bolts. Include calculations indicating analysis and compliance with loading specified herein. Calculations and stair shop drawings sealed by a registered engineer in the state of the project and responsible for their preparation.
D.
Templates: For anchors and bolts.
1.3 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Stair and Guard Rail System Design, Fabrication, and Installation: Comply with 2011 Ohio Building Code (OBC) Section 1607. 1.
Handrails and Guards: a.
A uniform load of 50 lbs. per lineal foot applied in any direction at the top of the rail. Loads transferred through supports to stringers.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE b.
c. d. e. 2.
4.
5. B.
A single concentrated load of 200 lbs. applied at any point and in any direction along the top railing member. Loads transferred through supports to stringers. Intermediate rails: A horizontally applied normal load of 50 lbs. applied on a one square foot area at any point in the system. The concentrated and uniform loading conditions noted in 1.a. and 1.b. above need not be assumed to act concurrently. The reactions due to the loading in 1.c. above are not required to be superimposed with those from 1.a. and 1.b. above.
Treads and Landings: a. b.
3.
01/13/12
Uniform: 100 lbs per square foot. Concentrated: 300 lbs per square foot over 4" square area at treads.
Stair Framing and Hand and Guard Railing: Materials, designs, and installation capable of withstanding stresses resulting from stair and railing loads specified above. Tread, Riser, and Handrail Design and Installation: Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibilities Guidelines (ADAAG), Section 4.9 - Stairs as applicable. Roof and Elevator Pit Access Ladders: Comply with requirements of the Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Subtitle B, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.27.
Galvanizing: Comply with applicable provisions in ASTM A 123 and A 153, and the American Galvanizers Association (AGA) publications. 1.
Galvanizing Applicator Qualifications: A qualified applicator specializing in hot-dip galvanizing after fabrication, and follows the procedures of the Quality Assurance Manual of the American Galvanizers Association (AGA). a. b.
2.
3.
Fabricator and Galvanizer Coordination: Prior to fabrication of galvanized items, fabricator shall submit approved fabrication shop drawings to the galvanizer who shall review shop drawings for suitability of materials for galvanizing and coatings and, coordinate any required fabrication modifications. Galvanizing: Comply with applicable provisions in ASTM A 123, ASTM A 153, and the American Galvanizers Association (AGA) publications. a. b.
4.
Applicator ISO 9002 Certified within the last five years and audited yearly. Galvanizing, shop finishing, and job site delivery of all exposed galvanized steel components by a single entity.
To minimize surface imperfections, use of the galvanizing process involving a flux blanket on the kettle (wet method) is prohibited. Surface Finish: Continuous, adherent as smooth and evenly distributed as possible and free from defect detrimental to the stated end use of the coated item.
Comply with applicable provisions in AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings-Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design" and "Code of Standard
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
5.
6.
Practice", and RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." Comply with applicable provisions in "Code of Standard Practice for Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel (AESS)" for AESS where noted on the drawings. Steel Materials for Galvanizing: a. b.
Materials to be geometrically and chemically suitable for galvanizing as described in ASTM A 384 and A 385. Material to be chemically suitable for galvanizing. 1)
C.
01/13/12
Steels containing carbon below 0.25%, phosphorus below 0.04% and manganese below 1.3%, either individually or in combination, and providing the silicon content is 0.04% or less, will normally develop a typical coating when conventional galvanizing techniques are applied.
Field Measurements: Verify required dimensions by field measurement prior to fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
METALS
A.
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes.
B.
Ferrous Metals: 1. 2. 3.
C.
Nonferrous Metals: 1. 2. 3.
2.2 A.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/ A 36M, Fy = 36 ksi carbon steel. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/ A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads.
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T6. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/ A 632M, alloy 6061-T6. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/ B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.
FASTENERS General: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, size, length, grade and class required by field conditions.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
B.
Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/ A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/ A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329.
C.
Anchor Rods, Bolts, Nuts: ASTM A 36/ A36M, unheaded rods, and ASTM A 325/ A325M, headed bolts, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts and heavy hex carbonsteel nuts. 1. 2.
Configuration: Hooked. Finish: a. b.
D.
Interior Locations: Plain. Exterior Locations: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153, Class C.
Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/ A 36M. 1.
Finish: a. b.
Interior Locations: Plain. Exterior Locations: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153, Class C.
E.
Nonhigh-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 307/ A 307M, Grade A; carbonsteel, hex-head bolts; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers, uncoated.
F.
High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325/ A 325M or A 490/ A 490M Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts, heavy hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers, uncoated. 1.
Finish: a. b.
G.
2.3
Interior Locations: Plain. Exterior Locations: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/ A 153M, Class C.
Bolts: Size exact length required to meet installation conditions and fitted with lock washers. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI #79.
B.
Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat. Products by the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Benjamin Moore & Co.; Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer CM18/19. Carboline Company; Carbozinc 621. ICI Devoe Coatings; Catha-Coat 313. International Coatings Limited; Interzinc 315 Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97-670. Sherwin-Williams Company; Corothane I GalvaPac Zinc Primer. Tnemec Company, Inc.; Tneme-Zinc 90-97.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE C.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20, high-zinc-dust-content, brush applied paint for regalvanizing welds in steel. 1.
D.
2.4 A.
nonstaining,
noncorrosive,
FABRICATIONS General: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
2.
3. 4. 5.
Cut, drill and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. Weld corners and seams continuously. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. Finish exposed welds smooth and blended. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, not less than 24" o.c.
Loose Steel Lintels: Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. 1.
C.
Spray applied materials not permitted.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107.
1.
B.
01/13/12
Lintels in Exterior Walls: Galvanized.
Shelf Angles: Fabricate shelf angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to framing. Fabricate with horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4" bolts, spaced not more than 6" from ends and 24" o.c. 1. 2.
Shelf Angles in Exterior Walls: Galvanized. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-in-place concrete.
D.
Loose Bearing and Leveling Plates: Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts.
E.
Pipe Railings: Design and fabricate railing system to support loads noted in Paragraph 1.3 above. 1. 2. 3.
Materials: Steel pipe, Schedule 40, sizes and designs indicated. Provide horizontal railing extensions with returns to wall at terminals. End Closures: 3/16" steel plate welded in place or prefabricated fitting with flush finish to railing.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 4.
Wall Mounting Brackets: Brackets and accessories by McNichols. a.
Gypsum Board Walls: "Heavy Duty Cast Steel Handrail Brackets, Style D" with round saddle. 1)
b. c. d. e. f. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. F.
Bracket Filler: "Style PF-1" for gypsum board thickness indicated at each location.
Masonry and Concrete Walls: "Heavy Duty Cast Handrail Brackets-2 Holes", surface mounted. Center Line Rail-to-Wall Measurement: 3". Spacing: Not to exceed 4'-0" on center; not greater than 12" from terminals. Weld handrails to saddles. Finish: Primed at interior locations, galvanized at exterior locations.
Weld to steel stringers at metal stairs. Joints welded and ground smooth. Provide pipe railings shop primed. Provide steel setting sleeves at railings set in concrete. Wood Cap on Steel Guardrails: Wood (stained) cut and formed to shape shown on the Drawings, attach to steel channel.
Exterior Aluminum Guardrails and Handrails at Balconies and Plaza Stair. Railing system to support loads noted in Paragraph 1.3 above. 1.
2.
Pre-manufactured Aluminum Ornamental Railing System: Products by Hansen Architectural Systems, Inc. form the basis of design. Equal custom railing system is acceptable. Components: Refer to the drawings for details and elevations. Railing system contains the following components. a. b. c. d.
G.
01/13/12
Posts: Trim-Line tube posts, side mounted (where shown on the Drawings). Balusters: Vertical square pickets. Handrails: Rectangular tubes. Hardware: Provide all required anchor bolts, washers, screws and plates that are required for a complete installation of the system.
Interior and Exterior Steel Framed Stairs: Design and fabricate stair system to support loads noted in Paragraph 1.3 above. 1.
2.
3. 4. 5.
Fabricate units so that bolts and other fasteners do not appear on finished surfaces. Make joints true and tight, and connections between parts lightproof tight. Provide continuous welds, ground smooth where exposed. Construct stair units to conform to sizes and arrangements indicated. Provide metal framing, struts, clips, brackets, bearing plates, landing supports and other components for the support of stairs. Provide brackets and bearing surfaces required to anchor and contain stairs on supporting structures. Fabricate stringers of structural steel channels. Provide closures for exposed ends of stringers. Balusters: Refer to the Drawings for type and spacing.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 6
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 6. H.
Interior Treads and Risers: Provide closed risers and pan-type treads for field concrete fill. Weld steel supporting brackets to stringers and treads to brackets.
Elevator Pit Ladders: Comply with ANSI A14.3, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4.
I.
01/13/12
Elevator Pit Ladders: Comply with ASME A17.1. Siderails: 2½" x 3/8" steel continuous bars 18" apart, unless otherwise indicated. Rungs: #6 deformed bars at 12" o.c. Mounting Brackets: Clip angles or bent plate fabrications at top, bottom and 4'-0" o.c. vertically. Provide holes for mounting fasteners.
Metal Bollards: Fabricate from Schedule 40 steel pipe, Type E or S, Grade B. 1. 2.
Size: Diameter as indicated x 7'-0" long. Finish: Primed.
J.
Elevator Hoist Beam: Provide beam size and length indicated.
K.
Area Well Grilles: Galvanized steel angle frames with removable bar grating. Provide one piece frames with corners mitered and welded. 1. 2.
3.
4. 2.5
Frame 4" x 3" x ¼" LLV and 3" x 3" x 3/16" angle with continuous plate ¼" x 1", and ½" diameter x 4" headed studs at 2'-0" o.c. Grating: McNichols Co. GW-100 with 1" x 1/8" bearing bars at 1-3/16 " o.c. and cross-bars at 4" o.c. Provide equal stubs at bearing bars and welded banding along grate length. Fasteners: Galvanized. Size and length required for installation conditions. Provide anchor clips with padlock hasps at each section to secure grating to frame. Padlocks by Owner.
FINISHES
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
B.
Steel and Iron Finishes: 1. 2.
Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 123/ A 123M or ASTM A 153/ A 153M as applicable. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below for environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: a. b.
Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B) SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 7
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 3.
01/13/12
Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting," for shop painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL:
A.
Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb and true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.
B.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to from hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. 1. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. 2. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4.
D.
3.2
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.
Set bearing and leveling plates on cleaned surfaces using wedges, shims or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts and pack solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS: 1.
2.
Erect bollards plumb with top at 4'-0" above finish grade and in 18" round x 4'-0" deep concrete footing. Fill tube with concrete and crown top. Slope base away from bollard. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 8
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 3.3
01/13/12
INSTALLING STAIRS AND LADDERS:
A.
Erect stair work to line, plumb, square and true with runs registering level with floor and platform levels.
B.
Erect elevator pit ladders straight, plumb and rigidly attached to wall and floor surfaces.
3.4
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
B.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 055000
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 9
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 055133 - METAL LADDERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3.
1.2 A.
Preassembled steel ships ladder with alternating metal treads. Steel tube railings attached to metal ladders. Installation materials and accessories.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Ladder, Hand and Guard Rail System Design, Fabrication and Installation: Comply with Ohio Building Code (OBC) Section 1607. 1.
Handrails and Guards: a. b. c. d. e.
2.
Treads and Landings: a. b.
3.
A uniform load of 50 lbs. per lineal foot applied in any direction at the top of the rail. A concentrated load of 200 lbs. applied at any point and in any direction along the top railing member. Intermediate rails: A horizontally applied normal load of 50 lbs. applied on a one square foot area at any point in the system. The concentrated and uniform loading conditions noted in 1.a. and 1.b. above need not be assumed to act concurrently. The reactions due to the loading in 1.c. above are not required to be superimposed with those from 1.a. and 1.b. above.
Uniform: 100 lbs per square foot. Concentrated: 300 lbs per square foot over 4” square area at treads.
Framing and Hand and Guard Railing: Materials, designs and installation capable of withstanding stresses resulting from stair and railing loads specified above.
B.
Access Ladders: Comply with requirements of the Code of Federal Regulations, Title 29, Subtitle B, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.27 and requirements of local authorities.
C.
Access Ladder System: Composed of aluminum ladders and rest platforms. Provide cages for portions of ladders exceeding 20'-0" or at a height dictated by local codes. Provide rest platforms so no ladder segment exceeds 30'-0" in height. Furnish floor and wall mounting brackets. Standard riser height is 12".
METAL LADDERS
055133 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1.3 A.
SUBMITTALS Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, dimensions and details of steel ladders, and their connections to other Work. 1. 2. 3.
B. 1.4
01/13/12
Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchors and bolts. Include calculations indicating analysis and compliance with loading specified herein. Calculations and ladder shop drawings sealed by a registered engineer in the state of the project and responsible for their preparation.
Templates: For anchors and bolts. COORDINATION
A.
Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
B.
Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they will not encroach on required ladder enclosure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Prefinished and assembled steel ships ladder stair by Lapeyre Stair, Inc. forms the basisof-design. Products with comparable designs, materials and performance characteristics by other manufacturers may be submitted to the Architect for review no later than ten (10) days prior to the bid date.
B.
Stair: Prefinished and assembled steel ships ladder: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
C.
Design: Alternating tread design. Angle: 68 degrees. Overall Width: 23”. Treads and Landings: 11 gauge steel, non skid. Stringers: 11 gauge steel. Handrail: 1½” diameter steel, standard narrow handrail, 42" above landing. Materials and Finishes: Carbon steel with powder coat finish. Color selected from manufacturer’s standard palette.
Fasteners: Zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with and Class Fe/Zn 5.
METAL LADDERS
055133 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2.2 A.
MANUFACTURERS Preassembled metal access ladders by Precision Ladders, L.L.C. form the basis-ofdesign. Products with comparable materials, designs, performance characteristics and finishes by manufacturers listed below are also acceptable. 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
ACL Industries. ALACO Ladder Company. Cotterman Company. O'Keeffe's, Inc.
Metal Access Ladders: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Model: “FL Series Fixed Aluminum Wall Ladder”. Stringers: Aluminum channel 6005-T5, 2½” x 1-1/16" x 1/8" with 1/8" molded polyurethane safety caps at top and 2½” x 2" x 3" floor brackets. Treads: Extruded aluminum 6005-T5, 2¼” wide, deeply serrated with 8" x 2" x 3" x ¼" aluminum angle mounting brackets. Rest Platforms: 1/8" aluminum treadplate with aluminum toe boards and 42" high guardrails. Cages (if required): a. b.
6. 7. C.
2.3 A.
01/13/12
Bar Hoops: ¼” x 2" aluminum, 6005-T5. Vertical Bars: ¼” x 2" aluminum bars, 6005-T5.
Total Height: 9’-11 1/2”±, or as shown on the Drawings. Finish: Mill finish on all components.
Fasteners: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. FABRICATION Provide complete ladder assemblies, including railings, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor ladders and platforms on supporting structure. 1.
2. 3.
4. 5.
Join components by welding, unless otherwise indicated. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds smooth and blended. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without impairing work. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
METAL LADDERS
055133 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.
INSTALLATION Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1. 2.
Install metal stairs by welding or bolting stair framing to steel structure. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Adjusting and Cleaning: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting.
END OF SECTION 055133
METAL LADDERS
055133 - 4
06
WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1.
Framing with dimension lumber. a. b. c. d.
2.
Plywood panels. a. b.
3.
b. c.
d.
k.
A.
Miscellaneous concealed wall, roof, soffit, fascia and floor nailers and blocking. Wood and compressible fireblocking (firestopping). Membrane roof area perimeter, roof curb and opening nailers and framing. Minor vents and other penetrations not requiring structural reinforcement provided by trade requiring penetration. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
Miscellaneous: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j.
1.2
Roof and wall sheathing. Backing panels.
Wood blocking, cants and nailers. a.
4.
Interior and exterior walls. Roof, fascia soffit and floor framing. Supplemental floor and roof truss framing and bracing. Sleepers.
Gypsum wall and parapet sheathing. Floor structure draftstopping. Fireblocking (firestopping). Wood framing anchors, fasteners and accessories. Building air/ moisture infiltration barriers. Fluid-applied membrane air barriers. Sill sealer. Setting hollow metal frames at masonry openings. Accessible parking and site directional signs and posts. Installing rough hardware furnished by finish hardware supplier under Division 8. Temporary closures.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: and Reports: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1.
2.
3.
Include data for wood-preservative and fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i.
1.3 A.
01/13/12
Wood-preservative-treated wood. Fire-retardant-treated wood. Power-driven fasteners. Powder-actuated fasteners. Expansion anchors. Metal framing anchors. Building air infiltration barriers. Gypsum sheathing. Sill sealer.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Building Wrap System: 1.
2.
3.
Qualifications a. Installer shall have experience with installation of weather barrier assemblies under similar conditions. b. Installation shall be in accordance with weather barrier manufacturer’s installation guidelines and recommendations. c. Source Limitations: Provide weather barrier and accessory materials produced by single manufacturer. Mock-up a. Install mock-up using approved weather barrier assembly including fasteners, flashing, tape and related accessories per manufacturer’s current printed instructions and recommendations. 1) Mock-up size: 10 feet by 10 feet. 2) Mock-up Substrate: Match wall assembly construction, including window opening. 3) Mock-up may remain as part of the work. b. Contact manufacturer’s designated representative prior to weather barrier assembly installation, to perform required mock-up visual inspection and analysis as required for warranty. Pre-installation Meeting a. Hold a pre-installation conference, two weeks prior to start of weather barrier installation. Attendees shall include Contractor, Architect, Engineer, Consultant, Installer, Owner’s Representative, and Weather Barrier Manufacturer’s Designated Representative. b. Review all related project requirements and submittals, status of substrate work and preparation, areas of potential conflict and interface, availability of weather barrier assembly materials and components, installer’s training
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
requirements, equipment, facilities and scaffolding, and coordinate methods, procedures and sequencing requirements for full and proper installation, integration and protection. 1.4 A.
WARRANTY Special Manufacturer's Warranty for Building Wrap System: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace weatherization system material that does not comply with requirements or that fails to remain watertight within specified warranty period. 1. 2.
Warranty Period: Ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion. Pre-installation meetings and jobsite observations by weather manufacturer for warranty are required.
barrier
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any ruleswriting agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. 2.
B.
Wood Structural Panels: 1. 2.
2.2 A.
Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, unless otherwise indicated. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2.
WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER Preservative treatment materials “Alkaline Copper Quaternary (ACQ)" by Chemical Specialties, Inc. form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable materials, properties and performance by the following manufacturers are also acceptable. Products containing arsenic and chromium not permitted. 1.
B.
Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece.
Osmose, Inc.
Preservative Treatment Materials: 1.
Material: a.
“Preserve Plus” ACQ preservative with water repellent component.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2.
Material Standards: Comply with the following AWPA Standard Use Categories: a. b. c. d. e.
C.
2. 3. 4. 5.
A.
Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers and waterproofing. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls. Wood framing members that are less than 18" above the ground in crawlspaces or unexcavated areas. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.
FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS Fire-retardant treatment materials by Hoover Treated Wood Products form the basisof-design. Products with comparable materials and properties by the following manufacturers are also acceptable. 1. 2.
B.
Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.
Applications: Treat items indicated on Drawings and the following. 1.
2.3
Lumber: Nominal 2" thick, Construction, Stud, or No. 2. grade dimension lumber. Plywood: APA Rated Sheathing, Exposure 1.
Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. 1.
E.
UC1: Interior no ground or foundation contact. UC2: Interior damp areas. UC3A: Exterior above ground, coated. UC3B: Exterior above ground, finished. UC4A: Exterior ground or freshwater contact.
Materials to be Treated: 1. 2.
D.
01/13/12
"Dricon" (interior) and “FRX” (exterior) by Arch Wood Protection, Inc. "D-Blaze" (interior) by Chemical Specialties.
Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). 1. 2. 3. 4.
Interior Fire-Retardant Materials: “Pyro-Guard” with flame spread rating of 25 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E-84. Exterior Fire-Retardant: “Exterior Fire-X” with flame spread rating of 25 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E-84. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated. Use Interior Type A, High Temperature (HT) for enclosed roof framing, framing in attic spaces and where indicated.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 5. C.
Lumber: Nominal 2" thick, Construction, Stud or No. 2. grade dimension lumber. Plywood: APA Rated Sheathing, Exposure 1.
Applications: Treat items indicated on Drawings and the following: 1. 2. 3.
2.4
Mark each piece indicating kiln dried after treatment (KDAT). Mark each treated item with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
Materials to be Treated: 1. 2.
F.
UCFA: Fire protection, weather protected. UCFB: Fie protection, exterior.
Kiln-dry material after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood. 1. 2.
E.
Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated.
Material Standards: Comply with the following AWPA Standard Use Categories: 1. 2.
D.
01/13/12
Concealed blocking. Framing for non-load-bearing partitions. Framing for non-load-bearing exterior walls.
DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING
A.
Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent.
B.
Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction, Stud or No. 2. grade of any species.
2.5 A.
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. 2. 3.
Blocking and nailers. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. Cants, furring and grounds.
B.
For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction, Stud or No. 2 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content of any species.
C.
For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. 2. 3.
Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB. Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA. Northern species, No. 2 Common grade; NLGA.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 4. D.
2.6 A.
2.7 A.
PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4" nominal thickness. SHEATHING Plywood Wall and Roof Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing, Exposure 1, Structural I. Fire-Retardant-Treated if shown on the Drawings.
Oriented-Strand-Board Wall and Roof Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing, Exposure 1, Structural I. 1.
C.
Western woods, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.
Provide preservative treated or fire-retardant treated materials where indicated or required.
1. B.
01/13/12
Fire-Retardant-Treated if shown on the Drawings.
Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: "Dens-Glass Gold Exterior Guard" by G-P Gypsum Corp. forms the basis-of-design. Products with comparable materials and performance characteristics by CertainTeed, National Gypsum or Temple-Inland are also acceptable. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Panels: Water-resistant treated gypsum core with glass mats both sides and long edges, and complying with ASTM C 1177. Type and Thickness: As indicated on the Drawings. Edge Treatment: Square. Mold and Mildew Resistance: Tested in accordance with ASTM D 3273. Fire Resistance: a. b.
6.
Noncombustible when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136. Rated Wall Assemblies: Provide "DensGlass Gold Fireguard Exterior Sheathing" Type X, ASTM C 1396.
Fasteners: Non-corrosive, type, size, length and spacing recommended by sheathing manufacturer for application indicated. a. b.
Nails: 11-gauge, hot-dip galvanized steel with 7/16" head. Screws: 1) 2)
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Heavy Gauge Steel: Type S-12, bugle head, self-tapping, rustresistant, fine thread. Light Gauge Metal Framing or Furring: Type S, bugle head, rustresistant, sharp point, fine thread.
061000 - 6
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 3)
7.
Joint Tape: 2" wide, 10 x 10 glass mesh tape. Joint Compound: Manufacturer’s standard setting-type joint compound. Sealants and Caulk: Comparable materials by other manufacturers must be approved by sheathing manufacturer. 1)
d.
2. 3. 4.
Exposed Edge Exterior Trim: "L" trim with 5/8” x 1-7/8” flanges, ASTM C 1047, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet or rolled zinc. Plastic not permitted.
Panels: Nonstructural, glass mat-faced, noncombustible, moisture-resistant treated gypsum core with non-asphaltic, integral surface treatment, and complying with ASTM C 1177. Type and Thickness: Regular, ½” and ¼” thick, or “Type X”, 5/8” thick. Edge Treatment: Square. Fire Resistance: a. b.
5.
A.
Products: Dow Corning "795", Pecora "895" and "AC-20" acrylic latex sealant; GE Silicone "Silpruf Sealant"; or Tremco "Dymonic".
Parapet Gypsum Sheathing: "DensDeck Prime" by G-P Gypsum Corp. forms the basisof-design. Products with comparable materials and performance characteristics by other manufacturers may be submitted to the Architect for review no later than ten (10) days prior to the Bid Date. 1.
2.8
Metal or Wood Framing: Wafer head, rust-resistant, Type S-12 drill, or Type W rust-resistant, bugle head, coarse thread, sharp point for wood.
Accessories: a. b. c.
D.
01/13/12
Flame spread 0, smoke developed 0, when tested in accordance with ASTM E-84. Noncombustible when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136. Rated Assemblies: Provide “DensDeck Prime Fireguard Type X”, UL classified Type DGG when tested in accordance with ASTM E 119.
Fasteners: Non-corrosive, type, size, and spacing recommended by sheathing manufacturer.
DRAFTSTOPPING Draftstopping Wall Materials: Plywood or oriented strand board APA Rated Sheathing Exposure 1, or paper-surfaced gypsum wall sheathing at Contractor’s option. 1. 2. 3.
Thickness: ½” minimum. Joint Treatment: Not required. Plywood materials fire-retardant treated to match truss materials if shown on the Drawings. Oriented strand board not permitted if shown on the drawings.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 7
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2.9 A.
FIREBLOCKING (firestopping) Materials: Provide one or more of the following at Contractor’s option. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
2.10
01/13/12
One layer 2” nominal lumber. Two layers 1” nominal lumber with broken lap joints. One layer 3/4” wood structural panel with joints backed up by matching material. One layer 3/4” particle board with joints backed up by matching material. Mineral wool or glass fiber batts or blankets, gypsum board, or cement fiber board installed in a manner to remain securely retained in place. Materials and installation requirements to be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
FASTENERS
A.
General: Provide fasteners of type, size and length required for installation conditions.
B.
Treated Wood Materials: 1.
Preservative Treated Materials: a.
b. c. 2.
Fire-Retardant Treated Materials: a. b.
3.
Hot-Dip Galvanized: Conform to ASTM-A153 (hot-dip fastener products) and ASTM-A653 (coating designation G-185 for hot-dip connector and sheet products). Stainless Steel: Type 304 or 316. Aluminum: Not permitted for use with ACQ (Alkaline Copper Quaternary) pressure-treated wood.
Interior Dry Locations: Standard fasteners. Exterior and Interior Wet Locations: Hot dip galvanized or stainless steel.
Verify fastener requirements with treatment manufacturer.
C.
Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D.
Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and flat washers.
2.11 A.
METAL FRAMING ANCHORS Preengineered metal framing anchors by Simpson Strong-Tie Co. form the basis-ofdesign. Products with comparable materials, structural properties and finishes by the following manufacturers are also acceptable. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Alpine Engineered Products, Inc. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. Harlen Metal Products, Inc. KC Metals Products, Inc. Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co., Inc.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 8
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 6. B.
01/13/12
USP Structural Connectors.
Materials: Steel sheet complying with ASTM A 625, ASTM A653 and ASTM A1011 with noted hot-dip, zinc-coated coating designation or stainless steel as noted for specific application. 1. 2. 3.
Interior, Non-Preservative Treated Wood Applications: G90 hot-dip, zinc-coated. Interior and Exterior, Preservative Treated Wood, Dry Applications: "ZMAX" G185 hot-dip, zinc-coated. Exterior Preservative Treated Wood, For Wet Applications: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel.
C.
Fasteners: Comply with type, size, length and quantity required for each anchor type as stated by anchor manufacturer. Fastener material to meet or exceed framing anchor material requirements.
D.
Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.
E.
Refer to Structural Drawings for specific products required and additional information.
2.12 A.
BUILDING AIR/ MOISTURE INFILTRATION BARRIERS Building Wrap: Breathable sheet product engineered as an air barrier and secondary weather resistive membrane by DuPont forms the basis-of-design. Products with comparable materials and performance characteristics by BBA Fiberweb, Celotex Corp., Pactiv Building Products, Parsec, Inc., Raven Industries, Inc. and Sto-Cote Products, Inc. are also acceptable. 1.
Building Wrap: "Tyvek Weatherization System”. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.
2.
Material: "Tyvek CommercialWrap". Thickness: Not less than 3 mils. Permeance: Not less than 10 perms. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less per ASTM E 84. Allowable Exposure Time: Not less than three months. Flashing: DuPont “Flashing System”, “Tyvek Flexwrap” and “Tyvek Straightflash”. Fasteners: “Wrap Caps”, high density polyethylene cap with electrogalvanized nails of proper type, size and length for installation conditions. Seam Tape: “Contractor Tape”, oriented polypropylene film coated with a permanent acrylic adhesive.
Building Wrap for Simulated Stone Masonry: a. b.
Material: "Tyvek Stucco Wrap". Thickness: Not less than 18 mils.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 9
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE c. d. e. f. g. h. i. 3. B.
Permeance: Not less than 50 perms. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less per ASTM E 84. Allowable Exposure Time: Not less than three months. Flashing: DuPont “Flashing System”, “Tyvek Flexwrap” and “Tyvek Straightflash”. Fasteners: “Wrap Caps”, high density polyethylene cap with electrogalvanized nails of proper type, size and length for installation conditions. Seam Tape: “Contractor Tape”, oriented polypropylene film coated with a permanent acrylic adhesive. Installation: Drainage grooves run vertical on wall surface.
Refer to Part 1 section, “Quality Assurance” for detailed building wrap system requirements.
Fluid-Applied, Vapor-Permeable Membrane Air Barrier: Synthetic polymer membrane. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one the following: a.
Synthetic Polymer Membrane: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
2.
b. c.
A.
Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.; Barritech VP. Grace, W. R. & Co.; Perm-A-Barrier VP. Henry Company; Air-Bloc 31 or Air-Bloc 33. Rubber Polymer Corporation, Inc.; Rub-R-Wall Airtight VP. Tremco Incorporated; ExoAir 230.
Physical and Performance Properties: a.
2.13
01/13/12
Air Permeance: Maximum 0.004 cfm/ sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57-lbf/sq. ft. pressure difference; ASTM E 2178. Vapor Permeance: Minimum 10 perms; ASTM E 96/ E 96M. Ultimate Elongation: Maximum: 200 percent; ASTM D 412, Die C.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Corrugated polyethylene foam gasket “GreenGuard Sill Sealer” by Pactiv Building Products. 1. 2.
Thickness: ¼”. Width: Select from manufacturer's standard widths to suit sill member widths indicated.
B.
Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG01 or ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by both adhesive and panel manufacturers.
C.
Splashblocks: Precast concrete units, 30" long, with integrally sloped bottom, smooth finish and natural color.
D.
Roof Sheathing Edge Clips: H-shaped aluminum or steel "ply-clips".
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 10
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE E.
Accessible Parking and Building Entrance Signs: "Stock Traffic Signs" by Best Sign Systems form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable materials, graphics and color by other manufacturers may be submitted to the Architect for review no later than ten (10) days prior to the Bid Date. 1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6. 7. F.
R.C. SECTION 4511.99 Colors: Blue field with white logo and text. Post: Prefinished metal hat channel or tube, 10'-0" long, painted. Concrete: 4000 psi. Comply with Section 033000.
Size: 1" x 1½” x 4' sections. Free Area: 9 sq. in. net free area per lineal foot. Materials: Heat resistant polypropylene. Color: Black.
Concealed Soffit Vent: “SV201 or SV202” by Air Vent, Inc. 1. 2. 3. 4.
2.14
Handicapped Parking Stall: Type A, #SS53. Handicapped Van Parking Stall: Type B, similar to #SS57 with handicapped logo and "VAN ACCESSIBLE" text. Handicapped Accessible Entrances: Type C, #SS58 with handicapped logo and Unauthorized Parking Sign: Provide the following text: UNAUTHORIZED PARKING $250 FINE MINIMUM
Concealed Soffit Vent: “S-400 Strip Vent” by COR-A-Vent. 1. 2. 3. 4.
G.
01/13/12
Size: 2" x 8' sections. Free Area: 9 sq. in. net free area per lineal foot. Materials: Aluminum. Color: Mill, White or Brown.
TEMPORARY CLOSURES
A.
Doors: Batten doors with locks at exterior openings.
B.
Openings: Preservative treated plywood and framing as required to close opening.
C.
Maintain appropriate protection against weather and danger of life throughout the work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 11
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1. C.
01/13/12
Table 2304.9.1 "Fastening Schedule," in the Ohio Building Code.
Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. 1. 2. 3.
4.
5.
6.
7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
Powered Fasteners: Powered fasteners not permitted on any precast concrete element. Install sill sealer continuously at all metal framed perimeter walls. Coordinate with Division 05 Sections. Install wood framing, blocking, nailers and/or bracing, to comply with requirements for attaching other construction and supports required to support construction during formative stages. Install wood framing, blocking and nailers between floor trusses at top and bottom chords. Provide additional framing and blocking required to install roof sheathing and gypsum wall board ceiling. Align framing with top and bottom chords. Install necessary concealed wood blocking in partitions to assure rigid anchorage of equipment, cabinets, toilet partitions and accessories, fire extinguishers and cabinets, and other items indicated to be surface or recessed mounted. Blocking and framing for subsequently applied work reviewed and approved by Contractor prior to installation of finish materials. Install roof area perimeter and penetration wood nailers and blocking to heights required for total height of installed insulation provided under Division 07 Section "Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Roofing". Secure nailers in compliance with roof system installation requirements. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated. Provide temporary barricades, railings, doors, ladders or stairs as required. Maintain temporary items for the life of the work or as directed. Set miscellaneous rough hardware in connection with carpentry work. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. Install non-staining protective wood covers for corners and edges subject to soiling and damaged.
D.
Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and per requirements of Division 06 Section “Laminated Veneer Lumber”.
E.
Plywood Sheathing: Install plywood roof and wall sheathing to provide a smooth, even surface and per requirements of Division 06 Section “Structural Lumber and Sheathing”.
F.
Gypsum Sheathing: Install sheathing in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and applicable instructions in GA-253 and ASTM C 1280. 1.
Set panels vertically or horizontally in compliance with manufacturer's fastening requirements.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 12
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2. 3.
01/13/12
Use maximum lengths possible to minimize number of joints. Set panels plumb and rigidly attached to framing with appropriate fasteners spaced at manufacturer's recommended spacing. Drive fasteners tight against and flush with surface of sheathing. Do not countersink.
G.
Set and rigidly brace hollow metal frames straight, plumb and square at masonry wall locations.
H.
Install firestopping (fire-blocking) materials at the following locations. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
I.
Concealed wall spaces. Connections between horizontal and vertical spaces. Ceiling and floor openings. Architectural exterior trim at 20'-0" o.c. Combustible interior and finish trim. Concealed sleeper spaces. Firestopping materials shall be continuous throughout concealed space and fill the cavity entirely. Rigidly secure firestopping (fire-blocking) to adjacent framing such that it shall remain in place when subject to moderate fire exposure.
Building Wrap Application: Cover wall sheathing with building wrap indicated. Cover upstanding flashing with 6” overlaps. Seal seams, edges, and penetrations with tape. 1. 2.
3.
4. 5.
Attach building wrap to wall framing with manufacturer’s recommended fasteners at required spacings. Maintain roll plumb with bottom edge running along the foundation line. Extend material over sill track interface and beyond corner edges for later overlap. Secure material to foundation with polyurethane or latex based joint sealer. Unroll material directly over window and door openings. Cut and secure material at openings in accordance with manufacturer’s standard details. Trim and remove excess material. Tape horizontal seams and repair or tape damaged areas. Tape vertical breaks or overlaps at corners. Cover building wrap within four months of installation.
J.
Install handicapped parking sign posts in 12" diameter x 3'-6" deep concrete piers. Set sign top at 7'-0" above grade.
K.
Clean up debris and cuttings daily. Store only in fireproof containers and remove from site.
3.2
FLUID-APPLIED AIR BARRIER INSTALLATION
A.
Clean, prepare, treat, and seal substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for air barrier application.
B.
Apply air barrier membrane to form a seal with strips and transition strips and to achieve a continuous air barrier according to air barrier manufacturer's written instructions.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 13
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
C.
Apply air barrier membrane within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges.
D.
Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by air barrier sheet in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. 1.
E.
Apply a continuous unbroken air barrier to substrates according to the following minimum thickness. Apply membrane in full contact around protrusions such as masonry ties. 1.
F.
3.3 A.
Prime glass-fiber-surfaced gypsum sheathing with number of prime coats needed to achieve required bond, with adequate drying time between coats.
Vapor-Permeable Membrane Air Barrier: Min 90-mil thickness or as required by the manufacturer of the product used.
Protect air barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions. BUILDING WRAP FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Notify manufacturer’s designated representative observations of weather barrier assembly installation.
to
obtain
required
periodic
END OF SECTION 061000
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 14
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 064013 - EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes the following exterior woodwork: 1.
1.2
Decorative wood brackets.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Include location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components.
B.
Samples: Provide 12" (minimum) length sample for each type of exterior wood material selected showing proposed, grade, texture, and finish system. Provide samples with one-half surface finished and other half exposed.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for Custom Grade work unless noted otherwise.
B.
Western Red Cedar: Comply with Western Red Cedar Lumber Association (WRCLA) published documents for grading, installation, and finishing requirements.
C.
Installation: 1. 2.
Installers: Finish carpenters, trained and experienced in skills required. Pre-manufactured Items: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
MATERIALS Decorative Wood Brackets: Design as indicated on the Drawings. 1.
B.
Cedar: WRCLA Western Red Cedar, Grade A and Better, smooth, S1S2E boards, kiln-dried 12% MC. smooth face exposed.
Fasteners: Hot-dipped galvanized, aluminum alloy or stainless steel of type, sufficient size, length and withdrawal resistance to properly secure materials as required by installation conditions.
EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064013 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
2.2
01/13/12
Provide sinker head siding nails for wood trim and finish nails for wood siding that comply with CRA nail size and length recommendations. Provide carriage bolts and heavy duty washers at bolted connections. Provide drilled plastic anchors and galvanized screws at trim connections to concrete or block substrate. Provide self-tapping screws for attachment of wood siding and trim to metal stud framing components. Refer to Division 06 Section “Rough Carpentry” for fasteners used in attachment of preservative treated materials.
FABRICATION
A.
Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
B.
Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work.
C.
Shop Priming: Shop prime woodwork for paint finish with one coat of wood primer specified in Division 09 Section "Painting".
D.
Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of wood siding and trim. Apply two coats to surfaces installed in contact with concrete or masonry and to end-grain surfaces.
E.
Shop Finishing: 1.
2.
Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to surfaces installed in contact with concrete or masonry and to end-grain surfaces. Finish System: At contractor's option, wood brackets may be primed in accordance with requirements of Division 09 Section “Painting” prior to installation. Final coat(s) field-applied under Division 09 Section “Painting” after material installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including backpriming and removal of packing.
B.
Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 or the same grade specified for type of woodwork involved.
EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064013 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1. 2. 3.
4.
01/13/12
Install woodwork true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8” in 96”. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. Do not over drive or set fasteners to counteract material bow or misalignment.
C.
Complete finishing work specified to extent not completed at shop or before installation of woodwork. Fill nail and screw holes with matching filler where exposed.
D.
Refer to Division 09 Section “Painting” for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork.
E.
Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
F.
Remove excess material and dispose of properly off site.
END OF SECTION 064013
EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064013 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 064023 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes interior woodwork for the following applications: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
Standing and running trim. Wood cabinets. Plastic-laminate cabinets. Plastic-laminate countertops and sills. Shelving in storage, janitor, and closet areas. Flush wood paneling and wainscots. Stairwork and rails. Frames and jambs. Accessories. Shop finishing of woodwork.
B.
Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips, unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.
C.
Rough carriages for stairs are interior architectural woodwork. 1.
D. 1.2 A.
See Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for platform framing and other rough framing associated with stairwork.
Interior architectural woodwork finished under Division 09 Section “Painting”. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For the following: 1. 2. 3.
Cabinet hardware and accessories. Handrail brackets. Finishing materials and processes.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include location of each item, plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components.
C.
Samples: 1. 2. 3.
Lumber and panel products for transparent finish, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge. Lumber and panel products with shop-applied opaque finish, for each finish system and color, with exposed surface finished. Plastic-laminate-clad panel products, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064023 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 4. 5. 1.3
01/13/12
Thermoset decorative-overlay surfaced panel products, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish. Solid-surfacing materials.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of woodwork.
B.
Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards", eighth edition, for Custom Grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and other requirements. 1. 2.
Provide AWI certification labels or compliance certificate indicating that woodwork complies with requirements of grades specified. Lumber and Plywood Materials: AWI Quality Standards. a. b. c. d.
3.
Fabrications: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
1.4 A.
Section 100: Lumber grades. Section 200: Plywood and particleboard grades. Provide lumber surfaced four sides (S4S) and worked to patterns shown. Moisture content: Provide materials kiln-dried to moisture content complying with Section 100-S-3.
Section 300, Standing and Running Trim. Section 400, Architectural Cabinets. Section 600, Closet and Utility Shelving. Section 800, Stairwork and Rails. Section 900, Door Frames/Exterior or Interior. Section 1500, Factory Finishing. Section 1700, Installation.
PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Deliver and install woodwork after building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
MATERIALS Wood Trim for Units: Provide pre-finished wood trim package including base, door casings and pre-hung doors. 1.
Refer to Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames” for unit entry doors.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064023 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2. B.
Hardboard: AHA A135.4. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD-Exterior Glue. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay. Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA HP-1.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: manufacturers are acceptable: 1. 2. 3. 4.
2.2
Profiles as indicated on the Drawings. Provide rated door frames where indicated in Door and Frame Schedule on the Drawings.
Wood Panel Products: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
D.
Refer to Division 08 Section “Flush Wood Doors” for unit interior doors.
Wood door frames, wall, window, and ceiling trim (painted finish): Yellow poplar. 1. 2.
C.
01/13/12
NEMA LD 3.
Products
by
the
following
Formica Corporation. Laminart. Nevamar, a division of Panolam Industries. Wilsonart International, Inc.
CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials for a complete installation of architectural woodwork, except for items specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."
B.
Hardware Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.9 for items indicated by referencing BHMA numbers or items referenced to this standard.
C.
Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): "Clip top Series", self-closing, 170 degree swing, for flush overlay doors by Blum. Products with comparable materials, construction and performance criteria by Grass America are also acceptable. 1.
Adjustments: Side, height and depth.
D.
Door Bumpers: Fabricator's standard resilient, permanently attached raised domes.
E.
Wire Pulls: 4", to be determined.
F.
Adjustable Shelf Supports: #332ANO with anochrome finish by Knape-Vogt.
G.
Drawer Slides: All steel ball-bearing slides with noted capacity and clear zinc finish by Accuride. Products with comparable materials, construction and performance criteria by Knape-Vogt are also acceptable. 1. 2.
Box Drawer Slides: #3832SC at 100 lbs. per pair, full extension, self-closing. File Drawer Slides: #4032 at 150 lbs. per pair, full extension.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064023 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 3.
01/13/12
Pencil Drawer Slides: #2132 at 45 lbs. per pair, 3/4 extension.
H.
Drawer and Door Locks: Brass body 5-pin tumbler cylinder cam-type lock for doors and drawers with dull chrome faces and matching trim washer. Locks master keyed.
I.
Coat Rod: 1" round tubing with stainless steel finish No. 660 SS by Knape-Vogt. 1. 2.
End Flanges: No. 734 CHR/735 CHR. Intermediate Supports: No. 1195 WH at 4'-0" o.c.
J.
Countertop Brace Mounting Brackets: Sanymetal No. 4035, or equal.
K.
Shelf Bracket: Factory fabricated “Model SWS2”, 18” x 18” with diagonal brace, integral mounting holes, and matte black finish by Doug Mockett & Co.
L.
Wall mounted shelf standards and brackets by Knape-Vogt. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
M.
2.3 A.
2.4 A.
Standards: No. 85 ANO, double-slotted, 16-gauge steel. Lengths as indicated. Brackets: No. 185 ANO, double-slotted, 2" less than shelf depth indicated. Standards: No. 80 ANO, single-slotted, 16-gauge steel. Lengths as indicated. Brackets: No. 180 ANO, single-slotted, 2" less than shelf depth indicated. Finish: Standard anochrome.
Cable Access Grommets: Round black plastic inserts with removable covers “Flip-Top Series” by Doug Mockett & Co. INSTALLATION MATERIALS Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, fireretardant-treated, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. FABRICATION General: Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6.
Interior Woodwork Grade: Premium complying with the referenced quality standard. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. Install glass to comply with applicable requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and in GANA's "Glazing Manual." For glass in wood frames, secure glass with removable stops. For trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064023 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 7. B.
Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field assembly.
Plastic-Laminate Cabinets: 1. 2. 3.
AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay. Reveal Dimension: ½”. Core Materials: a. b. c.
4.
5. 6. 7. 8.
Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: HGS, 0.048” thick. Vertical Surfaces: HGS, 0.048” thick. Edges: HGS, 0.048” thick. Postformed Surfaces: HGP, 0.039” thick.
Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS 0.028” thick. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected from manufacturer's full range of solid colors. Provide dust panels of ¼” plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers, unless located directly under tops. Cabinet Hardware: a. b. c. d. e. f.
Concealed hinges. Wire pulls at each door and drawer. Adjustable shelf supports at 2¼” o.c., two pair per shelf. Drawer slides, one pair per drawer, sized as indicated. Drawer and door locks as indicated. Door bumpers: One pair per door.
Plastic-Laminate Countertops and Sills: 1. 2. 3. 4.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS, 0.048” thick. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected from manufacturer's full range of solid colors. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate on horizontal surfaces, square profile. Core Material: a. b.
D.
Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood. Doors: Medium density particleboard or fiberboard.
Laminate for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative of grade indicated. a. b. c. d.
C.
01/13/12
At Non-Sink Locations: Manufacturer’s standard. At Sink Locations: Particleboard made with exterior glue or exterior-grade plywood.
Painted Wood Shelving (storage and coat shelves): 3/4” AB plywood or medium density particle board with 3/4” x 1½ " clear pine wood nosing on front edge. Prepare for field painted finish.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064023 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1. E.
Plastic laminate and melamine finishes are acceptable, provided a full range of colors is available.
Wood Stair Handrails and Accessories: 1. 2.
3. 4. 5. 2.5
01/13/12
Handrail: Solid red oak, profile as indicated. Support Brackets: “Heavy Duty Cast Steel Handrail Brackets, Style E” with flat saddle and bracket filler “Style PF-1” for gypsum board thickness indicated at each location. Center Line Rail-to-Wall Measurement: 3”. Spacing: Not to exceed 4' 0" on center and not greater than 12" from terminals. Finish: Primed.
SHOP FINISHING
A.
Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.
B.
Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling.
C.
Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system, staining, and sheen, with sheen measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Grade: Premium. AWI Finish System: TR-4, conversion varnish. Appearance: Closed Grain. Staining Color: Refer to Division 09 Section "Painting" for color. Sheen: Medium-gloss rubbed effect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas and examine and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming before installation.
B.
Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified in this Section for type of woodwork involved.
C.
Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight to a tolerance of 1/8” in 96”. Shim as required with concealed shims.
D.
Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged finish at cuts.
E.
Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064023 - 6
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. F.
Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using fulllength pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood base, if finished.
G.
Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. 1.
2. H.
Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips. Adjust hardware to provide proper operation.
Plastic Laminate Countertops: Fasten plastic-laminate countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Form seams using splines to align adjacent surfaces, and secure with glue and concealed clamping devices designed for this purpose. 1. 2.
Set applied backsplashes in bead of clear silicone sealant. Remove excess material. Caulk space between backsplash and wall with clear silicone sealant.
I.
Sills: Install plastic laminate window sills level, true to alignment, accurately fit to wall conditions and securely fastened in place.
J.
Shelving: Install shelving and coat rods anchored securely in place. 1.
Install shelf standards plumb and securely fastened in place. Recess bracket tips into shelf bottom.
END OF SECTION 064023
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064023 - 7
07
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 071326 - SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes Self-adhering, rubberized-asphalt sheet waterproofing and the following for perimeter of the elevator pits: 1. 2.
1.2 A.
SUBMITTALS Data and Reports: 1.
2. 3. 4. B.
1.3
Protection board and accessories. Waterproofing system manufacturer's field quality control inspections.
Product Data: For each product indicated. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing and treating substrate, technical data, and waterproofing tested physical and performance properties. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for waterproofing. Manufacturer’s representative's warranty inspection reports. Special warranties.
Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, wall-footing details, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, top-of-wall details and other termination conditions. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A firm acceptable to waterproofing manufacturer for installation of waterproofing required for this Project, and eligible to issue waterproofing warranty specified.
B.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site and comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." Notify participants at least five (5) working days before conference. 1.
2. 3.
Meet with Owner’s representative, General Contractor, Architect; waterproofing installer; waterproofing system manufacturer's representative and subcontractors whose work interfaces with or affects waterproofing system installation, including foundation wall penetrations, perimeter drainage system and backfill. Establish waterproofing extent, material installation requirements and special details and flashings installation procedures. Establish trade-related job schedules, including installation of wall openings, pipes, conduits and other penetrations.
SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING
071326 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 1.4 A.
1.5 A.
01/13/12
Establish schedules and work methods that will prevent waterproofing system and protection board damage. Establish areas on job site designated as work and storage areas. Establish weather and working temperature conditions. Establish provisions for protecting installed waterproofing areas during the remainder of the Project. Establish manufacturer’s warranty inspection requirements and schedules. Establish provisions for on-site monitoring after the work is completed.
PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate. WARRANTY Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace waterproofing material that does not comply with requirements or that fails to remain watertight within specified warranty period. 1.
Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
MANUFACTURERS Rubberized-asphalt sheet waterproofing system by W. R. Grace & Co forms the basisof-design. Products with comparable materials and performance characteristics by manufactures listed are also acceptable. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
2.2 A.
American Hydrotech, Inc.; VM 75. American Permaquik Inc.; PQ 7100. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW MiraDRI 860/861. CETCO Building Materials Group; Envirosheet. Henry Company; Blueskin WP 200. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; SealTight Mel-Rol. Nervastral, Inc.; BITU-MEM. Pecora Corp.; Duramem 700-SM. Polyguard Products; Polyguard 650. Progress Unlimited, Inc.; Plastiwrap 60. Tamko Roofing Products, Inc.; TW-60.
RUBBERIZED-ASPHALT SHEET WATERPROOFING System: “Bituthene System 4000 Membrane” below grade, self-adhering rubberized asphalt sheets with cross-laminated, high density polyethylene film formulated for use
SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING
071326 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
with water-based surface conditioner. “Bituthene Low Temperature Membrane” may be used if required by weather conditions. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Thickness: 60 mil (.060") thick dft. Primer: “Bituthene Primer WP-3000”. Surface Conditioner: "System 4000 Surface Conditioner." Liquid Membrane: "Bituthene Liquid Membrane", two component, elastomeric, cold-applied, trowel grade material. Termination Material: “Bituthene Mastic”, rubberized asphalt-based mastic. Tapes: a. b.
7. 8.
2.3 A.
“Hydroduct Tape”, two-sided adhesive tape for adhering drainage composites, expanded polystyrene protection board to membranes. “Preprufe Tape”, two sided, reinforced pressure-sensitive tape to adhere to penetrations, protrusions and membranes.
Mastic: “Bituthene Mastic” rubberized asphalt-based mastic to seal terminations, edges of patches, and overlaps in detail areas. Metal Termination Bars: Aluminum bars, approximately 1" by 1/8” thick, predrilled at 9” centers.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with sheet waterproofing. 1.
Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Primer: Liquid solvent-borne primer recommended for substrate by manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material.
C.
Surface Conditioner: Liquid, waterborne surface conditioner recommended for substrate by manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material.
D.
Liquid Membrane: Elastomeric, two-component liquid, cold fluid applied, trowel grade or low viscosity.
E.
Substrate Patching Membrane: Low-viscosity, two-component, asphalt-modified coating.
F.
Sheet Strips: Self-adhering, rubberized-asphalt sheet strips of same material and thickness as sheet waterproofing.
G.
Mastic, Adhesives, and Tape: Liquid mastic and adhesives, and adhesive tapes recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
H.
Metal Termination Bars: Aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick, predrilled at 9-inch centers.
SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING
071326 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE I.
01/13/12
Protection Course: ASTM D 6506, semirigid sheets of fiberglass or mineral-reinforcedasphaltic core, pressure laminated between two asphalt-saturated fibrous liners and as follows: 1. 2.
Thickness: 1/4 inch, nominal. Adhesive: Rubber-based solvent type manufacturer for type of protection course.
recommended
by
waterproofing
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
SURFACE PREPARATION
A.
Clean, prepare and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application.
B.
Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction.
C.
Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.
D.
Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids.
E.
Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.
F.
Bridge and cover isolation joints, expansion joints with overlapping sheet strips. 1.
Invert and loosely lay first sheet strip over center of joint. Firmly adhere second sheet strip to first and overlap to substrate.
G.
Corners: Prepare, prime, and treat inside and outside corners according to ASTM D 6135.
H.
Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at drains and protrusions according to ASTM D 6135.
3.2
APPLICATION
A.
Install modified bituminous sheets according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and according to recommendations in ASTM D 6135.
B.
Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by sheet waterproofing in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.
SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING
071326 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
C.
Apply and firmly adhere sheets over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform 2½" minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams and stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation.
D.
Apply continuous sheets over sheet strips bridging substrate cracks, construction and contraction joints.
E.
Seal exposed edges of sheets at terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with mastic.
F.
Install sheet waterproofing and auxiliary materials to tie into adjacent waterproofing.
G.
Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofing extending 6" beyond repaired areas in all directions.
H.
Install protection course with butted joints over waterproofing membrane immediately.
I.
Correct deficiencies in or remove sheet waterproofing that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates, reapply waterproofing and repair sheet flashings.
3.3
PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A.
Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
B.
Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Schedule waterproofing system manufacturer’s preinstallation and periodic field quality control inspections required to insure proper system installation and to obtain noted warranties.
B.
Final Installation Inspection: Arrange for waterproofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect entire waterproofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect.
C.
Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION 071326
SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING
071326 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 071413 – HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2
SUMMARY This Section includes: 1. Split-slab hot-applied rubberized asphalt waterproofing. 2. Vertical wall, self-adhering sheet waterproofing. 3. Flashing, adhesives and sealants and accessories. 4. Roof garden soils and gravel. 5. Waterproofing flood testing. 6. System manufacturer’s field quality control inspections. SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data and Reports: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing and treating substrates, technical data and tested physical and performance properties. 2. Product test reports. 3. Certifications: a. Showing waterproofing components being supplied and warranted by a single-source manufacturer. b. Showing installer is qualified and approved by system manufacturer to install manufacturer's products and issue noted warranties. 4. Warranty: Showing complete system and component coverages and exclusions, if any.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing/roofing system. 1. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, and other termination conditions.
C.
Samples: Waterproofing/roofing membrane and accessories.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer, approved by system manufacturer to install manufacturer's products; and who is eligible to receive waterproofing warranties specified. 1. Certification or license by the system manufacturer as a locally based, authorized applicator of the product for a minimum of five (10) years. 2. List of at least three (3) projects, satisfactorily completed within the past five (5) years, of similar scope and complexity to this project. Previous experience submittal must correspond to specific membrane system proposed for use by applicator.
B.
Single Source Responsibility: To ensure total system compatibility and performance, purchase all system components from a single-source manufacturer.
HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING
071413 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
C.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Notify participants at least five working days before conference. 1. Meet with the Owner’s representative, General Contractor, Architect; system installer; system manufacturer's representative and subcontractors whose work interfaces with or affects system installation. 2. Establish concrete surface/substrate installation, finish and curing requirements. 3. Establish trade-related job schedules, including installation of pipe penetrations and equipment. 4. Establish schedules and work methods to prevent system damage. 5. Establish job site areas designated for work and storage. 6. Establish weather and working temperature conditions. 7. Establish provisions for protecting installed system areas during the remainder of the Project. 8. Establish structural requirements and conditions for flooding waterproofed areas to test installation as often as required to obtain a waterproof installation. 9. Establish manufacturer’s installation and warranty inspection requirements and schedule. 10. Establish provisions for on-site monitoring after the work is completed.
D.
Inspections: Manufacturer's authorized representative to conduct inspections in accordance manufacturer's installation and warranty requirements and contract documents requirements for issuing systems warranty. Manufacturer's representative to periodically visit the installation to verify systems materials and application techniques comply with manufacturer’s written requirements.
1.4
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing/roofing system within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by system manufacturer. 1. Membrane application shall not commence nor proceed during inclement weather. Surfaces to receive the membrane shall be free of water, dew, frost, snow and ice. 2. Membrane application shall not commence nor proceed when the ambient temperature is below 0°F (-17.7°C).
B.
Preparation and application of membrane must be conducted in well ventilated areas. Consult container or packaging labels and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for specific safety information.
C.
Do not expose membrane or accessories to a constant temperature in excess of 180°F (82°C) (i.e., hot pipes and vents or direct steam v enting, etc.) over their service life.
D.
Do not allow waste products (petroleum, grease, oil, solvents, vegetable or mineral oil, animal fat, etc.) to come in contact with the waterproofing membrane. Any exposure to foreign materials or chemical discharges must be presented to membrane manufacturer for evaluation to determine any impact on the waterproof membrane assembly performance.
E.
Provide adequate protection during waterproofing/roofing system installation.
HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING
071413 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1.5 A.
01/13/12
WARRANTY Warranties: Manufacturer's standard forms, signed by manufacturer, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace waterproofing/roofing system and/or components that do not comply with requirements or that do not remain watertight for ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
2.2
MANUFACTURERS Hot fluid-applied rubberized asphalt waterproofing and roof garden systems by American Hydrotech, Inc. form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable designs, materials, performance criteria and finishes by the following manufacturers are also acceptable: 1. Carlisle Corporation, Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Div. a. Waterproofing Membrane: "CCW-500R". b. Reinforcing Fabric: "CCW-500". c. Self-Adhering Membrane: "CCW MiraDRI 860/861". d. Flashing Membrane: "CCW-711-90", CCW-Uncured Neoprene Flashing, and "Sure-Seal" Unreinforced EPDM Membrane". e. Protection Course: "CCW-Protection Board H". f. Drainage Course: "MiraDRAIN 9900" – Parking Deck; "MiraDRAIN 9200" – Garden Roof Area; "MiraDRAIN" 6000 – Vertical Application. g. Root Barrier: "RMB 400". 2. Barrett Company. a. Waterproofing Membrane: "Ram-Tough 250". b. Self-Adhering Membrane: Refer to manufacturer for type. c. Reinforcing Fabric: "Poly-Felt 125 VP". d. Flashing Membrane: "Ram Flash 327 HDR". e. Protection Course: "Ram 203". f. Drainage Course: Refer to manufacturer for type. g. Root Barrier: "Ram RB20". MATERIALS
A.
Systems: 1. Plaza Deck and Balconies: Including waterproofing/roofing membrane, flashing, adhesives and sealants. 2. Roof Garden Areas: Including waterproofing/roofing membrane, flashing, adhesives and sealants, root barrier, moisture retention components, filter fabric and soils.
B.
Waterproofing Membrane: “MM 6125”, reinforced, single-component; 100 percent solids; hot fluid-applied, rubberized asphalt complying with CGSB-37.50-M89. Overall System Thickness: 215 mils.
C.
Reinforcing Fabric: "Flex Flash F", spunbonded polyester fabric sheet. Thickness is 9 mils.
HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING
071413 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
D.
Self-Adhering Membrane: "VM75", vertical applications. Thickness is 60 mils, ASTM D 3767.
E.
Flashing Membrane: 1. Self-Adhering Membrane: Thickness 60 mils, ASTM D 3767. 2. Neoprene Membrane: Thickness 60 mils, ASTM D 412. 3. EPDM Membrane: Thickness 60 mils, ASTM D 412.
F.
Protection Course: "Hydroflex 30", thickness .03".
G.
Drainage Course: 1. Parking Deck: "Hydrodrain 300", thickness 0.25", ASTM D 1777. 2. Garden Roof: a. "Hydrodrain 400", thickness 0.40", ASTM D 1777. b. "Hydrodrain 700" for vertical surfaces, thickness 0.40", ASTM D 1777.
H.
Root Barrier: "Root Stop HD", thickness 15 mils.
I.
Soil/gravel for Garden Roof: As indicated on Landscape Drawings.
2.3
ACCESSORIES
A.
Fasteners: Provide required masonry anchors and pop rivets. Corrosion-resistant stainless steel.
B.
Sealing Washers: Stainless steel, bonded to minimum 0.060" EPDM (curd).
C.
Termination Bars: Aluminum or stainless steel.
D.
Counterflashing: 26 gauge stainless steel.
E.
Gravel Stops: Manufacturer's standard aluminum angles with vertical slots for water drainage. Vertical leg to align with top of gravel. 1. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard fasteners of type, size, length and spacing required to secure gravel stops to substrates.
F.
Reglet and Flashing System: Surface mounted, two-piece reglet and flashing system by Fry Reglet Corp. Products with comparable materials, designs, performance characteristics and colors by other manufacturers may be submitted to the Architect for review at least ten (10) days prior to the Bid Date. 1. Model: "SM" surface mounted with factory punched mounting slots. 2. Materials: 0.025" aluminum with factory applied gray polyester coating. 3. Fasteners: Manufacturer's 7/8" diameter stainless steel drive pins with neoprene facing washers. 4. Sealant: Polyurethane, polysulfide or silicone sealant as recommended by reglet manufacturer.
G.
Adhesives/Sealants: 1. “Splicing Cement”, contact adhesive to bond elastomeric flashings. 2. “Bonding Adhesive”, contact adhesive to bond elastomeric flashing to approved substrates.
HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING
071413 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 3. 4. 5.
01/13/12
“Lap Sealant”, sealant to seal elastomeric flashing seam edge. Water Cut-Off Sealant: Butyl based sealant. Sealant Tape or Sealing Strip: Isoprene Copolymer Tape.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Examine substrates and installation conditions. Verify the work of other trades concealed by waterproofing work has been inspected and accepted. Coordinate setting of penetrating items to insure a watertight installation. 1. Verify damaged or honeycombed surfaces, joints and penetrations are grouted solid. 2. Proceed with waterproofing/roofing work after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Installation constitutes acceptance of existing conditions and responsibility for satisfactory performance.
B.
Clean and prepare substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free and dry substrate for waterproofing application. 1. Remove grease, oil, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete. 2. Thoroughly sweep and blow clean substrates to remove any remaining loose debris. 3. Concrete deck surfaces shall be clean, dry, free of materials, wire ties, obstructions, debris prior to installing waterproofing/roofing system.
C.
Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction.
D.
Close off deck drains and other deck penetrations to prevent spillage and migration of waterproofing/roofing fluids.
E.
Apply surface primer to concrete surface using manufacturer's recommended equipment evenly at a rate recommended by manufacture for substrate and surface texture. Allow sufficient time for surface conditioner to thoroughly dry prior to membrane application.
3.2
JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT
A.
Detailing and Flashing: Install all detailing and flashing in accordance with manufacturer's standard guideline details, and completed before installing membrane.
B.
Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions.
C.
Install elastomeric sheet reinforcement and bond to deck and wall substrates where indicated or required. Extend elastomeric sheet reinforcement a minimum of 6” onto perpendicular surfaces and other work penetrating substrate.
HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING
071413 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE D.
3.3
01/13/12
Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at drains and sleeves. 1. At discontinuous deck-to-wall or deck-to-deck joints, bridge joint with sheet flashing extended along each side of joint and securely bond to substrate. 2. Install elastomeric flashing sheet at terminations and adhere to deck and wall substrates in a layer of hot, rubberized asphalt. MEMBRANE APPLICATION
A.
Apply rubberized asphalt according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Heat rubberized asphalt in manufacturer's recommended equipment with mechanical agitator specifically designed for heating rubberized-asphalt waterproofing.
B.
Reinforced Membrane: Apply waterproofing to substrates and adjoining surfaces indicated. Spread hot fluid-applied, rubberized asphalt to a thickness of 90 mils; embed reinforcing fabric, overlapping sheets 2”; and spread another 125-mil- thick layer to provide a uniform, reinforced, seamless membrane 215 mils thick.
C.
Apply waterproofing over prepared joints, up wall terminations and vertical surfaces to heights indicated or required by manufacturer. Extend waterproofing to edge of areas to be treated.
D.
Install protection/root barrier course with 2"-3" overlapped joints while rubberized asphalt is still hot. 1. Root Barrier: Lap adjacent sheets minimum of 4" and seal with propane torch. Turn barrier up at vertical and roofed/flashed surfaces to completely protect waterproofing and flashings.
E.
Install reglets straight, level and rigidly secured to substrate or framing. Apply sealant at top and in recess to seal against water penetration.
F.
After horizontal membrane has properly cured, flood waterproofed area with 2" of water for 48 hours. Locate and repair all leaks. Retest installation as often as required to obtain a waterproof installation. Remove water after successful testing.
G.
Cover completed membrane/protection assembly with subsequent topping materials within 30 days of membrane installation.
3.4
ROOF GARDEN INSTALLATION
A.
Drainage Components: Install components in proper orientation with butted joints and secured with staples or clips. Cut units where required to fit around penetrations, etc. 1. Aggregate Fill: Fill component cups with lightweight aggregate level with top surface. 2. Filter Fabric: Install layer of filter fabric over aggregate fill with 6" lapped joints. 3. Turn mat up at vertical surfaces minimum 6" beyond anticipated soil level. Trim excess to soil level.
B.
Gravel Stops: Install stops straight, level and securely fastened to substrates. Set vertical leg to align with top of gravel.
HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING
071413 - 6
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
C.
Inspection Chambers: Install inspection boxes at roof drains. Provide vertical extensions as required to meet adjacent grade elevations.
D.
Soil: Place soil to avoid damage or displacement of other materials walls, paving, drainage components, filter fabric and roofing membrane. 1. Place materials in lifts no greater than 6" deep and compact until soil has been placed within 1" of final grade. 2. Perform compaction with 200 - 300 lbs landscape roller or hand held mechanical compactor to achieve a 50-60% compaction as determined by ASTM D1557. 3. After compaction, place additional soil to 1" greater than final grade. Thoroughly water entire area. Fill low or settled areas with additional soil. Water to achieve uniform final grade.
3.5 A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Schedule system manufacturer’s field quality control inspections. 1. Final System Inspection: Arrange for system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect system installation on completion and submit report to Architect. 2. Repair or remove and replace system components where test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION 071413
HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING
071413 - 7
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 071900 - WATER REPELLENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes clear water-repellent coatings for the following vertical and nontraffic horizontal surfaces: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
1.2 A.
SUBMITTALS Data and Reports: 1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6. 7. B.
Product Data: For each product indicated. Product test reports. VOC Certification: Certification that furnished water repellents comply with regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOC). Copy of the selected product manufacturer’s estimated quantities for each type of material of required for each substrate type, and the actual quantities delivered to the applicator. Include anticipated coverage rate for each product. Pre-application substrate cleaning and application testing reports. Post-application testing reports. Sample warranties.
Applicator Qualifications: 1. 2.
1.3
Cast stone. Manufactured stone masonry. Pre-application substrate testing. Pre-application substrate cleaning. Post-application substrate testing.
Certification stating applicator is trained and approved by manufacturer to apply manufacturer's products. List of recently completed water repellent projects, including project name and location, names of owner and Architect, and description of products used, substrates, applicable local environmental regulations, and application procedures.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer (applicator) who employs only persons trained and approved by manufacturer to apply manufacturer's products.
B.
Manufacturer's Representative: Manufacturer’s authorized personnel trained to monitor installer’s application methods and quantity of materials used, and to conduct sufficient field testing on each type of treated surface to satisfy warranty requirements.
WATER REPELLENTS
071900 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
C.
Final Cleaning Materials: Substrate cleaning materials produced by the water repellent coating material manufacturer, or specifically approved, in writing, by the coating material manufacturer as a system if produced by different manufacturers.
D.
Water Repellent’s Properties: Based on testing manufacturer's standard products, according to test methods indicated, applied to substrates simulating Project conditions using same materials and application methods to be used for Project. 1.
Absorption: Minimum 90 percent reduction of absorption after 24 hours in comparison of treated and untreated specimens. a.
2. 3.
4. 5.
Concrete Unit Masonry: ASTM C 140.
Water-Vapor Transmission: Maximum 10 percent reduction in rate of vapor transmission in comparison of treated and untreated specimens, per ASTM E 96. Water Penetration and Leakage through Masonry: Maximum 90 percent reduction in leakage rate in comparison of treated and untreated specimens, per ASTM E 514. Durability: Maximum 5 percent loss of water repellency after 2500 hours of weathering in comparison to specimens before weathering, per ASTM G 53. Permeability: Minimum 80 percent breathable in comparison of treated and untreated specimens, per ASTM D 1653.
E.
Sample Panels: Prior to start of the work, prepare a 4' x 4' (minimum) test panel with the selected cleaning and water repellent products for each type of substrate at locations designated by the Architect. Apply selected materials and allow proper curing. Verify application coverage rate for each material and substrate. Proceed with further installation after sample panels have been approved. Prepare additional sample panels, if required. Refer to the Drawings.
F.
Project Conditions: Comply with material manufacturer’s established environmental limitations or criteria for product use. Such conditions include air and surface temperatures, weather, and wind conditions.
G.
Pre-Application Meeting: Convene a pre-application meeting at least two weeks before the start of water repellent application. Contractor, Architect, applicator, and water repellent manufacturer’s representative attendance is required. Review environmental regulations, protection of surrounding areas and nontreated surfaces, final cleaning, surface preparation, application, field quality control, and coordination with other work.
1.4 A.
WARRANTY Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace water-repellent coatings that fail in materials and workmanship within time period indicated from date of Substantial Completion. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of coating due to unusual weather phenomena, failure of prepared and treated substrate, new substrate cracks in excess of 1/16" wide, fire, vandalism, or abuse by maintenance equipment.
WATER REPELLENTS
071900 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
WATER REPELLENTS Water repellent and cleaning materials by ProSoCo form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable materials and performance characteristics by manufacturers noted are also acceptable. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
B.
Chemprobe Technologies, Inc. Diedrich Technologies, Inc. Degussa Building Systems, Hydrozo Products. Euclid Chemical Company. Harris Specialty Chemicals, Inc. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
Manufactured Stone Masonry: 1.
Cleaning Material: As recommended by product manufacturer base on substrates and installation conditions. a. b. c.
2.
Water Repellent: Two (2) coats, "Sure Klean Weather Seal Natural Stone Treatment", modified siloxane system. a. b.
C.
"Enviro Klean Mortar & Grout Remover". "Sure Klean Burnished Custom Masonry Cleaner". "Sure Klean Light Duty Concrete Cleaner".
VOC: 732 grams/liter, ASTM D 3960. Application Rate: 125-175 sq.ft. per gallon.
Cast Stone Units: 1.
Cleaning Material: As recommended by product manufacturer base on substrates and installation conditions. a. b. c.
2.
"Enviro Klean Mortar & Grout Remover". "Sure Klean Burnished Custom Masonry Cleaner". "Sure Klean Light Duty Concrete Cleaner".
Water Repellent: As recommended by product manufacturer base on substrates and installation conditions. a.
Two (2) coats "Weather Seal Siloxane PD" (predilute), water-based silane/siloxane. 1) 2)
b.
VOC: 203 grams/liter, ASTM D 3960. Application Rate: 150-200 sq.ft. per gallon.
Two (2) coats "Sure Klean Weather Seal SL100 Water Repellent", modified, silane system.
WATER REPELLENTS
071900 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1) 2) c.
01/13/12
VOC: 376 grams/liter, ASTM D 3960. Application Rate: 150-400 sq.ft. per gallon.
Two (2) coats "Sure Klean Weather Seal Natural Stone Treatment" modified siloxane system. 1) 2)
VOC: 732 grams/liter, ASTM D 3960. Application Rate: 125-175 sq.ft. per gallon.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.
APPLICATION Preparation: Clean substrates of substances that might interfere with penetration or performance of water repellents. Test for moisture content, according to water repellent manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure surface is sufficiently dry. 1.
Formed Concrete: Remove oil, curing compounds, laitance, and other substances that could prevent adhesion or penetration of water repellents.
B.
Test concrete and masonry surfaces for pH level, according to water repellent manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure chemical bond to silicate minerals.
C.
Weather and Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with application of water repellent under any of the following conditions, except with written instruction of manufacturer: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Ambient temperature is less than 40 deg F. Concrete surfaces and mortar have cured for less than 28 days. Rain or temperatures below 40 deg F are predicted within 24 hours. Application is earlier than 24 hours after surfaces have been wet. Substrate is frozen or surface temperature is less than 40 deg F. Windy condition exists that may cause water repellent to be blown onto vegetation or surfaces not intended to be coated. Comply with additional requirements of material manufacturer.
D.
Protect adjoining work, including sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow-over of water repellent. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass if there is possibility of water repellent being deposited on surfaces. Cover live plants and grass.
E.
Coordination with Sealants: Do not apply water repellent until sealants for joints adjacent to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment have been installed and cured. 1.
F.
Water-repellent work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion and compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate, water repellent, and sealant materials identical to those used in the Work.
Test Cleaning and Application: Before performing cleaning and water-repellent work, including bulk purchase and delivery of products, prepare small applications in an unobtrusive location and in a manner approved by Architect to demonstrate final effect
WATER REPELLENTS
071900 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
(visual, physical, and chemical) of planned cleaning and water repellent materials. Proceed with work only after Architect approves test applications or as otherwise directed. G.
Cleaning: Thoroughly saturate surfaces with fresh water. 1. 2. 3. 4.
H.
Use soft-fibered masonry-washing brush or low pressure spray (50 psi max), to apply solution. Leave solution on wall for time period recommended by manufacturer based on field testing. Do not allow cleaner to dry into the masonry. Reapply solution and scrape off heavy buildup of mortar using wooden scrapers. Avoid damaging the masonry surface. Do not use metal scrapers. Rinse surfaces thoroughly with fresh water, removing all cleaning compound, free sand, loose material and debris.
Apply heavy-saturation spray coating of water repellent on surfaces indicated for treatment using low-pressure spray equipment. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for using airless spraying procedure, unless otherwise indicated. 1.
Precast Work: At Contractor's option, first application of water repellent on precast concrete units may be completed before installing units. Mask sealantbond surfaces to prevent water repellent from migrating onto joint surfaces.
I.
Apply second saturation spray coating, repeating first application. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for limitations on drying time between coats and after rainstorm wetting of surfaces between coats. Consult manufacturer's technical representative if written instructions are not applicable to Project conditions.
J.
Immediately clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces and surfaces soiled or damaged by water-repellent application as work progresses. Repair damage caused by water-repellent application. Comply with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions.
K.
After application is complete, remove protective coverings from adjacent surfaces and other protected areas.
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Provide factory-authorized technical service representative to inspect and approve substrates, confirm material selections for each substrate and installation condition, and coverage rate for each material on each substrate before application, and to instruct applicator on product and application methods to be used.
B.
Thirty (30) days after coating material installation, the manufacturer's representative shall test the installation as required to verify all surfaces have been properly treated and meet or exceed water repellency noted in Part 1.3 of this specification and as required to meet requirements for warranties.
WATER REPELLENTS
071900 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE C.
01/13/12
Recoat and retest areas not properly treated or that fail to meet the repellency requirements to provide a complete installation.
END OF SECTION 071900
WATER REPELLENTS
071900 - 6
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Insulation under slabs-on-grade. Interior furred wall insulation. Concealed building insulation. Fiberglass batt insulation in interior walls for acoustic isolation.
B.
Underslab vapor retarder and insulation provided and installed under Division 03 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete”.
C.
Roof insulation provided and installed under Division 07 Section “Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Roofing”.
1.2 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data and Reports: For each product indicated. 1. 2.
1.3
Product test reports. Research/evaluation reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the firetest-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 for surface-burning characteristics by UL. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
B.
Batt Materials: Comply with ASTM C665. 1. 2.
Unfaced - Type I and ASTM E 136. Foil faced - Type III. Provide Class A facing at all installation locations.
C.
Rigid Polystyrene Material: Comply with ASTM C578.
D.
Foam Plastic Insulation: Comply with OBC Section 2603.
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
INSULATING MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide insulating materials that comply with specified requirements and referenced standards, in sizes to fit applications indicated, and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths and lengths.
B.
Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Glass fiber blankets or batts by CertainTeed, Knauf, Manville, or Owens-Corning. Sizes as indicated. 1.
Provide commercial products certified for Superior Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) performance. Unfaced: ASTM C 665, Type I, Class A and passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. a.
Surface Burning Characteristics: When tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 1) 2)
3.
Foil Faced: ASTM C 665, Type III, Class A. a. b. c.
C.
Provide Class A facing at all installation locations. Foil-Facing Perms: Maximum 0.50. Tape: FSK-25 Class A, for sealing joints and foil facing penetrations.
Furred wall extruded polystyrene rigid board insulation products by Dow Chemical form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable materials and performance criteria by Owens Corning are also acceptable. 1. 2. 3.
Furred Wall: “STYROFOAM Score Board”, R = 5.0 per inch, 25 psi compressive strength, 1.6 lbs density, ASTM C578 Type IV. Thickness: As indicated. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer. a. b.
D.
Maximum Flame Spread: 10. Maximum Smoke Developed: 10.
Contech Brand PL300 Foam Board Adhesive by ChemRex, Inc. Foamgrab PS by Dakar Products, Inc.
Perimeter Wall Foundation Insulation: Extruded, closed cell polystyrene plastic board “Styrofoam Square Edge (SE)” by Dow Chemical forms the basis of design. Products with comparable materials and performance characteristics by Owens Corning and Pactiv Building Products are also acceptable. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Thermal Value: R @ 5.0 per inch. Density: 1.6 pcf, minimum. Compressive Strength: 25 psi, minimum. Compliance: ASTM C578, Type IV. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer.
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE a. b. 2.2 A.
01/13/12
“Contech Brand PL300 Foam Board Adhesive” by ChemRex, Inc. “Foamgrab PS” by Dacar Products, Inc.
AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install insulation to comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
B.
General Building Insulation Installation: Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. 1.
2.
Seal joints between closed-cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping. a.
3.
Install mineral-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: a.
b. 4.
5.
Tape joints, ruptures and penetrations in vapor retarder. Seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.
Use blanket widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96”, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping stapling flanges to flanges of metal studs. Retain insulation in place by metal clips and straps or integral pockets within window frames, spaced at intervals recommended in writing by insulation
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
6.
7. 8. C.
01/13/12
manufacturer to hold insulation securely in place without touching spandrel glass. Maintain cavity width of dimension indicated between insulation and glass. Stuff glass-fiber, loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft.. Protect batt insulation from excessive exposure to light fixtures and other such heat sources as recommended by the insulation manufacturer. Remove and replace glass fiber blanket or batt insulation that has become exposed to water.
Perimeter Foundation Wall Insulation: Install perimeter insulation on vertical surfaces by setting units in adhesive. 1. 2.
Apply insulation in single layer of required thickness over entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions. Fill all voids. Protect insulation from damage during backfilling.
END OF SECTION 072100
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 073113 - ASPHALT SHINGLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
B.
1.2 A.
Roof felt underlayment provided and installed under Division 06 Section “Rough Carpentry”. SUBMITTALS Data and Reports: 1. 2. 3.
B.
1.3 A.
Asphalt shingles. Self-adhering sheet underlayment. Metal flashing and trim. Ridge and hat vents. Accessories. Manufacturer’s representative periodic and final inspections. Extra stock.
Product Data: For each product indicated. Product test reports. Research/evaluation reports.
Samples: For asphalt shingles, metal flashing and trim, hat and ridge vents and vent flashing. QUALITY ASSURANCE Source Limitations: Obtain ridge and hip cap shingles and self-adhering sheet underlayment through one source from a single asphalt shingle manufacturer. 1.
Ridge vent system selected must be acceptable to asphalt shingle manufacturer.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Certified or authorized by shingle manufacturer for steep slope installation, and certified to install warranty projects.
C.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide asphalt shingle and related roofing materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
ASPHALT SHINGLES
073113 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1. D.
01/13/12
Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A, ASTM E 108 or UL 790, for application and roof slopes indicated.
Materials: Meet or exceed the following: 1. 2. 3.
ASTM D3018 Type 1. ASTM D3161 Type 1. ASTM D3462.
E.
Material Installation: Comply with material manufacturer’s written requirements, the National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for steep roofing, and the 2011 Ohio Building Code (O.B.C.) Section 1507 for shingle attachment.
F.
Flashing Fabrication and Installation: Comply with quality standards established in the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual", current edition, for the work.
G.
Manufacturer's Representative: Conduct periodic inspections to review installation procedures and satisfy warranty requirements.
H.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 A.
WARRANTY Warranties: Manufacturer's standard forms in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace asphalt shingles that fail in materials within specified warranty periods. 1.
2. 3.
B.
Material Warranty Period: Free from manufacturing defects for lifetime (minimum of 40 years) of installation beginning from date of Substantial Completion, prorated, with first five (5) years nonprorated. Algae-Discoloration Warranty Period: Asphalt shingles will not discolor ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion. Wind Damage Warranty Period: Free from damaged by winds up to the maximum wind speed of 70 m.p.h. for the first five years from date of Substantial Completion.
Contractor and Roof Installer Warranty: Contractor and roof installer jointly warrant roofing system, sheet metal, and rain drainage materials watertight for a period of two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion. Leaks or defects occurring during the warranty period corrected at no cost to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
ROOF SHINGLES Laminated fiberglass asphalt shingles by GAF form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable materials, performance criteria and colors by manufacturers listed are also acceptable.
ASPHALT SHINGLES
073113 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1. 2. 3. 4. B.
2. 3. 4.
A.
Felts: ASTM D 226 or ASTM D 4869, Type I, asphalt-saturated organic felts, nonperforated. Felt Underlayment Nails: Hot-dip galvanized steel wire with low profile capped heads or disc caps, 1" minimum diameter.
Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Valley, rake and eave liner “StormGuard” 36" wide, fiber glass reinforced, self-adhering rubberized asphalt sheet. 1.
2.3
Roof Shingles: "Slateline", Class A, fiberglass-reinforced and self-sealing with “Algae-Eater” protection, tapered cut-outs and "Shadow Accent" effect. Starting Material: Manufacturer's standard materials at eaves and ridges. Pre-Formed Ridge and Hip Shingles: Manufacturer's standard materials matching roof shingles. Color: “Weathered Slate”.
UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
1. B.
Celotex CertainTeed. Georgia Pacific. Tamko.
Materials: 1.
2.2
01/13/12
Thickness: 60 mils.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II, asbestos free.
B.
Roofing Nails: ASTM F 1667, hot-dip galvanized steel wire shingle nails, minimum 0.120” diameter, barbed or deformed shank, sharp-pointed, with a minimum 3/8” diameter flat head and of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4” into solid wood decking or extend at least 1/8” through roof deck sheathing. 1. 2.
Where nails are in contact with metal flashing, use nails made from same metal as flashing. Staples not permitted.
C.
Felt Underlayment Nails: Hot-dip galvanized steel wire with low profile capped heads or disc caps, 1" minimum diameter.
D.
Roof Vent (pipes) Flashing: Prefabricated rubber assemblies with integral base flashing and stainless steel screw-type clamps.
ASPHALT SHINGLES
073113 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.
UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION Single-Layer Felt Underlayment: Install single layer of felt underlayment on roof deck perpendicular to roof slope in parallel courses. Lap sides a minimum of 2” over underlying course. Lap ends a minimum of 4”. Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72”. Fasten with felt underlayment or roofing nails. Staples not permitted. 1.
Install felt underlayment on roof deck not covered by self-adhering sheet underlayment. Lap sides of felt over self-adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3” in direction to shed water. Lap ends of felt not less than 6” over selfadhering sheet underlayment.
B.
Felt Underlayment: Verify felt underlayment installation is complete and secure. Do not proceed until corrections are completed.
C.
Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free, on roof deck perpendicular to slope and lapped in direction to shed water. Lap sides not less than 3½”. Lap ends not less than 6” staggered 24” between courses. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within seven days. 1. 2.
Comply with manufacturer’s low-temperature installation restrictions if applicable. Install at following locations: a. b. c. d.
3.2 A.
METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION General: Install metal flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 1.
3.3 A.
Eave and rake edges: Extend from edge to 72” up roof surface. Hips, ridges and valleys: 24” wide on each side of hips, ridges and valleys. Dormers: Extend membrane 6” (minimum) up the wall and 12” on to the roof surface lapping over roof deck underlayment. Vent Pipes: Install 24” square piece over roof deck and seal tightly to pipe.
Install metal flashings according to recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual" and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual."
ASPHALT SHINGLE INSTALLATION Install asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions, recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual," and NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual, Asphalt Roofing."
ASPHALT SHINGLES
073113 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
B.
Install starter strip along lowest roof edge, consisting of an asphalt shingle strip at least 7” wide with self-sealing strip face up at roof edge. Extend asphalt shingles 3/4” over fascia at eaves and rakes.
C.
Install first and remaining courses of asphalt shingles stair-stepping diagonally across roof deck with manufacturer's recommended offset pattern at succeeding courses, maintaining uniform exposure. The "vertical" (racking) method not permitted or accepted. 1.
D.
Fasten asphalt shingles with a minimum of roofing nails required by the manufacturer or local code authority, which ever is greater, and located according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Valleys: 1.
Open Valleys: Cut and fit asphalt shingles at open valleys, trimming upper concealed corners of shingle strips. Maintain uniform width of exposed open valley from highest to lowest point. a. b. c.
Set valley edge of shingles in a 3” wide bed of asphalt roofing cement. Do not trim shingles to less than 12” width. Do not nail asphalt shingles to metal open valley flashings.
E.
Hat Vents: Install hat vents straight, aligned with adjacent units, and rigidly secured to roof deck. Locate units centered between trusses. Provide proper deck cut-out to maximize ventilation.
F.
Peak and Flashing Vents (Option): Install continuous vent flashing over asphalt shingles in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing. 1. 2. 3.
3.4 A.
Coordinate required deck rough opening dimensions with deck and framing contractor. Apply sealant at end plugs, section straps, and exposed fastener heads. Secure vertical leg to building structure with neoprene gasketed fasteners.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Warranty Installation Inspections: Arrange for shingle manufacturer's technical personnel to periodically inspect installation to review installation procedures and satisfy warranty requirements. Submit report to Architect. 1. 2.
Final Inspection: Arrange for system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect entire installation on completion and submit report to Architect. Repair or remove and replace components of system where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. Repaired and replaced areas shall be acceptable to the Owner.
ASPHALT SHINGLES
073113 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 3.5 A.
01/13/12
EXTRA STOCK Provide one square (minimum) of undamaged roof shingles to the Owner for future maintenance. Package materials in properly sized boxes and securely attach the following information to each container. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Manufacturer's name, phone, and fax numbers. Local representative's name, phone, and fax numbers. Installer's name, phone, and fax numbers. Product name and color. Product manufacturing location.
END OF SECTION 073113
ASPHALT SHINGLES
073113 - 6
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 074113 - METAL ROOF PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
1.2
Factory-formed and field-assembled, nonstructural, standing-seam concealedfastener, lap-seam metal roof panels. Metal fascia. Roof panel penetrations, flashings and sealants. Accessories. Manufacturer’s representative periodic and final inspections.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Metal roof system manufacturer and installer to provide a complete, integrated set of components and assemblies forming a metal roof capable of with standing structural and other designated loads, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure or infiltration of water or air into building interior. Includes roof panels, penetrations, flashings, rain drainage systems, sealants and accessories complying with requirements indicated.
B.
Wind-Uplift Resistance: Comply with UL 580 or FM I-90 for wind-uplift resistance class indicated.
C.
Structural Performance: Capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses, based on testing according to E 330 for non-structural panels. 1. 2.
Wind Loads: 90 mph basic wind speed. Minimum design wind pressures of lbf/sq. ft., acting inward or outward. Snow Loads: Indicated Structural drawings.
D.
Thermal Performance: Entire metal panel roofing system to provide for material expansion and contractions due to local seasonal temperature changes without buckling, producing excess stress on structure, anchors, or fasteners, or reducing performance ability. Interface between panels and expansion clips to provide for applicable movement in each direction along longitudinal direction.
E.
Weather Conditions: Entire roofing system including metal panels, flashing, expansion joints, and penetrations detailed to provide watertight roof under peak weather conditions. 1.
Air Infiltration: Entire metal roof system maximum static pressure air infiltration of 0.046 cfm per sq. ft. with 1.57 psf air pressure differential when tested in
METAL ROOF PANELS
074113 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
2.
F.
1.3 A.
SUBMITTALS Data and Reports:
2. 3. 4.
2.
A.
Drawn to scale and coordinating metal roof panel installation with penetrations and roof-mounted items. Include dimensions of fabricated work, reference dimensions to the structure, layout showing panel lengths used in each area and erection sequences.
Samples: 1.
1.4
Include system description, material base sheet gauge, seam height, panel oncenter spacing, coordination required with other trades, finish and sealant required, Include details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures and accessories. Include roof penetration flashing standard and custom details required by project conditions. Identify locations where continuous panels can not be provided due to production or delivery restrictions, or jobsite conditions. Provide detail of end lap conditions.
Coordination Drawings: 1.
D.
Product data for each type of metal roof panel and accessory indicated. Material certificates. Product test reports. Field quality-control inspection reports. Maintenance data.
Shop Drawings: Show layouts of metal roof, fascia panels, and rain drainage system including plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work. 1.
C.
accordance with ASTM E283-91, or 0.014 cfm per sq. ft. with 1.57 psf air pressure differential when tested in accordance with ASTM E1680-95. Water Penetration: Entire metal roof system shall have no uncontrolled water penetration (dynamic water pressure), other than condensation, when exposed to dynamic rain at 6.24 psf differential static pressure when tested for not less than fifteen minutes in accordance with ASTM E331-93 or ASTM E1646-95.
Roof Penetration Flashings: Provide roof penetration flashings designed and installed to provide a weathertight seal.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B.
01/13/12
For each panel profile and exposed finish.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications:
METAL ROOF PANELS
074113 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1.
2.
01/13/12
An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer with a minimum of two years experience applying similar types of materials with successful completion of projects with similar scope. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations and details, and the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual", sixth edition (2003) recommendations for fabrication and installation of the work.
B.
Roof Panel Penetrations: Each roof panel penetration executed, flashed and sealed by the erector in compliance with roofing panel manufacturer’s standard details, techniques and materials required to produce a weathertight installation. Non-standard penetrations reviewed and approved by roofing panel manufacturer prior to installation.
C.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site and comply with project requirements. Notify participants at least five (5) working days before conference. 1.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. D.
1.5
Meet with the Owner’s representative, General Contractor, Architect; metal roofing erector; roofing system manufacturer's representative and subcontractors whose work interfaces with or affects roofing system erection, including required roof penetrations and roof-mounted equipment. Review established on-time delivery schedule of metal roofing components. Establish trade-related job schedules, including installation of mechanical roof curbs, roof penetrations, and roof mounted equipment. Establish roof panel installation schedules and work methods that will prevent panel damage. Review building manufacturer’s requirements for details, penetrations, flashings and sealants. Establish areas on the job site designated as work and storage areas. Establish weather and working temperature conditions. Establish provisions for protecting installed roof areas during the remainder of the Project. Establish and schedule metal roofing manufacturer’s field quality control and warranty inspection requirements. Establish provisions for on-site monitoring after the work is completed.
Manufacturer's Representative: Conduct periodic inspections to review installation procedures, and satisfy installation and warranty requirements. COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of roof panel penetrations. Field verify number, size and locations with other contractors requiring penetrations prior to installation. Refer to the drawings.
B.
Coordinate building manufacturer’s field quality control inspections required to review installation quality, and approve issuing or co-issuing noted warranties.
METAL ROOF PANELS
074113 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1.6 A.
WARRANTY Watertightness Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace metal roof panel components or assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b.
2. 3.
4. 5.
6. B.
01/13/12
Structural failures, including rupturing, cracking or puncturing. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes and other materials beyond normal weathering.
Warranty limited to the value of the installed metal roof assembly. Warranty signed by metal roof system manufacturer and his authorized installer, agreeing at their option to replace or repair defective materials and workmanship as required to maintain the metal roof system in watertight condition. Warranty shall not exclude conditions such as flashing, valleys, penetrations, etc. which are an integral part of the roof system. Metal roof system manufacturer shall review installation details and perform on site inspections as required to certify proper watertight roofing material installation. Warranty Period: Twenty (20) years from date of Substantial Completion.
Panel Finishes Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal roof panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1.
Deterioration includes the following: a. b. c.
2.
Cracking, chipping, peeling or other mechanical failure of paint to adhere to the substrate. Fading or color change in excess of five (5) hunter delta E units as determined by ASTM D2244-79. Chalking in excess of a numerical rating of eight (8) as determined by ASTM D4224-89.
Fluoropolymer Finish Warranty Period: Twenty (20) years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
METAL ROOF PANELS Factory fabricated, concealed fastener metal roofing panels by DMI form the basis-ofdesign. Products with comparable materials, panel profiles, performance characteristics and colors by manufacturers listed are also acceptable. 1. 2.
AEP/Span. MBCI.
METAL ROOF PANELS
074113 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE B.
01/13/12
Double-Lock Seam Metal Roof Panels: Standing seams incorporate a continuous engineered interlocking connection with factory concealed anchor clips that prevent the passage of water. 1. 2. 3.
System Name: "Double-Lock DL1518". Panel Profile: Smooth. Material: 24 Gauge (.024") Galvalume Aluminum-Zinc Alloy Coated Steel Grade C meeting ASTM A792. a.
b. c. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Seam Height: 1½". Major-Rib Spacing: 18" o.c. Maximum Estimated Panel Length: 20’±. Uplift Rating: UL 90. Flashing: Standard and custom exposed flashings of the same material and finish as roof panels or as specified on the Drawings if different. Includes: a. b. c. d. e. f.
9.
b.
11.
Wrapped fascias. Drip edges. Rake wall flashing and counterflashing. Peaks. Miscellaneous trim and flashings. Formed crickets and scuppers.
Sealants: a.
10.
Exterior Finish: 70% Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 Fluorocarbon coating with top side dry film thickness of 1.1 +/-.01 mil dry film thickness and wash coat and primer of .04 +/- .01 mil total dry film thickness on reverse side. Color: Charcoal Grey. Panel Protection: Strippable film applied to panel topside. Film removed during installation.
Factory Applied: Seam sealant, non-curing butyl designed for metal to metal connection in concealed joints. Field Applied: Butyl based sealant and/or tape as recommended by system manufacturer, and compatible with EPDM roofing materials.
Clips: Fixed or floating type to accommodate thermal movement as selected by system manufacturer. Includes cleats, pressure plates and accessories required for weathertight installation. Fasteners: Type, size and spacing as determined by system manufacturer. a.
b. c. d.
Exposed screw fasteners: 300 series alloy stainless steel with integrally bonded neoprene washers or Zinc Aluminum Cast head covers with integral neoprene gaskets. Exposed pop rivets: Stainless steel, rivet and mandrel, self plugging type. Exposed pop rivets painted to match the metal roof system. Concealed fasteners for anchor clips and flashing attachment: As selected by system manufacturer. Exposed fasteners not permitted except to fasten flashing, at fixing points, or as indicated on the shop drawings.
METAL ROOF PANELS
074113 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2.2 A.
01/13/12
METAL FASCIA Standard metal fascia material by DMI form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable materials, panel profiles, performance criteria and colors by manufacturers listed are also acceptable. 1. 2. 3.
AEP/Span. ATAS International, Inc. MBCI.
B.
Fascia: Standard metal fascia material which includes: 1. Wrapped formed fascia. 2. Drip edges. 3. Miscellaneous trim and flashings. 4. Color: To be determined based on location.
C.
Concealed Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended type, size and length required for installation conditions.
D.
Sealants: Refer to section below for required sealants by the manufacturer.
2.3
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15 mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
B.
Felt Underlayment: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.
C.
Self-Adhering Underlayment: "Ultra" by Grace Construction Products. Products with comparable materials and performance characteristics approved by metal roofing manufacturer are also acceptable. 1. 2.
Composition: Butyl rubber based adhesive backed by layer of high density cross laminated polyethylene. Thickness: 30 mils.
D.
Slip Sheet: Building paper, minimum 5 lb/100 sq. ft., rosin sized.
E.
Snow Guards: Prefinished cast-aluminum "Model #640 Snowboss" traditional design by M.J. Mullane Co. Products with comparable designs, sizes, materials and finishes by other manufacturers may be submitted to Architect for review at least ten (10) days prior to the Bid Date. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Material: Aluminum alloy "Almag 35". Finish: Factory applied Dupont "Imron". Color: Match metal roofing. Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard mounting sealant adhesive for substrates indicated. Mechanical fastening to metal roof panels not permitted.
METAL ROOF PANELS
074113 - 6
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2.4 A.
PANEL MATERIALS Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Prepainted with Coil Coating: Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G90 coating designation; structural quality. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40; structural quality. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. Exposed Finishes: a.
5. B.
High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat, thermocured system with fluoropolymer coats containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with physical properties and coating performance requirements of AAMA 2604.
Concealed Finish: White or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish.
Panel Sealants: 1. 2. 3.
2.5
01/13/12
Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing; ½" wide and 1/8" thick. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; as recommended in writing by metal roof panel manufacturer. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.
FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate and finish metal roof panels, flashing, trim and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.
B.
Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel.
C.
Where indicated, fabricate metal roof panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, in a manner that will minimize noise from movements within panel assembly.
D.
Fabricate panels in continuous lengths without horizontal end lap joints unless production or delivery restrictions, or jobsite conditions do not permit.
E.
Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.
METAL ROOF PANELS
074113 - 7
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE F.
01/13/12
Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A.
Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment and building-paper slip sheet on roof sheathing under metal roof panels. Use adhesive for temporary anchorage. Apply at locations indicated on Drawings, in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2".
B.
Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free, on roof sheathing under metal roof panels. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. 1.
C. 3.2 A.
Apply slip sheet over underlayment before installing metal roof panels. METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL General: Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge, unless otherwise indicated or restricted by production, shipping, or jobsite limitations. Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
B.
Apply over entire roof, in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6" staggered 24" between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3½". Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.
Field cutting of metal roof panels by torch is not permitted. Rigidly fasten eave end of metal roof panels and allow ridge end free movement due to thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels. Provide metal closures at peaks and hip caps. Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition. Lap metal flashing over metal roof panels to allow moisture to run over and off the material. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions wherever possible. Hem sheet metal flashing exposed edges with at least ½" fold under.
Fasteners: 1.
Steel Roof Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior and galvanized steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.
METAL ROOF PANELS
074113 - 8
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
C.
Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.
D.
Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of metal roof panel assemblies. 1. 2.
3.3 A.
FIELD-ASSEMBLED METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal panels to supports with concealed clips at each standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. 1. 2.
3.4 A.
Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners. Apply butyl based sealant where fasteners penetrate PVC roofing at copings. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved motorized seamer tool so clip, metal roof panel, and factory-applied sealant are completely engaged.
ACCESSORY INSTALLATION General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1.
2.
B.
Seal metal roof panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Seal side joints where recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
Snow Guards: Install double row of snow guards, one (1) per panel, alternating height. Refer to the Drawings. 1. 2.
Prepare and prime locations for snow guard attachment. Do not damage adjacent finish. Set units square, straight, and properly adhered to the roof panel. Remove excess adhesive.
METAL ROOF PANELS
074113 - 9
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 3.5 A.
3.6 A.
01/13/12
CLEANING AND PROTECTION Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Warranty Installation Inspections: Arrange for system manufacturer's technical personnel to periodically inspect installation to review installation procedures and satisfy warranty requirements. Submit report to Architect. 1. 2.
3.
Final Inspection: Arrange for system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect entire installation on completion and submit report to Architect. Repair or remove and replace components of system where test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. Repaired and replaced areas shall be acceptable to the Owner. If additional is work required, the manufacturer shall provide additional final inspection(s) to verify acceptance of completed additional work.
END OF SECTION 074113
METAL ROOF PANELS
074113 - 10
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 074243 - COMPOSITE WALL PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1.
2. 3. 1.2 A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS System Design: A dry joint system incorporating a means to drain water to the exterior. 1. 2.
B.
Individual panels within the system capable of removal. Joint Design: Dry.
Structural Performance: Capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses, based on testing according to ASTM E 330: 1. 2.
C.
Factory-formed concealed-fastener, metal composite panels including attachment system components and accessories required for weathertight system for new storefront entrance in-fill. Flashings. Installation accessories
Wind Loads: 90 mph basic wind speed. Wind Exposure Category: B.
Thermal Performance: Metal panel systems to provide for material expansion and contractions due to local seasonal temperature changes without buckling, producing excess stress on structure, anchors, or fasteners, or reducing performance ability. Interface between panels and expansion clips to provide for applicable movement in each direction along longitudinal direction. 1.
Temperature Change (Range): Systems accommodate 120 deg ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces.
D.
Air Infiltration: When tested in accordance with ASTM E 283, air infiltration at 1.56 lbs per sq. ft. shall not exceed 0.06 cubic feet per minute per sq. ft. of wall area.
E.
Water Penetration: No water infiltration permitted in any system under a differential static pressure of 6.24 lbs per sq. ft. after 15 minutes of exposure in compliance with ASTM E 331.
1.3 A.
SUBMITTALS Data and Reports:
COMPOSITE WALL PANELS
074243 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1. 2. 3. 4. B.
1.4 A.
B. 1.5 A.
Product Data: For each type of metal panel and accessory indicated. Material certificates. Product test reports. Maintenance data.
Shop Drawings: Show layouts of metal panels, including plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work. 1.
C.
Include details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures and accessories.
Samples: For each exposed finish. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. 1.
Installer's responsibilities include fabricating and installing metal panel assemblies and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility.
2.
Non Qualified Installers: Must receive (2) two days of field training.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. WARRANTY Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b.
2. B.
01/13/12
Structural failures, including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes and other materials beyond normal weathering.
Warranty Period: One (5) year from date of Substantial Completion.
Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. 2.
(PVDF) Fluoropolymer Finish Warranty Period: Ten (20) years from date of Substantial Completion. NQ20 Finish Coating: Twenty (10) years from date of Substantial Completion.
COMPOSITE WALL PANELS
074243 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
MANUFACTURERS Factory fabricated metal composite panels by (Omega Panel Products) Laminators, Inc form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable materials, system designs, panel profiles, performance characteristics and colors by manufacturers listed are also acceptable. 1. 2. 3. 4.
2.2 A.
PANEL MATERIALS Metal Composite Panels: Two aluminum face sheets sandwiching a plastic core. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
B.
System: “Omega-Lite” clip and one-piece tight-fit molding system. Aluminum Face Sheets: .032” thickness, ASTM B 209. Core: Corrugated polyallomer (CPA) core. Aluminum Backing Sheet: .015 thickness, ASTM B 209. Panel Thickness: 6 mm (.25”). Panel Weight: 1.49 lbs/ft². Finish: Three-coat, thermocured system with Kynar 500 containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight. Panel Color: Refer to each panel listed below. Molding Color: Refer to each panel listed below. Protective Cover: Strippable protective covering.
ACP-1: 1. 2.
C.
Alcan Composites USA, Inc. Alcoa Architectural Products. Mitsubishi Chemical USA. Sobotec Ltd.
Face Color: To be determined. Molding Color: Same as face color.
Accessories: Manufacturer’s standard materials and components. Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Aluminum extrusions. Fasteners, concealed and non-corrosive. Mounting clips, full panel length. Intermittent clips not permitted. Plastic shims. Sub-girts if required, G-90 galvanized steel. Joint filler strips, same material and color as panels. Miscellaneous flashings, same material and color as panels. Mechanical penetration flashings, same material and color as panels. Sealants: Panel manufacturer’s selected materials required for installation conditions.
COMPOSITE WALL PANELS
074243 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2.3 A.
FABRICATION General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. 1. 2.
B.
01/13/12
Form panel lines, breaks, and angles to be sharp and true, with surfaces free from warp and buckle. Fabricate panels with panel stiffeners as required to maintain fabrication tolerances and to withstand design loads.
Fabricate metal panels in a manner that eliminates condensation on interior side of panel and with joints between panels designed to form weathertight seals.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.
INSTALLATION General: Install metal panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1.
2. 3. B.
Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer. 1.
C. 3.2 A.
Anchor metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, protective coatings, separators, sealants and other miscellaneous items as required to complete flashing and trim system. Fasten mounting extrusions and metal panels and allow for movement due to thermal expansion and contraction. Install concealed fasteners. Install panels plumb, level, square and free of distortion or surface imperfections. Maintain joint patterns indicated.
Coat back side of aluminum wall panels with bituminous coating where wall panels will contact wood, ferrous metals or cementitious construction.
Penetrations: Seal all penetrations per Manufacturer’s written recommendations. CLEANING AND PROTECTION Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal wall panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal wall panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
COMPOSITE WALL PANELS
074243 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE B.
01/13/12
After metal wall panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions and dirt.
END OF SECTION 074243
COMPOSITE WALL PANELS
074243 - 5
NEW BILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 074600 - FIBER CEMENT PANELS, TRIM AND SOFFIT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2.
1.2
Fiber-cement panels, trim and vented soffit. Flashing, trim and accessories.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples: Full-size units of each type and profile of siding panel and trim in each color, texture, and pattern required.
C.
Research/Evaluation Reports: For each type of product required.
1.3 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Fiber-Cement Products and Accessories: 1. 2. 3.
Non-Asbestos Fiber-Cement Products: Comply with ASTM C1186 Type A, Grade II. Non-Combustible: Comply with ASTM E136. Surface Burning Characteristics: When tested according to ASTM E 84. a. b. c.
1.4 A.
Flame spread: 0. Fuel Contributed: 0. Smoke Developed: 5.
WARRANTY Fiber-Cement Products: Provide manufacturer's written material warranty from date of Substantial Completion. 1. 2.
Siding Panel Material: 30-year limited for product. Trim Materials: 15-year limited, transferable for product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
FIBER-CEMENT PANELS, TRIM AND SOFFIT Fiber-cement panels, trim, vented soffit and accessories by James Hardie Building Products, Inc form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable profiles, material characteristics and performance, and finishes by the following manufacturers are also acceptable. 1.
Cemplank, Inc.
FIBER CEMENT PANELS, TRIM AND SOFFIT
074600 - 1
NEW BILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2. 3. B.
CertainTeed Corp. Nichiha Products.
Fiber-Cement Recessed Panels: 1. 2.
Panels: "HardiPanel Vertical Siding Panels”. Texture and Finish: “Smooth" surface with factory applied primer and field finish color, Refer to the Drawings for colors. If field cuts are required, provide touch-up paint to match on exposed edges of panels. a. b.
3.
4.
b.
c. d.
Panel Molding: Siding H-Mold, 5/16” deep by length as shown on the Drawings. Material: Custom die-extruded from heavy duty, 6063 T-5 extruded aluminum alloy with proprietary coating, shop paint to match the adjacent panels. Fasteners: Size and spacing as recommended by both the molding and panel manufacturers. Sealant: Type as recommended by both the molding and panel manufacturers. Provide in joints where direct exposure to rain and wind driven water will infiltrate the joints between the fiber-cement panels and the aluminum H-Molds. General Contractor to verify locations in the field with the Architect before any installation occurs.
Fiber-Cement Trim: 1. Trim: “HardiTrim” Boards and Crown Mouldings. 2. Texture and Finish: “Smooth" surface with factory applied primer and field finish color, Refer to the Drawings for colors. If field cuts are required, provide touch-up paint to match on exposed edges of boards. a. b. 3. 4.
D.
Thickness: 5/16" thick. Widths: As indicated on the Drawings.
Material: Portland cement, ground sand, cellulose fiber, select additives and water. Contains no asbestos, fiberglass or formaldehyde. Complies with ASTM Standard Specification C1186 Grade II, Type A. Accessories: “Xtreme Trim” by R.H. Tamlyn & Sons, LP form the basis-of-design. No substitutions are permitted. a.
C.
01/13/12
Thickness: ¾” or 1" as indicated on the Drawings. Widths: As indicated on the Drawings.
Texture and Finish: “Smooth” surface with factory applied primer and field finish color, Refer to the Drawings for colors. Material: Portland cement, ground sand, cellulose fiber, select additives and water. Contains no asbestos, fiberglass or formaldehyde. Complies with ASTM Standard Specification C1186 Grade II, Type A.
Fiber-Cement Vented Soffit: 1. 2.
Vented Panels: 1/4" thick panels "HardiSoffit Panels”. Texture and Finish: “Vented Smooth" surface with factory applied primer and field finish color, Refer to the Drawings for colors. If field cuts are required, provide touch-up paint to match on exposed edges of panels.
FIBER CEMENT PANELS, TRIM AND SOFFIT
074600 - 2
a. b. 3.
4.
E.
01/13/12
Vinyl Bug Screen: Secure by staples or other means of securing as recommended by the manufacturer to the inside, non-visible face. Cover all vented holes completely to prevent bugs from entering building. Material: Portland cement, ground sand, cellulose fiber, select additives and water. Contains no asbestos, fiberglass or formaldehyde. Complies with ASTM Standard Specification C1186 Grade II, Type A.
Accessories: 1. 2. 3.
F.
NEW BILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Thickness: 1/4" thick. Widths: As indicated on the Drawings.
Starter Strips: ¼” thick preservative treated wood. Metal Flashings: Refer to Division 07 Section “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim”. Caulking: High quality, paintable and complying with ASTM C 920. Solvent based “Pro Series Quad Advanced Formula Sealant” by OSI Sealants.
Fasteners: Type size, length and spacing as required by panel manufacturer for each application. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Cold Formed Metal Framing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion resistant screw fasteners. Wood Blocking: Manufacturer's standard common hot-dipped galvanized nails. Adhesive: “Liquid Nails” or panel manufacturer’s approved product. Staples not permitted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.
INSTALLATION Coordinate installation with flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure proper sequencing. 1.
B.
Verify wall penetration locations and sizes.
Install panels and trim accurately to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true, and accurately cut and fit. Secure materials to subframing with weather-resistant fasteners of proper type, size and length. 1.
Install trim with minimum number of splices. a.
Fiber-Cement Trim: Provide trim in continuous lengths. Install with minimum number of splices when material lengths require joints. 1)
b. c.
Provide scarf joints at running trim where solid fastening to subframing can be made. Provide butt joints at exterior and interior angles, except as otherwise indicated. Install flashing provided under Division 07 Section “Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.”
Aluminum and Vinyl Trim: Lap joints to direct water from entering trim. Apply caulking at required locations.
FIBER CEMENT PANELS, TRIM AND SOFFIT
074600 - 3
2.
NEW BILDING FOR 01/13/12 LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Install panels butt jointed over solid subframing. Use longest lengths to minimize joints. a.
Apply caulking at manufacturer’s recommended locations.
C.
Clean exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
D.
Clean up debris and cuttings daily. Store only in fireproof containers and remove from site.
END OF SECTION 074600
FIBER CEMENT PANELS, TRIM AND SOFFIT
074600 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/12/12
SECTION 075423 - POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes PVC adhered membrane roofing system and the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Roof and tapered insulation. Flashing, adhesives, and sealants. Parapet wall cap flashings. Flashing all roof membrane penetrations and terminations. Miscellaneous accessories. Membrane manufacturer’s field quality control inspections.
B.
Openings, framing and nailers for new roof curbs and penetrations provide by General Contractor.
C.
Roof curbs, vents and others penetrations provided by trade requiring penetration.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other Work. Include tapered insulation layouts with indicated slopes and heights at each required location.
C.
Samples: For each product included in membrane roofing system.
D.
Research/evaluation reports and maintenance data.
E.
Warranty with requirements and conditions.
F.
Documentation showing contractor is an authorized system installer.
G.
Documentation showing roof insulation materials comply with FM Standard 4450/4470, or written statement stating system installer intends to properly isolate insulation from metal deck with an approved thermal barrier to be provided and installed under this Section.
H.
Manufacturer’s warranty inspection reports.
1.3 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products.
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
075423 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/12/12
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain components for membrane roofing system from or approved by roofing membrane manufacturer.
C.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide membrane roofing materials with the firetest-response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL, FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.
D.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site and comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." Notify participants at least five (5) working days before conference. 1.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 1.4 A.
1.5 A.
Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Minimum class C; ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes indicated.
Meet with the Owner’s representative, General Contractor, Architect; roofing installer; roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck installer and subcontractors whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment. Establish trade-related job schedules, including installation of mechanical roof curbs, pipe penetrations and equipment. Establish roof schedules and work methods that will prevent roof damage. Establish areas on the job site designated as work and storage areas. Establish weather and working temperature conditions. Establish provisions for protecting installed roof areas during the remainder of the Project. Establish manufacturer’s warranty inspection requirements and schedule. Establish provisions for on-site monitoring after the work is completed.
PROJECT CONDITIONS Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. WARRANTY Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes roof leaks. 1.
2.
Provide roofing manufacturer's written fifteen (15) year total roofing system warranty from date of Substantial Completion. Wind-lift coverage includes maximum peak gust wind speed coverage up to 55 miles per hour (88 km/h). Installer responsible for coordinating manufacturer’s required notifications and inspections.
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
075423 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE B.
01/12/12
Installers Warranty: Provide installer’s written warranty covering roofing work for a period of two (2) years from the date of Substantial Completion
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
MANUFACTURERS Elastic sheet (PVC) membrane roofing system by Duro-Last Roofing, Inc. forms the basis-of-design. Products with comparable materials and performance criteria by manufactures listed are also acceptable. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
B.
Firestone Building Products Company. Flex Membrane International, Inc. GAF Materials Corporation. GenFlex Roofing Systems. Johns Manville International, Inc. Mule-Hide Products Co., Inc. Sika Corporation US.
Membrane: “Duro-Last Membrane”, proprietary thermoplastic formulation consisting of resins, plasticizers, stabilizers, fungicides, flame retardant, and U.V. absorbers laminated to weft-inserted polyester fabric. 1. 2. 3.
Thickness: 40 mils, minimum. Exposed Face Color: White. Flashings: a. b. c. d. e.
C.
“Duro-Flash”, 1/8” x 3” extruded pad with 6” skirt. “Duro-Last Vinyl Coated Metal”, 24 gauge, hot dipped galvanized, Grade 90 steel with 16 mil “Duro-Last sheet laminated to one side. Round Pipe Flashings: Manufacturer’s prefabricated units for 1”-15” diameter pipes with factory welded “Duro-Last” skirts. Provide custom flashings where required. Exposed color to match roof membrane. n. Insulation thickness adjusted as required to meet selected R-value.
Roof Insulation: Material selection at contractor’s option. Selected materials must comply with membrane manufacturer’s requirements for system installation, and provide warranty noted in Part 1.5. 1.
Rigid Polyisocyanurate Board: “ES Foam I” rigid, closed cell, 2 lbs density polyisocyanurate foam with a fiberglass reinforced paper facer heat laminated on both the top and bottom of foam core. Other membrane manufacturers approval of other insulation manufacturers is acceptable. a.
2.
R-Value: 6.6 per inch thickness.
Rigid Extruded Polystyrene: 1.5 lbs density. Manufacturer’s as approved by selected membrane manufacturer.
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
075423 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE a. 3. 4. 5.
6. D.
01/12/12
R-Value: 5.0 per inch thickness.
Provide facers cover boards or slip sheets required by membrane roofing manufacturer. Membrane roofing manufacturer must approve installation of their system over selected insulation. Selected insulation must be capable of being installed under Project conditions indicated. Additional materials and costs required to install selected insulation provided by this Contractor. Materials must comply with FM Standard 4450/4470.
Tapered Insulation: Extruded polystyrene or polyisocyanurate foam core with compatible roof membrane facer, ¼” slope. Products by Apache Products Co., Atlas Roofing Corp., Dow Chemical Co., Johns Manville and Rmax are acceptable. 1.
Provide pre-cut tapered hip and valley members.
E.
Breather Vent: “Duro-Last Two-Way Breather Vent”, one per each 1,000 square feet of roof area.
F.
Fasteners: Manufacturer’s standard weather-resistant plates and fasteners of size, length and spacing required for installation conditions.
G.
Wall Cap Flashing: Refer to Division 07 Section “Sheet Metal Flashing And Trim”.
H.
Pipe Flashing: Manufacturer's standard premolded pipe flashing. Coordinate sizes and locations with plumbing, mechanical and electrical drawings and specifications.
I.
Where pre-molded pipe flashing is not applicable, provide fabricated enclosures similar to SMACNA Fig. 4-15A, 24 gauge galvanized steel. Size as conditions require. Furnish: Primed.
J.
Hat Vents (As Required): Prefinished aluminum units by Air Vent, Inc. Products with comparable design, performance criteria and finishes by Lomanco and Solar Group, Inc are acceptable. 1. 2. 3.
2.2 A.
Model: Round, aluminum with 144 sq. in. net free area per unit. Finish: Powder-coated or Mill. Color: To be painted to match roofing or adjacent material color.
WALKWAYS Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, solid-rubber, slip-resisting, surface-textured walkway rolls, approximately 3/16 inch thick, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer.
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
075423 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/12/12
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.
SUBSTRATE BOARD INSTALLATION Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together. 1.
3.2
Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.
B.
Comply with membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.
C.
Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.
D.
Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2” [1½”] or greater, install 2 or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6” in each direction. 1. 2. 3.
E.
Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows: 1. 2. 3.
F.
A.
Prime surface of concrete deck with asphalt primer at a rate of 3/4 gal./100 sq. ft. and allow primer to dry. Set each layer of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt, applied within plus or minus 25 deg F of equiviscous temperature. Set each layer of insulation in a cold fluid-applied adhesive.
Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck. 1.
3.3
Butt boards together and neatly cut around openings, penetrations, and projections. Maintain recommended clearances around heated penetrations. Fill gaps greater than ¼” with same material as insulation.
Fasten to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.
BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
075423 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/12/12
B.
Apply solvent-based bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing.
C.
Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with sheet flashing.
D.
Clean seam areas and overlap and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.
E.
Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars.
3.4 A.
3.5
WALKWAY INSTALLATION Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. FULLY ADHERED PVC ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A.
Install roofing membrane over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Install prefabricated roof material fully adhered to the insulation or parapet walls. 1.
2. 3.
4.
5.
6.
Install roofing membrane over area to receive roofing according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing membrane and allow to relax before installing. Lap roofing membrane sections as recommended by the manufacturer. Bonding Adhesive: Apply solvent-based bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of roofing membrane at rate required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing roofing membrane. Do not apply bonding adhesive to splice area of roofing membrane. Bonding Adhesive: Apply water-based bonding adhesive to substrate at rate required by manufacturer and immediately install roofing membrane. Do not apply bonding adhesive to splice area of roofing membrane. Weld top membrane to bottom membrane using a hand held welder or an automatic welding machine approved by membrane manufacturer. Provide minimum 1½" wide continuous weld. Inspect field-welded seams and repair deficiencies to manufacturer's inspection.
C.
Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
D.
Air Vents: Install one vent for every 1,000 square feet of deck membrane. Evenly space vents across the roof area in straight rows centered between rows of fastening tabs. Do not install vents in valleys.
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
075423 - 6
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 3.6
01/12/12
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform roof tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.
B.
Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect.
C.
Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION 075423
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING
075423 - 7
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
B.
1.2
Wall caps and copings. Formed roof drainage. Roof drainage scuppers. Formed wall flashing and trim. Miscellaneous flashings.
Flashing within PVC membrane roof systems and at locations where membrane roofing abuts different materials provided under Division 07 Section “Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Roofing”. SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show layouts, profiles, shapes, seams, dimensions, and details for fastening, joining, supporting, and anchoring sheet metal flashing and trim.
C.
Samples: For each type and color of sheet metal flashing and trim.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Sixth Edition." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
B.
Comply with requirements of ANSI/SPRI ES-1 2003 “Wind Design Standard for Edge Systems used with Low Slope Roofing Systems” for the following type of metal roof edge systems / tests: 1. RE-1: Roof edge terminations for mechanically attached and ballasted roofing systems, holding power. 2. RE-2: Metal edge flashing, pull-off test. 3. RE-3: Metal wall coping, pull-off test.
C.
Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
D.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
MANUFACTURED ITEMS Wall Cap Flashing: "Permasnap Coping", .050", .063, .080 (thickness to be determined by the manufacturer for the width of the coping) aluminum, by W.P. Hickman. Products with comparable design, materials, performance criteria and finishes Cheney, Construction Specialties, and MM Systems are also acceptable. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
B.
Coping: Prefinished formed .050" aluminum, similar to "Econosnap 2 EC2-550" by W.P. Hickman Co. Products with comparable design, materials, performance criteria and finishes Cheney, Construction Specialties, and MM Systems are also acceptable. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
2.2 A.
Mounting Clips: 20 gauge galvanized steel, fabricated to shape shown. Concealed Splice Plates: .032" aluminum, to match flashing profile and finish. Provide at cap section joints. Coping Chairs: Molded styrene chair at 5'-0" o.c. Provide custom sizes required. Colors: Kynar 500 (Group II) finish on exposed surfaces; selected from manufacturer’s standards.
Provide custom sizes required. Custom fabricate unit to required shape. Spring Clips: Galvanized steel. Concealed Splice Plates: Match fascia. Corner Units: Prefabricated with continuously mitered and welded seams. Fabricate spring clip and fascia to match condition and profile shown. Finish: Kynar 500 (Group II) finish on exposed surfaces. Color: Selected from manufacturer's standards.
ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other accessories as required. Fabricate in continuous sections with minimum 96” long sections. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion-joint covers and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters. 1.
Profile: Continuous. a. b.
2.
Half-round profile similar to SMACNA Fig. 1-3A. Drops: Fabricated to seal at gutter penetration and nest inside downspout, similar to SMACNA Fig. 1-24C, round.
Mounting Style: a. b. c.
Half-round profile, prefabricated bracket with spring clamp: SMACNA Fig. 1-19B. Half-round profile, prefabricated strap hanger: SMACNA Fig. 1-20A. Half-round mounting brackets by CSC Sheet Metal.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1) 2) 3) 3.
Aluminum: .027” or .032”.
Expansion Joints: Lap type, similar to SMACNA Figs. 1-5, 1-6 and 1-7. a. b.
5.
Lap joints in direction of water flow. Spacing: 50’ o.c., maximum.
Spacers and Brackets: Flat-stock spacers and brackets fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by SMACNA but not less than twice the gutter thickness. Spacing: 3'-0" o.c. a.
Brackets: 1) 2)
b. 6. 7.
Spacers: 1/16” x 1”, space alternately with brackets.
Bronze wire ball downspout strainer.
Downspouts: Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors. 1.
Profile: Sizes as indicated on the Drawings. a.
2. 3.
4.
Round: Similar to SMACNA Fig. 1-32A.
Materials: .027" prefinished aluminum. Fabricated Hanger Style: a. b.
Round: Similar to SMACNA Fig. 1-35D. Spacing: 60” o.c.
Manufactured Hanger Style: a.
C.
Aluminum: 3/16” x 1”. Galvanized Steel: 1/8” x 1”.
Gutter Bead Reinforcing Bars: 1/8” flat stock material to match gutter. Strainer: Galvanized steel, similar to SMACNA Fig. 1-24D, round. a.
B.
Aluminum Bracket: “#10 Combo Half Round Circle & Shank”, Aluminum Strap Hanger: “Half Round Rival Strap Hanger”. Finish: Prefinished white. Field finish to match gutter color.
Material: Provide minimum gauge for gutter size and material as listed in SMACNA Table 1-5 unless noted otherwise a.
4.
01/13/12
Spacing: 60” o.c.
Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers of dimensions required with closure flange trim to exterior, 4” wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4” beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof. 1.
Overflow Scupper: Similar to SMACNA Fig. 1-30A and 30B.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2.
Material: a. b.
D.
Profile: By CopperCraft Architectural Specialty Sheet Metal or similar. a.
2. 3. 4.
Ledge Flashing:
2. 3. 4.
Profiles: Similar to SMACNA Fig 4-21, Section BB. Shapes as indicated and required to cover ledge indicated. Fabrication: Provide sections in longest lengths practical. Provide lapped joints at section joints. Material: 0.032” aluminum with high-performance organic finish. Color: Selected from manufacturer's standard palette.
Miscellaneous Exposed Flashing: 1. 2. 3. 4.
C.
Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.0276” thick.
WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
1.
B.
Type: “Baron” Conductor head.
Tailpiece: Match downspout profile. Mounting: SMACNA Fig. 1-26A or 1-27A. Material: a. b.
A.
Aluminum: 0.032” thick, prefinished. Galvanized Steel: 24 gauge, primed.
Conductor Heads: Fabricate with flanged back and stiffened top edge and of dimensions and shape indicated complete with outlet tubes and exterior flange trim. 1.
2.3
01/13/12
Profiles: As indicated on the Drawings. Fabrication: Provide sections in longest lengths practical. Provide lapped joints at section joints. Material: 0.032” aluminum with high-performance organic finish. Color: Selected from manufacturer's standard palette.
Openings Flashing in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill and similar flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. Form head and sill pan flashing with 2” high end dams (one piece or welded). 1. 2.
Profiles: Fabricate from the following material: a. b.
Aluminum: 0.032” thick. Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel: 0.0217” thick.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2.4 A.
01/13/12
SHEET METALS Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3004, 3105, or 5005, Temper suitable for forming and structural performance required, but not less than H14, finished as follows: 1. 2.
3.
Siliconized-Polyester Coating: Epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyesterenamel topcoat. Color: Selected from manufacturer's standard palette. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat, thermocured system containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2604. Color: Selected from manufacturer's standard palette. Clear Anodic Finish: Class II, AA-M12C22A31, complying with AAMA 611.
B.
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G90 coating designation; structural quality, mill phosphatized for field painting.
C.
Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755. 1. 2.
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G90 coating designation; structural quality. Exposed Finishes: Apply the following coil coating: a.
High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat thermocured system containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with physical properties and coating performance requirements of AAMA 2604, except as modified for below: 1)
2.5
Color: Selected from manufacturer's standard palette.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation.
B.
Felt Underlayment: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated. 1.
C.
Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: 30 to 40 mils thick minimum, consisting of slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. 2.
D.
Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized paper, minimum 3 lb/100 sq. ft..
Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 deg F; ASTM D 1970. Low Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D 1970.
Slip Sheet: Building paper, minimum 5 lb/100 sq. ft., rosin sized.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE E.
01/13/12
Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Nails for Copper Sheet: Copper or hardware bronze, 0.109” minimum and not less than 7/8” long, barbed with large head. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex washer head. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets.
F.
Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape.
G.
Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane or polysulfide [silicone] polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.
H.
Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant, polyisobutylene plasticized, heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.
I.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15mil dry film thickness per coat.
2.6
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of items where practicable. Obtain field measurements fabrication.
B.
Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 1. 2.
and trim to comply with Metal Manual" that apply to item indicated. Shop fabricate for accurate fit before shop
Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams and solder.
C.
Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations.
D.
Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in the Work cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1" deep, filled with elastomeric or butyl sealant concealed within joints.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200 - 6
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
E.
Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed-to-view sheet metal flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal, and in thickness not less than that of metal being secured.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1.
Torch cutting sheet metal flashing and trim not permitted.
B.
Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar metals.
C.
Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks.
D.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and elastomeric or butyl sealant.
E.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 1.
Space cleats not more than 12” apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.
F.
Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10’ with no joints allowed within 24” of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1” deep, filled with elastomeric or butyl sealant concealed within joints.
G.
Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1¼” for nails and not less than 3/4” for wood screws. 1. 2. 3.
Galvanized or Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners. Aluminum: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners. Copper: Use copper or stainless-steel fasteners.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200 - 7
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 4. H. 3.2
01/13/12
Stainless Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners.
Seal joints with elastomeric or butyl sealant as required for watertight construction. ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system.
B.
Hanging Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered joints or with lapped joints sealed with elastomeric or butyl sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchored gutter brackets or straps spaced not more than 36” apart. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. 1. 2. 3.
C.
Downspouts: 1. 2.
3. 4. D.
3.3
Install gutters straight, level, and rigidly secured to subframing. Install and seal drops. Install gutters with expansion joints at locations indicated but not exceeding 50’ apart. Install expansion joint caps. Install continuous gutter screens on gutters with noncorrosive fasteners, removable for cleaning gutters.
Install downspouts straight, plumb, and rigidly secured to the wall. Join sections with 1½” telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1” away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60” o.c. in between. Connect downspouts to storm water run-out piping. Install matching elbows at splashblock locations.
Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers where indicated through parapet. Continuously support scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofing membrane. ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight.
B.
Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49. 1.
Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleats anchored to substrate at 24” centers.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200 - 8
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE C.
Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49. 1.
D.
3.4
01/13/12
Install coping straight, level, and rigidly secured to blocking at 16” centers. Install splice plates centered on section joints.
Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Secure in a waterproof manner. Extend counterflashing 4” over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4” and bed with elastomeric or butyl sealant. WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.
B.
Openings Flashing in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill and similar flashings to extend 4” beyond wall openings.
END OF SECTION 076200
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200 - 9
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1.
B.
The following items are provided under Division 22 & 23 Sections: 1. 2.
1.2
Roof hatches.
Roof curbs and equipment supports. Roof piping supports.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other Work.
C.
Coordination Drawings: Roof plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and roof-mounted items.
D.
Samples: For each exposed finish.
1.3 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Standards: Comply with the following: 1. 2.
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for fabrication of units, including flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofing indicated. NRCA's "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" details for installing units.
B.
Roof Hatch Cover: Fabricated to support a minimum live load of 40-lbf/sq. ft., and wind uplift of 20-lbf/sq. ft.
C.
Roof Hatches: F.M. and U.L. approved.
D.
Field Measurements: Verify required dimensions by field measurement prior to fabrication.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1.4 A.
01/13/12
WARRANTY Roof Hatches: Provide manufacturer’s five (5) year guarantee from date of Substantial Completion covering proper operations and defects in material or workmanship.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
ROOF HATCHES Roof hatches by Bilco Co. form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable design, materials and performance characteristics by manufacturers listed are also acceptable. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
B.
Babcock-Davis Hatchways, Inc. Bristolite Skylights. Custom Curb, Inc. Dur-Red Products, Inc. Milcor, Inc. O’Keeffe’s Inc. ThyCurb, Inc. Wasco Products, Inc.
Single-Leaf Personnel Hatches: 1. 2. 3.
4.
5.
Model: "Type NB" preassembled, single leaf. Size: 30” x 54” for ships ladder access. Curbs: 14 gauge paint bond G-90 galvanized steel, 12" high with integral cap flashing, 1" rigid fiber insulated walls, fully covered 22 gauge metal liner and 3" mounting flanges. Cover: 14 gauge paint bond G-90 galvanized steel top with lifting mechanism, automatic hold open arm, spring latch with inside-outside handles and 1” thick fiber glass insulation fully covered and protected by 22 gauge paint bond G-90 galvanized steel metal liner. Hardware: a. b. c.
Heavy pintle hinges. Cover: Equipped with spring latch and interior and exterior handles, and heavy extruded thermoplastic rubber gasket. Keyed Cylinder Lock: Deadbolt cylinder lock with turn handle exterior access and keyed interior access. 1) 2)
d.
6.
Exterior handle accessed through gasketed, threaded deck plate. Interior lock cylinder.
Lifting Mechanism: Compression spring operators enclosed in telescopic tubes arranged to prevent moisture, grit and debris accumulation mechanisms: inside lower tube assembly.
Safety Railing: “Bil-Guard Hatch Railing System” (If required)
ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE a. b. c. d.
Compliance: Meets and exceeds OSHA fall protection regulation 29 CFR 1910.23 and OSHA strength requirements with a factor of safety of two. Configuration: Factory fabricated fixed side rails with self-closing front gate. Posts and Rails: Round pultruded reinforced fire retardant yellow fiberglass treated with UV inhibitor. Hardware: 1) 2) 3) 4)
e. f. 7. 2.2 A.
Mounting Brackets: ¼” thick hot dip galvanized steel. Hinges and Post Guides: 6063-T5 aluminum. Fasteners: Type 316 stainless steel. Gate Bumpers: Neoprene pads
Attachment: Secured to roof hatch, non-roof penetrating. Color: High visibility safety yellow.
Finish: Factory applied alkyd based red oxide primer.
MATERIALS Aluminum: 1. 2.
B.
01/13/12
Sheet: ASTM B 209 for alclad alloy 3005H25 or alloy and temper required to suit forming operations, with mill finish, unless otherwise indicated. Extrusions: ASTM B 221 alloy 6063-T52 or alloy and temper required to suit structural and finish requirements, with mill finish, unless otherwise indicated.
Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653 with G90; commercial steel, unless otherwise indicated. 1.
Structural Quality: Grade 40, where indicated or as required for strength.
C.
Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792 with Class AZ-50 coating, structural quality, Grade 40, or as required for strength.
D.
Plastic Sheet: Unless additional thickness is required for light transmittances, sheet thickness required for 40-lbf/sq. ft. external and 20-lbf/sq. ft. internal loading pressures as recommended by manufacturer for size and shape indicated. 1.
2.
Acrylic: ASTM D 4802, thermoformable, cell-cast or continuous-cast acrylic (methacrylate), Category A-1 or A-2, Type UVA containing ultraviolet absorber, with smooth or polished Finish 1, unless otherwise indicated. Polycarbonate: Thermoformable, monolithic extruded polycarbonate sheets, burglar-resistance rated per UL 972 with average impact strength of 16 ft-lbf/in. of width when tested according to ASTM D 256, Method A (Izod).
E.
Insulation: Manufacturer's standard rigid or semirigid glass-fiber board of thickness indicated.
F.
Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for aboveground use, complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1½” thick.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
G.
Security Grilles: 3/4” diameter, hardened steel bars spaced 6" o.c. in one direction and 12” o.c. in other. Weld bar intersections and ends of bars to structural frame or primary curb walls. Clean and paint with rust-inhibitive metal primer.
H.
Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. 1.
Provide nonremovable fastener heads.
I.
Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, or PVC; or flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork.
J.
Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur and containing no asbestos fibers, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coating.
K.
Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant.
L.
Elastomeric Sealant: Recommended by unit manufacturer that is compatible with joint surfaces; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25.
M.
Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, nonasbestos, fibrated asphalt cement designed for trowel application or other adhesive compatible with roofing system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.
INSTALLATION General: Coordinate installation of roof accessories with installation of roof deck, roof insulation, flashing, roofing membranes, penetrations, equipment, and other construction to ensure that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight. Anchor roof accessories securely to supporting structural substrates so they are capable of withstanding lateral and thermal stresses, and inward and outward loading pressures. 1.
Verify access ladder locations and unit orientations.
B.
Install roof accessory items according to construction details in NRCA's "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual," unless otherwise indicated,
C.
Separation: Separate metal from incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, by coating concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with bituminous coating or providing other permanent separation.
D.
Flange Seals: Unless otherwise indicated, set flanges of accessory units in a thick bed of roofing cement to form seal.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
E.
Cap Flashing: Where required as component of accessory, install cap flashing to provide waterproof overlap with roofing or roof flashing (as counterflashing). Seal overlap with thick bead of mastic sealant.
F.
Operational Units: Test-operate units with operable components. Clean and lubricate joints and hardware. Adjust for proper operation.
G.
Secure safety railing brackets to roof hatch curb. 1. 2. 3. 4.
H.
Set side rails plumb and level with top rail at 42" above the roof level. Attach gate and adjust hinges to align gate with rails. Adjust gate tension to automatically close gate when opened. Apply neoprene pads to gate where gate contacts post.
Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Touch up damaged metal coatings.
END OF SECTION 077200
ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 078100 - APPLIED FIREPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes materials (SFRMs) applied to surfaces concealed from view behind other construction when the Work is completed and the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
The Owner will provide a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following: 1. 2.
1.2 A.
Data and Reports:
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
1.3 A.
Test materials and application methods for compliance with specified requirements for stated performance and test methods. Test materials and application methods for compatibility and adhesion to substrates.
SUBMITTALS
1.
B.
Protection of permanently exposed, non-treated surfaces. Work barriers and signs in areas under application. Cleaning and patching. Coordinating and scheduling required inspecting agency testing.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Provide material thicknesses required to meet indicated designs and ratings. Product certificates and/or test reports. Compatibility and adhesion test reports. Research/evaluation reports. Field quality-control test and special inspection reports. Installer Qualifications: Documentation on installer’s letterhead stating qualifications, experience and SFRM manufacturer’s approval as an applicator.
Shop Drawings: Show extent of sprayed fire-resistive material for each construction and fire-resistance rating, applicable fire-resistive design designations of a qualified testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and minimum thicknesses. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer approved by SFRM manufacturer to install manufacturer's products. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its SFRM to Contractor or to an installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer.
APPLIED FIREPROOFING
078100 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE B.
SFRM Testing: By a qualified testing and inspecting agency engaged by Owner to test for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods. 1.
2.
3.
C.
SFRMs are randomly selected for testing from bags bearing the applicable classification marking of UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Testing is performed on specimens of SFRMs that comply with laboratory testing requirements specified in Part 2 and are otherwise identical to installed fireresistive materials, including application of accelerant, sealers, topcoats, tamping, troweling, rolling, and water overspray, if any of these are used in final application. Testing is performed on specimens whose application the independent testing and inspecting agency witnessed during preparation and conditioning. Include in test reports a full description of preparation and conditioning of laboratory test specimens.
Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Owner to engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to test for compliance with requirements for specified performance and test methods. 1.
2. D.
01/13/12
Test for bond per ASTM E 736 and requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" for coating materials. Provide bond strength indicated in referenced fire-resistance design, but not less than minimum specified in Part 2. Verify that manufacturer, through its own laboratory testing or field experience, has not found primers or coatings to be incompatible with SFRM.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide products identical to those tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.
2.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
E.
Provide products containing no detectable asbestos as determined according to the method specified in 40 CFR 763, Subpart E, Appendix E, Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy."
F.
Mockups: Apply mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. 2.
G.
Extent of Mockups: Approximately 100 sq. ft. of surface for each product indicated. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
APPLIED FIREPROOFING
078100 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1.4
01/13/12
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not apply SFRM when ambient or substrate temperature is 40 deg F or lower unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain temperature at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after product application.
B.
Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of SFRM. Use natural means or, if they are inadequate, forced-air circulation until fire-resistive material dries thoroughly.
C.
Sequence and coordinate application of SFRM with other related work specified in other Sections to comply with following requirements: 1. 2.
3.
4. 5. 6. 7.
1.5 A.
Provide temporary enclosure as required to confine spraying operations and protect the environment. Provide temporary enclosures for applications to prevent deterioration of fireresistive material due to exposure to weather and to unfavorable ambient conditions for humidity, temperature, and ventilation. Avoid unnecessary exposure of fire-resistive material to abrasion and other damage likely to occur during construction operations subsequent to its application. Do not apply fire-resistive material to metal floor deck substrates until concrete topping has been completed. Do not begin applying fire-resistive material until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items penetrating fire protection are in place. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying fire-resistive material until application of fire protection is completed. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fire-resistive material has been applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to defective applications.
WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Contractor and by Installer, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace SFRMs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b.
2.
Cracking, flaking, spalling, or eroding in excess of specified requirements; peeling; or delaminating of SFRM from substrates. Not covered under the warranty are failures due to damage by occupants and Owner's maintenance personnel, exposure to environmental conditions other than those investigated and approved during fire-response testing, and other causes not reasonably foreseeable under conditions of normal use.
Warranty Period: Two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion.
APPLIED FIREPROOFING
078100 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
MANUFACTURERS Cementitious sprayed fire-resistive material by W. R. Grace & Co. forms the basis-ofdesign. Products with comparable materials and performance characteristics by manufactures listed are also acceptable. 1. 2. 3.
B.
Carboline Co.; Pyrolite 15 High Yield. Isolatek International Corp., Cafco Products; Cafco 300. (10% post-consumer) Southwest Vermiculite Co., Inc.; Type 5.
Interior Materials: 1.
Fire-resistive Material: “Monokote MK-6s” or “Monokote Mk-6HY”. a.
2. 3.
4.
5.
Water: Clean, fresh, suitable for domestic consumption and free mineral or organic materials in such quantities to affect fire-resistive material. Resistance to Mold: Material formulated at the time of manufacturing with a mold inhibitor. Fireproofing material tested in accordance with ASTM G21 and shall show resistance to mold growth for a period of 28 days for general use Dry Density: 15 lb/cu. ft. for minimum average and individual densities regardless of density indicated in referenced fire-resistance design, or greater if required to attain fire-resistance ratings indicated, per ASTM E 605. Thickness: Provide minimum average thickness required for fire-resistance designs indicated according to the following criteria, but not less than 0.375”, per ASTM E 605: a.
b.
c.
6.
Composition: Factory-mixed, dry formulation of portland cement binders and lightweight mineral or synthetic aggregates mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar for conveyance and application.
Where the referenced fire-resistance design lists a thickness of 1” or greater, the minimum allowable individual thickness of sprayed fireresistive material is the design thickness minus 0.25”. Where the referenced fire-resistance design lists a thickness of less than 1" but more than 0.375”, the minimum allowable individual thickness of sprayed fire-resistive material is the greater of 0.375” or 75 percent of the design thickness. No reduction in average thickness is permitted for those fire-resistance designs whose fire-resistance ratings were established at densities of less than 15 lb/cu. ft..
Bond Strength: 339 lbf/sq. ft. minimum per manufacturer’s data but not less than 150 lbf/sq. ft. minimum in accordance with ASTM E 736 under the following conditions: a.
Field test sprayed fire-resistive material applied to flanges of wide-flange, structural-steel members on surfaces matching those that will exist for remainder of steel receiving fire-resistive material.
APPLIED FIREPROOFING
078100 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE b.
c. 7.
8. 9. 10. 11.
12.
C.
If surfaces of structural steel receiving sprayed fire-resistive material are primed or otherwise painted for coating materials, perform series of bond tests specified in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory." Provide bond strength indicated in referenced UL fire-resistance criteria, per ASTM E 736. Minimum thickness of sprayed fire-resistive material tested in laboratory shall be 0.75”.
Compressive Strength: 5.21 lbs/sq. in. as determined in the laboratory per ASTM E 761. Minimum thickness of material tested shall be 0.75” and minimum dry density shall be as specified, but not less than 15 lb/cu. ft. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion per ASTM E 937. Deflection: No cracking, spalling or delamination per ASTM E 759. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling or delamination per ASTM E 760. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 g/sq. ft. in 24 hours per ASTM E 859. For laboratory tests, minimum thickness of sprayed fire-resistive material is 0.75”, maximum dry density is 15 lb/cu. ft., test specimens are not prepurged by mechanically induced air velocities, and tests are terminated after 24 hours. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide sprayed fire-resistive materials with the following surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: a. b.
13.
Flame-Spread Index: 10 or less. Smoke-Developed Index: 0.
Fungal Resistance: Fireproofing materials formulated with a mold inhibitor at the time of manufacturer. No observed growth on specimens per ASTM G 21 for a period of 28 days (minimum).
Exterior Exposed fireproofing. 1.
2. 3. 4.
5. 6.
7.
01/13/12
Locations:
“Monokote
Z-146”
factory-blended,
cementitious
Dry Density: Field density measured, in accordance with ASTM Standard E605. Minimum average density shall be that listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory, or as required by the authority having jurisdiction. Deflection: Material shall not crack or delaminate from surface to which it is applied when tested in accordance with ASTM E759. Bond Impact: Material subject to impact tests in accordance with ASTM E760 shall not crack or delaminate from the surface to which it is applied. Bond Strength: Material when laboratory tested in accordance with a modified ASTM E736, shall have a minimum average bond strength of 10,000 psf and a minimum individual bond strength of 8,000 psf. Air Erosion: Maximum allowable weight loss of material 0.005 gm/ft2 when tested in accordance with ASTM E859. Compressive Strength: Material not to deform more than 10 percent when subjected to compressive forces of 80,000 psf when tested in accordance with modified ASTM E761. Corrosion Resistance: Steel with applied material tested in accordance with ASTM E937 and shall not promote corrosion of steel.
APPLIED FIREPROOFING
078100 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 8.
Surface Burning Characteristics: Material shall exhibit the following surface burning characteristics when tested in accordance with ASTM E84: a. b.
9.
01/13/12
Flame Spread 0. Smoke Development 0.
Durometer Hardness: Material shall have a minimum Durometer Hardness of 35 when tested in accordance with ASTM D2240.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.
INSTALLATION Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of work. A substrate is in satisfactory condition if it complies with the following: 1. 2.
3. 4. 5.
Substrates comply with requirements in the Section where the substrate and related materials and construction are specified. Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, incompatible primers, incompatible paints, incompatible encapsulants, or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fireresistive materials with substrates under conditions of normal use or fire exposure. Objects penetrating fire-resistive material, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates. Substrates are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, and other suspended construction that will interfere with applying fire-resistive material. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B.
Verify that concrete work on steel deck has been completed.
C.
Verify that roof construction, installation of roof-top HVAC equipment, and other related work are completed.
D.
Conduct tests according to fire-resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations to verify that substrates are free of substances capable of interfering with bond.
E.
Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fire-resistive materials during application.
F.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fire-resistive material, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.
APPLIED FIREPROOFING
078100 - 6
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
G.
Prime substrates where recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive SFRM.
H.
Coat substrates with bonding adhesive before applying fire-resistive material where required to achieve fire-resistance rating or as recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer for material and application indicated.
I.
Extend fire-resistive material in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected. Unless otherwise recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer, install body of fire-resistive covering in a single course.
J.
Spray apply fire-resistive materials to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer.
K.
Where sealers are used, apply products that are tinted to differentiate them from SFRM over which they are applied.
L.
Apply concealed SFRM in thicknesses and densities not less than those required to achieve fire-resistance ratings designated for each condition, but apply in greater thicknesses and densities if specified in Part 2 "Concealed SFRM" Article.
M.
Apply water overspray to concealed sprayed-fiber fire-resistive material as required to obtain designated fire-resistance rating.
N.
Cure concealed SFRM according to product manufacturer's written recommendations.
O.
Apply sealer to concealed SFRM.
P.
Apply topcoat to concealed SFRM.
Q.
Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.
R.
Repair or replace work that has not successfully protected steel.
3.2 A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections and prepare reports: 1.
B.
SFRM.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1.
Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether tested work complies with or deviates from requirements.
APPLIED FIREPROOFING
078100 - 7
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE C.
01/13/12
Tests and Inspections: Testing and inspecting of completed applications of SFRM shall take place in successive stages, in areas of extent and using methods as follows. Do not proceed with application of SFRM for the next area until test results for previously completed applications of SFRM show compliance with requirements. Tested values must equal or exceed values indicated and required for approved fire-resistance design. 1.
2.
3.
4.
Thickness for Floor, Roof, and Wall Assemblies: For each 1000-sq. ft. area, or partial area, on each floor, from the average of 4 measurements from a 144-sq. in. sample area, with sample width of not less than 6” per ASTM E 605. Thickness for Structural Frame Members: From a sample of 25 percent of structural members per floor, taking 9 measurements at a single cross section for structural frame beams or girders, 7 measurements of a single cross section for joists and trusses, and 12 measurements of a single cross section for columns per ASTM E 605. Density for Floors, Roofs, Walls and Structural Frame Members: At frequency and from sample size indicated for determining thickness of each type of construction and structural framing member, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method." Bond Strength for Floors, Roofs, Walls, and Structural Framing Members: For each 10,000-sq. ft. area, or partial area, on each floor, cohesion and adhesion from one sample of size indicated for determining thickness of each type of construction and structural framing member, per ASTM E 736. a.
b.
5.
Field test SFRM that is applied to flanges of wide-flange, structural-steel members on surfaces matching those that will exist for remainder of steel receiving fire-resistive material. If surfaces of structural steel receiving SFRM are primed or otherwise painted for coating materials, perform series of bond tests specified in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory." Provide bond strength indicated in referenced UL fire-resistance criteria, but not less than 150 lbf/sq. ft. minimum per ASTM E 736.
If testing finds applications of SFRM are not in compliance with requirements, testing and inspecting agency will perform additional random testing to determine extent of noncompliance.
D.
Remove and replace applications of SFRM that do not pass tests and inspections for cohesion and adhesion, for density, or for both and retest as specified above.
E.
Apply additional SFRM, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results indicate that thickness does not comply with specified requirements, and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION 078100
APPLIED FIREPROOFING
078100 - 8
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes firestop systems installed by a single, qualified, firestop systems contractor for all penetrations and joints through the following types of fire-resistance and smoke rated assemblies: 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
Provide the following: 1.
2.
3. C.
Approved firestop system materials and installations at each plumbing, fire protection, mechanical, electrical and miscellaneous penetration and joints through noted rated assemblies. Pre-installation coordination with other contractors. Provide installation details for each penetration type, and establish requirements for each penetration opening size and location. Firestop system identification at each penetration and joint.
Penetrations and joints in rated assemblies include but are not limited to the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
D.
Fire-resistance-rated floor, wall, ceiling and roof assemblies. Fire-resistance-rated perimeter joints at floor/roof and exterior wall assemblies. Fire-resistance-rated top of wall joints. Smoke partitions and smoke barriers.
Mechanical ducts, piping (all types and materials), telephone and data cables, electrical wiring, cable trays, conduits, boxes, busways and raceways. Beams, columns and other structural elements. Vertical service shaft walls and partitions. Slots and gaps between edge of floor slabs and curtain walls. Openings between structurally separate sections of walls and floors. Gaps between tops of rated and non-rated walls and ceiling or roof assemblies. Non-building type expansion joints in fire rated walls and floors. Blank openings. Single membrane penetrations of floor, wall, floor/ceiling or roof/ceiling assemblies.
Work Provided by Others: Openings for each penetration and joint in rated wall, floor, ceiling and roof assemblies provided by the contractor requiring the penetration. 1. 2.
Refer to material Section for specific requirements for penetrating that material. Each opening size and location coordinated through the General Contractor and firestop systems contractor prior to installation. Opening sizes in accordance with firestop system detail requirements for each specific opening.
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
078413 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 3.
E.
Openings through structural floor, wall and roof assemblies not shown on the structural drawings must be reviewed and approved by the structural engineer of record prior to installation.
The Owner will provide a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency or inspector to perform the tests and inspections and prepare reports. 1.
Tests and Inspections, and Reports: a. b. c.
2.
Test materials and application methods for compliance with specified requirements for stated performance and test methods. Test materials and application methods for compatibility and adhesion to substrates. Prepare and submit reports to the Owner, Architect, Contractor and others as necessary.
Inspecting Agency and Inspector Qualifications: a. b. c. d. e.
1.2
01/13/12
Meet requirements of ASTM E 699-03. Acceptable to local authority having jurisdiction. Completely independent of and divested from firestop system contractor, firestop system material manufacturer and supplier. A non-competitor of the firestop system contractor, firestop system material manufacturer and supplier. Inspector shall meet the requirements of ASTM E 2174, 6.1-6.4.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Firestop Systems: A material or combination of materials installed as a system to retain the integrity of fire-rated construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke, and/or hot gases through penetrations, single membrane penetrations, blank openings, construction joints, or at perimeter fire containment in or adjacent to fire-rated barriers in accordance with the requirements of the Building Code for this project.
B.
F-Ratings: Provide firestop systems with F-ratings equaling or exceeding fireresistance rating of constructions penetrated as determined per ASTM E 814.
C.
For firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and/or physical damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction. 1. 2. 3.
Provide products with flame-spread indices of less than 25 and smoke-developed indices of less than 450, when tested per ASTM E 84. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-resistant firestop systems. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4” in width and exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads involved either by installing floor plates or by other means.
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
078413 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 4.
01/13/12
For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide firestop systems not requiring removal of insulation.
D.
Fire-Resistive Joints: Provide joint systems with fire-resistance ratings indicated, as determined by UL 2079 or (ASTM E 1399 and E 1966), but not less than the fireresistance rating of the construction in which the joint occurs.
E.
Where no specific third party tested and classified firestop system is available for a particular firestop configuration, the firestop contractor shall obtain from the firestop material manufacturer an Engineering Judgment (EJ) or Equivalent Fire Resistance Rated Assembly (EFFRA) for submittal to the Architect and the authority having jurisdiction. 1.
1.3 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each product indicated. Include the following: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Show details for each kind of construction condition penetrated showing relationships to adjoining construction, kind of penetrating item, required opening size and specific firestop material used.
Product Certificates and Test Reports: 1.
2.
3.
4. D.
Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. Manufacturer’s specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements. Firestop product manufacturer’s certification that proposed products are suitable for use indicated and comply with specification requirements.
Shop Drawings: Include details of installation and design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition indicated. 1.
C.
EJ and EFFRA designs designed in accordance with the International Firestop Council’s (IFC) Guidelines.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of through-penetration firestop system products certifying that products furnished comply with stated requirements. Manufacturer Certification: That products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOC’s) and are nontoxic to building occupants. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating throughpenetration firestop system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products. Compatibility and application test reports.
Written documentation of firestop contractor’s qualifications, including qualifications noted in “Quality Assurance” article and reference projects of similar scope and complexity.
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
078413 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE E. 1.4
01/13/12
Samples: Pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive, preprinted vinyl identification labels. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide rated systems identical to those tested per ASTM E 814 and with products bearing the classification marking of a qualified testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
B.
Contractor Qualifications: Acceptable firestop contractor shall be FM Approved in accordance with FM Standard 4991, or meet a minimum of three (3) of the listed requirements. 1.
2. 3.
4.
5.
6.
Provide acceptable documentation attesting to the fact that firestop contractor is a specialist firestop contractor. Firestop materials manufacturer’s willingness to sell firestop materials to a contractor or installer does not confer qualification on the buyer. Provide acceptable documentation showing firestop contractor to have successfully completed not less than five (5) projects of comparable scale. Provide acceptable documentation showing firestop contractor’s installers are fully trained in firestop materials installation. Firestop materials manufacturer’s on to three hour training courses do not in themselves meet this requirement. Provide documentation from an acceptable firestop materials manufacturer stating firestop contractor has a minimum of two (2) years experience in firestop materials installation. Firestop contractor shall employ at least one (1) individual holding the FM 4991 Standard “Designated Responsible Individual (DRI) designation prior to staring the work. Firestop contractor shall demonstrate the existence of a company quality assurance program that has been in existence for a minimum of one (1) year.
C.
Firestop contractor shall designate a single individual as project foreman who shall be on site at all times during material installation.
D.
Single Source Responsibility: Obtain firestop systems for each kind of penetration and construction condition indicated from a single manufacturer. 1.
Use tested and listed firestop systems before an Engineering Judgment (EJ) or Equivalent Fire Resistance Rated Assembly (EFRRA) is installed.
E.
Manufacturer’s Services: Provide manufacturer’s contact list for local representative.
F.
Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate firestop systems with subcontractors whose work interfaces with or affects firestop systems installation.
G.
Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirement shall govern. 1.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
078413 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.
2. 3. 4.
b.
A.
a) b) c) d)
NFPA 70 - National Electric Code. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. NFPA 221 - Fire Walls and Fire Barriers. NFPA 251 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. b. c. d.
1.5
Ref. 1 Recommended IFC Guidelines for Evaluating Firestop Engineering Judgments (April 2001). Ref. 2 Inspectors Field Pocket Guide.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. b. c. d.
6.
E 84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. E 119 Test Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. E 136 Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750F. E 814 Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops. E 1399 Cyclic Movement and Measuring Minimum and Maximum Joint Widths. E 1966 Test Method for Resistance of Building Joint. E 2174 Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Stops. E 05.11.14 Standard Test Method for Determining the Fire Endurance of Perimeter Fire Barrier Systems Using the Intermediate-Scale, Multi Story Test Apparatus (ISMA); ASTM permanent number assignment pending approval of Draft.
Factory Mutual (FM) Research: FM Approval Standard of Firestop Contractors – Class 4991. Firestop Contractors International Association (F.C.I.A): Manual of Practice M.O.P. International Firestop Council (IFC): a.
5.
01/13/12
UL 263 Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. UL 723 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. UL 1479 Fire-Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops. UL 2079 Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems.
PROJECT CONDITIONS Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site and comply with requirements of Division 01 Section "Project Meetings." Notify participants at least five working days before conference. 1.
2.
Meet with the Owner’s representative, General Contractor, Architect; firestop contractor, firestop system manufacturer's representative and subcontractors whose work interfaces with or affects firestop systems installation. Establish trade-related job schedules including responsibilities for sizes and installation of openings and sleeves.
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
078413 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. B.
1.6
01/13/12
Establish firestop installation schedules and work methods that will prevent damage to adjacent materials. Establish areas on the job site designated as work and storage areas. Establish weather and working temperature conditions. Establish provisions for protecting installed firestop during the remainder of the Project. Establish the Owner’s testing and inspection requirements and schedule. Establish manufacturer’s warranty inspection requirements and schedule.
Do not cover up firestop installations until Owner's inspection agency or the Authorities Having Jurisdiction have examined each installation and given their permission to cover. WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturer’s Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form warranty in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace firestop materials that fail in material quality within one (1) year from date of Substantial Completion.
B.
Installer’s Warranty: Installer’s standard form warranty in which installer agrees to repair or replace firestop materials and /or systems that fail in workmanship quality within one (1) year from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
MANUFACTURERS Penetration firestop systems by Tremco Inc. form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable materials, systems, performance characteristics and ratings by manufactures listed are also acceptable. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
2.2 A.
A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. Firestop Systems Inc. Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc. Isolatek International. Nelson Firestop Products. RectorSeal Corporation. Specified Technologies Inc. 3M Fire Protection Products.
FIRESTOP SYSTEMS Compatibility: Provide firestop systems that are compatible with the substrates forming openings, and with the items, if any, penetrating firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
078413 - 6
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE B.
Provide penetration firestop systems selected from manufacturer’s available products. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.
C.
TREMstop IA High Performance Intumescent Acrylic Sealant. TREMstop Acrylic Flexible Acrylic Sealant. TREMstop Acrylic - SP Sprayable, Flexible Acrylic Sealant. Fyre-Sil Fire Resistant Silicone Sealant. Fyre-Sil S/L Self-Leveling Fire Resistant Silicone Sealant. TREMstop WS Flexible Intumescent Wrap Strips. TREMstop D Premanufactured Intumescent Firestop Collar. Fyre-Can Premanufactured Cast-in-Place Intumescent Device. Fyre-Can Sleeve Premanufactured Intumescent Device for Walls. TREMstop PS Durable Intumescent Firestop Pillows. Fyre-Shield Fire Resistant Ceramic-Based Sealant. TREMstop Fire Mortar Trowelable Firestop Mortar Accessory. TREMstop MCR Flexible Metal Restricting Collar for Wrap Strips. Dymeric 511 Multi-Component Polyurethane Sealant. TREMstop MP Moldable Putty Pad for Electrical Outlet Boxes. Cerablanket-FS Ceramic Fiber Insulation.
Accessories: Manufacturer's standard accessories required to install fill materials that comply with requirements of tested assemblies, are approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency that performed testing, and are specified by manufacturer of tested assemblies. Accessories include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.
Permanent forming/damming/backing materials. a. b. c. d.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. D.
01/13/12
Slag-/rock-wool-fiber insulation. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. Fire-rated form board. Fillers for sealants.
Temporary forming materials. Substrate primers. Collars. Steel sleeves. Fasteners. Sheet metal closures. Masking tape.
Identification Labels: Pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive, preprinted vinyl labels. 1.
Contents: a.
b. c. d. e.
Wording: "WARNING--THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM-DO NOT DISTURB. NOTIFY BUILDING MANAGEMENT OF ANY DAMAGE." Firestop contractor's name, address and phone number. Firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. Installation date. Firestop material manufacturer's name.
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
078413 - 7
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2. 3. 4.
01/13/12
Size: Minimum 4” x 3”. Colors: White background with black lettering, or other contrasting combination designed to draw attention to the label Locations: a. b.
Penetrations: Adjacent to each penetration, both sides of the assembly. Joints: Adjacent to each joint, both sides of the assembly at 20’ o.c. or less.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article and firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications selected.
B.
Preparation: Verify penetrations and joints are properly sized, and sleeves, ducts, pipes, conduit, cable and other items penetrating firestop materials are properly secured. Proceed with the work after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
C.
Clean openings immediately before installing firestop systems. 1. 2. 3.
Remove foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of firestop systems. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. Produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with firestop systems. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.
D.
Priming: Prime substrates when recommended in writing by firestop system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not spill primers or allow them to migrate onto adjoining surfaces.
E.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of firestop with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove firestop smears. Remove tape immediately after installation without disturbing firestop seal.
F.
Accessories: Install accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position necessary to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1.
G.
After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories that are not permanent components of firestop systems.
Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques. 1.
Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
078413 - 8
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2. 3.
01/13/12
Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
H.
Identification: Identify firestop systems with pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive, preprinted vinyl labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces of penetrated construction on both sides of each firestop system installation where labels will be visible. Include noted required information on each label.
I.
Clean excess fill materials adjacent to openings as installation progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.
J.
Keep areas of work accessible until inspections by manufacturer’s representative and applicable code Authorities Having Jurisdiction are completed.
K.
Provide the Owner two (2) copies of each drawing and installation detail used for each type of construction condition penetrated, and list firestop materials used. Bind documents into sturdy three-ring binder.
3.2 A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency or contract inspector to perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports. 1.
2. 3.
Notify inspecting agency or contract inspector at least seven (7) days in advance of firestop system installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of installations. Inspecting agency or contract inspector will state in each report whether inspected firestop systems comply with or deviate from requirements. Inspection to follow ASTM E 2174 requirements.
B.
Do not cover up firestop system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until all inspections and corrections, if any, have been completed.
C.
Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace firestop systems to comply with requirements.
D.
Firestop contractor shall be available to assist inspecting agency or contract inspector during inspections and testing, and shall repair destructive test areas immediately.
END OF SECTION 078413
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
078413 - 9
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to this Section: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.
B.
See Division 32 pavement Sections for sealing joints in pavements, walkways and curbing.
C.
See Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for interior joint sealants through fire-resistance and smoke rated assemblies.
D.
See Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants.
E.
See Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for acoustical joint sealants.
F.
The following Sections contain additional sealant and caulking requirements that are within their specific Section and not within the scope of this Section. 1.
Division 03 Sections: a.
2.
Division 04 Section: "Cast Stone Masonry". a. b.
3.
“Cast Stone Masonry”. “Manufactured Stone Masonry”
Division 06 Sections: a. b.
4.
"Cast-in-Place Concrete".
"Exterior Architectural Woodwork". "Interior Architectural Woodwork".
Division 07 Sections: a. b. c. d. e. f.
JOINT SEALANTS
"Metal Roof Panels". "Metal Wall Panels". "Composite Wall Panels". "Fiber Cement Panel, Trim and Soffit". "Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Roofing". "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim".
079200 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 5.
Division 08 Sections: a.
6.
1.2 A.
"Tiling". "Resilient Base and Accessories". "Resilient Tile Flooring".
Division 12 Sections: a.
8.
"Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts".
Division 09 Sections: a. b. c.
7.
01/13/12
"Stone Countertops".
Division 32 Section: "Concrete Pavement".
DEFINITIONS Applicable Standards: ASTM C 920. 1.
Type: Identifies sealant products as prepackages or jobsite mixed. a. b.
2.
Grade: Identifies the flow characteristics of the sealant products. a. b.
3.
Grade P: Products with sufficient flow to fill joints in horizontal surfaces and remain level and smooth at temperatures as low as 40 deg F. Grade NS: Products suitable for installation in vertical surfaces without sagging at temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F.
Class: Identifies sealant products according to tested capabilities to remain adhered to given joint substrates without cohesive failure. A measurement of movement capability. a.
4.
Type S: Products prepackaged with no jobsite mixing required. Type M: Products furnished in two or more parts for jobsite mixing.
Classes: 12½, 25, 35, 50 and 100/50. Numbers indicate percentage of movement capability.
Use: Identifies sealant products' uses related to exposure and substrates. a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
JOINT SEALANTS
T: Surfaces subject to vehicular and pedestrian traffic. NT: Surfaces not subject to vehicular and pedestrian traffic. I: Submerged continuously in liquids M: Mortar substrates. A: Aluminum substrates. G: Glass substrates. O: Other substrates than M, A and G.
079200 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1.3
01/13/12
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
B.
Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
1.4 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data and Reports: 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
1.5
Product data for each joint-sealant product indicated. Preconstruction field test reports. Compatibility and adhesion test reports. Product certificates and test reports.
Samples: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in ½" wide joints formed between two 6" long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants to joint-sealant manufacturers for testing according to ASTM C 1087 manufacturer's standard test method to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.
B.
Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates according to the method in ASTM C 1193 that is appropriate for the types of Project joints.
C.
Applicator Qualifications: Trained and approved applicator with at least three years experience in installing materials of types specified and having successfully completed at least three projects of similar scope and complexity. 1.
Applicator to designate a single individual as project foreman who will be on site at all times during installation.
D.
Single Source Responsibility: To the extent possible, obtain joint sealants from single manufacturer for each different product required to ensure compatibility.
E.
Mockups: Build mockups incorporating sealant joints, as follows, to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution: 1.
Joints in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive elastomeric joint sealants, which are specified by reference to this Section.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1.6 A.
WARRANTY Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1.
B.
01/13/12
Warranty Period: Three (3) years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1.
Warranty Period: Three (3) years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
MANUFACTURERS Sealant and caulking products by Tremco form the basis-of-design unless noted otherwise. Products with comparable materials, performance characteristics and colors by manufacturers listed for applications indicated are acceptable. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
2.2
Bostik Findley. Dow Corning Corp. GE Silicones. Pecora Corp. PolySpec Corp. Sika. Sonneborn. W. R. Meadows.
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B.
VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide interior sealants and sealant primers that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. 2. 3.
C.
Sealants: 250 g/L. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Provide standard or custom colors that generally match adjacent materials.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2.3
01/13/12
ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
B.
Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
C.
Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.
2.4 A.
JOINT SEALANTS Exterior Wall polyurethane. 1.
240”,
multi-component
oligomeric
Type: M. Grade: NS. Class: 25. Use: NT, M, A and O.
Masonry and precast concrete wall expansion and control joints. Metal and aluminum door, louver and window frames. Concrete tilt-up panel joints. Pre-cast concrete panel joints. EIFS joints.
Exterior Slab Movement Joints: “Vulkem 45”, two part, self-leveling polyurethane. 1.
Applicable Standards: ASTM C920. a. b. c. d.
2.
Type: S. Grade: P. Class: 25. Use: T, M, A, I and O.
Applications: a. b.
C.
“Dymeric
Applications: a. b. c. d. e.
B.
Joints:
Applicable Standards: ASTM C920. a. b. c. d.
2.
Movement
Concrete sidewalks and paving. Concrete to asphalt transition joints.
Interior Wall Non-Movement Joints: “Tremflex 834”, siliconized acrylic latex, paintable.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1.
Applicable Standards: ASTM C-834. a. b. c. d.
2.
c.
Applicable Standards: ASTM C920. a. b. c. d.
2.
Type: S. Grade: NS. Class: 25. Use: NT, T, M, A, I and O.
Applications: a. b. c.
Wall control joints. Masonry and precast concrete wall control joints. Metal and aluminum door, louver and window frames.
Interior Sanitary Joints: “Tremsil 200”, one component sanitary silicone. 1. 2. 3.
2.5
Where gypsum board abuts masonry or concrete. Where hollow metal and aluminum door frames, and louver and window frames abut finished surfaces. At voids between wall and ceiling surfaces and applied materials including trim, door frames, millwork, stair stringers, etc.
Interior Wall Movement Joints (non-expansion): “Vulkem 116”, one-part polyurethane. 1.
E.
Type: S. Grade: NS. Class: 12½. Use: NT, M, A, and O.
Applications: a. b.
D.
01/13/12
Where backsplashes abut walls and countertops. Where plumbing fixtures abut finish wall and floor surfaces and countertops. Shower areas.
JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A.
General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B.
Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. 1. 2. 3.
Type C, closed-cell material with a surface skin. Type O, open-cell material. Type B, bicellular material with a surface skin.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 6
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
C.
Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F. Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance.
D.
Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
2.6
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B.
Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C.
Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.
PREPARATION Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean joints immediately before installing joint sealants. 1.
Remove foreign materials from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant. a.
2.
Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. a.
B.
Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.
Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.
Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 7
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C.
3.2
Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. INSTALLATION
A.
Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications and conditions indicated.
B.
Install sealant backings of type indicated or required to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. 2. 3.
Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. Do not stretch, twist, puncture or tear sealant backings. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials.
C.
Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.
D.
Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. 2. 3.
E.
Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. 2. 3.
F.
Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.
Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 8
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
END OF SECTION 079200
JOINT SEALANTS
079200 - 9
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 079500 - EXPANSION CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes exterior and interior joint systems for the following applications: 1. 2. 3. 4.
1.2
Interior fire-rated floors, walls and ceilings. Interior non-rated floors, walls and ceilings. Exterior brick and manufactured stone. Areas subject to pedestrian traffic at parking deck.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each joint system indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include Placement Drawings showing entire length of each joint system and details.
C.
Samples: For each joint system indicated.
1.3 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide joint systems incorporating fire barriers that are identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 1966, UL 2079 including hose-stream test of vertical wall assemblies, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
MANUFACTURERS Floor, wall and ceiling mounted expansion joint systems by Watson-Bowman Acme Corp. (Division of BASF Corp.) form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable design concepts, materials and finishes, and the ability to accommodate variations in adjacent surfaces by manufacturers listed below are also acceptable. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Balco Inc. C/S Group. MM Systems. Tremco Inc
EXPANSION CONTROL
079500 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2.2 A.
INTERIOR EXPANSION JOINT SYSTEMS INTEJ-1: “Wabo UreFlex T”, factory molded and cured polyurethane for requiring watertightness. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Edges: Formed with a chamfer and mechanically abraded to ensure adhesion. Seal: Non-slip serrated walking surface with nosing materials, bedding compounds and traffic support plate to form a complete watertight installation. Seal profile standard color: Concrete gray. Support Plate: Aluminum Alloy 6061-T6. Standard thickness and width determined by manufacturer according to system requirements. a. b.
5. 6. B.
01/13/12
Plate Primer: Manufacturer’s standard single component primer applied to underside of plate to achieve optimum bond with bedding compound. Support Plate Bedding Compound: “Wabo NS-25” two-component sealant.
Blockout Primer: Manufacturer’s standard two component primer for application to the concrete surfaces and beveled edge of the seal profile. Nosing and Splicing Material: “Wabo NS-12.5” two component sealant.
INTEJ-1: “Wabo SeismicFloor Model “FJX” for recessed 2” wide interior floor joints requiring three (3) hour fire rating. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, alloy 6061-T6 or 6063-T5. Stainless Steel: ASTM 5A 240 or ASTM A276 Type 304 with a 60-grit brushed finish. Base Member Extension Profile: Stainless steel. Slide Plate: Minimum 3/16” thick stainless steel plate secured to joint assembly utilizing a pre-engineered self-centering bar that freely rotates in all directions. Seismic-Centering Bar: Bar with circular sphered ends that lock and slide inside the corresponding aluminum extrusion cavity to allow freedom of movement and flexure in all directions including vertical displacement. a.
6. 7. 8.
Moisture Barrier: Fabric reinforced tear resistant clear vinyl sheet material with minimum 0.026” thickness. Anchorage: Minimum ¼” diameter concrete expansion anchor at maximum 24” o.c. spacing to secure aluminum base member to floor slab. Blockout Repair: “Wabo Renew 100” single component rapid strength repair mortar meeting the following compressive strength, (ASTM C 109) requirements. a. b.
9.
Bar: Molded or manufactured incorporating corrosion resistant nylon components with sphered ends and 1” wide standard cross member for standard applications. Provide 1½” wide cross member where heavy-duty application is required. Spacing shall be a maximum of 18” o.c.
Seven days: 8,000 psi. Twenty-eight days: 9,000 psi.
Blockout Infill: “Wabo Grout 100” non-catalyzed, non-shrink grout containing mineral aggregate meeting the following data requirements.
EXPANSION CONTROL
079500 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE a. b. 10. 11. 12. C.
Fire Barrier Assembly: “Wabo ThermoShield Fire Barrier”. Provide “T” shaped assembly where required. Accessories: Necessary related parts and fasteners required for complete installation.
Sub-Schedule: a. b. c. d.
2. 3. 4.
5.
6.
8. 9.
Size: ¼” thick by 3/8” wide. Provide manufacturer’s standard polyvinylchloride extruded profile where required.
Slide Plate Limit Clips: U-Clip fasteners preformed from heat treated spring steel; conforming to #01223015-24; reference #C-29576-020. Maximum spacing as recommended by manufacturer. Fastening System: Upper and lower inter-lock fastening strips backed with pressure sensitive acrylic adhesive. a. b. c.
7.
EJ-4W: Wall, non-rated. EJ-4WR: Wall, rated. EJ-4C: Ceiling, non-rated. EJ-4CR: Ceiling, rated.
Exposed Upper Component and Slide Plate: 14 ga. stainless steel, ASTM SA240 with a 2B finish. Lower Edge Component: 18 gauge galvanized steel, ASTM A653. Slide Gasket: Pre-cut medium density foam with R608D pressure sensitive adhesive on one side and #900 series light weight, nylon fabric laminated to the other side. Conform to properties of ASTM D-1056-85 grade 2C1. Color: Black. a. b.
A.
Seven Days: 7,000 psi. Twenty-eight Days: 8,500 psi.
INTEJ-2: “Wabo Contour Expansion Control System Models CTR (walls) and CTC400 (ceilings)” for recessed 2” wide interior wall and ceiling joints requiring three (3) hour fire rated and non-rated systems. Provide fire barrier assembly materials at rated locations. 1.
2.3
01/13/12
Minimum Width: 1”. Length: Continuous along expansion control system edge component. Minimum dynamic tensile disengagement strength: 16 lbs/in2.
Anchors: No. 10 diameter x 1½” long Phillips drive panhead self-drilling TEK screw. Maximum spacing: 18” o.c. Fire Barrier Assembly: “Wabo ThermoShield Fire Barrier”. Accessories: Manufacturer’s necessary related parts and fasteners required for complete installation.
EXTERIOR EXPANSION JOINT SYSTEMS EXTEJ-4: “Wabo WeatherSeam, Model WSW-200 Expansion Control System” for recessed 2” wide exterior wall joints, non-rated.
EXPANSION CONTROL
079500 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1. 2.
Aluminum Extrusions: Conform to properties of ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T5. Visual Seal: Extruded elastomeric profile with side lugs that mechanically lock into aluminum extrusions, and allow mechanical connection at splices between seal sectional lengths. a. b.
3.
b.
7. 2.4 A.
Use: As bedding compound when securing the aluminum extrusion to adjacent construction at exterior or other areas exposed to moisture. Color: Black.
Hardware: Manufacturer’s standard self-tapping screw including plastic masonry insert anchor. Diameter: ¼” (min.) with a maximum spacing of 18” o.c. Accessories: Manufacturer’s necessary and related parts, butt splice clips and devices required for complete installation.
EXPANSION JOINT SYSTEMS AT PARKING DECK Deck mounted, exterior expansion joint systems by MM Systems form the basis-ofdesign. Products with comparable design concepts, materials and finishes, and the ability to accommodate variations in adjacent surfaces by manufacturers listed below are also acceptable. 1. 2. 3.
B.
Use: Installation of visual and secondary elastomeric seals at exterior or other areas exposed to moisture.
Sealant: “Wabo SR”, one part polysulfide base synthetic rubber sealant conforming to Federal specification TT-S-00230C Type 11. a.
6.
Material: Quality flame retardant 0.063” (minimum) vinyl.
Adhesive: “Wabo PrimaLub”, one part moisture curing polyurethane and aromatic hydrocarbon solvent mixture that complies with ASTM D-4070. a.
5.
Material: “Santoprene” or manufacturer’s alternate material exhibiting a shore A hardness of 64 +/- 5. Color: Color to match adjacent materials.
Secondary Functional Seal: Extruded elastomeric profile utilizing a serpentine configuration with side lugs that mechanically lock into a corresponding aluminum profile. a.
4.
01/13/12
Balco Inc. C/S Group. Watson-Bowman Acme Corp.
NGEJ-1: “Expanded Rubber Sealing System": 1. 2. 3.
Location: Garage decks. Model: "ERS" joint seals for 2” wide exterior parking deck joint to wall, non-rated. Rubber Seal: Flexible, extruded ethelene propylene diene monomer rubber with a ribbed sidewall profiles through which an epoxy adhesive bonds the seal to the vertical walls of the joint opening for watertight seal.
EXPANSION CONTROL
079500 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 4.
Accessories: a. b.
5. 2.5
01/13/12
Provide manufacturer’s high strength aggregate reinforced epoxy adhesive. Aluminum Covers: Provide “Wabo HingeMount HDH” covers at all pedestrian access points.
Color: Black.
MATERIALS
A.
Aluminum: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions; ASTM B 209, alloy 6061-T6 for sheet and plate. Apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on aluminum surfaces to be placed in contact with cementitious materials.
B.
Bronze: ASTM B 455, alloy C38500 for extrusions; alloy C23000 Red Brass for plates.
C.
Brass: ASTM B 36/ B 36M, UNS alloy C26000 for half hard sheet and coil.
D.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304 with No. 2B finish, unless otherwise indicated, for plates, sheet, and strips.
E.
Preformed Seals: Single or multicellular extruded elastomeric seals designed with or without continuous, longitudinal, internal baffles. Formed to be installed in frames or with anchored flanges, in color indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
F.
Strip Seals: Elastomeric membrane or tubular extrusions with a continuous longitudinal internal baffle system throughout complying with ASTM E 1783; used with compatible frames, flanges, and molded-rubber anchor blocks.
G.
Compression Seals: Preformed, elastomeric extrusions having internal baffle system complying with ASTM E 1612 in sizes and profiles indicated or as recommended by manufacturer.
H.
Preformed Cellular Foams: [Nonextruded, low-density, crosslinked, nitrogen-blown ethylene-vinyl-acetate copolymer] [Extruded neoprene] [Extruded neoprene or polyurethane], compressible foam.
I.
Fire Barrier Assembly: “Wabo ThermoShield Fire Barrier” high purity ceramic fiber blanket encapsulated in a fiberglass reinforced aluminum foil to minimize dusting and passage of smoke. 1.
Blanket to meet the following requirements: a. b. c. d. e. f.
Density: Melting Point: Service Limit: Flame Spread (ASTM E-84): Smoke Developed (ASTM E-84): Color: White.
EXPANSION CONTROL
8 PCF. 3200° F. 2300° F. 0. 0.
079500 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE g. 2. J.
2.6 A.
Encapsulation Envelope (smoke barrier): Fiberglass reinforced aluminum foil.
Fire Tape: Self-extinguishing 0.045” x 2” wide durable woven textile.
Accessories: Manufacturer's standard anchors, clips, fasteners, set screws, spacers, flexible moisture barrier and filler materials, drain tubes, lubricants, adhesives, sealants and other accessories compatible with material in contact, as indicated or required for complete installations. FINISHES General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1.
B.
01/13/12
Applying a strippable, temporary protective covering on exposed surfaces to protect mechanical finishes from damage by before shipping.
Aluminum: 1. 2. 3.
Mill Finish: AA-M10 Mechanical finish as fabricated. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 607.1. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 607.1. a.
4.
Baked-Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42R1x. a.
5.
Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
Organic Coating: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils, medium gloss. a.
6.
Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
High-Performance Organic Finish: AAMA 2604 or 2605. a.
Color and Gloss: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.
INSTALLATION Prior to installation, verify the structure at each condition is ready to receive the Work. Verify field dimensions and alignment of finish surfaces to assure correct expansion control component installation. Proceed with the work after conditions that would adversely affect the appearance and performance of the installed components have been corrected.
EXPANSION CONTROL
079500 - 6
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE B.
Install expansion control systems in full compliance with manufacturer's written instructions and typical details. 1.
2. 3. 4. C.
01/13/12
Cut, drill, and fit architectural joint systems as required for complete installation. Install with hairline mitered corners where units change directions and hairline joints where unit lengths abut or units abut other materials. Secure to in-place construction. Install components straight, plumb, level, and flush with adjacent finished surfaces. Rigidly anchor frames to substrate. Install fire barriers to provide continuous, uninterrupted fire resistance throughout length of joint, including transitions and end joints. Install water barriers at exterior joints. Apply sealant where required to prevent water penetration.
Inspect gaskets for proper installation and operation. Remove and replace damaged or improperly installed materials.
END OF SECTION 079500
EXPANSION CONTROL
079500 - 7
08
OPENINGS
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY Section Includes: Standard hollow metal doors and frames. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
1.2 A.
Exterior insulated doors. Interior non-insulated doors. Exterior and interior door frames. Unit entry doors. Accessories.
SUBMITTALS Product Data and Reports: For each type of product indicated. 1. 2.
Door and Frame Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Certificates for rated doors and frames.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include material descriptions, core descriptions, label compliance, elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses, preparations for hardware and other details.
C.
Samples: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
1.3 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 1.
B.
Temperature-Rise Limit: At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure.
Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105 or UL 1784.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
MANUFACTURERS Hollow metal doors and frames by Steelcraft form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable designs, materials, performance characteristics and finishes by the following manufacturers are also acceptable: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
2.2 A.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS Interior Flush Doors: Model LW-18, SDI Level II, Model 2, 1-3/4" thick, with 18 gauge steel face sheets, welded and filled edge seams, and resin impregnated kraft paper honeycomb core. 1. 2. 3.
B.
Amweld Building Products, Inc. Ceco Door Products. Curries Co. Kewanee Corp. Mesker Door, Inc. Pioneer Industries Inc. Windsor Republic Doors.
Full Flush Design: Style F. Narrow Glass Design: Style N4 with 4" x 25" glass lite where scheduled. Provide rated doors where indicated in Door and Frame Schedule on the Drawings.
Exterior Flush Doors: Model LW-16, SDI Level III, Model 2, 1-3/4" thick, with 16 gauge, A60 galvanized steel face sheets, welded and filled edge seams, and 1½ lbs. density polyurethane insulated core. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Full Flush Design: Series L, Style FT-2S. Narrow Glass Design: Style N4 with 4" x 25" glass lite where scheduled. R-Value: 11.1, as tested. Provide top edge closed with 16 gauge steel inverted closure channel welded in place with the web flush with the door top. Plastic fillers not acceptable.
C.
Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6.
D.
Finish: Factory applied baked on rust inhibiting primer in accordance with ANSI A250.10.
2.3 A.
UNIT ENTRY DOORS (Contractor’s Option) Hollow metal or fiberglass doors and frames by Intertek (Therma Tru Corporation) form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable materials and performance characteristics by other manufacturers may be submitted to the Architect for review no later than ten (10) days prior to the Bid Date.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE B.
Types: 1.
Hollow Metal Polyurethane Core: a. b. c.
Door Design: Embossed simulated panels as shown the Drawings. Fire Resistant Rating: 20 minute per NFPA 252, and UL 10(b). Frames: (Contractors Option) 1) 2) 3) 4)
2.
Door to be pre-hung to proprietary wood rated frame. Field fitted to rated wood frame. Field fitted to pre-finished metal frames per Division 08 Section “Prefinished Hollow Metal Frames”. Provide hardware as listed in Division 08 Section “Door Hardware”.
Fiberglass Reinforced Face with Proprietary Core: a. b. c.
Door Design: Embossed simulated panels as shown the Drawings. Fire Resistant Rating: 20 minute per NFPA 252, and UL 10(c). Frames: (Contractors Option) 1) 2) 3) 4)
2.4
01/13/12
Door to be pre-hung to proprietary wood rated frame. Field fitted to rated wood frame. Field fitted to pre-finished metal frames per Division 08 Section “Prefinished Hollow Metal Frames”. Provide hardware as listed in Division 08 Section “Door Hardware”.
FRAMES
A.
General: ANSI A250.8; conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Door Frames: "Flush (F)" and "Multiple Use (MU)" double rabbet profile, cold rolled steel, with 2" face. 1. 2. 3.
Provide 4" head and sill sections where indicated. Provide rated frames where indicated in Door and Frame Schedule on the Drawings. Interior door: 18 gauge. a.
4.
Door Frames: KD.
Exterior: 16 gauge steel, galvanized G90, welded.
C.
Door Silencers: Three silencers on single-door frames and two silencers on doubledoor frames.
D.
Grout Guards: 0.016" thick, steel sheet grout guards or mortar boxes to close off interior of openings. Provide at following locations: 1. 2.
Grouted masonry frames. Electric strike locations.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE E.
01/13/12
Supports and Anchors: Not less than 0.042" thick zinc-coated steel sheet. 1.
Masonry Wall Anchors: 0.177" diameter, steel wire complying with ASTM A 510 may be used in place of steel sheet.
F.
Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Zinc-coat items that are to be built into exterior walls according to ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable.
G.
Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6.
H.
Finish: Factory applied baked on rust inhibiting primer in accordance with ANSI A250.10.
2.5
MATERIALS
A.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, CS, Type B; suitable for exposed applications.
B.
Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011, CS, Type B.
C.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 metallic coating.
D.
Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1.
For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008 or ASTM A 1011, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153, Class B.
E.
Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153.
F.
Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4", as measured according to ASTM C 143.
G.
Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I.
H.
Glazing: Refer to Division 08 Section "Glazing".
I.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15mil dry film thickness per coat.
2.6 A.
FRAME ANCHORS Jamb Anchors: 1.
2. 3.
Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042" thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2" wide by 10" long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177" thick. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042" thick. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 4.
B.
Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8" diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.
Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042" thick, and as follows: 1. 2.
2.7
01/13/12
Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 2" height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface.
STOPS AND MOLDINGS
A.
Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8" high unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032" thick, same material as frames.
C.
Door Glazed Lite Moldings: 1.
Flush Doors: a. b.
2. 3.
2.8
Non-insulated Glazing: "Standard Dezinger Trim" with glass in the center plane. Glass thickness as indicated. Insulated Glazing: Manufacturer’s standard overlapping steel trim with glass in the front plane and applied stops. Glass thickness as indicated.
Provide non-removable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors for glass. Provide screw-applied, removable, glazing stops on inside of glass, and other panels in doors.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.
B.
Ceiling Struts: Minimum ¼ "thick x 1" wide steel.
2.9
FABRICATION
A.
Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.
B.
Hollow Metal Doors:
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1. 2. 3. C.
01/13/12
Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated.
Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. 2.
3. 4. 5. 6.
Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress and make smooth, flush and invisible. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a.
Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18" from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32" o.c. and as follows: 1) 2) 3) 4)
b.
Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18" from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32" o.c. and as follows: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
c. d. 7.
Two anchors per jamb up to 60" high. Three anchors per jamb from 60" to 90" high. Four anchors per jamb from 90" to 120" high. Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 " or fraction thereof above 120" high.
Three anchors per jamb up to 60" high. Four anchors per jamb from 60" to 90" high. Five anchors per jamb from 90" to 96" high. Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24" or fraction thereof above 96" high. Two anchors per head for frames more than 42" wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions.
Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6" from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26" o.c.
Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers. a. b.
Single-Door Frames: Three door silencers. Double-Door Frames: Two door silencers.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 6
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE D.
Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." 1. 2. 3.
4. E.
2. 3. 4. 5.
A.
Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surfacemounted door hardware. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 26 electrical Sections.
Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 1.
2.10
01/13/12
Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of installation indicated.
STEEL FINISHES Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 1.
Shop Primer: ANSI/SDI A250.10.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.
INSTALLATION Hollow Metal Frames: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11. 1.
Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. b.
At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress and make splice smooth, flush and invisible
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 7
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
c. d. e. f. g. 2.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.
Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Take precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or damaged by grout forces. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush and invisible on exposed faces. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush and invisible on exposed faces. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist and plumb to the following tolerances: a. b. c. d.
B.
on exposed faces. Prime welded and ground areas to match factory priming. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout containing antifreezing agents.
Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. a.
3. 4.
01/13/12
Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16", measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16", measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16", measured at jambs at floor.
Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1.
Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 8
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE a. b. c. d. 2. 3. C.
Jambs and Head: 1/8" plus or minus 1/16". Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8" plus or minus 1/16". Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8". Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4".
Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105.
Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions. 1.
3.2
01/13/12
Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9" o.c. and not more than 2" o.c. from each corner.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed or otherwise unacceptable.
B.
Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
C.
Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 081113
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113 - 9
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 081213.23 - PREFINISHED HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2.
B.
1.2 A.
Interior prefinished steel door frames. Installation accessories.
Applied wood trim on door frames provided under Division 06 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork". SUBMITTALS Product Data and Reports: For each type of product indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, ratings and finishes. Door and Frame Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Manufacturer Certificates: For rated frames. Manufacturer Certificate: For certified installers.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include material descriptions, core descriptions, label compliance, elevations, frame profiles and details, metal thicknesses, preparations for hardware and other details.
C.
Samples: For units with factory-applied color finishes, provide available colors.
1.3 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Regulatory Requirements: Fabricate and label prefinished door frames to comply with the following 1. 2. 3. 4.
Standard Cold Rolled Materials: ASTM A1008M. Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies: ASTM E152. Fire Doors and Windows: NFPA 80. Fire Rated Frames: Identified by label or marking bearing the wording, "Listed Fire Door Frame", the Warnock Hersey Certification Mark.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain prefinished door frames through one source from a single manufacturer.
C.
Installers: Company with installers who are certified by prefinished door frame manufacturer for the installation of site assembled door frames.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PREFINISHED HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
081213.23 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2.1 A.
MANUFACTURERS Prefinished steel door frames by Timely form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable designs, materials, performance characteristics, ratings and finishes by manufacturers listed below are also acceptable. 1.
2.2 A.
Dunbarton Corp.
PREFINISHED STEEL DOOR FRAMES Frame Types: "Standard Profile" for rated and non-rated interior openings. 1. 2. 3.
Frame Ratings: Refer to Door and Frame Schedule on the Drawings. Wood Door Thickness: 1¾". Frame Material: 20 gauge cold-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A 1008M.
1. 2. 3.
Type: Surface mounted, knock down, with mitered corners. Frame Throat Openings: Refer to Drawings. Frame Finish: Prefinished with factory applied impact resistant, polyester baked enamel finish. Color: Painted to match the wood trim color. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.
4. C.
Salt Spray: No opening or rusting, ASTM D1654. Weatherometer: No deterioration of film, ASTM D822. Flexibility: No cracking, ASTM D2197. Blistering: No blistering, ASTM D714. Humidity: Less than 5% No. 8 size blisters, ASTM D2247. Gloss: 60%, ASTM D523. Chalking: None, ASTM D659. Color Change: No change, ASTM D2244.
Trim: Wood, provided under Division 06 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork".
Accessories: 1. 2. 3. 4.
D.
01/13/12
Closer Reinforcement Brackets: None required. Silencers: Vinyl or rubber. Fasteners: Interior frames, drywall type. Finish Repair Materials: Match Selected color.
Fabrication: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Hinge Preparation: Fabricate frames with hinge reinforcement plates secured in place. Strike Preparation: Prepare door frames for indicated strikes in accordance with lockset manufacturer's templates and instructions. Closer Preparation: Provide reinforcement for frames indicated to receive closer hardware. Fire Rated Frames: Attach certifying agency's fire-resistance rating labels on frames for fire-rated openings.
PREFINISHED HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
081213.23 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 5.
01/13/12
Silencers: Provide three (3) single silencers for single doors on strike side.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B.
Install frames in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned and securely fastened to wall assemblies with permanent anchors.
C.
Install frames for fire-rated openings in accordance with requirements of NFPA 80.
D.
Touch-up blemishes on finished frames after doors and hardware are installed.
END OF SECTION 081213.23
PREFINISHED HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
081213.23 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes flush solid or hollow core MDF doors as follows: 1. 2.
1.2 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data and Reports: For each type of door indicated. 1. 2. 3.
B.
Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
Samples: 1. 2.
1.3
Door Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Product test reports for each type of rated and non-rated door. Factory-finishing specifications.
Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data. 1. 2.
C.
Pre-hung, pre-finished unit interior doors. Factory finishing.
For factory pre-finished doors. Manufacturer’s written warranty for each door type.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.
B.
Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors."
1.4 A.
WARRANTY Warranty: Manufacturer’s written guarantee for replacement of doors that warp or twist in excess of ¼” in 8'-0" for period noted commencing at the date of Substantial Completion. Includes defective door replacement, rehanging and refinishing at no Owner cost.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081416 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1.
01/13/12
Interior: Full lifetime warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
2.2 A.
MANUFACTURERS Pre-hung, pre-finished MDF doors by Masonite International, Inc. form the basis-ofdesign. Products with comparable materials and performance characteristics by other manufacturers may be submitted to the Architect for review no later than ten (10) days prior to the Bid Date. PRE-FINISHED UNIT INTERIOR DOORS Pre-Finish Doors: “MDF Series” molded panel doors. 1.
Interior Solid or Hollow Core Doors: Non-rated doors. a. b. c. d.
Type: Unit interior swing and bi-fold doors. Faces: Embossed simulated panels as shown the Drawings. Surface: Smooth or textured, to be determined by the Owner. Construction: 1) 2)
2.3
Solid Core: Wood or MDF stiles and rails with low density composite core. Solid wood at hinge and strike side. Hollow Core: Wood or MDF stiles and rails with Corrugated cell core. Solid wood at hinge and strike side.
FABRICATION
A.
Factory pre-hang doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.
2.4 A.
FACTORY FINISHING General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. 1.
B.
Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts and mortises.
Doors if indicated to receive a different opaque finish than factory refer to Division 09 Section "Painting" for shop or field finish.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081416 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."
B.
Installation Instructions: Install pre-hung doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
C.
Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
D.
Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.
END OF SECTION 081416
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081416 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes interior and exterior access doors and frames for access to concealed work other than mechanical, plumbing, fire protection and electrical items.
B.
See Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for mortise or rim cylinder locks and master keying.
C.
Access doors to concealed mechanical, plumbing, fire protection and electrical items provided under Divisions 21 through 28.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of access door and frame indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work.
C.
Samples: For each door face material in specified finish.
D.
Schedule: Types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation. 1.
1.3 A.
Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to concealed non-plumbing, fire protection and electrical items mechanical, or other concealed work, and indicate in the schedule.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per the following test method and that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. 2.
NFPA 252 or UL 10B for vertical access doors and frames. ASTM E 119 or UL 263 for horizontal access doors and frames.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
083113 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
MANUFACTURERS Access doors and frames by Karp Associates, Inc. form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable material and operational characteristics, accessories and finishes by the following manufacturers are also acceptable. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
2.2 A.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS Interior Flush Access Doors and Trimless Frames: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
B.
Acudor Products, Inc. Babcock-Davis. Cendrex Inc. Dur-Red Products. J. L. Industries, Inc. Larsen's Manufacturing Co. Milcor Inc. Nystrom, Inc
Model: "KDW". Sizes: As required by installation conditions for each location. Material: Prime-painted steel. Surface Type: Gypsum board. Locations: Walls and ceilings. Door: 14 gauge steel, set flush with surrounding finish surfaces. Frame: 16 gauge steel with galvanized drywall bead. Hinges: Continuous piano type. Lock: Flush and screwdriver operated with stainless steel cam and stud. Cylinder lock with dust shutter. All locks keyed alike. Finish: Prime coat rust inhibitive electrostatic powder, baked gray enamel.
Interior Flush, Uninsulated, Fire-Rated Access Doors and Trimless Frames: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.
Model: "KRP-450FR". Sizes: As required by installation conditions for each location. Material: Prime-painted steel. Surface Type: Gypsum board. Locations: Walls and ceilings. Fire-Resistance Rating: 1 hour, walls only. Temperature-Rise Rating: 250 deg F at the end of 30 minutes. Door: Flush panel, 20 gauge steel pan type with 2” thick mineral-fiber insulation, self-latching with automatic closer and interior latch release. Frame: 16 gauge steel, 1” wide, with galvanized drywall bead. Hinges: Continuous piano type, 175 degree opening range.. Automatic Closer: Spring type. Latch: Self-latching bolt operated by key with interior release. Lock: Combination ring turn and flush key. All locks keyed alike
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
083113 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 14. C.
7. 8. 9. 10.
A.
Model: "MX". Sizes: As required by installation conditions for each location. Material: Prime-painted steel. Surface Types: Any. Locations: Walls and soffits. Door: 18 gauge galvanized steel with welded, watertight pan, with 1" thick polystyrene insulation, and 3/8" wide by 1/8" thick closed cell neoprene gasketing between door and frame. Frame and Trim: 18 gauge galvanized steel with 1” wide surface-mounted trim with welded & ground smooth corners. Hinges: Continuous stainless steel piano type. Lock: "Southco Lift & Turn Compression Latch", key operated with cup sealing gasket and finished in textured chrome. All locks keyed alike. Finish: Prime coat rust inhibitive electrostatic powder, baked gray enamel.
STEEL MATERIALS Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36. 1. 2.
B.
Finish: Prime coat rust inhibitive electrostatic powder, baked gray enamel.
Exterior Surface Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
2.3
01/13/12
ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products. ASTM A 153, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36 or ASTM A 283, Grade C or D. 1. 2.
ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products. ASTM A 153, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
C.
Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc-coated, ASTM A 591 with cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.
D.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Commercial Steel (CS) with A60 zinc-ironalloy (galvannealed) coating or G60 mill-phosphatized zinc coating.
E.
Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1.
Factory-Primed Finish: Manufacturer's standard shop primer.
F.
Drywall Beads: 0.0299" zinc-coated steel sheet to receive joint compound.
G.
Manufacturer's standard finish.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
083113 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2.4
01/13/12
FABRICATION
A.
General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation.
B.
Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes.
C.
Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports indicated.
D.
Recessed Access Doors: Form face of panel to provide recess for application of applied finish. Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling.
E.
Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed. 1. 2.
F.
For cylinder lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike. For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device. Furnish plastic grommets and install in holes cut through finish.
Extruded Aluminum: After fabrication, apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on aluminum that will come in contact with concrete.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.
B.
Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finish surfaces.
C.
Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.
D.
Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation.
E.
Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.
END OF SECTION 083113
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
083113 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 083323 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes the following types of manually operated overhead coiling doors: 1. 2.
Fire-rated service doors. Trash room service door.
B.
See Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports.
C.
See Division 09 Section “Painting” for field finishing.
1.2 A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Structural Performance: Provide overhead coiling doors capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses without evidencing permanent deformation of door components: 1. 2.
Fire Shutter Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 lbf/sq. ft acting inward and outward. Impact Test for Flying Debris: Comply with ASTM E 1996, tested according to ASTM E 1886. a. b.
B.
Operation-Cycle Requirements: Provide overhead coiling door components and operators capable of operating for not less than 20,000 cycles. 1.
1.3
Level of Protection: Basic Protection or unprotected, as determined by the manufacturer. Wind Zone: 90 mph, pressure test to 1/2 and 1-1/2 x design pressure (positive and negative).
Operation Cycle: One complete cycle begins with door in closed position. Door is then moved to open position and back to closed position.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, dimensions and attachment to other work. 1.
Verify openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate such on Shop Drawings.
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
083323 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2. 3. 4. 5.
01/13/12
Provide door schedule listing same door reference designations indicated on Drawings. Provide description of operations for motorized and fire rated doors. Provide power and control wiring diagrams and power requirements for motorized doors. Provide hanging weight of each door.
C.
Samples: For each exposed finish.
D.
Oversize Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be fire-rated and that exceed size limitations of labeled assemblies.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per UL 10b and NFPA 252, and that are listed and labeled for fire ratings indicated by UL, FMG, ITS, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Fire-rated Service and Counter Doors: Doors shall operate upon the fusing of either 160 degree fusible link or smoke detector located at the head and on each side of the wall, or a signal from building fire alarm system. 1.
Door descent velocity adjustable.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
FIRE-RATED COILING SERVICE DOORS Fire-rated coiling service doors by Overhead Door Corp. form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable material, equipment, operational characteristics and finishes by the following manufacturers are also acceptable. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
B.
Atlas Door. Cookson Co. Cornell Iron Works Inc. Mahon Door Corp. McKeon Rolling Steel Door Company, Inc. Wayne-Dalton Corp. Raynor. Windsor Door.
Interior Garage Fire-Rated Service Door: 1.
Model: "Fireking 630 Series”.
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
083323 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2.
Rating: NFPA-80, UL Three (3) hour. a.
3. 4.
6. 7. 8.
9.
10.
11.
13.
Chain Hoist Operator: Manufacturer’s standard chain hoist lifting device. Mechanical floor resettable hoist system as part of counterbalance system.
Door Curtain: 22 gauge (or gauge as recommended by the manufacturer) coldrolled galvanized steel, 2” flat interlocking slats in continuous length for door width, non-insulated. Endlocks: Malleable iron or stamped steel, located on every other curtain slat. Bottom Bar: Reinforced with two steel angles of equal size and weight and bolted together. Curtain Jamb Guides: Steel angles with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and withstand loading. Slotted holes for expansion at bolt connections. Brackets: Precision formed steel plates, with permanently sealed ball bearings, designed to enclose coil ends and provide counterbalance pipe support at each end. Counterbalance: Pipe of sufficient size to carry door load with deflection not to exceed 0.03” per foot of door span and evenly balanced by helical springs, oil tempered torsion type designed with a 25% safety factor. Cast iron barrel plugs used to anchor springs to tension shaft and pipe. Hood: Minimum 24 gauge galvanized sheet metal, flanged at top for attachment to header and beaded at bottom to provide longitudinal stiffness. Hood to enclose curtain coil and counterbalance mechanism. a.
12.
Provide UL labels on door as required.
Mounting: Face-of-wall. Operation: Chain hoist. a. b.
5.
01/13/12
Furnish hoods with flame baffle controlled by fusible links and designed to close against coil in the event of fire to reduce flame and smoke spread.
Automatic Closing Device: Thermally actuated by means of a fusible link rated @ 160 degrees on each side of the opening. Smoke Seals: UL-listed and -tested, smoke-seal perimeter gaskets as required to meet UL or FM requirements.
C.
Shop Finish: Shop coat of “Gray” rust inhibitive primer on galvanized surfaces and operating mechanisms. Guides and bracket plates coated with a “Gray” prime paint.
D.
Field Finish: Provided under Division 09 Section “Painting”.
2.2 A.
NON-RATES COILING SERVICE DOORS Non-rated, non-insulated coiling service doors by Overhead Door Corp. form the basisof-design. Products with comparable material, equipment, operational characteristics and finishes by the following manufacturers are also acceptable. 1.
Cookson Co.
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
083323 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2. 3. 4. 5. B.
01/13/12
Cornell Iron Works Inc. Mahon Door Corp. McKeon Rolling Steel Door Company, Inc. Wayne-Dalton Corp.
Exterior Non-Rated, Non-Insulated Service Door: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Model: "610 or 620 Series”. Mounting: Face-of-wall. Operation: Chain-hoist. Door Curtain: 18 gauge cold-rolled galvanized steel, #14 3” flat interlocking slats in continuous length for door width. a.
5. 6.
Windlocks: Metal fabrications located on every other curtain slat. Bottom Bar: a. b.
7.
8.
10.
11.
13. 14.
Guides provided with integral windlock bars and vinyl weatherstripping.
Brackets: Steel plates, 3/16" thick minimum with permanently sealed ball bearings. Designed to enclose ends of coil and provide support for counterbalance pipe at each end. Counterbalance: Pipe of sufficient size to carry door load with deflection not to exceed .03” per foot of door span and evenly balanced by helical springs, oil tempered torsion type designed with a 25% safety factor. Cast iron barrel plugs used to anchor springs to tension shaft and pipe. Hood: Minimum 24 gauge galvanized sheet metal, flanged at top for attachment to header and beaded at bottom to provide longitudinal stiffness. Hood to enclose curtain coil and counterbalance mechanism. a.
12.
Two equal sized roll formed steel angles, minimum 1/8" thick and fitted with EPDM bottom weatherseal. (when no locking or slide bolts are used). When additional security is required, provide (slide bolts) or (cylinder locks) on the bottom bar operable coil side of door.
Curtain Jamb Guides: Steel angles with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and withstand loading. Slotted holes for expansion at bolt connections. Guides: Roll-formed steel channels and angles or structural steel angles forming a slot of sufficient depth to retain curtains in guides to resist designated windload. a.
9.
Wind Load: 20 PSF.
Furnish neoprene hood baffle.
Locking: Manufacturer’s standard slide bolt locks suitable for padlocks by others or key operated cylinder locks. Weatherstripping: Nylon straight bristle, brush type weatherseal at lintel, with aluminum extrusion attachment to header. Shop Finish: Shop applied rust inhibitive primer on galvanized and nongalvanized surfaces and operating mechanisms. Guides and bracket plates coated with a flat black prime paint.
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
083323 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 15. C.
01/13/12
Field Finish: Provided under division 09 Section “Painting”.
Door Curtains: Interlocking slats in a continuous length for width of door of thickness and mechanical properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door. 1. 2.
Steel Door Curtain Slats: Zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled structural steel (SS) sheet; complying with ASTM A 653, G90 (Z275) coating designation. Slat type: As indicated. a. Fenestrated slats.
D.
Endlocks: Malleable-iron casings, secured to curtain slats to comply with wind load.
E.
Bottom Bar: Manufacturer's standard to suit type of curtain slats. 1.
Astragal: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible gasket of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene; as a cushion bumper for interior door.
F.
Curtain Jamb Guides: Steel angles or channels and angles, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Slot bolt holes for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain.
G.
Hood: Form to act as weatherseal and entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Provide closed ends for surface-mounted hoods, and provide fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting projecting beyond wall face. Provide intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging. 1. 2.
H.
Steel Door Hoods: Minimum 24 gauge, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet that matches slat steel. Shape: Round.
Integral Frame, Hood, and Fascia: Welded assemblies: 1. 2.
Steel: Minimum 0.064” thick, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet that matches door steel. Stainless-Steel: Minimum 0.0625” thick stainless-steel sheet, Type 304.
I.
Integral Sills: Integral part of frame assembly; fabricate of same sheet metal.
J.
Weatherseals: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping gaskets fitted to bottom and top of exterior doors, unless otherwise indicated. At door head, use 1/8” thick, replaceable, continuous sheet secured to inside of hood. 1. 2.
K.
Motor-Operated Doors: Combination bottom weatherseal and sensor edge. Jamb Seals: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, flexible, 1/8” thick seals of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene at door jambs for a weathertight installation.
Push/Pull Handles: Galvanized steel lifting handles on each side of door.
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
083323 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1.
01/13/12
Provide pull-down straps or pole hooks for doors more than 84” high.
L.
Slide Bolt: Engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock, located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side.
M.
Locking Device Assembly: Lock, spring-loaded dead bolt, operating handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bar to engage through slots in tracks. 1.
Lock cylinder is specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."
N.
Chain Lock Keeper: Suitable for padlock.
O.
Counterbalancing Mechanism: Adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to door curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members. 1.
Mounting Brackets: Cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.
INSTALLATION General: Install door and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and head mold strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports. 1.
Fire-Rated Doors: Install to comply with NFPA 80.
B.
Prior to installation, inspect rough opening and surrounding conditions. Proceed with installation after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
C.
Erect jamb guides straight, plumb, and rigidly secured to wall. Hang door and fire shutter and adjust closing to achieve smooth operation. Store fire shutter in open position.
D.
Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors and shutters to operate easily, free from warp, twist, or distortion and fitting smoketight for entire perimeter.
E.
Protect fire door and shutter hoods and fusible links from damage during balance of construction.
3.2
TEST AND DEMONSTRATION
A.
Test door operation in the presence of local authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain doors. Refer to Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures or Demonstration and Training."
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
083323 - 6
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
END OF SECTION 083323
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
083323 - 7
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES, STOREFRONTS AND WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
1.2 A.
Exterior and interior aluminum-framed storefronts. Exterior fixed windows. Exterior and interior manual-swing aluminum doors and hardware. Factory glazing at operable units. Miscellaneous aluminum closures, panels, flashing and fabrications. Caulking and sealants within framing systems. Fasteners and accessories. Field tests, inspections and reports.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS General: Provide aluminum-framed systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding, without failure, the effects of the following: 1. 2. 3.
4. 5.
Structural loads. Thermal movements. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. Failure includes the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
B.
Structural Loads: 1. 2.
C.
Deflection exceeding specified limits. Thermal stresses transferred to building structure. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movements, to glazing. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. Sealant failure. Failure of operating units.
Wind Loads: 90 mph. Seismic Loads: As indicated on Structural Drawings.
Deflection of Framing Members Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13’-6” or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4”, whichever is less.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES, STOREFRONTS AND WINDOWS
084113 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE D.
01/13/12
Structural-Test Performance: Systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows: 1. 2.
3.
When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity but not less than 10 seconds.
E.
Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistance-Test Performance:
F.
Temperature Change (Range): Systems accommodate -20 deg F to 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
G.
Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of systems of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.
H.
Water Penetration Under Static Pressure: Systems do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.
I.
Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas of systems have condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 53 CRF when tested according to AAMA 1503.
J.
Average Thermal Conductance: Fixed glazing and framing areas of systems have average U-factor of not more than 0.69 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F when tested according to AAMA 1503.
1.3 A.
SUBMITTALS Data and Reports: 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
Product data for each type of product indicated. Sealant test reports. Product test reports. Field quality-control test and inspection reports.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work. 1.
2.
Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. Prepare data based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project. For entrances, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types, functions, quantities, and locations.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES, STOREFRONTS AND WINDOWS
084113 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 3. 4. C. 1.4
01/13/12
Door Schedule. Use same reference designations indicated on Drawings. Include expansion fabrications, corners, aluminum closures, flashings, miscellaneous fabrications and fasteners.
Samples: For each exposed finish and for each color required. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Acceptable to manufacturer and capable of preparation of data for aluminum-framed systems including Shop Drawings based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.
C.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code-Aluminum."
D.
Door Hardware: Comply with state and local codes, and the Americans with Disabilities Act, Section 4.13 - Doors.
1.5 A.
WARRANTY Framing System Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace systems that fail in materials and workmanship. Failure includes, but is not limited to the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
B.
Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. Failure of operating components to function normally. Water leakage through fixed glazing and frame areas. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion.
Painted Finish System Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace materials that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. Deterioration includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Cracking, chipping, peeling or other mechanical failure of paint to adhere to the substrate. Fading or color change in excess of five hunter delta E units as determined by ASTM D2244-79. Chalking in excess of a numerical rating of eight as determined by ASTM D422489. Warranty Period: Twenty (20) years from date of Substantial Completion.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES, STOREFRONTS AND WINDOWS
084113 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
MANUFACTURERS Aluminum entrance framing systems and doors by Kawneer form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable materials, operational and performance characteristics, and finishes by the following manufacturers are also acceptable. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
2.2 A.
FRAMING SYSTEMS Exterior Entrance and Fixed Window Framing: “VersaGlaze Trifab 451T“ for 1” glazing, thermally broken. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
B.
Size: 2” x 4½”. Glazing Installation: Outside. Glazing Plane: Center back, front. Door Framing: Non-thermally broken. Finish: “Permanodic” AA-M12C22A44, AAMA 611, Architectural Class I Color Anodic Coating, #29 Black.
Interior Entrance and Fixed Window Framing: “Trifab VersaGlaze 450” for ¼” glazing, non-thermally broken. 1. 2. 3. 4.
C.
Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc. EFCO Corporation. Tubelite Architectural Systems. U.S. Aluminum. Vistawall Architectural Products. YKK AP America Inc.
Size: 1-3/4” x 4½”. Glazing Installation: Outside. Glazing Plane: Center back, front. Finish: “Permanodic” AA-M12C22A44, AAMA 611, Architectural Class I Color Anodic Coating, #29 Black.
Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1.
Exterior Thermally Broken Framing: "IsoLock Thermal Break" with 1/4" separation of two part chemically cured, high density polyurethane mechanically and adhesively joined to aluminum sections. a.
2. 3.
Thermal break designed in accordance with AAMA TIR-A8 and tested in accordance with AAMA 505. Interior Framing: Nonthermal. Corner Assemblies: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum, assemblies designed for framing corner conditions indicated and required. Match framing glazing installation: Includes:
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES, STOREFRONTS AND WINDOWS
084113 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE a. b. c. d. e. 4. 5.
Tubular: One and two piece units, square shape. Glazed: One, two, three and four pocket units, square shape. 135 Degree, Outside. Variable Degree Brake Metal Corners: One piece frames with integral receivers for brake metal inserts. Brake metal finish to match framing. Pivoting Mullions: Inside and outside units with integral pivoting capability. Range: 155 to 180 degrees
Expansion Mullions: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum two-piece, thermally broken framing members designed for horizontal movement. Fillers: a. b.
6.
01/13/12
Frames: Thermally broken, flat. Glazing Pockets: Manufacturer's standards required by installation conditions.
Provide thermally broken assemblies at exterior locations.
D.
Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
E.
Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. 2.
Provide fasteners of type, size and length required for installation conditions. Preservative Treated Materials: a.
b. c. 3. 4. 5.
Hot-Dip Galvanized: Conform to ASTM-A153 (hot-dip fastener products) and ASTM-A653 (coating designation G-185 for hot-dip connector and sheet products). Stainless Steel: Type 304 or 316. Aluminum: Not permitted for use with ACQ (Alkaline Copper Quaternary) pressure-treated wood.
Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads finished to match framing system.
F.
Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123/ A123M or ASTM A 153/ A 153M requirements.
G.
Window Trim and Closures: 6063-T5 aluminum break metal, fabricated to shapes shown. Finish: Match framing.
H.
Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials. Form exposed flashing from sheet aluminum finished to match framing and of sufficient thickness to maintain a flat appearance without visible deflection.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES, STOREFRONTS AND WINDOWS
084113 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1.
01/13/12
Sill Flashing: a. b. c.
Extruded: Manufacturer’s standard “L” shaped, thermally broken, aluminum Fabricated: Continuous “Z” or “L” shaped .032” aluminum. Finishes to match adjacent framing.
I.
Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard recommended by manufacturer for joint type.
J.
Framing Internal Reinforcement: Provide additional internal steel framing or components to insure maximum design stresses in steel or aluminum are not exceeded.
2.3
DOORS
A.
Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed doors for manual swing operation.
B.
Doors: 1-3/4” thick glazed doors with minimum 0.125” thick, extruded tubular rail and stile members, mechanically fastened corners with reinforcing brackets that are deep penetration and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie-rods, and with snap-on extruded-aluminum glazing stops and preformed gaskets. 1. 2. 3.
4.
Stile Design: “350 Series”, medium, 3½” maximum width. Bottom Rail Height: Provide 10" rails on doors with automatic openers per ANSI requirements. Finish: a. “Permanodic” AA-M12C22A44, AAMA 611, Architectural Class I Color Anodic Coating, #29 Black. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. a. b.
5. C.
Corner Construction: Mechanical fastenings and Sigma deep and fillet welds.
Hardware: Provided by door manufacturer unless noted otherwise. 1.
D.
Provide glazing pockets for glass thicknesses indicated. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.
Provided under Division 08 Section “Door Hardware”.
Door Construction: Extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deep penetration and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. 1.
Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES, STOREFRONTS AND WINDOWS
084113 - 6
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2.4
01/13/12
GLAZING SYSTEMS
A.
Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."
B.
Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types, replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile and hardness to maintain watertight seal.
C.
Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric types.
D.
Thermally Broken Spacers: Products by Azon USA, Inc. form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable materials, operational and performance characteristics, and finishes by the following manufacturers may be submitted to the Architect no later than ten (10) days prior to Bid Date. 1. 2.
"Warm-Light", anodized aluminum shape with a custom-formulated polyurethane thermal barrier. Manufacturer's Colors: Clear.
E.
Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop adhesion.
F.
Glazing Sealants: For structural-sealant-glazed systems, as recommended by manufacturer for joint type and as follows: 1.
Structural Sealant: ASTM C 1184, neutral-curing silicone formulation compatible with system components with which it comes in contact. a.
2.
Weatherseal Sealant: ASTM C 920 for Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, A, and O; neutral-curing silicone formulation compatible with structural sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact. a.
2.5 A.
Color: Matching structural sealant.
MATERIALS Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
B.
Color: Selected from manufacturer's full range of colors.
Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles and Tubes: ASTM B 221. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/ B 308M. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M
Steel Reinforcement: With manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant primer. 1. 2. 3.
Structural Shapes, Plates and Bars: ASTM A 36/ A36M. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/ A 1008M. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/ A1011M.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES, STOREFRONTS AND WINDOWS
084113 - 7
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2.6
01/13/12
ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Insulating Materials: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation."
B.
Joint Sealants: For installation within aluminum-framed systems and at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems framing system, provide manufacturer’s recommended materials. Comply with material requirements as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
C.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.
2.7
FABRICATION
A.
Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
B.
Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.
C.
Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Profiles that are sharp, straight and free of defects or deformations. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior. Fasteners, anchors and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible.
D.
Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.
E.
Structural-Sealant-Glazed Framing Members: Include accommodations for using temporary support device (dutchman) to retain glazing in place while structural sealant cures.
F.
Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing hardware. 1. 2.
G.
At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install three silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on head of frames for pairs of doors.
Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing hardware.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES, STOREFRONTS AND WINDOWS
084113 - 8
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1. 2.
01/13/12
At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.
H.
Hardware Installation: Factory install hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before applying finishes.
I.
After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.
INSTALLATION General: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Do not install damaged components. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration. Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated.
Metal Protection: 1.
2.
Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact pressure treated wood, concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C.
Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
D.
Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed to produce weathertight installation.
E.
Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, without warp or rack.
F.
Entrances: Install assemblies to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. Install hardware according to hardware manufacturer’s written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. 1. 2.
Doors: Install doors straight, plumb and square within openings. Weatherstripping: Apply door and frame materials to produce tight fit and weathertight closure around entire perimeter.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES, STOREFRONTS AND WINDOWS
084113 - 9
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 3. 4. 5. 6.
01/13/12
Closers: Adjust to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with accessibility requirements. Thresholds: Set in full bed of sealant and secure to flooring. Adjust height for proper door and sill sweep operation. Door Sill Sweeps: Apply sweep strips to door interior exposed bottom rail surface with concealed fasteners. Align sweeps to prevent water entrance at threshold. Exit Devices: Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation.
G.
Install joint sealants and to produce weathertight installation.
H.
Install operable windows operate and seal in accordance with manufacturers requirements.
I.
Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. 2.
Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8” in 12 feet; ¼” over total length. Alignment: a. b.
3.
3.2
Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16”. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32”.
Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurement to 1/8”.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B.
Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, a minimum area of 75 feet by 1 story of aluminum-framed systems designated by Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration. 1.
Test all entrances.
C.
Repair or remove work where test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.
D.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
E.
Aluminum-framed assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
F.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES, STOREFRONTS AND WINDOWS
084113 - 10
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 3.3 A.
01/13/12
DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE Refer to Division 08 Section "Door Hardware".
END OF SECTION 084113
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES, STOREFRONTS AND WINDOWS
084113 - 11
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 085313 - VINYL WINDOWS AND DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY Section includes: 1. 2.
1.2
Vinyl-frame windows. Vinyl sliding doors.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware, accessories, insect screens, operational clearances, and details of installation, including anchor, flashing, and sealant installation.
C.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color specified, 2 by 4 inches in size.
D.
Product Schedule: For vinyl windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.3
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Product test reports.
B.
Sample warranties.
1.4 A.
1.5 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. WARRANTY Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace vinyl windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.
Warranty Period: a. b.
Window: 10 years (transferable) from date of Substantial Completion. Glazing Units: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
VINYL WINDOWS AND DOORS
085313 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
MANUFACTURERS Vinyl windows by JELD-WEN, Inc. form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable materials, operational and performance characteristics, and finishes by the following manufacturers are also acceptable. 1. 2. 3. 4.
2.2
CertainTeed Corporation. Pella Corporation. Quaker Windows Products Co. Weather Shield Mfg., Inc.
WINDOW PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Product Standard: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.
B.
NFRC Certified: Rated and labeled per NFRC.
C.
Thermal Transmittance: R20-DP rated.
2.3
VINYL WINDOWS
A.
Series: Builders Vinyl.
B.
Operating Types: Single-hung units.
C.
Frames and Sashes: Impact-resistant, AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440. 1. 2.
D.
UV-stabilized
PVC
complying
with
Finish: Integral color, to be determined. Gypsum Board Returns: Provide at interior face of frame.
Insulating-Glass Units: ASTM E 2190. 1.
Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3. a. b.
2. 3.
Tint: Clear, low-E coated. Kind: ¾” thick insulated, fully tempered where indicated on Drawings.
Lites: Two. Filling: Fill space between glass lites with air.
E.
Glazing System: weathertight seal.
Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces
F.
Hardware, General: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant material sized to accommodate sash weight and dimensions.
VINYL WINDOWS AND DOORS
085313 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1. G.
01/13/12
Exposed Hardware Color and Finish: To match window or as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Hung Window Hardware: 1. 2.
3.
Counterbalancing Mechanism: AAMA 902, block and tackle. Locks and Latches: Visible latch indicator or a single action cam style lock operated from the inside only. Provide ADAAG compliant hardware where required, refer to the Drawings. Tilt Hardware: Low profile thumb latches (sash retainers) and pivot pins are equipped for utilization of the ”tilt” function.
H.
Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash unless otherwise indicated.
I.
Fasteners: Noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components. 1.
2.4 A.
ACCESSORIES Dividers (False Muntins): Provide divider grilles in designs indicated for each sash lite. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
2.5 A. B.
General: Fabricate insect screens to fully integrate with window frame. Provide screen for each operable exterior sash. Screen wickets are not permitted. Aluminum Frames: Complying with SMA 1004 or SMA 1201.
A.
Finish for Exterior Screens: Aluminum color to match the color of the window unit.
Glass-Fiber Mesh Fabric: Mesh complying with ASTM D 3656. 1.
2.6
Quantity and Type: One permanently located between insulating-glass lites. Material: Manufacturer's standard size to be determined. Pattern: As indicated on Drawings. Profile: Flat. Color: Color to match extrusion color.
INSECT SCREENS
1. C.
Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners to the greatest extent possible. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish hardware being fastened.
Mesh Color: Manufacturer's standard charcoal color.
VINYL SLIDING DOORS Series: Builders Vinyl.
VINYL WINDOWS AND DOORS
085313 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE B.
Operating Types: Sliding. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Color: White. Insulating Low-E glass. All frames are assembled utilizing fusion-welded technology for added strength and durability. Integral nailing fin can be easily removed for replacement purposes. Heavy-duty lock. Full perimeter weatherstrip. Overall frame width is 4-1/2". DP R-20* Options: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k.
2.7
01/13/12
Color: Desert Sand or Almond. Keyed cylinder locks. Insulating glass options: “LoE-366 Neat”, textured, tinted or other specialty glass. All glass is available tempered. Grilles between the glass (GBG) in 5/8" or 7/8" flat, or 5/8" or 1" contour grilles. Blinds between glass (BBG) in White. 3-panel door is available in a variety of configurations. Direct attachment of sidelights and transoms is available as an option (frame width of decorative units must match overall single frame unit). Frame options include pocket/block, flush fin and stucco key. Sliding fiberglass Charcoal color insect screen in an aluminum frame that matches the color of the unit. Retractable insect screens with easy-to-install instructions; available for 2panel applications (5' or 6' wide) only.
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate vinyl windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows.
B.
Glaze vinyl windows in the factory.
C.
Weather strip each operable sash to provide weathertight installation.
D.
Provide mullions and cover plates, compatible with window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design wind loads of window units. Provide manufacturer's standard finish to match window units.
E.
Mount hardware through double walls of vinyl extrusions or provide corrosion-resistant reinforcement.
VINYL WINDOWS AND DOORS
085313 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE F.
01/13/12
Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Allow for scribing, trimming, and fitting at Project site.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. For installation procedures and requirements not addressed in manufacturer's written instructions, comply with installation requirements in ASTM E 2112.
B.
Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction to produce weathertight construction.
C.
Adjust operating sashes and hardware for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure.
D.
Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.
E.
Remove and replace sashes if glass has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.
Remove excess
END OF SECTION 085313
VINYL WINDOWS AND DOORS
085313 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 086200 - UNIT SKYLIGHTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes factory-assembled unit skylights for installation in flat roof areas. 1. 2. 3.
B.
1.2 A.
Final curb flashing to membrane roof provided under Division 07 Section "Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing". PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Structural Loads: 1. 2.
B.
2.
3. 4.
A.
Temperatures: Fabricate and detail units to provide for normal thermal movement within a range of -20 degrees F to +120 degrees F without harmful buckling, opening joints, or undue stress to anchors and fastening devices. Water: Water infiltration from exterior to interior due to other than condensation and which does not readily drain outward through a system of weeps, will be considered a failure in performance.
Provide unit skylights capable of withstanding loads and conditions indicated without failure which includes the following: 1. 2.
1.3
Snow Load: As indicated on Structural Drawings. Negative Pressure (Uplift) Load: Provide unit skylights meeting requirements of American Architectural Manufacturer’s Association (AAMA) publication “Voluntary Uniform Load Structural Standard for Plastic Domed Skylights” (AAMA 1606-82) requiring acrylic thickness adequate to withstand positive and negative test pressure of 60 psf.
Environmental Conditions: 1.
C.
Type: Self flashing mounted on prefabricated curb. Glazing: Acrylic double dome. Required sealant and caulk within framing systems and at closures.
Thermal stresses transferred to building structure. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movement, to glazing. Noise or vibration created by thermal and structural movement and wind. Weakening of fasteners, attachments and other components.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each product indicated.
UNIT SKYLIGHTS
086200 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE B.
Shop Drawings: Include details of installation.
C.
Samples: For each exposed finish.
1.4 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Fire-Test Response Characteristics of Plastic Glazing: 1. 2.
Self-Ignition Temperature: 650 deg F or greater for plastic sheets in thickness indicated when tested per ASTM D 1929. Smoke Production Characteristics: Comply with either requirement below: a. b.
3.
b.
A.
Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less when tested per ASTM E 84 on plastic sheets in manner indicated for use. Smoke Density: 75 or less when tested per ASTM D 2843 on plastic sheets in thickness indicated for use.
Relative-Burning Characteristics: Tested per ASTM D 635. a.
1.5
01/13/12
Acrylic Glazing: Class CC2, burning rate of 2.5" per minute or less for nominal thickness of 0.060" or thickness indicated for use. Polycarbonate Glazing: Class CC1, burning extent of 1" or less for nominal thickness of 0.060" or thickness indicated for use.
WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of unit skylights that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.
Skylight Warranty: Provide written warranty signed by manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace work that exhibits defects in materials or workmanship and guaranteeing weather-tight and leak-free performance. “Defects” are defined as uncontrolled leakage of water and abnormal aging or deterioration. a.
2.
Glazing Warranty: Provide written warranty signed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace work that has or develops defects in the plastic. “Defects” are defined as abnormal aging or deterioration. a.
3.
Warranty Period: Two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion.
Warranty Period for Acrylic: Two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion against yellowing.
Finish Warranty: Provide written warranty signed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace work with finish defects. “Defects” are defined as peeling, chipping, chalking, fading, abnormal aging or deterioration, and failure to perform as required.
UNIT SKYLIGHTS
086200 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE a.
01/13/12
Warranty Period for Anodized Finish: One (1) year from date of Substantial Completion for film integrity.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
MANUFACTURERS Factory-assembled unit skylights by Plasteco, Inc form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable materials, operational and performance characteristics, and finishes by the following manufacturers are also acceptable 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
2.2
Bristolite Skylights. CPI International. Naturalite Skylight Systems. O'Keeffe's Inc. Wasco Products, Inc. Sunglo Skylights. Traco.
UNIT SKYLIGHTS
A.
Model: "297", factory-assembled, deck-mounted unit with double-dome plastic glazing, gaskets and inner frames and that are capable of withstanding design loads indicated.
B.
Integral Curb: Self-flashing type with roof mounting flanges. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Height: 9" minimum. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard rigid or semirigid type. Materials: Double skin, 1100-H14 sheet aluminum, with 1" fiberglass insulation and thermal break at top and bottom. Finish: Mill aluminum, exterior and interior faces.
C.
Unit Shape and Size: Rectangular, 48" by 96" skylight.
D.
Acrylic Glazing: ASTM D 4802, thermoformable, monolithic sheet, Category as standard with manufacturer, Type UVA (formulated with UV absorber), Finish 1 (smooth or polished). 1.
Double-Glazing: a. b.
Outer Glazing Color: Clear. Inner Glazing Color: Clear.
E.
Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard.
F.
Aluminum Components:
UNIT SKYLIGHTS
086200 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1.
2. 3. G.
01/13/12
Sheets: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper to suit forming operations and finish requirements but with not less than the strength and durability of alclad alloy 3005-H25. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221, alloy and temper to suit structural and finish requirements but with not less than the strength and durability of alloy 6063-T52. Anodic Coating: Class I, clear anodic coating complying with AAMA 611.
Fasteners: Same metal as metal being fastened, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. Finish exposed fasteners to match material being fastened. 1.
Where removal of exterior exposed fasteners might allow access to building, provide nonremovable fastener heads.
H.
Condensation Control: Fabricate unit skylights with integral internal gutters and nonclogging weeps to collect and drain condensation to the exterior.
I.
Thermal Break: Fabricate unit skylights with thermal barrier separating interior metal framing from materials exposed to outside temperature.
2.3
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur and containing no asbestos fibers, formulated for 15-mil dry film thickness per coating.
B.
Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant.
C.
Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; and Uses NT, G, A, and (as applicable to joint substrates indicated) O; recommended by unit skylight manufacturer and compatible with joint surfaces.
D.
Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, designed for trowel application or other adhesive compatible with roofing system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting skylight performance. Proceed with installation after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B.
Coordinate unit skylight installation with installation of substrates, vapor retarders, roof insulation, roofing, and flashing as required to ensure that each element of the Work performs properly and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight.
UNIT SKYLIGHTS
086200 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1.
01/13/12
Unless otherwise indicated, install unit skylights according to construction details of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual."
C.
Where metal surfaces of units will contact incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, apply bituminous coating on concealed metal surfaces, or provide other permanent separation recommended in writing by unit skylight manufacturer.
D.
Set units level, square and securely anchored to supporting structural substrates. Apply sealants at manufacturer's required locations.
E.
Clean exposed metal and plastic surfaces according to manufacturer’s instructions. Touch up damaged metal coatings
END OF SECTION 086200
UNIT SKYLIGHTS
086200 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 087111 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Commercial door hardware. 2. Cylinders for doors specified in other Sections. 3. Electrified door hardware.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include details of electrified door hardware and wiring diagrams.
C.
Samples: For each exposed finish.
D.
Door Hardware Schedule: Organized into door hardware sets indicating type, style, function, size, label, hand, manufacturer, fasteners, location, and finish of each door hardware item. Include description of each electrified door hardware function, including sequence of operation.
E.
Keying Schedule: Detail Owner's final keying instructions for locks.
F.
Product certificates.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Supplier Qualifications: Hardware Consultant.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that are listed to perform electrical modifications, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, are acceptable.
C.
Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. conference decisions into final keying schedule.
D.
Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
E.
Keys: Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail.
DOOR HARDWARE
Person who is or employs a qualified DHI Architectural
Incorporate keying
087111 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
F.
Templates: Obtain and distribute templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware.
G.
Standards: Comply with BHMA A156 series standards, Grade 1.
H.
Certified Products: Provide door hardware that is listed in BHMA directory of certified products.
1.4 A.
WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within warranty period from date of Substantial Completion. 1. Warranty Period for Manual Closers: 10 years. 2. Warranty Period for Exit Devices: 3 years. 3. Warranty Period for Locks: 7 years. 4. All other hardware one year.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product named for each door hardware item indicated in Door Hardware Sets.
B.
Basis-of-Design Product: Product named for each door hardware item indicated in Door Hardware Sets establishes the basis of design. Provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the manufacturers specified for each type of hardware item.
C.
Manufacturers Used in the specification: Products Hinges Continuous Hinges Bifold/Bipass Sets Locksets Exit Devices
Manufacture Specified Ives Ives Hager Schlage Von Duprin 98 Series
Closers
LCN 1461/1261 Slim
Overhead Stops Glynn Johnson Push/Pulls, Stops Ives Flushbolts, Viewers Ives Thresholds/Seals National Guard Key Cabinet Lund Power Transfers/Supplies Von Duprin
DOOR HARDWARE
Acceptable Equals Hager, Stanley Roton, Select Stanley No substitutions Precision Apex Falcon 24 Sargent 351/1231 Falcon SC71/81 Rixson, ABH Hager, Rockwood Hager, Rockwood Hager, Pemko Telkee Precision, Falcon
087111 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Auto. Operators Wall Magnets 2.2
LCN LCN
01/13/12 Gyro-Tech Rixson
DOOR HARDWARE
A.
2.3
Scheduled Door Hardware: Provide door hardware according to Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated. HINGES
A.
General: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units.
B.
Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin. 2. Interior Hinges: Steel, with steel pin. 3. Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: Steel, with steel pin.
2.4
C.
Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for out-swinging exterior doors.
D.
Screws: Phillips flat-head screws; screw heads finished to match surface of hinges.
E.
Metal Doors and Frames: Machine screws (drilled and tapped holes). MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES
A. Mortise Locks: 1. Locks shall be ANSI A156.13, Grade 1 mortise locksets, Manufactured from heavy gauge steel, containing components of steel with a zinc dichromate plating for corrosion resistance. 2. Locks to have a standard 2-3/4” backset with a full 3/4" throw stainless steel mechanical anti-friction latch bolt. Deadbolt shall be a full 1” throw, constructed of stainless steel. 3. Lever trim shall be cast or forged in the design specified, with 2-1/8” diameter roses. Levers to be thru-bolted to assure proper alignment. Trim shall be applied by threaded bushing “no exposed screws”. B. Cylindrical Locks: 1. Locks shall be ANSI A156.2, Series 4000 Grade 1 UL Listed for 3-hour doors. Manufactured from heavy gauge cold rolled steel mechanisms that are corrosion treated for normal conditions.
DOOR HARDWARE
087111 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
2. Locks to have standard 2-3/4” backset with a full 1/2" reversible dead latch. Thrubolted mounting post for positive interlock to the door with concealed mounting screws. 3. Lever trim shall be pressure cast zinc to match finishes. The design specified, with 37/16” diameter roses. Trim shall be applied by “no exposed screws”. 2.5
BOLTS Shall have forged bronze faceplate with extruded brass lever wrought brass guide and strike. Flush bolts for hollow metal doors shall be extension rod type door up to 7’6” in height shall have 12” steel or brass rods, manual flush bolts for doors over 7’6” in height shall be increased by 6” for each additional 6” of door height. Wood doors shall have corner-wrap type. Provide dust proof strikes for all bottom bolts.
2.6
EXIT DEVICES
A.
Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305.
B.
Fire Exit Devices: Complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled for fire and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252.
C.
All lever design shall match mortise or cylindrical lock lever designs.
D.
All devices to incorporate a security dead-latching feature. Provide roller strikes for all rim and surface mounted vertical rod devices, ASA strikes for mortise devices, and manufacturer’s standard strikes for concealed vertical rod devices.
E.
Removable Mullions: BHMA A156.3. 1. Fire-Exit Removable Mullions: Complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled for fire and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252. Mullions shall be used only with exit devices for which they have been tested.
F.
2.7 A.
Carry-Open Bars: Provide carry-open bars for inactive leaves of pairs of doors, unless automatic or self-latching bolts are used. CLOSERS Surface-Mounted Closers: 1. Spring power shall be continuously adjustable over the full range of closer sizes, and allow for reduced opening force for the physically handicapped. Hydraulic regulation shall be by tamper-proof, non-critical valves. Closers shall have separate adjustment for latch speed, general speed, and back check.
DOOR HARDWARE
087111 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
2. All closers will not be seen on the public side or hallway side of the door. The appropriate drop plate or mounting plates will be used as conditions dictate. 2.8 A.
2.9
PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS Protective Trim Units: Sized 2” inchesless than door width on push side and 1” inchless than door width on pull side, by height scheduled or indicated. Fasten with exposed machine or self-tapping screws. STOPS AND HOLDERS
A.
Stops and Holders: Provide floor stops for doors, unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or indicated. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall stops are not appropriate, provide overhead holders.
B.
Silencers for Door Frames: Neoprene or rubber; fabricated for drilled-in application to frame.
2.10 A.
2.11
DOOR GASKETING AND THRESHOLDS Door Gasketing: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide non-corrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. CYLINDERS, KEYING, AND STRIKES
A.
Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver.
B.
Keying System: Factory-registered keying system; grand master key system.
2.12
FABRICATION
A.
Base Metals: Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18 for finishes. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials if different from specified standard.
B.
Fasteners: Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Provide steel machine or wood screws or steel through bolts for fire-rated applications.
C.
Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow metal doors.
D.
Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply "Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors."
DOOR HARDWARE
with
requirements
of
DHI WDHS.2,
087111 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE E.
01/13/12
Finishes: Comply with BHMA A156.18.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Examine doors and frames for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation.
B.
Steel Door and Frame Preparation: Comply with DHI A115 series. Drill and tap doors and frames for surface-applied hardware according to SDI 107.
C.
Wood Door Preparation: Comply with DHI A115-W series.
D.
Mounting Heights: Comply with the following requirements, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames." 3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors."
E.
Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. 1. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
F.
Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with accessibility requirements. 1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period so that from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least three seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.
3.2 A.
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports. DOOR HARDWARE SETS
HW SET: 01 (Door # 340T)
DOOR HARDWARE
087111 - 6
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 3 1 1 1 1
EA EA EA EA EA
HINGE STOREROOM LOCK CORE ONLY SURFACE CLOSER WALL STOP
01/13/12
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 ND80TD ATH 23-030 1461 WS407CCV
646 619 626 689 619
IVE SCH SCH LCN IVE
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP ND80TD ATH 23-030 1461 CUSH
619 619 626 689
IVE SCH SCH LCN
HW SET: 03 (Doors # 002 & 140E) 3 1 1 1
EA EA EA EA
HINGE STOREROOM LOCK CORE ONLY SURFACE CLOSER
HW SET: 04 (Doors # 100B, 110B & 200B) 6 1
EA EA
1
EA
1 1 1 1 2 2
EA EA EA EA EA EA
HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP FIRE EXIT 9848EO-F LBR HARDWARE FIRE EXIT 9875L-F X 07 HARDWARE CORE ONLY 23-030 MORTISE CYLINDER AS REQUIRED COORDINATOR COR X 2-BKTS CARRY BAR CB1 SURFACE CLOSER 1461T (180 DEGREE) MAGNETIC HOLD- SEM 7840 OPEN ASTRAGAL BY DOOR SUPPLIER
619 IVE 619 VON 619 VON 626 626 600 600 689 AL
SCH SCH IVE IVE LCN LCN
619 619 626 626 619 689 630 AL
IVE VON SCH SCH IVE LCN GLY NGP
619 619 619 626 626 619 689
IVE VON VON SCH SCH IVE LCN
HW SET: 05 (Doors # 110D, 130D & S1C) 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA
HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP PANIC HARDWARE 98NL-OP CORE ONLY 23-030 RIM CYLINDER AS REQUIRED OFFSET DOOR PULL8190-2 SURFACE CLOSER 1461 X 61 OVERHEAD STOP 100S THRESHOLD 896S SEALS BY DOOR SUPPLIER
HW SET: 06 (Doors # 110A, 110C, 120B & 130C) 6 1 1 1 1 2 2
EA EA EA EA EA EA EA
HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP PANIC HARDWARE 9847EO PANIC HARDWARE 9847NL-OP CORE ONLY 23-030 RIM CYLINDER AS REQUIRED OFFSET DOOR PULL8190-2 SURFACE CLOSER 1461 X 61
DOOR HARDWARE
087111 - 7
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2 1
EA EA
OVERHEAD STOP THRESHOLD
01/13/12
100S 896S SEALS BY DOOR SUPPLIER
630 GLY AL NGP
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 ND70TD ATH 23-030 WS407CCV
646 619 626 619
HW SET: 07 (Door # 338) 3 1 1 1
EA EA EA EA
HINGE CLASSROOM LOCK CORE ONLY WALL STOP
IVE SCH SCH IVE
HW SET: 08 (Doors # 300A, 300B, 339, 345, 400A, 400B, 439, 445, 500A, 500B, 539, 545, S1F, S1G, S1H, S1I, S1J, S1K, S1L, S2D, S2E, S2F, S2G, S2H, S2I, S2J, S3D, S3E, S3F & S3G) 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
EA EA EA EA
HINGE ELECTRIC HINGE CORE ONLY EL STOREROOM LOCK EA SURFACE CLOSER EA KICK PLATE EA WALL STOP SET SEALS EA POWER SUPPLY
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 TW8 23-030 ND80TDEL ATH
646 646 626 619
IVE IVE SCH SCH
1461 8400 8" X 2" LDW WS407CCV 9450B PS914 FA CARD READER BY OTHERS
689 619 619 BRN
LCN IVE IVE NGP SCE
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP FB458
619 IVE 626 IVE
ND80TD ATH 23-030 900H
619 SCH 626 SCH 630 GLY
17 896S ASTRAGAL BY DOOR SUPPLIER
AL AL
NGP NGP
646 619 626 630
IVE SCH SCH GLY
TIE INTO FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. HW SET: 09 (Door # 349) 6 2
EA EA
1 1 2
EA EA EA
2 1
EA EA
HINGE MANUAL FLUSH BOLT STOREROOM LOCK CORE ONLY OVERHEAD HOLDER DRIP CAP THRESHOLD
HW SET: 10 (Doors # 337B & 337C) 3 1 1 1
EA EA EA EA
HINGE OFFICE LOCK CORE ONLY OVERHEAD HOLDER
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 ND50TD ATH 23-030 410H
HW SET: 11 (Door # 337A)
DOOR HARDWARE
087111 - 8
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
EA EA EA EA EA EA SET
HINGE OFFICE LOCK CORE ONLY SURFACE CLOSER OVERHEAD STOP KICK PLATE SEALS
01/13/12
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 ND50TD ATH 23-030 1461 100S 8400 8" X 2" LDW 9450B
646 619 626 689 630 619 BRN
IVE SCH SCH LCN GLY IVE NGP
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 ND40S ATH 1461 CUSH 8400 8" X 2" LDW
646 619 689 619
IVE SCH LCN IVE
HW SET: 12 (Door # 345R) 3 1 1 1
EA EA EA EA
HINGE PRIVACY SET SURFACE CLOSER KICK PLATE
HW SET: 13 (Doors # 346, 346E, 346T, 437, 443, 446, 446E, 446T, 537, 543, 546, 546E & 546T) 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
EA EA EA EA EA EA SET
HINGE STOREROOM LOCK CORE ONLY SURFACE CLOSER OVERHEAD STOP KICK PLATE SEALS
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 ND80TD ATH 23-030 1461 100S 8400 8" X 2" LDW 9450B
646 619 626 689 630 619 BRN
IVE SCH SCH LCN GLY IVE NGP
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 ND80TD ATH 23-030 1461 8400 8" X 2" LDW WS407CCV 9450B
646 619 626 689 619 619 BRN
IVE SCH SCH LCN IVE IVE NGP
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 ND70TD ATH 23-030 1461 8400 8" X 2" LDW WS407CCV 137NA 522N
646 619 626 689 619 619 CL AL
IVE SCH SCH LCN IVE IVE NGP NGP
5BB1 5 X 4.5 NRP
619 IVE
HW SET: 14 (Doors # 341, 440T, 441, 540T & 541) 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
EA EA EA EA EA EA SET
HINGE STOREROOM LOCK CORE ONLY SURFACE CLOSER KICK PLATE WALL STOP SEALS
HW SET: 15 (Door # 343F) 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
EA EA EA EA EA EA SET EA
HINGE CLASSROOM LOCK CORE ONLY SURFACE CLOSER KICK PLATE WALL STOP SEALS DOOR BOTTOM
HW SET: 16 (Door # 140) 3
EA
HINGE
DOOR HARDWARE
087111 - 9
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1 1 1 1
EA EA EA EA
STOREROOM LOCK CORE ONLY SURFACE CLOSER WALL STOP & HOLDER
ND80TD ATH 23-030 1461 WS40
01/13/12 619 626 689 619
SCH SCH LCN IVE
646 619 626 689
IVE SCH SCH LCN
HW SET: 17 (Door # 140T, 240E, 240T, 538E & 545M) 3 1 1 1
EA EA EA EA
HINGE STOREROOM LOCK CORE ONLY SURFACE CLOSER
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 ND80TD ATH 23-030 1461 CUSH
HW SET: 18 (Doors # 100C, 147B & 343C) BI-PARTING SLIDING DOORS ALL HARDWARE BY DOOR SUPPLIER HW SET: 19 (Doors # S1B & S1D) 3 1 1 1 1
EA EA
HINGE FIRE EXIT HARDWARE EA SURFACE CLOSER EA MAGNETIC HOLDOPEN SET SEALS
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 98L-BE-F X 07
646 IVE 619 VON
1461 SEM 7840
689 LCN AL LCN
9450B
BRN NGP
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 98L X 07 23-030 AS REQUIRED 1461 WS407CCV
619 619 626 626 689 619
IVE VON SCH SCH LCN IVE
5BB1 5 X 4.5 NRP 98EO 1461 WS407CCV
619 619 689 619
IVE VON LCN IVE
619 619 626 630
IVE SCH SCH GLY
HW SET: 20 (Door # 146A) 3 1 1 1 1 1
EA EA EA EA EA EA
HINGE PANIC HARDWARE CORE ONLY RIM CYLINDER SURFACE CLOSER WALL STOP
HW SET: 21 (Door # 146B) 3 1 1 1
EA EA EA EA
HINGE PANIC HARDWARE SURFACE CLOSER WALL STOP
HW SET: 22 (Doors # 145B & 147A) 3 1 1 1
EA EA EA EA
HINGE STOREROOM LOCK CORE ONLY OVERHEAD HOLDER
DOOR HARDWARE
5BB1 5 X 4.5 NRP ND80TD ATH 23-030 900H
087111 - 10
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
HW SET: 23 (Door # 240) 3 1 1
EA EA EA
HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 PASSAGE SET ND10S ATH SURFACE CLOSER 1461 HCUSH
646 IVE 619 SCH 689 LCN
HW SET: 24 (Doors # 210B & 210C) 6 2
EA EA
1 2 1 2
EA EA EA EA
1
EA
HINGE MANUAL FLUSH BOLT STORE LOCK CORE ONLY SURFACE CLOSER OVERHEAD HOLDER THRESHOLD
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP FB458
619 IVE 626 IVE
ND66TD ATH 23-030 1461 X 61 (ACT. LEAF) 100H
619 626 689 630
SCH SCH LCN GLY
896S SEALS BY DOOR SUPPLIER
AL
NGP
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 ND10S ATH 1461 8400 8" X 2" LDW WS407CCV 9450B
646 619 689 619 619 BRN
IVE SCH LCN IVE IVE NGP
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 98L-BE X 07 1461 100S 896S SEALS BY DOOR SUPPLIER
646 619 689 630 AL
IVE VON LCN GLY NGP
646 619 689 619 AL
IVE VON LCN IVE NGP
HW SET: 25 (Door # 340, 440 & 540) 3 1 1 1 1 1
EA EA EA EA EA SET
HINGE PASSAGE SET SURFACE CLOSER KICK PLATE WALL STOP SEALS
HW SET: 26 (Door # 350B) 3 1 1 1 1
EA EA EA EA EA
HINGE PANIC HARDWARE SURFACE CLOSER OVERHEAD STOP THRESHOLD
DRILL WEEP HOLES IN TOUCH BAR FOR DRAINAGE. HW SET: 27 (Door # 350A) 3 1 1 1 1
EA EA EA EA EA
HINGE PANIC HARDWARE SURFACE CLOSER WALL STOP THRESHOLD
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 98L-BE X 07 1461 WS407CCV 896S SEALS BY DOOR SUPPLIER
DRILL WEEP HOLES IN TOUCH BAR FOR DRAINAGE.
DOOR HARDWARE
087111 - 11
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
HW SET: 28 (Doors # 438 & 538) 3 1 1 1
EA EA EA EA
HINGE STOREROOM LOCK CORE ONLY WALL STOP
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 ND80TD ATH 23-030 WS407CCV
646 619 626 619
IVE SCH SCH IVE
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 B660T 23-030 AL10S JUP 1261 SLIM 8400 4" X 2" LDW WS407CCV 9450B U700B
646 619 626 619 689 619 619 BRN 619
IVE SCH SCH SCH LCN IVE IVE NGP IVE
S40D JUP 60 OR 70 AS REQUIRED HINGES BY DOOR SUPPLIER
619 SCH 619 IVE
HW SET: 29 (Door # U01) 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
EA EA EA EA EA EA EA SET EA
HINGE DEADBOLT CORE ONLY PASSAGE SET SURFACE CLOSER KICK PLATE WALL STOP SEALS VIEWER
HW SET: 30 (Door # U02) 1 1
EA EA
PRIVACY SET DOOR STOP
HW SET: 31 (Doors # U03, U04, U06 & U07) 1 1
EA EA
PASSAGE SET DOOR STOP
S10D JUP 60 OR 70 AS REQUIRED HINGES BY DOOR SUPPLIER
619 SCH 619 IVE
HW SET: 32 (Doors # U08 & U09) [BASE BID: SLIDING GLASS DOORS – HARDWARE BY MANUFACTURER] ALTERNATE: PATIO INSWING 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 1 EA DEADBOLT B660T 1 EA CORE ONLY 23-030 1 EA PASSAGE SET AL10S JUP 1 EA DOOR STOP 60 OR 70 AS REQUIRED 1 EA THRESHOLD 896S SEALS BY DOOR SUPPLIER
646 619 626 619 619 AL
IVE SCH SCH SCH IVE NGP
HW SET: 33 (Door # U11) 1
SET BIFOLD SET
9570
HAG
9614
HAG
HW SET: 34 (Door # U05) 1
SET BIPASS SET
DOOR HARDWARE
087111 - 12
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
HW SET: 35 (Doors # 245, S1A, S2A, S3A & S3C) 3 1 1 1 1 1
EA EA
HINGE FIRE EXIT HARDWARE EA SURFACE CLOSER EA KICK PLATE EA WALL STOP SET SEALS
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 98L-BE-F X 07
646 IVE 619 VON
1461 8400 8" X 2" LDW WS407CCV 9450B
689 619 619 BRN
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 98L-BE-F X 07
646 IVE 619 VON
1461 CUSH 8400 8" X 2" LDW 9450B
689 LCN 619 IVE BRN NGP
LCN IVE IVE NGP
HW SET: 36 (Door # 001) 3 1 1 1 1
EA EA
HINGE FIRE EXIT HARDWARE EA SURFACE CLOSER EA KICK PLATE SET SEALS
HW SET: 37 (Doors # 110E, 120A & 130B) 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
EA EA
HINGE FIRE EXIT HARDWARE EA CORE ONLY EA RIM CYLINDER EA SURFACE CLOSER EA OVERHEAD STOP SET SEALS EA THRESHOLD
5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 98L-F X 07
619 IVE 619 VON
23-030 AS REQUIRED 1461 100S 110SA 896S
626 626 689 630 CL AL
SCH SCH LCN GLY NGP NGP
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP EPT-10 EL98L X 07 23-030 AS REQUIRED 1461 CUSH 110SA 896S PS914 CARD READER BY OTHERS
619 689 626 626 626 689 CL AL
IVE VON VON SCH SCH LCN NGP NGP SCE
5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 9848EO-F
619 IVE 626 VON
9875L-F X 07
619 VON
HW SET: 38 (Door # S2B) 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
EA EA EA EA EA EA SET EA EA
HINGE POWER TRANSFER PANIC HARDWARE CORE ONLY RIM CYLINDER SURFACE CLOSER SEALS THRESHOLD POWER SUPPLY
HW SET: 39 (Door # 130A) 6 1
EA EA
1
EA
HINGE FIRE EXIT HARDWARE FIRE EXIT
DOOR HARDWARE
087111 - 13
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1
EA EA EA EA EA SET EA EA
HARDWARE CORE ONLY 23-030 MORTISE CYLINDER AS REQUIRED COORDINATOR COR X 2-BKTS CARRY BAR CB1 SURFACE CLOSER 1461 CUSH SEALS 110SA ASTRAGAL 115S THRESHOLD 896S
01/13/12
626 626 600 600 689 CL CL AL
SCH SCH IVE IVE LCN NGP NGP NGP
619 689 626 626 626 626 619 689 689 630 AL
IVE VON VON VON SCH SCH IVE LCN LCN GLY NGP SCE LCN
HW SET: 40 (Doors # 100A & 200A) 6 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2
EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA
HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP POWER TRANSFER EPT-10 PANIC HARDWARE EL9947EO PANIC HARDWARE EL9947NL-OP CORE ONLY 23-030 RIM CYLINDER AS REQUIRED OFFSET DOOR PULL8190-2 SURFACE CLOSER 1461 (TJ MOUNT) AUTO-EQUALIZER 4640 SERIES OVERHEAD STOP 100S THRESHOLD 896S POWER SUPPLY PS914 2RS 4RL ACTUATOR, WALL 8310-852 MOUNT CARD READER BY OTHERS SEALS BY DOOR SUPPLIER TIMER BY CARD READER SUPPLIER
CARD READER PULL SIDE ANY TIME, ENABLES PULL SIDE WALL ACTUATOR; DOOR OPENS. WALL ACTUATOR PUSH SIDE ANYTIME; DOOR OPENS. DOORS LOCKED/UNLOCKED BY TIMER AT DESIGNATED TIMES. HW SET: 41 (Door # S3B) 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA
HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP POWER TRANSFER EPT-10 PANIC HARDWARE EL98NL-OP CORE ONLY 23-030 RIM CYLINDER AS REQUIRED OFFSET DOOR PULL8190-2 SURFACE CLOSER 1461 X 61 OVERHEAD STOP 100S THRESHOLD 896S POWER SUPPLY PS914 CARD READER BY OTHERS SEALS BY DOOR SUPPLIER
619 689 619 626 626 619 689 630 AL
IVE VON VON SCH SCH IVE LCN GLY NGP SCE
HW SET: 42 (Door # S2C)
DOOR HARDWARE
087111 - 14
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
EA EA EA
HINGE POWER TRANSFER FIRE EXIT HARDWARE EA CORE ONLY EA RIM CYLINDER EA SURFACE CLOSER EA KICK PLATE EA WALL STOP SET SEALS EA POWER SUPPLY
01/13/12
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 EPT-10 EL98L-F X 07
646 IVE 689 VON 619 VON
23-030 AS REQUIRED 1461 8400 8" X 2" LDW WS407CCV 9450B PS914 CARD READER BY OTHERS
626 626 689 619 619 BRN
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 98L-F X 07
646 IVE 619 VON
23-030 AS REQUIRED 1461 SEM 7840
626 626 689 AL
9450B
BRN NGP
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 FB458
646 IVE 626 IVE
DP2
626 IVE
ND50TD ATH 23-030 100H
619 SCH 626 SCH 630 GLY
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 TW8 23-030 ND80TDEL ATH
646 646 626 619
1461 CUSH 9450B PS914 CARD READER BY OTHERS
689 LCN BRN NGP SCE
SCH SCH LCN IVE IVE NGP SCE
HW SET: 43 (Door # S1E) 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
EA EA
HINGE FIRE EXIT HARDWARE EA CORE ONLY EA RIM CYLINDER EA SURFACE CLOSER EA MAGNETIC HOLDOPEN SET SEALS
SCH SCH LCN LCN
HW SET: 44 (Door # 210A) 6 2
EA EA
1
EA
1 1 2
EA EA EA
HINGE MANUAL FLUSH BOLT DUST PROOF STRIKE OFFICE LOCK CORE ONLY OVERHEAD HOLDER
HW SET: 45 (Door # 145A) 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
EA EA EA EA
HINGE ELECTRIC HINGE CORE ONLY EL STOREROOM LOCK EA SURFACE CLOSER SET SEALS EA POWER SUPPLY
IVE IVE SCH SCH
TIE INTO FIRE ALARM SYSTEM.
DOOR HARDWARE
087111 - 15
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
END OF SECTION 087111
DOOR HARDWARE
087111 - 16
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 087113 - AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
1.2
Power door operators. Power-assist door operators. Controls and wiring. Installation accessories. New installation service for each operator.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Activation Device: Device that, when actuated, sends electrical signal to automatic door operator to open door.
B.
Safety Device: Device that prevents door from opening or closing.
1.3 A. 1.4 A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Opening and Closing Forces: Not more than 15 lbf 1” from the latch edge of the door. SUBMITTALS Data and Reports: 1.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. B.
Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for automatic door operators and activation and safety devices. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer and testing personnel or agency. Field quality-control test reports. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each product. Operation and Maintenance Data: For automatic door operators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Installation service agreement. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for automatic door operators. Include locations and elevations of entrances showing activation and safety devices. 1.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details, power and wiring requirements, wiring diagrams and attachments to other work.
AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS
087113 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE C.
1.5
01/13/12
Samples for Finish Selection: For each type of exposed component, door control and safety device indicated with factory-applied color finishes. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project, and who employs an inspector certified by AAADM or will provide an independent agency with inspector certified by AAADM.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company certificate issued by AAADM.
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain automatic door operators through one source from a single manufacturer.
D.
Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and marked for intended use.
E.
UL Standard: Comply with UL 325.
F.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.6 A.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS Field Measurements: Verify door openings by field measurements before fabrication of exposed covers for automatic door operators and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. COORDINATION
A.
Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing automatic door operators. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing automatic door operators to comply with indicated requirements.
B.
Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of automatic door operators with connections to power supplies, controls, safety devices and security access control systems.
1.8 A.
WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of automatic door operators that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS
087113 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE a. b. 2. 1.9 A.
01/13/12
Faulty or sporadic operation of automatic door operator or activation and safety devices. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering or use.
Warranty Period: One (1) year from date of Substantial Completion.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE Maintenance: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide one (1) year full maintenance by skilled employees of automatic door operator Installer. Include quarterly planned and preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door operation. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. 1.
2. 3. 4. 5.
Engage inspector certified by AAADM to perform safety inspection after each adjustment or repair and at end of maintenance period. Submit completed inspection form to Owner. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working hours. Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week emergency callback service. Maintain detailed records of work performed on each operator. Cost of this service included in proposal for Work under this Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
MANUFACTURERS Power-assist door operators and controls by Horton Automatics forms the basis-ofdesign. Products with comparable materials, operational characteristics and finishes by the following manufacturers are also acceptable. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
2.2 A.
Besam Automated Entrance Systems, Inc. DORMA Architectural Hardware. Dor-O-Matic, Inc. EFCO Corporation. KM Systems, Inc. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. Nabco Entrances Inc.
POWER-ASSIST DOOR OPERATORS AND CONTROLS Model: “Series 7000 EasyAccess” low energy, surface applied operator. 1.
Mounting: Shock mounted and concealed in extruded aluminum case. Convertible to any hand required.
AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS
087113 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2.
Controls: a.
b. c. B.
Master Control Unit: Provide adjustable time delay of 2 to 30 seconds (ANSI A156.19 time delay requirement is 5 second minimum), and infinite adjustment to opening and back check speeds including adjusting opening force without affecting opening speed. Blocked Door Reversal: Door shall reverse when closing if stopped by an object. Locked Door Motor Protection Circuit: System shuts off power to the motor if applied when door is locked or otherwise prevented from opening.
Exterior and Interior Activating Device: Push plate, 6" diameter stainless steel switch with handicapped logo and marked “Press to Open” per ANSI Safety Standard A117. 1.
C.
01/13/12
Device to be recessed in to wall surfaces.
Operation: 1.
2. 3.
Automatic: Pushbutton switch actuates door open; door closes after time delay expires. Operator to include variable adjustments to comply with ANSI Standard A156.19: Opening and closing speeds: 4 to 6 seconds. Door capable of manual operation with power on or off without damage to operator. Opening and closing force, measured 1” out from the lock stile of the door, not to exceed 15 pounds of force to stop the door when operating in either direction.
D.
Emergency Breakout Option: When in-swinging doors are in emergency breakout position, power shall be removed from the operator.
E.
Materials: Extruded aluminum, ASTM B221, 6063-T5 alloy and temper.
F.
Finishes (all exposed aluminum surfaces): 1.
G. 2.3 A.
Power Requirements: 120 VAC, 60 cycle, 1 phase, 15 amp. MATERIALS Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, complying with standards indicated below: 1. 2.
B.
Painted: Match frame materials and color.
Sheet: ASTM B 209. Extrusions: ASTM B 221.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10.
AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS
087113 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2.4 A.
ACTIVATION AND SAFETY DEVICES Wall Push-Plate Switch: Manufacturer's standard semiflush, wall-mounted, door control switch; consisting of round or square, flat push plate; of material indicated; and actuator mounted in recessed junction box. Provide engraved message as indicated. 1. 2.
B.
2.5
01/13/12
Material: Stainless steel. Message: International symbol of accessibility and "Push to Open."
Electrical Interlocks: Unless units are equipped with self-protecting devices or circuits, provide electrical interlocks to prevent activation of operator when door is locked, latched, or bolted. FINISHES, GENERAL
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.
EXAMINATION Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, door and frame supports, and other conditions affecting performance of automatic door operators. 1.
For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance.
B.
Examine roughing-in for electrical systems to verify actual locations of power connections before automatic door operator installation.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 A.
INSTALLATION General: Install complete automatic door operator system, including activation and safety devices, control wiring, and remote power units.
AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS
087113 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
B.
Power Door Operator Installation Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.10 for installation.
C.
Low-Energy Power Door Operator Installation Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.19 for installation.
D.
Automatic Door Operators: Install door operator system, including control wiring, as follows: 1.
E.
Refer to Division 26 Sections for connection to electrical power distribution system.
Activation and Safety Devices: Install devices and wiring, including connections to automatic door operators, according to BHMA A156.10 and as follows: 1.
Wall Switches: Provide push plates on both sides of each opening indicated to receive automatic door operators.
F.
Guide Rails: Install rails according to BHMA A156.10 including Appendix A, manufacturer's written instructions, and as indicated.
G.
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables."
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B.
Testing and Inspecting: After installation has been completed, testing and inspecting of each automatic door operator shall be performed to verify compliance with applicable BHMA standards. 1.
Inspection Report: Submit report in writing to Architect and Contractor within 24 hours after inspection.
C.
Remove and replace automatic door operators where test results indicate they do not comply with specified requirements.
D.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, shall be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.4 A.
ADJUSTING Adjust automatic door operators and activation and safety devices to operate smoothly, easily, and properly, and for safe operation and weathertight closure. 1.
B.
Adjust doors with BHMA A156.19.
low-energy
door
operators
to
close
according
to
Lubricate operators, hardware, and other moving parts.
AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS
087113 - 6
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
C.
After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished automatic door operators, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.
D.
Readjust automatic door operators and activation and safety devices after repeated operation of completed installation equivalent to three days' use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles). Lubricate hardware, operating equipment, and other moving parts.
E.
Occupancy Adjustment: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to site outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose, without additional cost.
3.5 A.
DEMONSTRATION Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain automatic door operators. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 087113
AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS
087113 - 7
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 088000 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. 2.
B. 1.2
Storefront windows, framing and doors. Hollow metal and wood doors.
Refer to Division 08 Section “Mirrors” for mirror glass products. DEFINITIONS
A.
Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified gas.
B.
Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating.
C.
Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.
D.
Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.
1.3 A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: Defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.
GLAZING
088000 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE B.
Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria: 1.
Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300, according to the following requirements: a.
Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour at 33 feet above grade, according to 2011 O.B.C Chapter 24 "Glass and Glazing". 1) 2) 3)
C.
A.
Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph. Importance Factor: Refer to the Structural Drawings. Exposure Category: Refer to the Structural Drawings.
Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1.
1.4
01/13/12
Temperature Change (Range): -20 deg F to 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
SUBMITTALS Data and Reports: 1. 2.
Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Reports: From glazing sealant manufacturer.
B.
Samples: 12” square, for each type of glass product indicated, other than monolithic clear float glass.
C.
Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Submit to elastomeric glazing sealant manufacturers, for testing according to ASTM C 1087, samples of each glazing material type, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member that will contact or affect elastomeric glazing sealants:
B.
Glazing for Fire-Rated Door and Window Assemblies: Glazing for assemblies that comply with NFPA 80 and that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting
GLAZING
088000 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257. C.
Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. 2.
GANA Publications: GANA Laminated Division's "Laminated Glass Design Guide" and GANA's "Glazing Manual." IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units."
D.
Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the Insulating Glass Certification Council or the Associated Laboratories, Inc.
E.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. 2.
1.6
Build mockups as shown on Drawings. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
WARRANTY
A.
Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by glass manufacturer agreeing to replace glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below.
B.
Manufacturer's Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: 1.
C.
Manufacturer's Warranty on Laminated Glass: 1.
D.
Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.
Manufacturer's Warranty on Insulating Glass: 1.
E.
Warranty Period: Ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion.
Warranty Period: Ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion.
Manufacturer's Warranty on Fire Rated Glass: 1.
GLAZING
Warranty Period: Three (3) years from date of Substantial Completion.
088000 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
MANUFACTURERS Clear and tinted glass products by Pittsburgh Plate Glass form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable material characteristics, operational criteria, and colors by the following manufacturers are also acceptable: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
2.2 A.
GLASS PRODUCTS Clear Insulated Glass: “Solarban 60 (2) Clear”, Low-E coated, 1” thick. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
B.
A.
Provide tempered or laminated safety glass where indicated.
FIRE-RATED GLAZING PRODUCTS Wireless, monolithic, safety and fire-rated glazing by Safety and Fire-Rated Technology International forms the basis-of-design. Products with comparable material and operational characteristics by the following manufacturers are also acceptable: 1.
B.
“Solarban 60 (2) Clear”, Low-E coated, 1” thick with 3/16” tempered lites. Center muntins in insulated glass unit.
Clear Interior Glass: Annealed float glass, ¼” thickness. 1.
2.3
Visible Light Transmittance: 70%. Winter U-value: 0.29. Summer U-value: 0.27. SHCG: 0.38. Shading Coefficient: 0.44. Outdoor Visible Light Reflectance: 11%. Provide both lites tempered where indicated.
Clear Insulating-Glass at Exterior Aluminum Door Units: 1. 2.
C.
AFDG, Inc. Cardinal IG. Guardian Industries. Libby-Owens-Ford. Viracon.
Technical Glass Products.
Fire-Rated Glazing: 1. 2. 3.
GLAZING
Glazing: "SuperLite C/S", ceramic impact safety-rated glazing wireless, monolithic, colorless with distortion-free optics. Thickness: 3/16”. Fire Rating: 20 to 180 minutes, as indicated in Door Schedule on Drawings.
088000 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 4. C.
2.4 A.
Safety Rated: Tempered to meet CPSC16 CFR1201 Cat. II 400 ft. lbs.
Glazing Accessories: Manufacturer's recommended EPDM tape or other flame resistant gasket material and calcium silicate setting blocks. GLASS MATERIALS Insulating-Glass Units, General: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and with requirements specified in this Article and in Part 2 "Insulating-Glass Units" Article. 1.
2.
3. 4.
Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated for insulating-glass units are nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are measured perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit's edge. Sealing System: Dual seal. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction complying with the following requirements: a. b.
B.
Spacer Material: Aluminum with mill or clear anodic finish. Corner Construction: Manufacturer's standard corner construction.
Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, and complying with other requirements specified and with the following: 1.
C.
01/13/12
Interlayer: Polyvinyl butyral of thickness indicated with a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after laminating glass lites and installation.
Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality-Q3; of class, kind, and condition indicated. 1. 2.
3. 4. 5.
GLAZING
Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed float glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other uncoated glass). Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed or Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass where safety glass is indicated.
088000 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2.5 A.
GLAZING GASKETS Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below, complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
B.
A.
Neoprene. EPDM. Silicone. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber. Any material indicated above.
GLAZING SEALANTS General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements: 1.
2.
3. B.
Neoprene, ASTM C 864. EPDM, ASTM C 864. Silicone, ASTM C 1115. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber, ASTM C 1115. Any material indicated above.
Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned gaskets of material indicated below; complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
2.6
01/13/12
Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: Selected from manufacturer's full range.
Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. Products by the following manufacturers: 1.
Low-Modulus Nonacid-Curing Silicone: With additional movement capability of 100 percent movement in extension and 50 percent movement in compression when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719. a. b. c. d.
GLAZING
Dow Corning; 790. GE Silicones; Silpruf or UltraPruf SCS2300. NUCO Industries, Inc.; HiFlex 331 or NuFlex 309. Ohio Sealants, Inc.; VP 275.
088000 - 6
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE e. f. g. 2.
Pecora Corporation; 864. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI-641. Sonneborn; Omniseal.
Medium-Modulus Neutral-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant: a. b. c. d. e.
3.
01/13/12
Dow Corning; 791 or 795. NUCO Industries, Inc.; HiFlex 393. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI-631. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM5731 or SM5733 Poly-Glaze. Tremco; Spectrem 2 or Tremsil 600.
Medium-Modulus Neutral-Curing Silicone: With additional movement capability of 50 percent movement in extension and 50 percent movement in compression when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719. a. b. c.
Dow Corning; 756 H.P. GE Silicones; Silglaze II. Pecora Corporation; 895.
C.
Cylindrical Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.
D.
Glazing Sealants for Fire-Resistive Glazing Products: Identical to products used in test assemblies to obtain fire-protection rating.
2.7 A.
GLAZING TAPES Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. 2. 3.
B.
AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure.
Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. 2.
GLAZING
Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant.
088000 - 7
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2.8
01/13/12
MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B.
Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C.
Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.
D.
Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
E.
Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).
F.
Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.
G.
Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Identical to product used in test assembly to obtain fire-resistance rating.
2.9 A.
FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.
GLAZING General: Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. 1.
2.
GLAZING
Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged
088000 - 8
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
3. 4.
5. 6. 7.
B.
2.
3. 4.
5.
Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.
Gasket Glazing (Dry): Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. 1. 2.
3. D.
glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50". Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.
Tape Glazing: Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. 1.
C.
01/13/12
Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
Sealant Glazing (Wet): Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in
GLAZING
088000 - 9
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. 1. 2.
3.2
Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.
B.
Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
END OF SECTION 088000
GLAZING
088000 - 10
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 088300 - MIRRORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2.
1.2
Annealed monolithic, film-backed safety glass mirrors. Mounting accessories.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For mirror hardware and mastic.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware and attachments to other work.
C.
Samples: For each type of mirror product required, in the form indicated below: 1. 2.
Mirrors, 12” square including edge treatment on two (2) adjoining edges. Mirror clips and trim, 12” long.
D.
Product Certificates: For each type of mirror and mirror mastic, signed by product manufacturer.
E.
Mirror Mastic Compatibility Test Reports: From mirror manufacturer.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Glazier Certification Program as Level 2 (Senior Glaziers) or Level 3 (Master Glaziers).
B.
Glazing Publications: 1.
2. C.
Comply with GANA's "Glazing Manual" and GANA Mirror Division's "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care: Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations in GABA's "Glazing Manual," unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
Preconstruction Mirror Mastic Compatibility Test: Submit mirror mastic products to mirror manufacturer for testing to determine compatibility of mastic with mirror backing paint, film and substrates on which mirrors are installed.
MIRRORS
088300 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1.4 A.
1.5 A.
01/13/12
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions for shipping, storing, and handling mirrors as needed to prevent deterioration of silvering, damage to edges, and abrasion of glass surfaces and applied coatings. Store indoors, protected from moisture including condensation. WARRANTY Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by mirror manufacturer agreeing to replace mirrors that deteriorate, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated in second subparagraph below. 1.
2.
Deterioration of Mirrors: Defects developed from normal use that are attributable to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to mirror manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include discoloration, black spots, and clouding of the silver film. Warranty Period: Ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
MANUFACTURERS Silvered mirrored glass by American Mirror Company, Inc. forms the basis-of-design. Products with comparable materials and performance characteristics by the following manufacturers are also acceptable. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
B.
Silvered Mirrored Glass: 1. 2.
C.
Carolina Mirror Company. Gardner Glass Products. Gilded Mirrors, Inc. Lenoir Mirror Company. Stroupe Mirror Co., Inc. Virginia Mirror Co., Inc. Walker Glass Co., Ltd.
Annealed Monolithic Float Glass: ¼” thickness, clear, ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3; Class 1. Silvering: Successive layers of chemically deposited silver, electrically or chemically deposited copper, and manufacturer's standard organic protective coating applied to second glass surface to produce coating system complying with FS DD-M-411.
Fabrication:
MIRRORS
088300 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1. 2.
2.2
01/13/12
Mirrored Glass Edge Treatment: Rounded polished. Seal edges after edge treatment to prevent chemical or atmospheric penetration of glass coating. Factory Fabricate: Perform edge treatment and sealing in factory immediately after cutting to final sizes.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Type A Shore durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.
B.
Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirror manufacturer for use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges.
C.
Mirror Backing Tapes: “1MT Category One Tape” by C.R. Laurence Co. Equal products by other manufacturers may be submitted for review to the Architect no later than ten (10) days prior to the Bid Date. 1. 2. 3.
D.
Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, produced specifically for setting mirrors and certified by both mirror manufacturer and mastic manufacturer as compatible with glass coating and substrates on which mirrors will be installed. Products by the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. 2.
2.3 A.
Gunther Mirror Mastics. Palmer Products Corporation.
MIRROR HARDWARE Mirror mounting hardware assemblies by C. R. Laurence Co. Inc. forms the basis-ofdesign. Products with comparable materials, performance characteristics and finishes by the following manufacturers are also acceptable. 1.
B.
Material: Impact resistant white plastic film mirror safety backing with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive. Width as required by installation conditions. Compliance: Meets test specifications in accordance with ASTM D-1709-67 to be in compliance with ANSI Z97.1 1975 UCB. Use film backing compatible with mirror backing paint as certified by mirror manufacturer.
Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.
Mirror Mounting Hardware Assemblies: 1.
Bottom Trim: “CRL FHA Type "J" Channel” with raised center channel rib to prevent moisture from being trapped in the channel. Holds mirror 1/8” from wall. a. b. c.
MIRRORS
Height: 3/4”. Exposed Face: 5/16”. Material: Extruded aluminum with satin anodized finish.
088300 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2.
01/13/12
Mirror Top Clips: “CRL Slotted Round Lip Mirror Clips” chrome plated steel "J" clips installed at top 1/4 points.
C.
Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it in finished color and texture where fasteners are exposed.
D.
Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for mirror hardware installation. Provide toothed or lead-shield expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Provide galvanized anchors and inserts for applications on inside face of exterior walls and where indicated.
2.4
FABRICATION
A.
Mirror Sizes: To suit Project conditions, and before tempering, cut mirrors to final sizes and shapes.
B.
Mirror Edge Treatment: Flat polished edge. 1. 2.
Seal edges of mirrors after edge treatment to prevent chemical or atmospheric penetration of glass coating. Require mirror manufacturer to perform edge treatment and sealing in factory immediately after cutting to final sizes.
C.
Film-Backed Safety Mirrors: Apply film backing with pressure-sensitive adhesive coating over mirror backing paint as recommended in writing by film-backing manufacturer to produce a surface free of bubbles, blisters, and other imperfections. Use adhesives and film backing compatible with mirror backing paint as certified by mirror manufacturer.
D.
Mirror Mastic: Cutout and remove mat backing at mastic application locations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids distorting reflected images.
B.
Provide a minimum air space of 1/8” between back of mirrors and mounting surface for air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.
C.
For wall-mounted mirrors, install with mastic and mirror hardware. 1.
Install mastic as follows: a.
MIRRORS
Apply mastic to comply with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for coverage and to allow air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.
088300 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
01/13/12
After mastic is applied, align mirrors and press into place while maintaining a minimum air space of 1/8” between back of mirrors and mounting surface.
Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors or inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of mirrors. Where indicated, install bottom trim and top clips. Fabricate bottom trim in single lengths to fit and cover bottom edges of mirrors. Locate top clips so they are symmetrically placed and evenly spaced. Provide setting blocks 1/8” thick by 4” long at quarter points. To prevent trapping water, provide, between each setting block, 2 slotted weeps not less than ¼” wide by 3/8” long. Place felt or plastic pad between mirror and each clip to prevent spalling of mirror edges.
D.
Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction operations.
E.
Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water.
F.
Maintain environmental conditions that will prevent mirrors from being exposed to moisture from condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time.
END OF SECTION 088300
MIRRORS
088300 - 5
09
FINISHES
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 092116.23 - GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2 A.
1.3
SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Shaft enclosures. 2. Accessories and finishing materials. SUBMITTALS Data and Reports: 1. Product Data: For each gypsum board shaft-wall assembly indicated. 2. Fire-Test-Response Reports: Include data substantiating that elevator entrances and other items that penetrate each gypsum board shaft-wall assembly do not negate fire-resistance rating. 3. Research/evaluation reports. 4. Acoustical-test-response reports. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
STC-Rated Assemblies: For gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies indicated to have STC ratings, provide assembly materials and construction complying with requirements of assemblies whose STC ratings were determined according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
MANUFACTURERS Gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies and accessories by United States Gypsum (USG) form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable material characteristics, ratings, and finishes by listed manufacturers are also acceptable. 1. 2. 3.
2.2 A.
American Gypsum Co. G-P Gypsum Corp. National Gypsum Company.
MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS General: Comply with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated. 1. Provide panels in maximum lengths available to eliminate or minimize end-to-end butt joints. 2. Provide auxiliary materials complying with gypsum board shaft-wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations.
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
092116.23 - 1
B.
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE System: “Sheetrock Brand Cavity Shaft Wall Systems”.
01/13/12
C.
Steel Sheet Components: Metal complying with ASTM C 645 requirements with ASTM A 653, G40, hot-dip galvanized coating. 1. Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive members and corner and end members and for fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated. 2. Profiles: “C-H Studs”, “J-Runners”, “Jamb Struts”, and “E-Studs”. 3. Gauge, depth and lengths as indicated or required for installation conditions.
D.
Gypsum Liner Panels: 1” “SHEETROCK Brand Gypsum Liner Panels”, ASTM C442, Type SLX with beveled edges and with moisture-resistant paper faces.
E.
Gypsum Wallboard: “SHEETROCK Brand Gypsum Panels”, ASTM C36 with tapered edges. Types “Firecode (Type X) and “Firecode C” as required by wall construction UL Classification label.
F.
Accessories: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints of material and shapes as specified in Division 09 Section “Gypsum Board” that comply with gypsum board shaftwall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations for application indicated.
G.
Gypsum Wallboard Joint-Treatment Materials: ASTM C 475 and as specified in Division 09 Section “Gypsum Board”.
H.
Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033” to 0.112” thick.
I.
Track (Runner) Fasteners: Power-driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand loading conditions imposed on shaft-wall assemblies without exceeding allowable design stress of track, fasteners, or structural substrates in which anchors are embedded. 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Provide powder-actuated fasteners with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by shaft-wall assemblies, as determined by testing conducted by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM E 1190. 2. Postinstalled Expansion Anchors: Where indicated, provide expansion anchors with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by shaft-wall assemblies, as determined by testing conducted by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM E 488.
J.
Acoustical Sealant: “SHEETROCK Brand Acoustical Sealant”, highly elastic, waterbased caulking for sound-rated partition and ceiling systems where indicated. Products with comparable materials and performance criteria by Ohio Sealants, Inc., Pecora Corp., and Tremco, Inc. are also acceptable. 1. Non-bleeding and staining. 2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame Spread: 0; Smoke Developed 0. Complies with ASTM C919 and ASTM C834. 3. Use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
K.
Sound Attenuation Blankets: “Thermafiber Sound Attenuation Fire Blankets (SAFB)”, ASTM C 665 for Type I, unfaced mineral-fiber-blanket insulation. 1. Thickness: Full cavity as indicated or required for installation conditions.
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
092116.23 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2. 3. 4.
01/13/12
Density: 2.5 pcf. R-Value per 1” Thickness: 3.7. Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E-84. a. Flame Spread: 0. b. Smoke Developed 0.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Examine substrates and abutting assemblies. Proceed with installation after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B.
Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: Coordinate with gypsum shaft-wall assemblies so both elements of Work remain complete and undamaged.
C.
Install gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies to comply with requirements of fireresistance-rated assemblies indicated, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and the following: 1. ASTM C 754 for installing steel framing. 2. Division 09 Section “Gypsum Board” for applying and finishing panels. 3. System manufacturer’s written installation instructions.
D.
Do not bridge building expansion joints with shaft-wall assemblies; frame both sides of joints with furring and other support.
E.
Install supplementary framing in gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies around openings and as required for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar items that cannot be supported directly by shaft-wall assembly framing. 1. At elevator hoistway door frames, provide jamb struts on each side of door frame. 2. Where handrails directly attach to gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies, provide galvanized steel reinforcing strip with 0.0312” minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal, accurately positioned and secured behind at least 1 face-layer panel.
F.
At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire-resistance rating of shaft-wall assembly by installing supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and fire protection behind boxes containing wiring devices, elevator call buttons, elevator floor indicators, and similar items.
G.
Isolate gypsum finish panels from building structure to prevent cracking of finish panels while maintaining continuity of fire-rated construction.
H.
Install control joints to maintain fire-resistance rating of assemblies.
I.
Seal gypsum board shaft walls with acoustical sealant at perimeter of each assembly where it abuts other work and at joints and penetrations within each assembly. Install acoustical sealant to withstand dislocation by air-pressure differential between shaft and external spaces; maintain an airtight and smoke-tight seal; and comply with manufacturer's written instructions or ASTM C 919, whichever is more stringent.
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
092116.23 - 3
J.
NEW BUILDING FOR 01/13/12 LANE AVENUE MIXED USE In elevator shafts where gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies cannot be positioned within 2” of the shaft face of structural beams, floor edges, and similar projections into shaft, install ½” or 5/8” thick, gypsum board cants covering tops of projections. 1. Slope cant panels at least 75 degrees from horizontal. Set base edge of panels in adhesive and secure top edges to shaft walls at 24” o.c. with screws fastened to shaft-wall framing. 2. Where steel framing is required to support gypsum board cants, install framing at 24” o.c. and extend studs from the projection to the shaft-wall framing.
END OF SECTION 092116.23
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
092116.23 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications: 1. Interior framing systems including supports for partitions, walls, framed and suspended soffits and ceilings, and furring. 2. Exterior suspended soffit framing systems. 3. Accessories.
B.
Load-bearing steel framing members provided under Division 05 Section “Cold-Formed Metal Framing”.
C.
Acoustic wall insulation provided under Division 07 Section “Thermal Insulation”.
1.2 A. 1.3
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
B.
Sound Transmission Characteristics: For STC-rated assemblies that incorporate nonload-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
C.
Metal Framing System Performance Requirements: Fabricate and install metal framing systems as indicated but not less than that required to comply with ASTM C754 under the following conditions: 1. Interior Wall Lateral Load: 5 psf. 2. Standard Systems: Maximum deflection of l/240 of partition height. 3. Water Resistant Gypsum or Cementicious Backer Board Systems: Maximum deflection of l/360 of partition height. 4. Interior Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Maximum deflection of l/360 of distance between supports. 5. Exterior Soffits: Withstand minimum positive and negative pressure of 20 psf with maximum deflection of l/360 of distance between supports. 6. Tall Walls: Partitions exceeding 30 feet in height are considered tall. Provide closer stud spacing or heavier gauge materials in compliance with manufacturer’s span tables for given stud depth and height at each location. 7. Top of Wall Bracing: Provide vertical or horizontal diagonal bracing at tops of walls that do not extend to deck or structure above. Bracing members to be adequate in size and spacing to properly brace wall under noted loading conditions.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092216 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL Non-load bearing metal framing components by Dietrich Metal Framing form the basisof-design. Products with comparable materials, thicknesses, performance characteristics and accessories by listed manufacturers are also acceptable. 1. 2. 3.
Clark Steel Framing Industries. Marino\Ware. The STEEL Network, Inc.
B.
Partition and Soffit Framing: C-studs “Big D” drywall studs. 1. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 2. Materials: Cold formed galvanized 33 ksi steel sheet. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: a. Designation: 16 gauge, 0.0538” sheet thickness. b. Designation: 20 gauge, 0.0329” sheet thickness. c. Designation: 22 gauge, 0.0269” sheet thickness. d. Designation: 25 gauge, 0.0179” sheet thickness. 3. Protective Coating: a. Interior Applications: ASTM A 653, G40 hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. b. Exterior Applications: ASTM A 653, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 4. Material Gauges: Provide minimum material gauges as indicated. Provide heavier gauge materials in compliance with manufacturer’s span tables for given member depths, heights and spans for framing conditions at each location. 5. Steel Studs and Runners: Metal complying with ASTM C 645, 25 gauge (minimum) in depths indicated. a. Flanges: Equal lengths, 1¼” high, unhemmed.
C.
Deep-Leg Deflection Track (non-rated walls): “Slp-Trk Slotted Track” by Dietrich Metal Framing. Galvanized steel sheet with 2½” deep slotted flanges. Provide depth and gauge required for given for framing conditions at each location. Comparable products by listed manufacturers are also acceptable. 1. Delta Star, Inc., “Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT)”. 2. Metal-Lite, Inc., “Slotted Track”. 3. The Steel Network Inc., “VertiClip SLD” or “VertiTrack VTD” Series. 4. Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT).
D.
Firestop Track (rated walls): Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fireresistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. Products by listed manufacturers are acceptable. 1. Metal-Lite, Inc., “The System”. 2. Dietrich Metal Framing, "SLP-TRK" slotted tract, 1 and 2 hour walls. 3. Fire Trak Corp., “Fire Trak” attached to studs with “Fire Trak Slip Clip”.
E.
Framing Component Accessories: Provide the following accessories as required for a complete system. 1. Furring Channels: Cold formed galvanized steel sheet, hat shaped, 25 gauge minimum. a. Depth: 7/8” and 1½”.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092216 - 2
2.
3.
4. 5.
6.
7.
8.
9. 2.2
NEW BUILDING FOR 01/13/12 LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Resilient Furring Channels: Cold formed galvanized steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission, 25 gauge minimum. a. Asymmetrical or hat shaped. b. Depth: ½”. Z-Shaped Furring Channels: 25 gauge minimum, galvanized steel with slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1¼”, wall attachment flange of 3/4”, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. Lateral Wall Bridging: “U Channel”, cold formed galvanized steel sheet, 16 gauge minimum. Depths: 3/4”, 1½”, 2”, or 2½” as installation conditions require. Clip Angles: “Clip Angle (AC)” with 90°angle fab ricated from 14 and 16 gauge galvanized steel. Provide sizes and gauges required for given for framing conditions at each location. Flat Straps and Backing Plates: “Backing Strip” 16 gauge (minimum) galvanized steel sheet for blocking and bracing in lengths and widths required for given for framing conditions at each location. a. Backing Plate: 4” and 6” wide by lengths to suit size of items to be attached and bracing required. Continuous Angles: 90°angles fabricated from 26 through 14 gauge galvanized steel. Provide sizes, lengths and gauges required for given for framing conditions at each location. Metal Framing Fasteners: Type, material, size, length, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. a. Metal Framing Component Fasteners: Steel self-drilling, self-tapping screws complying with ASTM C 1002; galvanized coating, plated or oilphosphate coated complying with ASTM B 633 for required corrosion resistance. b. Anchors: Self-drilling or expansion type, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching hanger wires and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to five (5) times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E488 by a qualified independent testing agency. c. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated form corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to ten (10) times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by a qualified independent testing agency. Touch-Up Paint: “ZRC 221” containing 92-percent metallic zinc by ZRC Worldwide.
CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING SYSTEMS
A.
Unless specifically required for adjacent construction or noted otherwise, selection of framing system at Contractor’s option. 1. Provide material spacing, depths and gauges required for given framing conditions at each location in compliance with manufacturer’s span and load requirements. 2. No suspended framing at elevator equipment room for rated ceiling.
B.
Suspended Ceiling and Soffit Framing: Interior and exterior locations. 1. Carrying Channels: 16 gauge cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with minimum ½” wide flange.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092216 - 3
2. 3. 4. 5.
NEW BUILDING FOR 01/13/12 LANE AVENUE MIXED USE a. Provide black asphaltum painted materials at interior locations. b. Provide galvanized materials at exterior locations. Furring Channels: 25 gauge (minimum) roll-formed galvanized steel hat-shaped sections. Metal Furring Channel Clips: “Metal Furring Channel Clips”, formed galvanized wire, used to attach metal furring channels to carrying channels. Hanger Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 8 gauge (minimum) galvanized steel for hanging carrying channels. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 18 gauge galvanized soft annealed steel wire.
C.
Grid Suspension System for Interior and Exterior Soffits: Pre-engineered “Drywall Suspension System” by USG Interiors, Inc forms the basis-of-design. Products with comparable materials and performance criteria by Armstrong World Industries, Inc. and Chicago Metallic Corp. are also acceptable. 1. System: Direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. Includes all accessories. 2. Fire Ratings: Where indicated, installed systems to conform to Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Fire Resistance Design number noted. 3. Components: a. Steel: Commercial quality, cold rolled and hot dipped galvanized. b. Main Tees, Cross Members and Wall Moldings: Fire-rated members with knurled faces. c. Furring Channels: “DGCL-4”, 7/8” high x 48” long with 1½” face. 4. Accessories: a. Transition, splice and wall attachment clips. b. Trim for light fixtures, access doors, and HVAC ceiling grilles. c. Hanger Wire: 12 gauge, galvanized. d. Tie Wire: 18 gauge, galvanized. e. Miscellaneous fasteners and components required for complete system.
D.
Metal Framing Components: Galvanized metal stud framing components of proper depth and gauge. Comply with requirements listed in this Section and/or Division 05 Section “Cold Formed Metal Framing”.
E.
Hanger Attachments: 1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching hanger wires and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by a qualified independent testing agency. a. Type: Postinstalled, chemical or expansion anchors. 2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by a qualified independent testing agency.
F.
Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following: 1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated. 2.
Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8" thick, in width to suit steel stud size.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092216 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.
3.2
INSTALLATION, GENERAL Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A.
Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
B.
Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 4. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards. 5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck or permanent metal forms. Furnish castin-place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 6. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes or conduit.
C.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.
D.
Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.
E.
Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
F.
Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8” in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.
3.3 A.
INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES General: Comply with ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation, and manufacturer’s requirements. 1. Examine areas of the work for conditions that will affect the satisfactory execution of the work. Proceed after such conditions are corrected. 2. Position framing according to dimensions indicated on the drawings. Do not scale the drawings. Obtain required additional information from the Architect. 3. Do not position framing across building control or expansion joints. Frame each side independently. 4. Tolerances: a. Do not exceed 1/8” in 8'-0" variation from plumb or level in exposed lines of surface, except at joints between gypsum board units. b. Do not exceed 1/16” variation between planes of abutting edges or ends.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092216 - 5
c.
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Shim as required to comply with specified tolerances.
01/13/12
B.
Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
C.
Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Extend non-rated and non-acoustic insulated wall partition framing to 4” (minimum) above suspended ceilings except where indicated to terminate otherwise. 2. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistancerated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fireresistance-rated assembly indicated. 3. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing from floor to underside of solid structure to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. 4. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 5. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum ½” clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. 6. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 7. Install supplementary metal framing, blocking and bracing at terminations to support gypsum drywall, fixtures, equipment, trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings or similar construction. 8. Install horizontal bracing for lateral support at tops of walls that do not extend to floor or roof deck above, or building structure above. Provide one or more of the following types: a. Diagonal metal framing from tops of walls to floor or roof deck, or building structure above. Braces set at 45° to the wall and spaced at 48” o.c. b. Continuous wall studs from floor to floor or roof deck, or building structure above spaced at 48” o.c. c. Horizontal metal framing at tops of walls set at 45° to the walls. 9. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed metal framing with galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and the manufacturer’s instructions.
D.
Direct Furring: 1. Screw to wood framing. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24” o.c.
E.
Z-Furring Members: 1. Erect insulation (specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation") vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24” o.c.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092216 - 6
2.
3.
NEW BUILDING FOR 01/13/12 LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24" o.c. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12" from corner and cut insulation to fit.
END OF SECTION 092216
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092216 - 7
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3.
Interior gypsum board. Tile backing panels. Accessories and finishing materials.
B.
Load bearing metal framing provided under Division 09 Section “Cold Formed Metal Framing”.
C.
Wall and ceiling vapor retarder provided under Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation."
D.
Rigid and acoustic wall insulation provided under Division 07 Section “Thermal Insulation”.
E.
Non-load bearing metal framing provided under Division 09 Section “Non-structural metal Framing”.
F.
Shaft-wall assemblies provided under Division 09 Section “Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies”.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples: For the following products: 1.
1.3
Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12” long length for each trim accessory indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
B.
STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE C.
Gypsum materials and installation to comply with the following Gypsum Association publications. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
D.
01/13/12
GA-214, Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish. GA-216, Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. GA-235, Gypsum Board Typical Mechanical and Physical Properties. GA-600, Fire Resistance Design Manual. GA-801, Handling Gypsum Board.
Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1.
Install mockups for the following: a. b.
2. 3. 4.
Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations. Each texture finish indicated.
Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
GYPSUM BOARD AND ACCESSORIES Interior gypsum board and accessories by United States Gypsum (USG) form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable material characteristics, ratings, and finishes by listed manufacturers are also acceptable. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
2.2
American Gypsum Co. BPB America, Inc. G-P Gypsum. National Gypsum Company. Temple. Lafarge North America, Inc.
INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS
A.
General: Materials complying with ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent.
B.
Panel Size, General: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. Thicknesses indicated.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE C.
Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, with long edges tapered. Provide thickness indicated. 1. 2. 3.
4.
5.
Regular Type: “SHEETROCK Brand Gypsum Panels”, at interior non-rated partitions and soffits. Fire-Rated Panels: "SHEETROCK Firecode (Type X) and Firecode C Cores Panels” at interior rated partitions, soffits, and ceilings. Water-Resistant Panels: ASTM C 630, "Fiberock Brand Aqua-Tough Panels”, at interior janitor room walls, restroom "wet" walls, and walls to receive ceramic tile. Provide Type X fire-resistant type where required to meet rated assembly requirements. Mold Resistant Panels: "SHEETROCK Brand Mold Tough Gypsum Panels", with moisture and mold-resistant gypsum core encased in moisture resistant papers, at all interior surfaces of exterior walls. Foil-Backed Gypsum Wallboard: “SHEETROCK Brand Gypsum Panels, Foil Backed”. a. b.
6.
7. 8.
Materials: Regular type interior gypsum panels with kraft-backed aluminum foil laminated to back face. Provide “Firecode” or “Firecode C” cores as required by wall construction UL Classification label.
Cement Backer Board: “DUROCK Cement Board” at walls to receive ceramic tile. a.
Materials: Aggregated portland cement with woven glass fiber mesh facing complying with ANSI A118.9.
Interior Ceiling Panels: “SHEETROCK Brand Interior Gypsum Ceiling Board”, ½” thick at non-rated ceilings. Abuse Resistant Panels: a. b.
Light Abuse: “SHEETROCK Brand FIRECODE Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Panels”. Increased Abuse: “FIBEROCK Brand Abuse-Resistant Panels”. 1) 2)
c.
2) 9.
A.
Materials: Gypsum and cellulose fiber without face-paper. Panels classified as noncombustible Type X gypsum panels.
High Abuse: “FIBEROCK Brand VHI Abuse-Resistant Panels”. 1)
2.3
01/13/12
Materials: Gypsum and cellulose fiber without face-paper and embedded fiberglass mesh in panel back. Bending Radius: 50’ or greater.
Thicknesses: As indicated on Drawings.
INTERIOR TRIM ACCESSORIES Metal Trim Accessories: ASTM C 1047, galvanized steel. Exposed and plastic trim not permitted. Comparable products by metal framing manufacturer are also acceptable.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1. 2.
3. 4. 5. 6.
B.
Provide sizes to match gypsum panel thickness at installation conditions. Cornerbead: “DUR-A-BEAD Corner Bead” No. 103, all-metal, galvanized steel reinforcement with 1¼” x 1¼” flange width. Use at standard 90° outside corners unless otherwise indicated. J-Bead: No. 200-A, J-shaped galvanized steel casing. L-Bead: No. 200-B, L-shaped galvanized steel casing. Expansion (Control) Joint: “Zinc Control Joint No. 093”, roll-formed zinc with tape-protected opening ¼” wide x 7/16” deep. Flexible Corner Trim: “SHEETROCK Brand Flex Metal Tape (Flex Tape)” with two 7/16” wide galvanized rust-resistant steel strips with 1/16” gap between the strips. Form to fit inside or outside angles greater or less than 90°. Provide width to suit application.
Paper Faced Trim Accessories: Paper faced trim accessories by Drywall Systems International. Products with comparable performance characteristics by Dietrich Metal Framing and U.S.G. Corp. are acceptable. 1. 2.
Paper Faced Trim Accessories: “No-Coat Paper Faced Trims”, latex saturated paperboard laminated to proprietary copolymer plastic and paper joint tape. Fixed Trims: a. b. c. d.
3.
A.
“Ultracorner”, 90 deg. with 2¼” flanges. “L-Trim SmartSeries”, 90 deg. edge trim with ½” x 1-7/8” flanges. “90 degree Bullnose SmartSeries” with 3/4” radius and 3-3/4” overall width. “135 degree Bullnose SmartSeries” with 3/4” radius and 3-3/4” overall width.
Flexible Trims: a. b. c. d. e.
2.4
01/13/12
“Ultraflex”, angles of any degree with 2¼” flanges. “Ultraflex Lite”, angles of any degree with 2-5/8” flanges. “90 degree Solid SmartSeries” with 1-7/8” flanges. “Fast-Flex SmartSeries” with 1-7/16” flanges. “Zooma-Flex” with 2-5/32” flanges.
EXTERIOR TRIM ACCESSORIES Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. 2.
Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet or rolled zinc. Plastic not permitted. Shapes: a. b. c.
GYPSUM BOARD
Cornerbead. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and removable strip covering slot opening.
092900 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2.5 A.
INTERIOR JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS Joint Treatment Materials: Comply with ASTM C 475. 1.
Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Ready-mixed, non-asbestos, materials for each coat that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. a. b.
c.
d.
e.
2. 3.
4. 5.
b. c. d. e. 6.
Prefilling: At open joints, beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, flanges of trim accessories, and fasteners, use “SHEETROCK Taping Joint Compound Ready-Mixed”, or “SHEETROCK All Purpose Joint Compound Ready-Mixed”. Fill Coat: For second coat, use “SHEETROCK Topping Joint Compound Ready-Mixed”, or “SHEETROCK Lightweight All Purpose Joint Compound Ready-Mixed (PLUS 3)”. Finish Coat: For third coat, use “SHEETROCK Topping Joint Compound Ready-Mixed”, “SHEETROCK All Purpose Joint Compound Ready-Mixed”, or “SHEETROCK Lightweight All Purpose Joint Compound Ready-Mixed (PLUS 3)”. Laminating Adhesive: ASTM C 475, “SHEETROCK Taping Joint Compound Ready-Mixed”, or “SHEETROCK All Purpose Joint Compound Ready Mixed" joint compound.
Joint Compound for Interior Cement Board: Latex fortified mortar with "Durock Interior Tape". Joint Tape: “SHEETROCK Brand Joint Tape”, cross-fibered paper, or “SHEETROCK Brand Fiberglass Drywall Tape” Self-adhesive, with crossfiberglass construction. Cement Board Joint Tape: “DUROCK Brand Interior Tape: 2” wide, alkaliresistant glass-fiber tape. Mold Resistant Panels: a.
Joint Compound: "SHEETROCK Brand Setting-Type Durabond or Lightweight Setting-Type Easy Sand Joint Compound". Tape: "SHEETROCK Brand Paper Tape". First Coat: "SHEETROCK First Coat". Trim: "SHEETROCK Brand Paper-Faced Metal Bead and Trim" for areas requiring Level 4 finish or less. Finish: "SHEETROCK Brand Primer-Surfacer Tuff Hide" for areas requiring Level 5 finish.
Abuse Resistant Panels: a. b.
B.
01/13/12
Joint Treatment: “SHEETROCK Setting-Type Joint Compound”, (chemically-hardening) type. Primer-Surfacer: “SHEETROCK Tuff-Hide”, vinyl acrylic, latex-based coating and primer, spray applied.
Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1. 2.
2.6
01/13/12
Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type, sandable topping compound. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.
B.
Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. 1.
C.
Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2.
D.
Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033” to 0.112” thick. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.
Acoustical Sealant: “SHEETROCK Brand Acoustical Sealant”, highly elastic, waterbased caulking for sound-rated partition and ceiling systems where indicated. Products with comparable materials and performance criteria by Ohio Sealants, Inc., Pecora Corp., and Tremco, Inc. are also acceptable. 1. 2.
Non-bleeding and staining. Surface Burning Characteristics: a. b. c.
Flame Spread: 0. Smoke Developed 0. Complies with ASTM C919 and ASTM C834.
E.
Wood Framing Adhesive: ASTM C557, commercial grade material as recommended by the panel manufacturer.
F.
Rated Wall Control Joint Safing Insulation: Mineral wool insulation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A.
Comply with ASTM C 840.
B.
Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged or mold damaged.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 6
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
C.
Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide ¼” wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
D.
Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members, or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage.
3.2 A.
APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD Install interior gypsum board types at locations indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
3.3
Install safing insulation at control joints in rated walls. Fill voids completely. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board and on opposite sides of partitions. Cut openings to fit electrical outlets, plumbing, light fixtures, piping and other penetrations snugly and small enough to be covered by plates and escutcheons Maintain fire rated wall ratings at recessed electrical panels, etc., by installing sufficient additional gypsum board layers behind recessed cabinets, boxes, etc. Space fasteners in compliance with manufacturer’s installation requirements for each type of material, and with rated wall assembly requirements. Install mold resistant panels at interior face of exterior walls. Use specific joint treatment and trim materials indicated.
APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS
A.
Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Install at showers, tubs and where indicated. Install with ¼” gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.
B.
Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and install at showers, tubs, and where indicated to receive tile. Install with ¼” gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.
C.
Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.1, at showers, tubs, and where indicated to receive tile.
D.
Areas Not Subject to Wetting: Install regular-type gypsum wallboard panels to produce a flat surface except at showers, tubs, and other locations indicated to receive waterresistant panels.
E.
Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 7
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 3.4 A.
ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION Insulation: Install sound attenuation blankets in sound rated partitions and ceilings where indicated. 1. 2.
B.
Completely fill space between studs and framing to full height of partition wall or full ceiling area. Fit carefully behind electrical outlets and other work penetrating sound-rated construction.
Acoustical Sealant: 1.
2. 3. 4.
5.
6.
3.5
01/13/12
At partition walls, provide continuous beads of acoustic sealant at juncture of both faces of runners with floor and ceiling construction, and wherever gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials, prior to installation of gypsum board. At ceilings, provide continuous beads of sealant wherever gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials. Provide continuous bead of sealant behind faces of control joints prior to installation of control joint accessories. After installation of gypsum board base layers, cut face layer sheets ½” less than floor to ceiling height and position with ¼” open space between gypsum board and floor, ceiling and dissimilar vertical construction. Fill ¼” open space with continuous sealant beads after installation of face layer. At openings and cutouts, fill open spaces between gypsum board and fixtures, cabinets, ducts and other flush or penetrating items, with continuous bead of sealant. Seal sides and backs of electrical boxes to completely close off openings and joints.
TRIM ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
A.
General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.
C.
Interior Trim: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. 2. 3.
Install metal corner beads at external corners. Install metal casing bead trim where edge of gypsum board is exposed or semi-exposed. Control Joints: a.
GYPSUM BOARD
Install control joints at junction of gypsum board partitions with walls or partitions of other finish material.
092900 - 8
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE b. c. D.
Install control joints within long runs of partitions, ceilings or soffits at approximately 30'-0" on center or as indicated. Where gypsum board is vertically continuous, as at stairwells, provide horizontal control joints at each floor level.
Exterior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. 2.
3.6
01/13/12
Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A.
General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B.
Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges and damaged surface areas.
C.
Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape.
D.
Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below: 1. 2.
3. 4.
5.
6.
Level 0: No taping, finishing, or accessories required. Use at temporary construction and draftstopping areas. Level 1: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and sound-rated assemblies. Level 2: Embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges where panels are substrate for tile. Level 3: Embed tape and apply separate first and fill coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges. Use in areas scheduled to receive heavy texture painted finish. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view and scheduled to receive a painted finish or wall covering. Level 5: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges, and apply skim coat of joint compound over entire surface. Use in areas exposed to view and scheduled to receive a gloss, semi-gloss, or enamel painted finish.
E.
Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F.
Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
G.
Abuse Resistant Panels:
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 9
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1. 2.
H.
3.7
01/13/12
Surface Preparation: Complete gypsum board surface treatment to Level 4 finish before applying primer-surfacer. Primer-Surfacer: Machine apply materials in conformance with manufacturer’s written application instructions to a wet film thickness of 15 to 20 mils (9-12 mils dry film thickness).
Sand joint compound at exposed finished areas to provide surfaces free of tool marks, ridges, and other imperfections, and ready for application of scheduled finishes. PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B.
Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. 2.
Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 092900
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 10
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 093000 - TILING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2
SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Wall tile. 2. Floor tile. 3. Glass tile. 4. Tile trim and accessories. 5. Waterproof membrane. 6. Crack-suppression membrane. 7. Metal edge strips. 8. Tile setting materials and accessories. SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each product indicated. Include floor tile coefficient of friction values.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints.
C.
Samples: 1. Each type, composition, color, and finish of tile. 2. Assembled samples with grouted joints for each type, composition, color, and finish of tile. 3. Stone thresholds in 6” lengths.
D.
Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
B.
Installation: Install tile in accordance with the recommendations contained in the latest edition of the Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation of the Tile Council of America Inc. and manufacturer's written instructions.
C.
Coefficient of Friction: Provide floor tile with non-skid surface with natural or applied rustproof abrasive embedded in the wearing surface in accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice to produce a coefficient of friction value equal to or greater than .60 under wet conditions. Value to be verified by independent testing lab results if required.
D.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of each type of floor and wall tile installation. 2. Size: 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
TILING
093000 - 1
4. E.
1.4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Make mockups available to other trades for their use.
01/13/12
Concrete Slab Curing Materials and Methods: Review concrete slab curing and sealing material submittals provided by General Contractor for compatibility with setting materials provided under this Section. Notify General Contractor, in writing, of materials' compatibility or noncompatibility with setting materials provided under this Section. Proceed with installation only after compatible materials and /or curing methods have been approved, or noncompatible curing or sealing materials have been removed by the General Contractor. EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. 2. Grout Materials: Furnish quantity of grout materials required to install each type, composition, color, pattern, and size of tile provided.
B.
Excess Materials: In addition to extra materials noted above, turn over unused tile, setting and grout materials to the Owner’s representative. Package materials with protective covers for storage and identify with labels describing contents and color.
C.
Provide a typed list of extra and excess materials and turn over to the Owner’s representative.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
MANUFACTURERS Floor and wall tile and accessories by the manufacturer as listed on the Drawings form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable materials, performance characteristics, colors and finishes by the following manufacturers are also acceptable. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.
B.
TILING
American Marazzi Tile, Inc. American Olean. Crossville Ceramics Company, L.P. Atlas Concorde. Ceramiche Caesar. Terragreen Ceramics. Laufen USA. Quarry Tile Company. Seneca Tiles, Inc. Summitville Tiles, Inc. United States Ceramic Tile Company. Winburn Tile Manufacturing Company. Daltile.
POR. T-1, CT-1, GT-1: Refer to the Finish Schedule on the Drawings.
093000 - 2
2.2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS
01/13/12
A.
Setting and grouting materials by MAPEI Corp. forms the basis-of-design. Products with comparable materials and performance characteristics, colors and finishes by the following manufacturers are also acceptable. 1. Atlas Minerals & Chemicals, Inc. 2. Boiardi Products Corp. 3. Bonsal, W. R., Co. 4. Bostik. 5. Custom Building Products. 6. LATICRETE International Inc. 7. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. 8. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 9. TEC Specialty Products Inc.
B.
Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.1. Provide nonsagging mortar for wall applications. 1. Walls: TCA W243. 2. Floors: TCA F125A, full coverage.
C.
Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4. Provide nonsagging mortar for wall applications. 1. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix containing dry additive to which only water must be added. 2. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix combined with liquid-latex additive. 3. Walls: TCA W243. 4. Floors: TCA F125A, full coverage.
D.
Grout and Tile Sealers: Manufacturer's standard products for sealing grout joints and unglazed tiles that do not change color or appearance of grout. 1. Grout, Interior Floors and Countertops: “KERASEAL”, penetrating sealer. 2. Ceramit Tile Grout, Interior: “KERASEAL S”, silicone sealer.
2.3
ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cementbased formulations by MAPEI Corp., or provided or approved by manufacturer of tilesetting materials.
B.
Waterproofing and Crack-Suppression Membranes: Manufacturer's standard product complying with ANSI A118.10. Select from the following. 1. Self-Adhering Elastomeric Membrane: "Anti-Fracture ECB" by National Applied Construction Products, 40 mil polymer modified elastomer laminated to fiber sheet. 2. Chlorinated-Polyethylene-Sheet Product: “Nobleseal TS” by The Noble Company. Nonplasticized, chlorinated polyethylene faced on both sides with nonwoven polyester fabric, 0.030” nominal thickness. 3. PVC-Sheet Product: “Composeal Gold” by Compotite Corporation. Two layers of PVC sheet heat-fused together and to facings of bondable nonwoven polyester, 0.040” nominal thickness. 4. Polyethylene-Sheet Product: “KERDI” by Schluter Systems L.P. Polyethylene faced on both sides with fleece webbing, 0.008” nominal thickness.
TILING
093000 - 3
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
2.4 A.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Elastomeric Sealants: Elastomeric sealants of base polymer and characteristics indicated that comply with applicable requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide, intended for in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures. Products by the following manufacturers are acceptable. a. Dow Corning Corporation, “Dow Corning 786”. b. GE Silicones, “Sanitary 1700”. c. Pecora Corporation, “Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant”. d. Tremco, Inc., “Tremsil 600 White”. 2.
B. TILING
NEW BUILDING FOR 01/13/12 LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Corrugated-Polyethylene Product: “DITRA” by Schluter Systems L.P. Polyethylene with dovetail-shaped corrugations and with anchoring webbing on the underside, 3/16” nominal thickness. Fabric-Reinforced, Modified-Bituminous Sheet Product: “Strataflex” by Product: National Applied Construction Products, Inc. SBS-modified-bituminous sheet with woven reinforcement facing, 0.040” nominal thickness. Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Product: Liquid-latex rubber with fabric reinforcement. Products by the following manufacturers are acceptable. a. Custom Building Products, “Trowel & Seal Waterproofing and Anti-Fracture Membrane”. b. LATICRETE International Inc., “Laticrete 9235 Waterproof Membrane”. c. MAPEI Corporation, “PRP M19”. d. Summitville Tiles, Inc., “S-9000”. Unreinforced, Fluid-Applied Product: Liquid-latex rubber. Products by the following manufacturers are acceptable. a. Boiardi Products Corporation, “Elastiment 324 or 644. b. Custom Building Products, “LevelQuick Waterproofing and Anti-Fracture Membrane”. c. Jamo Inc., “Waterproof”. Latex-Portland Cement Product: Flexible mortar with acrylic-latex additive. Products by the following manufacturers are acceptable. a. Boiardi Products Corporation, “Elastiment 323”. b. MAPEI Corporation, “PRP 315”. c. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc., “Southcrete 1100”. d. TEC Specialty Products Inc., “TA-324, Triple Flex”. Urethane Waterproofing and Tile-Setting Adhesive: One-part liquid-applied urethane. Products by the following manufacturers are acceptable. a. Bostik, “Hydroment Ultra-Set”. b. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc., “Deck-Seal 1000”.
Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: ASTM C 920; Type M; Grade P; Class 25; Uses T, M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. Products by the following manufacturers are acceptable. a. Bostik, “Chem-Calk 550”. b. Mameco International, Inc., “Vulkem 245”. c. Pecora Corporation, “NR-200 Urexpan”. d. Tremco, Inc., “THC-900”.
Joint-Sealant Backing and Accessories: 093000 - 4
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7. C.
NEW BUILDING FOR 01/13/12 LANE AVENUE MIXED USE General: Material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, any of the indicated types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: a. Type C: Closed-cell material with a surface skin. b. Type O: Open-cell material. c. Type B: Bicellular material with a surface skin. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F. Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible jointfiller materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.
Metal Edge Strips: Metal edge and trim strips by Schluter Systems L.P. form the basisof-design. Products with comparable designs, materials, performance characteristics and finishes by other manufacturers may be submitted to the Architect for review no later than ten days prior to the Bid Date. 1. Transitions to Carpet: “RENO-AETK” size as required by installation conditions. 2. Edge Strip: Edge of tile, "SCHIENE “, size as required by installation conditions. 3. Transitions: Tile to Concrete Flooring, "RENO-RAMP", size as required by installation conditions. 4. Finish: Satin anodized aluminum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials.
B.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according to tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions.
TILING
093000 - 5
C.
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.
01/13/12
D.
Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at Project site before installing.
E.
Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.
3.2
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
B.
TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
C.
Install crack suppression membrane to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate.
D.
Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate. 1. Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to determine that it is watertight.
E.
Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, vinyl tile, floor mats or other flooring finishes.
F.
Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
G.
Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
H.
Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths indicated, unless otherwise indicated.
I.
Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.
J.
Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
TILING
093000 - 6
K.
NEW BUILDING FOR 01/13/12 LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Grout tile to comply with requirements of ANSI A108.10, unless otherwise indicated. 1. For chemical-resistant epoxy grouts, comply with ANSI A108.6.
L.
For installations indicated below, follow procedures in ANSI A108 Series tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage. 1. Tile floors in wet areas. 2. Tile floors in laundries. 3. Tile floors composed of tiles 8” x 8” or larger. 4. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles.
M.
Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of setting bed as abutting field tile, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed would otherwise be exposed above adjacent nontile floor finish.
N.
Install metal lath and scratch coat for walls to comply with ANSI A108.1A, Section 4.1.
O.
Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints in tile floors according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer that has gotten on tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.
END OF SECTION 093000
TILING
093000 - 7
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 096400 - WOOD FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. 1.2
SUMMARY Section includes wood flooring. SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples: For each type of wood flooring and accessory.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Engineered Flooring: Comply with HPVA requirements for grading, bond line, moisture content, machining and formaldehyde emissions.
B.
Build mockup of typical flooring area as shown on Drawings including base.
1.4 A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS Conditioning period begins not less than seven days before wood flooring installation, is continuous through installation, and continues not less than seven days after wood flooring installation. 1.
2.
Environmental Conditioning: Maintain an ambient temperature between 65 and 75 deg F (18 and 24 deg C) and relative humidity planned for building occupants in spaces to receive wood flooring during the conditioning period. Wood Flooring Conditioning: Move wood flooring into spaces where it will be installed, no later than the beginning of the conditioning period. a. b.
Do not install flooring until it adjusts to relative humidity of, and is at same temperature as, space where it is to be installed. Open sealed packages to allow wood flooring to acclimatize immediately on moving flooring into spaces in which it will be installed.
B.
After conditioning period, maintain relative humidity and ambient temperature planned for building occupants.
C.
Install factory-finished wood flooring after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
WOOD FLOORING
096400 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
WOOD FLOORING Engineered-wood flooring by the manufacturer as listed on the Drawings form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable designs, materials, performance characteristics and colors by the following manufacturers are also acceptable. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
B.
Engineered-Wood Flooring (WD-1): Refer to room finish schedule on the drawings. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
2.2 A.
2.3
Anderson Hardwood Floors. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Boen Hardwood Flooring Inc. EcoTimber. Gammapar. Kentucky Wood Floors. Mannington Mills, Inc. Oregon Lumber Company. Tarkett. Wood Flooring International.
Style: Engineered. Species: Finish wood face with multi-ply wood backer. Thickness: 3/8”. Face width: 5”. Lengths: Random-length strips complying with applicable grading rules. Edge style: Square. Finish: UV urethane system.
SOUND CONTROL UNDERLAYMENT Sound Control Underlayment: Refer to Division 03 Section “Gypsum Cement Underlayment” or Division 09 Section “Resilient Acoustical Underlayment”. ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Vapor Retarder: ASTM D 4397, polyethylene sheet not less than 6.0 mils thick.
B.
Asphalt-Saturated Felt: ASTM D 4869, Type II.
C.
Wood Flooring Adhesive: Mastic recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers for application indicated. 1.
D.
Use adhesives that have a VOC content of not more than 100 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compound: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cementbased formulation approved by wood flooring manufacturer.
WOOD FLOORING
096400 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
E.
Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer, but not less than that recommended in NWFA's "Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring."
F.
Thresholds and Saddles: To match wood flooring. Tapered on each side.
G.
Reducer Strips: To match wood flooring. Wide, tapered per ADAAG requirements, and in thickness required to match height of flooring.
H.
Wood Air Vents and Grilles: To match wood flooring and in sizes and design indicated on Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.
PREPARATION Gypsum Underlayment: Verify that substrates are dry and moisture-vapor emissions are within acceptable levels according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1.
Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
B.
Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances on substrates that are incompatible with installation adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
C.
Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before product installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with flooring manufacturer's written installation instructions, but not less than applicable recommendations in NWFA's "Installation Guidelines: Wood Flooring."
B.
Provide expansion space at walls and other obstructions and terminations of flooring as recommended by the manufacturer of the flooring.
C.
Vapor Retarder (if required by manufacturer): Comply with NOFMA's "Installing Hardwood Flooring" for vapor retarder installation and the following: 1. 2.
3.
Wood Flooring Nailed to Wood Subfloor: Install flooring over a layer of asphaltsaturated felt. Wood Flooring Nailed to Sleepers over Concrete: Install flooring over a layer of polyethylene sheet with edges overlapped over sleepers and turned up behind baseboards. Wood Flooring Installed Directly on Concrete: Install a layer of polyethylene sheet according to flooring manufacturer's written instructions.
WOOD FLOORING
096400 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
D.
Sound Control Underlayment: Install over vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Engineered-Wood Flooring: Install floating floor or as recommended by the flooring manufacturer for the field conditions.
3.3 A.
PROTECTION Protect installed wood flooring during remainder of construction period with covering of heavy kraft paper or other suitable material. Do not use plastic sheet or film that might cause condensation.
END OF SECTION 096400
WOOD FLOORING
096400 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2
SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Wall base. 2. Resilient moldings and accessories. 3. Substrate preparation and testing. 4. Installation materials. SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each product indicated.
B.
Samples: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size samples but not less than 12” long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required.
1.3
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.
B.
After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.
C.
Prior to start of installation, test concrete for moisture content and adhesive bond as determined by flooring manufacturer's recommended moisture and bond tests.
D.
Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
1.4
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern and size of resilient product installed.
B.
Excess Materials: In addition to extra materials noted above, turn over unused resilient and installation materials to the Owner’s representative. Package materials with protective covers for storage and identify with labels describing contents and color.
C.
Provide a typed list of extra and excess materials and turn over to the Owner’s representative.
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
096513 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
RESILIENT WALL BASE Resilient wall base by Johnsonite forms the basis-of-design. Products with comparable size, material characteristics, performance characteristics and finishes by manufacturers listed are also acceptable. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
B.
RB-1: ASTM F 1861. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
C. 2.2
AFCO-USA, American Floor Products Company, Inc. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Azrock Commercial Flooring. Burke Mercer Flooring Products. Nora Rubber Flooring, Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc. Roppe Corporation. Stoler Industries. VPI, LLC, Floor Products Division.
Product: "Rubber Base" Type (Material Requirement): TP (rubber, thermoplastic). Group (Manufacturing Method): I (solid, homogeneous). Style: Coved at sealed concrete floors, straight at carpet. Minimum Thickness: 0.125”, 0.080”. Height: 4”. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. Inside and Outside Corners: Job formed. Pre-molded corners only permitted where proper anchorage cannot be obtained. Surface: Smooth. Colors: Refer to the Finish Legend on the Drawings for the colors.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Critical Radiant Flux Classification Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm per ASTM E 648. RESILIENT MOLDINGS AND ACCESSORIES
A.
Resilient moldings and accessories by Johnsonite form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable size, material, performance characteristics, and colors by the following are also acceptable. 1. BurkeMercer. 2. Flexco. 3. Roppe.
B.
Resilient Moldings and Accessories: 1. VCT to Exposed Concrete Reducers: RRS-XX-C. 2. VCT to Carpet: CRS Series, height as required by carpeting materials. 3. Carpet to VCT or Exposed Concrete Reducers: EG-XX Series. 4. Cap for cove carpet: 5. Cap for cove resilient sheet floor covering: 6. Carpet bar for tackless installations: 7. Carpet edge for glue-down applications: 8. Colors: Selected from manufacturer’s standard palette. Colors not to exceed three (3) for entire project.
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
096513 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
C.
Material: Vinyl, Rubber.
D.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Critical Radiant Flux Classification Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm per ASTM E 648.
2.3
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Products by TEC Inc. Equal products by Bostic, and Mapei or comparable materials recommended by flooring manufacturer for applications indicated are also acceptable. 1. Material: VersaPatch, latex modified patch and leveling compound. 2. Additive: Patch Additive 861. 3. Primer: Primer.
B.
Primers, Sealers and Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of resilient products.
B.
Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
C.
Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. Trowel to smooth finish with surfaces that align with adjacent substrate, and without defects that might telegraph through flooring.
D.
Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1. Install resilient products after they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.
E.
Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION
A.
Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
B.
Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.
C.
Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
096513 - 3
D.
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Do not stretch wall base during installation.
01/13/12
E.
On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
F.
Premolded Corners: Install premolded corners before installing straight pieces. Install only where proper anchorage for job formed corners cannot be obtained.
G.
Job-Formed Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends occur and remove strips perpendicular to length of base that are only deep enough to produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall base thickness. 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form by cutting an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate.
3.3 A.
3.4
RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would otherwise be exposed. CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. 4. Wash surfaces after time period recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 096513
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
096513 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE SECTION 096516.23 - RESILIENT ACOUSTIC UNDERLAYMENT
01/13/12
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2
SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Acoustic underlayment and accessories. 2. Installation accessories. SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data and Reports: 1. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles and finishes. 2. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that they comply with product requirements. 3. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other Work.
C.
Samples: For each type of acoustic underlayment indicated.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers experienced in the installation of acoustic underlayment and requirements required for this Project.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain acoustic underlayment products through one source from a single manufacturer.
C.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with project requirements.
1.4
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Concrete Slab Curing Materials and Methods: Review concrete slab curing and sealing material submittals provided by General Contractor for compatibility with adhesive materials provided under this Section. Notify General Contractor, in writing, of materials' compatibility or noncompatibility with adhesive materials provided under this Section. Proceed with installation only after compatible materials and/or curing methods have been approved, or noncompatible curing or sealing materials have been removed by the General Contractor.
B.
Maintain minimum uniform temperature of 65 deg F for 48 hours before, during and after installation.
C.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer states acoustic underlayment to be free from manufacturing defects on both material and workmanship.
RESILIENT ACOUSTIC UNDERLAYMENT
096516.23 - 1
D.
NEW BUILDING FOR 01/13/12 LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Warranty Period: Lifetime of installation from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
MANUFACTURERS Acoustic underlayment by Dodge-Regupol, Inc. forms the basis-of-design. Products with comparable materials and performance by the following manufacturers are also acceptable. 1.
Diversified Foam Products, Inc., "The Floor Muffler".
B.
Acoustic Underlayment: 1. Product: "Regupol-QTscu Recycled Rubber Impact Sound Insulation". 2. Material: 100% recycled rubber, resilient. 3. Thickness: 1/8" (5mm). 4. Wall Isolation Strip: "Regupol-QTscu Perimeter Isolation Strip". 5. Vinyl Flooring Area Coating: Underlayment manufacturer's troweled-on elastic sealing compound. 6. Performance: ASTM E 2179 16db. 7. Installation Method: Adhered.
C.
Leveling and Patching Compounds: "LevelQuik Self-Leveling Underlayment" or "LevelQuik Skim Coat and Patching Compound" by Custom Building Products.
D.
General-Purpose Adhesives: Contractor's option. 1. E-Grip II by Dodge-Regupol, Inc. 2. Synthetic Surfaces' 78H or 33C. 3. Helmicol 3078 by Helmitin. 4. Bostik's Best by Bostick. 5. Chemrex 941. 6. ParaBond M4700 by Parachem. 7. Chapco 399. 8. Capitol USA Fast 050.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of acoustic underlayment
B.
Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers and hardeners. 2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 3. Moisture Testing: a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. b. Perform additional tests recommended by flooring manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
RESILIENT ACOUSTIC UNDERLAYMENT
096516.23 - 2
C.
NEW BUILDING FOR 01/13/12 LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
D.
Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes and depressions in substrates. Trowel to smooth finish with surfaces that align with adjacent substrate, and without defects that might telegraph through flooring.
E.
Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by acoustic underlayment immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
F.
Move acoustic underlayment products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install acoustic underlayment products according to manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B.
Adhere perimeter isolation strip to entire wall perimeter and perimeter of protrusions into the area.
C.
Adhere acoustic underlayment with butt joints and roll to ensure proper adhesive transfer. Remove any air pockets.
D.
Patch and repair damaged areas to match and align with adjacent materials.
END OF SECTION 096516.23
RESILIENT ACOUSTIC UNDERLAYMENT
096516.23 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
01/13/12
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following: 1. Vinyl composition tile (VCT). 2. Solid vinyl floor tile (VT). 3. Accessories. 4. Floor preparation and testing. 5. Initial maintenance after installation.
B.
Refer to Division 09 Section for resilient wall base and flooring transition accessories.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each product indicated.
B.
Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of resilient floor tile required.
C.
Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
1.3 A.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm per ASTM E 648. 2. Smoke Development: <450 per ASTM E 662. PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Concrete Slab Curing Materials and Methods: Review concrete slab curing and sealing material submittals provided by General Contractor for compatibility with adhesive materials provided under this Section. Notify General Contractor, in writing, of materials' compatibility or noncompatibility with adhesive materials provided under this Section. Proceed with installation only after compatible materials and /or curing methods have been approved, or noncompatible curing or sealing materials have been removed by the General Contractor.
B.
Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.
C.
After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.
D.
Prior to start of installation, test concrete for moisture content and adhesive bond as determined by flooring manufacturer's recommended moisture and bond tests.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
096519 - 1
E.
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation.
F.
Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation.
G.
Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
1.5
01/13/12
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
The Work includes the following: 1. Installing new tiles over a concrete substrate.
B.
Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.
C.
After post-installation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.
D.
Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation.
E.
Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation.
F.
Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
1.6
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Floor Tile: Furnish 1 box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed.
B.
Excess Materials: In addition to extra materials noted above, turn over unused flooring and installation materials to the Owner’s representative. Package materials with protective covers for storage and identify with labels describing contents and color.
C.
Provide a typed list of extra and excess materials and turn over to the Owner’s representative.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
VINYL COMPOSITION TILE Vinyl composition tile and accessories by the manufacturer as listed on the Drawings form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable size, material characteristics, performance characteristics, and finishes by manufacturers listed are also acceptable.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
096519 - 2
1. 2. 3. 4. B.
2.2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Azrock Commercial Flooring. Mannington Mills, Inc. Tarkett Inc.
01/13/12
Materials: 1. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT-1): ASTM F 1066 Class 2 - through pattern. a. Product: “Standard Excelon Imperial Texture” or equal. 1) Size: 12” x 12” x 1/8”. 2) Wearing Surface: Smooth. 3) Colors: Refer to Room Finish Schedule on the drawings. 2. Static Load Limit: ASTM F 970, 75 psi. SOLID VINYL FLOOR TILE
A.
Solid vinyl floor tile and accessories by the manufacturer as listed on the Drawings form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable size, material characteristics, performance characteristics, and finishes by manufacturers listed are also acceptable. 1. Amtico International Inc. 2. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 3. Azrock Commercial Flooring. 4. Estrie, American Biltrite (Canada) Ltd. 5. GEMTEC, Inc. 6. Marley Flexco (USA), Inc. 7. Roppe Corporation. 8. TOLI International. 9. VPI, LLC, Floor Products Division.
B.
Materials: 1. Solid Vinyl Floor Tile (V.T.-1): ASTM F 1700. a. Product: Armstrong or equal. b. Size: 12” x 12”. c. Class: III Printed Film Vinyl Tile. d. Type: B Embossed Surface. e. Minimum Static Load: f. Color: Selected from manufacturer’s standard palette.
2.3
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Products by TEC Inc. Equal products by Bostic, and Mapei or comparable materials recommended by flooring manufacturer for applications indicated are also acceptable. 1. Material: VersaPatch, latex modified patch and leveling compound. 2. Additive: Patch Additive 861. 3. Primer: Primer.
B.
Primers, Sealers and Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by flooring manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.
C.
Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edges of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
096519 - 3
D.
NEW BUILDING FOR 01/13/12 LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Cleaning, Striping and Floor Polish Solutions: Tile manufacturers recommended products for selected flooring.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of resilient products.
B.
Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 3. Moisture Testing: a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. b. Perform additional tests recommended by flooring manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
C.
Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
D.
Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. Trowel to smooth finish with surfaces that align with adjacent substrate, and without defects that might telegraph through flooring.
E.
Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1. Install resilient products after they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed.
F.
Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. 1. Lay tiles square with room axis.
B.
Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1. Lay tiles with grain direction alternating in adjacent tiles (basket-weave pattern.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
096519 - 4
C.
NEW BUILDING FOR 01/13/12 LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
D.
Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds, and nosings.
E.
Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
F.
Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.
G.
Install tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of tile installed on covers. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.
3.3
INITIAL MAINTENANCE AFTER INSTALLATION
A.
Initial Maintenance: Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation. 1. Do not wet wash, scrub or strip floor for at least four or five days after installation 2. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 3. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 4. If required by tile manufacturer's recommendations, strip flooring using manufacturer's recommend materials and procedures. 5. Damp-mop surfaces with a neutral detergent solution to remove marks and soil. 6. Apply two (2) coats of tile manufacturers recommended a high-quality commercial floor polish.
B.
Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 096519
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
096519 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING
01/13/12
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes tile floor carpet and the following: 1. Floor preparation and testing. 2. Installation materials.
B.
Refer to Division 09 Section Resilient Base and Accessories for flooring transition accessories.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Carpet type, color and dye lot. 2. Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction and starting point. 3. Insets and borders. 4. Edge, transition and other accessory strips. 5. Transition details to other flooring materials.
C.
Samples: For each color and texture required. 1. Carpet: 12" square sample. 2. Exposed Edge Sample: 12" long samples.
D.
Product Schedule: For carpet, Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
E.
Maintenance data.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements.
B.
All carpeting to comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Section 4.5.3, and have a maximum pile thickness of ½”.
C.
Specific Floor Preparation and Installation Instructions: Comply with Carpet and Rug Institute Standard for Installation of Commercial Carpet (CRI 104).
D.
Mockups: Before installing carpet, build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.4 A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."
TILE CARPETING
096813 - 1
1.5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE PROJECT CONDITIONS
01/13/12
A.
Concrete Slab Curing Materials and Methods: Review concrete slab curing and sealing material submittals provided by General Contractor for compatibility with adhesive materials provided under this Section. Notify General Contractor, in writing, of materials' compatibility or noncompatibility with adhesive materials provided under this Section. Proceed with installation only after compatible materials and /or curing methods have been approved, or noncompatible curing or sealing materials have been removed by the General Contractor.
B.
Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and Section 7.12, "Ventilation."
C.
Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until they have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, and concrete slabs have attained pH range recommended by manufacturer.
D.
Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet, install carpet before these items are installed.
1.6 A.
1.7
WARRANTY Special Warranty for Carpet: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, loss of tuft bind strength, excess static discharge and delamination. 1. Warranty Period: Ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion. EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet: Equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd.
B.
Excess Materials: In addition to extra materials noted above, turn over useable excess unused flooring and installation materials to Owner’s representative. Package materials with protective covers for storage and identify with labels describing contents and color.
C.
Provide a typed list of extra and excess materials to Owner’s representative.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
MANUFACTURERS Carpet by Shaw forms the basis-of-design. Products with comparable designs, materials, performance characteristics and colors by the following manufacturers are also acceptable. 1. 2.
Atlas. J & J.
TILE CARPETING
096813 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 2.2 A. 2.3
01/13/12
Masland. Monterey. Patcraft. Mannington. Mohawk Durkan. Bolyu. Milliken.
PRODUCTS Carpet CPT-4: Refer to the Finish Schedule on the Drawings. INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Underlayment products by TEC Inc. Comparable products by Bostik and Mapei, or materials recommended by carpet manufacturer are also acceptable. 1. Material: VersaPatch, latex modified patch and leveling compound. 2. Additive: Patch Additive 861. 3. Primer: Primer.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and is recommended or provided by carpet manufacturers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Inspect subfloors to receive carpeting and notify General Contractor of major irregularities that require correction. Normal preparation of subfloor by this contractor includes leveling small areas and filling small cracks and holes. Remove dirt, oil, grease, and surface coatings effecting bond. 1. Test concrete for moisture content. Install flooring over concrete after slabs have been cured and are sufficiently dry to achieve permanent bond with adhesive as determined by floor manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test. 2. Install underlayment on subfloor surfaces containing score or pock marks, and surface roughness. Trowel material to provide a smooth surface without defects which telegraph through flooring. Prime surfaces to receive flooring in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B.
Comply with CRI 104 and carpet manufacturers' written installation instructions for the following: 1. Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 9, "Direct GlueDown Installation."
C.
Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations and Shop Drawings for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile.
D.
Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves and similar openings.
TILE CARPETING
096813 - 3
1. 2.
3. E.
NEW BUILDING FOR 01/13/12 LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Cut out for conduits, pipes, columns, etc., and neatly trim raw edges of carpet. Leave no ragged edges exposed to view. Transitions to other materials or different color carpets occurring at door frames shall be made at the center line of the door in the closed position. Transitions at the frame edge or center line will not be accepted. Install transition strips at all locations where carpet transitions to other material.
Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
END OF SECTION 096813
TILE CARPETING
096813 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE SECTION 096816 - SHEET CARPETING
01/13/12
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes sheet floor carpet and the following: 1. Carpet cushion. 2. Floor preparation and testing. 3. Installation materials.
B.
Refer to Division 09 Section Resilient Base and Accessories for flooring transition accessories.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Carpet type, color and dye lot. 2. Seam locations. 3. Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction and starting point. 4. Pile direction. 5. Insets and borders. 6. Edge, transition and other accessory strips. 7. Transition details to other flooring materials. 8. Carpet cushion.
C.
Samples: For each color and texture required. 1. Carpet: 12" square sample. 2. Exposed Edge Sample: 12" long samples. 3. Carpet Cushion: 6" square sample.
D.
Product Schedule: For carpet and carpet cushion. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
E.
Maintenance data.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements.
B.
All carpeting to comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Section 4.5.3, and have a maximum pile thickness of ½”.
C.
Specific Floor Preparation and Installation Instructions: Comply with Carpet and Rug Institute Standard for Installation of Commercial Carpet (CRI 104).
D.
Mockups: Before installing carpet, build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
SHEET CARPETING
096816 - 1
1. 1.4 A. 1.5
NEW BUILDING FOR 01/13/12 LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling." PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Concrete Slab Curing Materials and Methods: Review concrete slab curing and sealing material submittals provided by General Contractor for compatibility with adhesive materials provided under this Section. Notify General Contractor, in writing, of materials' compatibility or noncompatibility with adhesive materials provided under this Section. Proceed with installation only after compatible materials and /or curing methods have been approved, or noncompatible curing or sealing materials have been removed by the General Contractor.
B.
Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and Section 7.12, "Ventilation."
C.
Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until they have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive, and concrete slabs have attained pH range recommended by manufacturer.
D.
Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet, install carpet before these items are installed.
1.6
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty for Carpet: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, loss of tuft bind strength, excess static discharge and delamination. 1. Warranty Period: Ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion.
B.
Special Warranty for Carpet Cushion: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet cushion installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes, but is not limited to, permanent indentation or compression. 1. Warranty Period: Ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.7
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet: Full-width rolls equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd.
B.
Excess Materials: In addition to extra materials noted above, turn over useable excess unused flooring and installation materials to Owner’s representative. Package materials with protective covers for storage and identify with labels describing contents and color.
SHEET CARPETING
096816 - 2
C.
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Provide a typed list of extra and excess materials to Owner’s representative.
01/13/12
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
MANUFACTURERS Carpet by the manufacturer as listed on the Drawings forms the basis-of-design. Products with comparable designs, materials, performance characteristics and colors by the following manufacturers are also acceptable. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
2.2 A. 2.3
Atlas. J & J. Masland. Monterey. Patcraft. Mannington. Mohawk Durkan. Bolyu. Milliken. Shaw.
PRODUCTS Carpet CPT-1 Through CPT-3: Refer to the Finish Schedule on the Drawings. INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Underlayment products by TEC Inc. Comparable products by Bostik and Mapei, or materials recommended by carpet manufacturer are also acceptable. 1. Material: VersaPatch, latex modified patch and leveling compound. 2. Additive: Patch Additive 861. 3. Primer: Primer.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and is recommended or provided by carpet and cushion manufacturers. 1. VOC Limits: Provide adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when tested according to ASTM D 5116: a. Total VOCs: 10.00 mg/sq. m x h. b. Formaldehyde: 0.05 mg/sq. m x h. c. 2-Ethyl-1-Hexanol: 3.00 mg/sq. m x h.
C.
Tackless Carpet Stripping: Water-resistant plywood, in strips as required to match cushion thickness and that comply with CRI 104, Section 12.2.
D.
Seam Adhesive: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for sealing and taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams.
SHEET CARPETING
096816 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Inspect subfloors to receive carpeting and notify General Contractor of major irregularities that require correction. Normal preparation of subfloor by this contractor includes leveling small areas and filling small cracks and holes. Remove dirt, oil, grease, and surface coatings effecting bond. 1. Test concrete for moisture content. Install flooring over concrete after slabs have been cured and are sufficiently dry to achieve permanent bond with adhesive as determined by floor manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test. 2. Install underlayment on subfloor surfaces containing score or pock marks, and surface roughness. Trowel material to provide a smooth surface without defects which telegraph through flooring. Prime surfaces to receive flooring in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B.
Comply with CRI 104 and carpet and carpet cushion manufacturers' written installation instructions for the following: 1. Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 9, "Direct GlueDown Installation." 2. Stretch-in Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 12, "Stretch-in Installation."
C.
Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations and Shop Drawings for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. 1. Maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer.
D.
Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves and similar openings. 1. Cut out for conduits, pipes, columns, etc., and neatly trim raw edges of carpet. Leave no ragged edges exposed to view. 2. Transitions to other materials or different color carpets occurring at door frames shall be made at the center line of the door in the closed position. Transitions at the frame edge or center line will not be accepted. 3. Install transition strips at all locations where carpet transitions to other material.
E.
Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
END OF SECTION 096816
SHEET CARPETING
096816 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 097733 - FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS (FRP) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2
SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Sanitary wall panels. 2. Adhesives, sealant and trim. 3. Accessories. SUBMITTALS
A.
Data and Reports: 1. Product Data: For each product indicated. 2. Product Schedule: Use same room designations as indicated on Drawings. 3. Maintenance data
B.
Shop Drawings: Include location and extent of each wall panel, seam locations and termination points.
C.
Samples: For each for each wall panel and for each color and texture required. Include sample sets with specified treatments applied.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide wall coverings with flame-spread and smokedeveloped indices of not more than 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
B.
Materials and Installation: Acceptable by USDA for use in area of food preparation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Sanitary wall panels by Crane Kemlite form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable materials, performance characteristics, colors and finishes by the following manufacturers are also acceptable. 1. Glasteel. 2. Sequentia.
B.
Wall Panels: 1. Type 1: Glasbord-P with Surfaseal. a. UL classification: Class C. Smoke developed: 450 or lower. b. Texture: Embossed. c. Thickness: .09". d. Color: Selected from manufacturer’s standard palette.
C.
Accessories: 1. Trim and Cap: Match panel color. 2. Fasteners: Manufacturer's "Nylon Drive Rivets". Match panel color.
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS (FRP)
097733 - 1
3. 4.
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Adhesive: Kemlite Multi-Purpose Construction Adhesive 101. Sealant: Kemlite Silicon Construction Sealant 255.
01/13/12
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Preparation: 1. Clean substrates of substances that could impair wall panel bond, including mold, mildew, oil, grease, incompatible primers and dirt. 2. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks and defects. 3. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding. 4. Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new concrete masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter. 5. Prime new gypsum board with primer recommended by wall covering manufacturer. 6. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell finishes with fine sandpaper. 7. Acclimate panels in area of installation for at least 24 hours. Store panels flat and off the ground.
B.
Apply adhesive to panel back and install panels plumb, square, and rigidly secured to substrate. Maintain adequate edge clearances at walls, ceiling, floor, and joints. Provide and install temporary bracing as required to hold panel firmly in place until adhesive has fully set.
C.
Install trim at all panel joints and exposed edges. Apply sealant at required locations to completely seal all seams and junctures. Remove excess sealant immediately.
D.
Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces using cleaning methods recommended by panel manufacturer. Replace damaged panels that cannot be cleaned.
END OF SECTION 097733
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS (FRP)
097733 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 099100 - PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2
SUMMARY This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on indicated exterior and interior substrates, and the following: 1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. 2. Provide cleaning and pH testing of concrete walls prior to material application. 3. Extra and excess materials indicated. SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples: For each finish and for each color and texture required.
C.
Product List: Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.
D.
Product Schedule: A complete list of proposed paints and finishes, listing the name of each product and the surface to which it will be applied. Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installation: Installation by skilled commercial painters with not less than five (5) years of continuous experience with materials equal in quality on projects of comparable scope. A satisfactory crew of qualified painters shall be maintained throughout the duration of the work.
B.
MPI Standards: 1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List." 2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.
C.
Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3. a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. 3. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
PAINTING
099100 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE D.
1.4
01/13/12
Materials: 1. Provide ready-mixed paints and stains. Job mixing and tinting not acceptable. 2. Provide lead free materials with mildew and mold resistant top coatings. 3. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer’s testing and field experience. 4. Minimum dry film thickness (dft) for each coat is listed in millimeters (mils) in the Material Schedule within this Section. PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Storage: Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain stored containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. Protect from freezing. 1. Deliver painting materials in sealed, original labeled containers bearing manufacturer’s name, brand name, type of paint or coating, color designation, standard compliance, materials content as well as mixing and/or reducing and application requirements. 2. Take necessary precautionary and safety measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion and to protect environment from hazard spills. Store materials that constitute a fire hazard (paints, solvents, drop clothes, etc.) in suitable closed and rated containers. Post adequate warnings (e.g. no smoking) as required. 3. Keep storage areas neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily, and dispose of off-site in a manner approve by authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Environmental Conditions: 1. Apply waterborne paints and finishes only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 50 and 90 deg F. 2. Apply solvent-thinned paints and finishes only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 45 and 95 deg F. 3. Do not apply paint or finish material in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
C.
Work Conditions: 1. Coordinate with other trades to insure adequate illumination, ventilation and dustfree environment during paint and finish application and drying. Maintain temperature and humidity within manufacturer's recommended tolerances throughout the work. 2. Before commencing work on any surface type, carefully inspect same and verify they are clean, dry and in all other respects suitable to receive specified treatment. Use cleaning materials and methods appropriate for substrate and field conditions. 3. Protection and Cleaning: Provide clean drop cloths, and other protection as approved, to protect floors, doors, windows and other parts from damage. Where any work is splattered, clean promptly and leave in satisfactory condition. 4. Use no plumbing fixtures, open waste or vent pipe, or pipe of any kind to dispose of paint, used rags, waste or other materials. 5. Water closets, tubs, and other fixtures, cabinets, furniture etc. shall not be used as supports for planking, and shall be thoroughly protected from damage at all times.
PAINTING
099100 - 2
6. 7.
8. 9.
NEW BUILDING FOR 01/13/12 LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Mixed species of wood occurring within the same room or adjacent to one another shall be finished to match the selected species and finish. Exposed mechanical (Division 23) and electrical (Division 26) piping, conduit, ductwork, and their supporting systems within finished areas or rooms painted to match the adjacent surface. Do not paint interior exposed fire retardant treated wood trusses sooner than three (3) months after they have been enclosed in a conditioned environment. Provide pH testing of exterior concrete walls prior to application of any material. Submit copies of the results to the Owner and Architect. Material application to begin after test results show pH levels acceptable to material manufacturer's recommendations. Retest as often as required to obtain acceptable levels.
D.
Concrete Slab Curing Materials and Methods: Review concrete slab curing and sealing material submittals provided by General Contractor for compatibility with floor coating materials provided under this Section. Notify General Contractor, in writing, of materials' compatibility or noncompatibility with floor coating materials provided under this Section. Proceed with installation only after compatible materials and /or curing methods have been approved, or noncompatible curing or sealing materials have been removed by the General Contractor.
E.
Waste Management and Disposal: 1. Paint, stain and wood preservative finishes and related materials (thinners, solvents, etc.) are regarded as hazardous products and subject to regulations for disposal. Obtain information on required controls from applicable authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Collect, separate and recycle waste materials where recycling is available. Treat materials that cannot be reused as hazardous waste and disposed of in an appropriate manner. 3. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste, including used sealant and adhesive tubes and containers, in containers or areas designated on-site for hazardous waste. 4. The following procedures shall be strictly adhered to: a. Retain cleaning water for water based materials to allow sediments to be filtered out. In no case shall equipment be cleaned using free draining water. b. Retain cleaners, thinners, solvents and excess paint, and place in designated containers and ensure proper disposal. c. Return solvent and oil soaked rags for contaminant recovery, proper disposal, or appropriate cleaning and laundering. d. Dispose of contaminants in an approved legal manner in accordance with hazardous waste regulations. e. Empty paint cans are to be dry prior to disposal or recycling (where available). f. Close and seal tightly partly used cans of materials, including sealant and adhesive containers, and store in ventilated, fire safe areas at moderate temperatures. 5. Set aside and protect surplus and uncontaminated finish materials not required by Owner, and arrange collection for verifiable reuse or remanufacturing.
F.
Unless specifically noted, do not paint or finish prefinished items and surfaces, concealed surfaces, operating parts and the following:
PAINTING
099100 - 3
1.
2. 1.5
NEW BUILDING FOR 01/13/12 LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating or nomenclature plates. Architectural Features: Aluminum doors, frames and windows, finish hardware, and copper, stainless steel or aluminum fabrications.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied, and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner. 1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 3 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.
B.
Excess Materials: In addition to extra materials noted above, turn over unused paint and finish materials to the Owner’s representative. Package materials with protective covers for storage and identify with labels describing contents and color.
C.
Provide a typed list of extra and excess materials and turn over to the Owner’s representative.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
2.2
MANUFACTURERS Paint and stain products by Sherwin-Williams, except as otherwise noted, form the basis-of-design. Products of comparable materials, dry film thickness and containing equivalent solids by volume content by the following manufacturers are also acceptable. 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. Coronado Paint Company. 3. Glidden Professional. 4. Porter Paints. 5. PPG Industries, Inc. 6. Pratt & Lambert. PAINT, GENERAL
A.
Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
B.
Chemical Components of Field-Applied Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) and the following chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to primers or finishes that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 100 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.
PAINTING
099100 - 4
3.
4.
NEW BUILDING FOR 01/13/12 LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following: a. Acrolein. b. Acrylonitrile. c. Antimony. d. Benzene. e. Butyl benzyl phthalate. f. Cadmium. g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate. h. Di-n-butyl phthalate. i. Di-n-octyl phthalate. j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene. k. Diethyl phthalate. l. Dimethyl phthalate. m. Ethylbenzene. n. Formaldehyde. o. Hexavalent chromium. p. Isophorone. q. Lead. r. Mercury. s. Methyl ethyl ketone. t. Methyl isobutyl ketone. u. Methylene chloride. v. Naphthalene. w. Toluene (methylbenzene). x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane. y. Vinyl chloride.
C.
Minimum dry film thickness (dft) for each coat listed in millimeters (mils) in Material Schedule.
D.
Colors PT-1 Through PT-6: Selected from manufacturer's standard palette except where noted as custom. 1. Color schedule issued after approval of paint material submittals. 2. Match colors listed in Room Finish Schedule.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B.
Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent.
PAINTING
099100 - 5
4.
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
01/13/12
C.
Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
D.
Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.
3.2
PREPARATION AND APPLICATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.
B.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated.
C.
Remove or protect hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved.
D.
Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.
E.
Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer.
F.
Exposed Surfaces: Include areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection. 1. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 2. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. 3. Paint access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 4. Finish doors on tops, bottoms and side edges the same as faces. Coordinate required colors on each face of doors. 5. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to match exterior.
G.
Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Mechanical Work: a. Uninsulated metal piping. b. Uninsulated plastic piping. c. Pipe hangers and supports.
PAINTING
099100 - 6
2.
H. 3.3
NEW BUILDING FOR 01/13/12 LANE AVENUE MIXED USE d. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. e. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. f. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. Electrical Work: a. Switchgear. b. Panelboards. c. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A.
At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish and other discarded paint materials from Project site.
B.
Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
C.
Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.
3.4
MATERIAL SCHEDULE
A.
All paint and stain products must meet the 2009 State of Ohio EPA VOC regulations for paints and coatings.
B.
Exterior Metal Work: Includes hollow metal doors, metal stairs, pipe hand and guard rails, lintels, bollards, overhead doors (exterior face), exposed flashing, roof mounted scuttles, vents, exhausts, air intakes and hatches, utility meters, pipes and conduits, roof access ladders, and miscellaneous metals requiring finish treatment. 1. 1 coat Pro-Cryl Universal Primer @ 3 mils. 2. 2 coats A-100 Exterior Latex Gloss @ 1.3 mils.
C.
Exterior Galvanized Steel: Including hollow metal door frames, lintels, gutters, downspouts and scuppers, dumpster gate frame and posts, metal hat vents and exposed unfinished flashing and vents. (TEST REQUIRED BY THE MANUFACTURER FOR SURFACE PREPARATION COMPLETION). 1. 1 coat Pro-Cryl Universal Primer @ 3 mils. 2. 2 coats A-100 Exterior Latex Gloss @ 1.3 mils.
D.
Exterior Standard Concrete Masonry Units: Painted finish. 1. 1 coat Loxon Block Surfacer @ 8 mils. 2. 2 coats A-100 Exterior Latex Satin @ 1.3 mils.
E.
Exterior Concrete Walls: Painted finish. 1. 1 coat Loxon Masonry Primer @ 3.6 mils. 2. 2 coats A-100 Exterior Latex Satin @ 1.3 mils.
PAINTING
099100 - 7
F.
NEW BUILDING FOR 01/13/12 LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Exterior Wood: Painted finish. Includes soffits, siding and trim, dumpster gates, fencing, sign posts, doors. 1. 1 coat A-100 Exterior Latex Primer @ 2.3 mils. 2. 2 coats A-100 Exterior Latex Satin @ 1.3 mils.
G.
Exterior Gypsum Soffit: Painted finish. 1. 1 coat A-100 Exterior Latex Primer @ 1.4 mils. 2. 2 coats A-100 Exterior Latex Satin @ 1.3 mils.
H.
Exterior Composite Siding, Soffit and Trim: Painted finish. 1. Spot prime factory prime coat with Loxon Masonry Primer. 2. 2 coats A-100 Exterior Latex Satin @ 1.3 mils.
I.
Exterior Decorative Metal Railings and Balusters: Painted finish. Products by Sherwin Williams. 1. 1 coat Macropoxy 646 FC @ 7 mils. 2. 2 coats Hi-Solids Polyurethane @ 3.0 mils.
J.
Exterior Plastic: Including conduit risers and exposed rain drainage system piping and fittings. 1. 1 coat DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish @ 2.5 mils. 2. 1 coat DTM Acrylic Gloss Coating @ 2.5 mils.
K.
Interior Metal Work: Painted finish. Includes hollow metal doors and frames, wood and hollow metal door vision frames, counter shutters, guides and hoods, stair structure, risers, handrails and guardrails, balusters and railings, access ladders, elevator entrance frames, fire extinguisher cabinets, access panels, prime coated panels, registers and grilles, prefinished ceiling registers, grilles, and light fixture enclosures and miscellaneous metals requiring finish treatment. 1. 1 coat DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish @ 2.5 mils. 2. 2 coats ProClassic Waterborne Semi-Gloss @ 1.4 mils.
L.
Interior Gypsum Board: Standard painted finish. Includes walls, soffits and ceilings. 1. 1 coat PrepRite 200 Latex Primer @ 1.1 mils. 2. 2 coats PRO-MAR 200 Interior Latex Eg-Shel @ 1.6 mils.
M.
Interior Gypsum Board with Vapor Retardant Finish. 1. 1 coat SF-1 B72W1 @ 2.0 mils. 2. 2 coats Promar 200 eg-shel @ 1.6 mils.
N.
Interior New Standard Concrete Masonry Units: Painted finish. 1. 1 coat PrepRite Block Filler @ 8.0 mils. (spot prime existing where required) 2. 2 coats PRO-MAR 200 Interior Latex Eg-Shel @ 1.6 mils.
O.
Interior Concrete Block with Vapor Retardant Finish. 1. 1 coat B49W30 @ 2.0 mils. 2. 2 coats Promar 200 eg-shel @ 1.6 mils.
P.
Interior Concrete/Gypsum Board Ceilings: Painted textured finish. 1. 1 coat PrepRite 200 Latex Primer @ 1.1 mils. 2. 1 coat Triko "Aristex" medium grade with color added. Magnum Products V-Ruco 1000 and USG Imperial QT Spray E-Z Texture-PS are also acceptable.
PAINTING
099100 - 8
Q.
NEW BUILDING FOR 01/13/12 LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Interior Wood: Painted finish. Includes door, base, wall and ceiling trim, doors and frames, shelving, and telephone, data and electrical panel backer boards. 1. 1 coat PrepRite Classic Latex Primer @ 1.6 mils. 2. 2 coats ProClassic Waterbased Satin @ 1.3 mils.
R.
Interior Wood: Transparent stained finish. Includes door, base, wall and ceiling trim, doors and frames, windows and grilles, and handrails and balusters. 1. 1 coat Minwax 250 Stain. 2. 2 coat Wood Classics Varnish Gloss @ 1.3 mils. 3. 2 coat Wood Classics Water Based Poly Varnish Satin @ 1.3 mils.
S.
Interior Concrete Ceilings, Ductwork and Conduits: Painted finish. 1. 1 coat Pro-Cryl Universal Primer @ 3.0 mils (steel, alum., galvanized). 2. 1 coat Heavy Duty Block Filler @ 10.0-18.0 mils (concrete). 3. 2 coats B42 Waterbased Dryfall Flat or Eg-shel @ 4.0 mils.
T.
Interior Primed Coated Panels, Registers and Grilles within Walls: Paint to match adjacent surface.
U.
Visible portions of metal duct's internal surfaces behind air inlets and outlets without liner: Painted finish, flat black color.
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
The Owner reserves the right to engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor. 1. The testing agency will perform appropriate tests as required by the Owner
B.
If tests show material being used does not comply with specified requirements, Contractor shall remove non-complying paint from site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with rejected paint. If necessary, Contractor may be required to remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are incompatible.
END OF SECTION 099100
PAINTING
099100 - 9
10
SPECIALTIES
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 101300 - DIRECTORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY Section Includes: 1.
1.2 A.
1.3
Nonilluminated, message-strip directories.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Structural Performance: Directories shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7. ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For directories. attachments to other work. 1.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
D.
Message-Strip Schedule: Layout of each directory and each message strip showing letter size, font, spacing, indents, text copy, and graphics.
E.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For directories indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.4 A. 1.5 A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Maintenance Data: For illuminated directories to include in maintenance manuals. MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.
Message Strips: Full-size, blank strips equal to 10 percent of amount installed for each size indicated, but no fewer than 20 strips.
DIRECTORIES
101300 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1.6 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. 2.
B.
01/13/12
Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated; ASTM B 209 for sheet; ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063 for extruded shapes.
B.
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
C.
Clear Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3, and 6 mm thick unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Clear Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality q3, with exposed edges seamed before tempering, and 6 mm thick unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Clear Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), with Finish 1 (smooth or polished), and 6 mm thick unless otherwise indicated; colorless sheet with visible light transmittance of 92 percent measured per ASTM D 1003.
F.
Bronze-Tinted Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), with Finish 1 (smooth or polished), and 6 mm thick unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Translucent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), with Finish 1 (smooth or polished), and 6 mm thick unless otherwise indicated; white colored sheet of density required to produce uniform brightness and minimum halation effects.
H.
Opaque Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), with Finish 1 (smooth or polished), and 6 mm thick unless otherwise indicated; colors as indicated.
I.
Fasteners: Provide screws, bolts, and other fastening devices made from same material as items being fastened. Provide types, sizes, and lengths to suit installation conditions. Use security fasteners where exposed to view.
DIRECTORIES
101300 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2.2 A.
01/13/12
MESSAGE-STRIP DIRECTORIES Nonilluminated, Message-Strip Directory by APCO Graphics, Inc. form the basis-ofdesign. Products with comparable designs, materials, performance characteristics and finishes by the following manufacturers are also acceptable: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Allenite Signs; division of Allen Marking Products, Inc. ASI-Modulex. Best Sign Systems, Inc. Desk & Door Nameplate Co. Nelson-Harkins Industries. Poblocki Sign Company. Tablet & Ticket Co. (The). Visiontron Corp. Vomar Products, Inc.
B.
Coordinate similar design with interior room signage if possible. Final sections of directory to be by the Owner.
C.
Factory-fabricated unit consisting of changeable message strips held in place by retainer frame enclosed in manufacturer's standard 1-1/2-to-2-inch-deep perimeter frame; with aluminum-sheet rear cover panel and glazed cover. 1.
Profiled Frame: Removable, clear acrylic sheet held in place by perimeter frame; with 4-inch-high, molded-opaque-acrylic or molded-fiberglass profiled frame at top and bottom. a. b. c.
d. 2.
Aluminum Finish: To be determined. a.
3.
Profiled-Frame Shape: To be determined. Profiled-Frame Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. Header Panel: Provide copy on top profiled frame that complies with requirements indicated on supplied by Architect at a later date for size, style, spacing, content, height, location, material, and colors of graphics. Divider Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
Changeable Message Strips: Applied-copy; to be determined dimension long strips. a. b. c. d. e. f.
DIRECTORIES
Message-Strip Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Message-Strip Height: To be determined. Letter Height: To be determined. Letter Style: As selected by Architect. Letter Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Letter Case: Capitals and lowercase.
101300 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 4.
2.3
01/13/12
Graphics Panel: Screen-printed graphics or vinyl graphics laminated to opaque acrylic sheet; held in place by interchangeable, interlocking plastic carrier.
FABRICATION
A.
Message-Strip Directories: Provide message strips for each carrier in entire directory.
B.
Provide hold-open arms for doors of top-hinged directories.
2.4
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
B.
Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
C.
Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install directories in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings. Keep perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation.
B.
Surface-Mounted Directories: Attach directories to wall surfaces with concealed clips, hangers, or grounds fastened at not more than 16 inches o.c. Secure both top and bottom of directories to walls.
C.
Comply with requirements specified elsewhere for connecting illuminated directories. After installation is complete, install new fluorescent lamps.
D.
Adjust directory doors to operate smoothly without warp or bind and so that contact points meet accurately. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.
E.
Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION 101300
DIRECTORIES
101300 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 101400 - SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2
SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Interior wall mounted restroom signs. 2. Interior wall mounted occupant load signs. 3. Interior wall mounted handicapped “Area of Rescue Assistance” signs. 4. Interior wall mounted stair exit signs. 5. Interior wall mounted room signs. 6. Interior way finding signs. 7. Signage accessories. SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, wiring diagrams, and attachments to other Work. 1. Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 2. Provide message list for each sign, including large-scale details of wording, lettering, and Braille layout. 3. Provide a schedule of signs using same reference numbers for details, openings or rooms as those indicated on Drawings.
C.
Samples: For each sign material indicated that involves color selection.
1.3 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Regulatory Requirements: 1. Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and with code provisions as adopted by authorities having jurisdiction. a. Character Proportions: Letters and numbers with a width-to-height ratio between 3:5 and 1:1, and a stroke-width-to-height ratio between 1:5 and 1:10. b. Character Height: Minimum 5/8", maximum 2". Minimum 3" at overhead signs (80" above finish floor). c. Raised and Braille Characters and Symbols: Letters and numerals raised 1/32", upper case sans serif type, and accompanied with Grade 2 raised Braille characters. Provide pictograms with the equivalent written description placed directly below the symbol. Border dimension of pictogram minimum 6" in height. d. Finish and Contrast: Characters and sign background with an eggshell, matte, or other non-glare finish. Characters and symbols with a contrast ratio of 70% or better with their background. e. Mounting Location and Height: Signs installed on the wall adjacent to the latch side of the door at a distance away from the door so that a person may approach within 3" of the signage without entering the door swing. Signs mounted at 60" above the finish floor to the sign center line.
SIGNAGE
101400 - 1
1.4 A.
1.5 A.
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE PROJECT CONDITIONS
01/13/12
The Drawings provide graphic depictions of sign type that include overall sizes, profiles, colors, detail requirements, lighting type and fixtures, and mounting requirements. Designs, profiles, sizes, styles, spacings, content, mounting heights and colors shall be maintained. Fabrication details by fabricator. WARRANTY Finish System and Component Warranties: Provide manufacturers’ standard forms in which manufacturers agree to repair finish or replace components that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes or component failure within their specified warranty periods 1. Warranty Period: As provided my manufacturer from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
INTERIOR TACTILE AND BRAILLE COPY SIGNS
A.
Raised Braille and copy plastic signs by Best Sign Systems, Inc. form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable materials, design and finishes by other manufacturers may be submitted to the Architect for review no later than ten (10) days prior to the Bid Date. Include samples and product data.
B.
All Interior Wall Mounted Signs: signs with text and raised or engraved symbols. 1. Sign Body: “Graphic Blast” MP plastic with two-color, scratch resistant, nonstatic, fire retardant, washable melamine surface laminate with non-glare surface and a tough brown phenolic core painted with a contrasting color after artwork has been engraved into the surface. 2. Type: “Standard Word & Picture”. 3. Font: To be determined, copy raised 1/32". 4. Braille: Grade 2. 5. Size: To be determined. 6. Color: Selected from manufacturer’s standard palette. 7. Mounting: Wall, adhesive tape, silicone or concealed fasteners.
C.
Interior Wall Mounted Public Restroom Signs: Graphics consistent with internationally accepted symbols in content and proportion, and include the equivalent written and Braille description directly below. Provide the following: 1. Handicapped Access "MEN". 2. Handicapped Access "WOMEN". 3. Handicapped Access "MEN" and "WOMEN".
D.
Interior Wall Mounted Public Occupant Load Signs: Per Ohio Building Code. 1. Graphics: None. 2. Text: “MAXIMUM NUMBER OF OCCUPANTS PERMITTED IN THIS ROOM IS ##”. Refer to the drawings for the occupant load number to be inserted into each sign. 3. Braille: None. Interior Wall Mounted Rescue Assistance Signs: "Just in Time Signs". 4. Model: "F".
SIGNAGE
101400 - 2
5. 6. 7.
NEW BUILDING FOR 01/13/12 LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Graphics: Handicapped wheelchair logo in content and proportion, with written text. Text: “AREA OF RESCUE ASSISTANCE” directly below graphics. Braille: Raised Braille text directly below written text.
E.
Interior Wall Mounted Stair Exit Signs: 1. Graphics: Stair symbol with arrow. 2. Text: "Exit" with the equivalent Braille description directly below.
F.
Interior Room Signs: 1. Text: 1) Room Name and Room Number for public rooms. 2) Apartment Identification for residential units. Verify the requirements with the Owner before ordering. 2. Braille: Raised Braille text directly below written text.
G.
Interior Way Finding Signs: 1. Text: 1) Range of unit numbers for the individual floors. 2) Verify the requirements with the Owner before ordering. 2. Braille: Raised Braille text directly below written text.
2.2
ACCESSORIES
A.
Mounting Methods: Use concealed fasteners, double-sided vinyl tape or silicone adhesive fabricated from materials that are not corrosive to sign material and mounting surface.
B.
Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work.
C.
Note Holders: Manufacturer's standard aluminum paper sheet holders.
2.3 A.
ALUMINUM FINISHES Clear Anodic Finish: Manufacturer's standard clear anodic coating, 0.018 mm or thicker, over a satin (directionally textured) mechanical finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.
INSTALLATION General: Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3" of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door. 3. Install area of rescue assistance and occupant load signs at noted locations.
SIGNAGE
101400 - 3
B.
NEW BUILDING FOR 01/13/12 LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Wall-Mounted Interior Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using methods indicated below: 1. Vinyl-Tape Mounting: Use double-sided foam tape to mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces. 2. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Use liquid-silicone adhesive recommended in writing by sign manufacturer to attach signs to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered surfaces. Use double-sided vinyl tape where recommended in writing by sign manufacturer to hold sign in place until adhesive has fully cured. 3. Mechanical Fasteners: Use non-removable mechanical fasteners placed through predrilled holes. Attach signs with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate as recommended in writing by sign manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 101400
SIGNAGE
101400 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
01/13/12
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2
SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Public washroom accessories. 2. Underlavatory guards. 3. Custodial accessories. SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Product Schedule: Indicate types, quantities, sizes and installation locations 1. Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings. 2. Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings.
C.
Warranty: Three (3) copies
1.3
WARRANTY
A.
Surface and Recessed Mounted Accessories: Manufacturer's written warranty against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from date of Substantial Completion.
B.
Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects within ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Public toilet accessories by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable materials, capacities, performance characteristics, and finishes by the following manufacturers are also acceptable. 1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bradley Corporation. 4. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO). 5. McKinney/Parker Washroom Accessories Corp.
B.
Underlavatory guards by Truebro, Inc. form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable materials, performance characteristics, and finishes by the following manufacturers are also acceptable. 1. Brocar Products, Inc.
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
102800 - 1
2.2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE PUBLIC TOILET ACCESSORIES SCHEDULE
01/13/12
A.
Model numbers listed for each item are those of the basis-of-design manufacturer noted above for that item.
B.
Accessory Schedule: 1. T-1 Mop Holder: B-223x24. 2. T-2 Grab Bar: B-6806x36. 3. T-3 Grab Bar: B-6806x42. 4. T-4 Toilet Paper Dispenser (double roll): B-76867. 5. T-5 Towel Dispenser: B-262, surface mounted. 6. T-6 Soap Dispenser (wall): B-2112. 7. T-7 Protective Pipe Covers: “Lav Guard”. 8. T-8 Mirror without Shelf: B-165x2436.
C.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, No. 4 finish (satin) unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Brass: ASTM B 19, ASTM B 16 or ASTM B 30 castings.
E.
Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366, 0.0359” minimum nominal thickness.
F.
Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G60.
G.
Chromium Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).
H.
Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, nominal 6.0 mm thick, with silvering, electroplated copper coating, and protective organic coating complying with FS DD-M-411.
I.
Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
J.
Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, tamper and theft resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed.
2.3 A.
FABRICATION Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six (6) keys to Owner's representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. 1. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to method in ASTM F 446.
B.
Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function properly. Replace damaged or defective items. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
102800 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
END OF SECTION 102800
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
102800 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 103100 - MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes custom or prefabricated gas-fired fireplaces and the following: 1. 2.
1.2 A.
Integral starting device and controls. Ceramic logs and installation accessories.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Appliance Compliance: 1. 2.
National Safety Standards: Tested and listed by Omni-Test Laboratories (Report No. 116-F-07-5) to ANSI Z21.50 - 2000 as vented gas fireplaces. Installation: a. b. c.
B. 1.3
Conform to local codes and current National Fuel Gas Code, ANSI Z223.1 Electrical Wiring: Comply with the National Electrical Code ANSI/NFPA 70 (latest edition). Do not alter or modify appliance or its components construction. Modification or alteration may void unit warranty, certification and listings.
Gas Log Sets: Certified to ANSI Z21.60.1996/CGA 2.26.1996 standard for installation in the USA. SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of fireplace and accessory required.
B.
Shop drawings showing complete fabrication and installation details, unit sizes, required clearances and utility connections.
C.
Three (3) copies of manufacturer's warranty and installation instructions.
1.4 A.
WARRANTY Prefabricated gas-fired fireplaces and accessories warranted to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
CUSTOM GAS-FIRED FIREPLACES Custom constructed surround fireplace. Provide gas-fired vent-free loft burner by White Mountain Hearth (Empire Comfort Systems) form the basis-of-design. Provide all components required for a custom application so to provide a safe and operational
MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES
103100 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR 01/13/12 LANE AVENUE MIXED USE fireplace. Products with comparable materials and performance characteristics by other manufacturers may be submitted to the Architect for review no later than ten (10) days prior to the Bid Date. 1. 2.
Type: Breckenridge “VFP-36-SB”, see through fireplace either flush face or louvered. Finish: Matt or flat black metal interior.
B.
Surround: STONE-1, Refer to the Drawings.
C.
Flue: none, vent-free.
D.
Gas Type: Natural gas.
E.
Gas Log Sets: Deluxe split oak log set with integral grate and gas burners. 1. 2.
Logs: Realistic ceramic fiber wood logs with rustic, partially peeled, deep textured bark with extra supply of glowing coals and embers. Controls: a. b.
Ignition: Electronic for natural gas. Oxygen depletion sensor (ODS).
F.
Options: Battery-operated remote control, thermostat remote, electric remote control, wall thermostat, or wall switch, verify requirements with the Owner.
G.
Sealant: Manufacturer's standard.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install fireplaces where shown and according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Prior to start of installation, inspect adjacent installed work and verify that such work is completed to the point where installation may properly commence.
C.
Coordinate installation of electrical and gas utilities.
D.
Test entire assembly and check damper controls, safety damper, and overall unit operation. Repair or replace defective components.
3.2 A.
DEMONSTRATION Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fireplaces. Review emergency provisions and train Owner's personnel in procedures to follow in identifying sources of operational failures or malfunctions.
END OF SECTION 103100 MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES
103100 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES
01/13/12
103100 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 104400 - FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following: 1. Portable fire extinguishers. 2. Fire-protection cabinets. 3. Mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.
B.
See painting Division 09 Section “Painting” for field painting of cabinets.
C.
See Division 21 Section "Fire-Suppression Standpipes" for hose systems, racks, valves, valve cabinets, standpipes and fire hose systems in cabinets.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification. 2. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Include door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, panel style, and details of installation.
B.
Samples: For each exposed cabinet finish.
C.
Maintenance data.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."
B.
Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements of ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.
1.4
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.
B.
Apply decals on field-painted fire-protection cabinets after painting is complete.
1.5 A.
WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of portable fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
104400 - 1
2.
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers. Warranty Period: Six (6) years from date of Substantial Completion.
01/13/12
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
2.2
MANUFACTURERS Fire extinguishers, cabinets and extinguisher mounting brackets by Larsen’s Manufacturing Co. form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable materials, performance characteristics and finishes by manufacturers listed below are also acceptable. 1. Amerex Corporation. 2. Ansul Incorporated. 3. Badger Fire Protection. 4. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. 5. General Fire Extinguisher Corporation. 6. JL Industries, Inc. 7. Kidde Fyrnetics. 8. Potter Roemer. 9. Watrous. PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A.
Model: “MP Series”, multipurpose dry-chemical type with fluidized and siliconized mono ammonium phosphate powder, UL-rated as scheduled, in enameled-steel container. Color: Red. 1. FE-1: “MP10”, 4-A:80-B:C, 10-lbs nominal capacity, in semirecessed cabinets in nonrated walls, and at surface mounted cabinets and wall locations. 2. FE-2: “MP5”, 2-A:10-B:C, 5-lbs nominal capacity, in semirecessed cabinets mounted in rated walls.
B.
Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated. 1. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B.
2.3
FIRE-PROTECTION CABINETS
A.
Interior Fire Extinguisher Cabinets: Surface and semi-recessed mounted cabinets “Architectural Series Vertical Duo” with full clear tempered or laminated safety glass in door, round cabinet trim and standard white baked painted finish. 1. FEC-1: “Model 2409-6R" with 2½” rolled edge trim. Semirecessed mounted in interior nonrated walls. 2. FEC-2: “Model FS2409-R3” fire-rated with 2½” rolled edge trim and integral “Flame Shield” option. Semirecessed mounted in interior rated (2 hour maximum) walls.
B.
Exterior mounted fire extinguisher cabinets by Cato form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable materials, performance characteristics and finishes may be submitted to the Architect for review at least ten (10) days prior to Bid Date
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
104400 - 2
C.
NEW BUILDING FOR 01/13/12 LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Fire Extinguisher Cabinets: (Parking Garage) 1. Location: Exterior. 2. Model: "Island Chief". 3. Size: As required for 10 lbs extinguishers. 4. Color: White. 5. Cabinet: High-density, injection-molded polystyrene with ultra-violet inhibitors. 6. Face Panel: White PETG pull panel. 7. Labels: a. Sides: Two (2) "CL-401" with black fire extinguisher graphic and vertical red FIRE" text. 8. Face Panel: One (1) CL-416a with "Warning - Tampering…is a Felony" illustrated panel label. 9. FE-1: “MP10”, 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lbs nominal capacity, in semirecessed cabinets in nonrated walls, and at surface mounted cabinets and wall locations.
D.
Cabinet Material: Pre-finished enameled-steel sheet. Color: White. 1. Final paint color per Division 09 Section “Painting”.
E.
Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. 1. Provide projecting door pull and friction latch. 2. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to open 180 degrees.
2.4
MOUNTING BRACKETS
A.
Surface Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish. 1. Model: “B-2”, steel. 2. Color: Red.
B.
Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. 1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface. 2. Orientation: Vertical.
2.5
MATERIALS
A.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
B.
Transparent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), with polished finish.
2.6 A.
FABRICATION Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints and grind smooth.
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
104400 - 3
1.
NEW BUILDING FOR 01/13/12 LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.0428” thick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8” thick, fire-barrier material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.
B.
Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum ½” thick. 2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.
C.
Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semirecessed cabinets will be installed.
B.
Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units.
C.
Prepare recesses for semirecessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.
D.
Install fire-protection specialties in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Cabinets: Mount at 48” above finish floor to door handle centerline. 2. Surface Mounted Extinguishers: Mount at 48” above finish floor to extinguisher handle centerline.
E.
Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten fire-protection cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire-protection cabinets. If wall thickness is not adequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fireprotection cabinets. 2. Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels. 3. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and plumb.
F.
Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated.
G.
Identification: Apply decals at locations indicated.
H.
Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral latching devices operate properly.
I.
Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair.
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
104400 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
END OF SECTION 104400
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
104400 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 105500 - POSTAL SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1.
1.2
Mailboxes, parcel lockers and collection box.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, identification sequence for compartments, and attachments to other work.
C.
Samples: For each exposed finish.
D.
Product certificates, including written approval by Postmaster General.
E.
Maintenance data.
1.3 A. 1.4 A.
1.5 A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver lock keys to Owner with a record of each corresponding lock and key number. WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of postal specialties that fail in materials or workmanship within [five]
years from date of Substantial Completion. EXTRA MATERIALS Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.
Key Blanks: Furnish not less than one (1) for every locks or fraction thereof, of each type of compartment door lock installed.
POSTAL SPECIALTIES
105500 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
MANUFACTURERS Custom horizontal mailboxes by Salsbury Industries form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable materials, performance criteria and finishes by other manufacturers noted are also acceptable. 1.
2.2 A.
AF Florence Manufacturing Company.
MAILBOXES, PARCEL LOCKERS AND COLLECTION BOX USPS-Approved, Front-Loading, Mailboxes, Parcel Lockers and Collection Box: Consisting of multiple compartments enclosed within recessed wall box. Provide access to compartments for distributing incoming parcels from front of unit. Provide access to each compartment for removing parcels by swinging compartment door. Comply with USPS-B-1116A. 1. 2. 3.
Requirements: (108) residential tenants and (8) office tenants. Model: 3716D-20. Type: "USPS-STD-4C”, Recessed wall mounted, front loading unit. a.
Compartments: 1) 2) 3) 4)
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
12.
Total of (20) 4C horizontal mailboxes. Total of (2) parcel box. Total of (1) collection box. Total of (1) blank compartment.
Size: 31.125” wide by 56.75” high by 17” deep. Location: Lobby, refer to the Drawings for location. Lock: USPS-1172 910A, 3 keys each lock. Box Identification: Engraved identifier. Hinges: Continuous. Trim: Included with unit and solid rear cover. Compartment Enclosure: Fabricated from aluminum sheet with configuration of compartments as indicated on Drawings. Compartment Doors and Frames: Fabricated from aluminum sheet. Equip each compartment door with lock, identification, and concealed, full-length, continuous, flush hinge on right side. a. Compartment Identification: Engraved into face of compartment door. b. Compartment Door Locks: Two-key security system in which control key provides access to parcel-locker key, and parcel-locker key opens compartment and is retained once compartment is opened. Material and Finish: Aluminum, clear finish.
POSTAL SPECIALTIES
105500 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2.3
01/13/12
FABRICATION
A.
Preassemble postal specialties in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. Form postal specialties to required shapes and sizes, with true lines and angles, square, rigid, and without warp, with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges and corners free of sharp edges and burrs, and safe to touch.
B.
Where dissimilar metals will contact each other, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Metal Protection: Where aluminum and copper alloys will contact grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation.
B.
Final acceptance depends on compliance with USPS requirements.
C.
Collection Boxes: Install collection boxes with bottom of hopper doors not more than 60 inches above finished floor.
D.
Adjust doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Arrange for USPS personnel to test collection boxes after installation according to USPS regulations.
B.
Obtain written final approval from USPS postmaster that authorizes mail collection.
END OF SECTION 105500
POSTAL SPECIALTIES
105500 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE SECTION 105623 - WIRE STORAGE SHELVING
01/13/12
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2
SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Coated wire ventilated shelving and accessories. 2. Adjustable shelf systems. 3. Storage accessories. 4. Installation materials. SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data and Reports: For each type of product indicated. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, finishes and installation details. 2. Include rated capacities, furnished specialties and accessories. 3. Include material schedule using same scheduling sequence, format and room numbers as in Drawings. 4. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that they comply with requirements.
B.
Samples: For each type of shelf unit and accessory with required exposed finish.
C.
Maintenance Data: For coated wire ventilated shelving and accessories to include in maintenance manuals.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain coated wire ventilated shelving and accessories through one source from a single manufacturer.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide identical to those of tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency.
C.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide coated wire shelving with the following surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
D.
Mockups: Build One (1) mockup to verify selections made under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution, and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Construct mockup at location determined by Construction Manager.
WIRE STORAGE SHELVING
105623 - 1
a. b.
E. 1.4 A.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with Project requirements. WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of shelving system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a.
B.
NEW BUILDING FOR 01/13/12 LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups, unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing.
Deterioration of coating, metals and other materials beyond normal use.
Warranty Period: One (1) year from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
MANUFACTURERS Coated wire shelving and accessories by ClosetMaid form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable materials and performance characteristics by manufacturers listed are also acceptable: 1.
2.2 A.
Rubbermaid.
COATED WIRE SHELVING AND ACCESSORIES Coated Wire Shelving Systems: 1.
"12" Super Slide" clothing closet and storage shelving.
B.
Steel Wire: Basic cold drawn, Grade C-1006; average tensile strength 100,000 psi coated.
C.
Wire Coating: Proprietary heavy-duty polyvinyl chloride (PVC) formula with resin, plasticizers, stabilizers, pigments and other additives. 1. 2. 3.
D.
Thickness: 9 to 11 mils. Classification: No ingredients listed as hazardous per OSHA 29CFR1910.0017. Color: White.
Mounting Hardware: Manufacturer's standard components for shelving installation to drywall without requiring mounting to concealed wall blocking. 1.
Fasteners: Type, length and size required for installation conditions.
WIRE STORAGE SHELVING
105623 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE E.
01/13/12
Accessories: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Wall and Pole Clips. End and Support Brackets. Poles and Standards. Shelf Brackets. Shelf Caps.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.
EXAMINATION Examine substrates, areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1.
3.2 A.
INSTALLATION Install shelving plumb and level at heights indicated in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 1. 2. 3.
B.
Drill holes where required using sharp bit, do not punch. Install wall clips, standards and brackets properly spaced and secured to substrate. Install standards vertical and plumb.
Cut shelves to fit installation conditions. Cap exposed ends. 1.
C.
Begin installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Set units level and aligned with adjacent units where required.
Upon completion of installation, clean all surfaces that have become soiled during installation. Remove all debris and excess materials
END OF SECTION 105623
WIRE STORAGE SHELVING
105623 - 3
11
EQUIPMENT
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 113100 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2
SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Cooking equipment including ranges. 2. Ventilation range hoods. 3. Refrigerator/freezers. 4. Icemakers. 5. Dishwashers. 6. Clothes washers and dryers. SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rough-in diagrams and dimensions, and utility requirements.
B.
Appliance Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
C.
Maintenance data.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
C.
UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electrical components required as part of residential appliances that are listed and labeled by UL and that comply with applicable NEMA standards.
D.
Gas-Burning Appliances: Comply with ANSI Z21 Series standards.
E.
Residential Appliances: Comply with NAECA standards.
F.
AHAM Standards: 1. Refrigerators and Freezers: Total volume and shelf area ratings certified according to ANSI/AHAM HRF-1.
G.
Energy Ratings: Provide residential appliances that carry labels indicating energy-cost analysis (estimated annual operating costs) and efficiency information as required by the Federal Trade Commission.
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
113100 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1.4 A.
01/13/12
WARRANTY Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of each appliance specified agrees to repair or replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Electric Range: One-year warranty for in-home service on entire appliance. 2. Microwave Oven: Five-year warranty for in-home service on entire appliance. 3. Refrigerator/Freezer: One-year warranty for in-home service on entire appliance. 4. Dishwasher: One-year warranty for in-home service on entire appliance. 5. Clothes Washer: One-year warranty for in-home service on entire appliance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
2.2
MANUFACTURERS Kitchen equipment by GE Appliances form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable materials, operational and performance characteristics, and finishes by the noted manufacturers for each piece of equipment are also acceptable. COOKING APPLIANCES
A.
Range: Freestanding 30" Self-cleaning. 1. Model: GE JB640SRSS. 2. Type: Standard, ceramic-glass cooktop with electric oven. 3. Cooktop: Four electric burner elements. 4. Oven: One electric. 5. Finish: Stainless steel. 6. Power: 40A.
B.
(Add) Alternate Range: Freestanding 30" Self-cleaning. 1. Model: GE PB905STSS. 2. Type: Standard, ceramic-glass cooktop with electric oven. 3. Cooktop: Five Ribbon electric burner elements. 4. Oven: One electric convection. 5. Finish: Stainless steel. 6. Power: 40A.
C.
Microwave / Range Hood: 1. Model: GE JVM1540SMSS. 2. Oven Capacity: 1.5 cu. ft. 3. Exhaust Hood: Two speed fan, nonvented, recirculating-type with filter 300 cfm. 4. Finish: Stainless steel. 5. Microwave Power: 950 watts. 6. Power: 15A.
D.
(Add) Alternate Microwave / Range Hood: 1. Model: GE PVM2170SRSS. 2. Oven Capacity: 2.1 cu. ft. 3. Exhaust Hood: Four speed fan, externally vented, with filter 400 cfm. 4. Finish: Stainless steel. 5. Microwave Power: 1000 watts. 6. Power: 15A.
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
113100 - 2
2.3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE REFRIGERATION APPLIANCES
A.
Refrigerator/Freezer: 1. Model: GE GTS18SCXSS. 2. Type: Freestanding, 17.9 cu. Ft., two-door with freezer on top. 3. Storage Capacity: a. Fresh Food Compartment Volume: 12.9 cu. ft. b. Freezer Volume: 5.04 cu. ft. c. Shelf Area: 21.7 sq. ft. 4. Front Panel: Stainless-steel door front. 5. Defrosting: Frost-free. 6. Interior Cabinet Liners: ABS thermoplastic-copolymer. 7. Color: Stainless steel. 8. Options: Ice maker. 9. Power: 15A.
B.
(Add) Alternate Refrigerator/Freezer: 1. Model: GE PSSS3RGZSS. 2. Type: Freestanding, 23.1 cu. Ft., two-door with freezer on top. 3. Storage Capacity: a. Fresh Food Compartment Volume: 15.86 cu. ft. b. Freezer Volume: 7.26 cu. ft. c. Shelf Area: 23.8 sq. ft. 4. Front Panel: Stainless-steel door front. 5. Defrosting: Frost-free. 6. Interior Cabinet Liners: ABS thermoplastic-copolymer. 7. Color: Stainless steel. 8. Options: Ice maker. 9. Power: 15A.
2.4 A.
2.5
01/13/12
DISPOSER Disposer: 1. Model: Insinkerator. 2. Motor: 1/3 HP. 3. Power: 115V. CLEANING APPLIANCES
A.
Dishwasher: 1. Model: GE GSD4060VSS. 2. Type: Under the counter, 24 inches. 3. Front Panel: Stainless-steel door front. 4. Finish: Stainless Steel. 5. Power: 6.2A. 6. Energy Star Rated.
B.
(Add) Alternate Dishwasher: 1. Model: GE PDWT280VSS. 2. Type: Under the counter, 24 inches with hidden controls. 3. Front Panel: Stainless-steel door front. 4. Finish: Stainless Steel. 5. Power: 9.1A.
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
113100 - 3
6. C.
2.6
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Energy Star Rated.
01/13/12
Clothes: Combination Washer and Dryer. 1. Model: GE GTUP270EMWW. 2. Type: Washer 3.3 cu. ft, Dryer 5.9 cu. ft. 3. Size: 27 inches wide. 4. Finish: White-on-white. 5. Power: 30A. ADA APPLIANCES
A.
Handicap Range: Slide-in 30" Self-cleaning. 1. Model: 2. Type: Standard, ceramic-glass cooktop with electric oven. 3. Cooktop: Four electric burner elements. 4. Oven: One electric. 5. Finish: Stainless steel. 6. Power: 40A.
B.
Handicap Microwave Oven: 1. Model: To be determined. 2. Oven Capacity: 3. Microwave Power: 4. Power: 13A.
C.
Handicap Refrigerator/Freezer: 1. Model: To be determined. 2. Type: Freestanding, "Energy Star" side-by-side refrigerator/freezer. 3. Storage Capacity: a. Fresh Food Compartment Volume: b. Freezer Volume: 4. Front Panel: Stainless-steel door front. 5. Defrosting: Frost-free. 6. Interior Cabinet Liners: ABS thermoplastic-copolymer. 7. Color: Stainless steel. 8. Power: 15A.
D.
Handicap Dishwasher: 1. Model: To be determined. 2. Type: Tall Tub, under the counter, 24 inches. 3. Front Panel: Stainless-steel door front. 4. Finish: Stainless Steel. 5. Power: 9.1A.
E.
Handicap Floor Washer / Dryer Combo: 1. Model: To be determined. 2. Type: Freestanding, "Energy Star" combination washer-dryer. 3. Combination Washer-Dryer: Washer with integral electric dryer, 27 inches wide. 4. Venting: Ventless condensing drying system. 5. Finish: White. 6. Power: 115V.
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
113100 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are completely concealed.
B.
Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment.
C.
Utilities: Refer to Divisions 22 and 26 for plumbing and electrical requirements.
D.
Run all units through all cycles to verify proper operation and watertight installation.
E.
Instruct Owner's personnel on proper operating, maintenance, and trouble shooting procedures. Provide all standard operating manuals for each piece of equipment.
END OF SECTION 113100
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
113100 - 5
12
FURNISHINGS
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 122413 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1.
1.2
Manually operated roller window shades.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, details of installation, operational clearances, and relationship to adjoining Work. 1.
Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
C.
Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceilingmounted items.
D.
Samples: For each exposed finish and for each color and texture required.
E.
Window Treatment Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
F.
Maintenance data.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products passing flame-resistance testing according to NFPA 701 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Comply with WCMA A 100.1.
1.4
WARRANTY
A.
Provide manufacturer's written material warranty from date of Substantial Completion.
B.
System: Limited lifetime warranty no to exceed twenty-five (25) years from date of Substantial Completion.
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
122413 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
ROLLER SHADES Roller shades by MechoShade Systems, Inc. form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable designs, materials, performance characteristics and color by the following manufacturers are also acceptable. 1.
SOS (Sun or Shade) a division of Inside Outfitters, Inc., Dublin, Ohio.
B.
System: “Mecho 5”.
C.
Locations: Manual Roller shades are to be provided where shown on the Drawings.
D.
Shade Band Material: PVC-coated fiberglass yarns 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Style: 6000 Series, “EuroTwill”, reversible weave. Colors: To be determined. Width: Custom per recommendation of the manufacturer. Composition: 85 percent PVC (coating), 15 percent polyester (yarn). Material Openness Factor: 3 percent. Fire Resistant: NFPA 701-2004: pass.
E.
Rollers: Extruded-aluminum tube of diameter and wall thickness required to support and fit internal components of operating system and the weight and width of shade band material without sagging; designed to be easily removable from support brackets. Capacity for one or two roller shade band(s) per roller.
F.
Direction of Roll: Regular, from back of roller.
G.
Mounting Brackets: Galvanized or zinc-plated steel. Provide center bracket to be provided as needed to suit span, shade weight and indicated mounting type.
H.
Bottom Bar: Extruded aluminum concealed, by pocket of shade material, internal-type.
I.
Mounting: Inside of frame as indicated on Drawings.
J.
Shade Operation: Manual; with continuous-loop bead-chain, adjustable slip clutch to control the rate of fall from free running zero friction factor to a factor of 100 percent.
2.2 A.
ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F: 1.
Shade Units Installed Outside Jambs: Largest Width and length as possible, with terminations between shades of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical separations between openings.
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
122413 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
B.
Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of shade, for supporting roller, and operating hardware and for hardware position and shade mounting method indicated.
C.
Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to shade hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting substrate; and supporting shades and accessories under conditions of normal use.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
ROLLER SHADE INSTALLATION
A.
Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions, and located so shade band is next to interior face of glass frame. Allow clearances for window operation hardware.
B.
Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range.
C.
Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.2 A.
DEMONSTRATION Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain roller shades. Refer to Division 01 Section Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 122413
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
122413 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 123530.13 - KITCHEN CASEWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following: 1. Factory fabricated kitchen and vanity wall and base cabinets. 2. Matching filler panels and scribe moldings. 3. Accessories.
B.
Refer to Division 06 Section “Interior Architectural Woodwork” for custom countertops and backsplashes.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For cabinets and cabinet hardware.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans and elevations. Show materials, finishes, filler panels, molding, hardware, cutouts for plumbing fixtures, and accessories. 1. Cabinets: Verify dimensions of installation areas by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Show fillers and scribes if necessary.
C.
Samples: For each exposed finish. Include full range of colors.
1.3 A.
1.4 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Quality Standards: 1. Cabinets: KCMA A161.1. a. KCMA Certification: Provide cabinets with KCMA's "Certified Cabinet" seal affixed in a semiexposed location of each unit and showing compliance with the above standard. WARRANTY Provide manufacturer’s lifetime limited warranty against defects in materials or workmanship starting at the date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
MANUFACTURERS Factory fabricated wall and base cabinets by Armstrong form the basis-of-design. Manufacturers offering products with comparable materials, operational and performance characteristics, finishes by the following manufacturers are also acceptable. 1. Merillate Wood Cabinets. 2. Kraftmaid.
KITCHEN CASEWORK
123530.13 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
B.
Cabinets: 1. Model: “Premier Series”, Rutledge. 2. Door Style: Full overlay (5-piece Drawer). 3. Species: Maple. 4. Finish: Espresso. 5. Front Frame: 3/4" Thick kiln dried solid hardwood (wood door styles) or thermofoil vinyl wrapped solid finger jointed lumber or LVL linear veneer lumber (thermofoil and laminate door styles). Mortise and tenon or bore and dowel construction frame joinery reinforced with glue and nail. Stiles 1 1/2" wide. Mulls 3" wide. Rails 1 3/4" wide. Stiles and top and bottom rails dadoed to receive ends, tops and bottoms. 6. End Panels: Nominal 1/2" thick (12mm) wood based composite panel dadoed to receive tops and bottoms, with wood grained or white laminate on exterior surface. Maple grained or white laminate on interior surface. All end panels are inserted into dado in face frame and recessed 3/16". 7. Top/Bottom Panels: Nominal 1/2" thick (12mm) wood based composite panel with maple grained or white laminate on exterior and interior surfaces for wall cabinets and interior surface for base cabinets. Tops and bottoms are set into grooved end panels and front rails glued and stapled. Bottoms are supported at rear of base cabinet by nominal 1/2" thick (12mm) wood base composite panel. 8. Back Panel: Nominal 1/8" (3mm) hardboard with maple grained or white interior surface. Securely glued and stapled to end panels and hang rails. Back panels are fully captured on wall cabinets. 9. Shelves: Nominal 5/8" thick (15mm) wood based composite panel with maple grained or white laminate on both faces and matching edgeband on facing edge. Shelves are adjustable in all standard wall and base cabinets. 10. Toe Kick: Nominal 1/2" thick (12mm) unfinished wood based composite panel captured between end panels. Toe kick is 4" high and recessed 3 3/8". 11. Drawers: Nominal 1/2" thick (12mm) hardwood front, back and sides. Drawer bottoms are nominal1/4" thick (6mm) multi-ply hardwood inserted into dado in front, back and sides. All drawer parts glued and stapled together.
C.
Hardware: By Amstrong. 1. Style: BP19010-SS 2. Finish: Satin Nickel. 3. Hinges: Heavy duty, high quality steel, concealed 6-way adjustable hinge with self-closing feature. 4. Drawer Slides: Self-closing, positive-stop, full extension.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install casework without variations in plane of adjoining surfaces; use concealed shims. Where casework abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips, scribe strips, and moldings in finish to match casework face.
B.
Install casework level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8” in 8’.
C.
Fasten cabinets to adjacent units and to backing.
KITCHEN CASEWORK
123530.13 - 2
1. D.
NEW BUILDING FOR 01/13/12 LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not less than 24” o.c.
Adjust casework and hardware so doors and drawers are centered in openings and operate smoothly without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 123530.13
KITCHEN CASEWORK
123530.13 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 123640 - STONE COUNTERTOPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes stone countertops and the following: 1. 2.
1.2
Backsplashes and end splashes. Installation accessories.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each variety of stone and manufactured products.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, joint locations, cutouts and holes, and attachments to other work.
C.
Samples: For each stone type indicated.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
B.
Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each variety of stone from a single quarry with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. 1.
1.4 A.
Make stone slabs available for Architect to examine for appearance characteristics. Architect will select aesthetically acceptable slabs.
PROJECT CONDITIONS Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of construction to receive stone countertops by field measurements before fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
GRANITE Granite: Comply with ASTM C 615, refer to the Finish Schedule on the Drawings for type.
STONE COUNTERTOPS
123640 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE B.
Available Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, stone varieties that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.
Stone Suppliers and Fabricators: a. b. c.
C. 2.2 A.
ADHESIVES, GROUT, SEALANTS AND STONE ACCESSORIES Water-Cleanable Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3[, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24)]. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
Bonsal, W. R. Company. Bonstone Materials Corporation. C-Cure. Custom Building Products. Laticrete International, Inc. MAPEI Corp. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
Sealant for Countertops: Manufacturer's standard sealant of characteristics indicated below that comply with applicable requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" and will not stain the stone it is applied to. 1. 2. 3.
C.
Quarry Granite Fabricators - Groveport, Ohio. Buckeye Marble and Granite – Columbus, Ohio. Mont Granite – Columbus, Ohio.
Finish: Polished, match Architect's sample.
1.
B.
01/13/12
Single-component, neutral curing silicone sealant. Color: Clear. Use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Stone Sealer: Colorless, stain-resistant sealer that does not affect color or physical properties of stone surfaces, as recommended by stone producer for application indicated. 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.
Bostik Findley Inc. Custom Building Products. Hillyard, Inc. HMK Stone Care System. Miracle Sealants Company. Stone Care International Inc.
STONE COUNTERTOPS
123640 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE g. 2.3
01/13/12
Summitville Tiles, Inc.
STONE FABRICATION
A.
Select stone for intended use to prevent fabricated units from containing cracks, seams, and starts that could impair structural integrity or function.
B.
Fabricate stone countertops in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements indicated, including details on Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. 2.
3.
Dress joints straight and at right angle to face, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate molded edges with machines having abrasive shaping wheels made to reverse contour of edge profile to produce uniform shape throughout entire length of edge. Finish exposed faces of stone to comply with requirements indicated. Provide matching finish on exposed edges of countertops, splashes, and cutouts.
C.
Comply with recommendations in MIA's "Dimension Stone - Design Manual."
D.
Nominal Thickness: Provide thickness indicated, but not less than 3/4". Gage backs to provide units of identical thickness.
E.
Splashes: Provide 3/4" thick backsplashes and end splashes, unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Joints: Fabricate countertops without joints if at all possible.
G.
Joints: Fabricate countertops with minimum joints for joining in field, with joints at locations indicated and as follows: 1.
Sealant-Filled Joints: 1/16" in width.
H.
Edge Profile: Square with rounded top edge.
I.
Cutouts and Holes: 1.
2.
3.
Undercounter Fixtures: Make cutouts for undercounter fixtures in shop using template or pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves. Counter-Mounted Fixtures: Prepare countertops in shop for field cutting openings for counter-mounted fixtures. Mark tops for cutouts and drill holes at corners of cutout locations. Make corner holes of largest radius practical. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings, undercounter soap dispensers, and similar items.
STONE COUNTERTOPS
123640 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install countertops over plywood subtops with full spread of water-cleanable epoxy adhesive.
B.
General: Install countertops by adhering to supports with water-cleanable epoxy adhesive.
C.
Set stone to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings and Shop Drawings. Shim and adjust stone to locations indicated, with uniform joints of widths indicated and with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships.
D.
Space joints with 1/16" gap for filling with clear sealant. Use temporary shims to ensure uniform spacing. 1.
Clamp units to temporary bracing, supports, or each other to ensure that countertops are properly aligned and joints are of specified width.
E.
Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts to prevent damage while cutting. Use power saws with diamond blades to cut stone. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping.
F.
Install backsplash and end splash by adhering to wall with water-cleanable epoxy adhesive. Leave 1/16" gap between countertop and splash for filling with sealant. Use temporary shims to ensure uniform spacing.
G.
Apply sealant to joints and gaps specified for filling with sealant; comply with Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants". Remove temporary shims before applying sealant.
3.2
ADJUSTING, CLEANING AND SEALING
A.
In-Progress Cleaning: Clean countertops as work progresses. Remove adhesive and sealant smears immediately.
B.
Clean stone countertops not less than six days after completion of installation, using clean water and soft rags. Do not use wire brushes, acid-type cleaning agents, cleaning compounds with caustic or harsh fillers, or other materials or methods that could damage stone.
C.
Sealer Application: Apply stone sealer to comply with stone producer's and sealer manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 123640
STONE COUNTERTOPS
123640 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 129300 - SITE FURNISHINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes the following site and street furnishings: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
B. 1.2
Benches. Bicycle racks. Trash receptacles. Tree grates. Installation accessories.
Refer to Division 03 Section “Cast-in-place Concrete” for concrete materials. SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, finishes, field-assembly requirements and installation details.
B.
Samples: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
C.
Product Schedule: For site and street furnishings. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
D.
Maintenance Data: For site and street furnishings to include in maintenance manuals.
1.3 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Source Limitations: Obtain each type of site and street furnishings through one source from a single manufacturer of that material type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
BENCHES
A.
Exterior steel benches by DuMor Inc. form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable designs, materials, operational characteristics and finishes by other manufacturers may be submitted to the Architect for review at least ten (10) days prior to the Bid Date.
B.
Benches: “Bench 58”.
SITE AND STREET FURNISHINGS
129300 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
2.2
01/13/12
Dimensions: 31-13/16"h x 27-9/16"d x 73” length. Seating Surface: ¼” x 1-1/2” steel bar and 2-3/8” O.D. steel pipe. Supports: Cast iron. Unit Configuration: Curved seat and back. Materials: Steel. Finish: Zinc rich epoxy primer and TGIC polyester powder coat finish, manufacturer’s standard color to be selected by the Owner. Installation Method: Surface mounted expansion bolts, locations as indicated on Drawings.
BICYCLE RACKS
A.
Bicycle Racks by Fortin Iron Works (614-291-4342) form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable designs, materials, operational characteristics and finishes by other manufacturers may be submitted to the Architect for review at least ten (10) days prior to the Bid Date.
B.
Bicycle Racks: “BPB-32-DB”. 1. 2. 3.
2.3 A.
TRASH RECEPTACLES Trash receptacles by DuMor, Inc. form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable designs, materials, operational characteristics and finishes by other manufacturers may be submitted to the Architect for review at least ten (10) days prior to the Bid Date. 1.
B.
Unit Configuration: Post with arms to accept bike locks. Finish: Powder coated, color to be selected by the Owner. Installation Method: Surface mounted expansion bolts with cover plates, locations as indicated on Drawings.
Titan Manufacturing.
Trash Receptacles: “Receptacle 87” with bonnet top ash urn. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Capacity: 32 gallon. Top Edge: 5/8” diameter steel bar. Vertical Straps: 3/8” x 34/” steel bar and 3/8” x 1-1/4” steel bar. Reveal Strip: ¼” x 3” steel bar. Liner: 32 gallon plastic. Cover: 14 gauge spun steel with 10” diameter opening secured with vinyl-coated cable. Finish: TGIC polyester powder coat finish, manufacturer’s standard color to be selected by the Owner. Installation Method: Surface mounted expansion bolts, locations as indicated on Drawings.
SITE AND STREET FURNISHINGS
129300 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2.4
01/13/12
TREE GRATES
A.
Tree grates and guards by Neenah Foundry (800-558-5075) form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable designs, materials, operational characteristics and finishes by other manufacturers may be submitted to the Architect for review at least ten (10) days prior to the Bid Date.
B.
Tree Grates: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
2.5
Model: “Boulevard Collection #R-8811”. Size: 60" square with 30" diameter expandable tree opening. Slot Openings: ¼”. Weight: 456 pounds per set. Frame: As required to mount tree grates. Material: Gray Iron castings A.S.T.M. A-48, Class 35 or better. Finish: Blast cleaned, prime and paint if required by the Owner.
FABRICATION
A.
Metal Components: Form to required shapes and sizes with true, consistent curves, lines, and angles. Separate metals from dissimilar materials to prevent electrolytic action.
B.
Welded Connections: Weld connections continuously. Weld solid members with fulllength, full-penetration welds and hollow members with full-circumference welds. At exposed connections, finish surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness or unevenness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
C.
Pipes and Tubes: Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of handrail and railing components.
D.
Steel and Iron Components: Galvanized, galvanized and color coated, or color coated. Bare metal steel or iron components are not permitted except where noted otherwise.
E.
Exposed Surfaces: Polished, sanded, or otherwise finished; smooth all surfaces, free from burrs, barbs, splinters, and sharpness; all edges and ends rolled, rounded, or capped.
F.
Factory Assembly: Assemble components in the factory to the greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. Clearly mark units for assembly in the field.
2.6 A.
INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES Fasteners: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, size, length, grade and class required by field conditions.
SITE AND STREET FURNISHINGS
129300 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
B.
Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
C.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107.
D.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20.
E.
Finish Repair Paint: Match finish material and color.
nonstaining,
noncorrosive,
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for correct and level finished grade, mounting surfaces, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Unless otherwise indicated or required, install site and street furnishings after landscaping and paving have been completed.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Complete field assembly of site and street furnishings, where required. 1. 2.
3.3 A.
Install site furnishings level, plumb, true and securely anchored at locations indicated on Drawings. Verify posts are set and aligned at correct height and spacing.
CLEANING After completing site and street furnishing installation, inspect components. Remove spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finishes to match original finish or replace component.
END OF SECTION 129300
SITE AND STREET FURNISHINGS
129300 - 4
13
SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
14
CONVEYING SYSTEMS
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 142100 - ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SUMMARY A. This Section includes electric traction passenger and service elevators. 1. Elevator sill support angles and rail anchors. 2. Required permits and inspections. 3. Emergency telephone assistance service and equipment, (ADAAG) compliant. 4. New installation and maintenance services for twelve (12) months, each elevator. 5. A proposal to continue full maintenance and emergency repair services for five (5) years after the initial twelve month service period is complete for each elevator. 6. Factory-authorized demonstration, training and maintenance services, each elevator.
1.2
SUBMITTALS A. Data and Reports: 1. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes and similar information. 2. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoistway and pit, layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electrical service, as shown and specified, are adequate for elevator system being provided. 3. Operation and maintenance data. 4. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by authorities having jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use. 5. Installation service proposals for each elevator. 6. Warranty for each elevator. B.
Shop Drawings: Show plans, elevations, sections and large-scale details indicating variations from specified requirements, service at each landing, coordination with building structure, relationships with other construction, and locations of equipment and signals. Indicate variations from specified requirements, maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of support, and maximum and average power demands.
C. Samples: For each exposed finish. 1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Installer Qualifications: Elevator manufacturer or an experienced installer approved by elevator manufacturer who has completed elevator installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful inservice performance.
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
142100 - 1
B.
NEW BUILDING FOR 01/13/12 LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Accessibility Requirements: Comply with Section 4.10 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)."
C. All work inspected by appropriate state and local inspection agencies prior to use and Owner’s acceptance. D. All elevators supplied by the same manufacturer. 1.4
EMERGENCY TELEPHONE ASSISTANCE SERVICE A.
Service: The Owner will provide 24 hour emergency telephone assistance service for each elevator equipped with an emergency phone in compliance with "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG), Appendix A, Section 4.10.14.
B.
Communication Links: A phone line for each elevator will be provided by the Owner in the elevator’s equipment room. 1. Services that use cellular technology are responsible for providing and installing any equipment used as their communication link
C. Initial Service: Provide 24 hour emergency telephone assistance service for each elevator equipped with an emergency phone in compliance with "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG), Appendix A, Section 4.10.14 for twelve (12) months beginning on the date of Substantial Completion. The service includes the following capabilities: 1. Monitoring each elevator 24 hours per day. 2. Identifying each elevator individually. 3. Dispatching proper help to the affected elevator. 4. Maintaining constant contact with trapped passengers. 5. Providing service during a power failure, four (4) hours minimum. 6. Cost of this service is included in proposal for Work under this Section. D. Extended Service: Provide a proposal to continue full emergency telephone assistance services for two (2) years after the initial twelve month service period is complete. The service capabilities shall remain the same as the initial service. Deliver proposal to the Contractor for Owner’s review E. Communication Links: Services that use phone lines as their communication link will have access to a phone line installed in each elevator’s equipment room by the Owner. Services that use cellular technology are responsible for providing and installing any equipment used as their communication link 1.5
COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of sleeves, block outs and items embedded in concrete or masonry for elevator equipment. Furnish templates and installation instructions and deliver to Project site in time for installation. B.
Coordinate locations and dimensions of other work relating to electric traction elevators including pit ladders, sumps and floor drains in pits; entrance subsills; and electrical service, electrical outlets, lights and switches in pits and machine rooms.
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
142100 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1.6
01/13/12
WARRANTY A.
1.7
Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair, restore, or replace defective elevator work within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: One (1) year from date of Substantial Completion. TEMPORARY ELEVATOR SERVICE
A.
Should service of the elevators be required before completion and final acceptance, obtain permission in writing from the Owner and appropriate local inspection agency for each specific elevator and occurrence. Coordinate requests through the Contractor.
B. Provide and install protective frame, wall, floor and ceiling protection prior to use. 1.8
MAINTENANCE SERVICE A.
Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide one (1) year's full maintenance service by skilled employees of elevator Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A. Electric traction passenger and service elevators by Schindler Elevator Corp. form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable systems, materials, performance characteristics and finishes by manufacturers listed below are also acceptable. 1. KONE Inc. 2. Otis Elevator Co. 3. ThyssenKrupp Elevator.
2.2
PASSENGER ELEVATORS A. Elevators: Elevator No. 1. 1. Model: "400A". 2. Type: Electric traction machine-room less. 3. Total Travel: 55’-5 1/4". 4. Stops: Six (6) in line. 5. Pit Depth: 5’-0”. 6. Hoistway Plans: a. Lower Garage Level, Southeast Stair: Side entrance, front only, future back. b. First Level, Southeast Stair: Side entrance, front only. c. Second Level, Southeast Stair: Side entrance, front and back. d. Third Level, Southeast Stair: Side entrance, front and back. e. Fourth Level, Southeast Stair: Side entrance, front and back. f. Fifth Level, Southeast Stair: Side entrance, front and back.
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
142100 - 3
7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
12.
13.
14. 15. 16.
NEW BUILDING FOR 01/13/12 LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Rated Load: 3500 lbs. Rated Speed: 150 fpm. Operation System: Selective collective automatic operation. Auxiliary Operations: Battery-powered lowering. Car Enclosures: a. Car Frame: Steel, primed. b. Car Subfloor: Steel pan. c. Car Size: 6’-9 3/8" x 5’-6 7/8" x 7’-9". d. Door Opening: 3’-6" width x 7’-0" height. e. Front Walls: #4 Satin finish stainless steel with integral car door frames. f. Side and Rear Wall Panels: Plastic laminate panels adhesively applied to ½" fire-retardant-treated particleboard with #4 Satin finish stainless-steel vertical reveals and edge protection. 1) Laminate Color: To be determined. g. Flooring: POR. T per Division 09 Section “Tiling”. h. Base: None. i. Door Faces (interior): #4 Satin finish stainless-steel. j. Ceiling: “Halogen Downlight” suspended brushed stainless steel panels. k. Handrails Back and Side Walls: 1½” tubular, brushed satin stainless steel with #4 finish. l. Exhaust Fan: Two speed with key switch. m. Inspection Certificate Holder: #4 Satin finish stainless-steel frame with acrylic cover and sized to receive issued certificate. Hoistway Entrances: Manufacturer's standard hollow metal, horizontal sliding type with Underwriters Laboratories "B" labels, and consisting of support angles, frames, sills, doors, hanger supports, hanger covers, fascia plates and necessary hardware. a. Width: 42” b. Height: 84” c. Frame Size: Standard, refer to the Drawings. d. Type: Single-speed side opening. e. Frames and Doors: Hollow metal with primer finish. Provide self-supporting frames with reinforced head sections at gypsum board wall construction. f. Delete subparagraphs below not required; revise or add additional items to suit Project. g. Sills: Extruded aluminum, with grooved surface, ¼" thick. h. Retain subparagraph below for grouting door sills. i. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Signals: Stainless steel enclosure. All buttons and devices accessible to the handicapped and vandal proof. a. Hall station (intermediate) at each opening. b. Hall station with fire service key switch at selected level (terminal). c. Car position indicator at each opening, head mounted if space is available. Coordinate location with clearances to structure. d. Car direction lanterns, jamb mounted, vertical. e. One car operating panel adjacent to front door in each car. f. Car direction lantern in each car. Pad Hooks and Pads: One (1) set each elevator. Power Supply: 480 volts, 3 phase, 60 cycles, wye delta system with solid state starter. Elevator Sill Support Angles: Provided under this section. Size as required for installation conditions.
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
142100 - 4
17. 18. 19.
NEW BUILDING FOR 01/13/12 LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Rail Anchors: Manufacturer's standard, surface mounted to shaft wall. Machine room top to be both heated and cooled per the Mechanical Drawings. Shaft below not required to be heated or cooled. Additional Requirements: Refer to 2.4 this Section.
B. Elevators: Elevator No. 2. 1. Model: "3300". 2. Type: Electric traction machine-room less. 3. Total Travel: 55’-5 1/4". 4. Stops: Five (5) in line. 5. Pit Depth: 5’-0”. 6. Hoistway Plans: a. First Level, Northwest Stair: Side entrance, front only. b. Second Level, Northwest Stair: Side entrance, front only. c. Third Level, Northwest Stair: Side entrance, front only. d. Fourth Level, Northwest Stair: Side entrance, front only. e. Fifth Level, Northwest Stair: Side entrance, front only. 7. Rated Load: 2500 lbs. 8. Rated Speed: 150 fpm. 9. Operation System: Selective collective automatic operation. 10. Auxiliary Operations: Battery-powered lowering. 11. Car Enclosures: a. Car Frame: Steel, primed. b. Car Subfloor: Steel pan. c. Car Size: 6’-9 3/8" x 4’-4 7/8" x 7’-9". d. Door Opening: 3’-6" width x 7’-0" height. e. Front Walls: #4 Satin finish stainless steel with integral car door frames. f. Side and Rear Wall Panels: Plastic laminate panels adhesively applied to ½" fire-retardant-treated particleboard with #4 Satin finish stainless-steel vertical reveals and edge protection. 1) Laminate Color: To be determined. g. Flooring: POR. T per Division 09 Section “Tiling”. h. Base: None. i. Door Faces (interior): #4 Satin finish stainless-steel. j. Ceiling: “Halogen Downlight” suspended brushed stainless steel panels. k. Handrails Back and Side Walls: 1½” tubular, brushed satin stainless steel with #4 finish. l. Exhaust Fan: Two speed with key switch. m. Inspection Certificate Holder: #4 Satin finish stainless-steel frame with acrylic cover and sized to receive issued certificate. 12. Hoistway Entrances: Manufacturer's standard hollow metal, horizontal sliding type with Underwriters Laboratories "B" labels, and consisting of support angles, frames, sills, doors, hanger supports, hanger covers, fascia plates and necessary hardware. a. Width: 42” b. Height: 84” c. Frame Size: Standard, refer to the Drawings. d. Type: Single-speed side opening. e. Frames and Doors: Hollow metal with primer finish. Provide self-supporting frames with reinforced head sections at gypsum board wall construction. f. Delete subparagraphs below not required; revise or add additional items to suit Project. g. Sills: Extruded aluminum, with grooved surface, ¼" thick. ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
142100 - 5
13.
14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 2.3
NEW BUILDING FOR 01/13/12 LANE AVENUE MIXED USE h. Retain subparagraph below for grouting door sills. i. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Signals: Stainless steel enclosure. All buttons and devices accessible to the handicapped and vandal proof. a. Hall station (intermediate) at each opening. b. Hall station with fire service key switch at selected level (terminal). c. Car position indicator at each opening, head mounted if space is available. Coordinate location with clearances to structure. d. Car direction lanterns, jamb mounted, vertical. e. One car operating panel adjacent to front door in each car. f. Car direction lantern in each car. Pad Hooks and Pads: One (1) set each elevator. Power Supply: 480 volts, 3 phase, 60 cycles, wye delta system with solid state starter. Elevator Sill Support Angles: Provided under this section. Size as required for installation conditions. Rail Anchors: Manufacturer's standard, surface mounted to shaft wall. Machine room top to be both heated and cooled per the Mechanical Drawings. Shaft below not required to be heated or cooled. Additional Requirements: Refer to 2.4 this Section.
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide the following additional requirements for each elevator. B.
Emergency Communication System: Provide system that complies with ASME A17.1 and the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG)." 1. Operation: On activation, system dials preprogrammed number of monitoring station and identifies elevator location to monitoring station providing two-way emergency communication between the car and an emergency assistance service that is capable of summoning emergency personnel. 2. Design: Manufacturer’s standard with stainless steel finish. 3. System: Contained in flush-mounted cabinet with identification and instructions for use. a. Push-button without requiring voice activation. b. "Hands-free" two-way communication. c. Visual indicators to acknowledge call has been placed and that help is on the way. d. Raised letters and Braille equivalent. e. Built-in programmed automatic dialer. f. Connection to emergency telephone assistance service. g. Built-in battery backup power supply.
C. Fire Department Communication System: Provide telephone jack flush-mounted cabinet in each car and required conductors in traveling cable for fire department communication system specified in Divisions 27 and 28. D.
Emergency Car Light Power Unit: An emergency power unit employing a 12 or 6 volt sealed rechargeable battery and totally static circuits shall be provided to illuminate the elevator car and provide current to the emergency siren in the event of building power failure per ANSI code.
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
142100 - 6
E.
NEW BUILDING FOR 01/13/12 LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Door Reopening Devices: Door reopening devices with multi-beam pattern microprocessor-controlled, LED's with 154 or more criss-crossed beams projecting across car entrance. Interruption of one or more light beams causes doors to stop and reopen. 1. Nudging Feature: After car doors are prevented from closing for a predetermined adjustable time, through activating door reopening device, a loud buzzer shall sound and doors shall begin to close at reduced kinetic energy.
F. Hoistway Entrance Signs and Audible Signals: Raised text, Braille letter and numeral signs on each jamb at each floor that identifies the floor. Place written words above Braille word on each sign. 1. Letters and Numbers: 2" high and raised 1/32". 2. Braille: Grade II Braille, 5/8" high per ADAAG 4.10.5 3. Characters: Contrast with background. 4. Copy: GARAGE, "1 FIRST", "2 SECOND", "3 THIRD", "4 FOURTH" and "5 FIFTH" with Braille equivalent. 5. Audible Signals: Signals sound once for "UP and twice for "DOWN". G. Hoisting Machine: AC gearless hoisting machine including axial synchronous drive motor, direct current electro-mechanical brake and integral traction drive sheave mounted on base or bedplate. Electric drive motor designed for elevator service, developing high starting torque with low starting current. 1. Hoisting Machine Mounting: Incorporate isolation to minimize transmission of noise and/or vibration to building structure. 2. Machine Brake: Electrically released and spring applied with drive sheave accurately turned and grooved for quantity and size of hoist ropes applicable to required service. 3. Hoisting Machine: Machine-roomless, selected and sized by manufacturer for elevator capacity, speed and travel distances noted. H. Hoist Rope Deflecting Sheave: 1. Sheave located in machine room for ease of maintenance and supported by machine bedplate. 2. Sheave guard provided by elevator contractor and fitted in place at deflecting sheave. I.
Traction Steel Hoist Ropes: Size and number appropriate to insure proper wearing qualities, and in compliance with the factor of safety requirements of the ASME/ANSI A17.1 Safety Code for Elevators.
J.
Elevator System: Car frame, car safety, overspeed governor and pit buffers for both car and counterweight; all integrated into system in accordance with application criteria.
K.
Counterweight: Each elevator suitably counterbalanced with adequate weights contained in structural steel frame. Counterweight equal to weight of complete elevator car plus a percentage of capacity load.
L.
Counterweight Guard: Guard of appropriate design and size provided in place at bottom of the hoistway or elevator, and with compensation.
M. Guide Rails: Elevator car and counterweight guide rails erected plumb, and securely fastened to hoistway framing. Design and provision of hoistway framing of adequate
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
142100 - 7
NEW BUILDING FOR 01/13/12 LANE AVENUE MIXED USE strength and properly positioned to withstand loads applied in conjunction with data provided by elevator contractor. N.
Guideshoes: Provided and mounted to top and bottom of both car and counterweight frame. Each guideshoe assembly arranged to maintain constant contact on rail surfaces.
O.
Car Frame and Platform: Fabricated frame of formed or structural steel shapes, gusseted and rigidly welded with a wood subfloor. Underside of the platform fireproofed.
P.
Buffers: Oil-type car buffers mounted on continuous channels fastened to elevator guide rail or securely anchored to pit floor. Provide extensions if required by project conditions. Mount spring-type counterweight buffers onto machine frame
2.4
FINISH MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, commercial steel, Type B, exposed. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011, commercial steel, Type B, pickled. C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240, Type 304. D. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276, Type 304. E. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304. F. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063. G. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure type complying with NEMA LD 3, Type HGS or HGL. H. Paint: 1. Unexposed Steel and/or Iron: Clean metal of oil, grease, scale and other foreign matter and paint one shop coat of manufacturer’s standard rust-resistant primer. Galvanized metal not painted. 2. Exposed Steel: Clean metal of oil, grease, scale and other foreign matter. Eliminate dents, scratches, or other defects that would affect the final finish. For material delivered with primer coat only, apply manufacturer’s standard enamel primer. For material delivered with a finish coat, apply two coats of manufacturer’s standard enamel of a color selected from the manufacturer’s standard color selection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B.
Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts designed to minimize transmission of vibrations to structure and thereby minimize structure-borne noise from elevator system.
C. Leveling Tolerance: 1/8", up or down, regardless of load and direction of travel. ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
142100 - 8
D. 3.2
NEW BUILDING FOR 01/13/12 LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting use (either temporary or permanent), perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by ASME A17.1 and by governing regulations and agencies.
B. Emergency Communication System: Test each system for full operation. 3.3
DEMONSTRATION A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain elevators. Review emergency provisions and train Owner's personnel in procedures to follow in identifying sources of operational failures or malfunctions.
B.
Review provisions and train Owner's personnel in procedures to follow in the event of power loss and the operation of the emergency communication system.
C. Review provisions of the new installation service. 3.4
PROTECTION A. Temporary Use: Limit temporary use for construction purposes to service elevator. Comply with the following requirements for each elevator used for construction purposes: 1. Provide car with temporary enclosure, either within finished car or in place of finished car, to protect finishes from damage. 2. Provide other protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs and procedures as needed to protect elevator and elevator equipment. 3. Obtain Owner’s permission and appropriate local inspection agency’s approval for temporary use for each specific elevator and occurrence. Coordinate requests through General Contractor. 4. Engage elevator Installer to provide full maintenance service. 5. Engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work, if any, so no evidence remains of correction. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.
END OF SECTION 142100
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
142100 - 9
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE SECTION 149182 - TRASH CHUTES
01/13/12
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2
SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Metal, vertical, gravity-type waste chutes. 2. Fire sprinklers, flushing spray and sanitizing units. 3. Intake and discharge door assemblies. 4. Chute and venting fabrications. 5. Testing chute components after installation. 6. Mounting accessories. 7. Compactor. SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Detail chute assemblies and indicate installation details, dimensions, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Indicate locations of fire sprinklers, flushing spray and sanitizing units. 2. Indicate required pipe sizes.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
NFPA Compliance: Provide chutes complying with NFPA 82.
B.
Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated. 1. Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric (neutral) pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B. 2. Intake Door: Class B labeled; 1½ -hour fire rated with 30-minute temperature rise of 250 deg F. 3. Discharge Door: Class B labeled; 1-hour fire rated with 30-minute temperature rise of 250 deg F. 4. Access Door: Class B labeled; 1½ -hour fire rated with 30-minute temperature rise of 250 deg F.
C.
Manufacturer: Minimum five (5) years-documented experience producing products specified in this section.
D.
Contractor’s Certification: Manufacturer’s certification that Contractor is an approved installer of manufacturer’s products, and has a minimum of five (5) years experience.
E.
Pre-Installation Meeting: Convene at job site minimum of seven (7) calendar days prior to scheduled beginning of construction activities of this Section to review requirements of this Section. 1. Required attendance by representatives of the following: a. Chute manufacturer or designated representative. b. Equipment installer.
TRASH CHUTES
149182 - 1
c. F. 1.4 A.
NEW BUILDING FOR 01/13/12 LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Other entities directly affecting or affected by installation activities.
Intake doors shall meet all ADAAG requirements. WARRANTY Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard one (1) year warranty from date of Substantial Completion. Warranty covers defects in product workmanship and materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
MANUFACTURERS Trash chutes by American Chute System, Inc. form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable materials, performance characteristics and finishes by manufacturers listed below are also acceptable. 1. 2. 3.
2.2
Cutler Manufacturing Corporation. Midland Metalcraft Co. Wilkinson Hi-Rise, LLC.
TRASH CHUTES
A.
Model: “Easy Aire”.
B.
Trash Chute: 24” diameter, 16 gauge aluminized steel and fittings. 1. Offsets (bends): If required, offsets made at same diameter and material as chute with an additional layer of 13 gauge aluminized steel reinforcing the impact area. Offsets not to deviate more than 15” degrees off chute vertical axis. 2. Sound Insulation: "Daubert 3680V-DAMP" sound coat vibrations dampening compound to exterior only, and "Korfund" sound isolator pads at each floor support frame.
C.
Intakes Doors: 15” wide x 18” high, stainless steel, bottom hinged, self-closing, positive latching pneumatically operated. 1. Ratings: 1½ hour, Underwriters Laboratories “B” Label designation and rated for a 250° F maximum door temperature rise over 30 minu tes with stainless steel trim in a UL approved, “B” Label, 1½ hour assembly. 2. Door Types: a. Manual operated. b. Palm button pneumatic operated that meet ADAAG requirements. 3. Door to pivot on a concealed ½" steel pivot shaft to prevent build-up of debris. 4. Doors furnished with removable stainless steel trim with embossed letters: "Trash". 5. Operation: User depresses Push Button momentarily. The Door opens to the FULL-OPEN position and remains open for 10-30 seconds or any intermediate time selected. Door then closes automatically. 6. Door shall be powered by a suitable 33-gallon capacity compressor. 7. Installation: Masonry walls. 8. Chute intake doors on each floor shall be disabled when the compactor receives one or more of the following signals: Emergency Stop Activation, Compactor
TRASH CHUTES
149182 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR 01/13/12 LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Hopper Time-Out Cycle, Charging Chamber Full, and Motor Overload, providing the compactor has these control circuits. D.
Discharge: 14 gauge aluminized steel open end chute discharge rolling steel door with 165° F, fusible link hold open on an inclined steel rack at the bottom of the chute to close automatically when the ambient temperature reaches 165° F as required by city or state building and/or fire codes. 1. Insulation: 1” thick. 2. Ratings: 1½ hour, 250° F UL “B” label. 3. Reinforced bottom with #13 gauge impact plate. 4. Hopper Support: 2” pipe pedestal and 2” IPS drain flange for connection by Pluming Contractor.
E.
Vent: Full diameter chute extension through roof to 4’-0” above finished roof level with metal top vent cap, counter flashing and insect screen. Roof curb by others.
F.
Accessories: 1. Floor Supports: Manufacturer’s standard assemblies. 2. Flushing Spray Head: 3/4” IPS spray head unit located in chute above highest intake door, ready for hot-water piping connection with access for head and piping maintenance. 3. Sprinkler Heads: ½” above highest intake. Additional ½” sprinkler heads at every second intake (counting from the top) or as required by local code. 4. Sanitizing Unit: 3/4” NPS disinfecting and sanitizing spray head unit located in chute above highest intake door, including one gallon tank and adjustable proportioning valve with bypass for manual control of sanitizing and flushing operation, ready for hot-water piping connection, and with access for head and piping maintenance. 5. Electrical Interlocks: Bottom door interlock system energized by opening one intake door. Remaining doors not locked when system is energized. 6. Heat-Detector System: Interlock system with temperature-rise elements that lock chute doors when temperature in chute reaches a predetermined, adjustable temperature
2.3
FABRICATION
A.
General: Factory assemble chutes to greatest extent practical with continuously welded or lock-seamed joints without bolts, rivets, or clips projecting on chute interior. Include intake-door assemblies and chute-support frames at each floor, and chute expansion joints between each support point.
B.
Roof Vents: Fabricate vent unit to extend 48" above roof with full-diameter, screened vent and metal safety cap or glass explosion-release cap. Fabricate with roof-deck flange, and with counterflashing and clamping ring of nonferrous metal compatible with chute metal.
C.
Fire Sprinklers: Comply with NFPA 13. Locate fire sprinklers at or above the top service opening of chutes, within the chute at alternate floor levels in buildings more than two stories tall, and at the lowest service level.
D.
Equipment Access: Fabricate chutes with access for maintaining equipment located within the chute, such as flushing and sanitizing units, fire sprinklers, and plumbing and electrical connections.
TRASH CHUTES
149182 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2.4 A.
01/13/12
COMPACTOR Model: WasteCare Corporation “9HRCS”, fully automated. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Compacts into a reusable container. Liftcart required. Automatic fire control. System full capacity. Manual shut off gate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NFPA 82 requirements and with chute manufacturer's written instructions. Assemble components with tight, nonleaking joints. Anchor securely to supporting structure to withstand impact and stresses on vent units. Install chute and components to maintain fire-resistive construction of chute and enclosing chase.
B.
Install chutes plumb, without offsets or obstructions that might prevent materials from free falling within chutes.
C.
Coordination with Roofing: Anchor roof flanges of chute vents before installing roofing and flashing. Install counterflashing after roofing and flashing are installed.
D.
Intake and Discharge Doors: Interface door units with throat sections of chutes for safe, snag-resistant, sanitary depositing of materials in chutes by users. 1. Coordinate intake pneumatic door installation with chase installation. 2. Interconnect sanitizer control with door interlock system.
E.
Electrical Interlock System: Comply with applicable NECA 1 recommendations.
F.
Test chute components after installation. Operate doors, locks, and interlock systems to demonstrate that hardware is adjusted and electrical wiring is connected correctly. Complete test operations before installing chase enclosures.
END OF SECTION 149182
TRASH CHUTES
149182 - 4
20
GENERAL SECTIONS FOR PLUMBING, FIRE PROTECTION & HVAC
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
20 05 01 INTRODUCTORY STATEMENT
PART 1 1.01
1.02
GENERAL
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A.
The requirements of Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, and Division 1 apply to all work herein.
B.
In addition to conforming to the documents listed in Paragraph A above, the work performed by the Plumbing, Fire Protection, and Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Contractors shall conform to all provisions of Sections 20 00 00 through 20 99 99 as included in this Specification. The Plumbing, Fire Protection, and Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Contractors are each to consider the word "Contractor" when used in these Sections to mean themselves.
C.
All Plumbing, Fire Protection, and Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Contractors must read the entire Specification and all divisions therein because they will be responsible for Work described in other Sections where reference is made to "Mechanical Contractor" or other commonly used terminology that implies the Plumbing Contractor, Fire Protection Contractor, or Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Contractor.
D.
Plumbing Contractor shall provide temporary water, unless otherwise assigned in Division 1. Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Contractor shall provide temporary heat, unless otherwise assigned in Division 1.
E.
All work included under this heading is subject to the Bidding Requirements, General Conditions, and Division 1 General Requirements written for this entire Specification, whether attached to this Part or not, and the Contractor is notified to refer thereto as an integral part of the work.
F.
Fire Protection Contractor shall provide temporary or permanent standpipes with or without a water supply when the work of the building progresses more than 40 feet above the lowest level of fire department vehicle access, unless otherwise assigned in Division 1.
APPLICABLE SECTIONS A.
Contractors shall perform work described in the preceding paragraphs, the General Conditions, Division 1 and in the following Sections (as included): 1. Fire Protection: Sections 20 00 00 through 20 99 99 Sections 21 00 00 through 21 99 99 2. Plumbing: Sections 20 00 00 through 20 99 99 Sections 22 00 00 through 22 99 99 3. HVAC: Sections 20 00 00 through 20 99 99 Sections 23 00 00 through 23 99 99
B.
Contractors are required to coordinate their work with that described in other Sections, and therefore, must familiarize themselves with the entire set of Specifications.
INTRODUCTORY STATEMENT
20 05 01 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 1.03
01-13-2012
RESPONSIBILITY A.
The Engineer's efforts under this contract are aimed at designing a project that will be safe after full completion. The Engineer has no expertise in, and assumes no responsibility for, construction means and methods, nor job site safety during construction. These are exclusively the Contractor's responsibility. The Engineer may process or approve Contractor submitted means or methods that may contain information related to construction methods or safety issues. The Engineer may also participate in meetings where such issues might be discussed. Such processing or participation shall not be construed as voluntary assumption by the Engineer of any responsibility for safety procedures. END OF SECTION
INTRODUCTORY STATEMENT
20 05 01 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
20 05 05 PLUMBING, FIRE PROTECTION, AND HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 1.01
1.02
1.03
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION A.
Furnish all materials, labor, tools, and equipment to complete and leave ready for operation all Fire Protection, Plumbing and Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC) systems.
B.
By submitting a Bid, the Contractor certifies that: 1. The Contractor has visited the site and is satisfied that he/she understands all site conditions that may affect his/her Bid price, with the sole exception of those items which he/she specifically is taking exception to in writing in his/her Bid. 2. The Contractor fully understands the make-up, construction, and operation of all systems and equipment he/she is bidding on and has included in his/her price all materials, supplies, accessories, and services necessary to make these systems complete and operational, whether such materials, supplies, and services are explicitly shown on the Drawings or included in these Specifications or only implied by the clear intent of these Documents that the Contractor provide a complete and fully operational system as part of the scope of work undertaken by this Contractor.
C.
These General Requirements are in addition to the other requirements referenced elsewhere within these Specifications.
ENVIRONMENTAL GUIDELINES A.
Comply with all Project Requirements in Division 01 for Construction Waste Management.
B.
Minimize the use of virgin materials and minimize waste during construction.
C.
Use low-VOC mastics and sealants.
STANDARDS OF QUALITY A.
Provide quality work conforming to the best accepted practice and standards of the trade. Further definition of quality is given by reference to various laws, codes, standards, and regulations.
B.
All laws and codes having jurisdiction over this project are deemed to be included in their entirety as a part of these Specifications. Also, any other laws, codes, standards, or regulations referenced herein are deemed to be included in their entirety.
C.
If a conflict occurs between the Drawings, the Specifications, and the applicable codes, immediately call the conflict to the attention of the Architect before bids are submitted. The Architect will determine which interpretation shall take precedence. Conflicts not brought to the Architect's attention before bids are due shall be priced by the Contractor to include the most expensive, highest quality alternative.
PLUMBING, FIRE PROTECTION, AND HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
20 05 05 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
D.
Material and equipment installed under this Contract shall be new, undeteriorated, and of a quality not less than the minimum specified. All equipment shall be certified, listed, and labeled by UL. If UL does not certify an associated piece of equipment, then certification by another nationally recognized testing laboratory such as CTL shall be permissible. If equipment is of a type that no testing lab lists nor labels, then a safety evaluation must be performed at the supplier's expense by the inspecting authority or another federal, state or municipal agency.
E.
The following codes apply to this work (as approved and amended by the Authority Having Jurisdiction including all applicable sections of interim agreements in effect at the time of permit issuance): 1. Local a. Building Code b. Fire Code 2. State of Ohio a. Ohio Building Code b. Energy Conservation Code c. Mechanical Code d. Plumbing Code e. Boiler Code including ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section I, "Power Boilers," and Section IV, "Heating Boilers" f. Elevator Code g. Pressure Piping Code h. Fire Code 3. National a. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Codes as listed in subsequent Sections and Article 101 b. All applicable OSHA Requirements c. All applicable EPA Requirements d. Industrial Risk Insurers (IRI)
F.
Work must be performed by licensed Contractors as required by Local and State Codes.
G.
Methods and materials must be certified where noted in the individual Specification Sections.
H.
All equipment and appliances must bear a tag or label of an Approved Testing Agency. Review Local Code requirements.
I.
Work must comply with City of Columbus, Ohio; Ohio Building, Mechanical, Plumbing, and Fire Codes. Unless otherwise noted, the latest enforced code edition shall apply to this work.
J.
If the hardware or software installed under this Contract interacts with any existing systems that do not already have this feature, this Contractor is to notify the Owner, in writing and in a timely manner, of the specific changes that the Owner must make to the existing systems to bring the combined system into compliance with this requirement.
PLUMBING, FIRE PROTECTION, AND HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
20 05 05 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 1.04
1.05
01-13-2012
CONTRACT DRAWINGS A.
Drawings are schematic and show approximate locations and extent of work. Exact locations and extents must be coordinated with other Contractors and verified in the field. Coordination of the final fabrication drawings and final coordination of the installation in the field is the Contractor's responsibility. The Contractor is to take the design to the next level of detail, knowing exactly what equipment and materials he/she is going to provide, and build the project on the basis of that equipment and other approved Shop Drawings.
B.
The Drawings indicate required size and points of termination of pipes and ducts and suggests proper routes to conform to structure, avoid obstructions, and preserve clearances. However, it is not intended that Drawings indicate all necessary offsets, and the Contractor shall, without further instructions or additional cost to the Owner, make the installation in such a manner as to conform to structure, avoid obstructions, preserve headroom and keep openings and passageways clear.
C.
When the work as indicated on the Contract Drawings exceeds the minimum required by any code, standard, requirement, rule or regulation, the Contract Drawings shall govern the design and installation of the work.
D.
Significant deviations from Drawings must be approved by the Architect.
E.
Up to the time of roughing in, the Architect reserves the right to make minor changes in location that do not require additional labor or material. No cost shall be added to the Contract for a minor change. The Architect shall determine what is a "significant" and what is a "minor" change.
ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS A.
Listed below are titles and abbreviations used in the Specification. All may not necessarily apply to this work. 1. AABC Associated Air Balance Council 2. ADA Americans with Disabilities Act 3. ADC Air Diffusion Council 4. AGA American Gas Association 5. AMCA Air Movement and Control Association 6. ANSI American National Standards Institute 7. ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute 8. ASA Acoustical Society of America 9. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers 10. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 11. ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineers 12. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 13. AWWA American Water Works Association 14. BAS Building Automation System 15. CGA Compressed Gas Association 16. CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute 17. EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. 18. EPA Environmental Protection Agency 19. FM Factory Mutual
PLUMBING, FIRE PROTECTION, AND HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
20 05 05 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 20. HVAC 21. MSS 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. B.
1.06
NEBB NEC NEMA NFPA NSF OAC OBC ODH OSHA PDI SMACNA TAB UL
01-13-2012
Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. National Environmental Balancing Bureau National Electrical Code National Electrical Manufacturers Association National Fire Protection Association National Sanitary Foundation Ohio Administrative Code Ohio Building Code Ohio Department of Health Occupational Safety and Health Administration Plumbing and Drainage Institute Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Underwriters' Laboratories
The abbreviations are shown on Drawings. For further abbreviations, Contractor shall refer to the symbols list shown in the latest ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook.
DEFINITIONS A.
Applicable definitions as listed by Ohio Building Codes apply to this work.
B.
"The Authority Having Jurisdiction" shall refer to any duly authorized governmental body or public utility and/or their agents having jurisdiction over the work as provided under this Contract.
C.
"Concealed": Embedded in or installed behind walls, within partitions, above suspended ceilings, in trenches, in tunnels, below floor slabs, and within crawl spaces. Items within mechanical rooms are not considered "concealed."
D.
"Contractor": Means the Contractor whose scope of work is described within Divisions 20, 21, 22, or 23.
E.
"Ductwork": Duct and fittings, dampers, vanes, controls, hangers, bracing, insulation and other items required or necessary.
F.
"Exposed": Not installed underground or "concealed," as defined previously. In full view, all items within a mechanical room are considered "exposed."
G.
"Furnish": To purchase and deliver products to the project site and make ready for installation.
H.
"Install": To take furnished products, assemble, erect, secure, connect, and place into operation.
I.
"Piping": Pipe, fitting, flanges, valves, controls, specialties, hangers, concrete inserts, bracing, insulation, and other items required or necessary.
PLUMBING, FIRE PROTECTION, AND HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
20 05 05 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
1.07
1.08
1.09
01-13-2012
J.
"Products": Includes materials, systems, and equipment.
K.
"Provide": To furnish, erect, install, and connect to make completely ready for regular operation.
L.
"Work": The providing of products for entire Contract.
PERMITS, FEES, AND NOTICES A.
Secure and pay for all permits and governmental fees, bonds, licenses, and inspections necessary for the proper execution and completion of the work. Refer also to specific permit requirements in other Sections of Divisions 20, 21, and 22 (as included) and in Division 1.
B.
Give notice and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and lawful orders of any public authority bearing on the performance of the work.
C.
The Plumbing, HVAC, and Fire Protection Contractors shall arrange for inspection of the work by the Code Authority having jurisdiction.
D.
If the Contractor performs any work knowing that work to be contrary to such Laws, Ordinances, Rules and Regulations, and without notice to the Architect, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for and shall bear all costs associated with such work.
EXAMINATION OF SITE A.
Certain existing conditions affect the manner or sequence of the work performance. Review existing services, structures, and operating schedules to facilitate installation of the Work. Coordinate scheduling of the work with existing operations.
B.
Visit the site of the proposed project and familiarize with all conditions which might affect the work. After the Contract is signed, no allowance will be made for lack of knowledge of project conditions.
C.
Prior to bidding the project, verify and reconcile work required by the Contract Documents with conditions at the Site.
D.
Should any discrepancies be noted during the Bidding Period, notify the Architect immediately, in writing, to permit the issuance of an addendum to prevent misunderstandings at a later date.
UTILITIES A.
Prior to construction, locate any existing utilities within the project limits. Make minor relocations to permit installation of work. Advise the Architect immediately of major conflicts on a site plan layout to permit modifications of the Contract Documents, and submit to the Architect for review prior to any excavation. Where existing utilities conflict with new work, mark and identify proposed modifications on the site plan layout.
B.
Record locations of all concealed utilities on the Record Drawings.
PLUMBING, FIRE PROTECTION, AND HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
20 05 05 - 5
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
1.10
C.
Coordinate any utility service shutdown or outages with the Architect and the Owner. Shutdowns shall conform to all utility company requirements. Avoid inconveniencing the Owner, and provide temporary service during the curtailment, as required by the Architect or Owner. Provide five (5) working days (minimum) advanced notice to the Owner for any required utility outages.
D.
At least two (2) working days prior to construction in an area in which underground utility facilities may be located, notify the Project Engineer, the registered utility protection service, and the Owner of each underground utility facility listed here: 1. Utilities Protection Service Phone: 1-800-362-2764 2. Columbia Gas of Ohio New Business Team 1600 Dublin Road, 1st Floor 920 West Goodale Columbus, Ohio 43215 Phone: 614-280-7500 3. City of Columbus Water Department Mr. Burly Dunn, Line Location 910 Dublin Road Columbus, Ohio 43215 Phone: 614-645-7788 4. City of Columbus Storm/Sanitary Division of Sewage & Drainage 90 West Broad Street Columbus, Ohio 43215 Phone: 614-645-8156 5. Division of Construction 910 Dublin Road Columbus, Ohio 43215 Phone: 614-645-6441
CONTRACTOR DESIGN/DETAILING A.
1.11
01-13-2012
The Contractor is required to include the design of component parts, subsystems, and installation details as required by the Specifications, as indicated on the Drawings, and as required for a complete and operating installation. This design work shall be done after all equipment manufacturers and material types have been selected from those allowed by the Specifications. If required by the Specifications, submit design calculations for review. Obtain the services of qualified personnel to perform this design and detailing. The Contractor's design and detailing does not relieve the Contractor from complying with the Contract Documents.
RECORD DRAWINGS A.
Maintain at the job site one (1) copy of Drawings, which shall be used exclusively for recording the location of all installed work.
PLUMBING, FIRE PROTECTION, AND HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
20 05 05 - 6
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
1.12
1.13
1.14
01-13-2012
B.
Record deviations in locations of concealed piping, valves, all buried or concealed utility services (water, gas, fire, manholes, etc.), dimensioned from a fixed control point, including depth of bury at start of gas line, at each change of direction as required for further reference. Minor piping variations need not be recorded. Record Addendum and Change Order Items.
C.
Record deviations necessary to incorporate equipment different from the Design Base equipment.
D.
At completion of the project, deliver Record Drawings and Coordination Drawings to the Architect.
E.
For large, complex electrical equipment, supply and post at, on, or near the equipment, all electrical power and control drawings. Provide framed glass or plastic protection for the Drawings.
F.
Diagrams and Operating Instructions: Post complete diagrams and operating instructions for all control systems near the related equipment. Provide framed glass or plastic protection for the Drawings and operating instructions. When multiple equipment rooms exist in a building, these diagrams shall be required at each piece of equipment. Additionally, post or make available in the main equipment room a complete set of diagrams.
G.
Refer to Division 1, Section 01 74 01, "Execution Requirements," for additional requirements.
GUARANTEE A.
Guarantee equipment, workmanship, and materials for one (1) year from date of Contract Completion. If defects develop within this guarantee period, and upon receiving written notice from the Architect or Owner, remedy the defects and reimburse the Owner for all damage to other work caused either by the defects or during the work of correcting the defects.
B.
Refer also to Division 1 and any individual Sections that define the starting date of the guarantee period or discuss either additional warranty requirements or extended warranties beyond the standard period.
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate work carefully with the work of all other Contractors.
B.
Consult all contract documents that may affect the locations of any piping, and make minor adjustments in location to secure coordination.
C.
Before preceding, coordinate drilling, welding, etc., and method of attachment to columns, joists, beams, girders, etc., with Structural Engineer and General Trades Contractor.
TEMPORARY UTILITIES A.
Refer to Division 1, General Requirements.
PLUMBING, FIRE PROTECTION, AND HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
20 05 05 - 7
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING PART 2 2.01
2.02
01-13-2012
PRODUCTS
DESIGN-BASE MANUFACTURERS A.
The Drawings and Specifications are based on the requirements and layouts of the equipment of the Design-Base Manufacturers. Design of equipment has been coordinated with the building and other Trades for these specific models and manufacturers of equipment. Where several manufacturers are listed, the first named is the Design-Base Manufacturer, unless specifically noted otherwise. Submit for final approval products of the listed manufacturers that are of performance and quality comparable to the Design-Base Manufacturer's products.
B.
Where necessary, prepare new layouts to be used for other equipment listed. Adjust and coordinate the layouts with the equipment and service requirements and with Code-required working clearances that may have different dimensions or service requirements from the Design-Base Manufacturer's equipment. Verify that this equipment will fit and function in the indicated application and will coordinate with adjacent equipment for fit and clearances. Submit all new layouts as part of the shop drawing review.
C.
Whenever the Contractor furnishes equipment or material other than that of the DesignBase Manufacturer, he/she is responsible for the cost and coordination of all modifications required not only for his/her work, but also for the work of all other Trades affected. Where changes to other Trades' work are required, the Contractor furnishing the equipment or material must include the additional costs of all such changes in his/her Bid, arrange with these other Trades for the changes, and compensate them accordingly.
APPROVED EQUALS A.
Equal (equivalent) components (articles, materials, forms of construction, equipment, fixtures, etc.) by manufacturers not listed but meeting the Specifications may be submitted to the Architect for approval and subsequent inclusion into the bidding documents. Submittal must be received no later than ten (10) working days before bid date. If approved, such manufacturers will be listed in an addendum.
B.
Submittals must include all of the following: 1. Cover Letter: Company letterhead addressed to Architect. Indicate the following: a. Project name, project building name, project number, and phase or bid package if applicable b. Specification Section by number and title c. Specified Product d. Proposed Product e. Deviations, if any, from Specified Product f. List of attachments 2. Product Data: Manufacturer's literature, fully describing proposed product with exact item highlighted or clearly indicated. 3. Specifications: Manufacturer's Specifications with all modifications noted as required to show compliance with Bidding Documents. 4. Test Data: Where performance requirements are specified, submit laboratory tests to indicate compliance. 5. Samples: When required by Architect, submit appropriate samples of proposed product showing color, texture, construction and other attributes necessary for evaluation.
PLUMBING, FIRE PROTECTION, AND HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
20 05 05 - 8
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING C.
2.03
Equipment may be referred to either in these Specifications or on the Drawings, as singular or plural; Contractor is responsible for verifying the exact number of items required to complete his/her work.
OWNER-FURNISHED EQUIPMENT A.
The Owner will furnish certain items of equipment to the Contractor. The Contractor shall take delivery of such items and unload them from the truck at the job site.
B.
The Contractor shall protect and store such items as part of this Contract.
C.
The Contractor shall install these items in conformance with the requirements of the Specifications and Drawings and the supplier's recommended installation instructions.
PART 3 3.01
Submit a list of the suppliers to be used on this project within thirty (30) days of award of contract. Type this list on company letterhead and include the project title. Include all equipment listed in Section 20 05 15, "Submittals." Adjacent to each Specification Section number and product description, list the manufacturer and catalog number/type.
QUANTITIES A.
2.06
Contractor may submit equipment and material substitutions of his/her choice, without prior approval, on the "Substitution Sheet" included in the Bid Schedule. Such substitutions will not form the basis of the award and may be considered only after selection of the lowest bidder furnishing "Standards" as specified.
MANUFACTURER'S DECLARATION A.
2.05
If the Contractor fails to comply with all of the preceding requirements and fails to provide all of the requested information, the submittal will not be reviewed.
SUBSTITUTIONS A.
2.04
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
CUTTING AND PATCHING A.
Unless otherwise required in the General Conditions and other Specification Sections, the Contractor shall include in his/her Bid the cost of all cutting and patching required for his/her work. Work must be accomplished in a neat and workmanlike manner that is acceptable to the Architect.
B.
If necessary to cut into the work of other Trades, the other Trades shall do the cutting in at this Contractor's expense. Patching shall be done in the same fashion.
C.
Cutting of structural support beams, joists, plates, precast, or other structural members is strictly prohibited without the specific written consent of the Architect and Structural Engineer. Use rotary drills where cutting holes through concrete, brick, plaster, or tile is necessary. Obtain approval of the Architect before proceeding with work.
PLUMBING, FIRE PROTECTION, AND HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
20 05 05 - 9
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
3.02
3.03
01-13-2012
D.
All cutting and patching shall be done promptly and all repairs shall be made as necessary to leave the entire work in good condition, including all cutting, fitting, and drilling of masonry, concrete, metal, wood, plaster, and other materials as specified or required for proper assembly, fabrication, installation, and completion of all work of the Contract.
E.
Patching shall match adjacent materials and shall be accomplished only by tradesmen skilled in the respective craft required. Materials and equipment used in the patching work shall comply with requirements of those Sections of the Specifications relating to material to be used in new construction. Contractor is not necessarily obliged to employ the General Trades Contractor to do patching. The HVAC, Plumbing, and Fire Protection Contractors shall incur all cost for cutting and patching necessary for their installation of their respective work.
F.
Patch to match adjacent surface construction. Exception: Portions of the existing floor slab shall be cut and removed by Contractor and replaced by the other Contractors is appropriate for the underfloor plumbing piping. Plumbing Contractor shall excavate and backfill for his/her own work.
G.
Refer to Division 1 and Division 2 for additional requirements.
PAINTING AND RELATED WORK A.
Finish painting in areas of new construction and remodeled areas is the responsibility of the General Trades Contractor and is specified in Division 9.
B.
Any other painting required by Sections of Division 20, 21, 22, or 23 is the responsibility of the respective HVAC, Plumbing, or Fire Protection Contractors. Such painting shall be done by a qualified tradesman skilled in the craft and shall meet the requirements of Division 9. Each Contractor is responsible for repainting of finished areas disturbed by his/her own cutting and patching. Finishes shall match existing conditions.
C.
If factory-finished equipment has rusted or has been damaged, clean the equipment, spot prime it with zinc chromate, and finish it to the original quality and color.
D.
Clean HVAC, Plumbing, and Fire Protection support steel and bare ferrous metal, remove all rust, apply primer, and paint in accordance with Division 9 Specifications.
E.
Prime and finish all plywood mounting boards in accordance with Division 9 Specifications.
CLEANING A.
Upon completion of work, thoroughly clean of dirt, stickers, grease, rust, oil and other foreign matter, all material, fixtures and equipment furnished in this Contract. Prepare for finish painting, where painting is specified.
B.
Clean galvanized piping and ductwork in exposed areas with diluted acetic acid.
C.
Clean copper piping in exposed areas with fine emery cloth and solvent.
PLUMBING, FIRE PROTECTION, AND HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
20 05 05 - 10
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
3.04
3.05
01-13-2012
D.
Clean all gauges, thermometers, traps, dirt legs, strainers and fittings.
E.
Clean all insulation coverings.
F.
Keep all areas as clean as possible during construction. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements.
SCAFFOLDING, RIGGING, HOISTS, AND TRANSPORTATION A.
The Contractor shall provide scaffolding, staging, cribbing, tackle, hoists, and rigging necessary for placing of his/her materials and equipment in their proper places in the Project.
B.
The Contractor shall pay costs for transportation of materials and equipment to the job site and shall include such costs in his/her proposal. The Contractor shall pay costs for storage of materials and equipment if space is not available at the site and shall include such costs in his/her proposal.
C.
Scaffolding and hoisting equipment shall comply with requirements of applicable Federal, State, and Local Laws and Codes.
TESTS A.
The Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction may require portions of the work to be inspected, tested, or approved. These services shall be performed by approved agencies.
B.
The Architect must receive notification of all scheduled tests and adjustments at least 72 hours before they are scheduled so he/she may witness the tests and adjustments. If the Contractor performs any test or adjustment without the Architect present or without proper notification, the Contractor may be required to perform the test or adjustment a second time at the Contractor's expense. To minimize inconvenience, all test schedules shall be coordinated with the Owner.
C.
Secure required certifications of inspection, testing, or approval and include those in the Service Manuals. See Section 20 05 20, "Record and Information Booklets."
D.
Test and secure approval after the piping installation has been completed, but before the piping has been concealed and before the pipe covering has been applied. Each system shall be tested as required by other Sections of this Specification. The piping shall be free of leaks at the test pressure. If a leak appears, repair the line and any damage resulting from the leak at no additional cost to the Owner. The test shall be repeated until the system is proven to be free of leaks and properly anchored.
E.
Should any of the work be covered up or enclosed before all required inspections are completed and approvals obtained, uncover the work as required and, after the work has been completely inspected and approved, make all repairs and replacements, with such materials and workmanship as are necessary for the approval of the Architect. Do so at no additional cost to the Owner.
PLUMBING, FIRE PROTECTION, AND HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
20 05 05 - 11
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 3.06
3.07
TESTING PROCEDURES A.
Provide all tools, instruments, personnel, and equipment required to perform tests. Make all required temporary connections. Properly repair defects that develop under tests and repeat the tests. Do not caulk threaded joints, cracks, or holes. Repair leaks by tightening threaded joints or by replacing pipe, fittings, or equipment with new materials. Minor leaks in welded joints may be chipped out and rewelded.
B.
Perform hydrostatic and air tests before piping is concealed or covered. Completely drain all systems after hydrostatic tests are performed.
C.
Testing of service lines shall follow recommended practices. Remove all air from lines when testing with water pressure, to avoid false pressure readings.
INSPECTION A.
3.08
01-13-2012
Check each piece of equipment in the system for defects. Verify that all parts are properly furnished and installed, that all items function properly, and that all adjustments have been made.
PROTECTION A.
Do not deliver equipment and material to the site until the work is ready to receive it, unless it can be protectively stored in a manner acceptable to the Architect.
B.
During construction, protect all equipment and materials during construction from damage by weather, water, dirt, paint droppings, welding and cutting spatters, and other construction activities.
C.
Elevate and protectively cover all materials or equipment stored outside.
D.
Store inside all materials and equipment sensitive to weather or construction conditions. Where necessary, store sensitive equipment in a heated area.
E.
During construction, cover all non-operating motors, bearings, and controls that are stored or installed in place.
F.
Refer also to individual Specification Sections for specialized protection.
G.
Immediately repair or replace damaged equipment or materials to the satisfaction of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner.
H.
Protect the building and other Contractor's material and equipment from damage caused by your work. Protect floors from cutting oil and chips.
I.
Use all means necessary to protect materials before, during, and after installation.
PLUMBING, FIRE PROTECTION, AND HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
20 05 05 - 12
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 3.09
NOTIFICATION OF START-UP A.
3.10
Refer to Division 1, General Requirements.
TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICE AND MATERIALS STORAGE A.
3.12
Notify the Architect of the start-up schedule for all equipment. The Architect shall then notify the Owner.
PROTECTION FOR PUBLIC AND EMPLOYEES A.
3.11
01-13-2012
Refer to Division 1, General Requirements.
USE OF EXISTING FACILITIES A.
Refer to Division 1, General Requirements. END OF SECTION
PLUMBING, FIRE PROTECTION, AND HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
20 05 05 - 13
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
20 05 10 COORDINATION BETWEEN TRADES
PART 1 1.01
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION A.
Plumbing, Fire Protection, HVAC, and Electrical Contractors shall coordinate their roughin, service, and control wiring requirements with each other. Electrical Contractor shall review all control Drawings to coordinate exact number of temperature control panels, as well as to provide proper starters (including necessary time delays, auxiliary contacts, etc.).
B.
Motors 1/2 horsepower or smaller shall be single phase; larger motors shall be 3 phase, unless otherwise noted.
C.
Equipment drawing 1,000 watts or more, before power factor correction, must have a power factor of 85% or greater at rated load conditions. Equipment with an operating power factor of less than 85% shall be corrected to at least 90% under rated load-operating conditions. The Contractor furnishing the equipment shall be responsible for power factor correction devices.
D.
The Electrical Contractor shall install all wiring required to power Plumbing, Fire Protection, or HVAC equipment, including 120 volt to control panels as shown. The Contractor furnishing the control device is responsible for all control and interlock wiring, regardless of voltage, except if the control device actuates or is actuated by the fire alarm control panel. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for this wiring from the fire alarm control panel to the control device. The Contractor providing a control panel shall extend control power for temperature control panels required, but not shown on the Drawings from the nearest available breaker to the control panel.
E.
Each Contractor furnishing motors is responsible for advising Electrical Contractor of the exact function of the systems to assure proper type of starter (including necessary time delays, etc.) with correct number of auxiliary contacts required for proper system operation. If motors that require larger starters, safety switches, circuit breakers, fuses, or branch circuit conductors than indicated are furnished, the Contractor furnishing the motors shall reimburse the Electrical Contractor for any cost differential.
F.
All electrical devices furnished as part of Plumbing, Fire Protection, and HVAC equipment, and the installation requirements for all electrical work included in the project, shall conform to all other applicable Sections of these Specifications.
G.
The Plumbing, Fire Protection, and HVAC Contractors shall be responsible for start-up, commissioning, and final operation of equipment provided under their respective contracts, and shall demonstrate the operation of all systems to the Owner. Provide the appropriate personnel for the checkout of the building life safety systems and for the life safety system demonstration to the Authorities having jurisdiction.
COORDINATION BETWEEN TRADES
20 05 10 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING H.
01-13-2012
Minimum acceptable motor efficiencies are tabulated here. Motors used in variable speed applications shall be rated in accordance with NEMA Revision 1, Part 31.40.4.2 with 1,600 volt insulation and meet the minimum tabulated efficiencies at full-rated RPM. See individual product specifications for performance of chiller drive motors and other assemblies that have an energy efficiency rating. Typical Calculated Performance Data Minimum Motor Efficiencies
1.02
1200 RPM (Nom.)
1800 RPM (Nom.)
3600 RPM (Nom.)
Motor Horsepower
ODP
TEFC
ODP
TEFC
ODP
TEFC
5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100
88.5 89.5 90.2 91.0 91.0 91.7 92.4 93.0 93.0 93.6 93.6 94.1
88.5 89.5 89.5 90.2 91.0 91.7 92.4 93.0 93.6 93.6 94.1 94.1
87.5 88.5 89.5 91.0 91.0 92.4 93.0 93.0 94.1 94.1 94.1 94.1
88.5 91.0 91.0 91.0 91.7 92.4 93.6 93.6 93.6 94.1 94.5 95.0
85.5 87.5 88.5 89.5 90.2 91.0 91.0 92.4 92.4 93.0 93.0 93.6
87.5 88.5 89.5 90.2 90.2 91.0 91.0 91.7 92.4 94.1 94.1 94.1
COORDINATION A.
The Plumbing, Fire Protection, HVAC, and Electrical items are listed in the Coordination Schedule, with key letters and numbers to identify the responsibility of each Contractor. The following two (2) paragraphs describe the key numbers and letters.
B.
Combinations of Contractors doing the different parts of the work are identified as follows: 1. To be furnished and installed by Plumbing, Fire Protection, or HVAC Contractor supplying the equipment. 2. To be furnished and installed by Electrical Contractor. 3. To be furnished by Plumbing, Fire Protection, or HVAC Contractor and installed by Electrical Contractor. 4. To be furnished by Owner and installed by Plumbing, Fire Protection, or HVAC Contractor. 5. To be furnished by Owner and installed by Electrical Contractor.
C.
The items to be furnished are identified by key letters as follows: A - Disconnect B - Line voltage starter C - Reduced voltage starter D - Combination disconnect starter E - Factory pre-wired control panel with integral starter F - Variable Frequency controller G - Duplex outlet
COORDINATION BETWEEN TRADES
20 05 10 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 1.03
01-13-2012
COORDINATION SCHEDULE ITEMS
A
Fire Protection: Jockey pump Fire pump Air compressor
B
C
D
2
2 2 2 2
G
1 1 1 2 1 1
2 2
HVAC: Cabinet unit heater Exhaust fan Supply fan Wall air conditioner Air cooled condensing unit Rooftop unit Unit heater (electric)
F
1 1 1
2
Plumbing: Water heater Recirculating pump Disposer Electric water cooler Water pressure booster pump Sump pump/sewage ejector Automatic faucets Point-of-use electric water
E
1 2 2 2 2 2 2
1 2 2 2
A
B
1 1 1 1 C
D
E
F
G
END OF SECTION
COORDINATION BETWEEN TRADES
20 05 10 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
20 05 15 SUBMITTALS
PART 1 1.01
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION A.
For general requirements, refer to the GENERAL CONDITIONS and Division 1.
B.
Materials and equipment installed in this work shall meet all the requirements of the Contract Documents and no materials or equipment shall be ordered until submittals are reviewed and approved by the Contractor, Architect, and Engineer.
C.
Contractors assume all responsibility for changes required as a result of work performed, or equipment ordered, by the Contractor prior to submittal approval.
D.
Submit complete copies of the catalog data or Drawings for each manufactured item of equipment and each component to be used in the work as required in the table below. Catalog data shall include specific performance data, utility requirements, service area required, material description, rating, capacity, working pressure, dimensional data, material gauge or thickness, wiring diagrams, brand name, catalog number, and general type.
E.
Submittals reviewed by the Engineer shall not take precedence over the Contract Documents, and the Engineer's review shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility for complying with the Drawings or Specifications, nor from the responsibility for providing proper clearance and coordination with other Trades.
F.
When submitted for review, all shop Drawings shall bear the Contractor's certification that he/she has reviewed, checked, and approved the shop drawings, that they have been coordinated with the requirements of the project and the provisions of the Contract Documents, and that he/she has verified all field measurements and construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data. Submittals without a Contractor's approval will not be reviewed and will be returned.
G.
Submittals shall include the complete package of equipment materials, piping, and insulation pertaining to that piece of equipment. A package of equipment requiring long lead times may be submitted earlier.
H.
The Engineer's review and approval does not extend to means, methods, manners, techniques, sequences, procedure of construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. This is solely the Contractor's responsibility.
I.
Shop Drawings that are submitted, but are not required by the table below, will not be reviewed, and they will not be returned.
J.
Shop Drawings that are indicated to be provided for Record Purposes only will not be reviewed, and they will not be returned.
SUBMITTALS
20 05 15 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 1.02
1.03
01-13-2012
CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A.
Completely review and approve shop Drawings, product data, and samples prior to submittal.
B.
Determine and verify: 1. Field measurements 2. Field construction criteria 3. Catalog numbers and similar data 4. Conformance with Specifications 5. Quantities
C.
Coordinate each submittal with requirements of the work and the Contract Documents and other Trades.
D.
Notify the Architect in writing, at the time of submittal, of any deviations in the submittals from the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor must boldly note all deviations on the submittal.
E.
Make submittals promptly in accordance with the approved schedule and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the work of the Contractor or any other Contractor.
F.
Correct or change and then resubmit rejected submittals as required until approved. The Contractor must clearly note all revisions on resubmitted submittals. Resubmittals without the revisions noted may be returned without review.
G.
Do not begin fabrication or work that requires submittals until approved submittals are returned.
CERTIFICATIONS A.
Provide: 1. Test Agency results verifying capacities, operating conditions and power requirements at design conditions. Test Agencies are to be hired by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense. 2. Manufacturer's Statement of Compliance with Standards discussed in individual Specification Sections. 3. Equipment labels indicating Certification requirements. 4. Quality standard designations on each unit piece, for example, each pipe length, pressure vessel or valve. 5. Typed verification that noted mixes, chemical compositions and testing procedures were complied with. 6. Other Certifications listed in other Sections of the Specifications.
SUBMITTALS
20 05 15 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 1.04
01-13-2012
REQUIRED SUBMITTAL INFORMATION (ALSO REFER TO DIVISION 1) A.
Submittal Transmittal 1. Provide the following information on the Transmittal Form for each submittal: a. Project name b. Specification number for each submittal item required in table below c. Item description, as listed for each submittal item required in table below. Where equipment is identified by number or tag on the documents, use the same identification on the submittal. d. Specification number and item description (b and c, preceding) for each submittal if more than one (1) submittal is sent under one (1) transmittal form. e. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. f. Bid package number. 2. Submittal transmittal forms not properly identified with the preceding information will be returned (without review) to the Contractor.
B.
Shop Drawing Requirements 1. Shop Drawings – Provide catalog cuts, Drawings, warranties, motor efficiencies and power factor information (where applicable), wiring diagrams (where applicable), performance curves and characteristics. The total number of copies submitted will be as described in Division 1, but not less than seven (7) copies will be submitted. The submittals will be returned to the Contractor, who will make and distribute as many copies as needed. Only prints with the approved stamp printed on them shall be permitted on the site. 2. Color Samples of the following items are to be provided: a. Cabinet Unit Heaters b. Louvers
C.
Submit ductwork layout shop Drawings for record purposes only after coordination between all Contractors has occurred. Drawings shall be at 1/4 inch equals 1 foot scale and shall include duct, top and bottom elevations with enlarged sections and elevation plans as necessary. Coordinate size and location of ductwork with structure, piping, lighting, equipment, conduit, bus ducts, ceiling construction, and clear height above and other items that may present a potential conflict. These Drawings will not be reviewed or returned.
D.
Submit HVAC piping layout shop Drawings for record purposes only after coordination between all Contractors has occurred. Drawings to be a 1/4 inch equals 1 foot scale with enlarged sections and elevation plans as necessary. Identify all valve locations, as well as all piping and support elevations. Coordinate size and location of ductwork with structure, ductwork, lighting, equipment, conduit, bus ducts, ceiling construction, and Owner's desired clear headroom. These Drawings will not be reviewed or returned.
E.
Certain Fire Protection Shop Drawings listed in the table below are to be provided to the Engineer for record purposes only. The final approval for these systems is by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Provide these submittals to the AHJ for their approval prior to installing work. The Engineer will not review or return these Drawings.
SUBMITTALS
20 05 15 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING F.
01-13-2012
Each Contractor shall submit information on the equipment items as listed in the following table. Identify each item with Specification numbers.
Section #
Item
Provide for Approval
Provide for Record Purposes Only
General Items for Plumbing, Fire Protection, and HVAC 20 05 05 20 05 20 20 05 35 20 05 40 20 05 45 20 05 61
Suppliers and manufacturers list Record and information booklets Fire stops through floors and walls Piping expansion, noise and vibration isolation Hangers, supports and inserts Power factor correction
X X X X X X
Fire Protection Contract Items 20 05 99 21 12 01 21 12 28 21 13 13 21 13 16 21 13 17 21 31 13
Certificate for approval from state fire marshal Standpipe system Fire valve cabinets Wet sprinkler piping system Dry sprinkler piping system Air compressors Electric fire pump
X X X X X X X
Plumbing Contract Items 22 11 01 22 11 26 22 13 29 22 14 29 22 33 13 22 33 37 22 42 01
Water service piping system - Water Meter Variable speed water booster pumps Sewage ejectors Sump pumps Point-of-use electric water heaters Electric water heaters Plumbing fixtures
X X X X X X X
HVAC Contract Items 23 05 95 23 09 33 23 31 10 23 31 13 23 33 14 23 34 17 23 37 13 23 62 13 23 74 (14)(16) 23 81 16 23 82 29 23 82 40
HVAC systems balancing Temperature control systems Low-velocity ductwork - Fabrication Drawings Kitchen hood exhaust ductwork - Fabrication Drawings Fire dampers Exhaust fans Grilles, registers and diffusers Air-cooled condensing units Rooftop air-conditioning units Wall air conditioners Cabinet unit heaters Propeller unit heaters
X X X X X X X X X X X X
END OF SECTION
SUBMITTALS
20 05 15 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
20 05 20 RECORD AND INFORMATION BOOKLETS
PART 1 1.01
DESCRIPTION A.
See Division 1 for general requirements.
B.
Submit draft manual to the Architect for review and approval thirty (30) days before final inspection is due.
C.
After approval, submit two (2) copies of approved booklets to the Owner and obtain receipt. (See Section 20 05 99, "Requirements for Contract Completion.")
PART 2 2.01
GENERAL
PRODUCTS
MANUALS A.
Manuals shall be loose leaf, three-ring, hardcover binders. Material shall be typewritten or printed (in English) and fully legible. Each section shall be divided by labeled tabs and organized by Specification number.
B.
The following items, together with any other necessary pertinent data, shall be included in each Record and Information Booklet: 1. Each manual to be labeled on front cover with Project name, Contract, Contractor's name, Architect's name, Engineer's name, and date of Project Completion. 2. Manufacturers' names, nearest factory representative (including postal and e-mail address, telephone and fax number), and model and serial numbers of components of systems. 3. Name, postal and e-mail address, telephone and fax number of contact persons handling warranty work and issues. 4. Operating instructions, including start-up and shut-down procedures. 5. Maintenance and lubrication instructions, including routine and emergency service information and instructions. 6. Parts list with numbers of replaceable items (such as couplings and packings). Include sources of supply, with postal and e-mail address, telephone and fax number. 7. One (1) approved copy of each shop Drawing submitted. 8. Temperature control diagrams. 9. Valve charts. 10. Written warranties. 11. Belt sizes, types, and lengths. 12. Wiring diagrams, as actually wired. 13. Testing and balancing reports. 14. Copy of Owner's statement concerning completion of instruction period (see Section 20 05 99, "Requirements for Contract Completion").
RECORD AND INFORMATION BOOKLETS
20 05 20 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
15. Routine and 24-hour emergency service and repair information: a. Name, post and e-mail address and telephone and fax number of servicing agencies - routine and emergency. b. Names of personnel to be contacted for service arrangements - routine and emergency. 2.02
CONTROL DIAGRAM AND VALVE CHART A.
In the main Mechanical Room or location designated by Owner's Representative, mount approved copy in a neat frame with backing under glass or within a plastic jacket. END OF SECTION
RECORD AND INFORMATION BOOKLETS
20 05 20 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
20 05 25 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, AND PROTECTION OF UTILITIES
PART 1 1.01
1.02
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION A.
Provide all protection, removal, and relocation of existing utilities and all excavation and backfilling (including concrete) associated with the work of this Division. Protect above grade and below grade utilities that are to remain.
B.
Locate all existing utilities and equipment, in all areas of work, and record the actual locations. Take extreme care during excavations to avoid interruption of utilities. Protect above grade and below grade utilities that are to remain.
C.
Disconnect all utilities designated for removal or relocation, in conformance with the requirements of the utility company and the Owner.
D.
Cooperate with other Contractors and the utility company to protect existing utilities and avoid disruption of service. Repair damaged utilities.
E.
Restore or repair to their existing condition all lawns, planting areas, curbs, paving, streets, and walks damaged by the work of this Division.
F.
Coordinate the timing of excavation and backfilling with the work of other Contractors.
G.
Protect plant life, lawns, and other features remaining as a portion of final landscaping. Coordinate with General Trades Contractor.
H.
Protect benchmarks, existing structures, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavation equipment and vehicular traffic.
I.
In general, conform to the requirements of Division 2, except as specifically modified in this Section.
EXCAVATION A.
Excavations are to be open cuts from the surface. Undercuts are prohibited.
B.
Maintain 5 feet clear between trench and parallel building footing. When parallel trenches are required to be deeper than the footing, maintain a clear distance at least 1 1/2 times the vertical distance below the bottom of the footing or 5 feet, whichever is greater.
C.
Where necessary, keep excavations free of standing water by drainage or pumping.
D.
Keep excavations free of frost by covering, heating, or both.
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, AND PROTECTION OF UTILITIES
20 05 25 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
1.03
E.
If soil at planned elevation is found unsuitable for support of sewers, manholes, mechanical equipment, and materials, make provisions for proper support, and Contract price will be adjusted accordingly.
F.
To prevent surface water from draining into excavation, grade top perimeter of excavation.
G.
Hand trim excavation. Remove loose matter.
H.
Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock up to 1/3 cubic yard measure by volume.
I.
Notify Architect of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected work in area until notified to resume work.
J.
Correct areas over excavated by error.
EXCAVATION SAFETY A.
PART 2 2.01
01-13-2012
The Contractor has the responsibility to comply with all governing Codes and Ordinances regarding safety of open excavations. This responsibility includes the use of all sheet piling, bracing, shoring, sheathing, warning lights, barricades, etc., that may be required. Such material will remain the Contractor's property upon completion of the work.
PRODUCTS
FILL MATERIALS A.
Granular Material: Material shall consist of natural or synthetic mineral aggregate such as broken or crushed rock, gravel, or sand; graded in accordance with ANSI/ASTM C136 within the following limits: Sieve Size 2 1/2 inches 1 inch No. 4 No. 40 No. 200
Percent Passing 100 70 to 100 25 to 100 5 to 50 0 to 10
ODOT #310. B.
Pea Gravel: Natural stone; washed, free of clay, shale, organic matter; graded in accordance with ANSI/ASTM C136, to the following: 1. Minimum Size: 1/4 inch. 2. Maximum Size: 5/8 inch.
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, AND PROTECTION OF UTILITIES
20 05 25 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING C.
01-13-2012
Sand: Natural river or bank sand; washed: free of silt, clay, loam, friable or soluble materials, or organic matter graded in accordance with ANSI/ASTM C136, within the following limits: Sieve Size No. 4 No. 14 No. 50 No. 100 No. 200
Percent Passing 100 10 to 100 5 to 90 4 to 30 0
D.
Subsoil: Reused, select onsite or borrow soil materials conforming to the following: 1. ASTM D2487 Soil Classification Groups GW, GC, GM, SW, SC, SM, CL, and ML. 2. Less than 3% organic material by weight. 3. Free of unstable or unsuitable material or construction debris.
E.
Coarse Material: Coarse aggregate, washed gravel, carbonate stone, graded within the following limits. Sieve Size 1 1/2 inches 1 inch 1/2 inch No. 4 No. 8
Percent Passing 100 95 to 100 25 to 60 0 to 10 0 to 5
ODOT #57 F.
Concrete: Structural concrete conforming to Section 03 30 00 with a compressive strength of 1500 psi.
G.
Drainage Fill: #8 Stone – ODOT #703.
H.
Crushed Stone or Crushed Gravel: The aggregate shall be crushed carbonate stone or crushed gravel, graded in accordance with ANSI/ASTM C136 within the following limits: Sieve Size 2 inch (50 mm) 1 inch (25.0 mm) 3/4 inch (19.0 mm) No. 4 (4.75 mm) No. 30 (600 µm) No. 200 (75 µm)
Total Percent Passing 100 70-100 50-90 30-60 9-33 0-13
Prior to placing, aggregate shall have a reasonably uniform moisture content at or near optimum for compaction. ODOT #304
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, AND PROTECTION OF UTILITIES
20 05 25 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 2.02
BEDDING AND BACKFILL A.
Bedding Materials: 1. Coarse Material (ODOT #57) - round/not crushed 2. Drainage Fill (ODOT #703) - round/not crushed 3. Pea Gravel 4. Sand
B.
Backfill Materials: 1. Below Floor Slabs: Coarse Material (ODOT #57), Drainage Fill (ODOT #73), Pea Gravel, Crushed Stone or Gravel (ODOT #304) and Granular Material (ODOT #310) compacted to 100% standard Proctor Density (ASTM D698-91). 2. Below Asphalt, Concrete or Plazas: Crushed Stone or Gravel (ODOT #304) and Granular Material (ODOT #310) compacted to 98% standard Proctor density (ASTM D698-91). 3. Lawn Areas: Suitable native material compacted to 95% standard Proctor density (ASTM D698-91).
C.
Prohibited Materials: Backfill may not contain large rocks (over 2 inches), building materials, masonry debris, cinders, rubbish, wood or other material subject to decay, or material prone to damage buried portions of the work. The use of grits for backfill is prohibited.
PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
BACKFILL A.
Where unstable or wet soil in trench bottom requires over excavation to firm soil, and in areas of accidental undercutting, backfill to planned bottom elevation with crushed stone, tamped firmly in place.
B.
Backfill only when exact locations of lines and equipment have been recorded and all tests and inspections have been completed.
C.
Do not use fill that is frozen or place fill on frozen ground.
D.
Allow and pay for compaction control testing by the Soils Engineer retained under Division 2.
E.
During backfilling operation, install a continuous 6 inch wide vinyl plastic tape with printing identifying buried service, 12 inches below finished grade.
F.
In trenches below footings or walls, provide concrete encasement for full width and height of trench, extending 1 foot beyond each edge of footing or walls.
G.
Where top of pipe is within 24 inches of driving or parking surface, provide concrete encasement in pipe trenches. Top of encasement to be minimum 12 inches above top of pipe.
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, AND PROTECTION OF UTILITIES
20 05 25 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
H.
For all lines below slabs on grade within building, all sanitary and storm lines outside building, all lines accidentally or intentionally undercut, and in other locations as may be required by governing Codes (except where concrete encasement is required), provide pipe bedding of pea gravel or course sand, 4 inches below pipe and 12 inches above pipe.
I.
To impede natural flow of groundwater, provide clay bulkheads (of native materials), minimum 3 feet long, across full width of pipe trenches at 100 foot intervals. Extend bulkheads to 12 inches above top of pipe.
J.
Provide washed gravel backfill in trenches containing concrete encased underground ducts. Top of gravel 6 inches minimum above top of duct.
K.
Provide manufacturer recommended backfill around underground sumps, interceptors, meter pits, catch basins, and tanks. END OF SECTION
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, AND PROTECTION OF UTILITIES
20 05 25 - 5
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
20 05 30 BASES AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 1.01
SUPPORT STEEL A.
PART 2 2.01
In general, all hangers, concrete anchor bolts, brackets, and other steel supports incidental to the work of this Division are to be provided by this Division's Contractor. Conform to the quality standards in Division 5. Only major support framing shown on the structural Drawings is to be provided by the others. For the proper execution of this work, provide all pertinent dimensions, details, and weights to those others.
PRODUCTS
PREFABRICATED ROOF CURBS A.
Construction: Minimum 18 gauge galvanized steel, continuous welded seams, mitered corners, pressure treated wood nailer strip, 12 inches minimum height above finished roof elevation, and counterflashing with lag screws. Where curb is used for equipment support, provide integral base plates and internal reinforcing as required to support equipment load. Where curb is around a roof penetration, provide 1 1/2 inch thick, 3 lb. density rigid fiberglass insulation. Provide pitched roof curb as required to keep equipment level.
B.
Manufacturers: Pate Company, Louvers & Dampers, Inc., Vent Products Company, Swarthwout, Inc., Shipman Industries, or Thy-Curb.
PART 3 3.01
GENERAL
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Other Contractors, as appropriate, shall provide roof openings and installation of roof curbs.
B.
The HVAC Contractor shall coordinate the size and location of all roof curbs.
C.
Provide weathertight curb caps if equipment cannot be set immediately. END OF SECTION
BASES AND SUPPORTS
20 05 30 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
20 05 35 SLEEVES, SEALS AND FIRESTOPS
PART 1 1.01
1.02
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION A.
Furnish sleeves for pipe and duct penetrations through precast concrete, masonry, and concrete construction or where piping or ductwork passes through walls, through smokerated or fire-rated separations, and equipment room walls and floors.
B.
Provide watertight, corrosive service, oil-resistant service, and fire rated seals and firestops as specified herein.
C.
Use sleeving with absolutely watertight seal for piping passing through all foundation walls, floor slabs on grade, and other below grade penetrations into building.
D.
Provide dimensions and locations of openings for sleeves, piping, ducts, louvers, grilles, and similar items to the Contractor requiring the information.
E.
Carefully coordinate and check locations of sleeves immediately before and after each concrete pour and masonry installation.
F.
Provide approved firestop materials around all penetrations through fire-rated construction walls and floors per ASTM E814 and ASTM E119, including but not limited to pipes, ducts, drains, closet flanges, conduits, and raceways.
G.
At no additional cost to the Owner, correct unacceptable seals and firestops, and provide additional inspection as necessary to verify compliance with this Specification.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Firestop materials shall be classified by UL as "fill, void, or cavity materials" and "through penetration firestop systems."
B.
Firestop materials shall conform to both Flame (F) and Temperature (T) ratings as tested by nationally accepted test agencies per ASTM E814 or UL 1479 Fire Tests of ThroughPenetration Firestops. 1. The F rating shall be a minimum of one (1) hour but not less than the fire-resistance rating of the assembly being penetrated. 2. Conduct the fire test with a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01 inches of water column.
C.
Firestop materials and equipment used shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's written installation instructions. Installer shall be experienced, certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by the firestopping manufacturer as having been provided the necessary training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Note that a manufacturer's willingness to sell its firestopping products to the Contractor or to an Installer engaged by the Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer.
SLEEVES, SEALS AND FIRESTOPS
20 05 35 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
1.03
1.04
01-13-2012
D.
Firestop materials shall be expanded to fill cavities or provide adhesion to substrates that will maintain seal under normal expected movements of substrates.
E.
For those firestop applications that exist for which no UL-tested system is available through a manufacturer, a manufacturer's engineering judgment derived from similar UL system designs or other tests will be submitted to local authorities having jurisdiction for their review and approval prior to installation. Engineering judgment Drawings must follow requirements set forth by the International Firestop Council.
SUBMITTALS A.
Submit the following in accordance with Section 20 05 15, "Submittals": 1. Manufacturer's product data sheets indicating product characteristics, performance, and limiting criteria. 2. Manufacturer's installation instruction for each type of seal or firestop required by the project. 3. Written certification that firestop systems meet firestop requirements specified herein.
B.
To be included in Record and Information Booklets: 1. One (1) copy of each approved submittal.
MANUFACTURERS A.
Seals: 1. "Link-Seal" by Thunderline Corporation 2. CSD Sealing Systems 3. Calpico 4. Wayne 5. Michigan 6. Metraflex
B.
Firestop materials: 1. Hilti 2. 3M 3. CSD Sealing Systems 4. Johns-Manville 5. Tremco 6. Rectorseal 7. Proset Systems 8. Nelson 9. Firestop "Flame Safe" 10. STI
SLEEVES, SEALS AND FIRESTOPS
20 05 35 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING PART 2 2.01
2.02
2.03
2.04
01-13-2012
PRODUCTS
SLEEVE MATERIAL A.
For sleeves less than 8 inches in diameter, use machine cut, standard weight, black steel pipe. Fabricate sleeves 8 inches in diameter and larger from 12 gauge galvanized steel sheet.
B.
Use copper sleeves for bare copper piping.
C.
Sleeves to be large enough for insulation to be continuous or for seals to be installed, but clearance all around to be less than 1/4 inch for both insulated and uninsulated pipes that penetrate walls and slabs.
D.
Proset system prefabricated fire-rated sleeves may be installed as an option for poured-inplace concrete or through cored holes in floors or masonry walls.
E.
Provide with waterstop anchor flange at midpoint where penetrating below grade floor slab or exterior structure at or below grade. Sleeves shall have a full-length welded intermediate flange and be imbedded in masonry. The Contractor may provide steel wall sleeves by Link-Seal or Proset Systems Prefabricated Sleeve System.
SEALS A.
Modular Mechanical Type: 1. Seals shall consist of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between conduit and sleeve. 2. Seal assembly shall have steel bolts and nuts and rubber sealing element for service and environment under which assembly will be used. Seal shall have a pressure resistance rating of 20 psig.
B.
Sealing Plug Type: 1. Seals shall consist of two (2) identical piece plugs made of synthetic rubber with one edge flanged, serrated profile on the outside, and on the inside a series of ridges that compress and assure a tight seal. Seal shall have a pressure resistance of 15 psig at the plug base and 30 psig at the flange. Rubber grade shall be suitable for the service and environment under which sealing plug will be used.
WATERTIGHT SEALS A.
Modular, mechanical-type watertight seals shall have zinc galvanized bolts and nuts with EPDM rubber sealing element. Seals shall be Link-Seal, Type C.
B.
Sealing-plug-type watertight seals shall be made of EPDM rubber. Seals shall be by CSD Sealing Systems. OPTION: Proset System Elastomeric Seals.
FIRE-RATED SEALS A.
Sealing-plug-type fire-rated seals shall be made of fire resistance rated rubber for three (3) hour fire resistance rating. OPTION: Proset System Elastomeric Seals.
SLEEVES, SEALS AND FIRESTOPS
20 05 35 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 2.05
2.06
CORROSIVE-SERVICE SEALS A.
Modular, mechanical-type corrosive-service seals have stainless steel bolts and nuts with rubber sealing element that is highly resistant to most organic compounds, acids, alkalis, and related chemicals. Seals shall be Link-Seal, Type S.
B.
Sealing-plug-type corrosive-service seals shall be made by Viton rubber. Seals shall be by CSD Sealing Systems.
FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS A.
Penetration sealants: 1. 3M Brand "Fire Barrier" caulk, putty or penetrating sealing systems 2. CSD Sealing Systems CSD-FW and CSD-F caulk and putty 3. Johns-Manville "Cerafiber" 4. Rectorseal "Metacaulk" 5. Tremco 6. Hilti 7. Firestop "Flame Safe" 8. Spec Seal
B.
Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each other, the substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the firestopping manufacturer based on testing and field experience. Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill material. Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for the designated fire resistance-rated systems. Contractor shall be responsible for using the correct method and type of fire sealant and fire-rated seals in each type of installation.
C.
All firestop installations shall be UL rated.
PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
CUTTING A.
Cut sleeves through walls flush with each surface. Unused sleeves shall extend beyond wall surface and be capped on each end.
B.
Cut sleeves 3/4 inch above finished floors or concrete curbs and 4 inches above floors in equipment rooms, rooms with floor drains, and shafts. Sleeves through waterproof floors shall project a minimum of 4 inches above the floor. Cut bottom of sleeve flush with bottom of floor.
C.
Core drill holes for sleeves in existing construction.
D.
Patching shall be by others at this Contractor's expense.
SLEEVES, SEALS AND FIRESTOPS
20 05 35 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 3.02
3.03
01-13-2012
INSTALLATION OF SLEEVES A.
Carefully coordinate and check locations of sleeves immediately before and after each concrete pour and masonry installation. Install cast-in-place sleeves subject to the following limitations: 1. Do not embed aluminum without prior approval of coating material. 2. Do not displace reinforcing steel. 3. Maintain a center-to-center spacing of at least 3 diameters of sleeve. 4. Do not install sleeves in any concrete beam, unless specifically shown on the structural Drawings.
B.
Give other Contractors as appropriate locations and sizes of all openings required for sleeve installation before construction of masonry or concrete walls and floors is started. If it is necessary to cut into the new work of other Trades due to the failure of this Contractor to provide proper notification, the other Trades shall do the cutting in at this Contractor's expense. Patching shall be done in the same fashion.
C.
Core drill hole for sleeves in existing construction after locations have been approved by the Structural Engineer and General Contractor.
D.
Size sleeves with 1/4 inch minimum and 1 inch maximum clearance all around pipe or pipe insulation.
E.
Piping is not to bear on sleeves. Install sleeves plumb with respect to wall.
F.
Minimize gaps between sleeve and ducts and pipes passing through walls and floors. Seal space up to a 1/2 inch gap with sealant or caulking. Close off space greater than 1/2 inch gap with sheet metal and seal airtight. To maintain fire rating of structure, pack all firerated separation sleeves with fire retardant or other noncombustible material. To fill space around all sleeves leading into exposed areas, use material compatible with adjacent construction and finish.
G.
Plug, pack, and finish unused sleeves to match adjacent surface and be compatible with their ratings.
H.
Use sleeves where round or oval duct openings are required through exposed walls, smoke or fire partitions, or equipment room walls. Close off all spaces around rectangular ducts through these walls.
I.
Provide chrome plated wall or floor escutcheons, sized to cover opening and seal, for all exposed installations.
INSTALLATION OF SEALS AND FIRESTOPS A.
Clean surfaces and substrates of dirt, oil, loose materials and other foreign materials that may affect the proper bond or installation of seals and firestopping.
SLEEVES, SEALS AND FIRESTOPS
20 05 35 - 5
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
3.04
01-13-2012
B.
Do not apply seals and firestopping to surfaces previously painted or treated with a sealer curing compound or similar product. Remove coatings as required in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide primers, as required, that conform to manufacturer's recommendations for various substrates and conditions.
C.
Follow manufacturer's written instructions for installation of seals and firestopping.
D.
To ensure an effective smoke seal and to maintain the assembly's fire-resistance rating, install firestops with sufficient pressure to fill seal holes, voids, and openings.
E.
Tool or trowel exposed surfaces. Remove excess firestop material promptly as work progresses and upon completion.
F.
Fill and surround unused sleeves with firestop material. Sleeve ends. Contractor may use blind sealing plugs.
G.
Install watertight seals for all below grade penetrations of piping into the building.
H.
To maintain the fire-rating of the structure, pack all openings in fire-rated walls and floors and between sleeves and pipes with noncombustible material. Pipe insulation shall not be continued through a rated partition, unless sealant assembly is listed for use with continuous insulation. Maintain vapor barriers at all penetrations.
I.
Install oil-resistant-service seals in environment where oils, fuels, solvents, and other petroleum-base products are used.
J.
Install corrosive-service seals in environments where organic materials, acids, alkalis, and related chemicals are used.
INSPECTION A.
Examine seals and firestops to ensure proper installation and full compliance with this Specification. Work shall be accessible until inspection and approval by the applicable Code authorities.
B.
At no additional cost to the Owner, correct unacceptable seals and firestops, and provide additional inspection to verify compliance with this Specification.
C.
Maintain a current, legible copy of the manufacturer's written instructions for installation of seals and firestopping at the project site, for all products being used on the Project. Make installation instructions available on request for all Inspecting Authorities, the Architect, and the Engineer. END OF SECTION
SLEEVES, SEALS AND FIRESTOPS
20 05 35 - 6
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
20 05 40 PIPING EXPANSION, NOISE AND VIBRATION ISOLATION
PART 1 1.01
1.02
DESCRIPTION A.
Provide thermal expansion control for all piping.
B.
Isolate all piping for both noise and vibration transmission.
C.
To prevent damage to building, equipment, joists, hangers, and piping, provide expansion loops, expansion joints, guides, anchors, and offsets in piping systems as necessary to accurately control pipe movement resulting from equipment operation or thermal gradients.
D.
Provide pump connectors for each pump 1 hp and larger.
E.
Provide flexible connectors on all piping to equipment 5 hp and larger and where shown on equipment of lower horsepower.
F.
Provide expansion joints and accompanying anchors and guides where shown, or where expansion cannot be provided for with loops and offsets.
MANUFACTURERS A.
PART 2 2.01
2.02
GENERAL
Metraflex Company, Flexible Metal Hose, Wheatley, Proco, Mason Industries, or General Rubber.
PRODUCTS
PUMP CONNECTORS (HYDRONIC SYSTEMS) A.
1 1/2 Inch and Smaller: Metraflex SST, 250 degrees F, 400 psig, Type 321 stainless steel corrugated inner tubing and outer wire braid shield, threaded ends.
B.
2 Inches and Larger: Metraflex "Metrasphere," 240 degrees F, 225 psig, neoprene and nylon molded globe, bias-ply tire cord reinforcing, cadmium-plated 150 ASA steel companion flanges. Provide restraining cables or rods to limit axial growth.
EXPANSION JOINTS A.
Stainless steel bellows and elements, cast iron equalizing rings, tie-rods and pipe connections as required, 300 psig working pressure. Use packless, internally guided type for lines 2 inches and smaller. Provide internal liner for steam systems. Metraflex Model MC.
PIPING EXPANSION, NOISE AND VIBRATION ISOLATION
20 05 40 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 2.03
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A.
2.04
Flexible rubber connector, 22 degrees F, 150 psig, 150 lb. ASA flanges, steel retaining ring.
PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES A.
All heating hot water and low-pressure steam lines shall be guided by a painted steel cylinder guide assembly with welded mounting brackets and two piece pipe clamp "Spider" assembly.
B.
All high-pressure steam lines shall be supported on painted steel "T-pipe" guided slides, welded to pipe and base plate welded to support steel. Pipe slide and slide plate both to have factory bonded PTFE coating. Size units to conform with manufacturer's ratings for elevated temperatures. Typical support shall allow movement in axial direction only (PHD Fig. 690, Type 3 or approved equal). Within 12 feet of bends (or as indicated on the Drawings), support shall be allowed for horizontal movement in any direction (PHD Fig. 690, Type 6 or equivalent).
C.
Provide galvanized steel U bolts (PHD Fig. 91 or equivalent) nutted firmly in place for alignment, with insulation guard and shield on heating hot water, low-pressure steam, condensate, condensate pump discharge, and chilled-water systems, installed on stands or racks.
PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Line Expansion: 1. U Bends: In all piping subject to expansion and contraction, install U Bends or loops in piping, in accordance with ASHRAE Equipment Handbook. 2. Expansion Joints: Where space is insufficient to provide U Bends, or where specifically shown or specified, provide expansion joints. Install according to the manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Branch Connections: 1. Make branch connections to mains with a minimum of two (2) 90 degree elbows, and incorporate at least one (1) change of direction in the horizontal plane and one (1) change of direction in the vertical plane before connecting to equipment or fixtures, or dropping into or rising in a wall. 2. Bullhead connections in any piping services are expressly prohibited.
C.
Guides: To preserve alignment and pitch, supplement all loops and expansion joints with adequate guides as close to loops and joints as possible and additionally at recommended intervals from joints. Rigidly secure guides to the structure and ensure that only axial movement is permitted. Provide auxiliary support metal as required to secure guides to structure. Follow the recommendations and guidelines of the Expansion Joint Manufacturer's Association, Inc.
D.
Anchors: Install pipe anchors where required to secure the pipe and totally eliminate movement. Attach the anchors securely to the structure.
PIPING EXPANSION, NOISE AND VIBRATION ISOLATION
20 05 40 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING E.
01-13-2012
Pump Connectors: Install pump connectors according to the manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. Do not use pump connectors to align pump connections with piping. Install connectors with as little initial misalignment or deflection as possible. END OF SECTION
PIPING EXPANSION, NOISE AND VIBRATION ISOLATION
20 05 40 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
20 05 45 HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND INSERTS
PART 1 1.01
1.02
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION A.
Provide hangers, supports, concrete inserts, threaded rods, framing steel, and hardware required for piping, ductwork, and equipment installed under this Division.
B.
Install all necessary inserts, expansion shields, beam clamps, floor supports, and auxiliary steel.
C.
For new concrete installations, furnish and install concrete inserts (when used or required) for the work. Coordinate with other Contractors as appropriate.
D.
So as not to delay construction, the Plumbing, Fire Protection, and HVAC Contractors are responsible for correct locations, size, type, and installation of the concrete inserts for their work. Coordinate work with other Contractors as appropriate.
E.
The main supports shall be provided by the HVAC Contractor and shall include supports for all major, racked plumbing piping. Drawings show general configuration and intent of support systems. Final support dimensions, locations, and pipe elevations to be set by Plumbing Contractor in accordance with the Drawing Plans and Details and with coordination from all other trades. Piping supports shall be prepared and primed in accordance with the requirements of Division 5.
F.
Install wall brackets where required. Provide pipe guides and anchors as required to properly control pipe movement. Method to suit job conditions. Refer to Section 20 05 40, "Piping Expansion, Noise and Vibration Isolation."
G.
Support piping at pumps and equipment from floor, structure or walls, so that piping weight is not supported by pumps or by equipment. Install hangers with vibration isolator on all ductwork and equipment support in the room's housing mechanical equipment. See Section 20 05 80, "Vibration Isolators."
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
All piping supports and parts shall conform to the latest requirements of the Code for Power Piping (ANSI B31.1) and MSS Standard Practice SP-58 and SP-69, except as supplemented or modified by the requirements of this Specification.
B.
Components shall be selected and matched to the load imposed on them.
C.
For ductwork supports, refer to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible" (latest edition).
D.
Items specified in this Section that are used for fire suppression systems shall be UL or FM listed and NFPA approved for the usage.
HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND INSERTS
20 05 45 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 1.03
MANUFACTURERS A.
PART 2 2.01
01-13-2012
Pipe Hangers: PHD, PHP, Michigan Hanger (Erico), Hilti, Kinetics, B-Line, Anvil, or Modern.
PRODUCTS
HANGERS A.
Uninsulated Piping: 1. Steel, Plastic, or Copper: a. 1/2 Inch to 6 Inches: PHD Fig. 151, adjustable swivel ring, steel band, adjusting nut or Fig. 450 adjustable clevis, carbon steel yoke, U-strap, bolt and hex nuts.
B.
Insulated Piping: 1. Cast Iron (Storm), Steel, Plastic or Copper: a. All piping except steam and hot water piping, all sizes: PHD Fig. 450, adjustable clevis, carbon steel yoke, U-strap, bolt, and hex nuts. Provide thermal protector. b. Hot Water Piping: 1. 1/2 Inch to 1 1/2 Inches: PHD Fig. 450, adjustable clevis, carbon steel yoke, U-strap, bolt, and hex nuts. Provide thermal protector. 2. 2 Inches to 16 Inches: PHD Fig. 475, adjustable roller, carbon steel yoke, cast iron roll, rod and hex nuts. c. Hanger size must be sufficient to accommodate pipe and insulation without compressing insulation. 2. Thermal Protector: a. 6 inch long segments of 20 pcf molded fiberglass blocks Hamfab "H-block" or hardwood (oak) blocks supported by PHD Fig. 170, galvanized steel protection shield. Outdoor installations to be hardwood inserts, paraffin-coated. No softwood (pine) wood blocks or wooden dowels will be permitted. Provide a vapor barrier cover over inserts so that the insulation vapor barrier will not be broken. b. Insulated saddle system consisting of a factory-assembled glass-reinforced polypropylene saddle and steel pipe spacer. Assembly shall be rated for at least 40 degrees F to 200 degrees F service. Anvil Figure 260.
C.
Sanitary and Vent Piping: 1. Cast Iron: PHD Fig. 450, adjustable clevis, carbon steel yoke, U-strap, bolt and hex nuts. 2. Plastic: PHD Fig. 440, lightweight, adjustable clevis, carbon steel yoke, U-strap and bolt.
D.
Vertical Piping: 1. Cast Iron, Plastic or Steel Piping: a. 1/2 Inch to 10 Inches: Friction clamp with two point bearing, PHD Fig. 550 series at each floor level. 2. Copper Piping: Copper-plated friction clamp with two point bearing for sizes up to 6 inches, PHD Fig. 552.
HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND INSERTS
20 05 45 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 2.02
SPRING HANGERS A.
2.03
Refer to Section 20 05 80, "Vibration Isolators."
TRAPEZE HANGERS A.
2.04
01-13-2012
Pre-engineered strut or angle iron of sufficient length to support pipes and insulation on individual hangers, roller supports, or saddles with insulation protectors as specified for hangers above; trapeze hanger rod diameter and quantity as required to support total piping load. Loading on any attachment point to the structure shall not exceed 1,000 lbs. Trapeze hangers are to be spaced to not exceed this maximum structural load.
SUPPORTS A.
Hanger for Individual Pipes:
Pipe Size
Inches
Max Pipe Support Spacing Copper Tube or Plastic Pipe Feet
Max Pipe Support Spacing Steel Pipe
Structural Attachment Based on PHD Manufacturer
PHD Hanger Figure
Feet
3/4 or smaller
5 - copper 3 - plastic
7
1
6 - copper 3 - plastic
7
1 1/4
6 - copper 4 - plastic
9
1 1/2
8 - copper 4 - plastic
9
2
8 - copper 4 - plastic
10
2 1/2
9 - copper 4 - plastic
11
3
10 - copper 4 - plastic
12
3 1/2
10 - copper 4 - plastic
12
4
10 - copper 4 - plastic
12
5
10 - copper 4 - plastic
12
HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND INSERTS
Rod Size based on Hanger (Larger rods may be used) Inch
Concrete insert Fig 951 or 950 Beam Clamp Fig 270 w/Fig 259 Concrete insert Fig 951 or 950 Beam Clamp Fig 270 w/Fig 259 Concrete insert Fig 951 or 950 Beam Clamp Fig 270 w/Fig 259 Concrete insert Fig 951 or 950 Beam Clamp Fig 270 w/Fig 259 Concrete insert Fig 951 or 950 Beam Clamp Fig 270 w/Fig 259 Concrete insert Fig 951 or 950 Beam Clamp Fig 270 w/Fig 259 Concrete insert Fig 951 or 950 Beam Clamp Fig 270 w/Fig 259 Concrete insert Fig 951 or 950 Beam Clamp Fig 270 w/Fig 259 Concrete attachment plate Fig 903 Beam clamp fig 350 w/Fig 359 or Fig 360 w/Fig 359 Concrete attachment plate Fig 903 Beam clamp fig 350 w/Fig 359 or Fig 360 w/Fig 359
151 or 450
3/8
151 or 450
3/8
151 or 450
3/8
151 or 450
3/8
151 or 450 or 470 or 475 151 or 450 or 470 or 475 151 or 450 or 470 or 475 151 or 450 or 470 or 475 or 505
3/8
1/2
1/2
1/2
151 or 450 or 470 or 475 or 505
5/8
151 or 450 or 470 or 475 or 505
5/8 or 3/4
20 05 45 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
Pipe Size
Inches
Max Pipe Support Spacing Copper Tube or Plastic Pipe Feet
Max Pipe Support Spacing Steel Pipe
Structural Attachment Based on PHD Manufacturer
01-13-2012
Rod Size based on Hanger (Larger rods may be used)
PHD Hanger Figure
Feet
6
10 - copper 4 - plastic
12
8
10 - copper 4 - plastic
12
10
10 - copper 4 - plastic
12
12
10 - copper 4 - plastic
10
Inch Concrete attachment plate Fig 903 Beam clamp fig 350 w/Fig 359 or Fig 360 w/Fig 359 Concrete attachment plate Fig 903 Beam welded attachment Fig 900 Concrete attachment plate Fig 903 Beam welded attachment Fig 900 Concrete attachment plate Fig 903 Beam welded attachment Fig 900
151 or 450 or 470 or 475 or 505
5/8 or 3/4
151 or 450 or 470 or 475 or 505
7/8
450 or 470 or 475
7/8
450 or 470 or 475
7/8
For fire sprinkler systems, conform to latest NFPA standards required by OBC. B.
Beam Clamps: 1. "C" Clamps: PHD Figs. 270 w/259, 350 w/359, 360 w/359, malleable iron body, steel pointed set screw with lock nut and a minimum of 11 gauge steel retainer strap. Beam clamps by themselves (C-clamps) are expressly prohibited. Provide retainer straps with all beam (C-Clamps). Consult with MSS SP-58 and SP-69 for C-Clamp identification. 2. PHD Fig. 930 steel washer plate, double nutted with threaded rod.
C.
Wall Brackets: PHD Fig. 850 (lightweight 750 lbs. load) or Fig. 855 (medium weight 1,500 lb. load), carbon steel, back plates and bolts. Wall brackets for horizontal piping runs are limited to 10 inch pipe size and smaller.
D.
Hanger Rod on Wood Beams or Trusses: PHD Fig. 50 unwelded eye rods or PHD Fig. 55 welded eye rods with washer and lag bolt. Install lag bolt through entire beam or truss when load exceeds manufacturer's recommended load for lag bolt application. Piping loads on wood structures shall be limited to 600 lbs. Pipes 6 inches and larger in size and main racked utilities shall be supported on pipe stanchions from the floor below.
E.
Pipe Supports on Roof: Support piping on roof with an engineered prefabricated system designed for installation without roof penetrations, flashing, or damage to the roofing material. The system shall consist of bases, made of high-density polypropylene plastics with UV Protection, a hot-dipped galvanized structural steel frame and suitable pipe hangers for the application. Nuts, threaded rods, and washers shall be hot-dipped galvanized, spring nuts and bolts for spring nuts will be electro-plated. System shall be custom designed to fit piping and conduit to be installed and the actual conditions of service. 1. Bases: Injection molded high density/high impact polypropylene with UV-inhibitors and anti-oxidants, conforming to the following: a. Sized as required by loading conditions and as indicated on the Drawings, shop fabricated with inserts for square tubing or threaded rods as required. b. Chemical, insect, and moisture resistant.
HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND INSERTS
20 05 45 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
2.
3.
4. 5.
2.05
2.06
01-13-2012
c. Flammability: No ignition after 10 minutes, 25 kW/m, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1929. d. Bases for Mechanical Attachment: Sealant chamber around penetration point, with injection port for sealing after fastening; beveled lip for sealant bead around entire diameter. Steel Framing: a. Strut Types: 1 5/8 inch or 1 7/8 inch as required for loading conditions. b. Thickness: 12 gauge. c. Form: Roll-formed 3-sided or tubular shape, perforated with holes on three sides. d. Finish: Hot dip galvanize in accordance with ASTM A 123 after fabrication, free of roughness, whiskers, unsightly spangles, icicles, runs, barbs, sags, droplets, and other surface blemishes. e. Do not use tubing or tube steel. Pipe supports and hangers shall conform to MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69 and as follows: a. Fabricate of carbon steel where framing is carbon steel; fabricate of stainless steel where framing is stainless steel; finished same as framing. b. Sizes 2 1/2 Inches and Smaller: Single roller supports for piping subject to expansion and contraction; 3-sided channels and pipe clamps. c. Sizes 3 Inches and Larger: Rollers, clevis hangers, or band hangers, to allow for expansion and contraction without movement of the bases or framing and designed to reduce or eliminate the friction that would otherwise occur between the pipe and the roof membrane. Warranty: 5 year limited warranty to repair or replace any products found to be structurally defective in material or workmanship. Portable Pipe Hangers: PHP Systems and Design, or approved equal by MIRO.
F.
Attachment to Concrete Structures: PHD, Fig. 903 concrete rod attachment plate.
G.
Welded Beam Attachment: PHD, Fig. 900 concrete rod attachment plate.
INSERTS A.
In Concrete: PHD, Fig. 950 wedge type insert, low carbon steel, for up to 600 lb. load.
B.
In precast or already poured concrete: Hilti "Kwik Bolt TZ" concrete fasteners, or approved equal by ITW/Redhead. "Drop-in" type fasteners are not acceptable without written evidence of third-party testing indicating there is no measurable loss of an insert's tensile capacity when concrete cracking occurs where the insert is installed.
FINISH A.
Unless otherwise noted, all hangers and supports to be standard black, except that hangers and supports for exposed exterior applications and applications subject to high humidity shall be hot-dipped galvanized.
HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND INSERTS
20 05 45 - 5
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING PART 3 3.01
3.02
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
PIPING INSTALLATION A.
Install necessary pipe hangers and supports to properly support all piping and to maintain piping uniformly level or vertical (3/4 inch maximum deflection). Hangers to be doublenutted.
B.
Maximum spacing of piping supports shall be per Hanger Table included in this Specification. Provide additional hangers as follows: 1. On both sides of steel or brass, or cast metal valves for pipe sizes 6 inches and larger. 2. Horizontal DWV Plastic Piping: At branch connections and at each change of direction. 3. Vertical DWV Piping: At branch connections, at each change of direction, at each floor, and mid-story, for no more than a 10 foot vertical spacing. Provide additional supports as necessary to maintain piping alignment at the base. 4. Cast Iron Piping: Horizontal at intervals not in excess of the standard lengths of pipe used; vertical 15 foot maximum intervals, at base, and at each floor. 5. At each drop at a pump or other major equipment item. 6. Fire Protection Piping: Locate and space per NFPA requirements.
DUCTWORK HANGER INSTALLATION A.
Install necessary hanger rods and angle iron support brackets to properly support ductwork, insulation, reinforcing, and external loads. Friction clamps are excluded as upper attachment devices.
B.
Maximum spacing of supports to be as follows: Rectangular Ducts 1/2 x Duct Perimeter (Inches) Less than 72 72 to 120
Rod Diameter (Inches)
Spacing (Feet)
3/8 3/8
10 8
Rod Diameter (Inches)
Spacing (Feet)
1/4
12
Round Ducts Duct Diameter (Inches) Through 24
1. Use a pair of rods, one (1) on each side of ductwork. Rods to be uncoated, hot-rolled steel. 2. OPTION: 1 inch wide sheet metal straps may be used on sizes up to 22 inches wide (or 22 inches in diameter), one (1) sheet metal gauge (minimum) thicker than ductwork being supported.
HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND INSERTS
20 05 45 - 6
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 3.03
3.04
01-13-2012
GENERAL INSTALLATION A.
Ceiling grid system shall not be used to support ductwork, electrical conduit, heating or plumbing lines, or any other utility lines. Each utility and the ceiling grid system shall be a separate installation and each shall be independently supported from the building structure. To support ductwork or piping where interferences occur, the Contractor must install trapeze type hangers or supports that shall be located where they do not interfere with access to fire dampers, valves, and other mechanical equipment items.
B.
Where necessary, the Contractor shall furnish and install proper angles or channels for hanger supports between joists. Weld to steel structural members.
C.
Do not support hangers from roof deck.
D.
Use inserts to avoid cutting concrete or masonry. To avoid burning metal deck, use top flange beam clips.
E.
Vertical storm and waste stacks to rest firmly on masonry footings and be firmly supported at each floor.
F.
The following hanger methods are not permitted: 1. Wood, lead, or plastic plugs 2. Perforated band iron 3. Hook chain supports 4. Baling wire, etc. 5. Power-actuated anchors
G.
Whenever possible, use supports, clamps, hangers, etc., designed especially for the equipment to be installed.
H.
Where necessary, furnish and install proper angles or channels or support steel to reinforce the building structure or to spread out the load on the building structure. Weld to steel structural members or attach to concrete structures using inserts or concrete fasteners.
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate drilling, welding, etc., and method of attachment to columns, joists, beams, girts, etc., with Structural Engineer and other Contractors as appropriate before proceeding. END OF SECTION
HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND INSERTS
20 05 45 - 7
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
20 05 50 GENERAL PIPING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 1.01
PIPING SYSTEMS - GENERAL A.
The following instructions apply to all piping systems, except where otherwise noted: 1. Provide unions or flanges at each final connection and at each piece of equipment. Arrange piping and locate unions and flanges to permit easy removal of parts and equipment for inspection and cleaning. Welded connections to equipment are prohibited. 2. Make connections to equipment as detailed on the Drawings and according to the manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Where connection size is smaller than piping make reduction at final connection only (do not reduce size of pipe drop). 4. Provide valves and specialties as required to complete installation of each piece of equipment for proper operation. 5. Install all piping parallel to building lines, level and plumb unless required to slope.
B.
Cleanout and flush water piping systems.
C.
If other means of draining are not provided, install drain valves at all low points to permit complete draining of each of the following: 1. All water systems 2. Fire sprinkler systems (according to NFPA)
D.
Contractor to provide information on chases, sleeves, and openings required for his/her work to other Contractors. This Contractor to assume cost and responsibility for all cutting and patching resulting from improper coordination of the work.
E.
Certified Pipe Welding Bureau. Welds to be stamped at each joint or fitting.
F.
Install dielectric unions at all connections of dissimilar metals.
PART 2 2.01
GENERAL
PRODUCTS
UNIONS A.
Unions in Copper Pipe: Bronze 150 lb. ground joint, cast body, solder end (do not use wrought copper unions). Mueller, Chase, Crane, or Northern Indiana Brass Company.
B.
Unions in Steel Pipe: Black malleable iron, bronze ground ball joint. Mueller, Chase, Crane, or Northern Indiana Brass Company.
C.
Dielectric unions when connecting steel to copper pipe: 250 lb. W.P., insulating gasket, and dielectric insulators. Epco, Dart, Capital, or Watts.
GENERAL PIPING REQUIREMENTS
20 05 50 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING D.
2.02
2.03
Dielectric fittings on flanges when connecting flanges on piping of dissimilar metals: 175 psig W.P., insulating gaskets, dielectric insulators including bolt isolators.
JOINTS A.
Flanges: 1. Through 2 1/2 Inches: Cast iron screwed, 125 lb. or higher as required. 2. 3 Inches and Larger: Steel welding neck, 150 lb. or higher as required.
B.
Gaskets: Asbestos-free, suitable for the intended service. Use dielectric gaskets where joining dissimilar piping material.
C.
Bolts for steel, cast iron, brass, and bronze, for 250 lb. SWP and 450 degrees F or below to be carbon steel, with American Standard, regular, square heads and American Standard, heavy, hexagon grade or better semifinished nuts.
D.
ASTM A307, Grade B, Tee head, high-tensile steel bolts and nuts may be used in mechanical joint pipelines. (Mechanical joints are not to be used with tubing of copper or aluminum alloys.)
E.
Screwed Piping: Use NPT tapered threads.
GROOVED PIPING A.
Where grooved piping systems are allowed by reference in other Sections within this Specification, the installing Contractor must have installed at least five (5) grooved mechanical piping systems.
B.
Install grooved couplings on 2 inch – 24 inch roll-grooved, standard weight Schedule 40 pipe in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's installation instructions. Cut-grooved piping systems will be unacceptable.
C.
Install flexible couplings with the bolt pads metal to metal; rigid (slant bolt pad) couplings shall be installed within the bolt pads metal to metal with equal offset. Installing Contractor shall verify that bolt pad gaps do not exist.
D.
The grooved mechanical coupling manufacturer shall perform on-site installation demonstrations for the Installing Contractor before grooved coupling installation begins.
PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Install each union or flange to permit removal of parts, valves, and equipment and in a position permitting the device or equipment to be removed without disconnecting piping. Use flanged equipment connections exclusively on all steam and condensate systems.
B.
Make reductions in piping lines with reducing coupling or weld fitting reducer. bushings will be permitted.
GENERAL PIPING REQUIREMENTS
No
20 05 50 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
C.
Install piping to provide clearance for personnel passage, headroom, operation of doors or windows, equipment, lighting outlets, and for the Owner's apparatus and equipment. Coordinate pipe runs and elevations with other Contractors before installation. Where interferences develop in the field, pipes may need to be offset or rerouted, at no additional cost to the Owner, as required to resolve interferences.
D.
In pipe spaces to be entered for servicing, offset piping so that all lateral runs are located either near the floor or at least 6 feet above the floor, and all vertical piping is held close to the wall through that height. Keep all piping to the side of the chase wherever possible. Offset vents immediately above the connection to the waste line.
E.
Piping shall not be installed over electrical equipment, motor control centers, or transformers and shall not be installed within elevator shafts or elevator equipment rooms.
F.
Install pipes, valves, fittings, etc. with a minimum of 1/2 inch clearance between the finished covering and other work and between the finished covering of parallel, adjacent pipes.
G.
Use fittings to make changes in pipeline direction. Do not bend or spring piping.
H.
Offset lines around columns, beams, and other obstructions as required. Where special conditions are encountered in the field, arrangement and alignment of piping shall be decided by the Architect and Engineer.
I.
At time of assembly, clean piping components of loose material. After assembly and before putting in service, blow or flush lines free of loose materials. Clean strainer screens and sediment pockets prior to putting the lines in service.
J.
Install valves at service connections to equipment and branch lines from main lines. Install all valves and unions so that they are accessible through ceiling or wall access panel.
K.
Use dielectric unions, shims, gaskets, or coatings to insulate direct contact between pipe, fittings, and hangers of dissimilar metal
L.
Install thermometers and gauges to permit them to be read from floor level.
M.
Securely support all piping from structure with approved hangers, rods, brackets, and accessories.
N.
Where piping is installed in new masonry block walls, coordinate other Contractors as appropriate so that piping extends out through a masonry joint where possible.
O.
Bullhead connections are not allowed.
P.
Where exposed pipes pass through walls, floors, or ceilings of finished rooms, provide chrome-plated escutcheons. Prime-coated black iron escutcheons may be used in unfinished rooms. Protect escutcheons from tool marks.
Q.
Keep pipe level except where a slope is required. Use eccentric reducers to keep bottom of pipe level.
GENERAL PIPING REQUIREMENTS
20 05 50 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
3.02
3.03
3.04
01-13-2012
R.
Avoid trapping of piping.
S.
Install ball valves at pressure gauges and air vents at high points of piping.
T.
Provide a union or bolted flange fitting downstream and within approximately 12 inches of each valve and adjacent to both inlet and outlet of pumps and other equipment.
U.
When copper lines are supplied, install dielectric unions or flanges on water line connections to water heaters and equipment with steel pipe connections.
V.
Provide unions or flanged connections where required for construction or assembling purposes.
WELDED CONNECTIONS A.
Welded joints to be fabricated and stamped by welders qualified and certified for the positions, materials, methods, and equipment being used and as required by enforcing bodies.
B.
Buttweld joints shall have substantially full penetration and recommended bead reinforcement.
C.
Slip-on, socket, and fillet welds to have geometry indicated in the "Code for Power Piping" (ANSI B31.1).
D.
Remove weld scale from joints as work proceeds and at completion.
SOLDERED AND BRAZED CONNECTIONS A.
Joints to have pipe or tubing end reamed to full I.D. after cutting.
B.
Exterior of joint shall be smooth.
C.
Clean with steel wool.
D.
Apply flux to prevent oxidation.
E.
Apply solder or brazing filler material and thoroughly heat to completely melt material and cause it to migrate completely over the mating surfaces.
F.
Solder and brazing work shall comply with ANSI Standard B31.1.
THREADED CONNECTIONS A.
Ream pipe ends of threads to full cross sectional area after cutting. Threads shall conform to ANSI Standard B2.1.
B.
Joints shall be made with TFE tape, applied to male threads only. Option: Use Permatex pipe dope.
GENERAL PIPING REQUIREMENTS
20 05 50 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 3.05
FLANGED CONNECTIONS A.
3.06
3.07
3.08
01-13-2012
Face flanged joints square and true. Install gaskets suitable for the operating temperature and pressure of the fluid or gaseous medium being piped.
PIPE CLEANING A.
Before systems are placed in operation, flush out all water piping systems to remove dirt and grease from pipes and equipment. Clean strainers after each flushing until they remain clean.
B.
For heating and cooling water piping systems, after system has been flushed thoroughly and drained, perform the following steps: 1. Completely fill and circulate through system for four (4) hours at design temperature with a solution of Burman "Pre-Clean." 2. Completely drain and refill system with fresh clean water. 3. Check pH and continue cleaning as recommended by Burman.
C.
Fire protection mains to be flushed at flows required by NFPA-13 and NFPA-24.
PIPING PROHIBITIONS A.
Do not run piping over electrical equipment, across windows, door openings, access panels or lighting fixtures or within 36 inches in front of electrical panels that operate at a voltage of 150 volts or less, or within 42 inches of electrical panels that operate at a voltage of 151 to 600 volts. Obtain instructions from the Architect if a conflict occurs. Coordinate with the Electrical Contractor.
B.
On any given system, the Contractor will not be permitted to mix and join different types of pipe material. For example, if a storm or sanitary system uses plastic, copper, and cast iron, the Contractor may change from one to the other only once. The line may not be changed back to the first material further downstream.
C.
Storm, vent and sanitary lines shall be continuously sloped; trapping is expressly prohibited.
EMBEDDED PIPING LIMITATIONS A.
Install embedded pipes and sleeves subject to the following limitations: 1. Do not embed aluminum without prior approval of coating material. 2. Do not displace reinforcing steel. 3. In slabs and walls, limit outside dimension of pipes to 1/3 member thickness. Minimize crossing embedded piping, and where crossing cannot be avoided, maintain same minimum concrete cover as required for reinforcing bars. For slabs over metal decks, slab thickness is measured from the top of the metal deck. 4. In columns, limit total area of pipes to 4% of column area. 5. Maintain a center-to-center spacing of at least three diameters of pipe or sleeve. 6. Do not install sleeves or piping in any concrete beam, unless specifically shown on the structural Drawings. END OF SECTION
GENERAL PIPING REQUIREMENTS
20 05 50 - 5
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
20 05 55 VALVE TAGGING PART 1 1.01
1.02
DESCRIPTION A.
Provide valve tags on all HVAC, Plumbing, and Fire Protection valves including control valves. Stamp tags with service designation and number tags consecutively for each system. Coordinate numbering with any existing valve tag schedules and with the Owner.
B.
Prepare a typewritten valve tag directory with charts showing locations, designations, and sizes of valves. Laminate under plastic and mount as directed by the Architect. Include additional copies of valve charts in the Service Manuals.
COORDINATION A.
1.03
2.02
Coordinate with all other Contractors to ensure that the valve tagging used by all Trades is uniform in type, style, and appearance.
MANUFACTURERS A.
Brady, Seton, Kolbi, EMED, MSI, or Brimar.
B.
All valve tags used on the project shall be same type, shape, and lettering and be made by the same manufacturer. Coordinate with all other Contractors.
PART 2 2.01
GENERAL
PRODUCTS
TAGS A.
2 inch diameter, 16 gauge, brass tag with brass chain. 1/4 inch high stamped letters over 1/2 inch high stamped numbers, both black-filled.
B.
Furnish and install color-coded tags to indicate concealed valve locations. Attach colorcoded tags to the ceiling T-bars. Match tag colors to the color of the pipe band specified.
IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A.
Identify as follows: Type of Service PLUMBING
Domestic cold water Domestic hot water Natural gas
FIRE PROTECTION
Fire and water service Wet pipe sprinkler system Combination sprinkler system Dry pipe sprinkler system
VALVE TAGGING
Valve Tag Designation DCW DHW GAS FW SPR SPR DP
20 05 55 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING Type of Service HVAC
PART 3 3.01
Refrigerant liquid Refrigerant suction Air conditioner condensate
01-13-2012
Valve Tag Designation L S C
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Tags: 1. Attach to valve handwheels. 2. Locate to be easily readable from standing position when valve is in normal position. END OF SECTION
VALVE TAGGING
20 05 55 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
20 05 60 LUBRICATION AND PACKING
PART 1 1.01
DESCRIPTION A.
1.02
PART 2
Incorporate lubrication instructions in Service Manual.
PRODUCTS
LUBRICANTS A.
PART 3 3.01
Follow equipment manufacturer's recommendations for specific lubricants and application schedule.
SUBMITTALS A.
2.01
Lubricate equipment with correct grade, type, and quantity of lubrication before placing in service.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.03
GENERAL
Provide lubricants as recommended by the equipment's manufacturer.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Check the condition of each shaft or valve stem containing a packing gland and examine the shaft or valve stem for proper packing.
B.
Maintain lubrication and packing seals during construction and assure that all are operating properly at the time of final acceptance.
C.
When filling systems initially for hydrostatic pressure tests, adjust valve packing glands to finger tight and allow packing to absorb water for five (5) minutes before tightening packing nuts.
D.
Repair any damage caused by improper lubrication at no cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION
LUBRICATION AND PACKING
20 05 60 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
20 05 61 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION
PART 1 1.01
DESCRIPTION A.
Provide power factor corrective capacitors, switches, wiring, and all necessary accessories for complete installations as required under Section 20 05 10, "Coordination Between Trades."
B.
UL compliance: Comply with UL 810, "Capacitors." Provide power factor corrective capacitors that are UL-listed and labeled.
C.
Equipment furnished shall be standard products manufactured by Square D Company, General Electric, Cutler-Hammer/Eaton Corporation, Aerovox, Inc., or Sprague Electric Company.
PART 2 2.01
PRODUCTS
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION DEVICES A.
General: Provide power factor corrective capacitors and associated components complying with the manufacturer's standard materials, design, and construction; in accordance with published product information; and as required for complete installation, including hangers, brackets or other accessories. In sizing capacitors, take care to avoid excessive feedback harmonics.
B.
Capacitors: Provide factory-assembled power factor corrective capacitors of types, sizes, ratings, and electrical characteristics indicated and capable of correcting power factor to 90% or greater. Construct of internally fused, individually replaceable unit cells enclosed in a protective enclosure. Provide capacitors with discharge resistors that reduce voltage to 50 volts or less within one (1) minute after capacitors are disconnected. Use welded heavy gauge steel to construct single-case housings that can be ganged for multiple-bank installation. Equip with solderless connecting terminal lugs. Provide with nonflammable impregnant for operating with ambient temperature ranges of -40 degrees F to 104 degrees F.
PART 3 3.01
GENERAL
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
To ensure that power factor corrective capacitors fulfill requirements, install capacitors in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices. Comply with installation requirements of NEC pertaining to power factor corrective capacitors.
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION
20 05 61 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
3.02
01-13-2012
B.
Coordinate with other electrical work as necessary to properly interface installation of capacitors with other work.
C.
Grounding: Where required by the manufacturer, provide equipment grounding connections. For corrective capacitors, tighten sufficiently to assure a permanent and effective ground.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
After installing capacitors, energize capacitors and demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at project site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove units, replace with new units, and retest. END OF SECTION
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION
20 05 61 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
20 05 65 EQUIPMENT, PIPING AND DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 1.01
1.02
1.03
DESCRIPTION A.
Identify by labels and tags the following items: 1. Equipment such as water heaters, pumps, fire pumps, expansion tanks, rooftop units, pumps, control cabinets, exhaust fans, and similar items. 2. Piping exposed in equipment rooms and accessible service areas. 3. Piping running above accessible ceiling construction and near access panels in nonaccessible ceiling construction. 4. Ductwork in equipment rooms. 5. Piping in crawl spaces.
B.
Install laminated plastic nameplates for equipment, and install color banding, flow arrows, and contents identification for piping.
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate with other Contractors to ensure that the identification used by all Trades is uniform in type, style, and appearance.
B.
Coordinate all identification systems with any already existing.
MANUFACTURERS A.
PART 2 2.01
Brady, Seton, Kolbi, Graphic Products, CALPICO, EMED, MSI, or Brimar.
PRODUCTS
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A.
2.02
GENERAL
Engraved laminated plastic, white over black, sized for 3/4 inch high letters or numbers, Gothic style.
PIPING AND DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION A.
Provide vinyl adhesive pipe labels or vinyl wrap-around markers. Match label background color to 2 inch color band.
EQUIPMENT, PIPING AND DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION
20 05 65 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING B.
Size to be as follows: Outside Diameter of Pipe or Covering 3/4" to 1-1/4" 1-3/8" to 2" 2-1/8" to 7-7/8" 8" to 10" Over 10"
2.03
1/2" 3/4" 1-1/4" 2-1/2" 3-1/2"
Provide 2 inch wide (minimum) painted gloss enamel or vinyl tape color band on each pipe, completely wrapping the pipe circumference. See "Identification Schedule" for band color.
FLOW ARROWS A.
Provide color-coded adhesive vinyl flow arrow on each pipe, secure flow arrows to pipe at each end of flow arrow with a color band, completely wrapping the pipe circumference. Match flow arrow color with color band.
B.
Size to be as follows: Outside Diameter of Pipe or Covering 3/4" to 1-1/4" 1-3/8" to 2" 2-1/8" to 7-7/8" 8" and over
C.
2.05
Minimum Letter Height
COLOR BANDS A.
2.04
01-13-2012
Minimum Flow Arrow Size 1-1/8" by 4" 1-1/2" by 4" 2-1/4" by 6" 4" by 7"
In lieu of separate flow arrows, flow arrows may be incorporated into color bands. See "Identification Schedule" for band color, and match flow arrow color lettering color.
IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A.
Identify as follows:
Type of Service FIRE PROTECTION Sprinkler Drain Dry pipe
2 Inch Color Band and Label Color
Lettering Color
Designation
Red Red Red
White White White
SPR D DP
EQUIPMENT, PIPING AND DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION
20 05 65 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
Type of Service
PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
2 Inch Color Band and Label Color
Lettering Color
Designation
PLUMBING Domestic cold water Domestic hot water (systems less than 140°F) Natural gas Storm Sanitary Vent
Green Yellow
White Black
DCW DHW
Yellow Green Yellow Yellow
Black White Black Black
GAS STM SAN V
HVAC Refrigerant liquid Refrigerant suction
Yellow Yellow
Black Black
L S
HVAC DUCTWORK Supply air Return air Exhaust air Outside air
---------
---------
Supply Return Exhaust Outside Air
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Attach equipment tags with screws. Exception where screws might damage equipment or ductwork, use compatible adhesive instead of screws.
B.
Provide service designations, flow arrow, and color banding at intervals of 15 feet (maximum).
C.
Clean piping, duct, or insulation in area of labeling just before labeling of pipe, duct, or insulation.
D.
Ensure that labels are readable from a normal standing position. END OF SECTION
EQUIPMENT, PIPING AND DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION
20 05 65 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
20 05 75 ACCESS PANELS
PART 1 1.01
1.02
DESCRIPTION A.
Furnish access panels necessary for access to mechanical equipment, valves, or other devices requiring service, adjustment, or maintenance as follows: 1. Ceiling 2. Wall 3. Ductwork
B.
All access panels shall be 24 inches by 24 inches unless otherwise noted.
WORK NOT INCLUDED A.
1.03
1.04
Access panels are to be turned over to other Contractors as appropriate for installation.
COORDINATION A.
This Contractor is responsible for providing the dimension and locations of all ceiling, wall, and floor openings for the access panels to other Contractors requiring that information.
B.
Coordinate with other Contractors with respect to panel locations and group valves, traps, etc., so that they are accessible from a single panel.
MANUFACTURERS A.
PART 2 2.01
GENERAL
Milcor, Bilco, Zurn, Larsen's, Acudor, JL, Inland Ryerson, MIFAB, Nystrom, Mitco, or Karp.
PRODUCTS
CEILING ACCESS PANELS A.
Drywall Ceilings: Milcor Style DW, 16 gauge steel frame with 14 gauge door panel, double-acting concealed spring hinges, flush, screwdriver-operated, prime-painted for finish painting with ceiling.
B.
Fire-Rated Ceiling: Milcor fire-rated access door, UL approved, 16 gauge steel frame with 18 gauge recessed door panel, 20 gauge panel sides and 26 gauge panel hat channel, continuous hinge, self-latching, knurled knob, prime painted for finish painting.
C.
Plaster Ceilings: Milcor Style AP with finish material the same as ceiling material or Style K, 16 gauge galvanized steel frame with 18 gauge galvanized steel door panel. 24 inches x 24 inches and larger panels shall be reinforced, continuous hinge, flush, screwdriver-operated, prime painting for finish painting to match ceiling.
ACCESS PANELS
20 05 75 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING D.
2.02
2.03
Acoustical Concealed Spline Ceilings: Milcor Style AT, 16 gauge steel frame with an 18 gauge steel recessed door panel. 24 inches by 24 inches and larger panels shall be reinforced, continuous hinge, flush, screwdriver-operated, prime painted for finish painting.
WALL ACCESS PANELS A.
Drywall: Milcor Style DW, 16 gauge steel frame with 14 gauge door panel, double-acting concealed spring hinge, flush, screwdriver-operated, prime painted for finish painting.
B.
Masonry and Tile: Milcor Style M Standard, 14 gauge steel frame and door panel, concealed spring hinges, flush, screwdriver-operated, prime painted for finish painting.
C.
Fire-Rated: Milcor fire-rated access door, UL approved, 1 1/2 hour, Class B rating, 16 gauge steel frame, 20 gauge insulated door panel continuous hinge, automatic door closer knurled knob, interior release mechanism, prime painted for finish painting.
D.
Plaster: Milcor Style K, 16 gauge steel frame with 14 gauge door panel and 22 gauge galvanized casing beads, concealed spring hinges, flush, screwdriver-operated, prime painted for finish painting.
SECURITY OR DETENTION DOORS FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS A.
PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
Milcor 24 inches by 24 inches access door with 3/16 inch by 2 inches by 2 inches steel frame angle, welded with ground smooth joints. 10 gauge steel door panel. Prime coat of baked-on electrostatic powder. Heavy-duty stainless steel hinge, welded to door and frame. Provide detention-type deadbolt lock and tamperproof screws.
EXECUTION
COORDINATION OF INSTALLATION A.
Coordinate size, location, and installation of panels required to permit convenient access to valves, dampers, bearings, motors, filters, controls, and other equipment requiring adjustment, service, or maintenance. Mark locations of access panels on Record Drawings. END OF SECTION
ACCESS PANELS
20 05 75 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
20 05 80 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
PART 1 1.01
1.02
1.03
DESCRIPTION A.
Provide a complete vibration isolation system to isolate motorized equipment, piping, ductwork, and appurtenances from the building structure and ceiling construction.
B.
Provide vibration isolation devices with motion limiters, sway struts, limits stops, shock absorbing devices and/or snubbers to control the horizontal and vertical movement of equipment during seismic events. These devices shall be supplied based on the seismic design data included in the other sections of this specification or listed on the drawings. This data includes Site Class, Seismic Design Category and Design Spectral Response Acceleration for short period.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Expected noise levels in various parts of the building shall conform to noise criteria recommendations as set forth in the current edition of ASHRAE Guide and Fundamentals. The midpoint of the range of noise criteria curves shall apply and become part of these Specifications.
B.
Sound and vibration control design criteria for mechanical systems for this building shall conform to the chapter in Sound and Vibration Control in the current edition of ASHRAE Guide, HVAC Systems and Applications.
C.
Vibration isolation devices, including auxiliary steel bases and pouring forms, shall be designed and furnished by a single manufacturer or supplier.
MANUFACTURERS A.
PART 2 2.01
GENERAL
Kinetics, Korfund Dynamics Corporation, Vibration Eliminator Company, Inc., Vibration Mountings and Controls, Inc., or Mason Industries, Inc.
PRODUCTS
VIBRATION ISOLATORS A.
Type 3a - Spring Hanger Mounts: Vibration isolators shall be hangers consisting of a freestanding, laterally stable steel spring and elastomeric washer in series, assembled in a stamped or welded steel bracket. Springs shall have a lateral stiffness greater than 0.8 times the rated vertical stiffness and shall be designed to provide up to 50% overload capacity. Springs shall be selected to provide operating static deflections shown on the Vibration Isolation Schedule or as indicated on the project documents. Springs shall be color coded or otherwise identified to indicate load capacity. 1. Kinetics Noise Control Type SH
VIBRATION ISOLATORS
20 05 80 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
B.
Type 3b - Spring Hanger Mounts: Vibration isolators where both high and low frequency vibrations are to be isolated, shall be hangers consisting of a laterally stable steel spring in series with a pre-compressed molded fiberglass insert, complete with load transfer plates and assembled in a stamped or welded steel bracket. Vibration isolators shall be precompressed molded fiberglass pads individually coated with a flexible, moisture impervious elastomeric membrane. Vibration isolation pads shall be molded from glass fibers with fiber diameters not exceeding 0.00027 inches and with a modulus of elasticity of 10.5 million PSI. Natural frequency of fiberglass vibration isolators shall be essentially constant for the operating load range of the supported equipment. Vibration isolators shall be color coded or otherwise identified to indicate the load capacity. Springs shall have a lateral stiffness greater than 0.8 times the rated vertical stiffness and shall be designed to provide up to 50% overload capacity. Springs shall be selected to provide operating static deflections shown on the Vibration Isolation Schedule or as indicated on the project documents. Springs shall be color coded or otherwise identified to indicate load capacity. 1. Kinetics Noise Control Type SFH
C.
Type 4 - Spring Limit Floor Mounts: Similar to Type 3 Spring Floor Mounts, but include neoprene and steel vertical limit stops to assure a constant spring mount. Vibration isolators shall consist of large diameter laterally stable steel springs assembled into formed or welded steel housing assemblies designed to limit vertical movement of the supported equipment. Housing assembly shall be formed or fabricated steel members and shall consist of a top-load plate complete with adjusting and leveling bolts, vertical restraints, isolation washers and a bottom plate with non-skid noise stop pads and holes provided for anchoring to supporting structure. Housing shall be hot dipped galvanized. Make provisions to prevent mechanical short-circuiting by isolating the limit stops. 1. Kinetics Noise Control Type FLS.
D.
Type A - Structural Base: No additional base is provided. The isolators are attached directly to equipment that has been designed for adequate structural rigidity.
E.
Type B - Structural Base: Welded structural steel frame base, individually designed and engineered by the manufacturer to support mechanical equipment and allow the use of vibration isolators. Provide main steel numbers with section depths of 3 to 12 inches. Complete with outboard isolator brackets and prelocated equipment anchor bolts. 1. Kinetics Model SFB
F.
Type C - Inertia Bases: 1. Reinforced concrete inertia base with welded steel channel frame with prelocated equipment anchor bolts and welded templates, 1/2 inch diameter rebars, 8 inches O.C. each way, isolator mounting brackets, base thickness greater than 8% of span between isolators or as indicated on the Drawings, length and width as required to control size and weight of equipment being isolated, including pipe elbows connected to pumps. 2. Kinetics Model CIB
G.
Type D - Roof Curb Isolation Rails: Prefabricated extruded aluminum rail system incorporating 1 inch deflection freestanding stabile springs for vibration isolation and a continuous foam neoprene air and water seal. The aluminum rail shall include an integral slot anchoring springs to the bottom section, but allowing horizontal adjustment. 1. Kinetics Model ASR
VIBRATION ISOLATORS
20 05 80 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 2.02
ISOLATOR SCHEDULE A.
Furnish isolator types as follows:
Equipment Item Packaged rooftop units Large suspended fans Air-cooled condensing units Base-mounted pumps Piping Ductwork 2.03
2.04
Base Type
Isolator Type
Deflection (Inches)
D --A, D C -----
4 w/1" pad 3b 3a 3 3b 3a
0.75 0.75 0.50 1.00 0.50 0.50
MASS-LOADED VINYL WRAP A.
Limp, reinforced loaded vinyl with lead-free and asbestos-free fillers, with high-strength polyester fabric reinforcement, 1 lb. per square foot face weight. Material shall have a continuous operating range of -40 degrees F to +180 degrees F, and shall be resistant to water, oil, weak acids, alkalies, mold, and fungi. Material shall not rot, shrink or cause metal corrosion. Provide Class A fire-rating where required.
B.
Type KNM-100 by Kinetics, or equal by other listed manufacturers.
SEISMIC A.
PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
Provide sway struts, limits stops and/or shock absorbing devices to control the movement of equipment during seismic events. Each equipment manufacture shall designate the required restraints for the specific equipment items being supplied based on equipment construction and required seismic restraint. The equipment and the restraints, as a combined assembly, are to be tested or analysis and a certificate of compliance for both the restraints and the equipment item shall be provided. The testing and/or dynamic analysis methods shall comply with the building code requirements.
EXECUTION
PREPARATION A.
Use steel components that are phosphated and painted. Use only nuts, bolts, and washers that are zinc-electroplated.
B.
Thoroughly clean structural steel bases of welding slag and prime them with zinc-chromate or metal etching primer.
C.
All isolators exposed to the weather, located outdoors, or within manholes or tunnels shall have all steel parts either PVC-coated or hot-dip galvanized.
D.
Use aluminum components that are etched and painted.
VIBRATION ISOLATORS
20 05 80 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 3.02
01-13-2012
INSTALLATION A.
Equipment: All motorized heating and air-conditioning equipment, including pumps, fans and other equipment, shall be mounted on, or suspended with, vibration isolators.
B.
Piping and Ductwork: 1. All piping over 1 inch outside diameter located in mechanical equipment rooms shall be isolated from the building structure by means of noise and vibration isolation hangers. The only exclusions are roof and floor drain piping, and all sprinkler piping. 2. All piping located less than 50 feet (or 100 pipe diameters - whichever is greater) from any connection to vibration isolated mechanical or electrical equipment, shall be isolated from the building structure by means of noise and vibration isolation hangers. All piping in the building, which is connected to vibration-isolated equipment, shall be isolated at these connections to the building structure. 3. All ductwork located in mechanical equipment rooms, and for a minimum of 50 feet from any connection to vibration-isolated air moving equipment shall be isolated from the building structure by means of noise and vibration isolation guides and supports. 4. Isolate all ductwork vertical risers from the building structure by means of noise and vibration isolation guides and supports. 5. Use vibration and noise isolating expansion hangers to isolate vertical pipe risers from the structure. The hangers shall have a minimum rated deflection of four times the anticipated pipe expansion and shall be enclosed in a housing for fail-safe operation. 6. All piping and ductwork to be isolated according to this Section of the Specifications shall freely pass through walls and floors without rigid connections. Penetration points shall be sleeved or otherwise formed to allow passage of piping or ductwork, and maintain a minimum of 3/4 inch and maximum of 1 1/4 inches clearance around the outside surfaces. This clearance space shall be tightly packed with 1.58 PCF glass fiber and shall be caulked airtight after installation of the piping or ductwork, to form an acoustic seal.
C.
The installed vibration isolation system for each floor or for ceiling supported equipment shall have a maximum lateral motion under equipment start-up or shutdown conditions of 1/4 inch. Motions in excess shall be restrained by approved spring-type thrust restraints as specified or approved by submittal Drawing. END OF SECTION
VIBRATION ISOLATORS
20 05 80 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
20 05 99 REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTRACT COMPLETION PART 1 1.01
DESCRIPTION A.
Following is a partial list of items that must be submitted as required before Contract Completion. 1. All Plumbing, Fire Protection, and HVAC Contractors: a. Receipt for Operating Instructions and Service Manual b. Certificate of Equipment Demonstration c. Valve tags and charts d. Receipt for keys e. Warranties f. All required test reports as specified in other Sections g. All As-Built Drawings per Specifications 2. Plumbing Contractor only: a. Certificate of Plumbing Inspection b. Certificate of Sterilization c. Certification that the solder or brazing used for entire new domestic water piping system is lead-free. 3. Fire Protection Contractor only: a. Fire Marshal's certification of inspection and acceptance b. Certification from local fire department that pipe threads are suitable for their equipment. 4. HVAC Contractor only: a. Certificate of Inspection b. Air balance reports c. Contractor's Certificate of Operation of fire dampers
B.
In addition to the written submittals, the following material shall also be submitted prior to Contract Completion. Submit a signed copy of the Certificate of Materials Receipt. (ATTACHED TO THE END OF THIS SECTION) 1. Loose or spare parts as specified in other Sections. 2. Spare parts as specified in this Section.
C.
Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements.
PART 2 2.01
GENERAL
PRODUCTS
SPARE PARTS A.
Furnish one complete set of the following spare parts: 1. Gaskets for each pump 2. Pump packing/mechanical seal for each pump 3. Gaskets for manholes and handholes 4. Glass for each water gauge 5. All air filters (does not include air filters used during construction) 6. Special keys, wrenches, and similar required or special tools
REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTRACT COMPLETION
20 05 99 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING PART 3 3.01
3.02
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
OPERATIONAL TEST A.
At completion, operate the systems at least five (5) days, not necessarily consecutive, to demonstrate fulfillment of the requirements of the Contract. During this time, make adjustments so that equipment will perform as the manufacturer intended and systems will function as designed. Complete balancing before operating test is started.
B.
Operate each system in every mode of operation and check the position of valves, dampers, and other devices for proper closure and switching.
C.
Following completion of the testing described previously, sign and submit the Certificate of System Completion. (ATTACHED TO THE END OF THIS SECTION)
PERSONNEL INSTRUCTION A.
After all system operational tests have been completed, schedule an instruction period with the Owner. Instruct the Owner-designated personnel in the operation and maintenance of all systems and equipment. Use manuals to familiarize the Owner-designated personnel with equipment and procedures. Allow time as necessary for this instruction. Schedule time convenient for the Owner and the Architect.
B.
The instruction is to include the following: 1. Location of items of equipment and explanation of their use 2. Reference to service manual for record and clarity 3. Coordination of written and verbal instructions so that each is understood by personnel 4. Explanation of control system 5. Complete review of items in the manuals 6. Maintenance procedures to be followed by the Owner
C.
At the completion of instruction, have all attendees sign the Certificate of System Completion. (ATTACHED TO THE END OF THIS SECTION) END OF SECTION
REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTRACT COMPLETION
20 05 99 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
CERTIFICATE OF MATERIAL RECEIPT
Project Name:
Date:
Contractor:
Contractor's Representative:
On the date listed previously, the following pieces of equipment, as required by the Project Specifications, were delivered to the Owner's representative: Equipment
Quantity
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. (Attach a separate page for additional items) Owner's Representative:
(PRINT) (SIGN)
REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTRACT COMPLETION
20 05 99 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
CERTIFICATE OF SYSTEM COMPLETION Project Name: Contractor: System: Specification Section Number: A.
Manufacturer's Inspection and Approval (if required by specification section) The previously identified system has been inspected and approved as meeting the manufacturer's written instructions for installation and operation. Manufacturer's Representative:
B.
Date:
Testing The previously identified system has passed all testing required by the Project Specifications and has met the terms of the contract. Written test results are attached. Contractor's Representative:
C.
Date:
Equipment Demonstration The previously identified system has been demonstrated to the following Owner's representatives: Name
Title
Date
Signature
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. (ATTACH A SEPARATE PAGE FOR ADDITIONAL NAMES)
REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTRACT COMPLETION
20 05 99 - 4
21
FIRE SUPPRESSION
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
21 05 01 FIRE PROTECTION
PART 1 1.01
1.02
DESCRIPTION A.
Furnish material, labor, tools, accessories and equipment, final fabrication Drawings and detailed system design to complete and leave ready for operation all Fire Protection systems of this Project, as described in these Contract Documents and as shown on the Drawings, and as otherwise required for a complete installation which complies with all codes having jurisdiction.
B.
Refer to Sections 20 00 00 through 20 99 99 (as included) for items of a general nature which apply to this portion of the work. Sections 21 00 00 through 21 99 99 and 22 11 01 (as included) also describe Fire Protection Work.
C.
It is the intent that the Fire Protection Work be complete in every respect.
D.
Use sufficient journeymen and competent supervisors in execution of this portion of the work to ensure proper and adequate installation throughout. In the acceptance or rejection of installed Fire Protection work, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of workmen.
E.
Coordinate location of all work with other Contractors and equipment.
F.
Work includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Wet Sprinkler System 2. Dry Pipe Sprinkler System 3. Standpipe System 4. Fire Pump 5. Fire Valve Cabinets
G.
Sprinkler system and standpipe system shall be hydraulically calculated and sized.
H.
Locate sprinklers so they are symmetrical.
SITE WORK A.
1.03
GENERAL
All site work including underground service mains, fire hydrants and P.I.V. are the responsibility of the Site Utility Contractor.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Standards: American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), American National Standards Institute (ANSI), National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) and Factory Mutual (FM), American Water Works Association (AWWA), American Standards for Testing Materials (ASTM), and Ohio Building Code (OBC).
FIRE PROTECTION
21 05 01 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING B.
1.04
1.05
01-13-2012
All Fire Protection work shall comply with applicable NFPA and Local Code requirements and contract documents.
DRAWINGS A.
Drawings are schematic showing the type of systems, scope of systems and location of main piping, standpipes, fire pump and equipment, and fire valve cabinets.
B.
The number and location of sprinkler mains, branch piping and heads and standpipes shall be coordinated with other architectural, structural, mechanical and electrical equipment items such as ceiling panel patterns, beams, diffusers, speakers and light fixtures. The Fire Protection Contractor shall coordinate any and all changes in this layout with all other Contractors and notify the Architect immediately of any changes in location or other conflicts that may affect either the fire protection coverage or the work of other Contractors.
C.
The work shall be installed as required by applicable codes and governing agencies. Furnish the necessary valves, fittings, devices and accessories required, including all hangers, inserts, and other accessories. Locate sprinkler heads in a pattern so spaced as to meet the minimum requirements of the Governing Authorities involved and coordinate their locations so as not to interfere with work by any other Trade.
D.
The Contractor is responsible for the hydraulic calculations design, installation and obtaining all approvals for the Fire Protection Systems and preparing complete working reproducible (sepias or mylars) shop Drawings of the entire Fire Protection System. The Contractor shall submit the hydraulic calculations and shop Drawings approved by the AHJ to the Architect/Engineer for record purposes. Shop Drawings shall bear the stamp of a registered Professional Engineer or a State Certified Sprinkler Designer. Submit to the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) for approval. Provide a copy of this "Stamped" document shall be returned to the Engineer for record. See Section 20 05 15, "Submittals" for additional submittal requirements.
E.
Submit shop Drawings and calculations for review after submission to approving authorities and shall bear their stamp (and have key plans on each Shop Drawing indicating location in each building area).
F.
No additional money will be allowed for additional heads and piping required after code review.
LICENSES A.
The installation of this Fire Protection work shall be made only by a Contractor and craftsman licensed and certified by the City, County, and State to work on fire protection systems.
B.
Include copies of the Certificate of Approval in the Record and Information Booklets turned over to the Owner.
FIRE PROTECTION
21 05 01 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 1.06
FEES A.
1.07
01-13-2012
This Contractor shall pay for all permits, inspection fees and other charges related to the installation of the Fire Protection work.
COMPLETION OF FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM A.
The Fire Protection system shall not be considered complete and acceptable unless and until all Code and Governing Agency requirements are satisfied.
B.
All control valves, alarm devices, supervisory devices, drain valves and gauges shall be checked for proper operation. A written record of these checks shall be submitted to the Architect.
C.
Final completion of the work shall require successful completion of all required testing and approval, and submittal of the Contractor's Material and Test Certificate. END OF SECTION
FIRE PROTECTION
21 05 01 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
21 05 02 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 1.01
1.02
DESCRIPTION A.
Provide UL listed, FM approved fire protection specialties or accessories as required by either the equipment manufacturer or the Local Code Authority.
B.
Standards: Currently listed as approved in the "Fire Protection Equipment List" as published by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL), or the Factory Mutual System Approval guide (FM) and shall bear the proper labels as identified therein.
C.
The Fire Protection Contractor provides and installs supervisory valve and flow switches. The Electrical Contractor provides wiring.
MANUFACTURERS A.
PART 2 2.01
PRODUCTS
Vane-type switch, weather-resistant adjustable pneumatic time delay 90 seconds or less, two (2) sets of single-pole double-throw micro-switches, tamper-proof cover (extra set of contacts), steel U-bolt clamp, saddle type mounting directly to piping. 1. Potter-Roemer Fig. 6200 series.
SUPERVISORY (TAMPER) SWITCH A.
2.03
Reliable, Viking, Autocall, Star, Guardian, Gem, Globe, Central Sprinkler, Potter-Roemer, Potter, Notifier, Elkhart Brass, Simplex, Croker, Victaulic, W.D. Allen or Automatic Sprinkler.
FLOW SWITCH A.
2.02
GENERAL
Weather-resistant, single-pole, double-throw switch, roller type switch actuator, springloaded plunger, tamper-proof cover (extra set of contacts). 1. Potter-Roemer Fig. 6220.
PRESSURE GAUGE A.
Dial spring, brass case, 3 1/2 inches diameter, 1/4 inch NPT male connection, range: 0-300 psig. 1. Reliable Model UA.
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
21 05 02 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 2.04
ELECTRIC SPRINKLER ALARM SWITCH A.
2.05
2.06
2.07
Two (2) single-pole, double-throw snap-acting electric switches, spring loaded plunger, self-setting, 4-20 psi adjustable range, 180 degrees F, NEMA 1 enclosure [, with tamper switch]. 1. Potter Model PS10-2A.
INSPECTOR'S TEST CONNECTIONS A.
Sight Test Connection: 1. Steel, clear tube, smooth bore, non-corrosive orifice with flow equivalent to one (1) sprinkler head, 1 inch NPT connection. 2. Reliable Model B or equivalent test module Victaulic 718 or "Test-an-Drain."
B.
Blind Test Connection: 1. Bronze, non-corrosive, smooth bore orifice with flow equivalent to one (1) sprinkler head, 1 inch NPT connection. 2. Reliable Model A or equivalent test module Victaulic 718 or "Test-an-Drain."
IDENTIFICATION SIGNS A.
All control, drain, and test valves shall have marked identification signs indicating the portion of the system controlled by each valve. Reliable Model A.
B.
18 gauge steel, porcelain enameled, white lettering on red background. 1. General Purpose Valve Control - Reliable Style A 2. Specific Identification - Reliable Style B 3. Fire Alarm - Reliable Style D 4. Hydraulic Calculated System - Reliable Style E
C.
20 gauge steel, porcelain enameled, white lettering on red background. 1. Cold Weather - Reliable Style C
D.
Locate signs per NFPA 13 requirements.
E.
When item being identified is above suspended ceiling, sign is to be placed on nearest ceiling pad below shut-off valve or other item being identified.
F.
Signs shall be secured with noncorrosive wire, chain(s) or other approved means.
DRAINS A.
2.08
01-13-2012
Furnish drains using Schedule 40 black steel pipe (ASTM A120). Exterior piping shall be galvanized steel (with no raw steel exposed) or non-ferrous to prevent staining exterior walls.
HANGERS A.
Refer to Section 20 05 45, "Hanger, Supports and Inserts" which is part of this contract work.
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
21 05 02 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
2.09
B.
All component parts of hanger assemblies shall be UL listed, FM approved.
C.
All hangers shall support the total load of the water-filled pipe in addition to a minimum of 250 lb. load applied at the hanger.
D.
All hangers installed shall be appropriate for type of building structure indicated.
E.
C-clamps without retaining straps are expressly prohibited.
SPRINKLER GUARDS A.
2.10
2.12
A.
Reliable "Supertrol" 6 inch electric alarm bell with Model WBB weatherproof back box.
B.
Furnished and installed by the Fire Protection Contractor, wired by the Electrical Contractor.
FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION (WALL MOUNTED) Aluminum construction, 5 inch Storz connection on one end and female NPT on the other. Include blind cap and chain. 1. Potter-Roemer, Inc. Fig. 5799-02.
FIRE PUMP TEST CONNECTION A.
2.14
18 inches by 18 inches galvanized steel. 1. Potter-Roemer, Inc. Fig. 5021-D.
ELECTRIC ALARM BELL
A.
2.13
Welded wire steel, baked synthetic red enamel finish, for use with 1/2 inch or 3/4 inch NPT male pipe threads, 2 3/4 inches by 3 inch square base, 2 7/8 inches high. 1. Reliable Model B.
BAFFLES A.
2.11
01-13-2012
Cast brass inlet body, flush wall type, four-way, 30 inches L by 9 inches H horizontal polished brass escutcheon plate labeled "PUMP TEST CONNECTION," polished brass caps and chains, cast brass inlet manifold. Provide four (4) loose swivel 2 1/2 inch inlet brass hose gate valve with male hose thread outlet; threads to match local fire department requirements. Torque caps closed. 1. Potter-Roemer Model No. 5864.
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A.
Backflow preventers shall be serviceable without removal from pipe line.
B.
Backflow preventer shall have a permanently attached plate indicating type and listing approvals.
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
21 05 02 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 2.15
2.16
2.17
STRAINERS A.
Welded steel pipe with 150 lb. rated flange assemblies hot dipped galvanized inside and out that are "J" angle (inlet and outlet positions and a stainless steel basket strainer). 1. Gem (Grinnell Corporation) Model A or B-1; Hersey, Mueller, Neptune or Rockwell.
A.
Watts 77F-250 series, cast iron flanged (ANSI B16.1) body with stainless steel screen tapped for closure plug. Provide blow-off valve. Screen size 3/16 inch perf. 1. Watts, Nibco, Braukmann.
DOUBLE CHECK DETECTOR BACKFLOW PREVENTER ASSEMBLY A.
UL listed, FM approved, (ASSE 1048) 175 lb. MWP, epoxy coated cast iron body, independent poppet type check valves and two (2) O.S. & Y valves with meter and bypass trimming, hard rubber bushings, bronze clapper with full face rubber gasket, neoprene discs, flanged connections. Bronze hinge pins, weights and replaceable bronze seats.
B.
The meter bypass includes an approved double check valve assembly with shut-off valves, test cocks, and a bronze meter CFM (cubic feet per meter) readout (verify with Water Department).
C.
Double check detector assembly shall comply with Water Department Standards.
D.
Watts Model 709DCDA-OSY-CFM, Hersey Model EDC II or approved equal by Conbraco, Gem, Reliable, Central, Automatic Sprinkler, Viking, Star, Ames or Wilkins.
SPRINKLER PIPING COVERS A.
PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
NFPA, UL listed, FM approved, 22 gauge cold rolled steel primer for painting, for pendant or sidewall installation, with snap-lock brackets, end caps, corners, wall flanges and couplings to make-up a complete pipe covering system where indicated on Drawings. 1. Soft-Steel System or approved equal.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Install supervisory switches on all operable valves except fire department valves. Refer to Drawings.
B.
Install flow switches at locations indicated on the Drawings and as required.
C.
Do not install a flow switch within 12 inches of a "tee" or "elbow" or within 18 inches of a gate valve.
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
21 05 02 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
3.02
01-13-2012
D.
Install pressure gauges on top of each standpipe, sprinkler riser at each test connection and where shown on the Drawings.
E.
Pressure gauges shall be located where water will not freeze, provided with a shutoff valve and with provision for draining.
F.
All drain and Inspectors Test piping passing through an exterior wall shall be galvanized or non-ferrous. No raw steel surface shall be exposed.
G.
Install a blind test connection in test pipes connected to an open drain and a sight test connection in test pipes that connect to closed drains.
H.
Install electric bell on exterior building wall where directed by Architect.
I.
Install all necessary pipe hangers of approved spacing, type and size per NFPA 13.
J.
Provide splash blocks for all drain and inspectors test outlets occurring in sodded areas.
K.
Install baffles on sprinklers less than 6 feet apart.
L.
Install fire department connection so centerlines of inlets are a minimum of 18 inches to a maximum of 42 inches above finished grade.
M.
Install fire department connection and fire pump test connections flush with wall and level.
N.
Torque fire department connection and fire pump test connection outlet caps to prevent unauthorized usage or removal.
O.
Provide full-size drain from backflow preventer air gap drain funnel to 2 inches from finished floor.
P.
Provide automatic ball drip valve on lines to fire department, roof hydrants, and fire pump test connections. Extend ball drip valve drain line to nearest drain.
Q.
Install fire department connection riser plumb.
R.
Install sprinkler piping covers plumb and per manufacturer's recommendations.
COORDINATION OF WIRING A.
Required wiring from fire protection specialties to the fire alarm panel is provided by the Electrical Contractor.
B.
Electric alarm bell's wiring is to be interlocked with the main flow switch. Wiring is provided by the Electrical Contractor. END OF SECTION
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
21 05 02 - 5
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
21 05 23 FIRE PROTECTION VALVES
PART 1 1.01
1.02
DESCRIPTION A.
Provide UL listed, FM approved valves for the fire protection water piping system shown on the Drawings.
B.
Tag all valves, provide valve chart per Project Specifications.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Standards: Underwriters' Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM) and National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
B.
All valves of the same type used on the project shall be by the same manufacturer, except as noted.
PART 2 2.01
2.02
PRODUCTS
SWING CHECK VALVE A.
UL listed, FM approved, 175 lb. (WWP) cast iron body; brass moving parts including clapper valve seat and pivot shaft, Buna-N "O" ring, flanged connections.
B.
Viking Model G-1 or approved equal by Gem, Reliable, Central, Mueller, Automatic Sprinkler, Nibco, Watts, Star or Victaulic.
C.
The use of interior springs to assist closing of disc(s) shall not be accepted.
BRONZE GATE VALVES (UP TO 2 INCHES) A.
2.03
GENERAL
UL listed, FM approved, 175 lb. (WWP) bronze body, threaded ends, OS & Y rising stem, bronze yoke, solid wedge, repackable when wide open. 1. Fire Suppression System Manufacturer, Nibco, Watts, Mueller, Stockham Fig. B-133, Kennedy, Crane or Victaulic.
IRON BODY GATE VALVES (2 1/2 INCHES AND LARGER) A.
UL listed, FM approved, 175 lb. (WWP) high strength reinforced alloy iron body and bonnets, 125 lb. ANSI flanges, OS & Y rising stem, renewable bronze yoke bushing, bronze seat rings, solid taper wedge, repackable when wide open, blind bosses for drain tapping. 1. Fire Suppression System Manufacturer, Nibco, Watts, Mueller, Stockham Fig. G-634, Kennedy, Crane, or Victaulic.
FIRE PROTECTION VALVES
21 05 23 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 2.04
BRONZE GLOBE VALVES (UP TO 2 INCHES) A.
2.05
2.07
2.08
UL listed, FM approved, 300 lb. (WWP) bronze body, threaded ends, integral seats, Nitrile rubber disc, bronze stem and lock nut. 1. Fire Suppression System Manufacturer, Nibco, Watts, Mueller, Stockham, Kennedy, or Crane.
BUTTERFLY VALVES (IN LIEU OF GATE VALVES 2 1/2 INCHES AND LARGER) A.
2.06
01-13-2012
UL listed, FM approved, 175 lb. (WWP) ductile iron body, aluminum-bronze disc, stainless steel stem, Buna-N seat, phenolic ring, lever lock handle (up to 6 inches) or gear operator for 8 inches and larger. 1. Fire Suppression System Manufacturer, Nibco, Watts, Gem, Victaulic 708 or Sprink JPL Watchman.
PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE A.
Main Line Valve: Cast iron, single seated, hydraulically operated, pilot-controlled, diaphragm-type globe valve with 300 psi rating and UL listed. 1. CLA-VAL Company Model 90G-21 or equal.
B.
Fire Department valve and sprinkler branch lines: Chrome plated brass body, micro-metertype adjustment and breakable segment control. UL and FM listed. 1. Elkhart Brass Manufacturing Company No. 34, Croker-Standard or Potter-Roemer.
MISCELLANEOUS VALVES A.
All valves to be UL listed, FM approved.
B.
Angle Valves: 175 lb. (WWP) bronze, rubber disc, wheel handle. 1. NIBCO T-301-W or equal.
C.
Hose End Gate Valves: 175 lb. (WWP), bronze, solid wedge, screw-in bonnet non-rising stem, iron handwheel with cap and chain. 1. NIBCO T-103-HC or equal.
D.
Hose End Angle Valves: 175 lb. (WWP), bronze, renewable composition disc, iron handwheel w/cap and chain. 1. NIBCO T-331-HC or equal.
E.
Test Valve: 300 lb. (WWP) bronze, three-way, needle seat, integral tapered disc, wheel handle. 1. NIBCO T-291-W3 or equal.
ROOF HYDRANT A.
UL listed, cast brass, three-way, 2 1/2 by 2 1/2 by 4 horizontal manifold including 2 1/2 inch angle valves, matching threads, brass caps and chains, rough finish, with threads complying with local fire department threads. Provide galvanized pipe riser. 1. Elkhart Brass Manufacturing Company No. 168, Croker-Standard, or Potter-Roemer.
FIRE PROTECTION VALVES
21 05 23 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 2.09
2.10
2.11
2.12
01-13-2012
FLOOR STAND VALVE (HYDRANT VALVE CONTROL) A.
Valve Construction: UL listed, FM approved, 175 lb. (WWP) high strength alloy iron body and bonnet, non-rising stem, bronze alloy stem and seat ring, bronze bushings, solid taper wedge, mechanical joint, 2 inch square operating nut. 1. Clow F-5707, Stockham, Kennedy, or Mueller.
B.
Floor Stand: Heavy pattern, non-rising stem with valve position indicators, high strength cast iron with brass extension stem. 1. Clow F-5515, Stockham or Kennedy.
STANDPIPE VALVES A.
2 1/2 inch cast brass single hydrant gate valve, 300 lb., wheel handle, outlet end with threads, cap and chain to match Local Fire Department's standards, [rough, polished brass, rough, polished chrome plated] finish. 1. Elkhart Brass No. U-25, Croker-Standard or Potter-Roemer.
B.
2 1/2-inch cast brass single hydrant gate valve, combination pressure restricting angle valve, 300 lb., wheel handle and outlet end with threads, cap and chain to match local fire department standards, [rough, polished brass, rough, polished chrome plated] finish.
WET PIPE ALARM VALVE AND TRIM A.
UL listed, FM approved, 175 lb. (WWP), cast iron body, tapped bases for alarm accessories, pressure gauges, drain, bronze moving parts, including clapper and bushings, rubber gasket, flanged connections.
B.
Trim: Include retard chamber, pressure switch, strainers, gauges, fittings, piping and drain, control, and test valves.
C.
Reliable Model E or approved equal by Victaulic, Gem, Globe, Viking, Central, Automatic Sprinkler, or Star.
DRY PIPE ALARM VALVE, TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A.
UL listed, FM approved, 175 lb. (WWP), cast iron body, malleable iron clapper, neoprene rubber gasket, brass pins and springs, bronze air plate, bronze seat with Buna-N "O" ring seals, replaceable rubber air seat, 2 inch boss.
B.
Trim: Include air pressure gauge, three-way valve, air piping and unions, pressure switch, water pressure gauge, check gate, globe, 3/4 inch O.S.&Y. valves, drain cup and all fittings.
C.
Reliable Model D or approved equal by Victaulic, Central, Viking, Gem, Globe, Star, or Automatic Sprinkler.
FIRE PROTECTION VALVES
21 05 23 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING D.
PART 3 3.01
3.02
01-13-2012
Accessories: 1. Accelerator: UL listed, FM approved, cast iron body, brass cover, phosphorus bronze diaphragm, brass and stainless steel interior parts, integral anti-flooding device. The accelerator shall guarantee that the sprinkler water arrives at the most remote head in less than 60 seconds. a. Reliable Model B or approved equal by Victaulic, Central, Gem, Globe, Viking, Star, or Automatic Sprinkler. 2. Automatic Air Maintenance Device: UL listed, FM approved, including regulator, shutoff valves, bypass valve, strainer and check valve. a. Reliable Model A-2 or approved equal by Victaulic, Central, Gem, Globe, Viking, Star, or Automatic Sprinkler. 3. Provide a low pressure switch on all systems to detect a gradual loss of air pressure. The Electrical Contractor shall wire switch to fire alarm system as a distinct zone.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Install valves and accessories as indicated on the Drawings and as required by NFPA 13 and 14 and in locations that are accessible to qualified personnel.
B.
Tag all valves as required.
C.
Provide pressure reducing valves at all standpipe hose valves where pressure exceeds 100 psi.
D.
Torque hose end valve caps to prevent unauthorized use or removal.
E.
Install hose end valves pointed down and away from wall at 15 degrees.
F.
Seal roof manifold and floor stand weathertight. Install piping and drain valve to prevent roof hydrant freeze-up. Coordinate work with General Trades Contractor.
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate location of valves with Architect.
B.
Coordinate location of access panels as required with Architect and Contractors.
C.
Coordinate location and method of sealing around roof manifold riser and floor stand with General Trades Contractor. END OF SECTION
FIRE PROTECTION VALVES
21 05 23 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
21 12 01 STANDPIPE SYSTEM
PART 1 1.01
1.02
DESCRIPTION A.
Provide a NFPA Class I standpipe system, complete with piping, fire valve cabinets, valves and specialties where shown on Drawings.
B.
Connect to fire pump discharge and extend to standpipes and the roof hydrant.
C.
The standpipe systems shall be combined with sprinklers.
D.
Standpipe systems shall be sized based on hydraulic calculations.
E.
Test new complete systems.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
PART 2 2.01
2.02
GENERAL
Standards: National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 14, "Standpipe and Hose Systems," NFPA 25, "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems"), Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), American Standards for Testing Materials (ASTM), American National Standards Institute (ANSI), American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), American Water Works Association (AWWA), Ohio Building Code (OBC).
PRODUCTS
PIPING A.
Interior Piping: 1. Black steel (ASTM A120). 2. Wrought steel (ANSI/ASTM B36.10). 3. Welded seamless steel (ANSI/ASTM A53).
B.
Piping shall be UL listed and FM approved. All steel piping wall thickness shall be at least Schedule 40, regardless of the joining method.
FITTINGS A.
Interior: 1. Cast iron screwed or flanged fittings, 125 lb. or 250 lb SWP, as required (ANSI B16.4 and B16.5). 2. Malleable iron screwed fittings, 150 lb. or 300 lb. SWP, as required (ANSI B16.3). 3. Factory-made wrought steel, butt weld fittings (ANSI B16.9). 4. Butt welding ends for pipe, valve, flanges and fittings (ANSI B16.25). 5. Steel pipe flanges and flanged fittings (ANSI B16.5). 6. Forged steel fittings, socket welded and threaded (ANSI B16.11).
STANDPIPE SYSTEM
21 12 01 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
7. Wrought copper and bronze solder-joint pressure fittings (ANSI B16.22). 8. Victaulic grooved type fittings and couplings (ASTM A47) are acceptable only if they are used on Schedule 40 or heavier piping. Equal to Grovloc or Central. 9. UL and FM Approved Copper Pipe Extracted Fitting (T-Drill): An extracted mechanical tee joint may be made in copper tube. The joint shall be made using tooling specifically designed for this type of joint, and the tooling shall extrude a collar with a minimum height of three times the thickness of the tube wall. The branch tube shall be beveled to match the contour of the main run of the piping and dimpled to control the depth of insertion. The fitting penetration shall not impede the free flow within the piping system. The joint shall be completed using a certified method of brazing in accordance with ASME brazing requirements. The brazing filler material shall be of the copper phosphorous classification. This joining method shall be in strict accordance with the written installation instructions as published by T-Drill Industries, Inc. B. 2.03
SOLDER AND BRAZING ALLOYS A.
Brazing filler metal (Classification BCUP-3 or BCUP-4) (AWS A5.8).
B.
Solder metal, 95/5 Tin-Antimony-Grade 95 (ASTM B32).
PART 3 3.01
EXECUTION
INSPECTION A.
3.02
Fittings shall be UL listed, FM approved..
Schedule all inspections required by all Codes and Governing Agencies.
INSTALLATION OF PIPING A.
Standpipe Piping: 1. Entire installation shall comply with all the requirements of NFPA 14. 2. All piping shall be arranged in accordance with the best standards of the trade, with risers plumb and horizontal mains and branches run parallel or perpendicular to the building walls. 3. Install all piping and valves as required in connection with this installation. Install all necessary standard hangers and special hangers of approved type and size, and in accordance with Section 20 05 45, "Hangers, Supports and Inserts." 4. All piping in interior areas having a ceiling shall be concealed, unless noted otherwise. 5. No wet piping shall be installed in areas where space temperature may drop below 40 degrees F. 6. All piping systems shall be installed with adequate provisions made for expansion and to avoid placing stress on valves and equipment. Provide adequate pipe anchors and guides and support from building structure. 7. Pitch piping to drain toward incoming service and make provisions to drain all piping. Provide auxiliary drains at all low points in the system. 8. Drain/test pipes shall be installed at base of standpipe riser. Discharge from drain/test pipes to be at location approved by the Architect.
STANDPIPE SYSTEM
21 12 01 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
9. All drain and test piping passing through an exterior wall shall be galvanized or nonferrous. No raw steel surface shall be exposed. 10. Tag and identify all valves, piping and equipment. 11. Install a pressure gauge at top of each standpipe riser, in a location to prevent vandalism. 12. Install supervised, indicating valves to permit isolating one standpipe from another without interrupting the water supply. 13. Extend and connect to fire valve cabinets and fire hose cabinets. 14. Provide all necessary adapters, fittings and piping required to make connections to [existing piping, water service piping, fire pump]. 15. Torque all standpipe hose valve outlet caps tight to prevent unauthorized usage or removal. 16. Install hose valve outlets so they point down and away from wall at 15 degrees. B.
3.03
Joints: 1. Threaded Pipe and Fittings: a. Ream pipe ends to full cross sectional area after cutting. b. Threads shall conform to ANSI Standard B2.1. c. Joints shall be made with TFE tape, applied to male thread only. 2. Welded Pipe: a. All welding and brazing shall be done by an AWS-certified welder in accordance with the American National Standards Institute "Code for Pressure Piping, Power Piping," (ANSI B31.1). b. All welders or brazers shall be certified by this Contractor as being qualified for welding and/or brazing in accordance with the requirements of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Qualification Standard for Welding and Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding and Brazing Operators." c. Torch cutting of pipe is prohibited. d. Butt-welded joints shall have substantially full penetration and recommended bead reinforcement. e. Slip on, socket and fillet welds shall have geometry indicated in the "Code for Pressure Piping" (ANSI B31). f. All slag and other welding residue shall be removed as work proceeds and at completion. 3. Mechanical Joints (Exterior Piping): a. Bolts for steel, cast iron, brass and bronze, 250 lb. SWP and 450 degrees F or under, shall be carbon steel with American Standard Regular, square heads and American Standard heavy hexagon, semi-finished nuts. b. ASME A307, Grade B, tee head, high tensile steel bolts and nuts may be used.
TESTS A.
Test in accordance with NFPA 14, 25, and applicable state and local governing authorities.
B.
The standpipe systems shall be tested hydrostatically at 200 psig for two hours. The hydrostatic test pressure shall be measured at the low point of the individual system or zone being tested. There shall be no visible leakage during the hydrostatic testing.
C.
Provision shall be made for the disposal of water issuing from test outlets to avoid property damage.
STANDPIPE SYSTEM
21 12 01 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING D. 3.04
01-13-2012
Brine or other corrosive chemicals shall not be used for testing systems.
STERILIZATION A.
Exterior Piping Only (to Connection of Backflow Preventer) 1. The entire system of underground water piping shall be flushed out, tested, proven tight and sterilized per AWWA C600 before any pipe is backfilled. 2. After system is complete, flush entire system clean and sterilize. Sterilization shall be done under the immediate on-the-job supervision of a Water Testing Laboratory regularly engaged in the service. All fees for testing and use of testing equipment shall be paid by the Contractor. END OF SECTION
STANDPIPE SYSTEM
21 12 01 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
21 12 28 FIRE VALVE CABINETS
PART 1 1.01
1.02
DESCRIPTION A.
Furnish recessed fire valve cabinets where shown on the Drawings.
B.
Extend and connect to standpipe system.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.03
PART 2
Potter-Roemer, Larsen's, J.L. Industries, Elkhart Brass, Nystrom, or Croker.
PRODUCTS
FIRE VALVE CABINET (FVC-1) A.
Construction: Recessed, 20 gauge steel body, welded, full length semi-concealed piano hinge, baked white enamel inside, prime coat outside, solid steel door.
B.
Fire Department Valve: UL listed, FM approved, 2 1/2 inches male/female, threads to match Local Fire Department Standards, angle valve, wheel handle, cap and chain, rough brass finish.
C.
FVC-1: Potter-Roemer Model No. 1810 (recessed), 18 inches wide by 18 inches high by 8 inches deep, 20 gauge painted steel box with 20 gauge tubular solid steel door with 18 gauge steel frame, continuous steel hinge, cam latch, "fire valve decals." Provide chrome escutcheon plates around valve entrances. Provide interconnecting piping.
PART 3 3.01
Refer to the Drawings for location, size and style of cabinets.
MANUFACTURERS A.
2.01
Standards: Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) and Factory Mutual (FM).
CABINET A.
1.04
GENERAL
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Turn recessed fire valve cabinets over to General Trades Contractor for installation.
B.
Cabinets shall be mounted so they are not more than 5 feet above floor to centerline of valve, and plumb.
FIRE VALVE CABINETS
21 12 28 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
C.
Identify each cabinet with an engraved laminated plastic identification nameplate.
D.
Tighten all 2 1/2 inch hose end valve caps sufficiently to prevent unauthorized usage or removal.
E.
Install hose end valve pointed down and away from wall at 22 1/2 degrees. END OF SECTION
FIRE VALVE CABINETS
21 12 28 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
21 13 13 WET SPRINKLER PIPING SYSTEM
PART 1 1.01
1.02
DESCRIPTION A.
Connect to fire water service line 5 feet outside building where shown on Drawings. Extend line into building to fire pump with backflow preventer to sprinkler system. Refer to Drawings.
B.
Provide sprinklers and piping to provide coverage of all areas of the Building, including the water service room, unless otherwise noted on Drawings.
C.
Provide sprinklers and piping to provide coverage of all areas of the building and floor control valve assemblies with drain at each standpipe sprinkler connection.
D.
Install recessed sprinklers with white escutcheon plate and white sprinklers in finished areas (lay-in or plaster ceilings). Unfinished areas without ceilings shall have brass upright sprinklers.
E.
Provide concealed type sprinklers in Main Lobby Area and elevator lobby areas.
F.
Sprinkler system shall be sized based on hydraulic calculations. The water flow velocity anywhere within the piping system shall not exceed 25 feet per second.
G.
Contractor shall locate sprinklers in ceilings so they are symmetrical.
H.
Suppression systems for electrical equipment rooms, elevator equipment rooms, computer equipment rooms, or similar spaces shall be designed so as not to present a hazard to occupants or equipment.
I.
Test new complete system.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.03
GENERAL
Standards: National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 13 and 25), Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. (UL), and Factory Mutual (FM), American Standards for Testing Materials (ASTM), American National Standards Institute (ANSI), American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), American Water Works Association (AWWA), and Ohio Building Code (OBC).
BUILDING FIRE HAZARD CLASSIFICATION A.
Light Hazard, Ordinary Hazard or Intermediate.
WET SPRINKLER PIPING SYSTEM
21 13 13 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 1.04
CEILING TEMPERATURE COORDINATION A.
1.05
PART 2
2.02
It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to install sprinklers having the proper temperature ratings. Contractor shall check ceiling temperatures as needed to determine proper sprinkler head temperature ratings.
MANUFACTURERS A.
2.01
01-13-2012
Reliable, Gem, Globe, Automatic Sprinkler, Viking, Victaulic, Star or Central.
PRODUCTS
PIPING A.
Interior Piping: 1. Schedule 40, electric-resistance welded steel (ASTM A135, or ASTM A53). 2. Schedule 40, wrought steel (ANSI/ASME B36.10M). 3. Schedule 40, welded and seamless steel (ANSI/ASTM A53).
B.
Exterior Piping: 1. Underground piping from 5 feet outside building wall to backflow preventer assembly shall be ductile cast iron pipe, cement-lined (AWWA C104), enamel coated, thickness Class 53, 250 lb. working pressure, push-on joints, rubber gaskets, mechanical joints at valves and fittings (ASTM A377, AWWA C151). 2. Clow "Super Bell-Tite," American Cast Iron Pipe Company or U.S. Pipe & Foundry.
C.
Piping shall be UL listed and FM approved. All steel piping wall thickness shall be at least Schedule 40, regardless of the joining method.
FITTINGS A.
Cast iron screwed or flanged fittings, 125 lb. or 250 lb. SWP as required, (ASME B16.4 and B16.1).
B.
Malleable iron screwed fittings, 150 lb. or 300 lb. SWP as required (ASME B16.3).
C.
Factory-made wrought steel, butt-weld fittings (ASME B16.9).
D.
Butt welding ends for pipe, valves, flanges and fittings (ASME B16.25).
E.
Steel pipe flanges and flanged fittings (ASME B16.5).
F.
Forged steel fittings, socket welded and threaded (ASME B16.11).
G.
Fittings shall be UL listed and FM approved.
WET SPRINKLER PIPING SYSTEM
21 13 13 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 2.03
01-13-2012
SPRINKLERS A.
General: All sprinklers shall be UL listed and FM listed and bear an approved stamp or label.
B.
Construction: Automatic spray, quick response, glass bulb type, bronze tensioned frame, directional deflectors, and threaded connection. Orifice and connection size to be determined by density requirements and hydraulic calculations.
C.
Furnish following sprinkler types: 1. Recessed: Reliable Model F1FR with adjustable recessed escutcheon. 2. Sidewall or Pendant: Reliable Model F1FR. 3. Upright: Reliable Model F1FR, brass finish (unfinished areas without ceilings). 4. Pendent or upright sprinkler heads with guards for storage and service areas. 5. Concealed: Reliable Model G4A with adjustable coverplate.
D.
Temperature Ratings: 1. Unless otherwise noted, furnish Ordinary Class, 135 to 170 degree F sprinklers, except in the following areas: a. Mechanical Rooms: Intermediate Class, 177 to 225 degrees F. b. Electrical Rooms and Telephone Equipment Rooms: Intermediate Class, 175 to 225 degrees F. c. Near Heating Equipment: Intermediate Class, 175 to 225 degrees F. d. Kitchen: Intermediate Class, 175 to 225 degrees F. e. Any Rooms or Areas where Temperature shall exceed the Normal Building Temperature: Intermediate Class, 175 to 225 degrees F. f. Special areas as may be noted on Drawings.
E.
Finish: 1. Standard factory brass finish for upright sprinklers in areas without ceilings. 2. Pendant, sidewall, concealed, and recessed sprinklers shall be factory painted white.
F.
Escutcheon Plates: 1. Escutcheon plates shall be installed tight to the ceiling where sprinklers are either mounted below acoustical tile ceiling, drywall ceiling or protrude from wall or soffit. Provide white painted finish.
G.
Spare Sprinklers: 1. This Contractor shall provide a sprinkler wrench and a stock of spare heads in a cabinet for future use for each type and temperature rating of head installed. Furnish quantity of each type and temperature rating per the following schedule: NUMBER OF SPRINKLERS Up to 300 301 - 1000 Over 1000
EXTRA SPRINKLERS 6 12 24
2. Mount sprinklers and wrench in cabinet and install cabinet on wall next to alarm valve or on alarm valve piping.
WET SPRINKLER PIPING SYSTEM
21 13 13 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING PART 3 3.01
EXECUTION
INSPECTION A.
3.02
01-13-2012
Schedule all inspections required by all Codes and Governing Agencies.
INSTALLATION A.
Piping: 1. All piping shall be arranged in accordance with the best standards of the trade, with risers plumb and horizontal mains and branches run parallel or perpendicular to the building walls. 2. Securely fasten pipe and support with hangers that meet NFPA requirements, spaced not less than 12 inches or more than 18 inches from a sprinkler head. One hanger on each length of pipe and on cross mains between each branch line. 3. Install all piping and valves as required in connection with this installation. Install all necessary standard hangers and special hangers of approved type and size. Refer to other sections within these Specifications regarding hangers, supports and inserts. 4. All piping in interior areas having ceilings shall be concealed, unless noted otherwise. 5. No wet piping to be installed in areas where space temperature may drop below 40 degrees F. 6. All piping systems shall be installed with adequate provisions made for expansion and to prevent stresses on valves and equipment. Provide adequate pipe anchors and guides and support from building structure. 7. Pitch piping to drain toward alarm valve and make provisions to drain all piping. Provide auxiliary drains where necessary. 8. Ceiling grid systems shall not be supported from, or used to support from, or used to support, electrical conduit, sprinkler lines, or any other utility lines. Each utility and the ceiling grid system shall be independently supported from the building structure, concrete, steel or masonry. Where interferences occur, in order to support piping, conduit, ceiling grid systems, trapeze-type hangers or supports will have to be employed and shall not be located where they interfere with access panels, valves and other mechanical equipment items. 9. Drain/test pipes shall be installed at base of sprinkler riser. 10. All drain and test piping passing through an exterior wall shall be galvanized or nonferrous. No raw steel surface shall be exposed. 11. Install flow and supervisory switches where shown on Drawings. Wiring provided by the Electrical Contractor. 12. Tag and identify all piping and valves installed under this work. 13. All drains/test pipe locations shall be approved by Local Fire Department and Architect. 14. Provide all necessary adaptors, fittings and piping required to make connections to the water service piping.
B.
Joints: 1. Threaded Pipe and Fittings: a. Ream pipe ends to full cross sectional area after cutting. b. Threads shall conform to ANSI Standard B2.1. c. Joints shall be made with TFE tape, applied to male thread only.
WET SPRINKLER PIPING SYSTEM
21 13 13 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
2. Welded Pipe: a. All welding and brazing shall be done by an AWS-Certified welder in accordance with the American National Standards Institute "Code for Power Piping, Pressure Piping," (ANSI B31). b. All welders or brazers shall be certified by this Contractor as being qualified for welding and/or brazing in accordance with the requirements of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Qualification Standard for Welding and Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding and Brazing Operators." c. Torch cutting of pipe is prohibited. d. Butt-welded joints shall have substantially full penetration and recommended bead reinforcement. e. Slip on, socket and fillet welds shall have geometry indicated in the "Code for Pressure Piping" (ANSI B31). f. All slag and other welding residue shall be removed as work proceeds and at completion. 3. Mechanical Joints (Exterior Piping): a. Bolts for steel, cast iron, brass and bronze, 250 lb. SWP and 450 degrees F or under, shall be carbon steel with American Standard Regular, square heads and American Standard heavy hexagon, semi-finished nuts. b. ASME A307, Grade B, tee head, high tensile steel bolts and nuts may be used.
3.03
C.
Install sprinkler heads in center of ceiling tile in lay-in ceiling system to within 1 inch of exact center of ceiling grid. Refer to details on Drawing.
D.
Installation of sprinkler system shall comply with all requirements for a high rise building.
TESTS A.
After all tests have been completed, the Contractor's Material and Test Certificate required by NFPA 13 shall be completed and forwarded to the Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
B.
The sprinkler system shall be tested hydrostatically at 200 psig for two (2) hours. The hydrostatic test pressure shall be measured at the low point of the individual system or zone being tested. There shall be no visible leakage during the hydrostatic testing.
C.
Comply with NFPA 25, "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems."
D.
Provision shall be made for the disposal of water issuing from test outlets to avoid property damage.
E.
Brine or other corrosive chemicals shall not be used for testing systems.
F.
Tests shall be observed by Approving Authorities and the Architect's Representative.
G.
Isolate existing system as much as possible during test.
WET SPRINKLER PIPING SYSTEM
21 13 13 - 5
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 3.04
STERLIZATION A.
3.05
01-13-2012
Exterior piping only to connection of backflow preventer. 1. Flush, tested, proven tight and sterilized per AWWA C600 before any pipe is backfilled.
WIRING A.
Wiring from the main flow switch to the fire alarm panel by the Electrical Contractor.
B.
Electric alarm bell's wiring is to be interlocked with the main flow switch. Wiring is provided by the Electrical Contractor. END OF SECTION
WET SPRINKLER PIPING SYSTEM
21 13 13 - 6
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
21 13 16 DRY SPRINKLER PIPING SYSTEM
PART 1 1.01
1.02
1.03
DESCRIPTION A.
Connect to fire suppression system inside building where shown on Drawings, extend to dry pipe alarm valve; from alarm valve to building sprinkler system.
B.
Provide pendant type sprinklers and piping to provide coverage for first and second floor garage, lower level garage, and areas adjacent to garage as indicated on plans.
C.
Sprinkler system shall be sized based on hydraulic calculations. The waterflow velocity anywhere within the piping system shall not exceed 15 feet/second.
D.
Suppression systems for electric equipment rooms shall be designed so as not to present a hazard to occupants or equipment.
E.
Provide air maintenance device with electrical pressure switch.
F.
Refer to Section 21 13 17, "Air Compressors" for air compressor and for dry pipe alarm valve.
G.
Test new complete system.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Standards: National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 13 and 25), Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. (UL), and Factory Mutual (FM), American Standards for Testing Materials (ASTM), American National Standards Institute (ANSI), American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), and Ohio Building Code (OBC).
B.
Couplings and gaskets used for dry pipe installations must be listed for dry pipe service.
BUILDING FIRE HAZARD CLASSIFICATION A.
1.04
Light Hazard and Ordinary Hazard.
CEILING TEMPERATURE COORDINATION A.
1.05
GENERAL
It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to install sprinkler heads having the proper temperature ratings. Contractor shall check ceiling temperatures as needed to determine proper sprinkler head temperature ratings.
MANUFACTURERS A.
Reliable, Gem, Globe, Automatic Sprinkler, Viking, Victaulic, Star or Central.
DRY SPRINKLER PIPING SYSTEM
21 13 16 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING PART 2 2.01
2.02
2.03
01-13-2012
PRODUCTS
PIPING A.
Interior Piping: 1. Schedule 40 galvanized steel (ASTM A795 or ASTM A53). 2. Schedule 40 wrought galvanized steel (ANSI B36.10M). 3. Schedule 40 welded and seamless galvanized steel (ASTM A53).
B.
Piping shall be UL listed, FM approved.
FITTINGS A.
Interior: 1. Galvanized cast iron screwed or flanged fittings, 125 lb. or 250 lb. SWP, as required, (ANSI B16.4 and B16.1). 2. Galvanized malleable iron screwed fittings, 150 lb. or 300 lb. SWP, as required, (ANSI B16.3). 3. Galvanized factory-made wrought steel, butt weld fittings (ANSI B16.9). 4. Galvanized butt-welded ends for pipe, valves, flanges and fittings (ANSI B16.25). 5. Galvanized steel pipe flanges and flanged fittings (ANSI B16.5). 6. Galvanized forged steel fittings, socket welded and threaded (ANSI B16.11). 7. Victaulic or Gruvlok type couplings are acceptable only for Schedule 40 or heavier pipe and gaskets are suitable for dry pipe system (indicate such on Shop Drawing Submittal). Equal Central.
B.
Exterior: 1. Ductile iron with mechanical joint ends (AWWA C110/C111), cement lining (AWWA C104), bitumastic enamel finish (AWWA C151). Fittings 16 inches and smaller may be manufactured according to AWWA C153.
C.
Fittings shall be UL listed, FM approved.
SPRINKLERS A.
General: All sprinklers shall be UL listed, FM approved and bear an approved stamp or label.
B.
Construction: Automatic spray, quick response, glass bulb type, bronze tensioned frame, directional deflectors, nominal 1/2 inch orifice, 1/2 inch NPT threaded connection.
C.
Furnish following sprinkler types: 1. Pendent: Reliable Model G, brass finish.
D.
Temperature Ratings: 1. Unless otherwise noted, furnish Ordinary Class, 165 degrees F, except in the following areas: a. Electrical Rooms and Telephone Equipment Rooms: Intermediate Class, 212 degrees F. b. Near Heating Equipment: Intermediate Class, 212 degrees F. c. Special areas as may be noted on Drawings.
DRY SPRINKLER PIPING SYSTEM
21 13 16 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
E.
Finish: 1. Brass.
F.
Spare Sprinklers: 1. This Contractor shall provide a sprinkler head wrench and a stock of spare heads for future use for each type and temperature rating of head installed. Furnish quantity of each type and temperature rating per the following schedule: NUMBER OF SPRINKLERS Up to 300 301 - 1000
EXTRA SPRINKLERS 6 12
2. Mount in sprinklers and wrench in cabinet and install cabinet on wall next to alarm valve or on alarm valve piping.
PART 3 3.01
INSPECTION A.
3.02
EXECUTION
Schedule all inspections required by all Codes and Governing Agencies.
INSTALLATION A.
Piping: 1. Arrange all piping in accordance with the best standards of the Trade, with risers plumb and horizontal mains and branches run parallel or perpendicular to the building walls. 2. Securely fasten pipe and support with hangers that meet NFPA requirements spaced not less than 12 inches or more than 18 inches from a sprinkler head. One (1) hanger on each length of pipe and on cross mains between each branch line. 3. Install all piping and valves as required in connection with this installation. Install all necessary standard hangers and special hangers of approved type and size, also refer to Section 20 05 45, "Hangers, Supports and Inserts." 4. All piping in interior areas having ceilings shall be concealed, unless noted otherwise. 5. All piping systems shall be installed with adequate provisions made for expansion and to prevent stresses on valves and equipment. Provide adequate pipe anchors and guides and support from building structure. 6. Pitch piping to drain toward alarm valve and make provisions to drain all piping. Provide auxiliary drains where necessary. 7. Ceiling grid systems shall not be supported from, or used to support, electrical conduit, sprinkler lines, or any other utility lines. Each utility and the ceiling grid system shall be a separate installation and each shall be independently supported from the building structure, concrete, steel, or masonry. Where interferences occur, in order to support piping, conduit, ceiling grid systems, trapeze-type hangers or supports will have to be employed and shall not be located where they interfere with access panels, valves and other mechanical equipment items. 8. Drain/test pipes shall be installed at base of sprinkler riser. 9. All drain and test piping passing through an exterior wall shall be galvanized or nonferrous. 10. Install supervisory switches where shown on Drawings. Wiring between the supervisory switches and fire alarm system shall be provided by Electrical Contractor.
DRY SPRINKLER PIPING SYSTEM
21 13 16 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
11. Tag and identify all piping and valves installed under this work. 12. All drains/test pipe locations shall be approved by Local Fire Department and Architect. 13. Install air piping, valves, air gauges, and specialties associated with the dry pipe alarm valve, air compressors, and accelerator. 14. Provide all necessary adapters, fittings and piping required to make connections to water service piping. 15. Provide all control wiring necessary for a complete and working system.
3.03
B.
Joints: 1. Threaded Pipe and Fittings: a. Ream pipe ends to full cross sectional area after cutting. b. Threads shall conform to ANSI Standard B2.1. c. Joints shall be made with TFE tape, applied to male thread only. 2. Welded Pipe: a. All welding and brazing shall be done by an AWS-Certified welder in accordance with the American National Standards Institute "Code for Power Piping, Pressure Piping" (ANSI B31.1). b. All welders or brazers shall be certified by this Contractor as being qualified for welding and/or brazing in accordance with the requirements of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Qualification Standard for Welding and Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding and Brazing Operators." c. Torch cutting of pipe is prohibited. d. Butt-welded joints shall have substantially full penetration and recommended bead reinforcement. e. Slip on, socket and fillet welds shall have geometry indicated in the "Code for Pressure Piping" (ANSI B31). f. All slag and other welding residue shall be removed as work proceeds and at completion.
C.
Installation of sprinkler system shall comply with all requirements for a high rise building.
TESTS A.
After all tests have been completed, the "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate" required by NFPA 13 shall be completed and forwarded to the Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
B.
The sprinkler system shall be tested hydrostatically at 200 psig for two (2) hours. The hydrostatic test pressure shall be measured at the low point of the individual system or zone being tested. There shall be no visible leakage during the hydrostatic testing. Comply with NFPA 25 "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection Systems."
C.
Provision shall be made for the disposal of water issuing from test outlets to avoid property damage.
D.
Brine or other corrosive chemicals shall not be used for testing systems.
E.
Tests shall be observed by Approving Authorities and the Architect's Representative.
DRY SPRINKLER PIPING SYSTEM
21 13 16 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
3.04
F.
Test air piping, compressor and operation of dry pipe valve.
G.
Isolate existing system as much as possible during test.
01-13-2012
WIRING A.
Install all wiring in 3/4 inch minimum size conduit, and conforming to the requirements of Division 26, as included in this Specification. Conductors shall be No. 14 AWG minimum, bunch-tinned (bonded) stranded copper per NEC 760-16. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's wiring diagrams, recommendations, and in compliance with practices set forth by local, State and National Fire Codes. Color code and tag all wires at all junction points.
B.
Power wiring to control panel and air compressor shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor.
C.
Alarm wiring from the dry pipe alarm valve to fire alarm panel shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor.
D.
Alarm wiring from air maintenance device switch to fire alarm panel shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor. END OF SECTION
DRY SPRINKLER PIPING SYSTEM
21 13 16 - 5
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
21 13 17 AIR COMPRESSORS
PART 1 1.01
DESCRIPTION A.
1.02
PART 2
PRODUCTS
A.
Simplex unit, including compressor, ASME receiver, pressure gauges, relief and safety valves, motor starter, pressure switch, solenoids, silencers, valves, and piping.
B.
Manufacturers: Sprinkler System Manufacturer, EMGLO, Ingersol-Rand or Worthington.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
3.02
Contractor shall size air compressor for the dry pipe sprinkler system.
AIR COMPRESSOR
PART 3 3.01
Unit shall have sufficient capacity and designed to limit compressor operation to 25% duty cycle.
RATINGS AND CAPACITIES A.
2.01
Standards: American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) and National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
MAXIMUM DUTY CYCLE A.
1.04
Provide a new air compressor and connect to the new dry pipe alarm valve.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.03
GENERAL
Install air compressor as per recommendations of the manufacturer.
COORDINATION OF WIRING A.
Provide all compressor and air maintenance device control wiring.
B.
Power wiring to air compressor shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor. Coordinate electrical requirements with Electrical Contractor. END OF SECTION
AIR COMPRESSORS
21 13 17 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
21 31 13 ELECTRIC FIRE PUMP
PART 1 1.01
DESCRIPTION A.
1.02
Refer to the Drawings for required flow in gpm, pressure boost, and motor horsepower, voltage, and electrical requirements.
MANUFACTURERS A.
1.05
Standard: Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) and National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 20, "Centrifugal Fire Pumps").
RATINGS AND CAPACITY A.
1.04
Provide a fire pump assembly including a main fire pump, jockey pump, control panels accessories, low suction pressure control panel and all piping including pressure sensing lines.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.03
GENERAL
Peerless, Patterson, Aurora, Fairbanks, or Allis-Chalmers.
FACTORY TESTING AND START-UP SUPERVISION REQUIREMENTS A.
Prior to shipment, pumps and drives shall be thoroughly shop tested by the pump manufacturer. A certified pump curve shall be generated, showing the pump performance. Horsepower based upon the results of the shop test shall be furnished to the Owner. The fire pump shall be hydrostatically tested to 1.5 times the pump shut off pressure or 200 psi, whichever is greater.
B.
Manufacturer's Representative shall provide: 1. Supervision of installation, start-up and initial check-out service, including alignment per NFPA 20. 2. Supervision and assistance with Underwriters' Acceptance Test and provide required instrumentation to Conduct Acceptance Test, including pitot gauge, certified amp and volt meter and self-timing tachometer. This service shall consist of a minimum of two (2) days at the site.
C.
Contractor and the pump manufacturer's representative shall perform a demonstration test of the system in the presence of designated Owner personnel.
ELECTRIC FIRE PUMP
21 31 13 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING PART 2 2.01
2.02
01-13-2012
PRODUCTS
ELECTRIC FIRE PUMP A.
General Construction: UL listed and FM approved, factory assembled, fire pump and motor on a common steel non-drip rim baseplate. Control panels and jockey pump are to be independently mounted. Pumps, valves, accessories shall be painted red.
B.
Fire Pump: Horizontal split case, with single stage construction. The materials of construction shall be cast iron bronze fitted with packed stuffing boxes. Pump and motor shall be mounted on a fabricated steel baseplate complete with flexible coupling and coupling guard. Pump shall be furnished with sealed ball or roller bearings.
C.
Motor: The motor shall be UL listed specifically for fire pump service and be open dripproof with a 1.15 service factor.
D.
Fittings and Accessories: An eccentric suction reducer, concentric discharge increaser, automatic air release valve, ball drip valve and suction and discharge pressure gauges, temperature relief valve integral to the pump casing.
E.
Controller: UL listed and FM approved specifically for fire pump service. Controller shall start the motor upon a drop in system pressure, provide visual indication that power is available and if there is phase reversal. Controller shall have manual start, stop, and emergency manual run capabilities. The controller shall be designed for solid state reduced voltage soft start stop, factory prewired, complete with circuit breaker, motor starter, pressure switch, running period timer, power available light and alarm contacts for power failure, phase loss and pump running, pilot light and auxiliary contacts for the alarm panel, recording pressure gauge, all mounted in NEMA Type II drip-tight enclosure. Controller shall be service entrance rated and have a 100,000 AIC rating.
F.
The Electrical Contractor shall coordinate the electrical connection lugs with the cable size being provided, or provide junction boxes and terminal strips to match wire sizes indicated in the motor schedule on the Electrical Drawings.
G.
Provide an automatic transfer switch. 1. The transfer switch shall be UL listed and FM approved and be an integral part of the fire pump control panel. The transfer switch shall include a disconnect switch and circuit breaker sized per NFPA 20. All interconnecting wiring between the transfer switch and fire pump controller will be completed and tested at the factory.
H.
Minimum Pressure Sustaining Valve: Provide a pressure sustaining valve on the pump package discharge to throttle the discharge volume of the pump when necessary to the suction line pressure will not be reduced below 10 psig.
JOCKEY PUMP A.
General Construction: Vertical-mounted multistage centrifugal jockey pump close-coupled to a motor arranged for 3 phase, 60 Hz electric service.
ELECTRIC FIRE PUMP
21 31 13 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING B.
2.03
2.04
A.
A low suction pressure cutoff switch panel mounted in a NEMA 2 enclosure conforming to NFPA 70 shall be wired to the fire pump control. The panel shall be furnished with a pressure switch externally mounted to stop the pump if the supply pressure drops to 20 psig or less or a time period over thirty (30) seconds.
B.
Provide the following visual and audible signals: 1. Supply Power Normal - Green Pilot Light 2. Supervisory Power Normal - White Pilot Light 3. Low Suction Pressure (without time delay) - Red Pilot Light
C.
Provide the following audible alarm signals: 1. Low Suction Pressure (after thirty (30) second delay) 2. Supply Power Failure 3. Supervisory Power Failure
D.
Power supply shall be obtained from a 120 volt circuit provided by Electrical Contractor and fused within the controller.
FLOW METER Flow Meter: FM approved, pitot tube type meter with 2 1/2 inch by 6 inch dial calibrated in GPM, 225 PSI WP, accuracy of ±2% full scale, annubar with two (2) shut-off valves and mounting couplings and sensing lines. 1. Fittings and Accessories: Flow meter with a dial type indicator orifice flanges, orifice plate, differential pressure valve and all accessories. 2. Eagle eye model flow meter by Dieterich or an approved equal.
OHIO EPA SUCTION CONTROL VALVE A.
PART 3 3.01
Controller: Magnetic starter, HOA switch, fused disconnect switch, Mercoid pressure switch, 120 volt control transformer and minimum run timer. Components shall be mounted in a NEMA 1 wall-mounted enclosure.
LOW SUCTION CUTOFF CONTROL PANEL
A.
2.05
01-13-2012
Fire pump shall be furnished with a FM approved suction control/sustaining valve to be installed on the discharge side of the fire pump. The installing contractor shall install a 1/2 inch pressure sensing line to the pilot operator mounted on the suction control valve. This sensing line shall include an orifice restriction (or shut-off valve), pressure gauge and drain valve for testing of the control valve. Valve shall be similar to Cla-Val Model 50B-5KG, globe style with 125 psi flanged connections.
EXECUTION
INSPECTION A.
This Contractor shall be responsible for all inspections required for the installation of the fire pumping system.
ELECTRIC FIRE PUMP
21 31 13 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 3.02
3.03
INSTALLATION A.
Mount fire pump and pipe as shown on the Drawings.
B.
Extend drain line from fire pump packing connections to nearest drain.
C.
Pipe casing relief valve to nearest drain.
D.
Provide the fuses required for each function and three (3) spare fuses of each size.
E.
Field testing and proper pump alignment shall be the responsibility of the fire pump manufacturer's qualified representative.
F.
The Contractor shall not lubricate sealed bearings.
CONCRETE PADS A.
3.04
3.05
01-13-2012
General Trades Contractor shall install a concrete pad under the fire pump and jockey pump bases. Coordinate size requirements with the General Trades Contractor.
TESTS A.
All tests shall be in accordance with NFPA 20 and NFPA 25 requirements.
B.
Pay all test fees and arrange and conduct the final field acceptance tests and provide all test equipment, including hoses and nozzles.
C.
Fully test all automatic control features.
D.
Notify the Authority Having Jurisdiction one (1) week before the tests so this person can be present and witness the acceptance test. If Authority Having Jurisdiction does not approve fire pump system, it will be cause for retest at no cost to the Owner.
MANUFACTURER'S FACTORY TESTS A.
The fire pump shall be tested prior to shipment to demonstrate that it performs as required. The test will measure pressure against capacity and power consumption. Also, the pump shall be hydrostatically tested at a pressure equal to 1 1/2 times the no-flow (shut-off) head of the pump's maximum diameter impeller plus the maximum allowable head, but at not less than 250 psig under any circumstances. The fire pump driver and controller shall be tested by its manufacturer to demonstrate compliance with NFPA 20.
ELECTRIC FIRE PUMP
21 31 13 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 3.06
FIELD ACCEPTANCE TEST A.
3.07
01-13-2012
A field acceptance test shall be conducted upon the completion of pump installation. The field test can then be compared to the factory test to determine the acceptability of the installation. The test shall be performed by flowing water through calibrated nozzles, approved flow meters, or other such devices that may be selected by the authority having jurisdiction. The test shall be conducted as recommended in NFPA Pamphlet 20 by pump manufacturer's representative in the presence of the authority having jurisdiction and with that authority's final approval and acceptance. Failure to submit documentation of factory and field tests will be just cause for equipment rejection.
COORDINATION OF WIRING A.
All power and emergency power service and control wiring to control panels and emergency generator and wiring to the fire alarm system shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor.
B.
All non-packaged fire pump system interconnecting wiring shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor.
C.
Interconnecting wiring between low suction panel and fire pump control panel to be provided by Electrical Contractor. END OF SECTION
ELECTRIC FIRE PUMP
21 31 13 - 5
22
PLUMBING
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
22 05 01 PLUMBING
PART 1 1.01
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION A.
Furnish material, labor, tools, accessories and equipment to complete and leave ready for operation all plumbing systems of this project as described in these Specifications and as shown on the Drawings.
B.
Refer to Sections 20 00 00 through 20 99 99 (as included) for items of a general nature which apply to this portion of the work. Sections 22 00 00 through 22 99 99 (as included) also describe Plumbing work.
C.
It is the intent that the Plumbing Work be complete in every respect.
D.
Use sufficient journeymen plumbers and competent supervisors in execution of this portion of the work to ensure proper and adequate installation throughout. In the acceptance or rejection of installed plumbing, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of workmen.
E.
Coordinate location of all work with other Contractors and equipment.
F.
Work includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Site Work: a. Water Service b. Gas Service c. Sanitary Sewer System d. Storm Sewer System e. Sewage Lift Station 2. Plumbing Insulation 3. Interior Domestic Water Piping System 4. Interior Natural Gas Piping System 5. Interior Sanitary, Waste and Vent Piping System 6. Interior Storm Drain Piping System 7. Plumbing Specialties 8. Water and Drain Valves 9. Water Supply Systems (See Index) 10. Plumbing Equipment: a. Electric Water Heaters b. Point-of-Use Electric Water Heaters c. Sewage Ejectors d. Sump Pumps e. Domestic Water Booster Pumps f. Expansion Tank 11. Plumbing Fixtures 12. Certification/Recertification on medical gas systems at every intrusion 13. Plumbing Alternates
PLUMBING
22 05 01 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
1.02
01-13-2012
G.
Plumbing Rough-in and Final Connections 1. Provide service rough-ins and make final connections to equipment furnished by the Equipment Contractor or the Owner. 2. Install plumbing equipment furnished by the Owner, unless otherwise noted. 3. Provide piping, valves and specialties as required and as specified under other Sections of these Specifications.
H.
Equipment Connections 1. Make final connections to equipment. Coordinate rough-in locations with other Contractors and the Owner. 2. Refer to approved equipment Drawings for exact rough-in sizes and locations. 3. Provide stops on supplies to equipment not otherwise furnished with integral stops.
LICENSES A.
The installation of this plumbing work shall be made by a Contractor and craftsmen licensed by the City, County, or State.
B.
Obtain from the State Department of Health, a Certificate of inspection and approval. Certificate of approval is to be inserted in the record and information booklets turned over to the Owner.
C.
Pay for all permits, tapping fees, inspection fees, meter cost, and other charges related to Plumbing work listed. END OF SECTION
PLUMBING
22 05 01 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
22 05 02 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 1.01
DESCRIPTION A.
1.02
A.
Standards: Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI), American Society of Sanitary Engineering (ASSE), American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
B.
All cast brass or bronze products shall be certified to be lead-free and meet EPA Standards when installed in the waterway used for drinking.
4 1/2 inch diameter dial, glass face with standard stainless steel bourdon tube spring, black die cast aluminum case, 0 to 160 psig range, ±0.5% of span accuracy, provided with ball valve. 1. Weiss Model 4PGA-1, Trerice, Ashcroft, Miljoco, Marsh, or Marshalltown.
THERMOMETERS A.
2.03
PRODUCTS
PRESSURE GAUGES A.
2.02
Provide plumbing piping specialties or accessories as listed herein or specified or indicated on Drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
PART 2 2.01
GENERAL
Center or bottom entry bimetal dial (3 inch diameter) thermometer, 30 to 240 degree F range with required insertion length to sense fluid temperature, 1/2 inch NPT brass thermowell with set screw. 1. Watts Series T8 or approved equal by Weiss, Miljoco, Trerice, Ashcroft, Marsh, or Marshalltown.
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A.
175 lb. SWP reduced pressure (ASSE 1013), bronze or cast iron body, with vents, inlet/outlet valves, test cocks, neoprene discs, Buna-N or plastic disc-stainless spring, interior check and differential pressure relief valves, air gap drain funnel, 32 degrees F to 145 degrees F. Temperature range and meeting the requirements of the local water department and EPA. Backflow preventer shall be serviceable without removal from pipe. Install strainer on inlet. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Watts, Ames, Cla-Val Company, Conbraco, Hersey or Wilkins. 2. Pipe backflow preventer drain through air gap fittings and down to 2 inches above nearest floor drain, unless noted otherwise. Secure and support drain line.
B.
Manufacturers and their models shall be approved by the EPA.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
22 05 02 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 2.04
2.05
VACUUM BREAKERS A.
125 lb. SWP (ANSI 112.1.1, ASSE 1001) bronze body construction, chrome plated, full line size with body trim, disc float, full size orifice. (For use without continuous backpressure.) 1. Watts No. 288C, Conbraco, Lawler, Wilkins, or Clayton.
B.
150 lb. SWP (ASSE-1056) bronze construction, 3/8 inch and 1/2 inch size, body trim, disc float, anti-siphon, spill-proof. (For use with continuous back pressure.) 1. Watts No. 008QT, Conbraco, Wilkins, Hersey or Clayton.
SHOCK ABSORBERS A.
2.06
Fully automatic, all brass trap primer activated by a drop of only 5 psig in building water pressure. Trap primers shall be able to be disassembled and repaired in field, provided with replaceable filter and so indicated on Shop Drawings. Trap primers shall conform to ASSE Standard 1018. Furnish trap primers as shown on the Drawings. Trap primers shall be sized as indicated on the Drawings. Provide distribution units when required. Provide 3/4 inch underfloor slab gravity drain from trap primer to inlet of trap. 1. MIFAB, Precision Plumbing Products "Prime-Rite" or Sioux Chief.
WATER HEATER EXPANSION TANKS A.
2.08
Shock absorbers shall conform to ASSE Standard 1010, PDI WH-201 and ANSI A112.26.1M-1984, stainless steel or copper housing. Furnish shock absorbers as shown on the Drawings. Shock absorbers shall be selected by weight in fixture units as indicated on the Drawings. 1. Zurn No. 1700, sizes 100 to 600, Wade No. W Series, Josam No. 75000 Series, Watts "SS" Stainless Steel series, or Jay R. Smith No. 5000 Series.
TRAP PRIMERS A.
2.07
01-13-2012
Welded ASME 125 psig steel tank with air charge valve, hot water connection, flexible heavy duty butyl diaphragm, rigid polypropylene liner, air precharge, FDA approved or certified for use in potable water service. See Plumbing Equipment Schedule on Drawings. Provide certification with Shop Drawing. 1. Amtrol "Ex-Trol" tank, State, Taco, Bell & Gossett, Wilkins or Wessels Expansion Tanks.
STRAINERS A.
1/2 Inch to 4 Inches: Watts No. 777S, "Y" strainer, 125 SWP, bronze body with 20 mesh stainless steel screen, threaded ends. Provide drain valve on strainer with 3/4 inch garden hose threaded outlet and capped.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
22 05 02 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 2.09
INTERIOR HOSE BIBBS A.
2.10
2.13
Zurn "Ecolotrol," 3/4 inch freezeresistant hydrant (ANSI/ASSE 1019) with chrome face integral self-draining vacuum breaker/backflow preventer, length as required. Provide key. All solder connections shall be lead-free. 1. Jay R. Smith, MIFAB, Woodford, Watts, Wade or Josam.
RECESSED WASHER CONNECTION BOX A.
2.12
Hose bibbs to have ball valves on supply lines and non-removable vacuum breaker spout, chrome finish, 3/4 inch hose end and be furnished as indicated on the Drawings. Inside sill fitting, loose key handle, slow compression cartridge. 1. Chicago Faucet, or equal by Hammond, Watts, T & S Brass, Nibco, Woodford, or Conbraco.
EXTERIOR WALL HYDRANTS A.
2.11
01-13-2012
WB1: Epoxy finish 20 gauge steel recessed wall box, top supply 1/2 inch hose end valves, and 2 inch drain pipe. Provide standpipe and trap. 1. Neptune, Oatey, or Water-Tite.
GREASE INTERCEPTOR A.
Concrete Construction: 1. E.C. Babbert. Precast concrete, complete with internal baffles, tappings, vents, manhole extension(s) to finished grade, bolted and gasketed manhole cover(s), reinforced construction and top suitable for heavy traffic. 2. Flow rate and grease capacity, inlet and outlets as shown on the Drawings. 3. E.C. Babbert, Mack Industries, Oldham or approved equal. 4. Interceptor shall comply with County, City, and State requirements. 5. Provide a 30 year bonded warranty against leakage and permeation.
B.
Fiberglass construction: 1. Proceptor Interceptors or approved equal. 2. Provide a 30 year bonded warranty against leakage and permeation.
C.
Grease interceptor cover shall have a ANSI load rating equal to "heavy duty" and be so indicated on the shop drawings. If rating is not indicated on shop drawings, there will be cause for rejection.
D.
Grease interceptor shall be left clean before final acceptance.
E.
Access cover shall be flush with finished floor.
VANDAL-PROOF VENT CAPS A.
J. R. Smith Fig. 1748, cast iron with set screws.
B.
Stoneman, Wade, Zurn, Watts or Josam.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
22 05 02 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 2.14
2.15
WATER METER A.
3 Inch Size and Larger: Turbine type with all bronze case, flanged ends, polypropylene rotor, ceramic magnets, stainless steel shaft and bolts, 150 psig W.P., register readout per utility company requirements. Provide remote readout register. 1. Hersey Model MHR, Badger, Rockwell or approved equal.
B.
Furnish meter and remote readout register with construction and readout approved by Utility Company.
C.
Coordinate requirements with utility company.
WATER HEATER DRAIN PAN A.
PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
Provide water heater drain pan and support for water heater. Drain pan shall be a minimum of 2 inches larger all around water heater, high density polyethylene with 1" diameter drain outlet. 1. Benjamin Manufacturing Company, Oatey or equal.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Install all plumbing specialties per manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Locate shock absorbers according to PDI Standard WH-201 and where shown on Drawings. Sizes shown on Drawings. Tag all shock absorbers with size designations for field inspection.
C.
Install backflow preventers and vacuum breakers as shown on the Drawings. Air gap type drain fittings are to be provided on reduced pressure backflow preventers and pipe to nearest drain.
D.
After installation of backflow preventer, flush water supply to remove debris. Clean out backflow preventer after flushing. Test backflow preventers at time of installation. A person or firm certified by the Ohio Department of Health shall perform the test and provide the testing equipment. Submit proper test report to Architect.
E.
Provide Y-type strainer with capped drain valve on upstream line to each backflow preventer.
F.
Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping to the water heaters and on domestic hot water recirculating pumps and where shown on Drawings.
G.
Install pressure gauges at the water service entrances and on the inlet and outlet piping of all pumps.
H.
Install wall hydrants flush and plumb with building wall and 24 inches above finished grade. Confirm exact height and locations with Architect.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
22 05 02 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
3.02
3.03
01-13-2012
I.
After installation of mixing valve assembly, flush water supply line to remove debris. Clean out shower mixing valve assembly and inlet strainers after flushing. Install strainers on upstream lines to inlets on mixing valve.
J.
Install continuous back pressure vacuum breaker on all lines to hose bibs if not furnished with integral vacuum breaker.
K.
Provide support for water meter and backflow preventer when required.
L.
Install water meter remote reader plumb with outside wall.
M.
Installation of water meter shall be approved by and meet Utility Company standards.
N.
Plumbing Contractor shall purchase water meter and remote reader from the Utility Company and install.
O.
Install water meter with three (3) valve bypass.
P.
Install backflow preventer on water supply line where shown.
Q.
All products of the same type shall be by the same manufacturer.
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate installation height and location of hose bibbs, faucets, interior and exterior wall hydrants with the Architect.
B.
Coordinate location of grease interceptor with other Contractors and equipment.
C.
Coordinate location and requirements of recessed washer connection box with Architect, equipment and the Electrical Contractor.
D.
Coordinate location of water meter remote reader with the Architect.
WIRING A.
Wiring for recessed washer connection box is a part of the Electrical Work.
B.
Provide all wiring for water meter remote reader. END OF SECTION
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
22 05 02 - 5
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
22 05 23 PLUMBING VALVES
PART 1 1.01
1.02
1.03
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION A.
Provide valves to facilitate maintenance and isolation of piping systems.
B.
All valves shall be line size.
C.
Provide valve chart. Refer to Section 20 05 20, "Record and Information Booklets."
D.
Shut-off valves shall be provided on all branches of main water lines and ahead of dielectric unions.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Standards: American National Standards Institute (ANSI), American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) and the Manufacturers' Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS).
B.
All cast brass or bronze valves shall be certified to be lead-free and meet EPA Standards when installed in the waterway used for drinking. Submit certification with valve shop drawings.
MANUFACTURERS A.
Gate Valves: Victaulic.
B.
Balance Valves: Milwaukee Valve, Apollo (Conbraco Industries), Hammond, Taco or Armstrong.
C.
Ball Valves: Milwaukee Valve, Apollo (Conbraco Industries), Hammond, Stockham, Watts, or Nibco.
D.
Butterfly Valves: Milwaukee Valve, Apollo, Hammond, Nibco, Keystone, Crane, Mueller, Watts, Stockham or Victaulic.
E.
Water Pressure Reducing Valves: Watts, Conbraco, Clayton (CLA-VAL), Cash, Acme, Ames, Baukmann or Wilkins.
F.
Check (Swing) Valves: Victaulic.
G.
Globe Valves: Milwaukee Valve, Hammond, Watts or Nibco.
H.
All valves of the same type used on the project shall be by the same manufacturer, except as noted.
PLUMBING VALVES
Milwaukee Valve, Hammond, Stockham, or Powell, Watts, Nibco or
Milwaukee Valve, Hammond, Stockham, Watts, Nibco or
22 05 23 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING PART 2 2.01
2.02
2.03
PRODUCTS
GATE VALVES A.
2 Inches and Smaller: Class 125, 200 lb. WOG, body and bonnets of ASTM B-62 cast bronze, single wedge disc, inside screw and rising stem, union bonnet, designed for unrestricted flow with back seat features for repacking under full pressure, with solder joint tubing or screwed ends, malleable iron handwheel. 1. Milwaukee Valve #148 (threaded ends) or #149 (soldered ends).
B.
2 1/2 Inches and Larger: Class 125, 200 lb. WOG, cast iron body, bronze trim with body and bonnet conforming to ASTM A-126, Class B with flanged ends. N.A. Packing (OS & Y), malleable iron handwheel. 1. Milwaukee Valve #F2885.
C.
OPTION: Ball valves as specified, 2 inches and smaller.
CHECK VALVES A.
2 Inches and Smaller: Class 125, 200 lb. WOG, cast bronze body and cap conforming to ASTM B-62, swing check design, with solder joint tubing or screwed ends, with replaceable composition disc and integral seat. 1. Milwaukee Valve #509T(TE) (threaded ends) or #1509T(SE) (soldered ends).
B.
2 1/2 Inches and Larger: Class 125, 200 lb. WOG, cast iron body, bronze trim and bolted cap conforming to ASTM A-126, Class B. Flanged ends, swing type disc. 1. Milwaukee Valve #F2974.
C.
The use of interior springs to assist closing of disc(s) shall not be accepted.
BALL VALVES A.
2.04
01-13-2012
2 Inches and Smaller: 2-piece ball valves, 600 lb. WOG, 150 SWP, cast bronze body conforming to ASTM B584, reinforced teflon seats, hexagonal threaded packing gland, TFE packing, full port, blow-out proof stem, adjustable packing gland, extension shaft for insulation clearance, stainless steel or chrome plated solid bronze ball, screwed or soldered ends. 1. Milwaukee Valve #BA-400 N61 (threaded ends) or BA-450 N61 (soldered ends).
BUTTERFLY VALVES A.
2 Inches and Smaller: 175 lb. SWP, B62 bronze body, screwed or solder joint ends, stainless steel shaft and disc, Viton seal, extension shaft for insulation clearance, lever handle. 1. Milwaukee "Butterball" Model BB2-100 (threaded ends) or BB2-350 (soldered ends).
PLUMBING VALVES
22 05 23 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING B.
2.05
2.06
2.07
01-13-2012
2 1/2 Inches and Larger: Lug type body, extended neck, 200 psig conforming to ASTM A126, Class B cast iron, EPDM cartridge liner, with aluminum bronze disc, Type 416 stainless steel stem, sizes up 6 inches - lever operated, 8 inches and larger - gear operated. Provide lever with lever operated valve. 1. Milwaukee Valve CL 1223E Series - sizes up to 6 inches, Model CL 323E series 8 inches up to 12 inches.
BALANCING VALVES A.
2 Inches and Smaller: 175 lb. SWP, ASTM B-62 bronze body (less than 3% lead content), screwed or solder joint ends, stainless steel shaft and disc, Viton seal, memory stop tab, extension shaft for insulation clearance, lever handle. The valve shall be equipped with integral meter connections or such connections provided on each side of the valve. Should they be located on both sides of the valve, spacing shall be such as to provide an accurate flow reading.
B.
Valves shall be suitable for use on domestic hot water systems.
DRAIN VALVES A.
Rough ASTM B-62 bronze body, angle pattern, screwed, boiler drain valves with packing nuts, garden hose thread outlet with bronze cap and chain as manufactured by any of the above listed Manufacturers.
B.
Ball Drain Valve: Bronze body, chrome plated ball, 600 WOG, 150 SWP, teflon seats, blow-out proof stem, adjustable packing gland, garden hose thread outlet with bronze gasketed cap and chain. Hammond No. 8501H.
C.
3/4 inch ball valve with capped hose end connector may be used at Contractor's option.
WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES A.
1 1/2 Inches and Smaller: All bronze body, stainless steel renewable seats, reinforced Buna-N diaphragm and valve disc (ASSE 1003) and a separate inlet strainer with stainless steel screen. Provide with low pressure range (10-35 psig) or higher pressure range (1/2 inch to 1 inch 50-145 psig; 1 1/4 inch 50-145 psig; 1 1/2 inch, 1 1/2 inch 50-95 psig). Refer to Drawings for pressure ranges. 1. Watts #223.
B.
2 Inches to 24 Inches: Flanged cast iron body, Class 125 rated at 175 psig, pressure reducing balanced control valve with V-port throttling, stainless steel seat, stainless steel tubing and large control filter. 1. Bermad Model 724-V-T-U-F.
C.
Provide strainer upstream of pressure reducing valves.
PLUMBING VALVES
22 05 23 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 2.08
WATER PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE A.
2.09
ASTM B-62 bronze body, diaphragm-activated, phosphor-bronze diaphragm and renewable seat disc, adjustable pressure settings. Refer to Drawings for pressure setting. 1. Cash Acme Type FH
GLOBE VALVES A.
2 Inches and Smaller: Class 150, 200 lb. WOG, cast bronze body and cap conforming to ASTM B-62, union bonnet, with solder joint tubing or screwed ends, gland packed, composition teflon disc, malleable iron handwheel. 1. Milwaukee Valve #590 T (threaded ends) or #1590 T (soldered ends).
B.
2 1/2 Inches and Larger: Class 125, 200 lb. WOG, bronze trim with cast iron body and bonnet conforming to ASTM A-126, Class B cast iron, flanged ends, N.A. packing, malleable iron handwheel. 1. Milwaukee Valve #F2981.
PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Install valves and specialties where indicated on the Drawings or where required for maintenance and service. Install valves with stems horizontal wherever possible, or within 15 degrees of vertical. Install valves with stems in the vertical in piping near the floor.
B.
Install 3/4 inch drain valves with hose end and capped in piping at low points to provide complete drainage of all systems.
C.
Install valves on hot and cold water branches serving more than one fixture, in supply lines to any equipment not provided with stops and in lines to wall hydrants.
D.
Install all valves in accessible locations. Coordinate with ceilings, structure, mechanical and electrical equipment.
E.
Open valves with solder joints fully before soldering to piping and no welded connections shall be made to valves.
F.
Provide space to allow adjustment of balancing valve.
G.
Install union between each valve and piece of equipment.
H.
Install strainer on inlet side of each pressure reducing valve.
I.
Install access panels for all valves above inaccessible ceilings and locate in walls or chases. Coordinate panel locations with the General Contractor and Owner's Representative.
J.
Install valves on branches to isolate areas of the building.
PLUMBING VALVES
22 05 23 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
3.02
3.03
01-13-2012
K.
Water pressure regulator for kitchen dishwasher will be furnished by the Kitchen Equipment Contractor, installed by the Plumbing Contractor.
K.
Provide water pressure regulator set for 20 psig outlet pressure for kitchen dishwasher. Coordinate size and capacity with equipment supplied.
L.
Extend drain from water pressure relief valve to 2 inches above floor drain.
PROHIBITIONS A.
Do not install any valves where the fluid operating pressure exceeds 80% of its pressure rating.
B.
Do not install solder joint valves on systems where the fluid temperature may soften the solder.
C.
Do not use union fittings on soldered copper connections.
TESTS A.
Test all valves for tightness.
B.
Test operate all valves at least once from closed-to-open-to-closed positions while valve is under pressure. Replace or repair leaking valve. END OF SECTION
PLUMBING VALVES
22 05 23 - 5
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
22 07 01 PLUMBING INSULATION
PART 1 1.01
1.02
DESCRIPTION A.
Insulate all domestic cold water supply and hot water supply, regardless of length or location, and also insulate the following: 1. All horizontal storm and emergency relief piping, all roof sumps and vertical storm and emergency relief piping above ceilings. 2. Water supply and waste pipe under all fixtures accessible to the handicapped. 3. All above-floor slab trap primer drain lines to trap inlet. 4. All above-floor slab main water supply lines from building entrance to tee for domestic water connection. 5. All horizontal storm sump pump and foundation drain sump pump discharge lines.
B.
If insulation is damaged while in storage or during installation, replace insulation at no additional cost to the Owner.
FACTORY-INSULATED EQUIPMENT A.
1.03
1.04
Water heaters and hot water storage tanks shall be factory-insulated to comply with the State Energy Code and shall comply with Federal Standards HHI-530A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Reference standards: Laboratories (UL).
B.
Insulation shall be in accordance with the State Energy Code and provide a maximum allowable heat loss as follows: 1. Piping: 25 BTUH psf of pipe surface area.
C.
Insulation to be installed according to "Commercial and Industrial Insulation Standards," as published by the Midwest Insulation Contractor's Association, latest edition.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) and Underwriters'
FIRE AND SMOKE HAZARD RATINGS A.
1.05
GENERAL
Indoor pipe insulation shall have a flame-spread rating not exceeding 25, a smokedeveloped rating not exceeding 50, and a fuel-contributed rating not exceeding 50. All insulation accessories shall have similar ratings. Rates are as tested by procedures ASTM E-84, NFPA 255, and UL 723.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.
Protection: Leave insulation boxed and stored until time for use. Elevate and cover material to avoid moisture condensation and physical abuse and to protect from weather.
PLUMBING INSULATION
22 07 01 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 1.06
MANUFACTURERS A.
Pipe and Roof Sump Insulation 1. Fiberglass: Owens-Corning, Manson, Knauf, or Johns-Manville. 2. Closed Cell Insulation: Nomaco, Tundra, "Armaflex," Rubatex, or IMCOA. 3. PVC Insulation Covers: Speed Line, CertainTeed, IMCOA, Knauf, CEEL-CO CEEL-TITE 300 Series, Foster Sealfas, or Zeston.
B.
Plumbing fixture drain and angle valves and supply lines under fixtures accessible to the disabled and shall be vandal-resistant, seamless, fire retardant, antimicrobial (germ-fighting additive) (insulation may be preinstalled with P-traps and offset grid drains): Plumberex, McGuire, Truebro, Brocar, EBC, TCI or Sanitary Dash.
PART 2 2.01
2.02
01-13-2012
PRODUCTS
ADHESIVES, FINISHES AND MASTICS A.
Use the following items or equivalent items: 1. Vapor barrier lap adhesive - Foster Drion Contact Bond Cement 85-75 2. Lagging adhesive - Foster 81-42W 3. Metal bonding adhesive - Foster 85-15 4. Indoor vapor barrier finish - Foster 30-80 5. Indoor breather finish - Foster Lagtone 46-50 6. Outdoor vapor barrier mastic - Foster 46-50 7. "Fuse-Seal" sticks and applicator (for polyolefin insulation)
B.
The use of the preceding adhesives, finishes, and mastics shall be approved by the insulation manufacturer. Once dried, these materials shall have a flame-spread rating not exceeding twenty-five (25) and a smoke-developed rating not exceeding fifty (50).
THERMAL RESISTANCE OF PIPING INSULATION A.
Insulate all piping installed to serve buildings and within buildings in accordance with the minimum pipe insulation as listed in the following table: Minimum Pipe Insulation based on a conductivity of 0.24 to 0.28 (Btu)(in)/((hr)(cu.ft.)(°F)) 100 degree F Mean Rating Temperature
Piping System
Insulation Thickness for Pipe Sizes (Inches) Fluid 1 1 1/4 Temperature and to Ranges (°F) Less 2
DOM hot water, tempered water and hot water return
2 1/2 to 4
5 and Larger
any
1.0
1.0
1.5
2.0
40-55
0.5
0.5
1.0
1.0
Storm drain (horizontal only and roof sump)
any
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
Floor drain p-traps
any
--
--
1.0
--
DOM cold water
PLUMBING INSULATION
22 07 01 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING B. 2.03
2.04
2.05
A.
Fiberglass heavy-density insulation with all service vapor membrane jacket and pressure sealing lap adhesive on longitudinal and butt strips, K=0.23 at 75 degrees F, OwensCorning 25 ASJ/SSL II. Staple and seal with pressure sealing lap adhesive on longitudinal and butt strips. Jacket vapor membrane shall have an installed vapor permeance of not more than 0.09 perms.
B.
Polyolefin foam insulation (for service temperature up to 210 degrees F), K=0.24 at 75 degrees F, IMCO "IMCOLOCK" or "IMCOSHIELD." No vapor barrier is necessary with 0.0 perm/inch permeability.
C.
Option: A flexible, closed-cell elastomeric insulation with pressure sealing longitudinal joints or applied adhesive meeting ASTM E84's ratings of 25 flame-spread and 50 smokedeveloped. Adhesive shall be approved by Insulation Manufacturer.
EXPOSED INDOOR PIPING DROPS UP TO 10 FEET ABOVE NEAREST WALKING SURFACE A.
Insulation same as for indoor piping. Cover with ultraviolet-resistant PVC jacket. Jacket to be self-extinguishing and have zero fuel contribution. PVC jacket shall have a flamespread rating not exceeding twenty-five (25) and a smoke developed rating not exceeding fifty (50). All piping visible inside and outside mechanical rooms is considered exposed.
A.
Insulation same as for indoor piping. Cover with 0.016 inch thick aluminum jacket with "Pittsburgh Seam." Seal between metal jacket and sleeve. All piping visible inside and outside mechanical rooms is considered exposed.
FITTINGS AND VALVES Premolded PVC covers over molded insulation. Insulation same thickness as on adjoining pipe. Insulation shall have a flame-spread rating not exceeding twenty-five (25) and a smoke-developed rating not exceeding fifty (50). For polyolefin insulation, use insulation of same type and thickness as on adjoining pipe.
PIPE INSULATING SUPPORT A.
PART 3 3.01
The pipe sizes given in the preceding table are nominal dimensions.
INDOOR PIPING
A.
2.06
01-13-2012
Refer to Section 20 05 45, "Hangers, Supports and Inserts." The use of thermal protectors as pipe insulation supports are noted elsewhere in this specification. Where inserts are used, maintain insulation vapor barrier integrity.
EXECUTION
GENERAL INSTALLATION NOTES A.
Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
PLUMBING INSULATION
22 07 01 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
B.
Use no damaged or water-soaked insulation.
C.
Insulate all water piping as described above, including piping concealed in walls.
D.
Insulation to be continuous through sleeves and hangers.
E.
When piping is installed through fire-rated walls and floors, the insulation shall be continuous and fire-rated calking shall be installed between pipe insulation and wall sleeve without any interruption to the vapor barrier.
F.
Leave no "raw" ends on fiberglass insulation. Bevel fiberglass insulation terminations seal with insulating cement and cover ends with glass cloth or similar to pipe insulation covering.
G.
Ensure that exposed insulation has a neat and finished appearance. Provide sizing for insulation if required and leave ready for painting.
H.
Overlap jacket joints and seal with a suitable adhesive. The use of staples is acceptable on domestic hot water systems only, but only as an installation aid and not as a substitute for adhesive.
I.
Brush coat all staples with a white vapor-barrier mastic and seal to provide an uninterrupted vapor membrane. Mastic shall be approved for use by the insulation manufacturer.
J.
Install all insulation with a continuous, unbroken, and unpunctured factory-applied vapor membrane. END OF SECTION
PLUMBING INSULATION
22 07 01 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
22 11 16 INTERIOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
PART 1 1.01
1.02
DESCRIPTION A.
Connect to the site water service line approximately 5 feet outside building foundation wall as shown on Drawings, extending the water line into building. The Site Utility Contractor shall provide the site water line to the point indicated on the Drawings.
B.
Provide a complete system of hot and cold water to fixtures and equipment.
C.
Provide a trap primer discharge line from outlet of each trap primer to each associated floor drain inlet.
D.
Provide a water service water meter and backflow preventer. Refer to Drawings.
E.
Test and sanitize the complete new domestic water system, isolating any existing water system as much as possible.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Standards: American Society of Plumbing Engineers (ASPE), American National Standards Institute (ANSI), American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), American Water Works Association (AWWA), National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) and Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI), Columbus, Ohio Division of Water.
B.
Provide only fittings, piping, valves, and solder certified to be lead-free in accordance with EPA and NSF requirements. Submit written certification that all of the installed components meet these requirements.
PART 2 2.01
GENERAL
PRODUCTS
PIPING A.
1 1/4 Inches and Smaller: Crosslinked polyethylene (PEX) tubing (SDR9, ASTM F876 and ASTM F877).
B.
1 1/2 Inches to 4 Inches: Type "L" hard drawn copper tubing (ASTM B88).
C.
5 Inches and Larger: 1. Schedule 40 galvanized steel piping (ASTM A53). 2. Type "L" hard drawn copper tubing (ASTM B88).
D.
Piping Below Grade, 2 Inches and Smaller: Type "K" soft temper copper tubing (ASTM B88).
INTERIOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
22 11 16 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING E.
2.02
2.03
01-13-2012
Piping Below Grade, 3 Inches and Larger: Ductile cast iron (AWWA C151), cement lined (AWWA C104), factory coated, Class 52 rated at 250 psi working pressure.
JOINTS A.
Copper: Wrought copper socket solder (ANSI B16.22) or brazed (ANSI B31.1) joints.
B.
Galvanized Steel: Galvanized cast iron, Class 150 lb. flanged or screwed fittings (ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10); roll-grooved joints with Grade "E" gasket for use up to 230 degrees F service. Acceptable manufacturers are Victaulic, Tyco, Stockham, Grovlok, and Central.
C.
Pipe Extracted Fitting (T-Drill): An extracted mechanical tee joint may be made in copper tube. The joint shall be made using tooling specifically designed for this type of joint, and the tooling shall extrude a collar with a minimum height of three times the thickness of the tube wall. The branch tube shall be beveled to match the contour of the main run of the piping and dimpled to control the depth of insertion. The fitting penetration shall not impede the free flow within the piping system. The joint shall be completed using a certified method of brazing in accordance with ASME brazing requirements. The brazing filler material shall be of the copper phosphorous classification. 1. This joining method shall be in strict accordance with the written installation instructions as published by T-Drill Industries, Inc.
D.
Below Ground Piping 3 Inches and Larger: Ductile iron with mechanical joint ends (AWWA C110/C111), cement lining (AWWA C104), factory enamel finish (AWWA C151). Fittings 16 inches and smaller may be manufactured according to AWWA C153. 1. All interior joint shall be of the "Anchor" type using: EBAA "MEGALUG" mechanical joint restraint (ASTM A536), MJ Field Lok (ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11) or other approved restraint system. 2. The piping as it penetrates the building shall be restrained to prevent the transfer of "thrust" from the exterior to the interior piping.
E.
Underground Copper: Wrought copper fittings with brazed joints.
F.
PEX: Crosslinked polyethylene tubing fittings systems (ASTM F877), brass insert fittings (ASTM F1807).
SOLDER AND BRAZING ALLOYS A.
Solder: 95/5 tin-antimony (ASTM B32), lead-free (above grade use only). 1. "Silvabrite 100" as manufactured by Englelhard or equal. 2. "Bridgit" as manufactured by J.W. Harris Company or equal. 3. "Sterling" as manufactured by Tarament or equal.
B.
Copper Brazing Alloys: AWS A5.8 Class BCUP-5 alloys having a melting point greater than 1350 degrees F. (ANSI B31.1), lead-free. 1. Sil-Fos filler as manufactured by Handy and Harmon or equal. 2. Aircosil 15 filler as manufactured by Airco Welding Products or equal. 3. "Stay-Silv "15" as manufactured by J.W. Harris.
INTERIOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
22 11 16 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING C.
PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
No alloys containing lead shall be used for joints within any portion of the potable water system.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Install all valves in accessible locations and coordinated with access panel locations.
B.
Make all joints in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written installation instructions and best practices of the profession.
C.
Install water lines located in exterior walls closest to the "heated" side of the wall. Cover the piping with continuous insulation. Pack the space between the insulated pipe and the "unheated" side of the wall with a continuous layer of building insulation.
D.
Install shock absorbers as sized and indicated on the documents.
E.
Provide an approved dielectric brake between piping of dissimilar metals; fittings, flanges, transition materials, etc.
F.
Install unions or flanges between valves and final connections to all equipment.
G.
Use only nipples of the same or similar material as the pipe being connected.
H.
Install valves on all branch line, fixture group areas, wall hydrant drops at the wall and at all equipment connection, whether specifically shown on the Drawings or not.
I.
Securely anchor all supply piping to fixtures, faucets, hydrants and flush valves to prevent movement.
J.
Provide all low points within the potable water systems with drain valves to facilitate drainage. Install system to permit complete drainage of the system.
K.
Where piping is installed above ceilings, below ceiling insulation, the Plumbing Contractor shall confirm that ceiling insulation has no insulation voids above piping.
L.
Install piping entering the building below grade with a minimum of 4 feet of cover from finished grade.
M.
For Copper Pipe: Cut copper tubing square for all joints, remove burrs with approved cutting tool and reaming tools. Clean inside of fittings and outside surfaces of tubing in joint area with stainless steel wool before assembly of joint. Apply brazing and heat source in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to provide proper capillary action to fill the socket space and to achieve 100 percent of sheet line strength capability.
N.
For PEX Piping: Provide all tubing, fittings, tools, manifolds, and accessories required for a complete installation. Installation shall comply with manufacturer's requirements.
INTERIOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
22 11 16 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING O.
3.02
3.03
01-13-2012
Contractor shall be certified by manufacturers for installation of PEX tubing and fitting systems.
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate piping with beams, joints, wall, HVAC piping, ductwork, equipment and electrical equipment and conduit.
B.
Coordinate installation height and location of faucets, hose bibbs, and wall hydrants with the Architect.
C.
Install exterior wall hydrants flush and plumb with exterior wall.
D.
Coordinate flushing of new site water line and building domestic water lines after sterilization of new domestic water lines with Owner.
E.
Coordinate location of water meter remote reader location with Architect.
F.
Coordinate location of main building water supply line within building, above floor slab with Site Utility Contractor.
G.
Coordinate any shutdown time for water line connection(s) with the Owner and General Trades Contractor.
H.
Coordinate location of site water service line entrance into building and water meter with equipment and doors.
I.
Coordinate location and size of new water service connection with Fire Protection Contractor.
J.
Coordinate location of rough-ins, outlets, and final equipment connections with all other Contractors and Owner's equipment.
TESTS A.
Perform tests as required by the Local Code Authority and as specified below: 1. Take precautions to remove all air before performing hydrostatic tests. 2. Test piping at 1 1/2 times actual working pressure or 125 psig, whichever is greater, for six hours with no pressure drop. All tests shall be made before piping is concealed. Tests shall be witnessed by the Architect's Representative. 3. If a leak occurs, defective piece or joint shall be replaced. Caulking is prohibited. Repeat tests until no leaks are detected. 4. Perform all testing after completion of roughing-in, before setting of fixtures.
B.
Submit test reports to the Owner.
INTERIOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
22 11 16 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 3.04
01-13-2012
STERILIZATION OF WATER LINES A.
After the water system is complete and fixtures have been installed, flush piping clean and sterilize all new hot and cold-water piping, including water service line and water heaters. Sterilize lines under the immediate on-the-job supervision of a Water Testing Laboratory regularly engaged in the service. This Contractor shall pay all fees for testing and use of testing equipment.
B.
With all outlets closed, fill system to working pressure and close valve on supply main.
C.
Open all fixtures slightly and pump a sterilization solution into test tap to achieve a minimum of 50 maximum parts per million chlorine solution made from a sanitation grade of hyperchlorite, 70% available chlorine. Hyperchlorites may be Pittchlor, H.T.H. or Perclorn.
D.
Test every outlet, hot or cold, during fill to prove the presence of chlorine at that outlet. Chlorine shall be present at all outlets.
E.
Water piping system shall remain filled for a period of 24 hours. As an alternative, the system may be filled with a 200 part per million solution of chlorine, and allowed to stand for three hours.
F.
After sterilizing, all outlets shall be opened wide and the main supply valves opened, flushing system free of chlorine with clean water. Outlets shall be again checked and flushed until free of chlorine. Flush entire system. Coordinate this action with Owner if building is occupied.
G.
After final flushing, all electric water cooler strainers, faucet aerators and mixing valve strainers shall be removed, cleaned and reinstalled.
H.
Chlorination of the system may be performed at same time the pressure test is conducted.
I.
After sterilization of system is complete, notify the local Health Department having jurisdiction to obtain water samples and complete biological examination.
J.
Obtain Certification of Acceptance from the Health Department and forward to the Architect.
K.
When connecting to an existing system, isolate all existing piping to the extent possible during testing. END OF SECTION
INTERIOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
22 11 16 - 5
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
22 11 26 VARIABLE SPEED WATER BOOSTER PUMPS
PART 1 1.01
DESCRIPTION A.
1.02
1.03
A.
Each pump and drive unit shall be performance tested at the factory at design conditions. The system shall be hydrostatically tested. The entire assembly shall be painted after shop testing.
B.
All packaged equipment shall be independently Third Party labeled as a system suitable for the intended use by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) in accordance with OSHA Federal Regulations 29CFR1910.399 and NFPA Pamphlet 70, National Electric Code (NEC), Article 90-7.
PUMP RATINGS AND CAPACITIES
Refer to the Drawings for GPM, suction and discharge pressures, Ft. Hd., HP., and electrical requirements.
SUBMITTALS A.
1.07
Unless otherwise noted, motors shall be 3500 RPM with the horsepower indicated on the Drawings. All motors shall be equipped with ball bearings.
RATINGS AND CAPACITIES A.
1.06
Pump Operating Point Requirements: The operating point of each pump at the conditions shown shall be within 5 percentage points of the maximum efficiency on its impeller curve. The impeller furnished is not to exceed 90% of the cutwater diameter available for the pump casing furnished. The impeller curve shall be continuously rising throughout the range contained within its efficiency curves. The peak of the impeller curve shall be a minimum of 10% above the total head shown on the Drawings. The pump must not overload the motor at any point on the impeller curve.
MOTORS A.
1.05
Provide a packaged variable speed booster pump system capable of maintaining a constant discharge pressure regardless of changes in flow or suction pressure.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.04
GENERAL
Shop drawings and pump curves shall indicate materials, size, RPM, GPM, Ft. Hd., efficiency and brake horsepower at the design conditions. Provide wiring diagrams.
MANUFACTURERS A.
Manufacturers: Canariis, Peerless, Aurora, or ITT Bell & Gossett.
VARIABLE SPEED WATER BOOSTER PUMPS
22 11 26 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 1.08
START-UP SERVICE A.
PART 2 2.01
01-13-2012
Pump manufacturer shall provide a Representative to start up, adjust and fully prepare booster pump for final operation. PRODUCTS
VARIABLE SPEED BOOSTER PUMP A.
Construction: Packaged, factory piped duplex pump system that requires only suction and discharge pipe connections. The system shall consist of two pumps, variable speed drives, starters, controls, valves and all necessary piping.
B.
Duplex Pumps: Each pump to be cast iron, bronze fitted with bronze shaft sleeves, and mechanical seals. Furnish variable frequency drive (VFD) for each pump. A built-in adjustable speed control shall vary the speed of the pump to meet system requirements.
C.
Factory-Installed Piping: Standard weight stainless steel, 150 lb. flanged connections, supported independently of pump flanges. All control sensing lines and gauge connections shall be piped with shut-off valves. Butterfly valves shall be furnished on the suction side of each pump. Check valves and shut-off valves shall be provided on the discharge side of each pump. Piping shall be arranged for removal of pump volute without disturbing motor or drive. Provide a full-sized manual bypass with a full-sized butterfly valve to allow the water distribution system to remain in service in the event of a pump failure, and allow removal of any or all of the pumps.
D.
Controls: The electrical control system shall start and stop pumps as required. The secondary pump shall be started by a drop in system pressure and stopped by a minimum run timer in conjunction with the pressure switch. All start and stop functions shall be controlled by adjustable devices. Control features shall include: 1. Lead pump shutdown on no flow. 2. Automatic pump alternation. 3. Low suction pressure alarm (audible and visual). 4. Pump running lights. 5. Automatic addition of standby pump on flow demand.
E.
Cabinet: UL-Listed, NEMA 1. Individual disconnect switches, fuses or circuit breaker and hand-off-automatic switch shall be furnished for each pump. Controls shall be 115 volt, including control circuit fuses. A door handle shall be provided for each pump disconnect switch so both power and control circuits are deenergized before the door is opened. Third leg overload protection shall be provided on each magnetic starter. A transformer fused on both the primary and secondary sides shall be provided for 115 volt control circuit. Factory wiring shall be complete between the control cubicle and electric motors.
VARIABLE SPEED WATER BOOSTER PUMPS
22 11 26 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING PART 3 3.01
3.02
3.03
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Install flexible connectors on both suction and discharge manifolds.
B.
Install a vent cock on volute casing.
C.
Install long dimension increasers or decreasers at suction and discharge of base mounted pumps.
D.
Support vertical piping drops from floor braces.
E.
Install isolation valves for removal of pumps without draining of system.
F.
Install vibration isolators between unit base and concrete pad.
G.
Field testing and proper pump alignment shall be the responsibility of the pump manufacturer's qualified representative.
TESTS A.
Once pumps are installed, pump manufacturer's qualified representative shall run pumps to test them to see if they are within specifications and to cycle pumps.
B.
All electrical wiring between controllers and motors shall be tested.
C.
All automatic control features shall be tested.
D.
Contractor shall notify the Architect's and Owner's Representative one week before the tests so the persons can be present and witness the acceptance test. If the Architect's and Owner's Representative does not approve pump system, it will be cause for repair or replacement and retest at no cost to Owner.
CONCRETE PADS A.
3.04
01-13-2012
Contractor shall install a concrete pad under pump base. Coordinate size requirements with General Trades Contractor.
WIRING A.
All power service wiring to control panel shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor. END OF SECTION
VARIABLE SPEED WATER BOOSTER PUMPS
22 11 26 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
22 13 16 INTERIOR SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM
PART 1 1.01
1.02
1.03
DESCRIPTION A.
Provide a complete system of soil, waste, and vent piping to fixtures and equipment, including traps, floor drains, trench drains, and cleanouts, extending to a point 5 feet outside building wall. Connect to site sanitary sewer system.
B.
Site sanitary sewer system provided by the Site Utility Contractor.
C.
Refer to Drawings for size of connections to fixtures.
D.
Test complete new system.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Standards: American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) and the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI), American Water Works Association (AWWA), American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), and American National Standard Institute (ANSI).
B.
All pipe and fittings shall conform to the requirements of Commercial Standard CS188.
MANUFACTURERS A.
Piping: 1. Cast Iron: Tyler Pipe or Charlotte Pipe & Foundry. 2. PVC Plastic: Charlotte, Nibco, Manville, Yardley, Freedom or Crestline.
B.
Drains and Cleanouts: Zurn, Wade, Jay R. Smith, MIFAB, Watts or Josam.
C.
Trench Drains: Josam, Zurn, Polydrain, Polycast, Jay R. Smith "Enviro-Flo" or Aco "Enviro Flow" Model 9818.
PART 2 2.01
GENERAL
PRODUCTS
PIPING A.
Piping and fittings in earth under slab: 1. Schedule 40 PVC (ASTM D1785 and ASTM D2665) plastic pipe, solid wall.
B.
Interior Piping and Fittings Above Slab: 1. Hubless cast iron (CISPI-301), factory enamel coated. 2. Schedule 40 PVC (ASTM D1785 and ASTM D2665), solid wall plastic pipe.
INTERIOR SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM
22 13 16 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
2.02
2.03
01-13-2012
C.
Vent Piping and Fittings: 1. Hubless cast iron (CISPI-301). 2. Schedule 40 PVC (ASTM D2665).
D.
Note: Certain ceiling area(s) are used as a return air plenum, and plastic piping is prohibited. Refer to Architectural and HVAC Drawings for areas that apply to this requirement. First and second floor tenant areas shall be considered as plenum areas.
E.
All cast iron piping and fittings shall have factory-applied coatings and be E.P.A. acceptable.
F.
All fittings shall be drainage type and be same manufacturer as piping and be compatible with piping for size, material, and joint type.
G.
Sump Pump and Sewage Ejector Discharge Piping: 1. 4 Inches and Smaller: Standard weight, galvanized steel (ASTM 120, Type "F") with galvanized cast iron screwed drainage fittings, shall be used to the point of connection to a gravity line. 2. For Piping 5 Inches and Larger: Schedule 40 galvanized carbon steel piping (ASTM A53) with galvanized cast iron Class 125 lb. flanged drainage fittings (ANSI B16.1) shall be used to the point of connection to a gravity line.
JOINTS A.
Cast Iron Piping: 1. Compression type plastic or rubber gaskets (ASTM C564) by Dual-Tight or Ty Seal with lubricant equal to "Lubrifast." 2. "No-Hub" coupling with ASTM C-564 neoprene sealing sleeve, minimum of 28 gauge (0.016 inch) thick heavy duty slotted or corrugated Type 304 stainless steel shield with a minimum of two (2) stainless steel bands on pipe sizes 1 1/2 inch to 4 inches, minimum of four (4) bands on pipe sizes 5 inches to 10 inches. Joints in hubless cast iron pipe sizes 1 1/2 inch to 2 inches where exposure to head pressure cannot exceed 10 foot head shall be approved by CISPI Standard 310-85. Pipe sizes 2 1/2 inches to 10 inches shall be Clamp-All Model #80. Approved manufacturers: Anco "Husky," Mission or Charlotte Heavy Duty. 3. The threading of cast iron piping is prohibited.
B.
PVC Plastic Piping: 1. Solvent and cements as recommended by the pipe and fittings manufacturer.
FLOOR DRAINS A.
General Construction: Drains to be adjustable, coated cast iron double drainage pattern, bottom outlet, inside caulk with flashing clamp, strainers, sediment buckets and trap primer inlets where required and other accessories and features indicated on the Schedule on the Drawings.
B.
Each floor drain, other than a light duty rating, shall have an ANSI load rating and be so indicated on the Shop Drawings. If rating is not indicated on Shop Drawings, they will be rejected.
INTERIOR SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM
22 13 16 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
2.04
2.05
2.06
C.
Provide membrane clamps on all floor drains in floors having waterproof membrane.
D.
Slot in grates shall be free of flashing (clean cut), and tops shall not have sharp edges which may be injurious to bare feet when used in shower or swimming pool areas.
E.
Refer to Schedule on the Drawings for specific types and accessories.
CLEANOUTS A.
General Construction: Floor cleanouts shall be adjustable, inside caulk with flashing clamp and other accessories and features indicated on the Schedule on the Drawings.
B.
General: All cleanouts to be line size up to and including 4 inches and installed in accessible locations.
C.
Each floor cleanout other than a light duty rating, shall have an ANSI load rating and be so indicated on the Shop Drawings. If rating is not indicated on Shop Drawings, they will be rejected.
D.
Provide membrane clamps on all cleanouts in floors having waterproofing membranes.
E.
Refer to Schedule on the Drawings for specific types and accessories.
TRAPS A.
Same material as piping.
B.
Refer to Section 22 42 01, "Plumbing Fixtures" for fixture traps, exception, floor mounted fixtures.
VANDALPROOF VENT CAPS A.
2.07
01-13-2012
Zurn Model Z-193, cast iron with vandal-resistant fastening device. 1. Stoneman, Wade, Jay R. Smith, Watts or Josam.
TRENCH DRAINS A.
Vehicular Traffic: 1. Pre-slope polymer concrete trench drain system, 6 inch wide, interlocking joints. Heavy-duty, ductile iron frame assembly with bracket support or anchor bars for concrete installation. Section will have end caps, no-hub end outlets, no-hub bottom outlet or 12 x 24 catch basins with dome strainer for bottom outlet or 18 gauge stainless steel sediment baskets for catch basins. Grate will be slotted ductile iron and secured to the trench with screws to the frame or locking device. Application loading pressure to 300 psi. 2. Refer to the drawings for length, sizes, (widths) connections, etc. 3. Manufacturers: ABT, Inc. (Polydrain), Zurn, Neenah, Quazite (Polycast), or approved equal.
INTERIOR SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM
22 13 16 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING PART 3 3.01
3.02
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
GENERAL INSTALLATION A.
Pitch soil and waste piping no less than 1/8 inch per foot, for pipes 2 inches and smaller, pitch at 1/4 inch per foot.
B.
Minimum size is 2 inches for underground waste and vent piping.
C.
Install P-trap below floor for floor drains, floor sinks, janitor receptors, showers, standpipes, bathtubs, and hub drains.
D.
All changes of directions shall be made with TY or Y fittings and 1/8 bends as required.
E.
All pipe joints shall be compatible with piping for size, material and joint types.
F.
Provide all necessary adapters, fittings, and pipe required to make connections to site utility piping and to new and existing building sewer and drains.
G.
All sanitary waste and vent piping in return air plenums required to be insulated, shall be insulated with pipe insulation meeting the requirements for return air plenums.
H.
Plastic piping shall not be allowed in return air plenums and other areas prohibited by Code.
I.
All piping shall be concealed, unless indicated on Drawings.
J.
Any horizontal sanitary piping located in elevator equipment rooms shall be covered and enclosed by a painted metal enclosure to prevent water dripping onto equipment.
K.
Vertical stacks shall be supported by riser clamps at each floor and concealed when passing through finished areas, unless noted otherwise.
L.
Install bathtub traps to be accessible. Coordinate locations with General Trades Contractor.
VENTS A.
Install vents through roof as follows: 1. 3 inches minimum size. 2. Locate at least 8 feet away from outside wall of building and 15 feet away from outside air intakes or operable windows. 3. Offset vent piping below roof to allow for thermal expansion and contraction, minimum 4 foot offset. 4. Vents to extend 12 inches above roof, except where specifically required to be higher or lower by code. 5. Plumbing Contractor cuts hole(s) in roof. Install vent through roof vent boot or sleeve in membrane or metal roof. Roof vent boots furnished and installed by General Trades Contractor. General Trades Contractor to flash vents into roof construction and make watertight. 6. Coordinate vent locations through roofs with General Trades Contractor, HVAC Contractor and Architect.
INTERIOR SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM
22 13 16 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
3.03
3.04
B.
Connect to existing vents where shown on Drawings.
C.
Pitch vents for proper drainage.
01-13-2012
FLOOR DRAINS AND CLEANOUTS A.
This Contractor is responsible for installing top of floor drains and cleanouts flush and level with wall or finished floor. If not shown on Architectural Drawings, confirm elevation and proper floor pitch to floor drains and floor cleanouts with Architect before roughing in. All items not installed flush and level will be removed and replaced by this Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
B.
Use graphite on all cleanout plug threads.
C.
Install duct tape over floor drains and cleanout covers to provide protection from scratching and collection of dirt and debris during construction. Remove tape just prior to final inspection.
D.
Install wall cleanouts in finished areas, at the base of all stacks at 18 inches above finished floor where indicated on Drawings.
E.
Provide exposed cleanout plugs without coverplate in unfinished areas or in above ceiling installations.
F.
Exterior: Install in center of 24 inch square concrete slab, 6 inches thick flush with grade or pavement. Concrete shall be installed by General Trades Contractor.
G.
All floor drain interiors shall be clean just prior to final inspection.
H.
Install floor drains and cleanouts in accessible locations.
I.
Install square cleanouts and floor drains in quarry tile floors and carefully align edges parallel to room walls.
J.
Install tops of hub drains flush with finished floor.
TRENCH DRAINS A.
Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Utilize manufacturer's approved installation device to assure proper joints, drawn tightly together by device.
C.
The trench excavation must allow for the placement of the concrete on both sides and the bottom of the channel(s) for the thickness and reinforcement specified by the designer or structural engineer.
D.
The trench drain and its encapsulating concrete should be isolated from the expansion and contraction stress of the adjacent slabs.
INTERIOR SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM
22 13 16 - 5
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 3.05
3.06
01-13-2012
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate piping with beams, joists, foundation piers and walls and footings, HVAC piping and ductwork, equipment, electrical equipment, wiring, and installation with conduit.
B.
Coordinate vents through roof, floor and hub drain and cleanout locations and elevations and installation with walls, equipment and housekeeping pads with the General Trades Contractor and other Contractors.
C.
Coordinate location and elevation of new site sanitary sewer.
TESTS A.
Test entire new sanitary system as required by the Local Code Authority.
B.
For a minimum test, plug piping and fill with water to highest vent on roof to provide a minimum of 10 foot of head of water on all parts of the system. Maintain for one hour with no leakage. Repair any deficiencies. Final test to be conducted with smoke or peppermint at 1 inch W.C. for fifteen (15) minutes. Install gaskets or reset fixtures with new gaskets as required.
C.
All tests to be performed before any piping is covered or concealed and a written record of the test shall be submitted to the Architect's Representative as a part of the Owner's Record and Information Booklets.
D.
Should leaks occur, the defective section(s) of pipe and/or defective fitting(s) shall be removed and replaced with new materials at no cost to Owner.
E.
Tests shall be repeated until no leaks occur.
F.
Isolate existing system as much as possible during test. END OF SECTION
INTERIOR SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM
22 13 16 - 6
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
22 13 29 SEWAGE EJECTORS
PART 1 1.01
1.02
1.03
DESCRIPTION A.
Provide a duplex sewage pump system complete with float controls, pump control panel, basin with cover, and remote alarm panel where shown on Drawings.
B.
Provide remote alarm panel where shown on Drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Each pump and drive unit shall be performance tested at the factory at design conditions. The system shall be hydrostatically tested. The entire assembly shall be painted after shop testing.
B.
Pump assembly and basin shall comply with OSHA requirements.
PUMP RATINGS AND CAPACITIES A.
1.04
Refer to the Drawings for GPM, discharge pressures (Ft.Hd.) HP, and electrical requirements. Each pump to be rated for 100% of total design flow.
MANUFACTURERS A.
PART 2 2.01
Pump Operating Point Requirements: The operating point of each pump at the conditions shown shall be within five percentage points of the maximum efficiency on its impeller curve. The impeller furnished is not to exceed 90% of the cutwater diameter available for the pump casing furnished. The impeller curve shall be continuously rising throughout the range contained within its efficiency curves. The peak of the impeller curve shall be a minimum of 10% above the total head shown on the Drawings. The pump must not overload the motor at any point on the impeller curve.
RATINGS AND CAPACITIES A.
1.05
GENERAL
Zoeller, Peerless, or Liberty.
PRODUCTS
SEWAGE EJECTORS A.
Provide a packaged duplex immersible sewage pump. Pump shall be centrifugal, non-clog type, having a cast iron casing with integral cast tripod support, automatic thermal overloads, float switches, and factory-wired controls.
SEWAGE EJECTORS
22 13 29 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
B.
Motor: Provide 1,750 RPM motor with ball bearings and horsepower as scheduled on Drawings. Provide cast iron frame motors with UL approval in Class I Group D hazardous locations, complete with inner and outer water seals and moisture sensing probe to sense seal failures. Provide thermal protection rated NEMA MG1-12 and insulation compatible with Class B rated system with Class F components. Provide 30 feet multi-conductor cable with ground.
C.
Impeller: Solids-handling impeller, dynamically balanced, cast iron enclosed, keyed to motor shaft and secured with a lock screw.
D.
Shaft: Stainless steel motor-impeller type.
E.
Liquid Level Controls: Sealed electronic floatless device with electrodes sealed in a chemical resistant rubber bulb with an electrolytic solution of distilled water and sodium bicarbonate, mercury float switches for duplex pumps and high water alarm. Provide NEMA 1 enclosures for float switch and high level alarm.
F.
Control Panel: 1. Duplex controller to include: Control panel shall be arranged for separate electrical feeds for each pump. Provide fusible disconnect switches, motor starters with three (3) coil overload protection, control circuit transformer with fused secondaries, running lights, H-O-A pump selector switch, pump alternator, moisture detection alarm for each pump, local high water alarm and silence button, provide set of contacts for remote alarm panel, and DDC connection, liquid level relays, and high water alarm circuit, all factory wired in a NEMA 1 enclosure. 2. Sequence of Operation: Duplex (4 float): first float (lowest) all pumps off, second float P1 on, third float P2 on (P1 and P2 run together), fourth float high water alarm. Panel shall not operate in the "hand" position unless the first float is activated to prevent pumps from "running dry." 3. Provide remote alarm panel with high water alarm and silence button with warning light.
G.
Accessories: Steel bolted and gasketed basin cover with access opening, vent and cord grip fittings for motor cable and flexible connector to seal openings for discharge pipe where they pass through the basin cover.
H.
Sump Basin: Furnish one (1) fiberglass basin, complete with steel encased anti-flotation flange(s) located at bottom. Inlets to be of the size and location shown on the Drawings. All inlet hubs shall be cast iron caulking type furnished loose for field installation by the contractor. Basin cover shall be bolted and gasketed steel cover with float control cover complete with cord grips and inspection cover. Basin shall be designed to resist lateral movement. Basin cover shall be identified as a confined space per OSHA standards. Refer to the Drawings for size and type construction. 1. Basin by Pump Manufacturer or RCF.
SEWAGE EJECTORS
22 13 29 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING PART 3 3.01
3.02
3.03
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Install basin, pumps, and control panel. Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations.
B.
Install a non-slam check-valve and shut-off valve in discharge piping constructed of Schedule 40 galvanized steel.
C.
Secure basin cover to sump basin so that it is absolutely airtight.
D.
The top part of the basin shall be vented to atmosphere; refer to Drawings.
E.
Install basin cover flush with finished floor.
F.
Fill basin with water, place 1'-6" concrete around exterior basin sides and bottom. Any other basin support methods acceptable to basin manufacturer to prevent basin side movement when filling exterior of basin with concrete.
G.
Install and adjust level switches.
H.
Install remote high water alarm panel in as shown on Drawings. Coordinate location with other equipment.
WIRING A.
Provide all power wiring from control panel to sewage ejectors.
B.
Provide all alarm wiring from control panel to remote alarm panel.
COORDINATION A.
Power wiring to control panel by the Electrical Contractor.
B.
Power wiring to remote alarm panel by the Electrical Contractor. END OF SECTION
SEWAGE EJECTORS
22 13 29 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
22 14 13 INTERIOR STORM DRAIN SYSTEM
PART 1 1.01
1.02
1.03
DESCRIPTION A.
Provide a complete system of interior storm drain piping including roof drains, relief drains, interior and exterior cleanouts, and area well drains to a point 5 feet outside building wall and downspout boots where shown on Drawings.
B.
Connect to new storm sewer system where shown on Drawings.
C.
Site storm sewer system provided by Site Utility Contractor.
D.
Foundation drains shall be provided by the General Trades Contractor.
E.
Connect foundation drain to duplex sump pump basin where shown on Drawings.
F.
Test complete new system.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Standards: American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI), American Water Works Association (AWWA), American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
B.
All pipe and fittings shall conform to the requirements of commercial standard CS188.
MANUFACTURERS A.
Piping: 1. Cast Iron: Griffin, Clow, American Cast Iron, Tyler Pipe or Charlotte Pipe & Foundry. 2. PVC Plastic: Charlotte, Nibco, Manville, Yardley, Freedom or Crestline.
B.
Roof Drains and Cleanouts: Zurn, Wade, Jay R. Smith, MIFAB, Watts or Josam.
PART 2 2.01
GENERAL
PRODUCTS
PIPING A.
Piping and fittings in earth under slab: 1. Hubless cast iron (CISPI-301), factory enamel coated. 2. Schedule 40 PVC (ASTM D1785 and ASTM D2665) solid wall plastic pipe.
B.
Interior Piping and Fittings above Slab: 1. Hubless cast iron (CISPI-301), factory enamel coated. 2. Schedule 40 PVC (ASTM D1785 and ASTM D2665) solid wall plastic pipe.
INTERIOR STORM DRAIN SYSTEM
22 14 13 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
2.02
2.03
C.
Note: Certain ceiling area(s) are used as a return air plenum, and plastic piping is prohibited. Refer to Architectural and HVAC Drawings for areas that apply to this requirement. First and second floor tenant areas shall be considered as plenum areas.
D.
All cast iron piping and fittings shall have factory-applied coatings and be EPA acceptable.
E.
All fittings shall be drainage type and be same manufacturer as piping and be compatible with piping for size, material, and joint type.
F.
Duplex Sump Pump and Elevator Pit Sump Pumps Discharge Piping: 1. Standard weight, galvanized steel (ASTM A120, Type "F") with galvanized cast iron screwed drainage fittings (ANSI B16.2), shall be used to the point of connection to a gravity line.
JOINTS A.
Cast Iron Piping: 1. Compression Type Plastic or Rubber gaskets (ASTM C564) by Dual-Tight or Ty Seal with lubricant equal to "Lubrifast." 2. "No-Hub" coupling with ASTM C-564 neoprene sealing sleeve, minimum of 28 gauge (0.016 inch) thick heavy duty slotted or corrugated Type 304 stainless steel shield with a minimum of two (2) stainless steel bands on pipe sizes 1 1/2 inch to 4 inches, minimum of four (4) bands on pipe sizes 5 inches to 10 inches. Joints in hubless cast iron pipe sizes 1 1/2 inch to 2 inches where exposure to head pressure cannot exceed 10 foot head shall be approved by CISPI Standard 310-85. Pipe sizes 2 1/2 inches to 10 inches shall be Clamp-All Model #80. Approved manufacturers: Anco "Husky," Mission or Charlotte Heavy Duty. 3. The threading of cast iron piping is prohibited.
B.
PVC Plastic Piping: 1. Solvents and cements are recommended by the pipe and fittings Manufacturer.
ROOF DRAINS A.
2.04
General Construction: Adjustable cast iron body and dome, bottom or side outlet inside caulk, membrane clamping collars, roof sump receiver, deck clamp and accessories as noted on the schedule on the Drawings.
AREA DRAINS A.
2.05
01-13-2012
General Construction: Cast iron body, underdeck clamp and accessories as noted on the schedule on the Drawings.
CLEANOUTS A.
General Construction: Floor cleanouts shall be adjustable, inside caulk with flashing clamp and other accessories and features indicated on the Schedule on the Drawings.
B.
General: All cleanouts to be line size up to and including 4 inches and installed in accessible locations.
INTERIOR STORM DRAIN SYSTEM
22 14 13 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING C.
Each floor cleanout other than a light duty rating shall have an ANSI load rating and be so indicated on the Shop Drawings. If rating is not indicated on Shop Drawings, they will be rejected.
D.
Provide membrane clamps on all cleanouts in floors having waterproofing membranes.
E.
Refer to Schedule on the Drawings for specific types and accessories.
PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
GENERAL INSTALLATION A.
Pitch storm piping no less than 1/8 inch per foot and not more than 1/4 inch per foot, unless otherwise noted. All vertical piping in finished areas to be concealed, unless otherwise noted.
B.
Install sealing gaskets between roof drain collar and drain.
C.
Offset piping below roof to allow for thermal expansion and contraction.
D.
Roof and area drains shall be installed at low points in deck and clamped to sump receiver. General Trades Contractor extends waterproofing membrane into drains and secures with flashing collar.
E.
Flashing around roof drains and relief drains installed by General Trades Contractor.
F.
Vertical leaders shall be supported by riser clamps at every floor and concealed with passing through finished areas, unless noted otherwise.
G.
All changes of directions shall be made with TY or Y fittings and 1/8 bends as required.
H.
All pipe joints shall be compatible with piping for size, material, and joint types.
I.
Provide all necessary adapters, fittings, and pipe required to make connection to site utility piping and to new and existing building sewers and drains.
J.
All storm piping in return air plenums that is required to be insulated shall be insulated with pipe insulation meeting the requirements for return air plenums.
K.
Plastic piping shall not be allowed in return air plenums and other areas prohibited by codes.
L.
All piping shall be concealed, unless indicated on Drawings.
M.
Coordinate location of roof drains and relief drains with General Trades Contractor.
N.
Roof drain flashing shall extend 12 inches in all directions from clamping ring placed below roof insulation or per roof manufacturer's requirements. All surfaces of flashing including edges shall be coated with the same material as used by Roofing Contractor.
INTERIOR STORM DRAIN SYSTEM
22 14 13 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
3.02
3.03
01-13-2012
O.
Any horizontal storm piping located in elevator equipment rooms shall be covered and enclosed by a painted metal enclosure to prevent water dripping into equipment.
P.
Catch Basin Cleaning: 1. Clear the interior of catch basin and pipe of dirt and other superfluous material. Maintain a swab or drag in the line and pull past each joint as it is completed. 2. Place plugs in the ends of uncompleted catch basin and pipe at the end of the day or whenever work stops. 3. Flush new line if required to remove collected debris. 4. Sewer pipes and catch basins, upon their completion, are to be left clean and fire from rubbish until acceptance.
Q.
Catch Basin Inspection: 1. Inspect pipe to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred.
CLEANOUTS A.
This Contractor is responsible for installing top of cleanouts flush and level with wall or finished floor. If not shown on Architectural Drawings, confirm elevation to top of floor cleanouts with Architect before roughing in. All items not installed flush and level will be removed and replaced by this Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
B.
Use graphite on all cleanout plug threads.
C.
Install duct tape over floor cleanout covers to provide protection from scratching and collection of dirt and debris during construction. Remove tape just prior to final inspection.
D.
Install wall cleanouts in finished areas, at the base of all downspouts at 18 inches above finished floor where indicated on Drawings.
E.
Provide exposed cleanout plugs without coverplate in unfinished areas or in above ceiling installations.
F.
Exterior: Install in center of 24 inch square concrete slab, 6 inches thick flush with grade or pavement. Concrete shall be installed by General Trades Contractor.
G.
Install cleanouts in accessible locations.
H.
Install square cleanouts in quarry tile floors and carefully align edges parallel to room walls.
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate piping with beams, joists, foundation piers, walls, footings, HVAC piping and ductwork, equipment, electrical equipment, wiring, and conduit.
B.
Coordinate roof drains, emergency roof drains, and cleanout locations, elevations and installation with walls, equipment and housekeeping pads with the General Trades Contractor and other Contractors.
C.
Coordinate location and elevation of site storm sewers.
INTERIOR STORM DRAIN SYSTEM
22 14 13 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 3.04
01-13-2012
TESTS A.
Test entire new piping system as required by the Local Code Authority.
B.
For a minimum test, plug piping and fill with water to highest point on roof to provide a minimum of 10 foot of head of water on all parts of the system. Maintain for one (1) hour with no leakage. Repair any deficiencies. Final test to be conducted with smoke or peppermint at 1 inch W.C. for fifteen (15) minutes. Install gaskets or reset roof drains as required.
C.
All tests to be performed before any piping is covered or concealed and a written record of test shall be submitted to the Architect's Representative as part of the Owner's Record and Information Booklets.
D.
Should leaks occur, the defective section(s) of pipe and/or defective fitting(s) shall be removed and replaced with new materials at no cost to Owner.
E.
Tests shall be repeated until no leaks occur.
F.
Isolate existing system as much as possible during test. END OF SECTION
INTERIOR STORM DRAIN SYSTEM
22 14 13 - 5
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
22 14 29 SUMP PUMPS
PART 1 1.01
1.02
DESCRIPTION A.
Provide a duplex sump pump system for foundation drainage complete with float controls, pump control panel, and basin with cover where shown on Drawings.
B.
Provide a remote alarm panel where shown on Drawings (Foundation Drainage Pumps).
C.
Provide a sump pump for each elevator pit sump where shown on Drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.03
Refer to Drawings for GPM, discharge pressure (Ft. Hd.) and electrical requirements. Each pump to be rated for 100% of total design flow.
MANUFACTURERS A.
PART 2 2.01
Pump Operating Point Requirements: The operating point of each pump at the conditions shown shall be within five (5) percentage points of the maximum efficiency on its impeller curve. The impeller furnished is not to exceed 90% of the cutwater diameter available for the pump casing furnished. The impeller curve shall be continuously rising throughout the range contained within its efficiency curves. The peak of the impeller curve shall be a minimum of 10% above the total head shown on the Drawings. The pump must not overload the motor at any point on the impeller curve.
RATINGS AND CAPACITIES A.
1.05
Pump and drive unit shall be performance tested at the factory at design conditions. The system shall be hydrostatically tested. The entire assembly shall be painted after shop testing.
PUMP RATINGS AND CAPACITIES A.
1.04
GENERAL
Manufacturers: Zoeller, Peerless, Weil, or Liberty.
PRODUCTS
DUPLEX SUMP PUMP SYSTEM A.
General: Provide a duplex submersible sump pump. Pump shall be centrifugal type, having a cast iron casing with integral cast tripod support, automatic thermal overloads, integral float and float switch and factory-wired controls.
B.
Motor: Provide 1,750 RPM motor with ball bearings and horsepower noted on Drawings. Provide cast iron housed, oil filled motor with Class A insulation, and 15 foot power cable.
SUMP PUMPS
22 14 29 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
2.02
01-13-2012
C.
Impeller: Dynamically balanced, cast iron, enclosed, keyed to motor shaft and secured with a lock screw.
D.
Shaft: Stainless steel motor-impeller type.
E.
Float Switches: Mechanical mercury float switches for duplex pumps and high water alarm. Provide NEMA 1 enclosures.
F.
Control Panel (Duplex Pumps): 1. Fusible disconnect switches, motor starters with overload protection, control circuit transformer with fused secondaries, running lights, high water level warning light and audible alarm, H-O-A pump selector switch, pump alternator, local high water alarm and silence button with warning light, factory wired controls, and NEMA 1 control panel. Provide extra set of contacts for high water alarm for remote alarm device and DDC connection. 2. Sequence of Operation: Duplex (4 float): first float (lowest) all pumps off, second float P1 on, third float P2 on (P1 and P2 run together), fourth float high water alarm. Panel shall not operate in the "hand" position unless the first float is activated to prevent pumps from "running dry." 3. Provide remote alarm panel with high water alarm with silence button with warning light.
G.
Sump Basin: Furnish one fiberglass basin, complete with steel encased anti-flotation flange(s) located at bottom. Inlets to be of the size and location shown on the Drawings. All inlet hubs shall be cast iron caulking type furnished loose for field installation by the Contractor. Basin cover shall be bolted and gasketed steel simplex cover with float control cover complete with cord grips and inspection cover. Basin shall be designed to resist lateral movement. Basin cover shall be identified as a confined space per OSHA standards. Refer to the Drawings for size and type construction. 1. Basin by Pump Manufacturer, RCF, or AK Industries.
H.
Accessories: 1. Duplex Pumps: Steel bolted and gasketed basin cover with access opening, cord grip fittings for motor cable and flexible connector to seal openings for discharge pipe where they pass through the basin cover.
SUMP PUMPS FOR ELEVATOR PIT SUMPS A.
General; Centrifugal type having a cast iron casing, with integral cast tripod support, automatic thermal overload protection, float switch and power cord.
B.
Motor: 3450 RPM protected by double mechanical seals; Silicon carbon/silicon carbide lower seal, carbon/ceramic upper seal and an additional seal to prevent abrasives from entering into the seal chamber; winding protection and NEMA Class F motor insulation.
C.
Impeller: Dynamically balanced cast iron.
SUMP PUMPS
22 14 29 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING PART 3 3.01
3.02
3.03
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Install basin, pumps, and control panel. Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations.
B.
Install a non-slam check-valve and shutoff valve in each discharge pipe constructed of Schedule 40 galvanized steel.
C.
Secure basin cover to sump basin so it is absolutely airtight.
D.
Install basin cover flush with finished floor.
E.
Fill basin with water, place 1'-6" concrete around exterior basin sides and bottom. Any other basin support methods acceptable to basin manufacturer to prevent side basin movement when filling exterior of basin with concrete.
F.
Install and adjust level switches.
G.
Install high water alarm panel in location shown on Drawing. Coordinate location with other equipment.
WIRING A.
Provide all power wiring from control panel to sump pumps.
B.
Provide all alarm wiring from control panel to remote alarm panel.
COORDINATION A.
Power wiring to control panel by the Electrical Contractor.
B.
Power wiring to remote alarm panel by the Electrical Contractor.
C.
Power wiring to remote alarm panel by the Electrical Contractor.
D.
Power wiring to receptacle for sump pumps in elevator pits by the Electrical Contractor. END OF SECTION
SUMP PUMPS
22 14 29 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
22 33 13 POINT-OF-USE ELECTRIC WATER HEATER
PART 1 1.01
DESCRIPTION A.
1.02
Provide a one (1) year parts and labor warranty.
MANUFACTURERS A.
PART 2 2.01
Heater shall comply with the latest edition of the State Energy Code.
GUARANTEE A.
1.06
Refer to "Equipment Schedule" on the Drawings for recovery and capacity.
ENERGY CODE A.
1.05
Underwriters' Laboratories (UL).
RATINGS AND CAPACITIES A.
1.04
Provide an electric tankless water heater complete with heating coil and controls where indicated on drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.03
GENERAL
Tankless (instantaneous) Type: Eemax, Chronomite Laboratories, Inc., Steibel-Eltron, Hot Aqua, Thermar, or PVI Industries, Inc.
PRODUCTS
TANKLESS ELECTRIC WATER HEATER (INSTANTANEOUS TYPE) A.
Housing: UL listed, 150 lb. W.P., plastic with critical metal parts of stainless steel, copper, brass and silver. High temperature limit switch, anti-siphon, built-in flow control, wall hanger.
B.
Heating Elements: Flow switch activated high watt density nickel/chromium.
C.
Provide flow control aerator if not provided with water heater.
POINT-OF-USE ELECTRIC WATER HEATER
22 33 13 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING PART 3 3.01
3.02
3.03
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Make all piping connections to electric tankless water heater and install a ball valve on inlet line.
B.
Install heater per manufacturer's recommendations.
C.
Pipe T & P relief valve full size to 6 inches above floor.
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate installation with lavatory or sink and its rough-in.
B.
Coordinate electrical requirements with the Electrical Contractor.
WIRING A.
Power wiring for point-of-use water heater shall be a part of the Electrical Work. END OF SECTION
POINT-OF-USE ELECTRIC WATER HEATER
22 33 13 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
22 33 37 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
PART 1 1.01
DESCRIPTION A.
1.02
Heaters shall have a minimum of three (3) year warranty for commercial use.
MANUFACTURERS A.
PART 2 2.01
Heaters shall comply with the Latest Edition of the State Energy Code.
GUARANTEE A.
1.06
Refer to the Drawings for locations, recovery, storage capacity, input and output operating parameters.
ENERGY CODE A.
1.05
Standards: American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), National Board of Boiler and Unfired Pressure Vessel Inspectors (NB), Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) and National Sanitation Foundation (NSF).
RATINGS AND CAPACITIES A.
1.04
Provide electric water heaters complete with heating elements and controls for each apartment.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.03
GENERAL
A.O. Smith, Lochinvar, Ruud, Hubbell or State.
PRODUCTS
ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS A.
Tank: UL-listed, 125 lb. W.P., glass lined tank, anode rod, integral thermostat, baked enamel jacket with factory installed fiberglass insulation, stainless steel dip tube.
B.
Heating Elements: Medium watt density, zinc-plated copper, sheath element.
C.
Controls: Element thermostats.
D.
Safeties: Element high temperature cutoffs, low water cutoff, and ASME temperature and pressure relief valve.
ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
22 33 37 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Make all piping connections to electric water heaters. Pipe discharge full-size from temperature and pressure relief valves to 6 inches above floor. Install drain valves.
B.
Power wiring for electric water heaters by the Electrical Contractor.
C.
Install thermometer on outlet of water heaters.
D.
Install each electric water heater inside a drain pan. Connect flexible plastic drain line and terminate over floor drain. END OF SECTION
ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
22 33 37 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
22 42 01 PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION A.
Provide new plumbing fixtures installed in place, complete with carrier supports, supply and waste trim as indicated on the Drawings.
B.
Provide trim, fittings, carriers, stops, chrome water supply piping and all accessories required for a complete installation.
C.
Fixture connection sizes are shown on Drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Standards: American National Standards Institute (ANSI A112.19 and Z124), American Society of Sanitary Engineering (ASSE), National Sanitation Foundation (NSF), Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI), city and state plumbing and energy codes.
B.
Unless otherwise noted, all fixtures of the same type shall be by the same manufacturer.
C.
Exposed metal parts shall be chrome-plated unless otherwise noted. Fixtures and trim shall be free of defects. Provide white vitreous china or enamel fixtures, unless otherwise noted.
D.
All faucets shall meet or exceed NSF 61, Section 9 drinking water standard and be so indicated on shop drawings or they will be rejected.
E.
All shower mixing valves shall have a minimum of 45 degrees of handle rotation between outlet temperature range of 90 degrees F to 105 degrees F when served by 120 degrees F of hot water and 45 degrees F of cold water. The mixing valve performance shall be indicated on shop drawings in the form of certified laboratory reports.
SUBMITTALS A.
Submit manufacturer's product data for all products specified in this section and shown on Drawings.
B.
Shop Drawings: Each submittal shall be clearly marked with fixture designation number, model number, and indicate all required fittings, construction, color and rough-in requirements. Submit color charts when required.
C.
The approved fixture's shop drawings shall be a part of the Owner's Manual.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.
Protection: Fixtures and trim shall remain crated and stored until installation to prevent moisture and dirt contamination and physical damage. Adequately protect installed fixtures from damage.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
22 42 01 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING PART 2 2.01
01-13-2012
PRODUCTS
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES A.
Refer to the Specifications and Drawings for specific catalog numbers and required fittings.
B.
Fixture Manufacturers: 1. Vitreous China Fixtures: American Standard, Eljer, Crane or Kohler. 2. Stainless Steel Sinks: Moen "Lancelot," Elkay, Just Mfg. Co., Republic, Metcraft, American Standard or Continental Medical Products. 3. Fiberglass Reinforced or Acrylic Plastic Showers: Sterling, Clarion, American Standard, Dura Glass, Eljer, Aquarius, Aqua Glass, Fiat, Lasco or Kohler. 4. Kitchenette Disposer: In-Sink-Erator, KitchenAid, Waste King or Whirlaway.
C.
Fittings Manufacturers: 1. Water Closet Seats: Bemis, Olsonite, Beneke or Church. 2. Faucets: Moen, Geberit/Chicago, Zurn, T&S Brass, Watersaver, American Standard, Symmons, Eljer, Speakman, or Kohler. 3. Supplies and Stops: McGuire Mfg. Co., Central Brass, EBC, Dearborn, Bridgeport, Speedflex, T & S Brass, Chicago Faucet, Consolidated, Frost, Waterway, Sanitary Dash, Speedway or Brass Craft. 4. Fixture Traps: McGuire Mfg. Co., EBC or Central Brass. 5. Shower Controls: Moen, Chicago Faucet, Leonard, Powers, Speakman, Lawler, Zurn, Haws, American Standard, Eljer, Symmons, Acorn, Bradley or Metcraft. 6. Shower Heads: Moen, Zurn, Sloan, Leonard, Powers, Speakman, American Standard, Chicago Faucet, Haws, Eljer, Symmons, Acorn, Bradley or Metcraft. 7. Safety Grab Bars: Shower enclosure manufacturer, Bradley, Tube Bends, Inc. or approved equal. 8. Shower and Tub Doors: Shower manufacturer, Baso, Swan or Century.
D.
All trim and exposed piping to be chrome-plated unless noted otherwise.
E.
Faucets to have renewable seats.
F.
Shower controls to have integral check and screwdriver stops.
G.
All germ-fighting water closet seats shall be factory embossed or stamped that the water closet seat is germ-fighting (anti-microbial) by indication of model logo on the seat in a non-conspicuous location. This factory stamp shall indicate that the water closet seat is germ fighting (anti-microbial) and shall also be indicated on the water closet seat Shop Drawings.
H.
All plumbing fixtures and accessories of the same generic type shall be the products of the same manufacturer.
I.
Supplies to lavatory and sink fittings shall be flexible tube risers with steel handle stops (unless otherwise noted), all chrome plated.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
22 42 01 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 2.02
CARRIERS A.
Provide heavy duty, rectangular vertical support, floor supported, commercial type fixture carrier for all new wall mounted plumbing fixtures, unless noted otherwise.
B.
All carriers shall be specifically chosen to accommodate the particular brand and style of fixture actually installed, the particular type of floor and wall actually present at each fixture location and the piping arrangement at each fixture. Furnish plastic or metal positioning frames to isolate carrier bolts from wall construction. Anchor carriers firmly to the floor with maximum sized bolts that feet will accommodate.
C.
Provide neoprene carrier gaskets.
D.
Zurn, Jay R. Smith, Wade, MIFAB, Josam or Watts.
PART 3 3.01
3.02
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
COORDINATION A.
See Architectural Drawings for the exact location of plumbing fixtures.
B.
Review approved millwork shop drawings from the General Trades Contractor. Coordinate location and size of countertop fixtures, casework and openings before ordering or proceeding with rough-in work.
B.
Countertop lavatory and sink openings and cabinet base backs for drains and water supply stop valves shall be cut by the General Trades Contractor. Furnish templates and locate. Coordinate with General Trades Contractor and Architect.
C.
Coordinate location and rough-in requirements with equipment requiring plumbing with General Trades Contractor, other Contractors, and Owner.
INSTALLATION A.
Install fixtures according to the manufacturer's written installation instruction.
B.
Refer to Architectural Drawings for fixture mounting heights.
C.
At new floor and wall-mounted plumbing fixtures, caulk between fixture, floor and wall with silicone caulking compatible with the wall paint. Refer to Division 7 of Specifications for specific requirements.
D.
Install fixture carriers and drainage fittings on wall hung fixtures such as lavatories and sinks. Securely anchor all carriers to the floor.
E.
Install chrome plated brass escutcheons on waste and supply piping at walls, including piping in cabinets.
F.
Install stops on all cold and hot water supplies to fixtures.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
22 42 01 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
3.03
3.04
01-13-2012
G.
Thoroughly clean all fixtures of paper and dirt before final acceptance.
H.
Provide all required seals, gaskets, nuts, bolts and washers.
I.
Fixtures shall be carefully assembled and connected to the required plumbing inlets and outlets, and tested so fixtures will be functioning correctly when the Work is completed.
J.
After the installation of the plumbing fixtures is completed, all connecting water pipes shall be flushed out through the fixtures to eliminate scale. Clean faucet strainers and aerators. Refer to Specification Sections referring to Domestic Water Piping System, for sterilization of water lines.
K.
Adjust self-sustaining water closet seats self-sustain in any position.
L.
Install check valves on shower mixing valves inlets unless shower mixing valve already has a combination check stops.
M.
Do not permit the use of installed plumbing fixtures by construction personnel without prior written consent by the Owner. Any of the installed fixtures or trim found damaged prior to final acceptance shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
N.
Adjust shower and shower/tub combination valves with temperature limit stops for a maximum leaving temperature of 120 degrees F.
O.
Adjust all flush tanks for proper operation.
P.
Install strainers on shower mixing valve inlets.
SPECIAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS A.
Install handicapped water closet flush valves so the control lever is on the wide side of water closet and no more than 44 inches A.F.F. Coordinate locations with any grab bars.
B.
Insulate all water and drain piping that could come in contact with wheelchair occupants. Refer to Section 22 07 01, "Plumbing Insulation" and Drawings.
C.
Coordinate exact location of shower and bathtub controls used by the handicapped with the Architect.
ELECTRICAL WIRING INSTALLATION AND COORDINATION A.
Power wiring for garbage disposers (food waste grinders) shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor. END OF SECTION
PLUMBING FIXTURES
22 42 01 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
22 71 02 INTERIOR NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM
PART 1 1.01
1.02
DESCRIPTION A.
Provide low pressure natural gas piping, regulator(s) and valves for equipment and provide final connection where shown on Drawings.
B.
Connect to new gas line at point indicated on the Drawing - 5 feet outside of the building and extend through a gas meter/regulator assembly to equipment, inside the building.
C.
Extend and connect to existing building gas piping system where shown on Drawings.
D.
Connect to outlet of gas meter. Provide regulator and extend piping into building 18 inches above grade.
E.
Connect to gas fired equipment with a dirt leg, union, shut-off valve and a regulator if required, where shown on Drawings.
F.
Gas distribution pressure shall be 14 inches W.C.
G.
Provide all regulators, vent piping and miscellaneous appurtenances required to complete all supply piping systems.
H.
Test complete new system.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
PART 2 2.01
GENERAL
Standards: National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 54), American Society for Testing & Material (ASTM) and American Gas Association (AGA), Local Gas Company requirements.
PRODUCTS
GAS PIPING A.
Aboveground Piping: Standard weight, Schedule 40, Type F, Grade B, welded, screwed, or welded ends (refer to fittings below), black carbon steel pipe (ANSI/ASTM A53).
INTERIOR NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM
22 71 02 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
2.02
2.03
B.
Underground Piping: (ANSI/ASTM A53) standard weight, Schedule 40, Black carbon steel pipe shall be polyethylene sheathed, conforming to Federal Specification L-C-530 with heat shrunk sleeves for butt joints and manufacturer's standard tape wrapping for fittings. 1. Polyethylene sheathing shall be as manufactured by Scotchcoat 202, Sheath, Republic "X-TRU-COAT." 2. Repair damaged coatings by wrapping. 3. Install pipe coating on underground steel piping according to manufacturer's recommendations.
C.
All concealed piping shall be welded.
FITTINGS A.
1 1/2 Inches and Smaller: 150 lb. screwed banded malleable black iron fittings (ANSI B16.3).
B.
2 Inches to 2 1/2 Inches: Welded (ANSI B31.1) or forged steel fitting socket welded and threaded (ANSI B16.11).
C.
3 Inches and Larger: Forged steel butt welded flanged, 150 SWP, (ASTM A234). Provide gaskets suitable for natural gas.
PIPE CASING A.
2.04
Solid rubber, sealing elements with non-creep reinforced plastic centering blocks and mating non-conductive pressure plates and corrosion resistant bolts. 1. Thunderline Corporation: Link-Seal Model PL or approved equal.
BALL VALVES (PERMITTED IN LIEU OF PLUG VALVE 2" AND SMALLER) A.
2.06
Standard weight, Schedule 40, plain end, black steel pipe (ANSI/ASTM A53), welded joints (ANSI B31.1). Provide backing rings for pipe 8 inches and larger.
PIPE CASING SEALS A.
2.05
01-13-2012
AGA and UL listed for gas service, 175 lb. (UL), bronze body, full port, viton seat, screwed ends, stainless steel disc and stem, lever handle. 1. Milwaukee "Butterball," Model BB2-100, Conbraco GB Series or approved equals. 2. Each type of valve shall be by the same manufacturer.
LUBRICATED PLUG VALVES (SEE OPTION FOR BALL VALVES) A.
2 Inches and Smaller: AGA and UL approvals, 175 lb. WOG, semi-steel or brass body, screwed ends with TFE stem seal and seat, square stem, wrench-operated. 1. Nordstrom Fig. 142, Powell Fig. 2200 or Homestead Fig. 611, Hays Series 7455 or Walworth Fig. 1796. 2. Provide wrench.
INTERIOR NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM
22 71 02 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
2.07
2.08
B.
2 1/2 Inches and Larger: AGA and UL approvals, 200 lb. WOG, semi-steel body, flanged ends, lubricated, with TFE stem seal and seat, square stem, wrench operated. 1. Nordstrom Fig. 143, Powell Fig. 220, Homestead Fig. 612 or Walworth Fig. 1797F. 2. Provide wrench.
C.
Each type of valve shall be by the same manufacturer.
PRESSURE REGULATORS A.
3/4 Inch to 2 1/2 Inches: (ANSI Z21.18) cast iron body with screwed connection, aluminum die cast diaphragm case that is spring loaded with 10 degree valve, internal relief (3/4 inch orifice) outlet pressures from 1 1/2 inches W.C. to 10 psig and maximum inlet pressure of 60 psig. 1. Size, capacity and pressure requirements as required by equipment. 2. Sensus-Equimeter Models 086, 121, 122, or equal by American, EMRO, Sprague, Fisher or Americal.
B.
3 Inches to 4 Inches: (ANSI Z21.18) cast iron body with flanged connection, aluminum die cast diaphragm case that is spring loaded with 10 degree valve, internal relief (3/4 inch orifice) outlet pressure from 1 1/2 inches W.C. to 3 psig and maximum inlet pressure of 40 psig (3 inches) or 15 psig (4 inches). 1. Size, capacity and pressure requirements as required by equipment. 2. Sensus-Equimeter Models 086, 121, 122, or equal by American, EMRO, Sprague, Fisher or Americal.
GAS METER AND REGULATOR A.
2.09
Gas meter and regulator(s) provided by Utility Company. Regulators furnished by Utility Company and installed by Plumbing Contractor.
TAPE COATING A.
PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
Acceptable Manufacturers: Tapecoat Company "Tapecoat CT," Kendall Company "Polyken 930," Royston Labs "Greenline" or Republic Steel "X-Tru-Tape #35." Install with 1/2 inch minimum overlap.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Install a dielectric union at point of gas line entrance through building wall and enter through a pipe sleeve above grade. Caulk around pipe between casing or use casing seal.
B.
Gas piping shall run horizontal or pitch upward in the direction of flow at a rate of not less than 1/4 inch in 15 feet.
C.
Provide shut-off valve, dirt leg and union at each final connection to equipment.
INTERIOR NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM
22 71 02 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
D.
All concealed or encased piping and casing shall be welded. When piping is within casing, support gas piping inside casing every 10 feet.
E.
Install sealing nut type sleeve in building wall and caulk for gas line entrance.
F.
Gas piping system within building shall be electrically continuous and bonded to any grounding electrode. Bonding shall be a part of the Electrical work.
G.
Provide drip legs at any point in line where condensate may collect. A drip shall not be located where the condensate may freeze.
H.
Install vents from interior pressure regulators on gas-fired equipment and from sleeves, where required. Extend line through outside wall above grade, sleeve and caulk, turn pipe down, terminate with approved vent cap.
I.
Piping in vertical chases shall have chase ventilated to the outside in accordance with NFPA 54, 3.5.3. Coordinate requirements with Architect.
J.
Do not install gas piping in or through a circulating air duct, clothes chute, chimney or gas vent, dumb waiter or elevator shaft.
K.
Enter building above finished grade, through building exterior wall in a waterproof sleeve.
L.
Purge existing abandoned lines to outside.
M.
All new and revised gas piping shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 54 and American Gas Association.
N.
Buried gas lines in the building shall be encased in cathodically protected and coated steel pipe. Seal ends of casing by welding and extend vent from casing 1 foot above exterior grade, or as shown. Terminate vent opening with approved vent cap. Coordinate location with Architect.
O.
Provide 18 inch minimum cover over buried pipe. Provide cathodic protection to comply with Gas Company's requirements.
P.
Support new gas line on roof with Miro Model 4-R (will handle up to 4 inch pipe size) pillow block adjustable pipe stand, PVC base, nylon pipe roller with Teflon seat. Adjusts from 2 3/4 inches to 7 inches above roof membrane. Maximum 10 foot spacing, refer to Section 20 05 45, "Hangers, Supports and Inserts" for actual spacing requirements. Provide proper size support for pipe larger than 4 inches.
Q.
A minimum of 6 inches of clearance shall be provided between the gas line and any other underground utility line crossing or paralleling it, except for electric lines, in which case the minimum clearance shall be 12 inches.
R.
For underground piping, provide all welded assembly with welding work in accordance with ANSI B31.1 Code for Pressure Piping, performed by welding operators certified by the National Weld Test Bureau, or other approved bureau or agency.
INTERIOR NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM
22 71 02 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
3.02
S.
Remove all damaged polyethylene shielding and replace with heating shrinkable sleeves placed on freshly adhesive-primer coated surface.
T.
Install temporary plugs on ends of cut lines to keep out mud and debris.
U.
Sleeve and/or vent all piping installed under exterior pavements and walls.
V.
Pipe tape coating shall extend at least 2 inches above finished grade.
W.
Wrap tape onto fittings or joints with 50% overlap, in accordance with manufacturer's most stringent requirements or recommendations.
VENTING A.
3.03
3.04
01-13-2012
Sleeve and vent to the exterior and terminate with approved vent cap the following: 1. All underground gas lines penetrating outside wall, installed under outside wall or located below ground within the building. 2. Vent all gas piping installed within closed mechanical chases or shafts. 3. Vent all pressure regulator vents. 4. All new gas pressure regulators on gas-fired pieces of equipment, if required. Use iron or steel pipe for vents.
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate the actual location and size of meter and regulator location with Site Utility Contractor and Gas Company before installation.
B.
Verify actual gas regulator inlet and outlet pressure with Gas Company.
C.
Contractor shall contact the Gas Company for installation advisory assistance regarding the installation of piping from meter set assembly.
D.
Coordinate gas pressure requirements of all new gas-fired fixtures and equipment to determine gas pressure regulator requirements.
E.
Coordinate gas pressure requirements of all equipment with Owner.
F.
Coordinate fixture and equipment location and connection requirements.
G.
Coordinate location of new gas line through exterior wall.
H.
Coordinate all pipe runs with other work.
TESTS A.
Perform tests and inspection before concealing any work. Tests shall be witnessed by the Architect Representative and Gas Utility Company Inspectors approval shall be obtained. Tests shall be per NFPA 54 and Utility Company requirements.
INTERIOR NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM
22 71 02 - 5
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
3.05
01-13-2012
B.
Contractor shall give notice to the Gas Utility Company that the work is completed and ready for testing. This notice must be made to the Gas Company at least 24 hours in advance of the time when desired.
C.
Air or inert gas such as nitrogen, air or carbon-dioxide shall be used to pressurize the new gas piping. In no case shall natural gas, oxygen, acetylene, freon or other gases be used.
D.
New gas piping system (including valves, excluding equipment) shall be given a pressure test of not less than 1 1/2 times the proposed maximum working pressure, but not less than 3 psig. Test duration shall not be less than 1/2 hour for each 500 cubic feet of pipe volume or faction thereof. For piping systems having a volume more than 24,000 cubic feet, the duration of the test need not exceed 24 consecutive hours with no leakage. Test equipment at operating pressures.
E.
Contractor shall soap suds test all exposed valves and fittings at operating pressure. Isolate existing piping as much as possible during test.
F.
Should leaks occur, the defective section(s) of pipe and/or fitting(s) shall be removed and replaced with new materials without any cost of Owner. Test(s) shall be repeated until no defects occur.
G.
The date(s) and result(s) of tests shall be recorded, witnessed and submitted to the Architect. A written record of tests shall be provided as a part of the Owner's record and information booklets.
H.
Obtain gas company and inspector approval.
I.
Purge new system completely after testing. Connect to openings and conduct gas (air) to outside according to recommendations and under supervision of the Gas Company.
J.
Test coating integrity on underground lines with a Holiday Detector.
CATHODIC PROTECTION A.
Provide cathodic protection on all new underground steel gas lines.
B.
The cathodic protection system consists of furnishing and installing all materials and equipment necessary to provide a flow of direct current from sacrificial anodes to the underground gas piping.
C.
Provide cathodic protection per Gas Company Standards and Specifications for magnesium anodes, anode size and spacing and attachment method.
D.
Magnesium or zinc anodes shall be high purity magnesium alloy and shall comply with Gas Company composition Specification and shall be installed according to Gas Company requirements.
INTERIOR NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM
22 71 02 - 6
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING E.
01-13-2012
Test stations shall be located in a plastic curb box and conform to Gas Company Standards. 1. Loop lead wire around steel pipe. Lead wires to consist of two (2) single strand, single conductor, No. 12 copper wires extending from pipe connection to terminal block at grade in curb box. 2. Provide a minimum of two (2) test stations with maximum spacing of 300 feet. END OF SECTION
INTERIOR NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM
22 71 02 - 7
23
HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
23 05 01 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
PART 1 1.01
1.02
1.03
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION A.
Furnish material, labor, tools, accessories and equipment to complete test, adjust, start up, balance and successfully run all HVAC systems of this Project as described in these Specifications and as shown on the Drawings.
B.
Refer to Sections 20 00 00 through 20 99 99 (as included) for items of a general nature which apply to this portion of the Work. Sections 23 00 00 through 23 99 99 (as included) describe the HVAC work.
C.
Work includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Vibration Isolators 2. HVAC Insulation 3. Refrigerant Piping System 4. Condensation Drain Piping 5. Cabinet Unit Heaters 6. Propeller Unit Heaters 7. Air-Cooled Condensing Units 8. Filters 9. Exhaust Fans 10. Low Velocity Ductwork 11. Grilles, Registers and Diffusers 12. Louvers 13. Dampers 14. Fire Dampers 15. Rooftop Air Conditioning Units 16. Packaged Terminal Air Conditioning Unit 17. Temperature Control 18. HVAC Systems Balancing
LICENSES A.
The installation of this HVAC work shall be made by a Contractor and craftsmen licensed by the Governing Authorities.
B.
Obtain all permits and licenses required by Local Code Authorities having jurisdiction.
FEES A.
Unless otherwise noted, this Contractor shall pay for all permits, inspection fees, and other charges related to the installation and inspection of the HVAC work.
HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
23 05 01 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 1.04
CODES, REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS A.
1.05
1.06
01-13-2012
Unless otherwise noted, the latest enforced Edition shall apply to this work.
HVAC ROUGH-INS A.
Provide service rough-ins and make final connections to equipment furnished by the Equipment Contractor or the Owner.
B.
Provide piping, valves, ductwork and specialties as required, and as specified under other Sections of these Specifications.
EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A.
Make final connections to equipment. Contractors.
Coordinate rough-in locations with other
B.
Refer to approved equipment drawings for exact rough-in sizes and locations. END OF SECTION
HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
23 05 01 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
23 05 95 HVAC SYSTEMS BALANCING
PART 1 1.01
DESCRIPTION A.
1.02
1.03
A.
Standards: AABC National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation.
B.
Instruments used for testing and balancing of air systems must have been calibrated within a period of six months and checked for accuracy prior to start of work on this project.
BALANCING CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
1.06
The HVAC Contractor shall retain the services of an Independent Test and Balance Agency that specializes in, and whose business is limited to, the testing and balancing of HVAC systems. The Agency selected shall be fully certified by the Associated Air Balance Council, and shall have at least one member certified by the National Examining Board-United States and Canada. Certification by NEBB will also be acceptable.
BALANCING REPORT A.
1.05
Provide all labor, materials, and tools for completely testing, balancing and adjusting the following systems: 1. Air Flows
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.04
GENERAL
Submit a completed balancing report indicating the performance of fans, motors, dampers and air distribution devices.
AIR SYSTEMS A.
Air velocities shall be measured with an anemometer, velometer or pitot tube and manometer. Static pressures and total pressures shall be measured with a velometer or pitot tube and manometer. Fan RPM shall be measured with a tachometer or revolution counter. Motor amperage shall be measured with an "Amprobe" or similar device. Voltages shall be measured with a voltmeter.
B.
In measuring velocities in ducts or at outlets, traverse the duct or outlet so that one reading is taken for each 80 square inches maximum of flow area, but a minimum of six readings shall be taken for each duct or outlet regardless of size.
QUALITY CONTROL A.
Testing and balancing shall be performed in complete accordance with AABC National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, Form Number 81266, Volume One, Sections as applicable. END OF SECTION
HVAC SYSTEMS BALANCING
23 05 95 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
23 07 05 HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 1.01
1.02
1.03
DESCRIPTION A.
Insulate the following: 1. Piping: a. Condensation drain b. Refrigerant lines 2. Ductwork: a. Supply b. Return (outdoors) c. Outside air d. Plenums
B.
Refer to Section 23 31 10, "Low Velocity Ductwork" for duct liner.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Indoor pipe and duct insulation shall have a flame-spread rating not exceeding 25, a smokedeveloped rating not exceeding 50, and a fuel-contributed rating not exceeding 50. All insulation accessories shall have similar ratings. All rating procedures shall meet the standards set in ASTM E-84, NFPA 255, and UL 723.
B.
Install insulation to according to "Commercial and Industrial Insulation Standards," as published by the Midwest Insulation Contractor's Association, latest edition.
C.
Insulation values shall be in accordance with the State Energy Codes.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.
1.04
GENERAL
Protection: Leave insulation boxed and stored until time for use. Elevate and cover material to avoid moisture condensation and physical abuse.
MANUFACTURERS A.
Fiberglass-based insulation: Owens-Corning, Manson, Knauf, or Johns-Manville.
B.
Closed-cell elastomeric insulations: Armacell, Rubatex, or IMCOA.
C.
Polyisocyanurate insulation: Dow Chemical Company
HVAC INSULATION
23 07 05 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING PART 2 2.01
PRODUCTS
ADHESIVES, FINISHES AND MASTICS A.
2.02
Use the following items or equivalent items: 1. Vapor barrier lap adhesive - Foster Drion Contact Bond Cement 85-75 2. Lagging adhesive - Foster 81-42W 3. Metal bonding adhesive - Foster 85-15 4. Indoor vapor barrier finish - Foster 30-80 5. Indoor breather finish - Foster Lagtone 46-50 6. Outdoor vapor barrier mastic - Foster 46-50
THERMAL RESISTANCE OF PIPING INSULATION A.
Insulate all piping installed to serve buildings and within buildings in accordance with the minimum pipe insulation as listed in the following table. Pipe insulation not required between control valve and heating coil on runouts when the control valve is within 4 feet of coil and piping is 1 inch or smaller. Condensate system design temperature shall match the saturation temperature of the steam system they drain. Minimum Insulation Thickness for Pipe Sizes (Inches) Fluid Less 1 1 1/2 Temperature than to to Piping System Types Ranges (°F) 1 1-1/4 3 Cooling systems: Condensation Above 40 0.5 1.5 1.5 Refrigerant Below 40 1.0 1.5 1.5
B.
2.03
01-13-2012
4 to 6
8 and Over
1.5 1.5
1.5 1.5
Pipe sizes are nominal dimensions. For piping exposed to outdoor temperatures, increase thickness by 0.5 inches.
INDOOR PIPING A.
Use fiberglass, heavy-density insulation with all service jacket and pressure sealing lap adhesive on longitudinal and butt strips. Jacket vapor membrane shall have an installed vapor permeance of not more than 0.09 perms. Staple and seal with pressure-sealing lap adhesive on longitudinal and butt strips. Insulation conductivity shall be in accordance with the following table. Condensate system insulation design temperature shall match the saturation temperature of the steam system they drain.
Piping System Types Cooling systems: Condensation Refrigerant
HVAC INSULATION
Fluid Design Temperature Ranges (°F)
Insulation Conductivity Range (Btuh in./ft3 deg. F)
Mean Rating Temperature (°F)
Above 40 Below 40
0.23-0.27 0.23-0.27
75 75
23 07 05 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 2.04
EXPOSED INDOOR PIPING UP TO 10 FEET ABOVE NEAREST WALKING SURFACE A.
2.05
2.08
Insulation type and vapor barrier shall be the same as indoor piping. Increase insulation thickness by 1/2 inch, minimum. Cover with 0.016 inch thick aluminum jacket with "Pittsburgh Seam." Seal between metal jacket and sleeve.
PIPE INSULATING SUPPORT A.
2.07
Insulation same as for indoor piping. Cover with 0.016 inch thick aluminum jacket with "Pittsburgh Seam." Seal between metal jacket and sleeve. All piping visible inside and outside mechanical spaces is considered as exposed.
OUTDOOR PIPING A.
2.06
Refer to Section 20 05 45, "Hangers, Supports and Inserts." The use of thermal protectors as pipe insulation support are noted elsewhere in this Specification. Maintain insulation vapor barrier integrity where inserts are used.
REFRIGERANT PIPING A.
Insulation for all indoor refrigerant piping shall be the same as for indoor piping.
B.
Insulation requirements for all outdoor refrigerant piping shall be the same as for outdoor piping.
C.
Option: Flexible elastomeric thermal insulation K=0.27 at 75 degrees F, as manufactured by Armacell, Rubatex, or IMCOA. Indoor insulation must meet a flame-spread rating not exceeding twenty-five (25) and a smoke-developed rating not exceeding fifty (50), as specified in Paragraph 1.02.A.
INSULATE DUCTWORK AS FOLLOWS
Duct Type Concealed-round or rectangular Exposed-round Exposed-rectangular Exposed-rectangular-outdoors Exposed-round-outdoors Outdoor air intakes 2.09
01-13-2012
Minimum Insulation Thickness (Inches)
Minimum R-Value (As-installed; not including film resistance)
2 1 1/2 1 2 2 2
6.0 4.5 4.3 8.0 8.0 8.7
CONCEALED DUCTWORK - ROUND OR UNLINED RECTANGULAR A.
Flexible fiberglass duct wrap laminated to foil-reinforced kraft vapor membrane facing with 2 inch stapling flange, 1.0 pcf density, K=0.27 at 75 degrees F, Owens-Corning Commercial Grade Fiberglass Duct Wrap Type 100. Installed vapor membrane shall be less than 0.09 perms.
HVAC INSULATION
23 07 05 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 2.10
EXPOSED DUCTWORK - ROUND A.
2.11
Flexible fiberglass duct wrap laminated to foil-reinforced kraft vapor membrane facing with 2 inch stapling flange, 1.0 pcf density, K=0.27 at 75 degrees F, Owens-Corning Commercial Grade Fiberglass Duct Wrap Type 100. Installed vapor membrane shall be less than 0.09 perms.
EXPOSED DUCTWORK - UNLINED RECTANGULAR A.
2.12
01-13-2012
Rigid fiberglass industrial board with foil scrim kraft vapor membrane facing, 6.0 pcf density, K=0.22 at 75 degrees F, Owens-Corning Industrial Type 705. Option: ASJ Jacket. Installed vapor membrane shall be less than 0.09 perms.
EXPOSED DUCTWORK – OUTDOOR INSULATION A.
Insulation material shall be a flexible, closed-cell elastomeric insulation in sheet form: AP Armaflex SA sheet and roll insulation, 2 inch installed thickness. This product meets the requirements as defined in ASTM C 534, specification for preformed elastomeric cellular thermal insulation in sheet and tubular form.
B.
Materials shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke-developed rating of 50 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, latest revision. Sheet material with a thickness greater than 1 inch shall have a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 100 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, latest revision. In addition, the product, when tested, shall not melt or drip flaming particles, the flame shall not be progressive and all materials shall pass simulated end-use fire tests.
C.
Materials shall have a minimum thermal conductivity of 0.25 Btu-in./h-ft2 - °F at a 75 degrees F mean temperature when tested in accordance with ASTM C 177 or ASTM C 518, latest revisions.
D.
Materials shall have a minimum water vapor transmission of 0.05 perm-inches when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96, Procedure A, latest revision.
E.
The material shall be manufactured under an independent third party supervision testing program covering the properties of fire performance, thermal conductivity and water vapor transmission.
F.
Duct insulation that is installed shall be wrapped not stretched around the duct, and shall be adhered directly to clean, oil-free surfaces with a full coverage of adhesive. All insulation shall be adhered directly to clean, oil-free surfaces. 1. The duct insulation shall be constructed from the bottom up, with the top insulation sized to extend over the side insulation. This will form a watershed. 2. Butt-edge seams shall be adhered using Armaflex 520 Adhesive by the compression fit method to allow for expansion/contraction. Leave a 1/2 inch-wide uncoated border at the butt-edge seams on the duct surface and the insulation surface. Overlap the insulation 1/4 inch at the butt-edges and compress the edges into place. Apply Armaflex 520 Adhesive to the butt-edges of the insulation.
HVAC INSULATION
23 07 05 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
3. Standing metal duct seams shall be insulated with the same insulation thickness as installed on the duct surface. Seams may be covered using strips of Armaflex Sheet Insulation or half sections of tubular pipe insulation with miter-cut ends. Standing seams shall be adhered using Armaflex 520 Adhesive. 4. Insulation seams shall be staggered when applying multiple layers of insulation. 5. On round ductwork larger than 12 inches in diameter, the insulation shall be adhered to the duct surface on the lower one third. On ductwork greater than 24 inches in diameter, the insulation shall be completely adhered to the duct surface. G.
2.13
EXPOSED DUCTWORK – OUTDOOR INSULATION JACKET A.
PART 3 3.01
Use the following duct insulation adhesives or equivalent items, as recommended by the insulation manufacturer: 1. Insulation adhesive - Armaflex 520 BLV 2. Insulation spray adhesive - Armaflex Low VOC Spray Contact Adhesive
Jacket material shall be a pre-fabricated, self-adhering, and sheet-type water proofing membrane. Material external surface shall be a stucco-embossed, UV-resistant aluminum, backed by a double layer of high density polyethylene reinforcement, and a rubberized asphalt adhesive. Material shall be MFM "Flex-Clad 400" or approved equal and shall be installed with heat-sealed joints and in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION NOTES A.
Use no damaged or water-soaked insulation.
B.
Insulate piping where concealed in walls.
C.
Make insulation continuous through sleeves and hangers, except through fire-rated walls.
D.
Leave no "raw" ends on insulation. Bevel insulation terminations, seal with insulating cement, and cover ends with glass cloth or similar to pipe insulation covering.
E.
Ensure that exposed insulation has a neat and finished appearance. Size insulation if required and leave ready for painting.
F.
Ensure that jacket has overlapping joints and is sealed with suitable adhesive. The use of staples is acceptable on heating hot water systems only, but only as an installation aid and not as a substitute for adhesive.
G.
Brush coat all staples used with a white vapor barrier mastic.
H.
Use adhesive and welded pins with washers for attaching liner and rigid board insulation to ductwork. Seal joints with a 2 inch wide application of adhesive.
I.
Provide sheet metal lips on leading and leaving air edges at liner transitions.
HVAC INSULATION
23 07 05 - 5
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
J.
All duct sizes shown are clear inside dimensions.
K.
Tape and seal all joints.
L.
Wrap all outside air ductwork.
M.
Duct insulation that is installed shall be wrapped not stretched around the duct. On ductwork larger than 12 inches in diameter, the insulation shall be adhered to the duct surface on the lower one third. On ductwork greater than 24 inches in diameter, the insulation shall be completely adhered to the duct surface. Butt-edge seams shall be adhered using adhesive by the compression fit method to allow for expansion/contraction. Overlap the insulation at the butt-edges and compress the edges into place. Apply adhesive to the butt-edges of the insulation. END OF SECTION
HVAC INSULATION
23 07 05 - 6
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
23 09 33 TEMPERATURE CONTROL
PART 1 1.01
GENERAL
Furnish and install as hereinafter specified, a system of electric or electronic control. The system specified is based on equipment manufactured by and installed by. A.
Work Performed by Others: All automatic control dampers, control valves, separable sockets, flow sensors, and other in-line pipe devices, furnished by the Temperature Control Contractor shall be installed by the HVAC Contractor under the Control Contractor's supervision.
B.
Electric Wiring: The Temperature Control Contractor shall provide all temperature control wiring and interlocks for a complete and workable temperature control system as herein specified and shown on the Drawings. All interconnections to the control cabinets shall be to terminal blocks furnished and numbered by the Temperature Control Contractor. The Temperature Control Contractor shall prepare complete wiring/interlock diagrams included with submittal drawings. The temperature control wiring shall conform to all the requirements of Division 26.
C.
Interlock Wiring: All cable required shall be installed in a protective enclosure and shall conform to Section 725, Class 2 wiring of the National Electrical Code.
D.
Owner's Instructions: Upon completion of the work and acceptance by the Owner, factory representatives under employment of the Control Manufacturer shall provide two four-hour periods of instruction to the Owner's operating personnel who have responsibility for the mechanical system. The Control Contractor shall make available to the Owner regularly scheduled training courses for the ongoing training of the Owner's operating personnel.
E.
Documentation: The following information shall be provided upon project completion. Provide one set for each operating manual. 1. Shop drawing of control system showing all devices, all interconnections between devices, and all connections to items provided by others. Provide a sequence of operation. 2. Specification data sheets on each device. 3. A reference table listing the settings.
F.
System Acceptance: The Control Manufacturer shall issue a report upon project completion stating that the system is complete, has been adjusted, and is operating in accordance with the Specifications. Any deviations from specified settings or operations necessitated during system adjustment shall be specifically noted. A demonstration of complete system operation shall be made to the Owner's Representative.
G.
Guarantee: The control system designated on the Drawings and Plans and herein specified shall be guaranteed to be free from original defects in both material and workmanship for a period of one year of normal use and service, excepting damage from other causes. This guarantee shall become effective with the date of final acceptance by the Architect, or on the date of occupancy by the Owner.
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
23 09 33 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING PART 2 2.01
01-13-2012
PRODUCTS
EQUIPMENT A.
Low Limit Detection Thermostats: Low limit detection thermostats shall be of the vapor tension capillary type having a sensing element a minimum of 20 feet in length. These thermostats shall be of the manual reset type. The elements shall be complete with necessary fittings to permit installation in the duct so as to sense the correct discharge temperatures. The low limit detection thermostats will be arranged so as to stop their respective units and close the outside air dampers in the event discharge temperatures fall below 38 degrees F.
B.
Electric Room Thermostats: Heavy duty snap action type with key operators rated at 6 FLA at 120 VAC contacts suitable for the intended service. Provide manual selector switches, as required, in the sequence of operation.
C.
Electronic Room Thermostats: A modulating solid state controller with built-in detector, P or PI controller, as required, with continuous voltage or current output. Each controller shall have individual setpoint, proportional band, start-point, and span adjustments. Input voltage shall be 24 VAC or less. Each controller to be provided with night setback, summer/winter switch over, or remote reset capabilities, as required. Controllers shall be of matching type to the input detectors and output drives or sequencers. Thermostats to be key operated.
D.
Temperature Sensors: Each temperature sensor shall match the requirements of the associated temperature controller. Sensors of the nickel wound, thermistor, or platinum type shall be provided. Each sensor shall be designed for the appropriate application (i.e. duct, immersion, etc.) and be provided with all necessary installation accessories. Ranges shall be selected to the middle of the control range. All liquid temperature sensors shall be immersion-type. No strap-on sensors are allowed.
E.
Manual Override Timer: 0-12 hour spring wound override timer.
F.
Time Clocks: Programmable time clocks shall be utilized for providing the required occupied/unoccupied functions.
G.
Temperature Control Cabinets: Standard control cabinets, size as required, with hinged locking door. Unit is factory-piped and wired to numbered terminal strips. Target gauges, temperature gauges, selector switches and night setback overrides are mounted in face of panel.
H.
Carbon Monoxide Sensor: Totally sealed, electro chemical sensor with audible and visual alarms, adjustable setpoint, audible alarm reset, remote alarm and warning relays, tamper resistant NEMA 1 type painted steel case, circuit board with adjustable potentiometers, power switch, circuit breaker and plug-in relays. Warning and alarm level set points shall be set as recommended by the manufacturer. MSA Instruments "Toxgard" Model C.
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
23 09 33 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING I.
01-13-2012
Dampers (Multiple Blade Dampers): Automatic dampers, furnished by the Control Contractor, shall be single or multiple blade as applicable. All dampers are to be sized to the application by the manufacturer using methods similar to control valve sizing. Dampers are to be installed by the HVAC Contractor under the supervision of the Temperature Control Contractor. All blank-off plates and conversions necessary to install smaller than duct size dampers are the responsibility of the HVAC Contractor. All damper frames are to be constructed of No. 13 gauge galvanized sheet metal and shall have flanges for duct mounting. Damper blades shall not exceed 8 inches width. All blades are to be of corrugated or roll formed type construction. Blades are to be suitable for high velocity performance. All damper bearings are to be made of nylon. Bushings that turn in the bearings are to be oil impregnated sintered metal. All damper linkages shall be housed in the damper side channel. Replaceable butyl rubber seals are to be provided with the damper. Butyl rubber seals are to be installed along the top and bottom of the frame and along each blade edge. Independent, self-compensating, stainless steel end seals shall be installed to insure minimum leakage between blade ends and damper frame. Seals shall provide a tight closing low leakage damper. Damper sections shall not exceed 16 sq. ft. and shall have minimum of one operator per damper section. All outside air and return air dampers shall be parallel blade, low leakage dampers. Return air dampers shall be smoke dampers. END OF SECTION
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
23 09 33 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
23 09 93 SEQUENCES OF OPERATION
PART 1 1.01
1.02
1.03
GENERAL
CONTROL DIAGRAMS A.
Refer to Drawings for information which indicates the components and intended control functions and devices.
B.
Temperature Control Contractor shall be responsible for all control wiring connections, auxiliary devices, and control wiring diagrams to complete the control system and attain the described sequence of operation.
C.
All setpoints of thermostats, controllers and the like, that are not factory preset, shall be preset by the Temperature Control Contractor before system startup.
SAFETY INTERLOCKS - GENERAL A.
All safety interlocks shall be hard wired and independent of control system programming software, and controllers. These safety interlocks include the shutdown of equipment items due to low temperatures, shutdown due to lack of combustion air supply, and shutdown due to smoke detection.
B.
The Division 26 fire alarm panel shall contain one (1) set of contacts for each rooftop unit that the Temperature Control Contractor shall be responsible for wiring through in order to shutdown the unit, and associated exhaust fans when smoke is detected by smoke detectors that report through the fire alarm panel. This safety interlock is in addition to smoke detectors located at the air handling unit that are locally hard wired by the Temperature Control Contractor for air system shut down of the air handling unit, associated return fans, and associated exhaust fans.
SEQUENCES OF OPERATION A.
Packaged rooftop units (RTU 1, 2) shall have factory mounted and wired controls for the following Sequences: 1. System shall have a 7-day, 4 event day (minimum) programmable thermostat. 2. Unoccupied Mode: a. The supply fan shall start and stop, as indicated by temperature. b. The setback temperature for heating (set-up temperature for cooling) shall be 5 degrees below (above for cooling) the occupied setpoint of the space. c. The outside air damper shall remain closed and all interlocked exhaust fans shall remain off. 3. Occupied mode: a. The supply fan shall run continuously. b. The outside air damper shall fully open upon activation of associated interlocked exhaust fans. c. The unit outside air damper shall be 100% open and the refrigerant circuit or natural gas heat shall cycle as required to maintain space temperature setpoint.
SEQUENCES OF OPERATION
23 09 93 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
4. Smoke Detection: Upon receiving a signal from the smoke detector or the building fire alarm system, the fans shall stop and the outside air damper shall close. B.
Packaged rooftop units (RTU 3, 4, 5, 6) shall have factory mounted and wired controls for the following Sequences. 1. System shall have a 7-day, 4 event day (minimum) programmable thermostat. 2. Unoccupied Mode: a. The supply fan shall start and stop, as indicated by temperature. b. The setback temperature for heating (set-up temperature for cooling) shall be 5 degrees below (above for cooling) the occupied setpoint of the space. c. The outside air damper shall remain closed and all interlocked exhaust fans shall remain off. 3. Morning warm-up/cool-down. 4. Occupied Mode: a. The supply fan shall run continuously. b. The outside air damper shall open to minimum. c. All associated interlocked fans shall start and run continuously. 5. Economizer and Cooling Control: a. Cooling mode and outside air temperature less than 55 degrees F: The unit shall modulate the economizer outside air damper and the return air damper to maintain space temperature setpoint. b. Cooling mode and outside air temperature between 55 and 57 degrees F: The unit outside air damper shall be 100% open and the refrigerant circuit shall cycle as required to maintain space temperature setpoint. c. Heating shall be locked out in economizer operation. d. Heating mode: The outside air damper shall be in minimum position. 6. Smoke Detection: Upon receiving a signal from the smoke detector or the building fire alarm system, the fans shall stop and the outside air damper shall close. All smoke dampers associated with the system shall close.
C.
Packaged rooftop units (RTU 7, 8, 9, 10) shall have factory mounted and wired controls for the following Sequences: 1. System shall have a 7-day, 4 event day (minimum) programmable thermostat. 2. Unoccupied Mode: a. The supply fan shall start and stop, as indicated by temperature. b. The setback temperature for heating (set-up temperature for cooling) shall be 5 degrees below (above for cooling) the occupied setpoint of the space. c. The outside air damper shall remain closed and all interlocked exhaust fans shall remain off. 3. Occupied mode: a. The supply fan shall run continuously. b. The outside air damper shall open to maximum position. c. The unit outside air damper shall be 100% open and the refrigerant circuit or natural gas heat shall cycle as required to maintain space temperature setpoint. 4. Smoke Detection: Upon receiving a signal from the smoke detector or the building fire alarm system, the fans shall stop and the outside air damper shall close.
SEQUENCES OF OPERATION
23 09 93 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
D.
Residential Air Conditioning Systems (PTAC) 1. System shall have a 7-day, 4 event day (minimum) programmable thermostat. 2. Fan mode shall be set by the occupant (off-on-auto). 3. Unit heating and cooling shall cycle in response to space temperature. 4. The living unit is naturally ventilated through window opening.
E.
Residential Toilet Room 1. Fan shall be interlocked with light switch to activate/deactivate.
F.
Cabinet and Unit Heaters 1. A thermostat (unit mounted on all unit heaters and all floor mounted cabinet unit heaters and wall mounted on all elevated cabinet unit heaters) shall cycle the fan and heater on when calling for heat.
G.
Parking Garage Ceiling Space 1. Independent temperature sensors located throughout the ceiling space of the garage shall indicate an alarm when the plenum temperature drops below 45 degrees. Alarm indication shall report to the leasing office.
H.
Electrical Room Fans 1. Outside air damper will open and exhaust fan will operate when space temperature is above setpoint (85 degrees F).
I.
Trash Room Fans 1. The fans shall operate continuously. END OF SECTION
SEQUENCES OF OPERATION
23 09 93 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
23 31 10 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK
PART 1 1.01
1.02
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION A.
This section specifies the construction of ductwork for the listed systems when the duct static pressure is 2 inches W.C. or less (positive or negative). Each duct system shall have a single pressure classification, which shall exceed to fan's external static rating listed in the equipment schedules. In cases where an external fan static is not given in the equipment schedules, the pressure classification of the duct system shall exceed the fan's total static rating.
B.
Provide ductwork and/or plenums for the following low pressure air systems: 1. Outside air 2. Supply air 3. Exhaust air other than kitchen hood exhausts 4. Return air
C.
Include all turning vanes, extractors, volume dampers, duct access doors, walls and ceiling access panels, flexible connections, flexible duct, duct sealing systems, hangers and supports necessary to complete the indicated and specified system and achieve the desired system operation.
D.
The following rectangular ductwork shall be lined: 1. All transfer air ductwork
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
The listed standards are referenced for the contractor to follow for the construction of ductwork items not specifically addressed in this specification section. This specification takes precedence over the referenced standards.
B.
Standards: 1. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE), Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA), National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), and Underwriters' Laboratories (UL). 2. SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible" 1985 edition. Construct ductwork to meet all functional criteria defined in the 1985 SMACNA standards except where noted otherwise. Note: Duct constructions compliant with other editions of the SMACNA standards that do not meet or exceed the 1985 SMACNA standard are unacceptable. 3. SMACNA "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual" latest edition.
LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK
23 31 10 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
1.03
1.04
01-13-2012
C.
All ductwork and fittings must have a computer generated label affixed to each section detailing all applicable information including the duct dimensions, gage, reinforcement type/class, and connector type of systems manufacturer. In addition, galvanizing thickness and country of origin must be clearly stenciled on each duct section.
D.
The Engineer reserves the right to randomly check sheet metal gauges and reinforcing to verify all duct construction is in compliance. Non-conforming material will be replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
SUBMITTALS A.
Submit ductwork fabrication and layout shop drawings in accordance with Section 20 05 15, "Submittals." Coordinate the detailed fabrication drawings with all trades. Coordinate size and location of ductwork with structure, piping, lighting, equipment, conduit, bus ducts, ceiling construction and clear height above ceilings and other items which may present a potential conflict.
B.
Layout Drawings shall be at 1/4 inch = 1 foot scale on reproducible media with enlarged sections, elevations, plan drawings, and mechanical room drawings as necessary to ensure a coordinated installation.
C.
Written program outlining protection of ductwork from contamination with dirt and procedures for cleaning contaminated ductwork.
D.
Submit documentation that the minimum two weeks building 100% outside air flush-out was completed, including dates when the flush-out was begun and completed and what steps were taken to guarantee 100% outside air usage.
E.
Submit documentation for the filtration media used during the flush-out period, including filtration media manufacturer's name, model number, and MERV value.
F.
Submit documentation that all filtration was replaced immediately, prior to occupancy including filtration media manufacturer's name, model number, and MERV value.
G.
Low Emitting Materials Documentation: 1. Provide a cut sheet and a Material Safety Data Sheet for each adhesive used in the building highlighting compliance with Specification requirements. 2. Provide a cut sheet and a Material Safety Data Sheet for each sealant used in the building highlighting compliance with Specification requirements.
DUCT DIMENSIONS A.
The dimensions indicated on the drawings are the net inside clear dimensions available for airflow.
B.
Contractor shall allow for shop-lined or exterior insulation thickness as required and indicate this on the ductwork layout shop drawings.
LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK
23 31 10 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING PART 2 2.01
PRODUCTS
STEEL DUCTWORK A.
2.02
01-13-2012
MATERIAL 1. Unless noted otherwise, all ducts shall be constructed with G-90 or better galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A653/A653M and A924/A924M Standards, Lock-Forming Quality (LFQ). Chem treat to all galvanized steel to be used for ductwork that will not be painted. Provide a factory-applied surface protection such as oil or a paintcompatible chem treat on all galvanized steel to be used for ductwork that will be painted. 2. Pre-engineered low pressure duct systems with factory fabricated fittings utilizing gasketed joints are acceptable. "Spiro-safe" by Lindab, "Uni-gasket" by McGill Airflow Corporation, or "Greenseam I" by Ductmate Industries. 3. Stainless steel ductwork shall be Type 304 stainless steel with a No. 2D finish in concealed locations, and a No. 4 finish for exposed locations, conforming to ASTM A167 and A-480.
RECTANGULAR DUCT A.
The following table indicates the minimum duct gauge based on largest dimension of the duct. DUCT DIMENSION
DUCT GAUGE WITHOUT REINFORCEMENT
DUCT GAUGE REINFORCED 4 FT ON CENTER
DUCT GAUGE REINFORCED 5 FT ON CENTER
12" or less 13" to 14" 15" to 18" 19" to 20" 21" to 24" 25" to 42" 43" to 48"
24 22 20 18 16 ---
-24 24 24 24 24 22
-24 24 24 24 22 20
1. Ducts with one (1) dimension 85 inches to 120 inches shall be 18 gauge with reinforcement 2 feet on center. Reinforce all ducts having one (1) dimension over 120 inches per SMACNA standards. 2. Duct reinforcement must be provided and spaced as indicated above on all ducts with a dimension greater than 24 inches. All reinforcements shall meet SMACNA standards with regards to reinforcement style and rigidity. Reinforced ductwork gauges shall not be reduced from the minimums indicated in this specification. All reinforcement shall be galvanized steel. 3. All ductwork with a side 16 inches or greater and 20 gauge or less thickness with more than 10 square feet of panel area shall be cross-broken or beaded. 4. Bead, crossbreak and reinforce flat surfaces of all fittings the same as straight duct sections. 5. Transverse joints shall not be considered as duct reinforcement unless specifically stated and listed in the SMACNA standard.
LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK
23 31 10 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
6. Rectangular elbows shall be radius, 1.5 times duct width, or square throat with vanes. Drawings indicate style of elbow to be provided. 7. All rectangular duct fittings shall conform to the gauge and reinforcement requirements indicated for the largest connected straight duct section. 8. Provide opposed multiblade volume dampers in rectangular ducts. 9. Turning vanes shall be double wall with every sixth vane welded to the runner. a. Turning vanes shall be Harper double wall turning vanes fabricated from the same material as the duct. b. Turning vane front and back panels shall be securely locked together with adequate crimping to prevent twisting of vane. Vane shall be capable of withstanding 250 pounds of tensile load when secured according to the manufacturer's instructions. c. Rails for mounting turning vanes shall have self locking, friction fit tabs designed to facilitate proper alignment of vanes. 2.03
ROUND DUCT A.
B.
The following table indicates the minimum gauge for round ductwork for fans with positive external static pressures of up to 2 inches W.C.:
DUCT DIAMETER
SPIRAL SEAM GAUGE
LONGITUDINAL SEAM GAUGE
FITTING GAUGE
3" thru 8" 9" thru 14" 15" thru 26" 27" thru 36"
28 26 24 22
24 24 22 20
24 24 22 20
The following table indicates the minimum gauge for round ductwork for fans with negative external static pressures of up to minus 2 inches W.C.:
DUCT DIAMETER
SPIRAL SEAM GAUGE
3" thru 8" 9" thru 14" 15" thru 20" 21" thru 26" 27" thru 34" * Provide reinforcement rings
28 26 24 22 20
LONGITUDINAL SEAM GAUGE
FITTING GAUGE
26 24 22 20 18
26 24 22 20 18
1. Seam construction shall be spiral seam, lap and rivet or tack weld on 6 inch interval, spot weld on 2 inch interval, continuous butt weld, or lapped and seam welded. 2. Round elbows shall be radius type, with a centerline radius of 1.5 times the duct diameter, of stamped, pleated, or three-piece segmented construction. 3. Provide round volume dampers with wing nuts, hand quadrants, bearings and stiffened blades.
LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK
23 31 10 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 2.04
2.05
EXPOSED DUCTWORK A.
All ductwork exposed in conditioned spaces shall be provided with a paint-grip galvanized finish or similar mill surface etch treatment for painting. Prime with Glidden #5229.
B.
On round ducts, provide pleated elbows.
C.
Provide tapered wedge (ramp) joint or gasketed fittings on round ducts.
D.
Minimize the use of duct sealants.
SPLITTER DAMPERS A.
2.06
2.07
01-13-2012
20 gauge galvanized steel blades welded to square cold-rolled steel operating rod, air tight end bearings with rubber gasket, adjustable locking mechanism.
DUCT SEALS A.
Seal all duct transverse joints and longitudinal seams to meet SMACNA Seal Class A for 2 inches of static pressure (positive or negative) as a minimum, and so that leakage rates do not exceed those stated in other sections of this specification.
B.
Duct Sealant: Liquid seal for joints and seams. Surfaces are to be clean and free from oil, dust, dirt, rust, moisture, or any substance which would interfere with bonding of sealant. Where metal clearances exceed 1/16 inch, several applications are required. 1. McGill AirSeal Corporation, "United Duct Sealer – Water Based" 2. Hardcast "Duct-Seal 321" 3. Ductmate "Proseal" 4. Products with documented VOC-emission rates meeting LEED guidelines by Dow Corning, Miracle Adhesives, Ductmate Industries, or Surebond, Inc.
FIELD ERECTED CASING, PLENUMS AND MIXING BOXES A.
Construct all casings and plenums to the pressure class equal to the fan's total static pressure as indicated on the drawings, but for no less than 2 inches static pressure. The casings shall be capable of handling both positive and negative pressures.
B.
Seal all pipe penetrations airtight.
C.
Panel construction shall be galvanized steel.
D.
Drain pans shall be welded stainless steel and shall extend beyond the coil to catch all condensed water (extend a minimum of 6 inches beyond coil). For coils over 30 inches tall provide intermediate drain pans.
E.
Provide casing access doors with a minimum of two hinges and two latches. Provide access doors such that filters, dampers, motors, coils and control devices are accessible for service or removal. 1. Ventlock, Ruskin, or McGill AirPressure Corporation.
LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK
23 31 10 - 5
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
2.08
2.09
2.10
01-13-2012
F.
Seal all joints, seams, penetrations, and connections on both suction and discharge sides of the fan in accordance with SMACNA Seal Class A for 2 inches of static pressure (positive or negative) as a minimum. Provide gasketing on all doors and access panels.
G.
Insulate all casings, plenums and mixing boxes.
INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK A.
Five feet is the maximum allowable length for final connection to supply diffusers in suspended ceilings. Flexible ductwork shall not be used to connect return or exhaust air devices unless specifically indicated on Drawings.
B.
All flexible ducts shall be UL-listed for use as flexible air ducts, and rated for 10 inches W.C. positive pressure and 5 inches negative pressure for sizes through 16 inches diameter, from -20 degrees F to +250 degrees F. Provide gray or black, non-reflective CPE or multiply polyester inner liner, mechanically bonded to a corrosion-resistant steel helix. Average attenuation across octave bands one through seven, based on 650 FPM velocity through 9 feet of 8 inch duct, shall be 23 dB.
B.
Each flexible duct section shall be supported by a minimum of two duct supports and shall not sag more than 1/2 inch per linear feet of duct.
C.
Manufacturers: Flexmaster USA Type 8B or 8M, or approved equal by Hart & Cooley, or Thermaflex.
FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A.
Flexible duct connector shall be used where ductwork connects to fans of apparatus, or apparatus casing to fans to isolate vibration transfer. Connectors shall be attached in such a manner as to provide an airtight and waterproof seal. Connectors will comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning & Ventilation Systems" and NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating & Air Conditioning Systems."
B.
Indoor installations shall be of a UL 214 listed, fire retardant Vinyl coated woven nylon or Neoprene coated woven fiberglass fabric. Minimum density of Vinyl is 20 ounces per square yard and rated to 200 degree F. Minimum density of Neoprene is 30 ounces per square yard and rated to 200 degrees F.
C.
Outdoor installations shall be of a UL 214 listed UV-resistant Hypalon coated wovenfiberglass fabric. Minimum density 24 ounces per square yard and rated to 250 degrees F.
DUCT LINER A.
Semi-rigid fiberglass duct liner with flame spread rating not to exceed 25 and a smoke developed rating not to exceed 50 and K=0.23 at 75 degrees F, 1 inch thick.
B.
All edges of liner facing in the direction of airflow shall be coated with adhesive or shall have a metal nosing.
LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK
23 31 10 - 6
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
2.11
C.
Mechanical fasteners shall be used to install the liner in addition to the adhesive. Fasteners shall be welded pin and washer or clinching type impact fasteners - galvanized.
D.
Remove and replace all liner that is exposed to water during construction.
DUCT LINER ADHESIVE A.
2.12
Provide 16 gauge, steel or aluminum, double skinned, insulating blank-off panels behind louvers as indicated on the drawings. Sheet metal material shall match louver material. Panel finish and color to match louver. Seal panel joints airtight. Provide panels with a minimum R-value of 6.
SPIN-IN FITTINGS A.
PART 3 3.01
Adhesive shall conform to Adhesive and Sealant Council Standards for Adhesives for duct liner: ASC-A-7001C-1972. 1. Foster Model 85 water-based adhesive 2. McGill AirSeal water-based "Uni-Tack" or water-based "Uni-Grab" 3. Ductmate water-based "PROtack"
BLANK-OFF PANELS A.
2.13
01-13-2012
Heavy gauge fitting with volume damper. Provide insulation guard when used with internally lined ductwork. 1. K and J, Philman, S and J, Flexmaster or Genflex.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
All duct installations and duct construction shall comply with all requirements of this specification and meet or exceed SMACNA standards and recommendations for construction and installation.
B.
Provide turning vanes or sweep elbows at all changes of direction in supply, exhaust, and return ductwork.
C.
Seal all seams and joints.
D.
Provide a minimum 6 inch flexible connection where ductwork connects to motor-driven equipment. Do not bulge or install on a bind.
E.
Provide duct access doors at all fire and fire/smoke dampers. Provide ceiling access panel in dry wall or other inaccessible ceiling systems such that fire dampers are serviceable.
F.
Keep ductwork tight to underside of structure. Maintain at least 7 inches clear between duct and suspended ceiling construction.
G.
Install all dampers and provide blank-off plates to seal frames airtight.
LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK
23 31 10 - 7
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
3.02
01-13-2012
H.
Provide volume dampers at each branch to balance system to air flows indicated on the drawings.
I.
All duct liners shall be secured in place with mechanical fasteners and adhesive spread over the entire contact surface. Pin spacing shall meet or exceed SMACNA requirements.
J.
Install flexible ducting only for termination in 5 feet maximum lengths and with only one 90 degree bend at a radius of two duct diameters.
K.
Metallic flexible duct shall be attached with at least three (3) #8 sheet metal screws equally spaced around duct circumference, and five (5) #8 screws for ducts over 12 inches in diameter. Locate screws at least 1/2 inch from duct end.
L.
Non-Metallic flexible ducts shall be secured with a draw band. On ducts over 12 inches in diameter, position draw band behind a bead in the metal collar.
M.
Secure all insulation and vapor barriers on factory-fabricated flexible ducts with a separate draw band, independent of any used for the connection of the flexible duct to the duct collar.
N.
Provide duct access doors at all duct smoke detector locations. Coordinate locations with the Electrical Contractor.
O.
Galvanizing Repairs – Repair galvanizing damaged by welding, scratches, etc., using cold galvanizing compound.
TESTING A.
Test Requirements: 1. Installed ductwork shall be tested prior to installation of access doors, take-offs, etc. 2. The Contractor shall give the Architect, Engineer, and Owner 72 hours notice prior to testing in order to provide an opportunity to witness the testing. 3. Any testing conducted without prior notification providing an opportunity to witness the test shall be considered invalid and will be redone at the contractor's expense. 4. Leak-test all ductwork. Air leakage in any tested section of ductwork shall not exceed that of SMACNA Leakage Class 12.
B.
Recommended Test Procedure: Perform testing in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual and as follows below. Note that this reference establishes procedures only; and the allowable leakage rates are found in these Specifications. 1. Use a certified orifice tube and its corresponding logarithmic chart for measuring the leakage. Supply fan must have a CFM capacity greater than the allowable leakage in CFM for the section being tested. 2. Define section of system to be tested and blank off. 3. Determine the percentage of the system being tested, on a square foot of surface area basis. 4. Using the percentage determined in Step "3" and the maximum allowable leakage of 2% of the total system volume, determine the allowable leakage (cfm) for the section being tested. 5. Pressurize to 100% of the duct pressure class design pressure and repair any significant or audible leaks.
LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK
23 31 10 - 8
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
6. Pressurize again and measure leakage. 7. Repeat Steps "5" and "6" until the leakage measured is less than the allowable defined in Step "4." C.
3.03
Document all duct testing and submit testing results as part of "As-Built" documents. Furnish copies of all completed duct testing documentation upon request of the Architect, Engineer, or Owner.
DUCT CLEAN OUT A.
Clean and blow out complete duct system before any connections to equipment are made. Inspect ductwork for debris before starting any fans.
B.
Interior surfaces shall be free of dust and debris prior to initial start up. Protect equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. Provide adequate access into ductwork for cleaning purposes. Any cleaning of duct systems shall comply with recommendations of NAIMA and NADCA.
C.
When internally cleaning duct work prior to installation or shipment to the jobsite, cover all duct ends and openings with a dual polyethylene protective film. Securely affix the film to protect against dirt and debris. Film must be translucent to facilitate inspection of interior surfaces without removing film. Film must have a minimum elongation of 600%, contain no VOC and leave no residue on duct after removal. Ductmate Industries "ProGuard" or approved equal.
D.
Clean external surfaces of foreign substances that might cause corrosion, deterioration of the metal, or where ductwork is to be painted. END OF SECTION
LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK
23 31 10 - 9
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
23 31 13 KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST DUCTWORK
PART 1 1.01
DESCRIPTION A.
1.02
1.03
This section specifies the construction of kitchen hood exhaust ductwork (including dishwasher exhaust).
SUBMITTALS A.
Submit ductwork fabrication and layout shop drawings in accordance with Section 20 05 15, "Submittals." Coordinate the detailed fabrication drawings with all trades. Coordinate size and location of ductwork with structure, piping, lighting, equipment, conduit, bus ducts, ceiling construction and clear height above ceilings and other items which may present a potential conflict.
B.
Layout drawings shall be at 1/4 inch = 1 foot scale on reproducible media with enlarged sections and elevation drawings to ensure a coordinated installation. Contractor shall locate and show all cleanouts and access doors on the fabrication shop drawings.
DUCT DIMENSIONS A.
PART 2 2.01
GENERAL
The dimensions indicated on the contract drawings are the net inside clear dimensions available for air flow.
PRODUCTS
STAINLESS STEEL DUCTWORK A.
Duct material shall be 304 stainless steel.
B.
Rectangular Duct: The following table indicates the minimum duct thickness based on largest dimension of the duct. DUCT DIMENSION
DUCT THICKNESS WITHOUT REINFORCEMENT
DUCT THICKNESS REINFORCED 4 FT ON CENTER
24" or less 25" to 60"
(0.05") --
-(0.05")
KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST DUCTWORK
23 31 13 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
Ducts with one (1) dimension 72 inches or larger shall be 0.063 inch thick with reinforcement 2 feet on center. Provide duct reinforcement spaced as indicated above on all ducts with a dimension greater than 24 inches as per the SMACNA publication "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible" 1985 edition, with regards to reinforcement style and rigidity for 3 inches W.G. pressure class. Reinforced ductwork thickness shall not be reduced from the minimums indicated in this specification. All reinforcement shall be stainless steel. Transverse joints and longitudinal seams shall be welded construction and water tight. Rectangular elbows shall be radius, 1.5 times duct width. Fitting shall be the same thickness as straight duct sections. C.
Round Duct: The following table indicates the minimum thickness for round supply ductwork: DUCT DIAMETER
DUCT THICKNESS
50" or less 51" to 60"
0.05" 0.063"
All ductwork with a diameter greater than 80 inches shall be 0.078 inch thick and angle reinforced as per SMACNA Industrial Duct Construction Standards. 2.02
2.03
CLEANOUTS A.
Provide cleanouts spaced 12 feet on center for all horizontal runs and at each floor level in vertical runs.
B.
Provide cleanouts at each change of direction in the duct such that the elbow or other fitting can be cleaned.
C.
Duct cleanouts shall be 14 inches x 14 inches or the width of the duct minus 2 inches by 14 inches when the duct width is less than 16 inches.
D.
Provide access doors through walls, ceilings and shafts such that duct cleanouts are accessible. Where a fire rated assembly is penetrated the access door shall be the appropriately rated type.
GREASE DUCT INSULATION (ENCLOSURE) A.
Enclosure for all kitchen exhaust ducts except dishwasher: 1. Insulation material shall be non-asbestos, inorganic alumina-silica fiber fire blanket having a minimum density of 6 pcf and shall be foil-faced on both sides using a fiberreinforced foil scrim material. The duct wrapping shall provide two hours rating enclosure. The insulation material shall be totally encapsulated. 2. Insulation thickness shall be 3 inches and be provide a UL rating for zero clearance to combustibles throughout the assembly.
KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST DUCTWORK
23 31 13 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
3. Insulation shall be UL classified and comply with NFPA 96 and must have passed ASTM E119, ASTM E136 and ASTM E84 testing and must meet BOCA standards for both horizontal and vertical grease ducts. 4. Insulation shall have a temperature rating of 2,300°F. 5. The insulation shall be installed in direct contact with the grease duct it encloses. All joints shall be overlapped and shall be held in place by a Type 304 stainless steel band (0.75 inch wide x 0.15 inch thick). 6. Acceptable Manufacturers: 3M, Thermal Ceramics, Unifrax, and ETS Schaefer
PART 3 3.01
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
All duct installations and duct construction shall comply with all requirements of this specification and meet or exceed all local, city, NFPA 96 and state requirements for construction and installation.
B.
All ducts are to be installed without forming dips or traps that might collect residues.
C.
Coordinate location of fire suppression system heads with ductwork.
D.
Keep ductwork tight to underside of structure. Maintain at least 7 inches clear between duct and ceiling construction.
E.
Wrap all kitchen hood exhaust ductwork not enclosed in a 2 hour fire-rated shaft with a UL-approved material to provide a two-hour fire rating, from hood to point of termination. Install in strict conformance with manufacturer's instructions and product listing criteria. END OF SECTION
KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST DUCTWORK
23 31 13 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
23 33 13 DAMPERS
PART 1 1.01
1.02
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION A.
Provide all dampers for adjusting and modulating airflow. See floor plans, schedules and details for required equipment for all specific situations.
B.
Scope of work includes the installation of all motor-operated control dampers, including those that may be furnished by the Temperature Control Contractor.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.03
Standards: AMCA Standard 500 Certified Performance.
MANUFACTURERS A.
PART 2 2.01
Ruskin, Louvers and Dampers, Arrow/United, Vent Products, or American Warming and Ventilating.
PRODUCTS
COUNTERBALANCED BACKDRAFT DAMPERS A.
2.02
Steel frame, extruded aluminum blades with vinyl edge seal, 1/2 inch axle, dustproof ball bearings, adjustable counter-balance weights, weather-resistant construction.
CONTROL DAMPERS A.
Rectangular Balancing Dampers: 1. Galvanized steel blades, 6 inches wide, 6 inches O.C., 16 gauge, 1/2 inch hex. steel axles, extended 1/2 inch O.D. control shaft. Opposed blade operation, concealed linkage, TFE-filled bearings.
B.
Round Balancing Dampers: 1. Galvanized steel blades, 18 inches and less - 12 gauge; above 18 inches - 10 gauge, with neoprene blade seal. Plated steel axle, extended control shaft.
C.
Manual balancing dampers for rectangular ducts 12 inches and smaller: 1. Galvanized steel blades, 5 inches wide, 16 gauge. 3/8 inch square control shaft, opposed blade damper operation, concealed linkage, TFE-filled bearings.
DAMPERS
23 33 13 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING PART 3 3.01
3.02
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Install all dampers in ductwork and provide access to adjustments as required.
B.
Coordinate the selection and installation of all motor-operated control dampers, including those that may be furnished by the Temperature Control Contractor.
CONTROLS A.
See Section 23 09 23, "Temperature Control" for control requirements.
B.
Provide motor-operated dampers as required to execute the provisions described in Section 23 09 93, "Sequences of Operation." END OF SECTION
DAMPERS
23 33 13 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
23 33 15 FIRE DAMPERS
PART 1 1.01
DESCRIPTION A.
1.02
PART 2
Ruskin, Vent Products, American Warming and Ventilating, Pottorff, or Prefco.
PRODUCTS
CURTAIN TYPE FIRE DAMPERS A.
Construction: Curtain type, positive spring closure, with blades out of air stream, galvanized steel channel frame, interlocking galvanized steel blades, factory-furnished steel sleeve, UL listed 212 degrees F fusible link, 1 1/2 hour fire protection rating, vertical or horizontal mounting, factory-furnished retaining angles, and mounting hardware. Steel sleeve shall be equal to or thicker than the ductwork it is connecting to, and at least the manufacturer's recommended thickness, but in no case less than 18 gauges. All fire dampers shall be UL classified and labeled for assured closure.
B.
Provide flexible metal jamb seals for lowest leakage.
PART 3 3.01
Standards: 1. SMACNA Publication "Fire Damper Guide." 2. UL Standard 555 - Standard for Fire Dampers. 3. UL Standard 555C - Standard for Ceiling Dampers. 4. NFPA 90A 5. SMACNA Publication "HVAC Duct Construction Standards."
MANUFACTURERS A.
2.01
Provide fire dampers at all duct penetrations through fire rated walls.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.03
GENERAL
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
HVAC Contractor shall coordinate the selection of damper with the fire resistance rating of the structure being penetrated.
B.
Install fire dampers in locations where they can be readily inspected, serviced, adjusted and maintained.
C.
Install transitions where required to match duct size to damper dimensions.
FIRE DAMPERS
23 33 15 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
3.02
D.
Coordinate installation of access panels. Install access doors in ductwork at each fire damper. Locate access doors to provide access to damper actuator/fusible link. Provide multiple doors if required. Label locations of all access doors.
E.
Install mounting angles and duct sleeves. Bolt, screw or tack weld fire damper enclosure to sleeve.
F.
Label locations of access door and ceilings per building code.
G.
Firestop all wall penetrations at all fire dampers per damper manufacturer's written instructions. Use only firestop materials that are compatible with damper construction and operation.
H.
Maintain a current, legible copy of the damper manufacturer's installation instructions at the Project site for all fire dampers being used on the Project. Make installation instructions available on request for all inspecting authorities.
INSPECTION A.
3.03
01-13-2012
At final acceptance inspection, approximately 10% of all fire dampers, as randomly selected by the Owner or Engineer, must be demonstrated by the Contractor to be accessible, in proper position, and in operational order. Failure of any one of the demonstrated dampers shall require the Contractor to check and demonstrate operation and accessibility to all dampers, and take corrective measures at not cost.
CERTIFICATION A.
Certify in writing that all fire dampers were checked by operation at installation and that all are in proper position and functional order. END OF SECTION
FIRE DAMPERS
23 33 15 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
23 34 17 EXHAUST FANS
PART 1 1.01
1.02
DESCRIPTION A.
Provide packaged, factory-wired exhaust fans of the following types: 1. Ceiling 2. Power and Upblast Roof Exhauster 3. Inline
B.
Provide curbs, dampers, caps and other accessories as called for in the individual product sections.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.03
Refer to the Drawings for CFM, static pressure, RPM, drive, sones, accessories, HP, and other electrical requirements.
SUBMITTALS A.
PART 2 2.01
Standards: 1. AMCA 210: Fan performance rating. 2. AMCA 300: Sound rating. 3. U.L. Listed: Fan assembly.
RATINGS AND CAPACITIES A.
1.04
GENERAL
Provide brake horsepowers to include drive losses. Data shall be provided with equipment submittal drawings.
PRODUCTS
CEILING EXHAUST FANS A.
General Construction: Galvanized steel housing with adjustable mounting brackets, complete with 1/2 inch acoustical lining, field adjustable (horizontal/vertical) discharge duct connection with backdraft damper, forward curved centrifugal fan wheel, statically and dynamically balanced, access panel, motor mounted on resilient isolators, control/junction box, and architectural inlet grille (where noted on the Drawings).
B.
Loren Cook, Greenheck, Acme, Jenn-Air, Twin City or Penn Ventilator.
EXHAUST FANS
23 34 17 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 2.02
2.03
POWER AND UPBLAST ROOF EXHAUSTERS A.
General Construction: Aluminum materials for components in the airstream, and exposed to the weather, including base, shroud, birdscreen, motor cover and motor base pan, constructed and assembled in a manner providing a rigid unit for fan wheel and power assembly attachment; backward inclined centrifugal fan wheel, statically and dynamically balanced, venturi shaped inlet cone, steel shaft, permanently lubricated motor with sealed pillow block ball bearings, drive assembly mounted on vibration isolators, motor and drive located out of the airstream, removable drive assembly and wheel through motor cover, adjustable motor slide base, belts, factory installed and wired disconnect switch and roof curb.
B.
Upblast fans shall be of the vertical discharge type with drain trough at the base of the wind band and features as described above.
C.
Grease Trap: Provide grease trap accessory for fan scheduled as kitchen hood exhaust type.
D.
Loren Cook, Greenheck, Jenn-Air, Twin City or Penn Ventilator.
INLINE EXHAUST FANS A.
General Construction: Tube axial, belt driven, extruded aluminum air foil blade propeller fan. Propeller shall be extruded aluminum with cast aluminum hub.
B.
Fan Wheel: Non-overloading, backward-inclined centrifugal, statically and dynamically balanced, matched venturi inlet and wheel cones.
C.
Motor and Drive Assembly: Motors shall be single-speed, NEMA Design B with Class B insulation rated for continuous duty, totally enclosed with sealed ball bearings. Drive assembly shall have adjustable cast iron sheave, sealed ball bearings, and belts sized minimum of 150% motor HP. Include extended bearing oilers.
D.
Controls: Factory-installed disconnect switch.
E.
Accessories: As scheduled.
F.
Loren Cook, Greenheck, Twin City or Hartzell.
PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Secure units to building structure in accordance with the Drawings and the manufacturer's recommendations.
B.
Furnish roof curbs for membrane type roof to General Trades Contractor for installation. Provide weathertight curb caps if units cannot be set immediately.
EXHAUST FANS
23 34 17 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING C.
01-13-2012
Provide selection of fixed sheaves and belts, as required for belt-drive units, to Balancing Contractor for proper final balancing. END OF SECTION
EXHAUST FANS
23 34 17 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
23 37 13 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS
PART 1 1.01
DESCRIPTION A.
1.02
Anemostat, Titus, Tuttle & Bailey, Krueger and Price.
SUBMITTALS A.
PART 2 2.01
Refer to Drawings for air device construction, CFM, Noise Criteria, throw, pattern, finish and accessories.
MANUFACTURERS A.
1.05
Standards: Air Diffusion Council (ADC).
RATINGS AND CAPACITIES A.
1.04
Provide grilles, registers and diffusers as indicated on the Drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.03
GENERAL
Provide noise criteria to meet that shown on the Drawing Schedules.
PRODUCTS
GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS A.
General Construction: 1. Steel or aluminum, factory-fabricated to evenly distribute design CFM throughout the space without causing noticeable drafts. 2. Provide all diffusers and registers with a volume controller device complete with an accessible operator unless otherwise indicated. 3. Diffusers shall be round, linear or square with adjustable air discharge pattern unless otherwise indicated. 4. Square ceiling diffusers (for variable volume systems) shall have internal Coanda pockets with a 360 degree isovel pattern enabling them to maintain a nonsmudging horizontal pattern at various air volumes with or without a ceiling. 5. Grilles shall be same construction as registers without volume-control damper. 6. All diffusers, registers, grilles, and mounting frames shall be furnished with factory finish as scheduled. 7. Provide concealed fastener mounting on all surface mount registers.
GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS
23 37 13 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
8. Unless noted otherwise, provide a mounting frame for all air devices mounted in a drywall or plaster ceiling, Mounting frame shall be factory-fabricated by the same manufacturer as the air device being mounted, and shall match air device in material of construction, color, and finish. Permanently secure mounting frame in ceiling construction, and install "lay-in" type air device within mounting frame with flexible ductwork to permit future access above ceiling assembly. 2.02
EQUALIZING DEFLECTORS A.
2.03
COMBINATION VOLUME CONTROLLER/EQUALIZING DEFLECTOR A.
2.04
2.05
Steel butterfly damper and steel bladed equalizing deflector assembly, flat black finish.
VOLUME CONTROLLER A.
Steel radial blades with flat black finish for round neck square diffusers.
B.
Steel opposed blades with flat black finish for registers and square neck diffusers.
INTEGRAL EXTRACTORS AND BALANCING DAMPERS A.
PART 3 3.01
Steel bladed assembly, flat black finish.
Steel frame and parallel diverting blades, angle bracket, pivot bearing assembly, worm gear operator and control shaft. 1. Anemostat, Tuttle and Bailey or Titus.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Square diffusers supplied by flexible ducts shall be installed with volume damper and equalizing grid in the diffuser neck.
B.
Surface mounted registers shall be provided with sponge-rubber gasket between flanges and wall or ceiling.
C.
Wall supply registers shall be installed at least 6 inches below the ceiling, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Provide additional support hangers for diffusers, grilles or registers mounted in lay-in ceiling tiles.
E.
Insure airtight seal at all connections.
F.
Paint inside portions of all ductwork or plenums that are visible behind registers or grilles, with non-specular flat black enamel. END OF SECTION
GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS
23 37 13 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
23 41 05 FILTERS
PART 1 1.01
DESCRIPTION A.
1.02
PART 2
2.02
Standards: 1. ASHRAE 52.2-99 2. MIL-STD-282 3. UL 900
DIMENSIONS AND RATINGS A.
2.01
Provide the following filters: 1. Disposable Rigid MERV 8 (30-35% dust spot efficiency) 2. Disposable Rigid MERV 11 (60-65% dust spot efficiency)
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.03
GENERAL
Refer to the Drawings for size, CFM, pressure drop and other design requirements.
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURER A.
Camfil-Farr
B.
American Air Filter
DISPOSABLE RIGID FILTERS A.
Filter shall be high-efficiency, high lofted supported glass fiber media in enclosing frame. Filter media shall have reinforced backing, welded wire support grid for tapered radial pleats. Media shall be bonded to frame to prevent air bypass.
B.
MERV 8: Filter shall be 4 inches deep, UL Class 2 and have MERV 8 and a 30-35% average dust spot efficiency when tested to ASHRAE Standards. Initial resistance shall be rated at 0.20 inches W.C at 500 FPM face velocity. 1. Camfil Farr Aeropleat IV.
C.
MERV 11: Filter shall be 12 inches deep, UL Class 2 and have MERV 11 and a 60-65% average dust spot efficiency when tested to ASHRAE Standards. Initial resistance shall be rated at 0.29 inches W.C. at 500 FPM face velocity. 1. Camfil Farr Riga-Flo 15.
FILTERS
23 41 05 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 2.03
DIRTY FILTER GAUGE A.
Provide a differential pressure gauge across the following filter banks: 1. All air handler prefilter/main filter banks
B.
On air handler prefilter/main filter banks, provide valving and piping to allow reading to be taken across prefilter bank and main filter bank, both individually and collectively.
C.
Filter gauges shall be 4 inch diameter, 0 to 2 inch W.C. range, and an adjustable signal flag.
D.
Dwyer Series 2000 "Magnehelic," or approved equal.
PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
GENERAL INSTALLATION A.
Install filters and holding frame at locations indicated on the Drawings.
B.
Level filter assembly and provide service access.
C.
Tighten filters and achieve a 50% gasket crush to prevent air bypass.
D.
Install filter gauge across each filter bank, one (1) for each pre-filter and one (1) for each final filter.
E.
When operating fans during construction, filters are to be in place and replaced when pressure drop reaches 1 inch W.C. more than the initial resistance. Do not operate fans without filters.
F.
At the time of occupancy, install new media throughout for each piece of equipment requiring filters. Provide one (1) complete replacement set of filters for each piece of equipment upon completion of the project. END OF SECTION
FILTERS
23 41 05 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
23 74 14 ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
PART 1 1.01
1.02
1.03
DESCRIPTION A.
Provide packaged, DX cooling, gas heating, complete with prewired controls and pitched roof curb.
B.
This Specification is for units RTU1 and RTU2, and RTU7 through RTU10.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Standards: American Refrigeration Institute (ARI) and Underwriters' Laboratories (UL).
B.
ARI 210 and 270.
RATINGS AND CAPACITIES A.
1.04
Valent or Aaon.
EXTENDED WARRANTY A.
PART 2 2.01
Refer to Drawings for dimensions, CFM, cooling MBH, HP, voltage and other electrical requirements.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A.
1.05
GENERAL
Compressors to have a five (5) year warranty.
PRODUCTS
ROOFTOP UNIT A.
Construction: Weatherproof cabinet of galvanized steel with factory baked enamel finish, filters, 2 inch foam injected fiberglass insulation, double walled panels, and roof mounting curb.
B.
Blower Section: Direct drive, backward inclined centrifugal, statically and dynamically balanced. Blowers to have permanently lubricated ball bearings and internal vibration isolation. Blower motor to have internal thermal and overload protection.
C.
Compressor Section: Fully hermetic compressors with refrigerant gas cooled motor windings. Unit to have high and low pressure controls, crankcase heater, and internal thermal and overload protection.
ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
23 74 14 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING D.
Evaporator and Condenser Coils: Dual circuit split coils with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes. Evaporator coil to have two thermal expansion valves, one for each circuit. Coils to be factory tested to 450 psig.
E.
Condenser Fans: Vertical discharge propeller type, direct drive fan, resiliently mounted. Condenser fan motors to have internal thermal and overload protection. Provide rain shield on motor.
F.
Filters: 2 inches thick, frame type disposable filters.
G.
Solid State Control System: Energy saving electronic control system that measures the deviation between room temperature and set point and controls the supply air temperature to meet the load requirements. See Section 23 09 93, "Sequences of Operation" for unit control.
H.
Refrigerant: Ozone depletion potential of 0.05 or less.
I.
Modulating Hot-Gas Reheat: Reheat coil shall be separated from the evaporator coil by a minimum of 6 inches to prevent.
J.
Indirect Gas Furnace: Forced-draft, 4:1 turndown indirect gas furnace, 409 stainless steel heat exchanger.
PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Install unit on roof on factory curb. Install ductwork with flexible connections.
B.
Coordinate cutting of duct openings and flashing with the General Contractor.
C.
Install trapped drain line from drain pan to roof.
D.
Check and tighten bearings after forty-eight (48) hours operation.
E.
Control panel shall include a factory supplied and mounted 115 volt GFCI convience outlet receptacle with a 12 Ampere circuit breaker.
F.
Filters shall be installed prior to operating the unit fans.
G.
At final completion, replace all filters with clean, new filters, and turn one complete set of replacement filters over to the Owner. END OF SECTION
ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
23 74 14 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
23 74 16 ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
PART 1 1.01
1.02
1.03
DESCRIPTION A.
Provide packaged, DX cooling, gas heating, complete with prewired controls and pitched roof curb.
B.
This Specification is for units RTU3 through RTU6.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Standards: American Refrigeration Institute (ARI) and Underwriters' Laboratories (UL).
B.
ARI 210 and 270.
RATINGS AND CAPACITIES A.
1.04
Carrier, Lennox, McQuay, or Trane.
EXTENDED WARRANTY A.
PART 2 2.01
Refer to Drawings for dimensions, CFM, cooling MBH, HP, voltage and other electrical requirements.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A.
1.05
GENERAL
Compressors to have a five (5) year warranty.
PRODUCTS
ROOFTOP UNIT A.
Construction: Weatherproof cabinet of galvanized steel with factory baked enamel finish, filters, enthalpy economizer control, 3 inch (1/2 lb. density) fiberglass insulation, and roof mounting curb.
B.
Blower Section: Direct drive, forward curved centrifugal, statically and dynamically balanced. Blowers to have permanently lubricated ball bearings and internal vibration isolation. Blower motor to have internal thermal and overload protection.
C.
Compressor Section: Fully hermetic compressors with refrigerant gas cooled motor windings. Unit to have high and low pressure controls, crankcase heater, and internal thermal and overload protection.
ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
23 74 16 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING D.
Evaporator and Condenser Coils: Dual circuit split coils with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes. Evaporator coil to have two thermal expansion valves, one for each circuit. Coils to be factory tested to 450 psig.
E.
Condenser Fans: Vertical discharge propeller type, direct drive fan, resiliently mounted. Condenser fan motors to have internal thermal and overload protection. Provide rain shield on motor.
F.
Dry-Bulb Economizer: Mechanically linked outdoor air and return air dampers with modulating actuator controlled by a discharge air controller and dry-bulb integrated control. Outdoor air hood with rain eliminator vanes.
G.
Pressure Relief Fans: Propeller type, direct drive fans resiliently mounted. Discharge air through pressure operated backdraft damper. Fan motors to have internal thermal and overload protection.
H.
Filters: 2 inches thick, frame type disposable filters.
I.
Solid State Control System: Energy saving electronic control system that measures the deviation between room temperature and set point and controls the supply air temperature to meet the load requirements. See Section 23 09 93, "Sequences of Operation" for unit control.
J.
Refrigerant: Ozone depletion potential of 0.05 or less.
PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Install unit on roof on factory curb. Install ductwork with flexible connections. Provide pre-compressed molded fiberglass vibration isolators between the unit and roof curb, equivalent to Peabody Model KIP.
B.
Coordinate cutting of duct openings and flashing with the General Contractor.
C.
Install trapped drain line from drain pan to roof.
D.
Check and tighten bearings after forty-eight (48) hours operation.
E.
Filters shall be installed prior to operating the unit fans.
F.
At final completion, replace all filters with clean, new filters, and turn one complete set of replacement filters over to the Owner. END OF SECTION
ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
23 74 16 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
23 81 17 PACKAGED TERMINAL AIR CONDITIONER
PART 1 1.01
DESCRIPTION A.
1.02
Provide a five (5) year warranty.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A.
PART 2 2.01
Refer to the Drawings for cooling BTUH, F.L.A. and electrical requirements.
EXTENDED WARRANTY A.
1.05
Standards: Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (AHAM) and Underwriter's Laboratories (UL).
RATINGS AND CAPACITIES A.
1.04
Provide a wall air conditioning unit at location shown on the Drawing.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.03
GENERAL
Carrier, Cutler-Hammer/Eaton Corp., General Electric, or York. PRODUCTS
AIR CONDITIONING UNIT A.
General Construction: Zinc-coated steel casing with bonderized and baked-on enamel finish, factory-insulated, adjustable discharge louvers, cord and plug.
B.
Fan and Coil Construction: Non-ferrous coil construction with aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded to aluminum tubing, direct driven centrifugal evaporator fan, propeller condenser fan, three-speed motor.
C.
Filter: Reusable polyurethane.
D.
Refrigeration System: Hermetically sealed compressor, factory-lubricated and internally spring mounted. Refrigerant used shall have an ozone depletion potential of 0.05 or less.
E.
Mounting Hardware: Wall mounting kit with side wing panels.
F.
Controls: Integral thermostat and factory-wired solid-state three-speed fan controller for ventilating and cycling the compressor to maintain space conditions.
G.
Condensate removal system that prevents dripping outdoors.
H.
External condenser air louver and internal louvered access panel with return.
PACKAGED TERMINAL AIR CONDITIONER
23 81 17 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Mount air conditioning unit in location as indicated on the Drawing.
B.
Mounting brackets for exterior mounting are by the General Trades Contractor.
C.
Seal unit against mounting bracket to eliminate air and moisture leaks. END OF SECTION
PACKAGED TERMINAL AIR CONDITIONER
23 81 17 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
23 81 27 DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONER
PART 1 1.01
1.02
1.03
DESCRIPTION A.
Provide packaged ductless split system air conditioner complete with fan, filters, electronic controls, factory-furnished condensate pump, and DX coil.
B.
Provide matching air-cooled condensing unit complete with fan, coil, and compressor.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Standards: American Refrigeration Institute (ARI) and Underwriters' Laboratories (UL).
B.
The units shall be listed by Electrical Laboratories (ETL) and bear the ETL label.
C.
All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code (N.E.C.).
RATINGS AND CAPACITIES A.
1.04
Mitsubishi, Friedrich, or Sanyo.
WARRANTY A.
PART 2 2.01
See Drawings for capacity requirements.
MANUFACTURERS A.
1.05
GENERAL
Provide a one year parts and labor warranty on the entire unit commencing at Project Completion. Provide a five-year warranty parts and labor warranty for compressors, commencing at Project Completion. Warranties commencing from the date of shipment or start-up are not sufficient.
PRODUCTS
GENERAL DESCRIPTION A.
The air conditioning evaporator shall be a self-contained factory assembled unit. The system shall be designed for draw through air arrangement to insure even air distribution to the entire face area of the coil.
DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONER
23 81 27 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 2.02
STANDARD FEATURES A.
Evaporator Fan Section: The evaporator unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit shall have a self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, an auto restart function, an emergency operation function and a test run switch. Evaporator unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dry air before shipment from the factory. The evaporator fan shall be an assembly with a turbo fan direct driven by a single motor. The fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced and run on a motor with permanently lubricated bearings. The evaporator coil shall be of nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing. The tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange. All tube joints shall be brazed with phoscopper or silver alloy. The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. A condensate pan and drain shall be provided under the coil. The condensate pump shall be able to raise drain water 33 inches above the condensate pan.
B.
Condensing Unit: The compressor shall be a high efficiency scroll design and shall operate with R410a. A crankcase heater shall be factory mounted on the outside of the compressor. The condensing unit shall have an accumulator. The compressor will be equipped with an internal thermal overload. The condensing unit shall have high pressure and low pressure safety switches. The condensing unit must have the ability to operate with a maximum height difference of 50 feet and have refrigerant tubing length of 75 feet between evaporator and condensing units without the need for line size changes, traps, or additional oil. The compressor shall be mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration. The condensing unit shall be capable of operating at 0 degree F outdoor ambient temperature.
C.
Control: This unit shall have a wired controller to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. The control system shall consist of two microprocessors interconnected by a single non-polar two wire cable. Wiring shall run direct from the indoor unit to the controller with no splices. Manufacturer shall provide 2 conductor 18 gauge stranded wire for connection to remote controller. The microprocessor located in the evaporator unit shall have the capability of sensing return air temperature and indoor coil temperature, receiving and processing commands from the wired controller, providing emergency operation and controlling the outdoor unit.
D.
Condensate Pump: Provide unit mounted condensate pump, wired to, and powered from the indoor unit. If condensate pump is required to be mounted outside indoor unit, provide all power wiring for the condensate pump.
PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Install unit and piping as per manufacturer's written recommendations.
B.
Make wiring connections between remote control panel and unit mounted control devices and panel. Also make any other field wiring connection required for remote or duct mounted sensors.
DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONER
23 81 27 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING C.
01-13-2012
Make all refrigerant-piping connections, fully charge unit and complete installation in accordance with the manufacturer's written installation instructions. END OF SECTION
DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONER
23 81 27 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
23 82 39 CABINET UNIT HEATERS
PART 1 1.01
DESCRIPTION A.
1.02
Refer to the Drawings for arrangements, MBH, CFM, GPM, voltage, HP, and other design requirements.
MANUFACTURERS A.
PART 2 2.01
Standards: Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) label.
RATINGS AND CAPACITIES A.
1.04
Provide hot water cabinet unit heaters, complete with coil, filters, fans, and controls.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.03
GENERAL
Trane, Chromalox, and Markel.
PRODUCTS
CABINET UNIT HEATERS A.
General Construction: Galvanized steel wraparound chassis with full back plate and flanged edges for rigidity, complete with filter rails and disposable filters, fan board, control cabinet, room side cabinet panels of galvanized steel, insulation backing on cabinet area covering coil section, stamped integral inlet/outlet grilles, tamperproof access doors to piping, controls and unit levelers.
B.
Heating Element: 1. Electric Heating: Individual elements shall be mounted in heavy gauge steel frame and be of the tubular finned metal sheath type. Elements shall have a corrosion-resistant finish and be of the low surface temperature type. A circuit breaker shall be furnished.
C.
Fans: Forward-curved, double width aluminum centrifugal wheels, shaft-mounted to permanent split capacitor enclosed motor with built-in thermal overload protection, extended bearing oilers.
D.
Controls: Motor starters, power lead circuit breaker, speed switch unit-mounted. 1. Wall-mounted thermostat
E.
Finish: Phosphatized/bonderized, primed baked enamel finish; color to be selected by the Architect.
CABINET UNIT HEATERS
23 82 39 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Secure unit to walls and level cabinet in the horizontal and vertical planes.
B.
Install wall-mounted thermostat. END OF SECTION
CABINET UNIT HEATERS
23 82 39 - 2
26
ELECTRICAL
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 00 00 DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL INTRODUCTORY STATEMENT
PART 1 1.01
1.02
GENERAL
RELATED REQUIREMENTS A.
The requirements of Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, and Division 1 apply to all work herein.
B.
In addition to conforming to the documents listed in Paragraph 1.01 A. above, the Work performed by the Division 26 Contractor shall conform to all provisions of Sections 26 00 00 through 26 99 99 as included in this Specification. The Division 26 Contractor is to consider the word "Contractor" when used in these Sections to mean himself/herself.
C.
The Division 26 Contractor must read the Specifications of all divisions therein because they will be responsible for Work described in other Sections where reference is made to "Electrical Contractor."
D.
All work included under this heading is subject to the Bidding Requirements, General Conditions and Division 1 General Requirements written for this entire Specification, whether attached to this Part or not, and the Contractor is notified to refer thereto as an integral part of the Work.
APPLICABLE SECTIONS A.
Contractor shall perform Work described in the preceding paragraphs, the General Conditions, Division 1 and in the following Sections (as included): Electrical: Sections 26 00 00 through 26 99 99
B.
1.03
Contractor is required to coordinate his/her work with that described in other Sections, and therefore, must familiarize themselves with the entire set of Specifications.
RESPONSIBILITY A.
The Engineer's efforts under this Contract are aimed at designing a project which will be safe after full completion. The Engineer has no expertise in, and takes no responsibility for, construction means and methods or job site safety during construction, which are exclusively the Contractor's responsibility. Processing and/or approving submittals made by the Contractor which may contain information related to construction methods or safety issues, or participation in meetings where such issues might be discussed must not be construed as voluntary assumption by the Engineer of any responsibility for safety procedures. END OF SECTION
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL INTRODUCTORY STATEMENT
26 00 00 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 00 05 DIVISION 26 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 1.01
1.02
1.03
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION A.
Furnish all materials, labor, tools and equipment to complete and leave ready for operation all electrical systems as called for in these Specifications or shown on the Drawings and any and all details essential to complete the work.
B.
By submitting a bid, the Contractor certifies that: 1. He/she has visited the site and is satisfied that he/she understands all site conditions that may have an effect on his/her bid price. 2. He/she fully understands the makeup, construction, and operation of all systems and equipment he/she is bidding on, and that he/she has included in his/her price all materials, supplies, accessories, and services necessary to make these systems complete and operational.
REFERENCE A.
These General Requirements are in addition to the other requirements referenced in Section 26 00 00, "Introductory Division 26 Statement." They are not meant to replace them. In case of conflict, ask the Architect for interpretation.
B.
The Contractor is responsible for becoming thoroughly familiar with all Drawings and Specifications prior to bidding so that all conditions of work are clear with regard to electrical requirements of equipment, mounting conditions, etc. Contractor shall study reflected ceiling plans, elevations, and details, etc.
C.
The Division 26 Contractor is responsible for all electrical work noted as by his/her division, on all Drawings and Specifications in the entire construction documents package. In case of conflict, Contractor shall include greatest quantity of equipment, extent of work, and expense in his/her bid.
STANDARDS OF QUALITY A.
Provide quality work conforming to the best accepted practices and standards of the trade. Further definition of quality is given by reference to various laws, codes, standards, and regulations. Refer also to the publications of NECA (National Electrical Contractors Association).
B.
All laws and codes having jurisdiction over this project are deemed to be included in their entirety as a part of these Specifications. Also, any other laws, codes, standards, or regulations referenced herein are deemed to be included in their entirety.
DIVISION 26 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
26 00 05 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
1.04
1.05
01-13-2012
C.
If a conflict occurs between the Drawings and the Specifications, immediately call the conflict to the attention of the Architect at least ten (10) days before bids are submitted, so an addendum clarification may be issued. Conflicts not brought to the Architect's attention before bids are due, shall be priced by the Contractor to include the most expensive, highest quality and quantity of the conflicting items in question.
D.
Material and equipment installed under this Contract shall be new, undeteriorated, and of a quality not less than the minimum specified. All equipment and conductors shall be certified, listed and labeled by UL. If UL does not certify an associated piece of equipment, then certification by another nationally recognized testing laboratory such as ETL shall be permissible. If equipment or conductors are of a type that no testing lab lists or labels, then a safety evaluation must be performed at the supplier's expense by the inspecting authority or another Federal, State or municipal agency.
E.
The latest adopted editions of the following also apply to this work: 1. National Electrical Code, NEC 2. National Fire Protection Association Publications, NFPA 3. State Building Code
CONTRACT DRAWINGS A.
Drawings are schematic and show approximate locations and the extent of work. Exact locations and extent must be coordinated with other Contractors and verified in the field. Coordination of the final fabrication drawings and final coordination of the installation in the field is the Contractor's responsibility. Contractor is to take the design to the next level of detail knowing exactly what equipment and materials he/she is going to provide and build the project based on that equipment and other approved shop drawings.
B.
Significant deviations from Drawings must be approved by the Architect.
C.
The Architect reserves the right to make minor changes in location which do not require additional labor or material up to the time of roughing-in without additional cost. No cost shall be added to the Contract for a minor change. The Architect shall determine what is "SIGNIFICANT" and what is a "MINOR" change.
DEFINITIONS A.
"Provide": To furnish and install.
B.
"Concealed": Embedded in or installed behind walls, within partitions, above suspended ceilings, below grade, in trenches, in tunnels and in crawl spaces.
C.
"Exposed": Not installed underground or "concealed" as defined above.
D.
"Contractor": Means the Division 26 Contractor.
E.
"Furnish": To purchase and deliver products to the project site and make ready for installation.
DIVISION 26 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
26 00 05 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
1.06
1.07
1.08
01-13-2012
F.
"Install": To take furnished products, assemble, erect, secure, connect, and place into operation.
G.
"Products": Includes materials, systems and equipment.
H.
"Work": The providing of products for entire Contract.
PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES A.
Unless otherwise excluded in the Contract Documents, secure and pay for all permits and governmental fees, licenses, and inspections necessary for the proper execution and completion of work.
B.
Give notice and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of any public authority having jurisdiction on the performance of the work.
EXAMINATION OF SITE A.
Certain existing conditions may affect the manner or sequence of the performance of work. Review existing services and structures prior to bidding the work. Review operating schedules for existing systems and services. Coordinate the scheduling of the work with existing operations.
B.
The Contractor is required to visit the site of the proposed project. After the Contract is signed, no allowance will be made for lack of knowledge of the project conditions.
C.
Verify and reconcile work required by the Contract Documents with conditions at the site.
UTILITIES A.
Locate any existing utilities prior to construction. Advise the Architect immediately of major conflicts to permit modification of the Contract Documents.
B.
Contractor shall record exact locations of all existing overhead and underground site utilities within the project limits on a site layout plan and submit to Architect for review prior to any excavation. Where existing utilities conflict with new work, proposed modifications shall also be marked and identified on the site layout plan.
C.
Record locations of all concealed utilities on the Record Drawings.
D.
Coordinate any utility service shutdowns or outages with the Architect and the Owner. Shutdowns shall conform to all utility company requirements. Avoid inconveniencing the Owner and provide temporary service during the curtailment, as required by the Architect or the Owner. Provide ten working days advance notice for any required utility outages.
E.
At least ten (10) working days prior to construction in an area which may involve underground utility facilities, the Contractor shall notify the Project Engineer, the registered utility protection service and each underground utility company: 1. Utilities Protection Service Phone .................. 1-800-362-2764
DIVISION 26 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
26 00 05 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 1.09
ABBREVIATIONS A.
Abbreviations used in these specifications: ADA ANSI CBM EIA ETL FCC ICEA IEC IES ITL NEC NECA NEMA NESC UL
PART 2 2.01
01-13-2012
-
Americans with Disabilities Act American National Standards Institute Certified Ballast Manufacturers Electronic Industries Association Electrical Testing Laboratories Federal Communications Commission Insulated Cable Engineers Association International Electro Technical Commission Illuminating Engineering Society Independent Testing Laboratories National Electrical Code National Electrical Contractors Association National Electrical Manufacturers Association National Electrical Safety Code Underwriters Laboratories
PRODUCTS
DESIGN BASE MANUFACTURERS ("STANDARDS") A.
The Contract Documents are based on the requirements and layout of the equipment of the Design Base Manufacturer. Coordination of equipment with the building and with other trades has been made for these specific models and manufacturers of equipment. Where several manufacturers are listed, the first named is the Design Base Manufacturer, unless specifically noted otherwise. Products of the other listed manufacturers which are of comparable performance and quality to the Design Base Manufacturers may be submitted for review and approval per Section 26 00 15, "Submittals." Refer to 26 00 05, "Division 26 General Requirements," Paragraph 2.02, "Approved Equals" for products of manufacturers not listed.
B.
Prepare new layouts for all non-Design Base Manufacturers equipment and adjust and coordinate these layouts with equipment dimensions or service requirements which may be different from those of the Design Base Manufacturer. Verify that this equipment will fit and function in the indicated application. Submit these layouts as part of the submittal review.
C.
Whenever the Contractor furnishes equipment or material other than the Design Base Manufacturer specified, the Contractor is responsible for the cost and coordination of all modifications required not only for his/her work, but also for the work of all other Trades affected. Where changes to other Trades' work are required, this Contractor must include the additional costs of all such work in his/her bid and ultimately make arrangements with these other Trades for such changes and compensate them accordingly. Where changes to design are required, the Contractor shall submit such changes to the Architect for approval. The Contractor shall investigate potential conflicts such as the following: 1. Physical dimensions and weights 2. Code required working clearances
DIVISION 26 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
26 00 05 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
2.02
2.03
Connecting pipe sizes Additional control and interlock wiring Lug size and quantity Increased wire size, fuse size, and motor control equipment size Increased ventilation requirements Battery capacity Sound levels of audible devices Increased withstand and interrupting ratings of downstream equipment due to differences in overcurrent protective device characteristics
APPROVED EQUALS A.
Equal (equivalent) components (articles, devices, materials, forms of construction, fixtures, etc.) by manufacturers not listed but meeting the specifications may be submitted to the Architect for approval and subsequent inclusion into the bidding documents. Submission must be received no later than ten (10) working days before bid date. If approved, such manufacturers will be listed in an addendum.
B.
Submittals must include all of the following: 1. Cover Letter: Company letterhead; addressed to Architect. Indicate the following: a. Project name, project number, and phase or bid package if applicable b. Specification Section by number and title c. Specified Product d. Proposed Product e. Deviations, if any, from Specified Product f. List of attachments 2. Product Data: Manufacturer's literature, fully describing proposed product with exact item clearly indicated. 3. Specifications: Manufacturer's specifications with all modifications noted as required to show compliance with Bidding Documents. 4. Test Data: Where performance requirements are specified, submit laboratory tests to indicate compliance. 5. Samples: Submit appropriate samples of proposed product when required by Architect, showing color, texture, construction and other attributes necessary for evaluation.
C.
Failure to comply with and provide all of the above requirements will result in the submission not being reviewed.
QUANTITIES A.
2.04
01-13-2012
Equipment may be referred to either in these Specifications or on the Drawings, as singular or plural; Contractor is responsible for verifying the exact number of items required to complete his/her work.
ACCESS DOORS A.
Install junction boxes, remote ballasts, etc. in locations where they will be accessible. Where not possible, Division 26 Contractor shall pay General Contractor to install access doors for electrical equipment. Coordinate all access door types and locations with the Architect.
DIVISION 26 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
26 00 05 - 5
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 2.05
RECORD (AS-BUILT) DRAWINGS A.
Contractor shall maintain at the job site, one (1) copy of Drawings which shall be used exclusively for recording the location of all installed work not extraneous information such as field notes. Neatly record all information with red pen.
B.
Record deviations in locations of concealed conduit, equipment, lighting, outlets, manholes, etc., dimensioned from a fixed control point, including depth of bury, at each change of direction, at each change of slope and as required for further reference. Minor variations need not be recorded. Addendums, Change Orders, Field Work Orders, Supplemental Instructions and other pertinent changes of record shall be recorded. These changes shall be reviewed monthly for conformance.
C.
Record deviations made necessary to incorporate equipment different from the Design Base equipment.
D.
Record deviations as noted above.
E.
At completion of the project, Contractor shall deliver "As-Built" Drawings and Coordination Drawings to the Architect for review and approval with regard to completeness. This submission shall consist of the job site "As-Built" Drawings in electronic format and as PDF files. Following approval, provide a full-plotted set as well as the electronic version and original.
F.
Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements.
PART 3 3.01
3.02
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
PAINTING AND RELATED WORK A.
Finish painting in areas of new construction is the responsibility of the General Trades Contractor and is specified in Division 9.
B.
Any other painting, required by Sections in Division 26, is the responsibility of the respective Division 26 Contractor. It shall be done by a qualified tradesman skilled in the craft, and shall meet the requirements of Division 9. Each Contractor is responsible for repainting of finished areas disturbed by his/her own cutting and patching.
C.
Factory-finished equipment which has rusted or has been damaged shall be cleaned, spot primed with zinc chromate, and finished to the original quality and color by the Contractor.
D.
Support steel shall be cleaned, rust removed, primed, and painted.
CUTTING AND PATCHING A.
Unless otherwise required in General or Special Conditions, Contractor shall perform all cutting and patching required for his/her own work. Work must be accomplished in a neat and workmanlike manner, acceptable to the Architect.
DIVISION 26 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
26 00 05 - 6
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
3.03
3.04
B.
If necessary to cut into work of other Trades, it shall be done by other Trades at this Contractor's expense. Patching shall be similarly executed.
C.
Cutting of structural support beams, joists, plates, or other structural members is strictly prohibited without the specific written consent of the Architect. Use rotary drills where cutting holes through concrete, brick, plaster, or tile is necessary. Obtain approval of the Architect before proceeding with work.
D.
All cutting and patching shall be done promptly and all repairs shall be made as necessary to leave the entire work in good condition, including all cutting, fitting, and drilling of masonry, concrete, metal, wood, plaster, and other materials as specified or required for proper assembly, fabrication, installation, and completion of all work of the Contract.
E.
Patching shall match adjacent materials and shall be accomplished only by tradesmen skilled in the respective craft required. Materials and equipment used in the patching work shall comply with requirements of those Sections of the Specifications relating to material to be used in new construction.
SCAFFOLDING, RIGGING, HOISTS AND TRANSPORTATION A.
The Contractor shall provide scaffolding, staging, cribbing, tackle, hoists, and rigging necessary for placing of his/her materials and equipment in their proper places in the project.
B.
The Contractor shall pay costs for transportation of materials and equipment to the jobsite and shall include such costs in his/her proposal.
C.
Scaffolding and hoisting equipment shall comply with requirements of applicable Federal, State, and Local Laws and Codes.
CLEANING A.
3.05
01-13-2012
Upon completion of work, all material and equipment furnished in this Contract shall be thoroughly cleaned of labels, dirt, grease, rust, oil and other foreign matter. Prepare for finish painting, where painting is specified.
TESTS A.
The Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction may require portions of the work to be inspected, tested, or approved. These services shall be performed by approved agencies.
B.
The Architect (and Owner's representative) must be notified of all scheduled tests and adjustments at least 72 hours before they are scheduled so that he/she may witness same. Obtain confirmation of attendance or absence for each test. If the Contractor performs any test or adjustment without the Architect present, or without proper notification, the Contractor may be required to perform the test or adjustment a second time. All test schedules are to be coordinated with the Owner to minimize inconvenience.
C.
The Contractor shall bear all costs of such inspections, tests, or approvals.
DIVISION 26 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
26 00 05 - 7
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING D.
3.06
3.07
01-13-2012
Required certifications of inspection, testing, or approval shall be secured by the Contractor and included in the Record and Information Manuals. See Section 26 00 20, "Record and Information Manuals."
WARRANTY OF WORK A.
The Contractor shall warrant all work for a period of one (1) year from date of Contract Completion against defects in materials, equipment, and workmanship. All manufacturer warranties shall begin on date of Contract Completion also.
B.
The Contractor will be required to make all repairs or changes which, in the opinion of the Owner, are necessary as the result of defective materials, equipment, or workmanship.
C.
The Contractor shall, promptly upon receipt of notice from the Owner, and without expense to the Owner, replace all defective work with suitable materials and equipment.
D.
Failure by the Contractor to promptly respond to warranty service calls can be sufficient reason for the Owner to have the defects corrected at the expense of the Contractor.
E.
Refer to Division 1 for additional guarantee requirements.
F.
Refer to other Specification Sections for extended warranty requirements.
TEMPORARY POWER A.
Provide temporary electrical power to be used for construction purposes by all Contractors in accordance with Division 1. Provide all fixtures, wiring, and equipment, and make all connections required for temporary electrical service during the construction period; coordinate all power and lighting requirements with the various trades. Provide power to contractor job trailers, and power and lighting on the construction site. Contractor to pay for energy consumption, and any utility company charges to establish service. 1. Temporary Service Panels: Provide a minimum of one (1) 100 Ampere rated service panel in a location or locations within 200 feet of all building work areas; include as many such panels as required to meet 200 foot maximum distance. Provide all wiring and raceways required for service connection and branch circuit wiring connecting each panel to the serving utility and to the following electrical loads; obtain all permits required. 2. Lighting: Provide minimum of 5 footcandles of illumination in all building work areas where construction work is being accomplished; increase illumination to 50 footcandles for painting, plastering and other interior fine finish work. 3. Outlets: Provide duplex receptacle outlets on 100 foot centers maximum; arrange and locate so that no work area of the building is more than 100 feet from a 120 volt outlet; allow no more than five (5) outlets on any 20 Ampere circuit. 4. Power Circuit Breaker: Provide one 100 Ampere, 208 volt, 3 phase or 240 volt, 1 phase circuit breaker in each panel for power equipment. END OF SECTION
DIVISION 26 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
26 00 05 - 8
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 00 10 COORDINATION BETWEEN TRADES
PART 1 1.01
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION A.
The Division 21, 22, 23, 26, 27 and 28 Contractors shall coordinate their rough-in, service, and control requirements with each other. Division 26 Contractor shall review all control Drawings to coordinate exact number and locations of temperature control panels as well as to provide proper starters (including necessary time delays, auxiliary contacts, etc.).
B.
Division 26 Contractor shall coordinate all of his/her work with the General Trades Contractor for location of all devices, luminaires and equipment prior to rough-in.
C.
All wiring required to power Division 21, 22, 23, 27 and 28 equipment shall be installed by the Division 26 Contractor, including 120 volt to temperature control panels. All control and interlock wiring, regardless of voltage, is by the Contractor furnishing the control device. The Division 28 Contractor shall be responsible for all wiring from the fire alarm control panel.
D.
If motors and/or equipment are furnished by Division 21, 22 or 23, which require larger starters, safety switches, circuit breakers, fuses, and/or branch circuit conductors than indicated, due to a larger size than specified, the Contractor furnishing the motors shall reimburse the Division 26 Contractor for any cost differential.
E.
All electrical devices furnished as a part of Division 21, 22, 23, 27 and 28 equipment, and installation requirements of all electrical work done by Division 21, 22, 23, 27 and 28 Contractors shall conform to the applicable sections of Division 26.
F.
Division 26 Contractor shall coordinate with other Contractors prior to installation of switchboards and panelboards to insure requirements of NEC Article 110 and 408 are met. The Contractor violating this requirement shall be responsible for the cost of all modifications required to comply to the satisfaction of the inspection agency for failure to meet the above code requirements.
G.
Final operation of equipment provided under Division 21, 22, 23, 27 and 28 shall be the responsibility of the respective Division 21, 22 or 23 Contractor.
H.
Division 26 Contractor shall coordinate with Divisions 8, 11, 13, and 14 Contractors for specific requirements for door hardware, kitchen equipment, elevators, pool, and theatrical equipment. END OF SECTION
COORDINATION BETWEEN TRADES
26 00 10 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 00 15 SUBMITTALS
PART 1 1.01
1.02
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION A.
Refer to the GENERAL CONDITIONS and Division 1 for general requirements.
B.
Materials and equipment installed in this work shall meet all the requirements of the Contract Documents and no materials or equipment shall be ordered until submittals are reviewed and approved by the Architect and Engineer.
C.
Submit complete catalog data or shop drawings for each manufactured item of equipment and all components to be used in the work, including specific performance data, material description, rating, capacity, working pressure, dimensional data, material gauge or thickness, wiring diagrams, brand name, catalog number, and general type.
D.
Catalog data for equipment reviewed by the Engineer shall not take precedence over the requirements of the Contract Documents. The review of the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility for deviations from Drawings or Specifications, nor from the responsibility for providing proper clearance and coordination with other Trades.
E.
When submitted for review, all shop drawings shall bear the Contractor's signed certification that he/she has reviewed, checked, and approved the shop drawings, that they have been coordinated with the requirements of the project and with the provisions of the Contract Documents, and that he/she has verified all field measurements and construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data. Annotations shall be in red ink.
F.
Each required Specification Section submittal shall be complete with all required information included in one PDF file. External web links are not permitted. Include a transmittal cover page indicating Specification Section name and number.
G.
Submittals shall be sent to [email protected].
CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A.
Complete review of shop drawings, product data, and samples prior to submission.
B.
Determine and verify: 1. Field Measurements 2. Field Construction Criteria 3. Catalog Numbers and Similar Data 4. Conformance with Specifications
C.
Coordinate each submittal with requirements of the work and the Contract Documents.
D.
Include a letter in the front of the submittal of any deviations in the submittals from the requirements of the Contract Documents.
SUBMITTALS
26 00 15 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
1.03
E.
Make submittals and resubmittals, if necessary, promptly in accordance with the approved schedule and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the work or in the work of any other Contractor, or the project as a whole.
F.
Make any corrections or changes in rejected submittals as required by the Architect and resubmit until approved.
G.
Begin no fabrication or work which requires submittals until approved submittals are returned.
INCORPORATION OF SUBMITTALS INTO RECORD AND INFORMATION MANUALS A.
1.04
Refer to Section 26 00 20, "Record and Information Manuals."
CERTIFICATIONS A.
1.05
01-13-2012
Provide: 1. Test Agency results verifying capacities, operating conditions and power requirements at design conditions 2. Manufacturer's Statement of Compliance with Standards discussed in individual Specification Sections 3. Equipment labels indicating Certification requirements 4. Quality standard designations on each unit piece 5. Typed verification that noted mixes, chemical compositions, and testing procedures were complied with 6. Other Certifications listed in other Sections of the Specifications
REQUIRED SUBMITTAL INFORMATION A.
Submittal Transmittal 1. Provide the following information on the Transmittal Form for each submittal: a. Project name and address. b. Specification number, as listed for each submittal item required in Paragraph 1.05C below. c. Item description, as listed for each submittal item required in Paragraph 1.05C below. Where equipment is identified by number or tag on the documents, same shall be indicated on the submittal. d. Specification number and item description (b and c, above) for each submittal if more than one submittal is sent under one transmittal form. e. Name, address and telephone number of Contractor. f. Bid package number (if applicable). 2. Submittal Transmittal Forms not properly identified with the above information will be returned (without review) to the Contractor.
B.
Refer to the following letter key: KEY FOR REQUIRED SUBMITTALS: A. Shop Drawings and/or Layout Drawings B. Product Data Sheets C. Color Samples
SUBMITTALS
26 00 15 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING D. E. F. G. H. I. J. C.
Product Samples Typed Statement Typed Verification of Compliance with Certification Requirements Motor Efficiencies and Power Factor Wiring Diagrams Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Instructions Reports or Test results
Submit information on equipment items as listed below.
SECTION #
CONTRACT ITEM
26 00 20 26 00 75 26 06 10 26 08 40 26 09 23 26 09 26 26 22 13 26 24 20 26 24 22
RECORD AND INFORMATION MANUALS ACCESS PANELS CABLE TRAY ELECTRICAL TESTS, ADJUSTMENTS, INSPECTIONS ELECTRICAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS PANELBOARDS DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS-CIRCUIT BREAKER TYPE DISTRIBUTION METER CENTER WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES FUSES SAFETY SWITCHES ELEVATOR SAFETY SWITCHES CIRCUIT BREAKERS MOTOR CONTROLLERS EMERGENCY GENERATOR AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION LUMINAIRES, LAMPS AND BALLASTS FIRE ALARM SYSTEM CABLE TRAY CABLE TV DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM RESIDENCE CALL INTERCOM SYSTEM AREA OF RESCUE ASSISTANCE INTERCOM
26 27 14 26 27 26 26 28 13 26 28 16 26 28 17 26 28 19 26 29 13 26 32 10 26 36 23 26 41 13 26 43 13 26 51 13 26 81 10 27 05 27 27 15 43 27 51 23 28 26 30 D.
01-13-2012
SUBMITTALS REQUIRED A, B, E, F, H, I B B J B, H, I A, B, H, I B, I B, I B B B B B, I B, H B, I B, H, I A, B, H, I A, B, H, I A, B, H, I B, I B A, B, H, I A, B A, B, H, I
After approval, one (1) copy shall be returned to the Contractor. Contractor shall make prints of the approved transparencies and reproductions of all other shop drawing information as necessary for his/her use and for inclusion in the Record and Information Manuals. END OF SECTION
SUBMITTALS
26 00 15 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 00 20 RECORD AND INFORMATION MANUALS
PART 1 1.01
REFERENCE A.
1.02
Refer to Division 1 for general requirements and for specific information regarding Record (As-Built) Drawings and quantity required.
SUBMITTALS A.
Submit one (1) copy of draft manual to the Architect for review and approval thirty (30) days before final inspection is due.
B.
After approval, submit three (3) approved manuals to the Owner and obtain receipt. (See Section 26 00 99, "Requirements for Contract Completion.")
PART 2 2.01
GENERAL
PRODUCTS
MANUALS A.
Manuals shall be loose leaf, three-ring, hard-cover binders. Material shall be typewritten or printed and be fully legible. Each section shall be divided by labeled tabs.
B.
The following items, together with any other necessary pertinent data, shall be included in each Manual: 1. Each manual shall be labeled on front cover with project name, Contract, Contractor's name, Architect, Engineer, and date of project completion. 2. Manufacturers' names, nearest Factory Representative, and model and serial numbers of components of systems 3. Operating instructions, start-up and shutdown procedures 4. Maintenance instructions 5a. Routine and 24 hour emergency service/repair information: a. Name, address and telephone number of servicing agency b. Names of personnel to be contacted for service arrangements 5. Parts list with numbers of replaceable items, including sources of supply 6. Manufacturers' literature describing each piece of equipment 7. One (1) approved copy of each submittal 8. Written warranties 9. Certificate of Material Receipt and Certificate of System Completion 10. One (1) typewritten directory for each panelboard as installed 11. Record (As-Built) Drawings 12. Certificate of Final Inspection signed by Building Authority having jurisdiction 13. Test results 14. Video recordings of all equipment demonstrations and training sessions END OF SECTION
RECORD AND INFORMATION MANUALS
26 00 20 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 00 25 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL AND PROTECTION OF UTILITIES
PART 1 1.01
1.02
DESCRIPTION A.
Provide all protection, removal, and relocation of existing utilities and all excavation and backfilling (including concrete), associated with the work of this Division.
B.
Locate all existing utilities and equipment, in all areas of work, and record the actual locations. Take extreme care during excavations to avoid interruption of utilities. Relocate new work, as directed by the Architect or Engineer, if required to coordinate new work with existing conditions. If incorrectly charted or uncharted utilities are encountered, notify the Architect immediately.
C.
Disconnect all utilities designated for removal or relocation.
D.
Cooperate with other Contractors and Utility Companies to protect existing utilities and avoid disruption of service. Repair damaged utilities to the satisfaction of the Architect and the Utility Companies.
E.
Restore or repair to its existing condition all lawns, planting areas, curbs, paving, streets, and walks damaged by the work of this Division.
F.
Coordinate the timing of excavation and backfilling with the work of other Contractors and the requirements of the Architect.
G.
In general, conform to the requirements of Division 2, except as specifically modified in this Section.
H.
Refer to boring tests and other subsurface records for rock strata that will be encountered in excavation and include sufficient costs in bid for their removal.
EXCAVATION SAFETY A.
1.03
GENERAL
It is solely the Contractor's responsibility to comply with all governing codes and ordinances regarding safety of open excavations. This includes the use of all sheet piling, bracing, shoring, sheathing, warning lights, barricades, etc. that may be required. Such material will remain the Contractor's property upon completion of the work.
SUBMITTALS A.
For Review: 1. Site layout plan sheet with recorded location of all existing utilities and equipment. Submit for review prior to starting any excavation work.
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL AND PROTECTION OF UTILITIES
26 00 25 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING PART 2 2.01
2.02
PRODUCTS
BACKFILL A.
Type A Materials: 1. Crushed Stone: 3/8 inch size 2. Pea Gravel: 1/4 inch minimum, 5/8 inch maximum 3. Sand: Clean, dry, coarse or medium size 4. Washed Gravel: 3/4 inch normal size
B.
Type B Materials: (Backfill may not contain large rocks (over 2 inches), building materials, masonry debris, cinders, rubbish, wood, or other material subject to decay or prone to damaged buried portions of the work.) 1. Excavated Material (or other clean soil): As permitted in Division 2.
UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE A.
PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
Tape shall be a 6 inch wide polyethylene material which resists acid, alkalis and other soil substances. Black printing shall identify buried service. Background color shall be as recommended by the American Public Works Association (APWA). Brady or equal.
EXECUTION
EXCAVATION A.
Excavate as shown on the Drawings removing all material encountered.
B.
Excavations are to be open cuts from the surface. Undercuts are prohibited, except where specifically permitted by the Architect. Hold trench width to a minimum, with banks as nearly vertical as possible.
C.
Maintain 5 feet clear between trench and parallel building footing, unless specifically approved by the Architect. When parallel trenches are required to be deeper than footing, maintain a clear distance at least 1 1/2 times the vertical distance below the bottom of the footing, or 5 feet, whichever is greater.
D.
Where bedding or concrete encasement is required by Section 26 05 43, "Underground Raceways," extend mechanical excavation as required to accommodate bed.
E.
Where bedding or concrete encasement is not required, extend mechanical excavation only to within 4 inches of bottom of trench depth, and excavate remainder by hand, so that final support is by undisturbed soil. Shoring from bottom of excavated trench is prohibited.
F.
Keep excavation free of standing water by drainage or by pumping where necessary.
G.
Keep excavations free of frost by covering or heating or both.
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL AND PROTECTION OF UTILITIES
26 00 25 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 3.02
3.03
01-13-2012
BACKFILL A.
Backfill shall be as follows: 1. For excavations through lawn areas: Type B. 2. For excavations through roadways, parking areas, sidewalks, plazas, etc.: Type A.
B.
Where unstable or wet soil in trench bottom requires over excavation to firm soil, and in areas of accidental undercutting, backfill to planned bottom elevation with crushed stone, tamped firmly in place.
C.
Backfill only when exact locations of lines and equipment have been recorded and all tests and inspections have been completed.
D.
Do not use fill in a frozen condition or place fill on frozen ground.
E.
Install a continuous warning tape with printing identifying buried service, 12 inches below finished grade, during backfilling operation.
F.
Refer to Section 26 05 43, "Underground Raceways" for concrete encasement requirements. Do not backfill above concrete until concrete has had sufficient setting time (one day minimum).
G.
Remainder of backfill shall be per the requirements of Division 2.
H.
Install backfill in 8 inch lifts and compact to 98%.
I.
Fill any settled areas at completion of project.
SPOILS A.
Stockpile excavated material onsite in accordance with Owner's direction. END OF SECTION
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL AND PROTECTION OF UTILITIES
26 00 25 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 00 30 CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS, SUPPORTS AND ENVELOPES
PART 1 1.01
DESCRIPTION A.
1.02
A.
For Review: 1. Concrete compression testing reports
B.
To be included in Record and Information Manuals: 1. One (1) copy of each approved submittal
PRODUCTS
CONCRETE A.
PART 3 3.01
Refer to Section 03 30 00, "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
SUBMITTALS
PART 2 2.01
Provide all concrete work needed for this Division as shown on the Drawings and herein specified. All concrete work incidental to the work of Division 26 is the responsibility of the Division 26 Contractor. Conform to the quality standards in Division 3. Such concrete includes, but is not limited to: 1. Encasement of underground raceways, as specified in Section 26 05 43, "Underground Raceways."
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.03
GENERAL
Refer to Section 03 30 00, "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
EXECUTION
APPLICATION A.
Provide concrete pads of sufficient size and thickness in accordance with manufacturer of equipment. Details shown on the Drawings shall be considered a minimum requirement.
B.
Coordinate concrete pad requirements with provider of equipment.
C.
Provide minimum 2 inch concrete collar (framed using 2 inches x 4 inches nominal lumber) around all conduit and sleeve penetrations through floors.
CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS, SUPPORTS AND ENVELOPES
26 00 30 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 3.02
01-13-2012
INSTALLATION A.
Refer to Section 03 30 00, "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
B.
Provide concrete compression testing for foundations and exterior equipment pads.
C.
Do not mount equipment on concrete supports until concrete has had sufficient setting time (seven days minimum). END OF SECTION
CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS, SUPPORTS AND ENVELOPES
26 00 30 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 00 55 SLEEVES, SEALS, AND FIRESTOPS
PART 1 1.01
1.02
1.03
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION A.
Furnish and install sleeves for conduit penetrations through masonry and concrete construction or where conduit passes through walls exposed and through smoke or fire rated separations.
B.
Provide watertight, corrosive service, oil resistant service and fire rated seals and firestopping as specified herein.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Firestopping materials shall be classified by UL as "fill, void or cavity materials" and "through penetration firestop systems."
B.
Firestopping materials shall conform to both Flame (F) and Temperature (T) ratings as tested by nationally accepted test agencies per ASTM E-814 or UL 1479 Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. 1. The F rating shall be a minimum of one (1) hour, but not less than the fire resistance rating of the assembly being penetrated. 2. Conduct the fire test with a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01 inches of water column.
C.
Firestopping equipment used shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer's written installation instructions.
D.
Firestopping materials shall be expanded to fill cavities or provide adhesion to substrates that will maintain seal under normal expected movements of substrates.
SUBMITTALS A.
For Review: 1. Manufacturer's product data sheets indicating product characteristics, performance and limiting criteria 2. Manufacturer's installation instruction for each type of seal or firestop required by the project 3. Written certification that firestopping systems meet firestopping requirements specified herein
B.
To be included in Record and Information Manuals: 1. One (1) copy of each approved submittal
SLEEVES, SEALS, AND FIRESTOPS
26 00 55 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 1.04
MANUFACTURERS A.
Seals 1. Link-Seal by Thunderline Corporation 2. CSD Sealing Systems 3. O-Z/Gedney Inc.
B.
Firestopping Materials 1. Hilti 2. Tremco Sealants & Coatings 3. 3M Fire Protection Products 4. Dow Corning 5. CSD Sealing Systems
PART 2 2.01
2.02
2.03
01-13-2012
PRODUCTS
SLEEVES A.
Sleeve material through floors and walls shall be machine cut rigid galvanized steel conduit.
B.
Sleeves installed in new construction shall have welded flange at mid-point of sleeve which functions as a water barrier and anchor collar.
C.
At the Contractor's option, steel wall sleeves by Link-Seal may be provided.
SEALS A.
Modular Mechanical Type 1. Seals shall consist of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between conduit and sleeve. 2. Seal assembly shall have steel bolts and nuts and rubber sealing element for service and environment under which assembly will be used. Seal shall have a pressure resistance rating of 20 psig.
B.
Sealing Plug Type 1. Seals shall consist of two (2) identical piece plugs made of synthetic rubber with one edge flanged, serrated profile on the outside and a series of ridges on the inside which compress and assures a tight seal. Seal shall have a pressure resistance of 15 psig at the plug base and 30 psig at the flange. Rubber grade shall be suitable for the service and environment under which sealing plug will be used.
WATERTIGHT SEALS A.
Modular mechanical type watertight seals shall have zinc galvanized bolts and nuts with EPDM rubber sealing element. Seals shall be Link-Seal, Type C.
B.
Sealing plug type watertight seals shall be made of EPDM rubber. Seals shall be by CSD Sealing Systems.
SLEEVES, SEALS, AND FIRESTOPS
26 00 55 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 2.04
2.05
FIRE RATED SEALS A.
Modular mechanical type fire rated seals shall have zinc galvanized bolts and nuts with silicone rubber sealing element which provides a three hour fire resistance rating.
B.
Sealing plug type fire rated seals shall be made of FRR rubber for three hour fire resistance rating.
FIRESTOP MATERIALS A.
Use only firestop products that have been UL 1479, ASTM E-814 tested for specific fire rated construction conditions conforming to construction assembly type, penetrating item type, annular space requirements, and fire-rating involved for each separate instance.
B.
Cast-in-place firestop devices are installed prior to concrete placement for use with noncombustible and combustible plastic pipe (closed and open piping systems), or electrical cable bundles, penetrating concrete floors.
C.
Sealants, foams or caulking materials for use with non-combustible items including rigid steel conduit and electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
D.
Intumescent sealants, caulking materials for use with combustible items (penetrants consumed by high heat and flame) including PVC jacketed, flexible cable or cable bundles and plastic pipe.
E.
Foams, intumescent sealants, caulking or putty materials for use with flexible cable or cable bundles.
F.
Non curing, re-penetrable intumescent sealants, caulking or putty materials for use with flexible cable or cable bundles.
G.
Wall opening protective materials for use with UL listed metallic and specified nonmetallic outlet boxes.
H.
Non curing, re-penetrable materials shall be used for large size/complex penetrations made to accommodate cable trays, multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical busways in raceways.
I.
Provide a firestop system with a "F" Rating as determined by UL 1479 or ASTM E814 which is equal to the time rating of construction being penetrated.
PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
APPLICATION A.
Provide sleeves for all conduit penetrations through walls, and through floors where above ground level. Sleeves are not necessary for slab-on-grade penetrations. (Refer to 26 00 30, Concrete Foundations, Supports, and Envelopes, for concrete collar requirements.)
SLEEVES, SEALS, AND FIRESTOPS
26 00 55 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING B.
3.02
3.03
01-13-2012
Provide one (1) spare sleeve of equal size in any floor or wall area where more than three (3) conduits penetrate floor or wall.
INSTALLATION A.
Sleeves 1. Carefully coordinate and check locations of sleeves immediately before and after each concrete pour and masonry installation. 2. Give the General Trades Contractor locations and sizes of all openings required for the installation of sleeves before construction of masonry or concrete walls is started. If it becomes necessary to cut into new work because of the failure of this Contractor to notify the General Trades Contractor, then the General Trades Contractor shall do any necessary cutting and patching required at this Contractor's expense. 3. Cut sleeves through walls flush with each surface. Unused sleeves shall extend beyond wall surface and be provided with caps. 4. Cut sleeves 3 1/2 inches above finished floors. Joint between sleeve and floor shall be caulked to be watertight. Bottom of sleeve to be cut flush. 5. Core drill holes for sleeves in existing construction. 6. Patching shall be by the General Trades Contractor at this Contractor's expense.
B.
Seals and Firestops 1. Clean surfaces and substrates of dirt, oil, loose materials and other foreign materials which may affect the proper bond or installation of seals and firestops. 2. Do not apply seals and firestops to surfaces previously painted or treated with a sealer curing compound or similar product. Remove coatings as required in compliance with Manufacturer's instructions. Provide primers, as required, which conform to Manufacturer's recommendations for various substrates and conditions. 3. Follow Manufacturer's written instructions for installation of seals and firestops. 4. Install firestops with sufficient pressure to fill seal holes, voids and openings to ensure an effective smoke seal and to maintain the fire resistance rating of the assembly. 5. Tool or trowel exposed surfaces. Remove excess firestop material promptly as work progresses and upon completion. 6. Unused sleeves shall be filled with and surrounded by firestop material. Sleeve ends shall be capped. Blind sealing plugs may be used at Contractor's option. 7. Install watertight seals for all below grade penetrations of conduit into the building.
INSPECTION A.
Examine seals and firestops to ensure proper installation and full compliance with this Specification. Work shall be accessible until inspection and approval by the applicable code authorities.
B.
Correct unacceptable seals and firestops and provide additional inspection to verify compliance with this specification at no additional cost. END OF SECTION
SLEEVES, SEALS, AND FIRESTOPS
26 00 55 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 00 75 ACCESS PANELS
PART 1 1.01
DESCRIPTION A.
1.02
1.04
Access panels are to be turned over to the General Trades Contractor for installation.
COORDINATION A.
This Contractor is responsible for providing the dimension and locations of all ceiling, wall, and floor openings for the access panels to the General Trades Contractor.
B.
Coordinate with other Contractors with respect to panel locations and group junction boxes, etc., in such a way as to be accessible from a single panel.
MANUFACTURERS A.
PART 2 2.01
Furnish ceiling and wall access panels as necessary for access to pull boxes, junction boxes, remote ballasts, electrical equipment, etc., requiring service, adjustment or maintenance.
WORK NOT INCLUDED A.
1.03
GENERAL
Acceptable manufacturers include, but are not limited to: Milcor, Bilco, Zurn, Larsen's, Acudor, JL, Inland Ryerson, Nystrom, Mitco or Karp.
PRODUCTS
CEILING ACCESS PANELS A.
Drywall Ceilings: 24" x 24", Milcor Style DW, 16 gauge steel frame with 14 gauge door panel, double acting concealed spring hinges, cylinder lock, prime painted for finish painting with ceiling.
B.
Fire Rated Ceiling: 24" x 24", Milcor fire rated access door, UL approved, 16 gauge steel frame with 18 gauge recessed door panel, 20 gauge panel sides and 26 gauge panel hat channel, continuous hinge, self-latching cylinder lock, prime painted for finish painting.
C.
Plaster Ceilings: 24" x 24", Milcor Style AP with finish material same as ceiling material or Style K, 16 gauge galvanized steel frame with 18 gauge galvanized steel door panel. 24" x 24" and larger panels shall be reinforced, continuous hinge, cylinder lock, prime painting for finish painting to match ceiling.
D.
Acoustical Concealed Spline Ceilings: 24" x 24", Milcor Style AT, 16 gauge steel frame with an 18 gauge steel recessed door panel. 24" x 24" and larger panels shall be reinforced, continuous hinge, cylinder lock, prime painted for finish painting.
ACCESS PANELS
26 00 75 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 2.02
WALL ACCESS PANELS A.
Drywall: 24" x 24", Milcor Style DW, 16 gauge steel frame with 14 gauge door panel, double acting concealed spring hinges, cylinder lock, prime painted for finish painting with wall.
B.
Masonry and Tile: 24" x 24", Milcor Style M Standard, 14 gauge steel frame and door panel, concealed spring hinges, cylinder lock, prime painted for finish painting with wall or Style M stainless.
C.
Fire Rated: 24" x 24", Milcor fire rated access door, UL approved, 1 1/2 hour, Class B rating, 16 gauge steel frame, 20 gauge insulated door panel continuous hinge, automatic door closer, cylinder lock, interior release mechanism, prime painted for finish painting with wall.
D.
Plaster: 24" x 24", Milcor Style K, 16 gauge steel frame with 14 gauge door panel and 22 gauge galvanized casing beads, concealed spring hinges, cylinder lock, prime painted for finish painting with wall.
PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
COORDINATION OF INSTALLATION A.
Coordinate size, location and installation of panels required to permit convenient access to electrical equipment requiring adjustment, service or maintenance. Mark locations of access panels on Record Drawings. END OF SECTION
ACCESS PANELS
26 00 75 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 00 99 REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTRACT COMPLETION
PART 1 1.01
1.02
DESCRIPTION A.
The following material must be submitted prior to Contract Completion: 1. Spare parts 2. Record and Information Manuals 3. Accessories and miscellaneous equipment 4. Keys for equipment
B.
Contractor shall use only the attached forms for Material Receipt and System Completion.
SUBMITTALS A.
PART 2 2.01
PART 3
PRODUCTS
Furnish spare parts and devices as required by Division 26 Specifications.
EXECUTION
SPARE PARTS AND KEYS A.
3.02
To be included in Record and Information Manuals: 1. Certificate of Material Receipt for all required spare parts 2. Certificate of System Completion for each system when required by individual Division 26 Specifications
SPARE PARTS A.
3.01
GENERAL
Deliver spare parts and keys to Owner's Representative. Obtain a signed copy of the Certificate of Material Receipt (ATTACHED TO THE END OF THIS SPECIFICATION SECTION).
MANUFACTURER'S INSPECTION A.
Arrange for inspection and approval by Equipment Manufacturer where required by Division 26 Specifications. Provide Manufacturer Representative's signature on the Certificate of System Completion (ATTACHED TO THE END OF THIS SPECIFICATION SECTION).
REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTRACT COMPLETION
26 00 99 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 3.03
OPERATIONAL TEST A.
3.04
01-13-2012
At completion, Contractor shall operate the systems for a period of at least seven (7) days, to demonstrate fulfillment of the requirements of the Contract. During this time, adjust equipment so that it will perform as the Manufacturer intended, and so that systems will function as designed. Contractor shall sign the Certificate of System Completion (ATTACHED TO THE END OF THIS SECTION).
EQUIPMENT DEMONSTRATION A.
After all system operational tests have been completed, schedule an instruction period with the Owner. Instruct designated personnel in the operation and maintenance of all systems and equipment. Use manuals to familiarize Owner with equipment and procedures. Allow time as necessary for this instruction. Schedule a time convenient for the Owner and the Architect. All training sessions shall be videotaped for the Owners use in instructing future employees. Instruction shall include: 1. Location of all components of the system and explanation of their function 2. Programming procedures for computer-based equipment 3. Maintenance and repair procedures 4. Review of documents in Record and Information Manuals At the completion of instruction, have all attendees sign the Certificate of System Completion. END OF SECTION
REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTRACT COMPLETION
26 00 99 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
CERTIFICATE OF MATERIAL RECEIPT
PROJECT NAME: DATE: CONTRACTOR: CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE: On the above listed date, the following pieces of equipment, as required by Division 26 Specifications, were delivered to the Owner's Representative: Equipment
Quantity
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. (Attach a separate page for additional items) Owner's Representative: ______________________________________ (PRINT) ______________________________________ (SIGN)
REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTRACT COMPLETION
26 00 99 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
CERTIFICATE OF SYSTEM COMPLETION PROJECT NAME: CONTRACTOR: SYSTEM: SPECIFICATION SECTION NUMBER: A.
MANUFACTURER'S INSPECTION AND APPROVAL (If required by Specification Section) The above listed system has been inspected and approved as meeting the Manufacturer's written instructions for installation and operation. Manufacturer's Representative: ______________________ Date: _____________________
B.
TESTING The above listed system has passed all testing required by Division 26 Specifications and has met the terms of the Contract. Written test results are attached. Contractor's Representative: ________________________ Date:______________________
C.
EQUIPMENT DEMONSTRATION The above listed system has been demonstrated to the following Owner's Representatives: NAME
TITLE
DATE
SIGNATURE
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. (ATTACH A SEPARATE PAGE FOR ADDITIONAL NAMES)
REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTRACT COMPLETION
26 00 99 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 05 10 WIRE AND CABLE
PART 1 1.01
1.02
DESCRIPTION A.
Furnish and install all electrical conductors for service entrance, feeder and branch circuit wiring and control wiring.
B.
Refer to other Division 26 Specification Sections for additional wiring requirements.
C.
Insulation shall be low smoke producing, zero halogen type.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Wire and cable furnished shall be in accordance with the following standards where applicable: 1. UL Standard 44 for rubber insulated wires and cables 2. UL Standard 83 for thermoplastic insulated wires and cables 3. UL Standard 817 for flexible cords and cables
B.
Wire and cable shall be in accordance with applicable NEC Articles.
C.
Wire and cable shall be identified by surface markings indicating manufacturer, size, metal type, voltage rating, UL listing and cable type.
PART 2 2.01
2.02
GENERAL
PRODUCTS
TYPE "THHN/THWN" WIRING A.
Wire shall be single conductor annealed uncoated copper with PVC insulation and nylon jacket. Insulation shall be heat and moisture resistant with light stabilized jacket. Wire shall be rated 600 volt, 90 degree C in dry locations, 75 degree C in wet locations.
B.
Conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller may be solid; No. 8 AWG and larger shall be stranded. Where stranded conductors of sizes 12 and 10 are used, appropriate crimp terminations shall be provided on the ends of each conductor for making connections to wiring devices, switches, etc.
TYPE "XHHW" WIRING A.
Wire shall be single conductor annealed uncoated copper with heat and moisture resistant thermosetting cross-linked polyethylene insulation. Wire shall be rated 600 volt, 90 degree C in dry locations, 75 degree C in wet locations.
WIRE AND CABLE
26 05 10 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 2.03
2.04
SPLICES A.
Splices in No. 10 AWG and smaller wire shall be made with insulated connectors with metallic coil springs and contoured wings such as 3M "Scotchlok," Ideal Company "Wing Nut," Thomas & Betts Company "Piggy" connectors, or with mechanically-crimped sleeves as manufactured by T & B or Ideal Company, which shall be insulated with pressure sensitive vinyl plastic electrical tape equal to Scotch No. "33" or No. "88."
B.
All taps, terminations or splices, size No. 8 and larger shall be made with bolted-type pressure or compression connectors. Connectors shall be compatible with the conductor material. Insulate connectors with electrical tape to 150% of the insulating value of the conductor insulation. The tape shall have insulating properties equivalent to the conductor.
C.
All splices located in manholes, handholes and exterior junction boxes shall be made with waterproof splice kits.
TYPE "XHHW-2" WIRING A.
PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
Wire shall be single conductor, uncoated aluminum with XLPE insulation and compressed compacted stranded conductor. Aluminum shall be Alcan Stabiloy AA-8030 alloy, or equal by Southwire.
EXECUTION
APPLICATION A.
Service entrance conductors for underground installations in raceways shall be Type "XHHW."
B.
All branch circuits, feeders and control wiring shall be Type "THHN/THWN."
C.
Unless otherwise noted, minimum wire size for power branch circuits shall be No. 12 AWG and for control and auxiliary systems No. 14 AWG. Wire size for branch circuit homeruns shall be as indicated in the panelboard schedules. Remainder of branch circuit shall be No. 12 AWG, unless noted otherwise.
D.
Where shown on the Drawings, conductors may be aluminum XHHW-2 wiring. Terminations on both ends shall be made with aluminum alloy, long barrel, one or two holes, high compression crimp lug connectors on cleaned ends protected with anticorrosion joint compound. Cable ampacity and conduit size shall be in accordance with National Electric Code tables. All switchboards, panelboards, safety switches, transformers, etc. shall come factory prepared with appropriate bus terminators to accept high compression crimp lug connectors. Equipment shall have sufficient wire bending space.
WIRE AND CABLE
26 05 10 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 3.02
01-13-2012
INSTALLATION A.
Install electrical cables, wires and connectors as indicated, in compliance with Manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA'S "Standard Installation," and in accordance with recognized industry practices.
B.
Coordinate cable and wire installation work with electrical raceway and equipment installation work, as necessary for proper interface.
C.
No wire may be pulled until masonry and concrete is in place. Free ends and loops at boxes and enclosures are to be pushed back in box and protected by blank covers or other means until the interior painting and decorating work is completed.
D.
Leave at least 6 inches of free conductor at all outlets except where conductors are intended to loop without joints through outlets for luminaires or wiring devices hookups.
E.
Wire color and code shall be used as follows:
Phase A Phase B Phase C Neutral Ground Isolated Ground
120/208 Volt
277/480 Volt
Black Red Blue White Green Green w/White Stripe
Brown Orange Yellow Gray Green
Emergency: Same as normal, but with 1/2 inch red tape wrapped twice around wire at maximum 12 inch intervals at access points. F.
All circuits shall have separate neutral conductors run for each phase conductor.
G.
Number of branch circuit conductors in a conduit including switch legs and neutral conductors shall not exceed nine (9) conductors. Conductors shall be derated in accordance with NEC Article 310 when more than three (3) current carrying conductors are installed in a raceway.
H.
Branch circuits shall be connected as numbered on the Drawings. Test and permanently tag by circuit number each circuit wire, except neutrals in panelboard gutter before connecting to panelboard. Numbered adhesive tapes may be used at Contractor's option.
I.
Where a feeder or branch circuit exceeds the terminating lug size, the Contractor shall use an appropriate adapter fitting to reduce cable size. Cutting of conductor strands is not permitted.
J.
Emergency circuit wiring and ground fault circuit breaker wiring shall be installed in separate conduits from all other wiring.
K.
Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable or rope and lubricant which will not damage raceway or deteriorate insulation.
WIRE AND CABLE
26 05 10 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
3.03
L.
Branch circuit conductor splices shall be kept to a minimum. Feeder conductors shall have no splices.
M.
Any equipment having multiple power connections shall have a warning label attached to each source where it connects to the equipment.
N.
Subsequent to wire and cable hookups, energize circuitry and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements.
O.
Division 26 Contractor shall provide cords and plugs for equipment furnished by General Trades Contractor which is intended or shown for connection to a receptacle but not furnished with the equipment.
CONDUCTOR SIZING A.
Branch circuit conduit routing is not shown on the plans and is left to the discretion of the Contractor. Wire size shall be as follows, unless specifically noted on plans: Conductor Size #12 AWG #10 AWG #8 AWG #6 AWG
B. 3.04
01-13-2012
Maximum Length 100 feet 150 feet 250 feet 400 feet
Wire size for under floor ducts shall be #8 AWG (minimum).
TESTING A.
Refer to Section 26 08 40, "Electrical Tests, Adjustments, Inspection."
B.
Prior to energization, test cable and wire for continuity of circuitry and for short circuits. END OF SECTION
WIRE AND CABLE
26 05 10 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 05 26 GROUNDING
PART 1 1.01
1.02
DESCRIPTION A.
Furnish and install a complete grounding system as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Provide all accessories as necessary for a complete system.
B.
All components of the electrical system shall be grounded and bonded including: raceways, enclosures, receptacles, motors, controllers, panelboards, contactors, luminaires, emergency generators, transfer switches, telephone systems, and all other electrical components and subsystems.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.03
1.04
All equipment shall be UL listed and labeled and in accordance with applicable NEMA and ANSI Standards and NEC Article 250.
SUBMITTALS A.
For Review: 1. Product data sheets of all components 2. Ground resistance testing results (refer to Section 26 08 40, "Electrical Tests, Adjustments, Inspection")
B.
To be included in Record and Information Manuals: 1. One (1) copy of each approved submittal
MANUFACTURERS A.
Exothermic Weld 1. Cadweld by ERICO Products, Inc.
B.
Low Resistivity Backfill 1. TerraFill by ALLTEC Corporation 2. GEM by ERICO Products, Inc. 3. Power Fill by LORESCO International, Inc.
PART 2 2.01
GENERAL
PRODUCTS
DRIVEN GROUND ROD A.
Ground rod shall be copper-clad steel, 3/4 inch minimum diameter, 10 foot length.
GROUNDING
26 05 26 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 2.02
CONDUCTORS, CLAMPS AND CONNECTORS A.
2.03
Exothermic welds shall be powdered copper oxide and aluminum to form a molded homogeneous copper joint connection between the copper conductor and the material being bonded to.
SINGLE POINT GROUND BUS BAR A.
PART 3 3.01
Refer to Section 26 05 10, "Wire and Cable."
EXOTHERMIC WELD A.
2.04
01-13-2012
Bus bar shall be minimum size 1/4" x 2" x 24" flat copper, wall mounted on standoff insulators.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
System Grounding Connections 1. The service entrance conductors shall be grounded in accordance with NEC Article 250.24. The grounding electrode conductor shall be connected to the grounded service conductors at the terminal or bus at the main service disconnecting means. A grounding connection shall not be made to any grounded circuit conductor on the load side of the service disconnecting means. 2. A separately derived alternating current system, such as a 480 volt delta to a 208/120 volt wye transformer, or any emergency generator, shall be grounded and bonded as required in NEC Article 250.30.
B.
Enclosure and Equipment Grounding 1. Metal enclosures or raceways for conductors or equipment shall be grounded. 2. Exposed noncurrent-carrying metal parts of fixed equipment likely to become energized shall be grounded. 3. Exposed noncurrent-carrying metal parts of switchboard frames and structures, motor frames, enclosures for motor controllers, and luminaires shall be grounded.
C.
Method of Grounding 1. Equipment grounding connections at service equipment shall be made by bonding the equipment grounding conductor to the grounded service conductor and the grounding electrode conductor. 2. The grounding electrode conductor shall connect the equipment grounding conductors, the grounded service conductors and the service entrance enclosures to the grounding electrode. 3. A main bonding jumper shall connect the equipment grounding conductors and the service equipment enclosure to the grounded conductor within the service equipment. 4. Provide separate green insulated equipment grounding conductors for all feeders and branch circuits.
GROUNDING
26 05 26 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
D.
Bonding 1. Bonding shall be provided and conform to all requirements of NEC Article 250 V and VII.
E.
Grounding electrode system shall consist of all of the following components exothermically bonded together: 1. The main domestic water service pipe ahead of any meter, and within 5 feet of entry into building. 2. Ufer Ground – 20 foot minimum length of re-bar, or Bare No. 4/0 cable embedded within concrete footer, with No. 4/0 cable extended to single point grounding buss bar. 3. The Steel Frame of the Building - At a column nearest to the service entrance equipment and at a point accessible to view. 4. Counterpoise Ground Ring - Bare No. 4/0 AWG stranded copper conductor installed at 30 inches below grade surrounding the entire building and encased with minimum of 4 inches low resistivity backfill. Bond from ring to nearest steel column every 100 feet around building. 5. Single Point Ground Bus Bar - Bus bar installed adjacent to the service entrance switch gear with each grounding electrode system component listed above bonded to it.
F.
Voice and data terminal boards shall have a copper grounding bus bar with a No. 2 AWG copper grounding conductor run through 3/4 inch conduit back to the single point ground bus bar at the main electrical service. Bond conductor to conduit at each end.
G.
Exterior luminaires and poles shall be grounded by the use of a manufacturer supplied ground lug or pigtail or by the use of ground clips fastened in bare metal that is free of paint. Poles shall be grounded to an equipment grounding conductor. Poles shall also have a driven ground rod installed at the bottom of their base excavation and bonded to pole.
H.
Separately derived systems such as transformers and emergency generators shall be grounded to the nearest building steel column. If building steel is not available, then ground to the nearest domestic cold water pipe. In addition, run a grounding electrode conductor back to the main service entrance ground point. Grounding electrode conductor shall be bonded to conduit at each end.
I.
Motor terminal boxes shall be grounded by the use of a manufacturer supplied ground lug or by drilling and tapping a hole for a ground screw. Remove paint prior to making the connection.
J.
Metal roofing and metal veneer siding shall be bonded to building steel or nearest grounding system connection with No. 6 AWG conductor every 100 feet.
K.
A No. 4/0 AWG ground jumper shall be installed around water meters. A No. 2 AWG ground jumper shall be installed around water heaters.
L.
Metal piping systems such as compressed air and natural gas shall all be bonded to the grounding electrode system with No. 2 AWG conductors.
M.
Lightning Protection System shall be bonded to the grounding electrode system underground exterior to the building.
GROUNDING
26 05 26 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 3.02
3.03
01-13-2012
GROUNDING SYSTEM TESTING A.
Soil Resistivity 1. Measure soil resistivity and record
B.
Grounding System Resistance 1. Ground system resistance measurements shall be taken and submitted to the Architect for approval before energizing equipment. Measurements shall be taken in dry weather, not less than 48 hours after rainfall. 2. The test method used shall be the fall-of-potential method described in IEEE Standard 142. If it is not possible to use the fall-of-potential method, then the slope method of Dr. George Tag shall be used. 3. Documentation shall include the following information: a. Sketch of site showing building, ground connection and test locations b. Location in feet of all test spikes c. Graphs showing all recorded data plotted d. A minimum of ten (10) data points shall be recorded
GROUNDING SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT A.
Where grounding system resistance test results are above 25 ohms, install additional driven ground rods spaced 20 feet apart until such a reading is achieved. END OF SECTION
GROUNDING
26 05 26 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 1.01
1.02
DESCRIPTION A.
Furnish and install complete hangers, supports and concrete inserts as required for the installation of conduits, cabinets, transformers and equipment installed under Division 26.
B.
Provide all beam clamps, expansion anchors, threaded rod, framing steel and hardware as required.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.03
PART 2
2.02
All equipment shall be UL listed and labeled and in accordance with applicable NEMA and ANSI Standards.
MANUFACTURERS A.
2.01
GENERAL
Hangers, Supports and Inserts 1. GTE/Unistrut International Inc. 2. Superstrut 3. Kindorf/Midland Ross Corporation 4. Grinnell 5. Tufstrut - Pilgrim Technical Inc.
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS A.
Conduits or raceways shall be securely supported and anchored with proper devices, using lead shields in walls or sides of beams, expansion shields or other approved type device for direct down-pull loads. Minerallac type hanger shall be limited to above ceilings. Holes made in walls or ceilings for use with anchoring devices shall be covered by large steel washers. Include special hangers, as required. Minerallac type fittings shall not be permitted within 8 feet of the floor surface where exposed raceways are installed.
B.
Hangers shall be individual ring or clevis type, one hole straps or multiple trapeze hangers.
STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENTS A.
Concrete: Use Grinnell Fig. 285, or equal, Light Weight concrete insert for loads up to 400 lbs., or Grinnell Fig. 282, or equal, Universal Concrete insert for loads up to 1430 lbs.
B.
Steel Beams: Where pipe size is 2 inches or less, use Grinnell Figure 87 or equal, Malleable iron C-Clamp and Retaining Clip. Where pipe size is over 2 inches, use Grinnell Figure 229, or equal.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
26 05 29 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING C.
Intermediate Attachments: Continuous threaded rod shall be used wherever possible. No chain, wire or perforated strap shall be used. Up to 2 inches trade size pipe use 3/8 inch (minimum) rod, 2 1/2 inches and larger use 1/2 inch (minimum) rod.
D.
Pipe Attachments: For steel pipe use Grinnell Figure 115 Ring and Turnbuckle Adjuster, or Figure 260 Clevis.
PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Conduits shall be supported to meet the conditions as required using proper type and size straps, clamps, and hangers.
B.
Exposed conduits shall be installed parallel with or at right angles to building structure, fastened at least every 8 feet and at both sides of each outlet, except at one side only of conduit terminating outlets. Conduits shall be installed tight to structure and beams/joists. Coordinate exposed conduit routing with Architect prior installation.
C.
Conduit risers shall be supported with friction clamps with two point bearing anchored to building construction and at every floor.
D.
The following hanger methods are not permitted: 1. Wood plugs 2. Perforated band iron 3. Hook chain supports 4. Balling wire, etc. 5. Minerallacs where previously mentioned 6. Friction type clamps, such as hammer on clips
E.
Whenever possible, use supports, clamps, hangers, etc., designed especially for equipment to be installed.
F.
The maximum permitted load on hanger rod, plain or all-thread, shall be as follows: 1. 1/4 inch size - 750 pounds 2. 3/8 inch size - 1000 pounds 3. 1/2 inch size - 2000 pounds 4. 5/8 inch size - 3000 pounds 5. The minimum size hanger rod permitted is 1/4 inch size.
G.
Any supports exposed to weather, shall be cleaned, primed and painted.
the
END OF SECTION
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
26 05 29 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 05 33 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
PART 1 1.01
1.02
DESCRIPTION A.
Provide complete grounded conduit systems for all electrical conductors.
B.
All conduits shown on the Drawings shall meet NEC fill requirements for the conductors enclosed.
C.
Conduit raceway systems shall be made mechanically tight and electrically continuous throughout. All metal raceway systems shall be grounded.
D.
Refer to Section 26 05 43, "Underground Raceways" for all conduits located within or below slab-on-grade floors, and exterior to the building foundation.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
All equipment shall be UL listed and labeled and in accordance with applicable NEMA and ANSI Standards.
B.
Conduit shall be in accordance with applicable NEC Articles.
PART 2 2.01
Conduit shall be steel, hot dipped zinc galvanized (minimum 0.0008 inch thick) inside and out, with circular cross section, uniform wall thickness, continuously welded seams and chamfered threaded ends. Conduit shall be furnished in 10 foot standard lengths.
ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A.
2.03
PRODUCTS
RIGID (RMC) AND INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC) A.
2.02
GENERAL
EMT shall be zinc galvanized (minimum 0.0008 inch thick) inside and out, with circular cross section, uniform wall thickness and continuously welded seams. EMT shall be furnished in 10 foot standard lengths.
FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC) A.
Conduit shall be steel or aluminum, hot dipped zinc galvanized inside and out and made from one continuous length of high grade strip of uniform weight and thickness shaped into interlocking convolutions with smooth interior and exterior surfaces. Conduit shall be provided in standard coil lengths.
CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
26 05 33 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 2.04
2.05
2.06
2.07
LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC) A.
Conduit shall be hot dipped zinc galvanized inside and out and made from one continuous length of high grade steel strip of uniform weight and thickness shaped into interlocking convolutions with smooth interior and exterior surfaces. Conduit shall be provided in standard coil lengths.
B.
Conduit shall have a continuous PVC jacket enclosing it.
CONDUIT FITTINGS A.
All RMC, IMC, and EMT fittings shall be galvanized steel. Connectors and couplings shall be threaded, set screw or compression type, concrete-tight.
B.
Conduit bodies shall be threaded steel type. Provide neoprene cover gaskets for conduit body covers exposed to the weather.
C.
Expansion fittings, shall be O-Z/Gedney Type "AX" for RMC and Type "TX" for EMT. For IMC applications, a 15 inch minimum length of RMC shall be used with a Type "AX" expansion fitting. Provide O-Z/Gedney Type "BJ" bonding jumpers at all expansion fittings.
D.
Sealing fittings shall be Crouse Hinds Type EYD or Appleton Type EYD, with drain.
E.
RMC and IMC conduit bushings shall be of the insulated type with phenolic thermosetting insulation molded to a hot dipped galvanized steel body of the threaded type.
F.
EMT fittings shall be of the insulated throat type. Fittings larger than 2 1/2 inches shall have threaded bushings installed as described in Paragraph E above.
G.
Conduits larger than 1 inch shall have grounding type bushings.
ROOF PENETRATIONS A.
Use prefabricated pipe flashing of ultra-violet resistant EDPM rubber with ribbed aluminum base.
B.
Pate, Shipman, or Thy-Curb.
ROOF SUPPORTS A.
PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
Rooftop conduit supports shall be UL listed for glue down installation.
EXECUTION
APPLICATION A.
All conduit shall be rigid metal conduit, unless noted otherwise below, minimum 3/4 inch trade size.
CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
26 05 33 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
3.02
01-13-2012
B.
EMT may only be used in these locations: 1. Within interior partitions and exterior walls 2. Above suspended ceilings inside building 3. Exposed above 9 feet A.F.F. inside building (except in wet, hazardous, or corrosive locations) 4. Exposed above electrical equipment above 7 feet in electrical and mechanical rooms.
C.
Intermediate metal conduit may be used at the Contractor's option in lieu of rigid steel conduit within the building interior.
D.
Flexible metal conduit up to 6 feet in length shall be used for connections to lighting fixtures. A green grounding conductor shall be installed in each flexible conduit as specified in Section 26 05 26, "Grounding." All runs shall be terminated in insulated flexible conduit fittings in accordance with NEC. Minimum size to be 1/2 inch.
E.
Liquid tight flexible metal conduit (up to 3 feet in length) and appropriate fittings shall be used for connections to motors, engine/generators, and vibrating equipment. A green grounding conductor shall be installed in each flexible conduit as specified in Section 26 05 26, "Grounding." All runs shall be terminated in insulated flexible conduit fittings in accordance with NEC. Minimum size to be 1/2 inch.
F.
All conduit used for conductors above 600 volts, within building shall be rigid metal conduit.
G.
All conduit used in fire pump rooms shall be rigid metal conduit, unless Type MI cable is used.
H.
EMT conduit shall not be installed on the underside of metal roof decking.
I.
RGS conduit shall be used on roofs with appropriate expansion fittings.
INSTALLATION A.
Generally, all conduits shall be concealed with runs installed parallel and perpendicular to walls and floor. Exposed conduits below 9 feet will be permitted only in electrical and mechanical rooms. Anywhere else at the discretion of the Architect or where specifically noted on the Drawings. In these cases, install conduit escutcheon plates around conduit penetration, sized to cover the conduit sleeve. Submit proposed routing of exposed conduits in finished spaces with Architect prior to installation.
B.
Branch circuit conduits shall not be run within concrete floors except for short runs to floor boxes.
C.
Conduit shall be securely and rigidly fastened in place with approved pipe straps, wall brackets, conduit clamps, conduit hangers, threaded C-clamps, or ceiling trapeze. Cclamps and beam clamps shall have strap or rod-type retainers.
CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
26 05 33 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
D.
Conduit support fastenings shall be by: 1. Wood screws to wood 2. Toggle bolts in hollow concrete masonry units 3. Expansion bolts in concrete or brick 4. Machine screws, welded threaded studs on steel work 5. Nail-type nylon anchors or threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts for concrete, brick or steel work 6. Conduit shall not be supported using wire or nylon ties.
E.
In areas without ceilings, conduits shall be run as high as possible attached to the structure of the roof, or of the floor deck above. Do not attach directly to the metal deck. Conduits shall be run next to walls as inconspicuously as possible. In finished areas exposed to public view without ceilings, all work shall be installed in an aesthetically acceptable manner. The Architect reserves the right to require the Contractor to make changes as necessary to equipment installation that is unsuitable for public view due to poor workmanship.
F.
Install conduit sleeves for all conduit penetrations through floors, masonry walls, and fire rated walls. Refer to Section 03 30 00, "Concrete" for spacing requirements. Sleeves shall be spaced a sufficient distance apart to maintain fire ratings as required by the UL Fire Resistance Construction Manual.
G.
Conduit shall be independently supported from elements of the building and shall not rest on, nor be supported from suspended ceilings. Boxes shall be fastened to structure independently from conduit system. Conduits shall not be attached to metal decking forming the roof or floor slab above.
H.
Generally, do not install conduits within poured concrete construction above grade. Where it is absolutely necessary to locate conduits in elevated concrete slabs, the Electrical Contractor shall satisfy the following requirements: 1. Conduit O.D. shall be less than 1/3 of the total thickness of concrete measured from top of metal deck. 2. Conduits shall be spaced no closer than three (3) conduit diameters center-to-center. 3. Imbedded conduits shall not displace enough concrete to significantly impair the strength of construction. 4. Place conduits above the bottom reinforcement and below the top reinforcement in concrete slabs, and run conduits parallel to the main reinforcing steel in the slab. 5. In columns, limit conduit area to less than 4% of total area. 6. Conduits shall be rigid galvanized steel. 7. Refer to Section 03 30 00 for additional requirements. 8. This Contractor accepts the risk of having other Trades drill into the conduits.
I.
Lay out conduit system to avoid crossing building expansion joints. Where crossings are necessary, use expansion fittings.
J.
All conduits shall be continuous from outlet to outlet or junction box, and installed complete before pulling conductors. Swab conduits free of dirt, grease and moisture before pulling conductors.
CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
26 05 33 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
K.
Install bushings on all RMC and IMC conduit ends. Install insulated throat fittings on all EMT conduit ends. Fasten conduit to boxes and cabinets using locknuts. Provide two (2) locknuts where required by the NEC, where insulating bushings are used and where bushings cannot be brought into firm contact with the box.
L.
All conduits entering or leaving refrigerated or moisture-laden spaces shall be sloped away from equipment and secured with sealing fittings. Secure conduits with threaded hubs to prevent air circulation and condensation.
M.
Provide a high strength pull cord in all empty conduits, and cap ends.
N.
Provide conduit sleeves, seals and firestops in accordance with Section 26 00 55, "Sleeves, Seals and Firestops."
O.
Provide expansion joints in conduits run on roofs and exterior to building above grade. Provide proper roof flashing and sealing when penetrating roofs.
P.
Install cable wedging plug type supports in all vertical conduit runs as required by NEC.
Q.
Do not exceed four (4) 90 degree bends in any conduit run without a pulling point. Provide pullboxes as required. Locate pullboxes in accessible areas. Coordinate locations with all other building Trades.
R.
Roof support steel shall be galvanized. END OF SECTION
CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
26 05 33 - 5
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 05 34 OUTLET BOXES
PART 1 1.01
1.02
DESCRIPTION A.
Outlets shall be provided for devices, luminaires, motors, and equipment connections, systems equipment connections, special outlets, and as otherwise required.
B.
Outlet boxes shall be of sufficient size to provide free space for all conductors enclosed in the box. Boxes shall be not less than the minimum size required by NEC Article 314 for the number and size of conductors contained within.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
PART 2 2.01
GENERAL
All equipment shall be UL listed and labeled and in accordance with applicable NEMA and ANSI Standards.
PRODUCTS
OUTLET BOXES A.
Interior Outlet Boxes: Provide galvanized flat rolled sheet steel interior outlet wiring boxes, of types, shapes and sizes, including box depths, to suit each respective location and installation; construct with stamped knockouts in back and sides, and with threaded screw holes with corrosion-resistant screws for securing box covers and wiring devices. Throughwall boxes shall not be used.
B.
Interior Outlet Box Accessories: Provide outlet box accessories as required for each installation, including mounting brackets, wallboard hangers, extension rings, fixture studs, cable clamps and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, which are compatible with outlet boxes being used and fulfilling requirements of individual wiring situations. Choice of accessories is Installer's option.
C.
Weatherproof Outlet Boxes: Provide corrosion-resistant cast aluminum, weatherproof outlet wiring boxes, of types, shapes and sizes, including depth of boxes, with threaded conduit ends, cast-metal face plates with spring-hinged waterproof caps suitably configured for each application, including face plate gaskets and corrosion-resistant fasteners.
D.
Luminaire outlet boxes shall be standard 4 inch octagonal, minimum 1 1/2 inches deep.
E.
Flush device boxes in masonry walls to be masonry boxes designed for the purpose, or 4 inch square boxes with raised covers designed for masonry.
F.
Wiring device boxes for surface conduit work and located in potentially damp areas shall be FS series cast aluminum boxes.
OUTLET BOXES
26 05 34 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING G.
Where outlet boxes are to be cast in concrete slabs, they shall be boxes designed for concrete installation.
H.
Flush device boxes shall be 4 inch square, 2 1/8 inch deep boxes with plaster covers or gangable 2 1/2 inch deep boxes. Shallow 1 1/2 inch deep gangable boxes may be used only in demountable partitions and in other walls too thin for standard depth boxes.
I.
Flush boxes for low voltage cabling shall be 4 11/16 inches square x 2 1/8 inches deep for 3/4 inch and 1 inch conduits. Boxes shall be 5 inches square x 2 7/8 inches deep for 1 1/4 inch conduits.
J.
Flush boxes for low voltage cabling for 1 1/2 inch conduits shall be 6 inches x 6 inches x 3 inches deep with flush NEMA 1 screw cover. Provide grommitted hole in cover.
K.
Flush boxes for low voltage cabling for 2 inch conduits shall be 6 inches x 6 inches x 4 inches deep with flush NEMA 1 screw cover. Provide grommitted hole in cover. (Coordinate wall depth with General Contractor.)
PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
All outlet boxes upon which luminaires are to be installed, shall be equipped with 3/8 inch fixture studs. All outlet boxes shall be installed vertically plumb within 3 degrees.
B.
All boxes shall be rigidly supported from building structure independent of the conduit system. Boxes cast into masonry or concrete are considered to be rigidly supported. Framing members of suspended ceiling systems shall not be permitted as a support.
C.
Flush boxes shall finish within 1/4 inch of surface of non-combustible materials. Boxes shall not project beyond finished surfaces.
D.
Flush luminaires in lay-in ceilings shall have branch circuit conduit terminated in a junction box above ceiling, but accessible through ceiling opening and located at least one foot away from the luminaire. Pre-wired incandescent luminaires may have the branch circuit conduit terminate in the luminaire junction box provided the box is sized sufficient for the wire and UL labeled for 90 degrees C wire.
E.
Locations of all outlets are approximate. Final location shall be verified with the Architect in the field prior to installation.
F.
Install knockout closures for unused openings.
G.
Outlet boxes installed on opposite sides of a fire rated wall shall have a minimum of 24 inch spacing between adjacent boxes.
H.
All outlet boxes shall use stud to stud box brackets with far side supports.
I.
"Through-wall" type boxes shall not be used.
OUTLET BOXES
26 05 34 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING J.
01-13-2012
Boxes shall not be installed in a "back-to-back" manner. Boxes shall be spaced at least 10 inches apart where in opposite walls within the same stud cavity, unless a sound absorptive barrier is placed between boxes. END OF SECTION
OUTLET BOXES
26 05 34 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 05 35 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
PART 1 1.01
1.02
DESCRIPTION A.
Pull or junction boxes shall be provided in all raceway systems where required to avoid an excessive number of bends, to facilitate wire pulling, or to afford required access to the raceway system. Maximum distance between boxes in raceway systems shall not exceed 100 feet.
B.
Pull and junction boxes shall provide adequate space and dimensions for the installation of conductors in accordance with NEC Article 314.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
PART 2 2.01
All equipment shall be UL listed and labeled and in accordance with applicable NEMA and ANSI Standards.
PRODUCTS
PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A.
Pull and Junction Boxes: Provide galvanized code-gauge sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with screw-on covers, of types, shapes and sizes, to suit each respective location and installation. Minimum size shall be 4 inch square, 2 1/8 inch deep box.
B.
Concealed pull or junction boxes shall be flush in finished walls, located near the floor and provided with flush type covers; blank device plates in case of outlet type boxes and flat plates prime painted and secured with flat head screws in the case of larger boxes. Surface junction boxes in utility areas shall be without knockouts, shall have close fitting screw covers and shall be finished in medium gray enamel.
C.
Boxes exposed to the weather shall be weatherproof type as required by NEC.
D.
Bushings, Knockout Closures and Locknuts: Provide corrosion-resistant punched-steel box knockout closures, conduit locknuts and malleable iron conduit bushings, offset connectors, of types and sizes to suit respective uses and installation.
PART 3 3.01
GENERAL
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Install pull and junction boxes, complying with Manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation," and in compliance with recognized industry practices.
PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
26 05 35 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
B.
Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with wire/cable and raceway installation work.
C.
Pull and junction boxes shall be located in utility areas or above accessible ceiling systems wherever possible. Boxes located in exposed areas shall be brought to the attention of the Architect prior to installation.
D.
Pull and junction boxes shall be sized in accordance with the NEC for both contained conductors and conduit entrances and exits.
E.
Fasten boxes rigidly to structural surfaces, or solidly imbed electrical boxes in concrete or masonry.
F.
Boxes not otherwise accessible in ceilings and walls shall be made accessible by an access panel.
G.
Provide watertight boxes, slip expansions or bonding jumpers where dictated by construction conditions. END OF SECTION
PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
26 05 35 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 05 43 UNDERGROUND RACEWAYS
PART 1 1.01
DESCRIPTION A.
1.02
2.02
Furnish and install all items necessary for a complete installation of underground and under slab raceway systems herein specified and as shown on the Drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
All equipment shall be UL listed and labeled and in accordance with applicable NEMA and ANSI Standards.
B.
Concrete work shall conform to the requirements of ACI 301-89.
C.
Refer to Section 03 30 00, "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
D.
Refer to Section 26 00 25, "Excavation, Backfill, and Protection of Utilities" for backfill requirements.
PART 2 2.01
GENERAL
PRODUCTS
RACEWAY AND FITTINGS A.
PVC conduit shall be rigid non-metallic, Schedule 40 heavywall, UL approved for direct earth burial.
B.
Rigid galvanized steel conduit and associated fittings shall be the same as specified under Section 26 05 33, "Conduit and Fittings."
C.
PVC conduit fittings shall be slip joint type with cement furnished and recommended by the Manufacturer.
D.
Conduit elbows shall be rigid metal and be long radius type.
CONCRETE ENVELOPES FOR RACEWAYS A.
Concrete used for the encasement of raceways shall have a 28 day compressive strength of 3000 psi. Refer to Section 03 30 00, "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for information concerning concrete to be furnished under this Section.
B.
Colored Concrete 1. Cement color shall be 95% pure mineral oxide (90% pure iron oxide) finely milled to pass a 325 mesh. Carbon added for darker shades shall be wettable and shall not exceed 3% of the weight of portland cement. Color pigments shall be light fast, wettable, weather resistant, alkali resistant, and free of deleterious fillers and extenders. 2. Color shall be Solomon Grind #140 or equal.
UNDERGROUND RACEWAYS
26 05 43 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING PART 3 3.01
3.02
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
APPLICATION A.
Underground raceways shall be rigid galvanized steel conduit or Schedule 40 heavywall PVC. Use rigid galvanized steel only for: 1. Raceways underneath electric equipment pads 2. All elbows (45 degrees and greater) 3. Additionally, where noted on the Drawings
B.
Underground raceways shall be encased in a concrete envelope for the following installations: 1. Voice/data ductbanks exterior to the building 2. Additionally, where noted on the Drawings
C.
Underground branch circuit raceways shall be a minimum of 1 inch.
D.
Branch circuit raceways (up to 1 1/2 inch size) may be run under slab-on-grade floors at bottom of gravel base. Only short runs of raceways connecting to floor boxes are permitted within the concrete of slab-on-grade floors.
E.
Raceways larger than 1 1/2 inch shall be run at 30 inches below finished grade or floor slab.
INSTALLATION A.
All raceways shall have ends capped during construction to prevent entrance of mud or solids. Seal active raceways entering building from underground raceway system. Cap spare raceways. Mark ends of future raceways with a stake at ground surface. Provide pull cord in all spare raceways.
B.
Raceways shall be placed and sloped so that water will not enter into the building through them. Provide a pullbox in conduit runs to prevent water ingress where necessary.
C.
For conduits located under slab-on-grade concrete floors, conduits shall be routed in a single layer. Where necessary for conduits to be routed in a stacked arrangement, concrete envelope shall be provided to prevent voids in the ductbank. In areas of high conduit concentration, such as under electrical switchgear, complete concrete backfill of excavation shall be provided to avoid compromising support of concrete floor.
D.
Refer to Section 26 00 55, "Sleeves, Seals and Firestops" for raceways installed through below grade walls and floors.
E.
Spacers shall be used to provide a minimum 7 1/2 inch separation between adjacent centers of raceways in ductbanks as shown in the National Electrical Code for all conduits, both exterior, and within the limits of the building foundation, regardless of voltage. Ductbanks shall be limited to only two (2) conduits wide arrays unless at ends of runs where turning up into electrical equipment.
UNDERGROUND RACEWAYS
26 05 43 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
F.
Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, underground raceways systems shall be installed 30 inches below finished grade to top of raceways. Coordinate with other site utilities and run deeper, if necessary. Always run below gas lines.
G.
Where trench depths are noted on the Drawings, depths shall be considered to mean buried depth to top of underground raceways.
H.
PVC raceways, where not encased in concrete, shall snake from side to side of trench for expansion relief.
I.
Where noted, concrete encased underground raceways in trenches shall have a 3 inch minimum concrete envelope between any raceway and edge of envelope.
J.
Underground raceways installed below footings shall be concrete encased for full width and height of trench, extending 1 foot beyond each edge of footing.
K.
Raceway envelopes shall be installed by monolithic pour method and vibrated in place to insure flow into voids and complete encasement of raceways. Raceways shall be bundled with twine on plastic spacers not over 5 feet on center and providing minimum conduit separation of 7 1/2 inches of center. Use steel reinforcing rods for alignment side stakes and support bottom of raceways on plastic base spacers not over 5 feet on center. Keep bottom of trench clean of debris and water. Envelope may be poured with side forms or "neat" excavated trench walls. Reinforce envelopes with rebar and wire ties.
L.
Identification 1. Location of underground raceways shall be identified with underground warning tape. Refer to Section 26 00 25, "Excavation, Backfill and Protection of Utilities" for warning tape requirements.
M.
Raceways installed for parallel feeder conductors shall be installed so that each run is the same length as the others. END OF SECTION
UNDERGROUND RACEWAYS
26 05 43 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 05 53 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 1.01
GENERAL
NAME PLATES A.
Furnish and install equipment identification nameplates on all pieces of electrical equipment including, but not limited to: 1. Safety Switches 2. Motor Starters 3. Panelboards 4. Transformers 5. Lighting Contactors 6. Relays 7. Each Switch, Circuit Breaker, Spare, and Space in new and existing Distribution Panelboards and Switchboards 8. Emergency Generators 9. Automatic Transfer Switches Identify and label all existing circuits and equipment that are located within the contract construction area.
B.
Nameplates shall state the equipment name and number or letter as shown on the Drawings; voltage and phase; HP, ampacity or KW size; and source of power. Identification shall be as shown in the following examples: 1. Main Switchboard "MSB" 480/277 Volt, 3 Phase 2500 Ampere Powered from Utility Company Transformer 2. Exhaust Fan "EF1" 208 Volt, 3 Phase 2 HP Powered from Panel P1 3. Panel "P1" 208/120 Volt, 3 Phase 225 Ampere Powered from Transformer T1 4. Electric Water Heater "EWH-1" 208 Volt, 3 Phase 4 KW Powered from Panel P1
C.
In pull and junction boxes, identify each set of circuit conductors by permanent ink on plastic tags with circuit number, voltage and phase, wire size, source, and load information.
D.
Refer to Section 26 05 10, "Wire and Cable" for color code identification of wire and cable.
E.
Refer to Section 26 24 20, "Panelboards" for branch circuit identification.
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
26 05 53 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 1.02
SPECIAL INSTRUCTION AND WARNING SIGNS A.
1.03
Furnish and install nameplates giving special instructions (examples as follows): 1. At emergency generator: "Emergency generator" "480/277 Volt, 3 Phase "Powers ATS and fire pump" 2. At fire pump controller: "Fire pump controller" "Utility power from 1st floor" "Emergency power from generator outside" 3. Where more than one (1) service equipment location exists in a building, a nameplate shall be installed at each location denoting the existence of multiple services, their voltage, and building areas served by each service. Refer to NEC 230.2. 4. Where more than one (1) service equipment location exists in a building, a nameplate shall be installed at each location denoting the existence of multiple services, their voltage, and building areas served by each service. Refer to NEC 230.2.
JUNCTION BOX IDENTIFICATION A.
Junction boxes in conduit runs shall be color coded and labeled as to the system that they have within. Each system shall have a different color or labeling scheme used. Do not color code in finished areas without ceilings.
B.
Electrical power and lighting branch circuit junction boxes shall be painted, but labeled with the circuit numbers contained within. Labeling may be done with paint stencils or permanent black felt-tip markers.
C.
Special systems shall have junction boxes painted as follows: 1. Fire Alarm - Red 2. Intercom - Blue 3. Card Access/Security - Yellow 4. Normal – Silver 5. Life Safety System – Green 6. Lighting – Black
PART 2 2.01
01-13-2012
PRODUCTS
NAMEPLATES A.
Nameplates shall be laminated plastic with letter type a minimum of 1/4 inch high.
B.
Color of nameplates shall be white with black letters for normal power systems and red with white letters for emergency power systems.
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
26 05 53 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING PART 3 3.01
3.02
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Install nameplates on equipment using cadmium plated, steel, self-tapping screws or rivets.
B.
Nameplates shall be installed on the front cover or trim of each piece of equipment. Where not possible, install on wall next to equipment using hollow-wall anchors.
C.
Horsepower, ampacity, or kilowatt values shall be taken from the equipment as delivered in the field, not from the Drawings.
EXISTING EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A.
Provide nameplates on all existing equipment within building as listed in Paragraph 1.01.A. of this Specification Section.
B.
Provide updated panelboard directories in all existing panelboards within building as required for new panelboards per Section 26 24 20, "Panelboards," Paragraph 3.01. END OF SECTION
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
26 05 53 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 06 10 CABLE TRAY (WIRE BASKET)
PART 1 1.01
1.02
DESCRIPTION A.
Division 26 Contractor shall furnish and install a complete cable tray system routed as shown on the Drawings and herein specified. Cable tray shall be a continuous run around any and all obstructions. Provide all hangers, splice hardware, wall brackets, wall sleeves, dropouts, and other hardware as required for a complete system.
B.
Cable tray is intended for voice, data, audio, and video safety and security cables only. All other systems shall have cabling run in conduits.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.03
1.04
All equipment shall be UL listed and labeled in accordance with applicable NEMA and ANSI Standards and meet NEC Article 392. Cable tray shall meet NEMA VE1-1991.
SUBMITTALS A.
For Review: 1. Product data sheets of cable tray and accessories. 2. Dimensioned layout Drawings showing all cable tray sections, and support location. Include all HVAC ductwork and piping, fire protection, plumbing and roof drain piping where crossing cable tray for coordination purposes.
B.
To be included in Record and Information Manuals: 1. One (1) copy of each approved submittal.
MANUFACTURERS A.
PART 2 2.01
GENERAL
Cable Tray 1. G.S. Metals Flextray 2. Chalfant 3. Cablofil
PRODUCTS
CABLE TRAY A.
Cable tray shall be wire mesh construction of galvanized steel. Heights shall be such that the usable loading depth of the cable tray is 2 inches. Wire shall be spot welded at all intersections. Tray shall utilize a double wire construction for side rails.
B.
Cable tray width shall be as shown on the Drawings.
CABLE TRAY (WIRE BASKET)
26 06 10 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING C.
All straight sections shall be provided in standard 10 foot sections.
D.
All straight sections and fittings shall be assembled with bolted connections. Hardware shall be zinc plated.
E.
Cable tray supports shall be of the trapeze type with threaded rod. Use L-brackets for supporting cable tray from wall.
F.
Wall sleeves shall be constructed of steel and equal in dimension to accommodate the cable tray.
PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Division 26 Contractor shall install cable tray and components in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions and EIA/TIA Standards.
B.
Coordinate layout of cable tray including specific routing and mounting elevations with building structure and work of other Trades.
C.
Cable trays are for low voltage voice/data/audio/video communication/security cables only. No other cables, including other low voltage cables for fire alarm, HVAC, etc. are permitted in tray.
D.
Install wall sleeves where tray passes through non-fired rated walls.
E.
Install cable tray from building structure using center hangers. Cable tray shall be located above suspended lay-in ceilings but below HVAC ductwork and piping systems, unless otherwise noted. Cable tray shall be supported a maximum of every 5 feet.
F.
Ground all sections of cable trays with a No. 6 AWG copper conductor bonded to building steel every 100 feet. Cable tray shall not be used as an equipment grounding means.
G.
Conduits extended to cable trays shall be located within 6 inches of tray.
H.
Cable trays shall not penetrate fire rated walls. Stop trays at the wall on each side and penetrate the wall with conduits as noted below: 1. 6 inch wide cable tray - two (2) 4 inch conduits 2. 12 inch wide cable tray - three (3) 4 inch conduits 3. 18 inch wide cable tray - four (4) 4 inch conduits 4. 24 inch wide cable tray - five (5) 4 inch conduits
I.
Cable trays shall be kept a minimum of 12 inches away from power wiring or luminaire ballasts.
J.
Install cable trays with a minimum of 8 inches clearance above. END OF SECTION
CABLE TRAY (WIRE BASKET)
26 06 10 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 07 10 VOICE/DATA SYSTEMS RACEWAYS
PART 1 1.01
DESCRIPTION A.
Division 26 Contractor shall furnish and install outlet boxes, conduits, raceways, risers, service lateral conduits and backgrounds for voice/data systems raceways.
B.
Conduit stub-ups shall be provided in rooms with lay-in acoustic tile ceilings. In all other rooms, provide continuous conduit runs to nearest lay-in ceiling in corridors or directly to telecom rooms.
PART 2 2.01
2.02
2.03
GENERAL
PRODUCTS
OUTLET BOXES AND PLATES A.
Outlet boxes shall be 4 11/16 inches square by 2 1/8 inches deep with one (1) gang plaster ring installed. Outlet boxes shall accommodate 1 inch conduit as required. Outlet boxes shall be 5 inches square by 2 1/8 inches deep where 1 1/4 inch conduits are required.
B.
Coverplates shall be blank.
CONDUITS A.
Conduits from voice/data outlet boxes shall be 1 inch.
B.
Conduits and conduit sleeves run between voice/data terminal closets shall be 3 inches.
C.
Conduits run underground as service lateral raceway shall be 4 inches.
D.
Refer to Section 26 05 43, "Underground Raceways" and Section 26 05 33, "Conduit and Fittings."
JUNCTION/PULL BOXES A.
Junction boxes shall be of the following minimum dimensions for conduit sizes as shown: 1. 1 inch conduit – 6" W x 6" L x 3" D 2. 1 1/4 inch conduit – 12" W x 12" L x 4" D 3. 3 inch conduit – 24" W x 24" L x 5" D
B.
Pull boxes shall be of the following minimum dimensions for conduit sizes as shown: 1. 1 inch conduit – 6" W x 12" L x 3" D 2. 1 1/4 inch conduit – 12" W x 12" L x 4" D 3. 3 and 4 inch conduit – 12" W x 48" L x 6" D
C.
Pull boxes shall be galvanized or baked enamel steel with screw covers.
VOICE/DATA SYSTEMS RACEWAYS
26 07 10 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 2.04
VOICE/DATA WALL FIELD BOARDS A.
PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
Service lateral conduits and riser conduits and sleeves shall terminate onto plywood voice/data wall field boards. Boards shall be of 4 feet by 8 feet by 3/4 inch fire retardant plywood mounted vertically in room from floor to 8 feet above floor.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Provide a minimum of two 4 inch conduits as service lateral raceways underground from telephone point to main voice/data telecom room in building.
B.
Provide a minimum of two 3 inch conduits or conduit sleeves between voice/data telecom rooms.
C.
Provide a minimum of two 3 inch conduits from each voice/data telecom room to above ceiling of main corridor or to cable tray system.
D.
Provide conduit stub-ups from each outlet location to above accessible ceiling space. Provide continuous conduits across exposed areas or areas of inaccessible ceilings. Provide conduits between isolated areas of accessible ceilings to provide a continuous pathway for wiring from main equipment location to each device. Floor outlets in slab on grade shall have conduits run up nearest column or wall to above accessible ceiling. Poke through type outlets shall have conduits run to above ceiling of main corridor on the floor below.
E.
All conduit elbows shall have the following minimum bend radius: 1 inch conduit 1 1/4 inch conduit 3 inch conduit 4 inch conduit
-
9 inches 12 inches 36 inches 48 inches
F.
Conduits for outlets shown exterior to the building shall be continuous from the outlet box back to the telecommunications room for the use of exterior rated cable.
G.
All conduits shall have a pull wire installed. Restore all fire ratings of walls, floors, and ceilings penetrated by conduits.
H.
Provide a pull box in each conduit run that exceeds 100 feet in length. All pull boxes shall have straight through conduit entrance and exit. Pull boxes shall be installed in accessible locations.
I.
Conduit runs shall have a maximum of two 90 degree bends.
J.
Provide a 3/4 inch conduit with a No. 2 AWG copper ground wire from a splice bar on each voice/data wall field board to the main building grounding electrode system. Bond each end of conduit to the ground wire.
VOICE/DATA SYSTEMS RACEWAYS
26 07 10 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
K.
Provide a blank coverplate on all outlet boxes.
L.
Each conduit stub-up shall have a grounding bushing installed and No. 12 AWG copper ground wire run to nearest building steel.
M.
Telecom rooms have been located such that all outlets shall have a maximum of 90 meters of cable length. Install outlet conduits in the shortest manner possible to avoid exceeding this cable length. END OF SECTION
VOICE/DATA SYSTEMS RACEWAYS
26 07 10 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 07 11 AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEMS RACEWAYS
PART 1 1.01
DESCRIPTION A.
PART 2 2.01
2.02
2.03
Division 26 Contractor shall furnish and install outlet boxes, conduits, and raceways for audio/video systems.
PRODUCTS
OUTLET BOXES AND PLATES A.
Outlet boxes shall be 5 inches square by 2 7/8 inches deep with one (1) gang plaster ring cover installed. Coverplates shall be blank stainless steel. Outlet boxes shall have knockouts for 1 1/4 inch conduits.
B.
Outlet boxes for 2 inch conduits shall be 6" x 6" x 4" with flush screw cover with grommited hole.
C.
Refer to Section 26 05 34, "Outlet Boxes."
CONDUITS A.
Conduits from outlet boxes shall be 1 1/4 inch.
B.
Conduits for ceiling video projector control shall be 2 inches.
C.
Refer to Section 26 05 33, "Conduit and Fittings."
PULL BOXES A.
Pull boxes shall be of the following minimum dimensions for conduit sizes as shown: 1. 1 1/4 inch conduit - 4" W x 12" L x 3" D
B.
Pull boxes shall be of baked enamel steel with screw covers.
PART 3 3.01
GENERAL
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Division 26 Contractor shall provide conduit stub out from each outlet to above accessible ceiling in corridor, or to cable tray. Floor outlets in slab on grade shall have conduits run up nearest column or wall to above accessible ceiling. Poke-through type outlets shall have conduits run to above ceiling of main corridor on the floor below. Provide conduit to between isolated areas of accessible ceilings to provide a continuous pathway for wiring from main equipment location to each device.
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEMS RACEWAYS
26 07 11 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING B.
01-13-2012
All conduit elbows shall have the following minimum bend radius: 1 1/4 inch conduit - 12 inches
C.
All conduits shall have a pull wire installed.
D.
Restore all fire ratings of walls, floors, and ceilings penetrated by conduits.
E.
Provide a pull box in each conduit run that exceeds 100 feet in length. All pull boxes shall have straight through conduit entrance and exit. Pull boxes shall be installed in accessible locations. END OF SECTION
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEMS RACEWAYS
26 07 11 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 07 12 SECURITY SYSTEM RACEWAYS
PART 1 1.01
DESCRIPTION A.
PART 2 2.01
2.03
PRODUCTS
Outlet boxes shall be 4 11/16 inches square by 2 1/8 inches deep with one (1) gang plaster ring cover installed. Coverplates shall be blank stainless steel. Outlet boxes shall accommodate 3/4 inch conduits as required.
CONDUITS A.
Conduits from outlet boxes shall be 3/4 inch.
B.
Refer to Section 26 05 33, "Conduit and Fittings."
PULL BOXES A.
Pull boxes shall be of the following minimum dimensions for conduit sizes as shown: 1. 3/4 inch conduit - 4" W x 12" L x 3" D
B.
Pull boxes shall be of baked enamel steel with screw covers.
PART 3 3.01
Division 26 Contractor shall furnish and install outlet boxes, conduits, and raceways for security systems.
OUTLET BOXES AND PLATES A.
2.02
GENERAL
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Division 26 Contractor shall provide conduit stub out from each outlet to above accessible ceiling in corridor, or to cable tray. Floor outlets in slab on grade shall have conduits run up nearest column or wall to above accessible ceiling. Poke-through type outlets shall have conduits run to above ceiling of main corridor on the floor below. Provide conduit to between isolated areas of accessible ceilings to provide a continuous pathway for wiring from main equipment location to each device.
B.
All conduit elbows shall have the following minimum bend radius: 3/4 inch conduit - 5 inches
C.
All conduits shall have a pull wire installed.
SECURITY SYSTEM RACEWAYS
26 07 12 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
D.
Restore all fire ratings of walls, floors, and ceilings penetrated by conduits.
E.
Provide a pull box in each conduit run that exceeds 100 feet in length. All pull boxes shall have straight through conduit entrance and exit. Pull boxes shall be installed in accessible locations.
F.
Conduit runs shall have a maximum of three 90 degree bends. END OF SECTION
SECURITY SYSTEM RACEWAYS
26 07 12 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 08 40 ELECTRICAL TESTS, ADJUSTMENTS, INSPECTION
PART 1 1.01
DESCRIPTION A.
1.02
1.03
GENERAL
Furnish equipment and perform as necessary all testing as required herein and called for in other Division 26 Specification Sections. Perform adjustments of equipment as required. Arrange for inspections by the authority having jurisdiction.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Testing equipment shall be UL listed and specially manufactured and appropriate for the intended type of testing to be performed.
B.
All testing shall be witnessed by Owner's Representatives. Provide five days advance notice.
SUBMITTALS A.
For Review: 1. Test results form (attached to the end of this Section) with all recorded data sheets and graphs
B.
To be included in Record and Information Manuals: 1. One (1) copy of each approved submittal 2. Final Certificate of Inspection
PART 2
PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01
TESTING A.
Amperage Phase Balance 1. Test and record amperage of each phase at main switchboard, each branch distribution panel, and all lighting and appliance panels.
B.
Continuity of Conduit System 1. Test each run of metallic conduit for continuity of ground return path.
C.
Conductor Insulation Leakage 1. Test each run of 600 volt cable for insulation leakage. Use the short-time method with readings taken at 30 and 60 seconds. Record results for conductors used for switchboard and panelboard feeders.
ELECTRICAL TESTS, ADJUSTMENTS, INSPECTION
26 08 40 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
3.02
3.03
01-13-2012
D.
Grounding System Resistance 1. Test and record grounding system resistance. Refer to Section 26 05 26, "Grounding" for test procedure.
E.
Operating Voltage 1. Measure and record operating voltage at main switchgear and all panelboards with all systems in building operating normally.
F.
Dielectric Strength 1. Provide megger test of all transformers to verify dielectric strength.
ADJUSTMENTS A.
Amperage Phase Balance 1. Where Contractor has deviated from panelboard circuit arrangement as shown on the Drawings, perform a phase balancing within the panelboard by rearranging the position of selected circuit breakers. Record the changed circuits on the "As-Built" Drawings.
B.
Continuity of Conduit System 1. Where the resistance of a conduit run is greater than two (2) ohms, disassemble all connections, clean, and reassemble to obtain an acceptable reading.
C.
Conductor Insulation Leakage and Impedance 1. Where insulation leakage is above Manufacturer's stated values, replace conductor.
D.
Grounding System Resistance 1. Refer to Section 26 05 26, "Grounding" for procedure for grounding system resistance adjustment.
E.
Operating Voltage 1. Adjust taps of all high voltage, service and dry-type transformers when loaded voltage readings drop below nominal system voltages. Final voltage shall be at nominal or above.
F.
Other Adjustments 1. Refer to Division 26 Specification Sections for additional adjustments.
INSPECTION A.
Inspection shall be performed by: 1. Local authorized inspection agency, or 2. State division of Inspection
B.
Contractor shall arrange for periodic and final inspections in a timely manner and with due regard for the work of other Contractors and the Construction Schedule.
C.
Include final Certificate of Inspection in the Record and Information Manuals. END OF SECTION
ELECTRICAL TESTS, ADJUSTMENTS, INSPECTION
26 08 40 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
TEST RESULTS FORM
PROJECT NAME: CONTRACTOR: SYSTEM: SPECIFICATION SECTION NUMBER: TYPE OF TEST: EQUIPMENT USED: WEATHER CONDITIONS: TEMPERATURE: HUMIDITY: PART OF SYSTEM TESTED: SUMMARY OF TEST:
PERSON PERFORMING TEST:
DATE:
CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE: (Attach Recorded Testing Data Sheets To This Form)
ELECTRICAL TESTS, ADJUSTMENTS, INSPECTION
26 08 40 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
CERTIFICATE OF SYSTEM APPROVAL
PROJECT NAME: CONTRACTOR: SYSTEMS COMPONENT: SPECIFICATION SECTION NUMBER: A.
APPROVAL (If required by specification section) The above listed system has been inspected and approved as meeting the specified instructions for installation. Owner's Representative:
B.
Date:
EQUIPMENT DEMONSTRATION The above listed system has been demonstrated to the following Owner's Representatives: NAME
TITLE
DATE
SIGNATURE
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
(ATTACH A SEPARATE PAGE FOR ADDITIONAL NAMES)
ELECTRICAL TESTS, ADJUSTMENTS, INSPECTION
26 08 40 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 09 23 ELECTRICAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT
PART 1 1.01
DESCRIPTION A.
1.02
1.04
1.05
Furnish and install relays, contactors, time clocks, push buttons and photocontrols as shown on the Drawings and herein specified. Provide all accessories and necessary equipment for a complete system.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.03
GENERAL
All equipment shall be UL listed and labeled and in accordance with applicable NEMA and ANSI Standards.
SUBMITTALS A.
For Review: 1. Product Data Sheets of Electrical Control Equipment 2. Wiring Diagrams of Electrical Control Equipment
B.
To be included in Record and Information Manuals: 1. One (1) copy of each approved submittal
MANUFACTURERS A.
Relays, Contactors and Push buttons 1. Square D Company 2. Cutler-Hammer Electric Corporation 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
B.
Time Clocks and Photocontrols 1. Paragon 2. Tork 3. Intermatic
OPERATION A.
Lighting contactors shall be turned "on" by photocontrols and turned "off" by time clocks, unless noted otherwise.
B.
All electrical control equipment shall control loads and be controlled as shown on the Drawings.
ELECTRICAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT
26 09 23 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING PART 2 2.01
2.02
A.
Multipole contactors shall have 20 Ampere lighting, 30 Ampere general purpose rated double-break, silver-cadmium-oxide convertible contacts with indicators. Contactor shall be 100% rated for ballast, tungsten lighting, and resistive loads, and have a NEMA 1 wall mountable enclosure. Contacts shall be 300 volt rated for phase to neutral loads and 600 volt rated phase to phase.
B.
Contactors shall have field addable poles up to a maximum of 12. Coils shall be encapsulated. Mechanically held contactors shall have coil-clearing contacts. Coils shall have a control voltage of 120 volt, 1 phase.
C.
Number of poles shall be as shown on the Drawings and as needed by the loads plus 1 spare.
D.
Square D Type L.
TIME CLOCKS
Relays shall be 600 volt, SPST, 2 HP rated, 120 volt coil, in a NEMA 1 enclosure. Square D Type C.
PUSH BUTTON STATIONS A.
PART 3 3.01
Photocontrols shall be sealed cadmium sulfide photocell in a weatherproof enclosure and conduit mounted. Photocontrol shall have a 2000 watt, 120 volt rating, 15 second inertial time delay and adjustable slide. Paragon CW201-00.
RELAYS A.
2.05
Time clocks shall be two channel, microprocessor based, seven (7) day programmable, with 100 hour battery carryover. Time clocks shall have two (2) 15 Ampere inductive rated SPDT (Form C) contacts. Time clocks shall be in a NEMA 1 enclosure. Paragon EC72D.
PHOTOCONTROLS A.
2.04
PRODUCTS
MULTIPOLE CONTACTORS
A.
2.03
01-13-2012
Push button stations shall be flush mounted momentary operation with red push button insert, extended metal guard, 720 VA break rating at 35% power factor and one N.O. and N.C. contacts. Square D SKR2RH13.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Install time clocks, relays and contactors in electrical rooms next to panelboards. Provide control wiring as shown. Provide power to unit from nearest branch circuit unless shown otherwise.
ELECTRICAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT
26 09 23 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
3.02
3.03
01-13-2012
B.
Install photocontrols on exterior north wall of building below roof line in an inconspicuous location.
C.
Unless otherwise noted, set and adjust photocontrols and time clocks for sunset "on," midnight "off" for building lighting. Security lighting shall be sunset "on," sunrise "off."
D.
Install push buttons where shown on the Drawings.
TESTING A.
Provide a complete functional test of all components in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations.
B.
Operate system for a minimum of seven (7) consecutive days with no problems before claiming completion.
C.
Refer to Section 26 08 40, "Electrical Tests, Adjustments, Inspection."
EQUIPMENT DEMONSTRATION A.
After all system tests have been completed, schedule an instruction period with the Owner. Instruction to be provided by Manufacturer's authorized field technician.
B.
Instruction shall include: 1. Location of all components of the system and explanation of their function 2. Demonstration of equipment 3. Maintenance and repair procedures 4. Programming procedures 5. Review of documents in Record and Information Manuals
C.
Contractor shall have all participants sign the Certificate of System Completion in Section 26 00 99, "Requirements for Contract Completion." END OF SECTION
ELECTRICAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT
26 09 23 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 09 26 LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM
PART 1 1.01
1.02
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION A.
The intent of this set of specifications is to provide a complete, functional, intelligent, lowvoltage lighting control system for the control of incandescent, low-voltage, neon, cold cathode, fluorescent and HID lighting sources.
B.
Where shown on the drawings, the contractor shall furnish and install a complete low voltage lighting control system consisting of, but not limited to, relays, contactors, controllers, enclosures, switch station and miscellaneous components as required for a complete, operable lighting control system.
C.
Where applicable standards have been established, all items of equipment, individual components and installation methods shall meet the requirements of these standards, including, but not limited to, Underwriter Laboratories (UL), the National Electrical Code (NEC), Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and any local or state codes that may be applicable.
D.
Designated exit and emergency egress lighting as a part of this system shall be barriered from normal power circuits.
E.
Listing of a manufacturer as acceptable does not in any way relieve the contractor from the responsibility for providing a lighting control system that meets all the requirements of these specifications.
F.
All manufacturers shall submit to the specifying engineer a line-by-line compliance comparison between each specifications requirement and the system being proposed.
G.
Any ambiguities in the drawings or specifications shall be brought to the attention of the specifying engineer for clarification.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
All equipment shall be UL listed and labeled and in accordance with applicable NEMA and ANSI Standards.
B.
Factory Assembly: All relays, contactors, controllers, enclosures, switch station and miscellaneous components shall be factory assembled and tested. All system components shall arrive at the job site completely pre-wired and ready for installation, requiring only the connection of lighting circuits and low-voltage control stations and/or network terminations. All connections shall be made to clearly and permanently labeled termination points. Systems that require field assembly shall not be acceptable.
C.
Component Testing: All system components and assemblies shall be individually tested prior to assembly. Once assembled, all finished products shall be tested for proper operation of all control functions per specifications prior to shipment.
LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM
26 09 26 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
1.03
1.04
D.
NEC Compliance: All system components shall comply with all applicable sections of the National Electrical Code (NEC) as required.
E.
NEMA Compliance: All system components shall comply with all applicable portions of NEMA standards pertaining to types of electrical equipment and enclosures.
F.
UL Approval: All applicable equipment shall be UL listed under section 916 / 508 and shall bear labels indicating compliance.
G.
FCC Emissions: All applicable equipment shall comply with FCC emissions standards specified in Part 15, for commercial applications and shall bear labels indicating compliance testing. Equipment that does not meet these standards shall not be acceptable.
SUBMITTALS A.
For Review: 1. Specifications Compliance: Submit a line-by-line comparison that describes the differences between each specifications requirement and the equipment/systems being proposed. Comparison shall include a complete listing of how the proposed equipment/systems differ from that specified with regard to size, quantity, quality, method of control, features and functions, control software functions and installation requirements. 2. System Description: Supply as part of the submittal package a brief description of the lighting control system's major features and functions. 3. Bill of Materials: Provide as part of the submittal package a detailed itemized listing of all proposed equipment, including quantities and capacities for all major system components. 4. Product Data Sheets: Provide as part of the submittal package detailed product data sheets for all major system components. 5. Riser Drawing: Provide as part of the submittal package a system riser drawing of sufficient detail to indicate relative placement of major system components and the required connections between each. 6. Programming schedules.
B.
To be included in Record and Information Manuals: 1. One (1) copy of each approved submittal 2. Certificate of System Completion
MANUFACTURERS A.
1.05
01-13-2012
Low Voltage Control System 1. Watt Stopper 2. Lighting Control and Design (LC&D) 3. Lutron Softswitch 4. Leviton Lighting Management Systems
SYSTEM OPERATION A.
Lighting shall be controlled by switches and time-of-day function.
LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM
26 09 26 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING B.
Panel shall be capable of turning "on" and "off" all zones.
C.
A master switch shall be capable of turning "on" and "off" all lighting zones.
D.
All relay panels shall be connected together and function as one system.
PART 2 2.01
01-13-2012
PRODUCTS
PROGRAMMABLE LIGHTING CONTROLLER(S) A.
Where shown on the drawings, the contractor shall furnish and install a programmable lighting control system consisting of programmable lighting controllers, switches and other devices in the quantities, sizes and types shown on the drawings and specified herein.
B.
Programmable lighting controllers shall contain relays, contactors and other devices of the sizes and quantities indicated on the drawings and specified herein.
C.
Hardware Features: 1. Controller Back-Box: Each programmable lighting controller shall be provided with a factory furnished; UL listed NEMA 1 enclosure designed for wall mounting. Back-box must be capable of being shipped ahead of controller chassis insert to allow for roughin of all electrical connections prior to receipt of the controller chassis insert. 2. Controller Chassis Insert: Each programmable lighting controller shall be provided with a factory or field installable controller chassis insert. Controller chassis insert shall contain all controller electronics, power supplies, relays, contactors and other required components. Controller chassis inserts shall arrive at the project site completely pre-wired and requiring only the connection of lighting circuits and control devices. 3. Line Voltage/Control Voltage Separation: Each programmable lighting controller shall be provided with a mechanical barrier that separates all line voltage components and wiring from all control voltage components and wiring. An additional barrier may be installed within the line voltage section that shall provide isolation between normal and emergency circuits where required. 4. Controller Covers: Each programmable lighting controller shall be provided with a dead front screw-held or hinged locking cover that is designed for either surface or flush mounting. 5. Controller Capacity/Configurations: Controllers shall be available in sizes to accommodate 4, 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, and 48 switch inputs and relay outputs. Controllers shall be available in either the standard configuration in which the electronics are to the left of the voltage barrier with the line voltage compartment on the right or with the electronics in the center and two line/low voltage dividers with the lighting relays on the right and left sides.
D.
Electrical: 1. Controller Power Supply: Each programmable lighting controller shall be provided with two dual-rated, UL listed Class 2 transformers capable of either 120 or 277 VAC primary (50 to 60 Hz). It shall contain an internal self-resetting fuse. 2. Connections: All connections shall be made to clearly and permanently labeled termination points.
LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM
26 09 26 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
2.02
01-13-2012
E.
Controller Electronics: 1. Controller CPU: Each programmable controller shall be provided with a CPU (Central Processing Unit) that shall provide all the programming and control functions for the entire controller. CPU shall be protected against loss of memory during a power outage through nonvolatile RAM for a period of up to 10 years without power of any type. The power input shall be protected against surges and transients. 2. Real-Time Clock: Real-Time Clock shall be used to perform all time-controlled functions. Clock accuracy shall be displayed to the second. Real-Time Clock functions shall include time of day, day of week, date and automatic daylight savings and leap year adjustments. Time clock shall be protected against loss of time during a power outage for a period of up to 45 days without power of any type. 3. I/O Controller: I/O (input/output) cards shall be provided to expand the controller capability from 8 to 48 switch inputs and relay outputs in increments of 8. Electronics shall feature surge protection and opto-isolation. 4. Switch Input Characteristics: Each switch input shall be designed to be actuated by dry contact from 2 or 3 wire momentary or maintained switches or their logical equivalents (Photo-cell contacts, Building Automation System Outputs, Time clocks etc.). 5. Input LEDs: For each input there shall be three LEDs: ON input contact status (hardwired), OFF input contact status (hardwired) and Programmable Pilot Output. The LEDs reflect the true status of the relay controlled by the switch input. Normally these Pilot LEDs track with the status LED(s) of the affected relays. (If the switch turns on relay output 5 for example, relay 5 output LED will light.) However the user has the option of programming the LED to indicate the status of any relay, group or preset. 6. Relay Output Characteristics: Each Relay Output shall control either a latching lighting relay rated for 120 or 277 VAC @ 20 full load amps, or a dry contact output that shall provide pulsed or maintained switching of the Class 2 circuits of other devices such as two pole relays, contactors etc. Each output is equipped with manual ON and OFF buttons that shall be used to control the output regardless of programming and with the CPU off if desired. In addition, each output has a status LED that indicates the current status of the output. 7. Communications: The controller shall be equipped with a serial (RS232) port and also may be provided a modem for monitoring and programming purposes.
F.
Pre-Sets: The lighting controller shall support up to 48 user-defined presets (ON/OFF relay patterns). The presets may be invoked by switch or timer actuation.
G.
Descriptive Names: The system shall support the optional assignment of descriptive names (up to 10 characters) to the lighting controller, relay outputs, relay groups, inputs, timers, and presets.
H.
Password Protection: Each Programmable controller shall have a user definable 6-number password, which will lock out the keypad programming functions.
LIGHTING CONTROL RELAYS A.
Electrical contractor shall provide quantities of Class 2 lighting control relays as indicated on the drawings and schedules as specified herein.
LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM
26 09 26 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
2.03
B.
Class 2 lighting control relays shall be individually UL and CUL listed and shall bear labels indicating compliance.
C.
Class 2 lighting control relays shall be designed and tested to have a minimum cycle life of 200,000 ON/OFF cycles @ FULL LOAD and 1,000,000 ON/OFF cycles at no load.
D.
Class 2 lighting control relays shall be designed for control of 120, 277 or 347 VAC lighting control circuits at a full 20 AMPS and motor loads of 1 Hp @ 120 VAC.
E.
Class 2 lighting control relays shall be designed with a magnetic latching mechanism that shall hold the relay in its last activated state indefinitely, with no change of state during an interruption of power. Solid state or electrically held relays are not acceptable.
F.
Each Class 2 lighting control relay shall contain an auxiliary set of contacts (rated at 1 AMP 30 VAC) electrically isolated but mechanically linked to the main contacts for the purpose of true status monitoring and pilot light activation.
G.
Relays shall be capable of panel or remote mounting up to 2,500 feet from the controlling device.
SWITCH PLATES & CONTROL STATIONS A.
PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
Standard Switch Plates (NFP): Electrical contractor shall provide and install switch plates and switches of the quantities and types shown on the drawings and specified herein. 1. Switch plates shall consist of a control panel faceplate, switches, LED pilot lights and all mounting hardware. 2. Switch plates shall be manufactured from a single piece of stainless steel or aluminum, finished and labeled as per the plans and specifications or as indicated on approved drawings. 3. Switch plates shall be designed to mount to standard electrical gang boxes supplied by the electrical contractor for either flush or surface mounting. 4. Switch plate labeling and switch identification shall be accomplished through the use of engraved phenolic labels, permanently attached to the switch plate or engraved into the control panel faceplate material. Silk-screened or painted labeling shall not be acceptable. 5. Switch plates shall be supplied with the appropriate number of center OFF momentary rocker switches as indicated on the drawings. 6. Switch shall consist of a single-pole double-throw center OFF momentary switch rated at 6 Amps @ 125 VAC with or without pilot as required.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Where shown on the drawings, the contractor shall furnish and install programmable lighting controllers of the quantities, sizes and types shown on the drawings or specified herein.
LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM
26 09 26 - 5
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
3.02
3.03
01-13-2012
B.
All equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer requirements and in compliance with all applicable local and national codes and requirements.
C.
Load circuit wiring shall be sized so that voltage drop shall not exceed 5% at socket of fixture farthest from the power source on any branch circuit.
D.
All wiring shall be in conduit.
E.
Provide 120 volt power to relay panels from a separate 20 Ampere branch circuit.
MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A.
Factory Programming: All controllers shall be factory programmed in accordance with the project specifications prior to shipment. All required firmware and software shall be installed prior to final testing and shipment.
B.
Installation Assistance: During the installation process, the manufacturer shall provide, at no cost, technical support via a toll-free telephone line to the installing contractor or owner's representative to answer questions and supply additional information when required.
C.
System Start-Up: The system manufacturer shall provide a factory authorized field engineer to the project site after installation has been completed and prior to system energization for the purpose of testing and adjustment of the system. Factory field engineer shall test and verify all system functions and ensure proper operation of the system components in accordance with the specifications and on-site conditions. The installing contractor shall notify the system manufacturer in writing that the system is completely wired and ready to be energized and tested 2 weeks prior to scheduling a field engineer for start-up of the system. Should the field engineer arrive on the job site and find the installation incomplete, the installing contractor shall pay the cost of any future visits by the field engineer required to complete the system start-up.
D.
On-Site Programming: During the start-up procedure, the factory field engineer shall provide programming assistance and guidance to the building operating personnel in order to program the systems for initial operation.
E.
Instruction: During the start-up procedure, the factory field engineer shall provide training to the building operating personnel in the operation, programming and maintenance of the lighting control system.
F.
As-Built Drawings: After completion of the system installation and testing, the manufacturer shall provide three sets of "as-built" drawings.
G.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: After completion of the system installation and testing, the manufacturer shall provide three sets of Operations and Maintenance Manuals.
SPARE PARTS A.
Furnish spare devices of a quantity of 10 percent of total used in building.
B.
Obtain a signed Copy of the Certificate of Material Receipt in Section 26 00 99, "Requirements for Contract Completion."
LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM
26 09 26 - 6
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 3.04
01-13-2012
EQUIPMENT DEMONSTRATION A.
Instruction shall include: 1. Location of all components of the system and explanation of their function. 2. Demonstration of equipment. 3. Maintenance and repair procedures. 4. Programming procedures. 5. Review of documents in Record and Information Manuals.
B.
Contractor shall have all participants sign the Certificate of System Completion in Section 26 00 99, "Requirements for Contract Completion."
C.
Training sessions shall be videotaped and delivered to Owner in DVD in MPEG 3 format. END OF SECTION
LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM
26 09 26 - 7
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 24 20 PANELBOARDS
PART 1 1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION A.
Furnish and install circuit breaker panelboards as indicated in the panelboard schedules and as shown on the Drawings.
B.
Provide all circuit breaker devices and accessories as noted on the Drawings, herein specified, and as required.
C.
Short circuit ratings shall be as shown on the Drawings.
D.
Provide lug sizes as necessary for cable sizes as shown on the Drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
All equipment shall be UL listed and labeled and in accordance with applicable NEMA and ANSI Standards.
B.
Branch circuit breakers shall be UL listed as SWD (switching duty) for single pole 15 and 20 Ampere circuits.
C.
Branch circuit breakers feeding HVAC equipment shall be "HACR" rated.
SUBMITTALS A.
For Review: 1. Product data sheets of panelboards and devices 2. Schedules showing quantities, sizes, and arrangement of devices
B.
To be included in Record and Information Manuals: 1. One (1) copy of each approved submittal 2. Accurate panelboard directories based on the schedules on the Drawings, but updated per as-built changes
MANUFACTURERS A.
Panelboards 1. Square D Company 2. Cutler-Hammer Electric Corporation 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. General Electric Company
PANELBOARDS
26 24 20 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING PART 2 2.01
01-13-2012
PRODUCTS
CIRCUIT BREAKER PANELBOARDS A.
Types 1. Panelboards shall be molded case circuit breaker type with dead front construction. 2. Panelboards for 208Y/120 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire service shall be Square D Type NQOD with Type "QOB" bolt on thermal magnetic molded case circuit breakers, (maximum depth of 5 3/4 inches). 22,000 AIC minimum. 3. Panelboards for 480Y/277 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire service shall be Square D Type NF with Type "EDB or EGB" bolt on thermal magnetic molded case circuit breakers (maximum depth of 5 3/4 inches). 35,000 AIC minimum.
B.
Boxes 1. Boxes shall be constructed of commercial, galvanized, code gauge sheet steel, surface or flush mounted as scheduled on the Drawings. 2. Boxes for panelboards shall be sized to provide code gutters but to have minimum width of 20 inches and a maximum depth of 5 3/4 inches. 3. Boxes for double tub panels shall be same size in height. 4. Boxes shall have sufficient wire bending space to accommodate conductor sizes as shown on the Drawings. 5. Panelboard enclosures shall not have any openings that would compromise Arc-Flash safety levels.
C.
Bussing 1. Bus bars shall be copper or tin-plated aluminum and arranged and drilled for sequence phasing. 2. Equipment ground bus shall be provided in each panelboard in addition to any neutral bus requirements. Bus to have same number, size, and type of anti-turn solderless lugs neutral assembly has. Ground bus to be factory bonded to panelboard tub. 3. Provide full size neutral bus with suitable lugs for each outgoing feeder requiring a neutral connection. 4. Provide through-feed lugs for all panelboards for future use.
D.
Mains 1. Provide main breakers for panelboards of the type and class indicated on the Drawings. Panelboards without main breakers are to be provided with solderless type incoming lugs suitable for either copper or aluminum conductors sized to accommodate wiring as shown on the Drawings.
E.
Arrangement 1. Panelboards shall have respective main and branch breakers including spares, provisions for future breakers and spaces arranged in accordance with panelboard schedule to facilitate field wiring and be in agreement with branch circuiting shown on the Drawings. 2. Panelboards equipped with multiple pole circuit breakers shall have circuit numbers based on single pole position. Multiple pole breakers and spaces shall be identified by top single pole position number of that breaker.
PANELBOARDS
26 24 20 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING F.
Branch Circuit Breakers 1. Thermal magnetic molded case circuit breakers with bolted bus connections. 2. Breakers shall have an over center, trip-free, toggle-type operating mechanism with quick-make, quick-break action and positive handle indication. 3. Ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) type circuit breakers shall be rated for 5 or 30 milliamp trip setting, up to 60 Amperes/2 pole configuration at 22,000 AIC. Five milliamp setting circuit breakers shall be used for personnel protection interior and exterior. Thirty milliamp setting circuit breakers shall be used for equipment protection only, exterior to the building (snow/ice melting equipment or pool/pond pumping and lighting equipment). 4. Arc fault circuit interrupter (AFCI) type circuit breakers shall be combination type, 20 Amperes, 1 pole or 2 pole as shown on the Drawings with 22,000 AIC rating. 5. Branch circuits shall be connected for sequenced phasing, i.e., circuits No. 1 and 2 connected to Phase A; circuits No. 3 and 4 connected to Phase B; etc. to conform with the branch circuit numbering system on the Drawings. "Polarity" or "Block" phasing will not be acceptable. 6. Scheduled lock-on devices for certain branch circuits are to be furnished and installed which prevent manual operation of breaker handle but not impede trip-free capability of breaker.
G.
Trims 1. Door and trim finish shall be Manufacturer's standard lacquer or enamel. 2. All trim shall be made for surface or flush mounted panelboards as scheduled on the Drawings and hinged to back box for "door in door" design. Doors shall be equipped with totally concealed hinges and trim clamps and flush chrome-plated combination locks and catches, all keyed alike. Fronts shall not be removable with door in the locked position. 3. Furnish two (2) keys for each panelboard installed and one (1) pint of touch-up enamel paint.
PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Coordinate location of panelboards with the work of other Contractors. Installation shall meet the requirements of NEC Article 110.26.
B.
Securely install panelboards to building walls.
C.
Install panelboard cabinets (box) at a height such that highest circuit breaker does not exceed 6'-6" above floor.
D.
Panelboards mounted on perimeter outside walls shall be shimmed 1/2 inch from wall with washers to permit back ventilation.
E.
Furnish directory frames inside the door of each panel which shall contain a correct typewritten directory card, properly filled out to correspond to the circuit numbers on the Drawings and the room numbers of loads served. If room numbers assigned by the Owner do not match the room numbers on the Drawings, both sets of room numbers must be crossreferenced and identified in the panel directory.
PANELBOARDS
26 24 20 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
F.
All flush panelboards shall have a 3/4 inch spare conduit rising and turning out of the wall above the ceiling line for every three (3) spares and spaces in the panelboard.
G.
Clean interior and exterior of equipment. Touch-up all scratched finishes. Vacuum out all debris in enclosure before energizing.
H.
Provide nameplates in accordance with Section 26 05 53, "Electrical Identification."
I.
Deliver keys and touch-up enamel to Owner's Representative. Refer to Section 26 00 99, "Requirements for Contract Completion."
J.
Panelboards installed in garages shall be mounted so that bottom of cabinet is higher than 18 inches above floor, to be above NEC hazardous area. END OF SECTION
PANELBOARDS
26 24 20 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 24 22 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS-CIRCUIT BREAKER TYPE
PART 1 1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION A.
Furnish and install equipment as shown on the Drawings, where located, and with all required accessories.
B.
Equipment shall be completely factory designed, constructed, assembled, and tested with all components in place.
C.
Short circuit ratings shall be as shown on the Drawings.
D.
Where distribution panelboards are used as service equipment, single phase protection shall be provided. Overcurrent protection device shall open when the voltage on any one phase leg drops below 70%.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
All equipment shall be UL listed and labeled and in accordance with applicable NEMA and ANSI Standards.
B.
Service entrance panelboards shall be UL labeled for service entrance use.
C.
Circuit breakers feeding HVAC equipment shall be "HACR" rated.
SUBMITTALS A.
For Review: 1. Product data sheets on all components of panelboards 2. Dimensioned shop assembly Drawings.
B.
To be included in Record and Information Manuals: 1. One (1) copy of each approved submittal
MANUFACTURERS A.
Distribution Panelboards 1. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 2. Cutler-Hammer Electric Corporation 3. Square D Company 4. General Electric Company
DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS-CIRCUIT BREAKER TYPE
26 24 22 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING PART 2 2.01
2.02
PRODUCTS
PANELBOARDS A.
Panelboard enclosure shall be dead front gray baked enamel steel with four (4) piece bolt on front panel with concealed self-adjusting trim clamps.
B.
Panelboard interior shall have factory assembled copper or tin-plated aluminum bussing, fully rated with ampacity and short circuit-interrupting rating as noted on the Drawings. Interrupting rating shall apply to entire panelboard as a unit. Enclosure and bussing shall be full height (90 inches) or as tall as will fit into the space where shown on the Drawings.
C.
Neutral bus shall be minimum 100% rated and ground bus shall be minimum 25% rated. Equipment ground bus shall be bonded to enclosure.
D.
Provide cable lugs and wire bending space as required to match wiring as shown on the Drawings.
E.
Bussing for overcurrent protective devices shall be in a group mounted front accessible only arrangement. Main overcurrent protective devices shall be mounted at the top of the bus. Backfed devices are not permitted.
F.
Enclosures shall not have any openings that would compromise Arc-Flash safety levels.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS A.
PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
Refer to Section 26 28 19, "Circuit Breakers."
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Install panelboards at the locations shown on the Drawings. Top of panelboard shall be mounted a minimum of 6 feet above finished floor, but at height so that highest circuit breaker handle will not exceed 6 1/2 feet.
B.
Panelboards shall be bolted to wall and shimmed 1/2 inch from wall with washers for ventilation.
C.
Where bottom of panelboard would be less than 6 inches above finished floor, set panelboard on a nominal 4 inch concrete housekeeping pad. Limits of concrete pad shall exceed dimensions of panelboard by 3 inches on front and both sides.
D.
Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with Equipment Manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where values are not available, comply with torques specified in UL Standard 486A.
E.
Clean exterior of equipment of dirt and smudges and dirt from interior compartments. Touch-up all scratched finishes. Vacuum out all debris in enclosure before energizing.
DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS-CIRCUIT BREAKER TYPE
26 24 22 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING F.
01-13-2012
Provide nameplates for panelboard, circuit breakers, spares and spaces in accordance with Section 26 05 53, "Electrical Identification." END OF SECTION
DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS-CIRCUIT BREAKER TYPE
26 24 22 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 27 14 DISTRIBUTION METER CENTER-CIRCUIT BREAKER TYPE
PART 1 1.01
DESCRIPTION A.
1.02
1.03
1.04
Furnish and install Distribution Meter Centers as shown on the Drawings, and as specified herein.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
All equipment shall be UL listed and labeled and in accordance with applicable NEMA and ANSI Standards.
B.
Distribution Meter Centers shall be UL labeled for service entrance use.
SUBMITTALS A.
For Review: 1. Product data sheets of all components of meter centers 2. Dimensioned shop assembly Drawings 3. Wiring Diagrams
B.
To be included in Record and Information Manuals: 1. One (1) copy of each approved submittal
MANUFACTURERS A.
PART 2 2.01
GENERAL
Distribution Meter Centers 1. Square D Company 2. Cutler-Hammer/Eaton Corporation 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. General Electric Company
PRODUCTS
DISTRIBUTION METER CENTERS A.
Meter center enclosure shall be dead front, gray baked enamel steel with four piece bolt-on front panel with concealed self-adjusting trim clamps.
B.
Meter center interior shall have factory assembled copper or tin-plated aluminum bussing, fully rated with ampacity and short-circuit interrupting rating as noted on the Drawings. Interrupting rating shall apply to entire meter center as a unit.
C.
Neutral bus shall be 100% rated and equipment ground bus shall be 25% rated. Equipment ground bus shall be bonded to enclosure.
DISTRIBUTION METER CENTER-CIRCUIT BREAKER TYPE
26 27 14 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
2.02
D.
Minimum short circuit rating shall be 42,000 AIC.
E.
Provide cable lugs and wire bending space as required to match wiring as shown on the Drawings.
F.
Bussing for overcurrent protective devices shall be in a group mounted, front accessible only arrangement.
G.
Meter Centers shall be Type EZM by Square D Company.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS A.
PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
Branch circuit breakers shall be Square D, QO, QZ, or LAL.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Install Meter Centers at the locations shown on the Drawings. Top of Meter Center shall be mounted a minimum of 6 feet above finished floor, but at height so that highest circuit breaker will not exceed 6 1/2 feet. Exact mounting heights shall be approved by utility company.
B.
Meter Centers shall be bolted to wall and shimmed 1/2 inch from wall with washers for ventilation.
C.
Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with Equipment Manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where values are not available, comply with torques specified in UL Standard 486A.
D.
Clean exterior of equipment of dirt and smudges and dirt from interior compartments. Touch-up of all scratched finishes.
E.
Provide nameplates for distribution meter center, circuit breakers, spares and spaces in accordance with Section 26 05 53, "Electrical Identification." END OF SECTION
DISTRIBUTION METER CENTER-CIRCUIT BREAKER TYPE
26 27 14 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES
PART 1 1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION A.
Furnish and install wiring devices and plates as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings.
B.
Specialty switches and outlets required for auxiliary systems shall be specified under those Sections or as shown on the Drawings.
C.
All devices shall be ganged together where shown grouped on the Drawings.
D.
All normal power devices shall be the same color.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
All equipment shall be UL listed and labeled and in accordance with applicable NEMA and ANSI Standards.
B.
All wiring devices and plates shall be furnished by one of the Manufacturers listed. No mixing of Manufacturer's products shall be permitted unless otherwise noted herein or on the Drawings.
SUBMITTALS A.
For Review: 1. Product data sheets for wiring devices and plates
B.
To be included in Record and Information Manuals: 1. One (1) copy of each approved submittal
MANUFACTURERS A.
Wiring Devices (except dimmers) and Plates 1. Cooper 2. Pass and Seymour 3. Hubbell 4. Leviton
B.
Dimmers and Plates 1. Lutron 2. Leviton
WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES
26 27 26 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING C.
Cover Assemblies 1. TayMac Corporation 2. Intermatic Inc. 3. Carlon Electrical Products
D.
Occupancy Sensors 1. Watt Stopper Inc. 2. Leviton 3. Sensorswitch
PART 2 2.01
2.02
01-13-2012
PRODUCTS
SWITCHES A.
Switches shall conform to NEMA Heavy Duty Standards and shall be Specification Grade, general use AC quiet type, 20 Ampere, 120-277 volt, back and side wired with white handles, unless noted otherwise.
B.
Lock type switches shall be 20 Ampere, 120-277 volt, back and side wired Corbin lock type, with stainless steel flush plate. Furnish two (2) keys with each lock type switch. All locks shall be keyed alike.
C.
Pilot light switches shall be Specification Grade, general use AC quiet type, 20 Ampere, 120-277 volt, back and side wired with clear handle.
D.
Momentary contact switches shall be SPDT 2 circuit, 3 position, center "off," 20 Ampere, 120-277 volt, side wired with white handles.
DIMMERS A.
Incandescent Dimmers 1. Local manual dimmers for incandescent loads shall be solid state, thin profile, slide type with square law dimming, power failure memory, gangable with side sections intact. Color shall be white. There shall be no visible screws or fins from the front. Wattage rating shall be 2000 watt, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Dimmers shall not be derated. Dimmers shall be single location or two location (using standard 3 way wiring) as noted on the Drawings. Dimmers shall be Lutron Nova T Star Series.
B.
Fluorescent Dimmers 1. Local manual dimmers shall be solid state, Lutron Nova T Hi-lume Series, white color. Control module shall be model NTF Series. 2. Dimming controls shall regulate lighting level via linear slide and have no side sections, screws, or other fasteners visible on the front of the unit. Dimming controls shall mount in a standard single-gang switch box and be gangable without derating capacity. 3. Light output shall be uniform throughout a controlled circuit of lamps, and be free from flicker and striations throughout the dimming range. Dimming shall be smooth and continuous from 100% to minimum light level. 4. The dimming control and the fixture pack/lamp combination shall be totally inaudible at 27 dB room ambient throughout the dimming range.
WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES
26 27 26 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
5. The system shall be voltage regulated to minimize the effects of line voltage fluctuations. 6. The fixture pack combinations shall require standard bi-pin lamp sockets; special disconnect sockets shall not be required. C.
2.03
2.04
LED Dimmers 1. Dimmers for LED luminaires shall be similar to 2.02A Incandescent Dimmers, but shall be listed and tested for use on LED luminaires.
RECEPTACLES A.
All convenience and power receptacles shall conform to NEMA Heavy Duty Standards and shall be Specification Grade, grounding type.
B.
Convenience duplex receptacles shall be 20 Ampere, 125 volt, back and side wired, 3 wire grounding, UL listed as complying with the requirements of NEC Article 250.146, NEMA 5-20R configuration.
C.
Ground-fault circuit-interrupting (GFCI) duplex receptacles shall be 20 Ampere, 125 volt "feed-through" type, NEMA 5-20R configuration.
D.
Tamper resistant duplex receptacles shall be 20 Ampere, 125 volt, 3 wire grounding, UL listed in accordance with NEC 406.11 and 210.52, NEMA 5-20R configuration.
E.
Weatherproof Duplex Receptacles shall be 20 Ampere, 125 volt or 250 volt, UL listed as weather resistant type per NEC 406.
F.
All receptacles shall be white, unless on emergency power, in which case receptacles shall be red.
G.
Refer to the Drawings for specification of specialty receptacles.
PLATES A.
Plates for flush devices in interior partitions shall be stainless steel.
B.
Plates for flush devices on concrete block walls shall match others but be "Jumbo" plates.
C.
Plates for voice/data communication boxes shall match wiring device plates in material, and be as specified in Section 27 05 29, "Voice/Data Communication Raceway System" or Section 27 15 00, "Voice/Data Communication Wiring System."
D.
Plates for devices in surface fittings shall be cadmium plated steel surface covers. Covers shall fit without overlap and have round corners.
E.
Plates for specialty receptacles required for auxiliary systems shall be satin stainless steel, furnished and specified with the device.
F.
Plates for future system outlets shall be blank plates matching device plates in quality and finish.
WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES
26 27 26 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 2.05
2.06
COVER ASSEMBLIES A.
Wiring devices in wet locations shall have hinged, gasketed cast aluminum coverplates of a color matching adjacent wall finish.
B.
Wiring devices subject to wet locations while in use shall be provided with NEMA 3R cover assemblies UL listed for wet locations while in use. Cover assemblies shall use a vertically-lifting "canopy" to protect the wiring device(s). Cover assemblies shall be standard size, one (1) or two (2) gang as required with gaskets between the hinged cover and mounting plate/base to assure proper seal.
OCCUPANCY SENSORS A.
Ceiling mounted low voltage dual technology occupancy sensors shall contain both PIR and ultrasonic technologies, adjustable 15 second to 15 minute time delay, integrated adjustable light level sensor, adjustable sensitivities, LED indicator for both technologies, isolated relay, 24 VDC operable, 277 volt power pack, 1200 square feet - wide angle coverage. Watt Stopper DT-200L, white color. Provide minimum one (1) power pack for every room.
B.
Wall mounted line voltage passive infrared occupancy sensor shall have adjustable 30 second to 30 minute time delay, manual off switches for bilevel lighting control, integrated adjustable light level sensor, adjustable sensitivity, LED indicator, 900 square feet - 180 degree coverage. Color shall be white.
C.
Power packs shall be 277 volt primary with self contained transformer and 20 Ampere relay contacts. Watt Stopper A277-E.
PART 3 3.01
3.02
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
APPLICATION A.
Provide outlets as noted on the Drawings and herein described.
B.
Provide GFCI type outlets in all bathrooms, anywhere within 6 feet of sinks, lavatories, mop basins, and in all exterior locations.
INSTALLATION A.
Install wiring devices as indicated, in compliance with the Manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation," and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements.
B.
Coordinate installation of wiring devices with other work, including painting, electrical box and wiring work, as necessary.
C.
Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes, which are clean, free from excess building materials, dirt and debris.
WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES
26 27 26 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
3.03
01-13-2012
D.
All devices shall be connected to conductors using the side wiring terminal screw connections. Devices with voltages higher than 120 volt shall have two (2) layers of electrical tape applied over the exposed side terminals. Provide electrically continuous, tight grounding connections for wiring devices, as required by NEC Article 250.
E.
Delay installation of wiring devices and wall plates until after painting work is completed. Wiring devices may be installed prior to painting where protective plastic covers are used. All wiring devices and covers shall be clean and free of paint upon completion of work.
F.
Upon installation of wall plates and receptacles, advise other Contractors regarding proper and cautious use of convenience outlets. At time of Contract Completion, replace those items which have been damaged, including those burned and scored by faulty plugs.
G.
Install matching device plates on all devices. Devices shown grouped on the Drawings shall be ganged together with one plate.
H.
Ceiling mounted occupancy sensors shall not be installed within 3 feet of an HVAC diffuser. Provide lens shields as required to prevent nuisance operation of occupancy sensors. Locate or aim sensors so they sense all areas of the room, but not out the doorway.
I.
Install engraved flush switch plates at all locations indicating function of switches for special applications and at every location where more than two switches are ganged together. Engraved switch plates shall have 1/8 inch black filled letters.
J.
Provide permanently installed barriers between switches ganged in outlet boxes where the voltage between adjacent switches exceeds 300 volts.
K.
Run neutral conductor to all dimmers.
L.
Receptacle plates shall be labeled with permanent marker on the back with panelboard and circuit number.
M.
All unused outlet boxes shall have blank coverplates installed.
N.
Wiring from ground-fault circuit-interrupters shall not occupy the same raceways with wiring from non-ground-fault interrupting type devices.
O.
Occupancy sensors to be initially set at 75% maximum sensitivity and 5 minute time delay. Locate all occupancy sensor power packs and slave packs above lay-in ceiling at room entry location.
P.
Tamper resistant duplex receptacles shall have their coverplates attached with tamper proof screws.
OCCUPANCY SENSOR OPERATION VERIFICATION A.
Contractor shall verify proper operation of every occupancy sensor in building at completion of project. Provide appropriate masking on sensor where line-of-site extends out of room and causes nuisance operation when room is vacant.
WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES
26 27 26 - 5
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 3.04
3.05
01-13-2012
SPARE PARTS A.
Furnish spare occupancy sensors in a quantity of 5% of total (of each type) used in building (minimum of two (2) of each type).
B.
Division 26 Contractor shall include in his/her bid an allowance for furnishing and installing five (5) additional occupancy sensors of each type (with average length of conduit and wire) at completion of the project as directed by the Architect. If all are not used, remaining value shall be credited to the Owner or turned over to the Owner as additional spares per Owner's discretion.
C.
Two screwdrivers for any specialty fasteners used.
TESTING A.
Prior to energizing circuitry, test wiring devices for electrical continuity, short circuits, and proper polarity connections.
B.
Verify that occupancy sensors are turning off lighting when spaces are unoccupied. Each sensor shall be tested for proper operation with HVAC system operational. END OF SECTION
WIRING DEVICES AND PLATES
26 27 26 - 6
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 28 13 FUSES PART 1 1.01
1.02
DESCRIPTION A.
Furnish and install 600 volt and 250 volt fuses as herein specified and sized as shown on the Drawings.
B.
Provide all accessories as specified.
C.
All fuses shall be provided by the same Manufacturer.
D.
For fuses greater than 600 volts, refer to appropriate equipment Specification Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.03
1.04
All equipment shall be UL listed and labeled and in accordance with applicable NEMA and ANSI Standards.
SUBMITTALS A.
For Review: 1. Product data sheets of fuses and accessories 2. Fuse curves and selectivity ratio charts
B.
To be included in Record and Information Manuals: 1. One (1) copy of each approved submittal 2. Certificate of Material Receipt
MANUFACTURERS A.
PART 2 2.01
GENERAL
Fuses 1. Bussmann 2. Littelfuse PRODUCTS
FUSES - 600 AMPERES AND BELOW A.
FUSES
Fuses shall be rated 600 volt for nominal 480 volt systems and 250 volt for nominal 240 or 208 volt systems. Fuses shall be UL Class RK, current limiting, 200,000 Ampere interrupting rating, dual element, with minimum time delay of 10 seconds at 500 percent rating. 1. Bussmann LPN-RK (250 volt) or LPS-RK (600 volt)
26 28 13 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
2.02
B.
In-line fuse and fuse holders for high intensity discharge luminaires shall be 600 volt, UL Class CC, current limiting, 200,000 Ampere interrupting rating, single element non-time delay fuses in a waterproof single or two (2) pole fuse holder. 1. Bussmann KTK-R in HEB or HEY holder
C.
Motor control circuits shall use 600 volt, UL Class CC, current limiting, 200,000 Ampere interrupting rating, single element, non-time delay fuses. 1. Bussmann KTK-R
D.
In-line fuse and holder combination units for fluorescent luminaires shall be glass ferrule fuses in a two (2) piece insulating fuse holder with 6 inch pigtail conductors. 1. Bussmann GLR with HLR holder
FUSE REDUCERS A.
2.03
3.02
Fuse reducers shall be Bussmann 200-R or 600-R Series.
SPARE FUSE CABINET A.
Spare fuse cabinet shall be heavy 0.080" gauge aluminum wall mountable cabinet with internal shelves, 30" x 24" x 12", locking handle with cylinder type lock.
B.
Bussmann SFC
PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Install fuses in all fusible devices with name and fuse size facing outward.
B.
Install spare fuse cabinets in main electrical room. Provide a list of all spare fuse sizes, types and quantities on inside of door.
C.
Install fuse reducers in equipment where required.
SPARE PARTS A.
Provide spare fuses in the following quantities: 1. 600 Amperes and below - 10% of quantity used (minimum three (3)) of each voltage and current rating and UL Class
B.
Refer to Section 26 00 99, "Requirements for Contract Completion." END OF SECTION
FUSES
26 28 13 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 28 16 SAFETY SWITCHES
PART 1 1.01
1.02
DESCRIPTION A.
Furnish and install safety switches where shown on the Drawings, and where required including all accessories and mounting hardware.
B.
Refer to Section 26 28 17, "Elevator Safety Switches" for safety switches used for elevator controllers.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.03
1.04
All equipment shall be UL listed and labeled and in accordance with applicable NEMA and ANSI Standards.
SUBMITTALS A.
For Review: 1. Product data sheets of safety switches
B.
To be included in Record and Information Manuals: 1. One (1) copy of each approved submittal
MANUFACTURERS A.
Safety Switches 1. Square D Company 2. Cutler-Hammer Electric Corporation 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. General Electric Company
B.
Equipment shall be furnished by the Manufacturer supplying major components of the electrical distribution system.
PART 2 2.01
GENERAL
PRODUCTS
SAFETY SWITCHES - NON-FUSIBLE A.
Safety switches shall have heavy-duty, single-throw, quick-make, quick-break, visible knife blade operators mounted in hinged cover steel enclosure. Lugs shall be listed for 75 degrees C ampacity aluminum or copper wire.
B.
Switches shall be clearly labeled for "ON" and "OFF" handle positions. Cover shall have defeatable safety interlock with handle to prevent inadvertent opening when in the "ON" position. Handle shall be pad lockable in the "OFF" position.
SAFETY SWITCHES
26 28 16 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
2.02
C.
Safety switches to be horsepower rated 600 volt AC.
D.
Switches shall have ground lug kit and neutral when required.
SAFETY SWITCHES - FUSIBLE A.
2.03
PART 3
3.02
Fusible safety switches shall be as specified in Paragraph 2.01 and with the following additional features: 1. Safety switches rated 600 Amperes and less shall have spring reinforced, plated fuse clips with rejection feature for Class R fuses. 2. Safety switches rated larger than 600 Amperes shall have provisions for Class L fuses. 3. Short circuit-interrupting rating shall be 200,000 Amperes RMS symmetrical. 4. Safety switches to be horsepower rated 240 volt AC for 208 or 240 volt usage, and 600 volt AC for 480 volt usage.
AC MANUAL TOGGLE DISCONNECT SWITCHES A.
3.01
01-13-2012
Toggle disconnect switch shall be snap switch with copper mechanism, silver alloy contacts, 10,000 Ampere withstand rating, in a NEMA 1 enclosure. 1, 2, or 3 pole with amperages of 30 to 60 Amperes, as required for load connected.
EXECUTION
APPLICATION A.
Provide the following NEMA rated enclosure types in these locations: 1. Interior - 1 2. Exterior - 3R
B.
Provide AC manual toggle disconnect switch in NEMA 1 enclosure for disconnecting means located at instantaneous electric water heaters.
INSTALLATION A.
Use flexible conduit to and from safety switches where vibration isolation is required.
B.
Install safety switches securely to building structure. Install safety switches on freestanding metal framing system support where mounting to building structure is not feasible or where shown on the Drawings. Framing system shall be galvanized steel.
C.
Safety switches located downstream of variable frequency drives shall have auxiliary control power interlock switch on handle. Run wiring to variable frequency drives.
D.
Provide fuses sized in accordance with Equipment Manufacturer's data plate.
E.
Provide nameplates in accordance with Section 26 05 53, "Electrical Identification."
F.
Touch-up all scratches on enclosure after installation. END OF SECTION
SAFETY SWITCHES
26 28 16 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 28 17 ELEVATOR SAFETY SWITCHES
PART 1 1.01
DESCRIPTION A.
1.02
1.04
All equipment shall be UL listed and labeled and in accordance with applicable NEMA and ANSI Standards.
SUBMITTALS A.
For Review: 1. Product data sheets of elevator safety switches 2. Control circuit and accessory wiring diagram
B.
To be included in Record and Information Manuals: 1. One (1) copy of each approved submittal
MANUFACTURERS A.
PART 2 2.01
Furnish and install shunt-trip fused safety switches for elevator controllers where shown on the Drawings, including all accessories and mounting hardware.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.03
GENERAL
Elevator Safety Switches 1. Cooper Bussmann 2. Littelfuse 3. Eaton Corporation
PRODUCTS
ELEVATOR SAFETY SWITCHES A.
Elevator safety switch shall be a fusible safety switch with shunt trip and fire safety interface to allow a single point tie in with the fire alarm system.
B.
Elevator safety switch shall be provided in NEMA 1 enclosure with all necessary relays, control transformer, key to test switch, "ON" green pilot light, 1 pole normally closed mechanical interlock for elevator recall, and fire alarm voltage monitoring relay.
C.
The control power transformer shall be provided with primary and secondary fuses. Primary voltage shall be 480 volt or 208 volt, as applicable. Secondary voltage shall be 120 volts.
ELEVATOR SAFETY SWITCHES
26 28 17 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING D.
The isolation relay shall be 3 pole, double-throw, 10 Ampere, 120 volt. The coil voltage of the isolation relay shall be 120 volt. A normally open dry contact in the fire alarm system panel shall energize the isolation relay and activate the shunt trip solenoid.
E.
Elevator safety switch shall be clearly labeled for "ON" and "OFF" handle positions. Cover shall have defeatable safety interlock with handle to prevent inadvertent opening when in the "ON" position. Handle shall be pad lockable in the "OFF" position.
F.
Elevator safety switch shall be horsepower rated 600 volt AC. Amperage rating shall be based on the elevator manufacturer's requirements for Bussmann LPJ fuses. Short-circuit current rating shall be 200,000 Amperes.
G.
Elevator safety switch shall have ground lug kit and neutral when required.
H.
Elevator safety switch shall be Cooper Bussmann Power Module or Littelfuse POWRSwitch.
PART 3 3.01
EXECUTION
APPLICATION A.
3.02
01-13-2012
Provide Elevator Safety Switch in elevator machine room for each elevator controller.
INSTALLATION A.
Equipment shall be installed and handled in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Install elevator safety switch securely to building structure.
B.
Use flexible conduit to and from safety switches where vibration isolation is required.
C.
Provide control wiring to elevator battery release system.
D.
Provide fuses sized in accordance with Equipment Manufacturer's data plate.
E.
Provide nameplates in accordance with Section 26 05 53, "Electrical Identification."
F.
Touch-up all scratches on enclosure after installation. END OF SECTION
ELEVATOR SAFETY SWITCHES
26 28 17 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 28 19 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 1.01
1.02
DESCRIPTION A.
Furnish and install circuit breakers in switchboards, distribution panelboards, and separate enclosures for overcurrent protection for panelboards, transformers and equipment, as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Provide all accessories as necessary.
B.
Short circuit ratings shall be as shown on the Drawings.
C.
Refer to Section 26 24 20, "Panelboards" for circuit breakers in panelboards.
D.
Provide frame size of circuit breaker with lug size as required to accommodate feeder size as shown on the Drawings.
E.
Provide frame size, plug size, and trip units as necessary to meet short circuit ratings, and to provide selective coordination on emergency power distribution systems.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.03
1.04
GENERAL
All equipment shall be UL listed and labeled and in accordance with applicable NEMA and ANSI Standards.
SUBMITTALS A.
For Review: 1. Product data sheets for all circuit breakers and components 2. Wiring diagrams
B.
To be included in Record and Information Manuals: 1. One (1) copy of each approved submittal 2. Test results 3. Manufacturer Representative's signed Certificate of Inspection and Approval
MANUFACTURERS A.
Circuit Breakers 1. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 2. Cutler-Hammer/Eaton Corporation 3. Square D Company 4. General Electric Company
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
26 28 19 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING PART 2 2.01
2.02
01-13-2012
PRODUCTS
MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH THERMOMAGNETIC TRIP A.
Molded case circuit breakers shall be bolt-on type operated by a toggle type handle and shall have quick-make/quick-break over-center switching mechanism that is mechanically trip free from the handle so that the contacts cannot by held closed against short circuits and abnormal currents. Tripping due to overload or short circuit shall be clearly indicated by the handle automatically assuming a position midway between the manual ON and OFF positions.
B.
Breakers must be completely enclosed in a molded case. Non-interchangeable trip breakers shall have their covers sealed; interchangeable trip breakers shall have the trip unit sealed to prevent tampering. Ampere ratings shall be clearly visible. Arc extinction must be accomplished by means of arc chutes.
C.
Molded case breakers shall be of the thermal magnetic standard type that provides inverse time delay overload and instantaneous short circuit protection by means of a thermal magnetic element.
D.
Single phase circuit breakers shall be balanced among the three (3) phases.
E.
All circuit breakers shall have an integral lock-out/tag-out means.
F.
High magnetic withstand circuit breaker type shall utilize higher trip levels of 18 to 20 times the breaker handle rating.
MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH SOLID STATE TRIP A.
Circuit protective devices shall be molded case type circuit breakers UL Listed for 80% continuous current with full function trip system. Frame/Sensor ampere ratings shall be as shown on the Drawings. The ampere rating shall be clearly marked on the front of the circuit breaker. Circuit breakers shall be of fixed construction.
B.
Circuit breakers shall be constructed using glass-reinforced insulating material providing high dielectric strength. Current carrying components shall be completely isolated from the trip unit and accessory mounting area. Breakers shall have common tripping of all poles and shall be trip free. The breakers shall have quick-make/quick-break contacts with an over center toggle operating mechanism. All circuit breakers shall be equipped with electrical accessories as noted on the Drawings.
C.
The integral electronic trip system shall be independent of any external power source and shall contain electronic components to measure and time the output from internal current sensors and initiate automatic tripping action. The continuous ampere rating of the circuit breaker shall be determined by the combination of the ampere rating switch position, and the frame/sensor size of the circuit breaker. The resulting ampere rating shall be clearly marked on the face of the circuit breaker. Provide a means to seal the trip unit adjustments to discourage unauthorized tampering to meet the requirements of NEC Article 240.6.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
26 28 19 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING D.
Provide the following time/current curve shaping adjustment to maximize system selective coordination. Each adjustment shall have discrete settings and shall be independent from all other adjustments: 1. Adjustable Long Time Ampere Rating and Delay 2. Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay (delay includes I2t in and I2t out) 3. Fixed Instantaneous Trip 4. Ground fault trip (where shown on one line diagram)
E.
Provide local visual trip indication for overload, short circuit occurrences. The trip system shall include a memory circuit to detect intermittent overcurrent conditions. Each circuit breaker trip system shall be equipped with an externally accessible test port for use with a Universal Test Set. No disassembly of the circuit breaker is required for testing. Test set shall be capable of verifying the operation of all trip functions with or without tripping the circuit breaker.
F.
All circuit breakers shall have an integral lock-out/tag-out means.
PART 3 3.01
3.02
3.03
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
APPLICATION A.
15 Ampere through 250 Ampere circuit breakers shall be molded case with thermomagnetic trip sensor and mechanism.
B.
300 Ampere and above through 1600 Ampere circuit breakers shall be molded case with solid state trip sensor and mechanism.
C.
Provide auxiliary contacts on circuit breakers used to feed elevator equipment.
INSTALLATION A.
Install circuit breakers in switchboards, distribution panelboards or enclosures as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Provide nameplates in accordance with Section 26 05 53, "Electrical Identification."
TESTING A.
Perform a complete functional test of all features of circuit breakers in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. Submit written documentation in Record and Information Manuals. END OF SECTION
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
26 28 19 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 29 13 MOTOR CONTROLLERS
PART 1 1.01
DESCRIPTION A.
1.02
1.03
1.04
Furnish and install motor starters and combination motor starter/disconnect switches as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
All equipment shall be UL listed and labeled and in accordance with applicable NEMA and ANSI Standards.
B.
Motor starters shall be sized in accordance with NEMA Standards.
SUBMITTALS A.
For Review: 1. Product data sheets 2. Wiring diagrams
B.
To be included in Record and Information Manuals: 1. One (1) copy of each approved submittal
C.
Fuses 1. Refer to Section 26 28 13, "Fuses."
MANUFACTURERS A.
PART 2 2.01
GENERAL
Motor Controllers 1. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 2. Cutler-Hammer Electric Corporation 3. Square D Company 4. Allen - Bradley Company, Inc. 5. General Electric Company
PRODUCTS
FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER MANUAL STARTERS A.
Fractional horsepower manual starters shall be toggle type quick-make/quick-break switch with double break silver alloy contacts, melting alloy type thermal overload relay, red pilot light, in flush or surface mounted with stainless steel coverplate and handle guard/lockoff.
MOTOR CONTROLLERS
26 29 13 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 2.02
2.03
MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTERS A.
Magnetic motor starters shall be across-the-line magnetic type with double break silver alloy contacts, molded coil and solid state type overload relay with phase loss protection. Starters shall have four (4) external field convertible auxiliary contacts. Refer to Sequence of Operation in Division 23 for type.
B.
Starters shall be 3 pole, 3 phase with solid state overload relays, 3 position hand-off-auto (H-O-A) switch, reset button, oversized control power transformer (50 watts extra capacity) with primary and secondary fusing, and green pilot light in NEMA rated enclosure.
COMBINATION MOTOR STARTER/DISCONNECT SWITCHES A.
Combination motor starter/disconnect switches shall be across-the-line magnetic type with double break silver alloy contacts, molded coil, solid state overload relay with phase loss protection. Starters shall have four (4) external field convertible auxiliary contacts. Refer to Sequence of Operation in Division 23 for type.
B.
Combination motor starter/disconnect switches shall be 3 pole, 3 phase with solid state overload relays, three position hand-off-auto (H-O-A) switch, reset button, oversized control power transformer (100 watts extra capacity) with primary and secondary fusing, and green pilot light in NEMA rated enclosure.
C.
Combination motor starters shall have a visible blade disconnect switch with fuse blocks. The disconnect handle used on combination motor starters shall always be in control of the disconnect device with the door opened or closed. The disconnect handle shall be clearly marked as to whether the disconnect device is "ON" or "OFF," and shall include a two (2) color handle grip, the black side visible in the "OFF" position indicating a safe condition and the red side visible in the "ON" position indicating an unsafe or danger condition.
PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Motor locations shown on the Drawings are approximate. Obtain exact location of motors from Contractor installing the motor driven equipment. DO NOT ROUGH-IN BY SCALING THE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS.
B.
Final connections to equipment shall be made using liquid-tight flexible steel conduit.
C.
Install fabricated steel floor stands for mounting starters where loads are in the center of a room. Floor stands shall be metal framing system or 2 inch steel angle with galvanized finish.
D.
Wall-mounted switches and motor starters shall be grouped together and installed on a 3/4 inch fire retardant plywood backboard.
MOTOR CONTROLLERS
26 29 13 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
E.
Provide appropriate solid state overload relay sized to match each motor nameplate rating. Overload relay for motors with power factor correction shall be adjusted according to ammeter readings of motor circuit.
F.
Provide fuses in all fuse holders in accordance with Section 26 28 13, "Fuses."
G.
Provide the following NEMA rated enclosure types in these locations: 1. Interior - 1 2. Exterior - 3R
H.
Provide nameplates in accordance with Section 26 05 53, "Electrical Identification."
I.
Provide control wiring as shown and/or described on the Drawings. END OF SECTION
MOTOR CONTROLLERS
26 29 13 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 32 10 EMERGENCY GENERATOR (DIESEL OUTSIDE)
PART 1 1.01
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION A.
Furnish and install complete diesel fueled standby Emergency Generator as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Provide accessories and equipment as required for a complete system. Emergency Generator shall be completely factory built and tested and delivered to the site ready for installation. All equipment herein specified shall be supplied as an integral package by one (1) supplier.
B.
As a minimum, equipment ratings shall be as shown on the Drawings. Actual equipment size shall be determined by the Manufacturer based on computer-generated calculations for building loads as follows (with single step block transferred unless noted otherwise): Lighting: Heating: Non-Linear Loads: Receptacle & Misc.: Motors: Spare Capacity: Total:
15 kW @ 0.95 pf kW @ 1.00 pf kW @ 0.90 pf 5 kW @ 0.80 pf 120 kW @ 0.80 pf 20 kW 160 kW (200 kW unit size @ 80%)
Calculations shall be based on the following operating conditions: Maximum Motor Starting Voltage Dip: Altitude: Ambient Temperature Range: Engine Speed: Maximum Loading: C.
30% 900 feet -10 degrees F to 105 degrees F 1800 RPM 80%
Emergency generators shall meet the following criteria as defined by NFPA 110: Type 10 (10 second maximum time of power outage on emergency system) Class 4 (4 hour minimum on-site fuel storage) Level 1 (life safety requirements)
EMERGENCY GENERATOR (DIESEL OUTSIDE)
26 32 10 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING D.
Division of work shall be as indicated below: SPECIFICATION DIVISION Furnished Installed Connected Under Under Under
ITEM 1. Engine Generator and Radiator
26
26
(See Below)
2. Electric Starting Motor, Automatic Start/Stop Panel and Cranking Panel
26
26
26
3. Batteries, Battery Electrolyte, Charger and Lube Oil
26
26
26
4. Gauges and Instrument Panels
26
26
26
5. Diesel, Fuel Piping, Strainers, Fuel Tank, Fusible Link, Check and Shut-Off Valve
22
26
26
6. Muffler, Exhaust Flex Connectors, Exhaust Piping
26
26
26
7. Ethylene Glycol
26
26
26
8. Steel Spring Vibration Isolators (95%)
26
26
26
9. Fuel Filters, Fuel Piping Flex and Connectors
26
26
26
10. Concrete Pads
3*
3*
3*
*
1.02
01-13-2012
Division 26 Contractor is responsible for coordinating the concrete pad requirements with the General Trades Contractor.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Emergency generator and all components shall be UL Listed and labeled, manufactured in accordance with applicable ANSI and NEMA Standards, and in accordance with the following codes: 1. NEC Article 700 2. NFPA 110 Emergency and Standby Power Systems
EMERGENCY GENERATOR (DIESEL OUTSIDE)
26 32 10 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 1.03
1.04
1.05
SUBMITTALS A.
For Review: 1. Product data sheets of all components 2. Dimensioned Drawings of emergency generators 3. Computer generated sizing results 4. Wiring Diagrams 5. Operating parameters 6. Installation instructions
B.
To be included in Record and Information Manuals: 1. One (1) copy of each approved submittal 2. Factory test report 3. Certificate of System Completion
MANUFACTURERS A.
Engine 1. Cummins-Onan 2. Kohler 3. Caterpillar
B.
Generators 1. Cummins-Onan 2. Kohler 3. Caterpillar
C.
Battery Charger 1. Cummins-Onan 2. Kohler 3. Caterpillar
OPERATION A.
Emergency generator shall be signaled to start by each automatic transfer switch and shall reach stable voltage and frequency and pickup load within 10 seconds after loss of normal power.
B.
Emergency systems with fire pumps shall have transfer times adjusted so that the fire pump transfers after life safety loads, but before all other non-essential loads.
PART 2 2.01
01-13-2012
PRODUCTS
ENGINE A.
Engine shall be stationary internal combustion, 1800 RPM, liquid cooled, turbo charged, intercooled, No. 2 Diesel fueled.
EMERGENCY GENERATOR (DIESEL OUTSIDE)
26 32 10 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
B.
Governor shall be isochronous electronic providing voltage regulation between + 2.0% and 0% deviation in frequency regulation.
C.
Cooling system shall consist of engine mounted radiator and pusher type blower fan, water pump, thermostat, shroud, duct adapter flange, water filter. Provide 50% concentration of ethylene glycol.
D.
Starting system shall be 24 VDC electric with lead acid batteries of capacity to provide 90 seconds of cranking power at -20 degrees F. System shall be complete with battery rack, cables and clamps.
E.
Battery charging system shall consist of 24 VDC, engine mounted alternator, and 120 volt automatic current limiting battery charger. Charger shall feature overload protection, DC ammeter and voltmeter, fuse, float/equalize switch, 2% voltage regulation. Charger shall be capable of fully recharging the batteries within 24 hours.
F.
Thermostatically controlled, 4000 watt, 208 volt, engine jacket water heater shall be provided with unit, connected through oil pressure switch for automatic cut-out during engine operation. Heater shall maintain temperature of engine at a minimum of 90 degrees F.
G.
Positive displacement, mechanical full pressure lubrication oil pump, full flow oil filters with replaceable elements, oil cooler, pressure relief valve, dipstick oil level indicator, and oil drain valve with hose extension.
H.
Dry type air cleaner with replaceable element.
I.
Fuel system shall include a mechanical, positive displacement fuel pump, fuel/water separator, filters, solenoid and shutoff valves. Provide wire reinforced flexible fuel lines at engine.
J.
Exhaust System shall include: 1. Exhaust Silencer - Provide a critical grade silencer, including stainless steel flexible exhaust fittings, properly sized according to the Manufacturer's recommendation. 2. Bird screen, condensation trap and drain.
K.
Engine/generators shall be mounted on a steel base with 95% spring type vibration isolators.
L.
Engine shall be capable of single step load pickup of 100% nameplate kW.
M.
Batteries shall be set on 120 volt mat heaters with thermostat designed to maintain a minimum battery temperature of 50 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F.
N.
A 300 gallon sub-base fuel tank shall be provided. Unit shall be 12 gauge steel, 7 gauge channel side supports, 1/4 inch drain, 1 1/2 inch fuel level gauge; 2 inch locking fill cap; 1 1/4 inch vent, 3/8 inch suction and return connections; tank shall be double wall with rupture leak detector switch. Tank shall have a low fuel level float switch in addition to fuel level gauge. Tank shall have a fuel level sensor for operation of a remote fuel gauge. Fill pipe shall have a spill bucket with manual drain, 90% fill level overflow alarm.
EMERGENCY GENERATOR (DIESEL OUTSIDE)
26 32 10 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 2.02
01-13-2012
GENERATOR A.
The AC generators shall be: synchronous, four pole, 12 lead reconnectable, revolving field, drip-proof construction, single prelubricated sealed bearing, air cooled by a direct drive centrifugal blower fan, and directly connected to the engine with flexible drive disc(s). The stator shall have skewed laminations of insulated electrical grade steel, two-thirds pitch windings. The rotor shall have amortissure (damper) windings. The rotor shall be dynamically balanced. The exciter shall be brushless, 3 phase, with full wave silicon diodes mounted on the rotating shaft and a surge suppresser connected in parallel with the field winding.
B.
All insulation system components shall meet NEMA MG1 standard temperature limits for Class H insulation system. Actual temperature rise measured by resistance method at full load shall not exceed 105 degrees C. The main generator and exciter insulation systems must be suitably impregnated for operation in severe environments for resistance to sand, salt and sea spray.
C.
A permanent magnet generator (PMG) shall provide excitation power to the automatic voltage regulator for immunity from voltage distortion caused by non-linear SCR controlled loads on the generators. The PMG shall sustain main field excitation power for optimum motor starting and to sustain short-circuit current for selective operation and coordination of system overcurrent devices.
D.
The automatic voltage regulator shall be temperature compensated, solid-state design. The voltage regulator shall be equipped with 3 phase RMS sensing. The regulator shall control buildup of AC generators voltage to provide a linear rise and limit overshoot. Over-voltage protection shall sense the AC generators output voltage and in the event of regulator failure or loss of reference, shut down regulator output on a sustained over voltage of one (1) second duration. Over-excitation protection shall sense regulator output and shut down regulator output if overloads exceed 10 seconds duration. Both over-voltage and overexcitation protection shutdowns shall be latched, requiring the AC generators to be stopped for reset.
E.
Generators shall be capable of providing 300% of rated current for 10 seconds in a short circuit condition for selective tripping of downstream overcurrent protection devices.
F.
Mainline circuit breaker shall be molded case thermomagnetic rated at 140 degrees F and sized as shown on the Drawings. Circuit breaker shall have an interrupting rating adequate for the emergency generators. Breaker shall have a 24 VDC shunt-trip operator wired through engine safety shutdowns. Generators/Exciter field circuit breakers shall not be used for these requirements.
G.
Total harmonic distortion shall not exceed 5% of rated voltage with no single harmonic exceeding 3%. Telephone influence factor shall not exceed 50 per NEMA MG-1-22 .43.
H.
Generator shall have a 120 volt strip heater.
EMERGENCY GENERATOR (DIESEL OUTSIDE)
26 32 10 - 5
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 2.03
2.04
01-13-2012
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROL A.
Instrument panel shall be mounted on the generator with vibration isolators and have the following functions and displays: 1. Panel Illumination Lamp with ON/OFF Switch 2. Engine Oil Pressure Gauge 3. Coolant Temperature Gauge 4. DC Voltmeter 5. Battery Charging Ammeter 6. Running Time Meter 7. Voltage Adjusting Rheostat 8. AC Voltmeter 9. AC Ammeter 10. Frequency Meter 11. Phase Selector Switch for Voltmeter and Ammeter 12. Overcrank Shutdown Indicating Lamp 13. Overspeed Shutdown Indicating Lamp 14. Low Oil Pressure 15. High Engine Temperature Shutdown Indicating Lamp 16. Low Oil Pressure Shutdown Indicating Lamp 17. Low Engine Temperature Indicating Lamp 18. Control Switch - Not in Automatic Position - Indicating Lamp 19. NFPA 110 Alarm Horn 20. High Engine Temperature Pre-Alarm Indicating Lamp 21. Battery Charger Malfunction Indicating Lamp 22. Battery Low Voltage Indicating Lamp 23. Lamp Test Switch 24. Auxiliary Alarm Contact 25. Alarm Silence Switch 26. Low Fuel Pressure Indicating Lamp
B.
Instrument panel shall be battery set powered.
C.
Instrument panel shall control the emergency generators in the following manner: 1. RUN/STOP/AUTO Control Toggle Switch 2. 15 second Crank/Reset - 75 Second Lockout Cranking Cycle 3. Engine lockout due to overcrank, overspeed, low oil pressure, high engine temperature, or remote manual stop.
REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR A.
Remote Annunciators shall be flush mounted located where shown on the Drawings and have the following functions and displays: 1. Normal Power Available Indicator Light 2. Emergency Generator Running Indicator Light 3. High Battery Voltage Indicator Light 4. Low Battery Voltage Indicator Light 5. Normal Battery Voltage Indicator Light 6. Battery Charger Malfunction Indicator Light 7. Alarm Horn Silence Switch 8. Alarm Horn
EMERGENCY GENERATOR (DIESEL OUTSIDE)
26 32 10 - 6
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 2.05
NEMA 12 non-metallic box with maintained contact pushbutton with flip lid covers. Pilla electrical products model GS120RP2.
OUTDOOR WEATHER HOUSING A.
Emergency Generator shall be enclosed with a 14 gauge steel insulated housing and hinged and key-locked panels. Housing panels shall be factory assembled to emergency generator base and radiator cowling. All steel shall be primed and enameled.
B.
Housing shall have within it a 120 volt incandescent luminaire and toggle switch located adjacent to controller.
PART 3 3.01
Light Test Switch Overcrank Shutdown Indicator Light Low Engine Temperature Indicator Light High Engine Temperature Pre-Alarm Indicator Light High Engine Temperature Indicator Light Low Oil Pressure - Pre Alarm Indicator Light Low Oil Pressure Indicator Light Overspeed Shutdown Indicator Light Low Fuel Level Indicator Light Control Switch Not In AUTO Position Indicator Light Emergency Generator Supplying Load Indicator Light
EMERGENCY GENERATOR REMOTE STOP BUTTON A.
2.06
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Install Emergency Generators as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions. Emergency Generator shall be bolted to concrete housekeeping pad through vibration isolators.
B.
Install all accessories and wiring not factory installed including: 1. Batteries, Cables and Rack 2. Battery Charger 3. Remote Annunciator Panels 4. Remote Fuel Gauge
C.
Provide power to jacket water heaters, battery charger and motor operated dampers from a normal power panelboard.
D.
Provide power to enclosure luminaires from an emergency power panelboard.
E.
Provide all control wiring to remote annunciator.
EMERGENCY GENERATOR (DIESEL OUTSIDE)
26 32 10 - 7
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
3.02
01-13-2012
F.
Provide control wiring run in a separate conduit from power wiring from each automatic transfer switch and fire pump controller transfer switch to emergency generator for engine start signal.
G.
Install mufflers, connectors, and piping engine.
H.
Provide a sign mounted on the service entrance equipment indicating the type and location of on-site emergency power sources as required in NEC 700.8.
I.
Provide all fuel required for testing and a complete fill up of fuel tanks at completion of testing.
J.
Provide a unit battery pack luminaire with two (2) quartz halogen heads with 90 minute capacity, mounted in the emergency generator housing powered from an emergency power panelboard.
K.
Provide a sign at the emergency generator grounding points as required by NEC 700.8.
L.
Provide driven ground rod at generator. Bond generator frame to driven ground rod.
TESTING A.
Provide a certified factory production test record indicating all of the following testing results on the emergency generator: 1. Maximum power generated 2. Voltage and frequency regulation 3. Governor response 4. Single step load pickup and voltage dip 5. Safety shutdown devices operation
B.
Provide on-site acceptance testing as described below. All testing shall be performed under the supervision of a factory-trained technician. The Contractor shall give 48 hours notice to the Architect, Engineer, the Inspecting Authority having jurisdiction, and the Owner, for their attendance option. Provide OSHA required safety equipment for all personnel present during the test period. Provide resistive load banks as required. The testing procedure shall be as follows: COMPONENT AND FUNCTIONAL TEST 1. Perform all manufacturer recommended tests to insure that all safety shutdowns and control devices are wired and function properly, including manual shutdowns. 2. Perform a "cycle crank" test to verify crank/rest/lockout control functions. 3. Perform testing as required by Section 26 36 23, "Automatic Transfer Switches" and in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations to insure all safeties function properly. 4. Verify that failure of normal power to each automatic transfer switch will cause emergency generators to start and pickup that load, and the subsequently shutdown the emergency generators (after cool down) once normal power is restored.
EMERGENCY GENERATOR (DIESEL OUTSIDE)
26 32 10 - 8
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
LOAD TEST 1. With emergency generators in a "cold start" condition and load banks equal to 100% of emergency generators capacity connected and distributed equally to the load side of all automatic transfer switches, initiate a normal power failure by opening the normal power disconnecting means feeding the emergency branch. 2. Observe and record the time-delay on start. 3. Observe and record the cranking time until starting occurs. 4. Observe and record the time required to achieve operating speed. 5. Observe and record the voltage and frequency overshoot. 6. Observe and record the time required to achieve steady state condition with all transfer switches on emergency. 7. Observe and record the voltage, frequency and amperes. 8. Observe and record the oil pressure, coolant temperature, battery charge rate at 5 minute intervals. 9. Continue test for a duration of 2 hours, switching load bank settings where possible and causing automatic transfer switches to transfer on and off the emergency generators. Record effects on voltage and frequency. 10. Restore normal power and observe and record the time delay on re-transfer to normal for each switch, and the cool down period on the emergency generators. 11. Permit emergency generators to cool for 5 minutes. Set all automatic transfer switchdelays to minimum, so that all loads will transfer as one (1) step. 12. Open the normal power disconnecting means feeding the emergency branch. 13. Observe and record data listed on 3 through 8 above initially and every 15 minutes for a duration of 2 hours. If this test is aborted for any reason, restart from Paragraph 11 above. 14. After test completion, reset all automatic transfer switch delays, such that minimum voltage dip is achieved. 15. Disconnect load banks and connect building load as shown on the Drawings. OPERATIONAL TEST 1. At the time of Contract Completion, perform an operational test of the emergency power system with as-designed building loads connected. Test each automatic transfer switch by opening the normal power disconnecting means to that automatic transfer switch for a 5 minute period and observing the proper operation of the emergency power system including a 5 minute rest period for the emergency generators between each automatic transfer switches. 3.03
EQUIPMENT DEMONSTRATION A.
After all system tests have been completed, schedule an instruction period with the Owner. Instruction to be provided by Manufacturer's authorized field technician.
B.
Instruction shall include: 1. Location of all components of the system and explanation of their function. 2. Demonstration of Equipment 3. Maintenance and Repair Procedures 4. Programming Procedures 5. Review of Documents in Record and Information Manuals
EMERGENCY GENERATOR (DIESEL OUTSIDE)
26 32 10 - 9
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING C.
3.04
01-13-2012
Contractor shall have all participants sign the Certificate of System Completion in Section 26 00 99, "Requirements of Contract Completion."
WARRANTY A.
Provide a five (5) year extended Parts and Labor Warranty. END OF SECTION
EMERGENCY GENERATOR (DIESEL OUTSIDE)
26 32 10 - 10
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 36 23 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
PART 1 1.01
DESCRIPTION A.
1.02
1.04
All equipment shall be UL listed and labeled and in accordance with applicable NEMA and ANSI Standards and in accordance with NEC Article 700.
SUBMITTALS A.
For Review: 1. Product data sheet of all components 2. Wiring diagrams 3. Complete dimension and installation information
B.
To be included in Record and Information Manuals: 1. One (1) copy of each approved submittal 2. Test results 3. Certificate of System Completion
MANUFACTURERS A.
1.05
Furnish and install automatic transfer switches and bypass-isolation switches of sizes as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Provide all accessories and equipment as necessary for complete systems.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.03
GENERAL
Automatic Transfer Switches 1. Cummins-Onan Corporation 2. Kohler 3. ASCO Inc. 4. Catepillar
SYSTEM OPERATION A.
Automatic transfer switches shall monitor the voltage level of the normal source, and when it drops below a pre-selected level, will initiate start of the emergency generator after a predetermined time delay (typically 3 seconds).
B.
Automatic transfer switches shall monitor voltage and frequency of the emergency generator, and when at an acceptable level shall initiate load transfer to the emergency source after a pre-selected time delay (typically 1 second).
C.
Automatic transfer switches shall transfer load back to normal source when it has been restored after a pre-selected time delay (typically 5 minutes).
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
26 36 23 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING D.
PART 2 2.01
01-13-2012
Automatic transfer switches shall signal emergency generator to stop after a pre-determined cool down period (typically 5 minutes).
PRODUCTS
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES A.
Automatic transfer switches shall be rated for continuous duty in a non-ventilated enclosure and shall be capable of switching all classes of loads. Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, automatic transfer switches shall be 4 pole.
B.
Automatic transfer switches shall be electrically operated capable of transferring successfully in either direction with 70% of rated voltage applied to the switch terminals.
C.
Automatic transfer switches shall be double throw, inherently interlocked mechanically and electrically, and actuated by two (2) electrical operators. These operators shall provide a time delay in the "OFF" position, between the opening of the closed contacts and the closing of the open contacts, to allow for the demagnetizing of motor and transformer loads. Time delay shall be set at a minimum of 2 seconds and shall be adjustable 0-2 minutes. The delay shall be accomplished under all transfer conditions, including, but not limited to, single phase and brown out conditions, failure of emergency source and manual operations. Switch mechanism shall provide a "quick-make" and "quick-break" operation of contacts.
D.
The normal and emergency contacts shall be positively interlocked mechanically and electronically to prevent simultaneous closing. Mechanical interlock shall be separate from the operating mechanism so as to provide positive interlocks in the event of operator failure. Operating mechanism shall be metal. Plastic or phenolic type components subject to breakage are not acceptable.
E.
The transfer switch shall be equipped with safe operators capable of manually transferring switches under load. The manual operator shall provide the same contact opening and closing speed as the electrical operator.
F.
All relays, timers, and accessories shall be front mounted and accessible for ease of maintenance. Control wiring shall be flame retardant 600 volt with numbered sleeve identification on each end.
G.
Main contacts shall be mechanically locked in position in both the normal and emergency positions and shall be silver tungsten alloy protected by arcing contacts with magnetic blowouts on each pole.
H.
Automatic transfer switches shall be rated to withstand the RMS symmetrical short circuit current available at the automatic transfer switch terminals as shown on the Drawings, but not less than the minimum values as follows: 1. 0-600 Amperes ............................. 50,000 RMS Amperes sym
I.
The automatic transfer switch shall be mounted in a NEMA Type 1 enclosure, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
26 36 23 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
J.
The automatic transfer switch shall conform to the requirements of NEMA Standard ICS2447-AC and UL 1008 and shall be UL listed as follows: 1. For use in emergency systems in accordance with the National Electrical Code 2. Rated in amperes for total system transfer including control of motors, electricdischarge lamps, electric-heating and tungsten-filament lamp loads
K.
Automatic transfer switches rated 400 Amperes and less shall be suitable for 100% tungsten-filament lamp load. Switches rated above 400 Amperes shall be suitable for 30% or 400 Amperes tungsten-filament lamp, load, whichever is higher.
L.
Control sections shall be de-energizable for maintenance by a control disconnect plug.
M.
Automatic transfer switches shall have a three (3) position test switch labeled "OFF/LOAD TEST/AUTO" to disengage automatic control, to simulate normal power failure and automatic position.
N.
Automatic transfer switches shall have two (2) auxiliary sets of contacts that are closed with switch in normal, and two (2) sets of contacts that are closed with switch in emergency.
O.
Functional Operation 1. For 3 phase switches all phases of the normal shall be monitored line-to-line. Close differential voltage sensing shall be provided. The pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 90% to 95% of nominal and the dropout voltage shall be adjustable from 80% to 85% of the pickup value. The transfer to emergency will be initiated upon reduction of the normal source to 85% of nominal voltage and retransfer to normal shall occur when normal source restores to 95% of nominal. 2. A time delay to override momentary normal source outages to delay all transfer switch and engine starting signals. The time delay shall be field adjustable from 0 to 2 minutes and factory set at three seconds at which time a contact will close to initiate engine starting so that the generator will be on line no later than ten seconds after power failure. 3. Independent single phase voltage and frequency sensing of the emergency source. Transfer to emergency upon normal source failure when emergency source voltage frequency is 90% or more of nominal. 4. A time delay on transfer to emergency. Initially set at zero but field adjustable up to two minutes for controlled timing of load transfer to emergency if required. 5. A time delay on retransfer to normal source. The time delay shall be automatically bypassed if the emergency source fails and normal source is available. The time delay shall be field adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes and set for one minute. 6. An unloaded running time delay for emergency generator cool-down. The time delay shall be field adjustable from 0 to 20 minutes and factory set at five minutes. 7. Unit shall have top cubicle with bus extension and lugs to make unit "front access only" required.
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
26 36 23 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING PART 3 3.01
3.03
3.04
EXECUTION
APPLICATION A.
3.02
01-13-2012
Provide automatic transfer switches of minimum ampacity values as shown on the Drawings and meeting the noted withstand ratings. Increase nominal size of automatic transfer switch where necessary to achieve adequate withstand ratings.
INSTALLATION A.
Install automatic transfer switches as shown on the Drawings in accordance with the Manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Wall mounted automatic transfer switches shall be bolted securely to a wall. Floor mounted switches shall be bolted to a nominal 4 inch concrete housekeeping pad. Limits of pad shall exceed dimensions of equipment by 3 inches on all sides.
C.
Provide control wiring between automatic transfer switches, emergency generator and the emergency generator remote annunciator as required. Provide wiring interconnection between each elevator controller and the automatic transfer switch feeding it for notification to the elevator that power transfer is about to occur, and that the elevator is running on emergency power.
D.
Provide nameplates in accordance with Section 26 05 53, "Electrical Identification."
TESTING A.
Provide a full functional test of all components of automatic transfer switch in accordance with Manufacturer's recommended procedure, and testing as specified in Section 26 32 14, "Emergency Generator."
B.
Adjust all settings of automatic transfer switches to coordinate with emergency generator settings to provide NFPA 110 Level 1 performance.
C.
Operate system for a minimum period of seven (7) consecutive days with no problems before final acceptance by Owner.
D.
Provide equipment grounding connections, sufficiently tight to assure permanent and effective ground for emergency light and power system equipment as indicated.
E.
Upon completion of installation and after building circuitry has been energized with the normal power source, the Contractor shall test the system, including the transfer switches, to demonstrate operation and compliance with Specification requirements. Any deviations from the Specification requirements shall be corrected, then the system shall be re-tested to verify conformance.
EQUIPMENT DEMONSTRATION A.
After all system tests have been completed, schedule an instruction period with the Owner. Instruction shall be provided by Manufacturer's authorized field technician.
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
26 36 23 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
B.
Instruction shall include: 1. Location of all components of the system and explanation of their function 2. Demonstration of equipment 3. Maintenance and repair procedures 4. Programming procedures 5. Review of documents in Record and Information Manuals
C.
Contractor shall have all participants sign the Certificate of System Completion in Section 26 00 99, "Requirements of Contract Completion." END OF SECTION
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
26 36 23 - 5
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 41 13 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
PART 1 1.01
DESCRIPTION A.
1.02
1.04
Lightning Protection System shall be UL listed and labeled, and certified as a Master Label "C" System.
SUBMITTALS A.
For Review: 1. Product data sheets of all components 2. Layout Drawings 3. Test Results
B.
To be included in Record and Information Manuals: 1. One (1) copy of each approved submittal 2. Certificate of System Completion
MANUFACTURERS A.
1.05
Furnish and install a complete Lightning Protection System as specified herein. Provide all accessories and equipment as necessary for a complete system.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.03
GENERAL
Lightning Protection System 1. Maxwell Lightning Protection Systems 2. Heary Brothers Company 3. Thompson Lightning Protection Inc. 4. Union Lightning Protection Company 5. Harger Lightning Protection Company
SYSTEM OPERATION A.
Lightning Protection System shall protect entire building against damage from lightning strikes.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
26 41 13 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING PART 2 2.01
01-13-2012
PRODUCTS
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM DEVICES A.
Air terminals shall be 12 inch high, 3/8 inch solid copper (1/2 for Class 2) with impalement protection. Attaching brackets shall have threaded stud for air terminal and bolted pressure type cable connector. The attaching brackets shall be suitable for mounting the air terminal in the location indicated on the Drawings. Use flat base for flat roof; use parapet base for parapet wall mounting; etc. All air terminal bases shall be cast copper with stainless steel bolt-pressure cable connectors. The air terminals should be spaced so as not to exceed 20 feet apart around the outside perimeter of the roof or the ridge and not 50 feet apart through the center of flat roof areas.
B.
Roof mounted conductors and down conductors (28 strand/14 gauge copper/375 pounds per 1,000 feet - Class 2) shall be stranded copper. Where splices are required between conductors, connector shall be bolted pressure type. Conductors shall consist of UL listed 32 strands of 17 gauge copper wire weighting 215 lbs. per 1,000 feet and installed in accordance with the UL Code. A perimeter cable shall be installed around the entire main roof. Each perimeter cable shall be connected to at least two (2) down leads, providing a two-way path to ground from each air terminal. All center roof air terminals shall be interconnected with conductors to the outside perimeter cable. Conductors on the flat roof areas may be run exposed. Ground connections shall be made around the perimeter of each roof and to the main down conductor. Aluminum material shall be used where necessary.
C.
Down Conductors: Concealed down conductors shall be installed in 1 inch Schedule 40 PVC conduit. Each perimeter roof cable shall be connected to at least two (2) down leads. The average distance between down leads shall not exceed 100 feet from upper roof to lower roof, or from roof to ground terminals.
D.
Cable Connectors: All cable connectors shall be cast copper with screw-pressure type stainless steel bolts and nuts. Cadweld shall be used below grade.
E.
Interconnection of Metals: All metal bodies within 6 feet of the conductor shall be bonded to the system with approved fittings and conductor. Connections between dissimilar metals shall be made with approved bimetallic connections. 1. Bonding of all metallic objects and systems at roof levels and elsewhere on the structure shall be complete. Primary bonds for metal bodies of conductance shall be bonded with appropriate fittings and full-size conductor; and shall consist of, but not be limited to the following: roof exhaust fans, HVAC units with related piping ductwork, exhaust vents and any other roof piping systems, cooling towers, antenna mast for TV, radio or microwave, roof ladders, and metal plumbing stacks. Exterior architectural metal fascia and/or curtain walls or mullions, which extend the full height of the structure shall also be bonded, if not inherently bonded through the building frame. 2. Metal bodies of inductance located within 6 feet of a conductor or object with secondary bonds, shall be bonded with secondary cable and fittings. Typical of these are: roof flashings, parapet coping caps, gravel guards, isolated metal building panels or siding, roof drains, downspouts, roof insulation vents and any other sizeable miscellaneous metals.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
26 41 13 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING F.
Grounding: Grounding terminals shall be located at the base of the structure. Ground connections shall be made around the perimeter of the structure and in no case shall average over 100 feet apart. Ground terminals shall be 3/4 inch in diameter and shall be driven to a minimum depth of 10 feet. One ground shall have connection to the water system where the water supply enters the building - in addition to artificial ground. In case of rock ledge or other conditions making it impossible to comply with the above, trenching or a copper ground plate will be permitted; providing it will meet the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. requirements. Ground rods shall be set not less than 3 feet nor more than 8 feet from the structure.
G.
Concealed Conductors: All concealed conductors shall be installed in 1 inch Schedule 40 PVC conduit.
H.
Fasteners: Conductor fasteners shall be an approved type of non-corrosive metal, as required to support conductors and shall be spaced not to exceed 3 foot centers. Masonry type cable fasteners spaced every 3 feet on masonry. Adhesive type cable fasteners spaced every 3 feet on flat roofs.
PART 3 3.01
3.02
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Install Lightning Protection System in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Installation shall have "A" label on each air terminal and "B" label at 10 feet along all main conductors. Completed installation as shown shall bear UL Master Label "C" as per UL Code 96A.
C.
Air terminal attaching brackets shall be permanently and rigidly attached to the building structure. There shall be a ground connection for each down conductor. Ground connections shall be protected from mechanical injury. Down conductors between building and ground rod shall be installed a minimum of 2 feet below finished grade.
D.
All services involving excavating, trenching, backfilling, tamping of ground for ground rods, test wells, and ground loops shall be provided.
E.
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Master Label shall be furnished as evidence that the installation has met with UL 96A requirements. Shop drawings in detail and catalog cuts shall be submitted for approval prior to installation of the system.
F.
Install impalement hazard wiring signs on all doors leading to roof.
TESTING A.
The completed system shall be tested as required to measure the grounding resistance. If two (2) or more driven ground rods are used to reduce the resistance, the rods shall be spaced at least 10 feet apart. Results of the ground resistance testing shall be submitted for review.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
26 41 13 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING B.
01-13-2012
Refer to Section 26 08 40, "Electrical Tests, Adjustments, Inspection." END OF SECTION
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
26 41 13 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 43 13 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION
PART 1 1.01
DESCRIPTION A.
1.02
1.03
1.04
Furnish and install Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor (TVSS) units as shown on the Drawings and herein specified.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Surge suppressors shall be UL Listed and labeled under UL 1449.
B.
Surge suppressors shall be tested to ANSI C62.41 and C62.45 Standards.
SUBMITTALS A.
For Review: 1. Product data sheets of all components 2. All operating parameters including UL 1449 voltage category 3. Test results
B.
To be Included in Record and Information Manuals: 1. One (1) copy of each approved submittal
MANUFACTURERS A.
PART 2 2.01
GENERAL
Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors 1. Cutler-Hammer (Clipper) 2. Siemens Sentron TPS 3. Square D Company 4. General Electric Company
PRODUCTS
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSORS A.
Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor (TVSS) units where shown within switchgear shall be integral mounted in an enclosed compartment, separate from the internal busbars with a hinged lockable door and provided with disconnect means. Diagnostic lights shall be mounted in front door.
B.
Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor (TVSS) units shall be self-contained, wall mountable, solid-state devices in an NEMA 12, enameled steel enclosure with hinged door and locking handle.
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION
26 43 13 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING C.
TVSS units shall consist of an engineered system to achieve suppression using one (1) or more of the following components: 1. Doped selenium plates 2. Metal Oxide Varisters (MOV) in enclosed replaceable modules 3. Sillicon Avalanche Diodes (SAD) in enclosed replaceable modules
D.
TVSS unit components shall be arranged to operate bi-directionally, in parallel with the line, have sinewave tracking characteristics, and have seven (7) modes of protection as follows: 1. Each Phase: Line to Neutral 2. Each Phase: Line to Ground 3. Neutral - Ground
E.
TVSS units shall be classified by UL with the following ratings:
208/120 volt, 3 phase "WYE" units 480/277 volt, 3 phase "WYE" units F.
Maximum Clamping Voltage L-N
Maximum Clamping Voltage N-G
400 volt 800 volt
400 volt 800 volt
TVSS units shall be capable of surviving the following surge current on a single impulse basis without performance degradation of more than 10%: 1. TVSS units located at Service Entrance switchgear
150,000 Amperes per mode (300,000 Amperes per phase)
2. TVSS units located at downstream panelboards
50,000 Amperes per mode (100,000 Amperes per phase)
G.
TVSS units shall have Form C summary output contacts for remote monitoring capability.
H.
TVSS units shall have integral noise filtering of the following minimum attenuation level: 100 KHz – 55dB.
I.
TVSS units shall have integral diagnostic indicating lights and individual MOV fusing.
PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Install transient voltage surge suppressors where shown on the Drawings, and in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Units shall be installed as close as possible to the equipment being protected (preferably closed nippled). Conductors and conduit shall be run horizontally directly from electrical equipment to surge suppressor enclosure.
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION
26 43 13 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 3.02
3.03
01-13-2012
EQUIPMENT DEMONSTRATION A.
After all system tests have been completed, schedule an instruction period with the Owner. Instruction to be provided by Manufacturer's authorized field technician.
B.
Instruction shall include: 1. Location of all components of the system and explanation of their function 2. Demonstration of equipment 3. Maintenance and repair procedures 4. Programming procedures 5. Review of documents in Record and Information Manuals
C.
Contractor shall have all participants sign the Certificate of System Completion in Section 26 00 99, "Requirements for Contract Completion."
EXTENDED WARRANTY/SPARE PARTS A.
Provide a five (5) year Extended Warranty or a complete spare parts package in accordance with Manufacturer's standard arrangement. END OF SECTION
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION
26 43 13 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 51 13 LUMINAIRES, LAMPS AND BALLASTS
PART 1 1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION A.
Furnish and install luminaires, lamps, ballasts and in-line fuses as herein specified and shown on the Drawings.
B.
Luminaire Manufacturer and model numbers shall be as scheduled on the Drawings. Luminaires not bearing a letter symbol shall match adjacent luminaire in space.
C.
All lamps and ballasts for a given luminaire type shall be by the same Manufacturer.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
All equipment shall be UL listed and labeled and in accordance with applicable NEMA and ANSI Standards.
B.
Ballasts shall be certified by ETL and CBM. Ballasts shall match lamps with appropriate ANSI code.
SUBMITTALS A.
For Review: 1. Luminaires a. Product data sheets for each fixture. b. Lamp product data sheets for each fixture. c. Ballast, LED driver, or power supply product data sheets for each fixture. 2. Construction Drawings for custom luminaires
B.
To be included in Record and Information Manuals: 1. One (1) copy each of approved submittal 2. Spare lamp inventory list 3. Certificate of Material Receipt
MANUFACTURERS A.
Luminaires 1. Refer to Luminaire Schedule on the Drawings.
B.
Lamps 1. Incandescent a. General Electric Company b. Osram/Sylvania Corporation c. Philips Lighting Company
LUMINAIRES, LAMPS AND BALLASTS
26 51 13 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
2. Fluorescent a. General Electric Company b. Osram/Sylvania Corporation c. Philips Lighting Company 3. High Intensity Discharge (HID) a. Osram/Sylvania Corporation b. Philips Lighting Company c. Venture C.
Ballasts 1. Electromagnetic a. General Electric Company b. Advance Transformer Company c. Universal Lighting Technologies d. Osram/Sylvania Corporation 2. Electronic a. Advance Transformer Company b. Universal Lighting Technologies c. General Electric Company d. Osram/Sylvania Corporation e. Robertson Inc.
D.
Fuses 1. Refer to Section 26 28 13, "Fuses."
E.
Surge Arrestors 1. Delta Lightning Arrestors Inc.
PART 2 2.01
2.02
PRODUCTS
LUMINAIRES A.
Luminaires shall be as scheduled on the Drawings.
B.
Recessed incandescent luminaires shall have integral thermal protection.
LAMPS A.
Unless specifically indicated otherwise, all incandescent lamps shall be inside frosted 120 volt.
B.
Unless specifically indicated otherwise, all fluorescent lamps shall be energy saving, T8 Type with 3500 degree Kelvin color temperature and minimum of 75 CRI, low mercury green label.
C.
Unless specifically indicated otherwise, all compact fluorescent lamps shall have a color temperature of 3000 degrees Kelvin, and a minimum of 82 CRI. Lamp base shall match luminaire socket.
LUMINAIRES, LAMPS AND BALLASTS
26 51 13 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
2.03
2.04
01-13-2012
D.
All high intensity discharge lamps shall be phosphor coated unless Manufacturer indicates photometrics are based on clear lamps. Lamp operating position shall match the luminaire orientation. Metal halide lamps used in open luminaires shall be UL listed for full rupture containment.
E.
Metal halide lamps shall be pulse start for 150 to 500 watt application.
FLUORESCENT BALLASTS A.
Electronic ballasts for T8 lamps shall meet the following criteria: 1. Minimum power factor of 95%. 2. UL listed class "P." 3. Class "A" sound level. 4. Current crest factor < 1.7. 5. Input total harmonic distortion (THD) < 20%. 6. Parallel wire lamp connection with programmed start operation. 7. High frequency operation. 8. 50 degree F or Zero degree F starting temperature. 9. Ballasts shall have end of lamp life fault mode shutdown protection.
B.
Compact fluorescent electromagnetic ballasts shall be energy saving, high power factor, Class "A" sound rating, Class "P" ballast protection, CSA certified, 50 degree F or 0 degree F starting temperature.
C.
Compact fluorescent electronic ballasts shall be energy saving, high power factor (minimum 95), Class "A" sound rating, high frequency Class "P" ballast protection, CSA certified, 0 degree F starting temperature, current crest factor <1.5, input total harmonic distortion (THD) <10%, with integral end of lamp life fault mode shutdown protection.
HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE BALLASTS A.
High intensity discharge (HID) magnetic ballasts shall be core and coil type, high power factor, constant wattage autotransformer (CWA) type capable of starting at minus 20 degrees F. Ballasts other than 480 volt input shall be multi-tap. Encased and potted ballasts shall have a class "B" sound rating and thermal protection.
B.
High intensity discharge (HID) electronic ballast. 1. The electronic ballast shall be multi-voltage capable. 2. The electronic ballast shall incorporate a microprocessor controller to provide for optimum starting and operation of the HID lamp. 3. The electronic ballast input current shall have Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of less than 15% when operated at nominal line voltage (200, 208, 230, 240 or, 277 volt). 4. The ballast shall incorporate a 0-10 volt dimming interface and control the dimming function such that the HID lamp is allowed to warm up for fifteen (15) minutes at full power before the lamp will be allowed to dim, regardless of the level of the 0-10 volt signal. 5. The ballast shall include a 120 volt/250 watt auxiliary output for standby incandescent lighting that shall include an integral control to turn the auxiliary lamp on and off. The integral control shall include a time-delay feature to keep the auxiliary lamp on until the HID lamp reaches 50% power. 6. The electronic ballast shall have a Power Factor greater than 90%.
LUMINAIRES, LAMPS AND BALLASTS
26 51 13 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
7. The electronic ballast shall have a lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 8. The electronic ballast shall be Sound Rated A. 9. The aluminum housing shall include a divided wiring compartment to separate the power leads from the control leads. All leads to be color-coded. C. 2.05
2.06
QUARTZ STANDBY SYSTEMS A.
Provide quartz standby lighting systems in HID luminaires where indicated on the Luminaire Schedule. Quartz lamps shall be of the maximum wattage permitted by the UL listing.
B.
Each luminaire shall have a time delay/current sensing relay circuit so that the quartz lamp remains energized anytime the HID lamp is under 40% of its rated light output.
LUMINAIRE ACCESSORIES A.
Luminaires located in mechanical and electrical rooms shall have appropriate guards provided with each luminaire.
B.
Luminaires located in gypsum board (drywall) or plaster ceilings shall have appropriate plaster rings provided with each luminaire.
C.
Luminaires shall be provided with all required mounting hardware for a complete installation.
D.
Exterior luminaires shall be installed on concrete bases.
PART 3 3.01
Pulse start lamp ballasts shall have a minimum of 88% efficiency.
EXECUTION
APPLICATION A.
Ballasts 1. Fluorescent ballasts in luminaires located exterior to the building and in unheated spaces shall have a 0 degree F starting temperature. 2. Fluorescent ballasts located within the building shall have a 50 degree F starting temperature. 3. Electronic ballasts shall be used in all luminaires where available.
B.
Single and multiple lamp ballasts shall be provided in luminaires as required to permit lamp switching configurations as shown on the Drawings.
C.
Each ballast shall have a disconnecting means located within 24 inches of the ballast.
LUMINAIRES, LAMPS AND BALLASTS
26 51 13 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 3.02
01-13-2012
INSTALLATION A.
Luminaires shall be securely mounted to elements of the building structure such that they will be square, plumb, and rigid, and will not fall or sag. Flush luminaires shall be furnished with installation provisions compatible with the suspended acoustical system furnished by the General Trades Contractor. This Contractor shall verify the actual suspension system to be used and make all adjustments in luminaire installation provisions.
B.
All open type fluorescent troffers shall be shipped from the Manufacturer with the louver enclosed in plastic wrap. The Contractor shall install the luminaires with the plastic wrap intact and only remove the wrap after the work environment is clean. Contractor shall patch any holes in the wrap to keep dirt out of the luminaire during construction.
C.
All luminaires mounted in suspended acoustical tile ceilings shall be securely attached to the ceiling grid system by removable grid clips or fasteners. Recessed "can" type luminaires shall have bar hangers attached to the ceiling grid system.
D.
All luminaires mounted on suspended acoustical tile ceilings shall be mounted to junction boxes with bar hangers attached to the ceiling grid system. In addition, luminaires heavier than ten (10) pounds shall have hangers attached to the ceiling grid system.
E.
All luminaires that are wall mounted or surface mounted to other than suspended acoustical tile ceilings shall be attached to outlet boxes that are securely supported to the building structure and UL listed for luminaire support.
F.
All surface mounted and recessed fluorescent luminaires and all high intensity discharge luminaires installed in suspended acoustical tile ceilings, shall have a supplemental support means attached to the building structure consisting of chain or cable, installed with 6 inches of slack. This support means shall be attached from the structure to the luminaire at each end and shall be capable of suspending the luminaire in the event the ceiling grid at the luminaire is removed.
G.
Clean both inside and outside surfaces of luminaires after installation. No luminaires shall be installed until the painting work of the General Trades Contractor is completed. Damaged, deformed or defective luminaires are to be replaced.
H.
Install lamps in all luminaires in accordance with the Luminaire Schedule.
I.
Only the number of lamps required to provide adequate lighting for work yet to be done, in each area, and acceptable temporary lighting elsewhere shall be installed by this Contractor at the time luminaires are installed and tested. Remaining lamps to be installed not more than ten (10) days prior to date of Contract Completion of the project. Replace lamps used for temporary lighting with new lamps not more than ten (10) days prior to date of Contract Completion of the project.
J.
All lamps are to be in working order at the time of Contract Completion. This Contractor shall replace all defective lamps with new lamps up until the time of Contract Completion.
K.
Prewired flush luminaire shall have minimum 90 Degree C wiring. Junction box capacity shall be sufficient for the circuit wiring requirements.
LUMINAIRES, LAMPS AND BALLASTS
26 51 13 - 5
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
3.03
01-13-2012
L.
Furnish all required installation accessories for the luminaires as required for specific location whether or not included in the Manufacturer's catalog number. Such accessories include plaster frames, rings, flanges, canopies, stem hangers, and suspension straps. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL ROOM TREATMENT SCHEDULE.
M.
Designated night light, emergency egress, and exit signage luminaires shall be connected ahead of any switching.
N.
Luminaire supports used in fire rated ceiling assemblies shall be in conformance with that assembly's UL listing requirements.
O.
Remote mounted HID ballasts shall have metal enclosures. Install ballasts to building structure in an accessible location within Manufacturer's maximum distance limitation. Provide all wiring between ballasts and HID lamps and Quartz restrike lamps per Manufacturer's Drawings.
P.
Install in-line fuse and fuse holders in all high intensity discharge luminaires on the line side of the ballasts. Install two (2) fuse holders or a double pole fuse holder for ballasts on 208, 240, or 480 volt single phase circuits. Fuse holders shall be installed at a location convenient for changing fuses.
Q.
Coordinate exact wiring requirements to luminaire ballasts with Manufacturer.
R.
Flexible conduit or cord run down to suspended luminaires shall be installed along side of the suspension chain and neatly attached along its entire length.
S.
Fixture whips shall be of a minimum size as specified in Section 26 05 10, "Wire and Cable" and Section 26 05 33, "Conduit and Fittings".
SPARE PARTS A.
Lamps 1. Provide spare lamps of each wattage as follows:
LAMP TYPE HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE FLUORESCENT
INCANDESCENT
LUMINAIRES, LAMPS AND BALLASTS
TOTAL NUMBER OF LAMPS INSTALLED IN PROJECT
NUMBER OF SPARES
1-10 11-20 21-UP 1-10 11-20 21-50 51-200 200-UP 1-10 11-50 51-UP
1 2 4 1 4 10 20 40 5 20 60
26 51 13 - 6
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING B.
01-13-2012
Division 26 Contractor shall include in his/her bid an allowance for furnishing and installing five (5) additional exit sign luminaires (with average length of conduit and wire) at completion of project as directed by the Architect. If not all used, remaining value shall be credited to Owner or turned over to Owner as additional spares per Owner's discretion. END OF SECTION
LUMINAIRES, LAMPS AND BALLASTS
26 51 13 - 7
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
26 81 11 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 1.01
1.02
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION A.
Furnish and install all equipment and accessories for a complete local, analog addressable, manually and automatically actuated, electrically operated, device annunciated, double supervised, non-coded 24 volt DC fire alarm system connected to Building Management network as described herein and as shown on the Plans.
B.
Furnish a network compliant (ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-1995), BACnet. Provide all necessary BACnet-compliant hardware and software to meet the system's functional specifications. Provide Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) for every BACnet Device in the system, including unitary controllers. All Device hardware is to comply with BACnet.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Fire alarm installation shall conform to the requirements of the NFPA 101, Life Safety Code, the Ohio Building Code, and Local Code and Building Authority requirements.
B.
All equipment shall be UL listed and labeled, and in accordance with applicable NEMA, ANSI Standards and Codes: 1. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-1995 BACnet 2. UL 916 Underwriters Laboratories Standard for Energy Management Equipment. Canada and the U.S. 3. National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) 4. FCC Part 15, Subpart J 5. EMC Directive 89/336/EEC
C.
All devices and installation shall be in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act.
D.
All BACnet device hardware shall be Listed Underwriters Laboratory for Open Energy Management Equipment (PAZX) under the UL Standard for Safety 916 in both the U.S. and Canada, with integral labels showing rating. All hardware shall be in compliance with FCC Part 15, Subpart J, Class A. The BACnet Device shall be tested by an objective third party for compliance to the BACnet Standard.
E.
All cabling for Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) and Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) shall be Class A. Network cable shall be Style 7.
F.
All vertical riser cable shall be a two (2) hour fire rated fire alarm cable and shall be listed in accordance with UL 2196. The vertical riser cable shall be installed in accordance with Electrical Circuit Protective System (FHIT), System No. 22.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
26 81 11 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 1.03
01-13-2012
SUBMITTALS A.
For Review: 1. Product data sheets of all components. 2. Riser/wiring diagrams and plans of entire system showing all devices, quantity, and size of wires, conduit sizes, zone schedule, sound levels, types of audible devices. 3. Power supply, amplifier and battery calculations indicating operating time and spare capacity for additional devices. 4. Voltage drop calculations for strobe circuits.
B.
To be included in Record and Information Manuals: 1. One (1) copy of each approval submittal 2. Certificate of Material Receipt 3. Certificate of System Completion
C.
Submit shop drawings to the appropriate Building Authority's office for review after approval by the Associate. These drawings shall include the following statement: Korda/Nemeth Engineering, Inc., 1650 Watermark Drive, Columbus, Ohio 43215 as shown on the Construction Documents and as required by the OBC, designed the fire protective signaling system for this project. The [Insert Company Name] project drawings are provided with manufacturer's installation and wiring recommendations to assist in the installation. Korda/Nemeth Engineering, Inc., Job # _____________. [Insert Designer Name] [Insert Company] [Insert City, State] NICET Level ________ Fire Protection System Designer [Insert, Name] [Certification # ________, valid through ________]
1.04
MANUFACTURERS A.
1.05
Fire alarm system components shall be as manufactured and/or certified by manufacturer to work as a complete and functional system. 1. Notifier 2. Edwards System Technology 3. Simplex-Grinnell 4. Siemens Fire Safety
SYSTEM OPERATION A.
Operation of any manual pull station or the actuation of any automatic device shall cause immediate and continuous operation of fire alarm signal and alarm indication at the control panel, remote annunciators and through the network connection at the Building Management System until the actuated device is restored to normal and the control panel is manually reset.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
26 81 11 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
B.
Fire alarm control panel shall send a signal to the remote monitoring service organization via leased telephone lines to indicate alarm or trouble condition.
C.
The remote LCD annunciator panel shall audibly and visually annunciate both alarm and trouble as well as the location of the affected device.
D.
In the event of operating power failure, an open or grounded circuit in the system, a trouble signal and trouble LED shall be activated until the system is restored to normal. The trouble signal may be silenced by means of a switch mounted on the control panel. Upon restoration of the system, the trouble signal shall resound until the trouble silence switch is restored to the NORMAL position.
E.
The incoming power to the system shall be supervised so that any power failures must be audibly and visually indicated at the control panel. A green "power on" LED shall be displayed continuously while incoming power is present. The system batteries shall be supervised so that a low battery condition or disconnection of the battery shall be audibly and visually indicated at the control panel and the remote annunciator.
F.
Sprinkler waterflow and tamper switches shall be supervised for alarm and trouble conditions. Tamper switches and flow switches are located schematically. Coordinate exact location with Division 21 Contractor in field. Provide monitor modules as needed to report status of flow and tamper switches.
G.
All air handling units and return air fans shall shut down when smoke is detected by return air duct mounted smoke detectors at the unit, unless unit is an integral part of a smoke control system. Shutdown shall be achieved by relay module signaled by the fire alarm panel. Exact location of smoke detectors shall be coordinated with Division 23 Contractor.
H.
The fire alarm system shall have a programmable relay module for each HVAC air handler. This relay shall close upon smoke detection by any smoke detector associated with that air handler in ductwork or at fan powered VAV terminal boxes.
I.
Each fan powered VAV HVAC terminal box or fan coil unit shall have a duct mounted smoke detector installed in the return air duct, with auxiliary relay modules.
J.
Area type spot smoke detectors shall be installed within the HVAC ductwork for each smoke damper and combination fire/smoke damper. Smoke detector shall have auxiliary relay module and remote alarm light.
K.
Smoke detectors located in elevator lobbies, elevator machine rooms, and hoistways shall be connected to the elevator control panel through fire alarm system relay modules. Activation of any of these devices shall send a signal to the elevator controller for seizure purposes. Elevator to be recalled to grade level access floor, unless the fire is on that floor, in which case the elevator shall be recalled to an alternate floor as designated by the local fire marshal.
L.
Heat detectors and water flow switches located in elevator hoistways and machine rooms shall signal power feeder circuit breakers to elevator machines to shunt trip, through fire alarm system relay modules.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
26 81 11 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING M.
The fireman's helmet in the elevator shall illuminate upon activation of associated elevator lobby smoke detectors and shall flash intermittently upon activation of the associated elevator room or hoistway smoke detectors. Provide relay module in elevator equipment room for this function.
N.
The fire alarm panel shall monitor fire pumps as follows: 1. Electric Fire Pumps a. Pump running b. Power failure c. Phase reversal d. Alternate power source available
O.
The fire alarm panel shall have on-off-auto switches to override automatic operation of the following pieces of equipment: 1. Electric locks on stairway doors 2. Emergency generator start 3. Automatic transfer switch transfer between normal and emergency power for each ATS.
P.
Pre-action and dry pipe sprinkler systems shall be monitored for loss of supervisory air pressure.
Q.
Smoke detectors in apartment resident rooms will be on a separate zone for each suite. Activation of a smoke detector in a resident suite will sound only the horn/strobes in that suite and not a general alarm, but will annunciate at the fire alarm panel. However, the horn/strobes in the resident suite will also sound upon general alarm.
PART 2 2.01
01-13-2012
PRODUCTS
FIRE ALARM PANEL A.
Fire Alarm Panel shall be an analog addressable type. Panel shall be modular with solid state, microprocessor based electronics, expandable, semi-flush mounted cabinet with glass window and locking door. Program shall be stored in non-volatile memory. Features shall include: 1. 80 character English readout dynamic LCD display 2. Battery supervision 3. Multiple operator access levels 4. 800 event historical logging 5. Zone selectable alarm verification 6. Individual circuit disable 7. Alarm, trouble, power on, and supervisory service LED indicators 8. Alarm, acknowledge, drill, lamp test, signal silence, and system reset buttons 9. Full Qwerty keyboard 10. Printer communication module 11. Remote station transmitter module for connection to 24 hour supervisory service 12. Synchronizing module for synchronized strobe visual devices 13. Optional wire or fiber network modules
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
26 81 11 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
B.
The system shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate the entire system upon loss of normal 120 VAC power in a normal supervisory mode for a period of twentyfour (24) hours with five (5) minutes of alarm operation at the end of this period. The system shall automatically transfer to the standby batteries upon power failure. All battery charging and recharging operations shall be automatic with 100% recharge within twelve (12) hours.
C.
All external circuits requiring system operation power shall be 24 VDC and shall be individually protected at the control panel.
D.
The system shall have a strip printer mounted directly in the FACP enclosure. Alarms shall be printed in RED, other messages, such as trouble, shall be printed in black. This printer is to receive power from the system power supply and shall operate via the system battery backup if AC mains are lost. The printer shall be UL 864 listed.
E.
Digital voice communication audio system, shall provide one way microphone voice communication, and pre-recorded voice and alarm tones to selectable speaker circuits. Features shall include: 1. Dual channel audio 2. Selectable alarm-tones 3. Local panel speaker 4. Fire fighters' master telephone module with master phone and circuit selector switches 5. Digital audio technology
F.
Digital amplifiers for voice communication audio systems shall have 50 watts of spare capacity for additional audible devices. Provide one (1) backup redundant digital amplifier with automatic transfer in the main voice evacuation panel and in all remote audio transponder cabinets.
G.
Panel shall have spare capacity for twenty-five (25) additional initiating devices.
H.
Digital communicator shall be point programmable, dual phone line with twenty-four (24) hour automatic test and automatic overload protection reset.
I.
Fire alarm system shall contain a relay module for each air handler fan. Relay shall be programmed to open upon smoke detection by any smoke detector associated with that air handling system and shutdown unit. Refer to Division 23 Drawings.
J.
Future software and firmware updates shall be provided at no cost to the Owner for two (2) full years following project close-out.
K.
The fire control panel must have one RS-232 port dedicated for connection to the BACnet Portal. The port is to be set to lock out Acknowledge, Silence, and Reset commands. In addition, the RS-232 port will be programmed to the lowest priority level for any control commands from the Portal. This setting locks out any outside commands affecting the panels programmed fire alarm operation.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
26 81 11 - 5
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING L.
01-13-2012
The BACnet Gateway is best suited to provide a Building network window to the fire alarm system activity. Each BACnet Gateway shall support up to fifteen (15) network nodes and 15,000 objects. The network should not affect the fire panel operation because the Gateway and the fire panel should be configured to transfer data only one way (except for circuit supervision). Any circuit interruptions between the fire panel and the Gateway will activate a port trouble condition at the fire panel. The BACnet Gateway shall be a fully self contained unit mounted within the fire panel, comprising of the Gateway circuit board assembly, power supply and mounting plate. Input power for the portal will be 110 to 120 VAC, 50 Hz to 60 Hz. The portal device is listed to PAZX (UL 916) and PAZX7 (ULC22.2 No. 205-M19). In order to minimize the need to program changes in the portal, the Portal should be preprogrammed to track and control pre-designated fire panel Pseudo points, effectively moving point programming to the fire panel. By setting the Portal program in a default mode, additions and deletions can be made at the end user site using the fire alarm panel programmer and Pseudo point mapping.
2.02
REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR A.
2.03
Remote annunciator to have an 160-character LCD display with English language readout, tone alert horn, control switches for alarm silence, system reset, alarm acknowledge, and key switch.
SMOKE DETECTORS A.
Area smoke detectors shall be analog smoke sensor type photoelectric devices that communicate smoke density values to the fire alarm control panel. Sensors shall have integral insect screens and RFI shielded electronics in a white plastic head and base. Detectors shall be addressable and have LED status indicating light and locking tamper resistant base. Detectors performing auxiliary control function such as elevator lobby, hoistway, and machine room detectors shall be programmed to control a relay module for this function.
B.
Duct mounted smoke detectors shall be analog addressable with sampling tube as required to span HVAC duct width. Addressable relay module shall be provided for equipment shutdown. Housing shall be gasketed and weatherproof with internal heating means for applications where detector is located in an unheated space or on roofs.
C.
Remote LED indicator stations shall have a red status LED.
D.
Duct smoke detector and area smoke detectors installed within return air HVAC ductwork shall have a test port installed upstream for aerosol smoke injection. Test port shall consist of pipe and elbow within ductwork upstream of detector, flexible hose with cap below ductwork at an accessible location. Product available from: Lifesafetytest.com.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
26 81 11 - 6
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 2.04
HEAT DETECTORS A.
2.05
2.07
Manual pull stations shall be red lexan semi-flush mounted push type double action with pull handle. Unit shall lock in the pulled position requiring a key to reset. Unit shall be individually addressable on the system. Status LED shall be visible through the front cover.
AUDIBLE/VISUAL DEVICES A.
Visual devices (strobes) shall be multi candela, 24 VDC, xenon flash unit, white semi-flush base assembly stating "FIRE," clear tamper resistant lexan lens. Candela settings shall be set per Paragraph 3.01 D. Contractor shall verify with the AHJ that white is an acceptable color in their jurisdiction.
B.
Combination audible/visual devices (horn/strobes) shall have multi candela 24 VDC xenon flash unit, clear tamper resistant lexan lens, 24 VDC, white semi-flush base assembly stating "FIRE," minimum 95 dB (at 10 feet) electronic horn. Contractor shall verify with the AHJ that white is an acceptable color in their jurisdiction.
C.
Combination audible/visual devices (speaker strobes) shall have multi candela 24 VDC xenon flash unit, clear tamper resistant lexan lens, white semi-flush base assembly stating "FIRE," minimum 85 dBA (at 10 feet at 2 watts) speaker with water sealed compression driver and taps at 1/8, 1/4, 1/2, 1, 2, and 4 watts. Contractor shall verify with the AHJ that white is an acceptable color in their jurisdiction.
D.
Audible/visual devices installed on the exterior of building shall be weatherproof and moisture proof.
E.
Provide synchronizing flash rate modules as needed to sync all strobes in the facility.
WATERFLOW AND TAMPER SWITCHES A.
2.08
Heat detectors shall be combination rate-of-rise and fixed temperature (135 degree Fahrenheit) sensing with RFI shielded electronics. Detector shall be addressable with LED status indicating light and locking tamper resistant base.
MANUAL PULL STATIONS A.
2.06
01-13-2012
Sprinkler water flow and supervisory tamper switches shall be provided by Division 21. Provide addressable input monitor module to monitor each water flow switch and supervise each tamper switch.
CONTROL DEVICES A.
Addressable output control modules shall provide relays with isolated contacts for controlling mechanical equipment.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
26 81 11 - 7
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 2.09
MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS A.
2.10
Magnetic door holders shall be 24 VDC electromagnetic, flush wall or floor mounted single door devices. Door holders shall be controlled by a programmable relay module. Upon building power loss, door holders will close (not on battery power).
REMOTE NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE CIRCUIT (NAC) POWER EXTENDER PANELS A.
Remote Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) power extender panels shall be wall mountable, with locking hinged door cabinet. The panels shall contain batteries, charging circuit, and power supply.
B.
The Notification Appliance Circuit panel shall be addressable or controlled by programmable control modules. Strobe sync circuitry shall be built into each panel.
C.
Each Notification Appliance Circuit panel shall have a minimum of 6 Amperes of notification circuit power and shall have a minimum of four (4) zones.
PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
APPLICATION A.
Smoke detectors shown on plans are located schematically. Maximum spacing between multiple smoke detectors in an area shall be 30 feet. No walls shall be more than 15 feet from a smoke detector. Smoke detectors shall not be installed within three feet of a HVAC diffuser. Wall mounted smoke detectors shall be installed at 12 inches from ceiling.
B.
Programming shall be done by the manufacturer's authorized representative. Electrical Contractor shall include in the bid sufficient funds to cover three (3) visits of eight (8) hours duration each for programming changes to include re-burning of electronic hardware components, to be done at the completion of the project after life safety test.
C.
Tamper and waterflow switches are located schematically. Coordinate exact locations with Fire Protection Contractor.
D.
Visual device types shall be located as follows: Candela Level Corridors Rooms < 400 SF Sleeping rooms All other spaces
E.
15/75 15/75 177 110
Visual device types shall be located within 15 feet of end of corridor.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
26 81 11 - 8
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 3.02
01-13-2012
INSTALLATION A.
Follow manufacturer's written instructions regarding mounting, wiring, and testing the fire alarm system. Installers shall be certified for fire alarm work by State Agencies.
B.
Conductors shall be twisted pair No. 14 AWG solid copper for annunciation circuits. Provide minimum #18 shielded twisted pair solid copper wiring for initiation circuits and riser loops. Provide #14 AWG solid copper shielded twisted pair for speakers and fireman's phones. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's wiring diagrams, recommendations, and in compliance with practices set forth by local, State and National fire codes. Color code and tag all wires at all junction points. Do not exceed 40% conduit fill capacity. All cables shall be UL listed for Fire Alarm Application. Fire alarm wiring shall be red.
C.
Duct mounted smoke detectors and duct mounted area detectors shall be installed in return ducts as directed by the mechanical equipment supplier under the supervision of the Division 23 Contractor, in a location that is accessible. Provide wiring to mechanical control equipment as necessary to achieve equipment control upon smoke detection. Install remote indicator lights at 60 inches above finished floor on adjacent wall in utility spaces, or in ceiling below duct detectors. Install label on each station identifying application.
D.
Elevator Interface: 1. Provide a smoke detector on each elevator landing centered in front of elevator cars. Provide fire alarm system control relay in elevator machine room. Wire from control relay to elevator controller to permit capture and control of all elevators during a fire. Provide connection to elevator control panel to activate visual (fireman's helmet) signal system, which shall alert passengers that the elevator recall has been activated and is returning nonstop to the designated level. 2. Provide a smoke detector in the elevator machine room and at the top of the hoistway. Provide fire alarm system control relay in elevator machine room. Wire from control room to elevator controller to permit capture and control of all elevators during a fire. Provide connection to elevator control panel to activate the visual signal (fireman's helmet) to flash to alert firemen. 3. Heat detectors shown on plans are located schematically. Provide heat detectors, within 2 feet of each sprinkler head, in each hoistway, pit, and elevator machine room. Provide wiring from fire alarm system control relay, upon activation of the device, to activate the associated shunt trip circuit breaker. Provide the shunt trip breaker with auxiliary contacts to disable battery-lowering device. 4. Connect auxiliary contacts of power disconnect switch to disable battery lowering unit. 5. Connect water flow switches and tamper switches in sprinkler piping at each hoistway and machine room to fire alarm panel.
E.
All wiring shall be in conduit unless noted and independent of all other systems. Paint all junction boxes with red paint and label "Fire Alarm."
F.
Provide 3/4 inch conduit from digital communicator to telephone terminal board. Provide two analog phone line cables from telephone board.
G.
Install tamper switches on sprinkler system post indicating valves. Install addressable monitor modules inside of the building.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
26 81 11 - 9
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
H.
Smoke detectors located on either side of smoke doors and smoke shutters shall be installed between 1 and 5 feet of the door and connected to release magnetic door holders. Motorized smoke shutters with electric release shall have control power run from shutter operator through relay module to electric release mechanism.
I.
Provide 120 volt branch circuits for power to fire alarm control panel, equipment racks, remote control panels, power supplies, and sprinkler system air compressors.
J.
The return path for all Class A circuits shall be in a separate conduit with a separate route back to the panel.
K.
The system shall be programmed by the manufacturer to operate as described in Paragraph 1.05 - System Operation. In addition, the following sensitivity shall be programmed for smoke detectors in the following areas: General Areas Duct Mounted Smoke Detectors Mechanical/Electrical/Telephone Rooms Elevator Lobbies Resident Units
2.5% 1.0% 1.0% 3.7% 2.5%
L.
Signaling device circuits shall be loaded to no more than 75% of capacity.
M.
Speaker taps shall be initially set as follows during installation: 1. Speakers in small rooms (less than 500 SF) - 1/4 watt 2. Speakers in large rooms and corridors - 2 watts 3. Adjustment of tap settings as required shall be the responsibility of the contractor to the satisfaction of the Fire Inspector and Engineer.
N.
Panel shall be programmed to use slow "whoop" tone for annunciation before verbal message on voice system.
O.
Audible device (speaker) circuits shall be separately run to each of the following areas and selectivity controllable from the voice control panel: 1. Elevators 2. Elevator Lobbies 3. Main Corridors 4. Exit Stairways 5. General Areas on a Floor 6. Rooms exceeding 1000 square feet area 7. Sleeping Rooms
P.
Provide relays and wiring connection from the fire alarm system to all security system controllers to cause stairway door locks, exterior doors, and other egress doors to be released.
Q.
Provide conduit and wire connection to main building management system control panel from fire alarm panel relays for remote monitoring of general alarm and trouble.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
26 81 11 - 10
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
R.
Provide a signal to each riser of a pre-action sprinkler system upon smoke detection in areas of the building protected by that sprinkler riser. Refer to fire protection drawings for specific zone information.
S.
Provide control wiring to smoke control fans from on-off-auto key position switches in fire alarm panel. Provide relays as required to interface with motor starters.
T.
Provide relays as required to connect fire alarm system to auxiliary systems as specified in other sections and noted on Drawings.
U.
Provide conduit, wire, and addressable input control module connection to dimming system panels for override to full lighting level.
V.
Fire alarm system shall monitor emergency generator and report failure as a trouble condition.
W.
Smoke and heat detector bases shall have an adhesive tape label with the programmed address visible from floor when head is removed.
X.
Provide heat detectors in elevator hoistways, pits, and machine rooms within 2 feet of each sprinkler head and connect to shunt trip power feeder to elevator.
Y.
Provide an area type smoke detector within HVAC ductwork for each HVAC smoke damper shown on the HVAC plans. Detector shall be located within 5 feet of damper at access door location. Provide two (2) smoke detectors for ducts between 36 inches and 72 inches wide. Provide three (3) smoke detectors for ducts greater than 72 inches. Provide a system relay adjacent to smoke damper for signal damper to close.
Z.
The BACnet Portal requires 115 VAC, 50/60 Hz power. If the Portal does not have battery standby, therefore, if AC power is lost, the Portal ceases to operate. Third party interfaces are typically applied for read only, supplemental data reporting. Because most third party connections are to non-fire alarm listed networks, battery standby is not important. Typically, if a UPS is required to maintain operation with a power failure, then the same UPS system used to maintain power to the local area network modules can be used for the Portal.
AA. Area smoke detectors shall be located a minimum of 36 inches away from HVAC air supply diffusers or return air grills. 3.03
TESTING A.
Each zone in the fire alarm control panel and remote annunciator and each device shall be individually tested as installed in the building under the supervision of an authorized manufacturer's representative. Contractor shall include in his/her bid, time for testing after normal work hours.
B.
The complete fire alarm system shall be tested by the Contractor as required by the Fire Marshal inspecting authority in the presence of the Owner's representative. Contractor shall make all modifications as required by the Fire Marshal. Contractor shall include in bid a second fire alarm system test of modifications mode.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
26 81 11 - 11
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
3.04
C.
Operate system for a minimum of seven (7) consecutive days with no trouble conditions before claiming contract completion.
D.
Complete and submit the required NFPA 72 test and inspection forms.
SPARE PARTS A.
3.05
3.06
01-13-2012
Provide spare parts as follows: 1. Smoke Detectors and Alarms 2. Manual Pull Stations 3. Audio Visual Devices 4. Heat Detectors 5. Magnetic Door Holders
10 2 5 2 2
B.
Electrical Contractor shall include in his/her bid, an allowance for furnishing and installing (with average length of conduit and wire), the following, at completion of project as directed by the Architect. If not all used, remaining labor and material shall be credited to Owner: 1. Audiovisual Devices 10 2. Manual Pull Stations 2 3. Tamper / Waterflow switches 5 4. Duct Smoke Detectors 3 5. Area Smoke Detectors 3 6. Heat Detectors 3 7. Re-Programming Time 24 hours
C.
Furnish ten (10) keys to open panels, pull stations and annunciators.
D.
Obtain a signed copy of the Certificate of Material Receipt from Section 26 00 99, "Requirements for Contract Completion."
EQUIPMENT DEMONSTRATION A.
After all system operational tests have been completed, schedule an instruction period with the Owner. Instruction to be provided by manufacturer's authorized field technician.
B.
The instruction is to include the following: 1. Location of all components of the system and explanation of their function 2. Demonstration of equipment 3. Maintenance and repair procedures 4. Programming procedures 5. Review of documents in Record and Information Manuals
C.
All participants shall sign the Certificate of System Completion from Section 26 00 99, "Requirements for Contract Completion."
SMOKE DETECTOR SENSITIVITY TEST A.
All area and duct mounted smoke detectors shall have a sensitivity test conducted at the time of completion and during the eleventh month after date of contract completion. Sensitivity test shall be conducted by the manufacturer's representative. Clean all detectors that are out of their listed sensitivity range. Provide written documentation of test results. END OF SECTION
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
26 81 11 - 12
27
COMMUNICATIONS
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
27 00 00 DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS INTRODUCTORY STATEMENT
PART 1 1.01
1.02
GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS A.
All work included under this heading is subject to the Bidding Requirements, the Instructions to Bidders, the General Conditions, and/or the Division 1 General Requirements written for this entire Specification and shall apply to all work herein.
B.
In addition to conforming to the documents listed in Paragraph 1.01A above, the Contractor shall pay specific attention to Section 27 00 01, "General Requirements." The Work performed by the Division 27 Contractor shall conform to all provisions of Sections 27 00 00 through 27 99 99 as included and made part of this Specification. The Division 27 Contractor is to consider the word "Contractor" when used in these Sections to mean himself/herself.
C.
The Division 27 Contractor must read the entire Specifications of all divisions because he/she will be responsible for any and all Work described in other Sections where reference is made to "Division 27 and/or Communications Contractor."
APPLICABLE SECTIONS A.
Division 27 Contractor shall perform work described in the preceding paragraphs, and as it relates to Division 27 work in the following Sections (as included): 03 30 00 26 00 10 26 00 11 26 00 55 26 05 10 26 05 26 26 05 29 26 05 33 26 05 34 26 05 35 26 05 43
B.
Cast-in Place Concrete Coordination Between Trades Coordination with Utility Companies Sleeves, Seals and Firestops Wire and Cable Grounding Hangers and Supports (Seismic Load) Conduit and Fittings Outlet Boxes Pull and Junction Boxes Underground Raceways
Where reference is made to the Division 26 Contractor in the above applicable Division 26 Specification Sections, it shall be construed to mean Division 27 Contractor.
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS INTRODUCTORY STATEMENT
27 00 00 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 1.03
01-13-2012
RESPONSIBILITY A.
The Engineer's efforts under this Contract are aimed at designing a project that will be safe during construction and after full completion of the project. The Engineer has no expertise in, and takes no responsibility for, construction means and methods or job site safety during construction, which are exclusively the Contractor's responsibility. Processing and/or approving submittals made by the Contractor which may contain information related to construction methods or safety issues, or participation in meetings where such issues might be discussed must not be construed as voluntary assumption by the Engineer of any responsibility for safety procedures. END OF SECTION
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS INTRODUCTORY STATEMENT
27 00 00 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
27 00 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 1.01
1.02
DESCRIPTION A.
The Division 27 Contractor shall be experienced in Division 27, Communications/Low Voltage Systems work, and meet the requirements as specified in Paragraph 1.05 of this Specification.
B.
The Division 27 Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, materials, and equipment to complete and leave ready for operation the low voltage systems as specified herein, shown on the Drawings and any and all details essential for the completion of a working system.
C.
By submitting a bid, the Division 27 Contractor certifies that: 1. He/she has visited the site, reviewed the Drawings and Specifications, is satisfied that he/she understands all the requirements and conditions that may have an effect on his/her bid price. 2. He/she fully understands the makeup, construction, and operations of all systems and equipment he/she is bidding on and that he/she has included in his/her price all materials, supplies, accessories, labor, supervision, fees, and services necessary to make these systems complete, operational, and meet the requirements of the Drawings, this Specification, and any regulatory requirements or agency requirements having jurisdiction.
D.
Prior to submitting his/her bid, the Division 27 Contractor shall call to the attention of the Engineer in writing, any materials, apparatus, or systems the Contractor believes to be missing or inadequate and any items of work that he/she believes has been omitted.
SCOPE OF WORK A.
1.03
GENERAL
It is the intent of this Specification, and the Specification Sections referenced and included, to provide a written description of the quality of material and workmanship to be provided. The description shall be considered the minimum acceptable for this project. The Contractor shall use this Specification and the Drawings as his/her guide for installing the systems shown and specified.
APPLICABLE SECTIONS A.
Other Divisions of this Specification may apply and affect the Division 27 Contractor and the work he/she is required to perform.
B.
Division 27 Contractor shall coordinate his/her work with that of other trades and as described in other Specification Sections. The Contractor shall not delay other trades. Due to the nature of the Division 27 work, the Contractor will need to work diligently and coordinate his/her work so as not to be affected by any delays caused by others. In no case shall the schedule or the bid price be affected or changed by any such delays caused by himself/herself or others trades.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
27 00 01 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 1.04
1.05
1.06
1.07
01-13-2012
CODES, STANDARDS AND REGULATORY REFERENCES A.
All work and materials shall conform in every detail to the rules and requirements of National Fire Protection Association, National Electrical Code, and/or local Electrical Code, and present manufacturing and installation standards.
B.
All materials shall be UL listed and shall be marked as such. If UL has no published standards for a particular item, other national independent testing standards shall apply and such items shall bear those labels. Where UL has an applicable system listing and label, the entire system shall be so labeled.
C.
All modular jacks, patch panels, and patch cords shall be ETL verified (not just tested) to be Category 6 component and channel compliant depending on the system in which it is installed.
JOB SITE DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
The Contractor shall work with the General Contractor to identify where and when materials may be delivered and/or received. Depending on the site conditions, a storage area, for materials, may or may not be available. The Contractor is to include in his/her bid any and all expected costs related to storage, transport, and handling of materials for this project.
B.
Cable shall be stored according to manufacturer's recommendations as a minimum. In addition, cable must be stored in a location protected from vandalism and weather. If air temperature at cable storage location is above 100 degrees F, cable shall be moved and stored in a location where temperature is below 100 degrees F. If temperature will be below 32 degrees F, the cable shall be moved to a heated (50 degrees F minimum) location. If necessary, cable shall be stored off site at the Contractor's expense.
C.
If the Contractor wishes to have a trailer on site for storage of materials, arrangements must be made with the General Contractor and the Owner. However, space cannot be guaranteed.
SAFETY RESPONSIBILITY A.
Contractor shall have a safety program in place and shall stress the importance of safety on the job to his/her staff.
B.
Report any job site injuries immediately to General Contractor and Owners.
PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS A.
Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining any and all permits required and shall post same at the jobsite if so required.
B.
Contractor shall call for, set up, and assist in any and all inspections required by local authority having jurisdiction. 1. Contractor shall notify Engineer, in writing, of any corrections/changes identified and requested by local inspector having jurisdiction.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
27 00 01 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING PART 2 2.01
At the conclusion of the project, before final payment is made, Contractor shall turn over to and supply the Owner with the Contractor's warranty to be included in the three (3) sets of Record and Information Manuals as listed in Section 27 08 01, "System Testing and Documentation," Paragraph 2.01.H.
TESTING AND DOCUMENTATION A.
PART 3 3.01
At the conclusion of the project, before final payment is made, Contractor shall turn over to Engineer, for review and approval, three (3) copies of the Record and Information Manuals. After approval, Contractors shall supply the Owner with three (3) sets of Record and Information Manuals. The "Record and Information Manual" shall include all items listed in Section 27 08 01, "System Testing and Documentation," Paragraph 2.01.C - Record and Information Manual.
CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY A.
2.06
If products or materials are not listed in Paragraph 1.06, Contractor shall submit request for approval of materials offered ten (10) days prior to bid. 1. Contractor shall supply detailed description of product/material. 2. Contractor shall give explanation of why that product/material is required.
RECORD AND INFORMATION MANUAL A.
2.05
Contractor shall use only new, unused products and material approved, and accepted as listed in Division 27 Specifications.
NON-LISTED PRODUCTS A.
2.04
The Contractor shall provide all labor, supervision, materials, and products required for a complete operational low voltage system as identified in this Specification.
PRODUCTS TO BE USED A.
2.03
PRODUCTS
COMPLETE INSTALLATION A.
2.02
01-13-2012
At the conclusion of the project, before final payment is made, Contractor shall turn over to and supply the Owner with all tests and documentation as required per the Specification. Test reports shall be included in the Record and Information Manuals. The "Record and Information Manual" shall include all items listed in Section 27 08 01, "System Testing and Documentation," Paragraph 2.01.J.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Contractor shall supply qualified labor and supervision for the installation, testing, documentation, commissioning, training and servicing this project.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
27 00 01 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
3.02
3.03
01-13-2012
B.
At no time will any unlawful acts be permitted by any Contractor's personnel on the job site. There shall be no fighting or verbal assaults by the Contractor's employees. No consumption of alcoholic beverages shall be allowed. No guns shall be allowed on the job site or any parking area that is job related. No drug use shall be allowed. Contractor shall immediately dismiss any individual found to be participating in any of the above mentioned activities.
C.
Contractor shall have in place all insurance, permits, and licensing required for operating a business in the project location as required by law.
D.
Contractor shall have a non-discrimination policy.
E.
Contractor shall maintain, as a minimum, two (2) sets of full size Drawings reflecting the latest revisions. One (1) set will be used for installation; the second set will be used for "As-Built" notation of the project installation and changes.
F.
Contractor shall maintain sufficient materials and parts such that lack of materials and/or parts will not impact the completion of the project.
G.
Contractor shall work with and around other trades such as not to affect the construction schedule.
H.
Contractor shall make personnel available for assistance during Engineer/Owner site visit and walk through.
I.
Contractor shall supply all documentation as required, see Section 27 08 01, "System Testing and Documentation."
PUT INTO SERVICE A.
Upon completion of the work required, in each area, Contractor shall inspect the work and make sure that it is properly labeled, tested, and meets the standards. Additionally, he/she shall inspect the work and verify that the appearance is correct, all installed items are vertical or horizontal, and cables are terminated correctly, properly secured, and correctly labeled.
B.
Contractor shall have the project/system ready for occupancy and to be put into service as dictated by the project schedule.
C.
Contractor shall remove all debris, make sure the walls and equipment is clean (no finger or hand prints) and work area is swept and left in a clean manner.
COMPLETION A.
Upon completion, Contractor shall schedule commissioning and acceptance as outlined in Section 27 08 00, "Commissioning of Communications."
B.
Additionally, the Contractor shall have final documentation, as required, in Section 27 08 01, "System Testing and Documentation" Paragraph 2.01.C - Record and Information Manual ready for review and presentation to Owner. END OF SECTION
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
27 00 01 - 4
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
27 05 15 CABLE TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
PART 1 1.01
REQUIREMENTS A.
1.02
1.05
All equipment shall be UL listed and labeled and in accordance with applicable NEMA and ANSI Standards.
SUBMITTALS A.
For Review: 1. Product data sheets of all components. 2. Wiring diagrams.
B.
To be included in Record and Information Manuals: 1. One (1) copy of each approved submittal. 2. Test results. 3. Certificate of System Completion.
MANUFACTURERS A.
1.06
Division 27 Contractor shall furnish and install a complete and fully balanced cable television distribution system as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Provide all accessories and equipment as necessary for a complete system.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.04
The Contractor shall comply with Section 27 00 00, "Division 27 - Communications Introductory Statement" of Division 27 Specifications.
SCOPE OF WORK A.
1.03
GENERAL
Cable Television Distribution System Equipment: 1. Blonder-Tongue Laboratories, Inc. 2. Jerrold 3. RCA
SYSTEM OPERATION A.
Cable television distribution system shall provide good quality color reception of all channels provided by local cable carrier.
CABLE TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
27 05 15 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING PART 2 2.01
2.07
Rack shall be wall mounted, breezeway housing, 20" W x 27" H x 10.5" D. Model BH-1.
SURGE SUPPRESSORS A.
Power line surge protector shall be a power line shutdown device with response time of 15 milliseconds. Model 4694.
B.
Coax surge suppressors shall be inline, flange mountable, 75 ohm, with 0.1 dB insertion loss, capable of 50,000 Ampere surge. Polyphaser IS-75F-C1.
AMPLIFIER A.
PART 3 3.01
Cable shall be RG59/U, 75 ohm coaxial with foam insulation, 20 gauge solid copper conductor, aluminum braid shield, plenum rated insulation. West Penn CL2.
RACK A.
2.06
Isolation taps shall be flush wall mounted into standard device box. Valves shall be as required to deliver a signal between 12 dbmv to 18 dbmv at the outlet. Model Versatap V3889.
CABLE A.
2.05
Tap-offs shall be back matched inline, with 0.4 dB through line loss and 21 dB tap down. Model STB.
ISOLATION TAPS A.
2.04
Splitters shall be passive, hybrid, with low insertion loss. Models SUV series.
TAP-OFFS A.
2.03
PRODUCTS
SPLITTERS A.
2.02
01-13-2012
Broadband amplifier shall be a Blonder-Tongue BIDA 550-30. The broadband amplifier shall be a high gain (32 dB), 50 MHz to 550 MHz solid state amplifier for use in television distribution systems. Broadband amplifier shall be located in equipment rack.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Division 27 Contractor shall install cable television distribution system as shown on the Drawings in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
All cables shall be tagged at each end.
CABLE TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
27 05 15 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
3.02
3.03
01-13-2012
C.
All unused cables shall have 75 ohm terminators on them.
D.
Provide attenuators, amplifiers, etc., as required for a completely balanced system with high picture quality with signal strength between 15 dbmv to 20 dbmv at each television outlet.
E.
Install coax surge suppressors inline before equipment rack and run a No. 6 AWG copper ground wire to nearest building ground.
F.
Provide conduit stub ups from each outlet location to above accessible ceiling space. Provide continuous conduits across exposed areas or areas of inaccessible ceilings. Provide conduits between isolated areas of accessible ceilings to provide a continuous pathway for wiring from main equipment location to each device.
G.
Wiring shall be run along building lines and supported by bridle rings every 5 feet.
TESTING A.
Provide a complete functional test of all components in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations.
B.
Operate system for a minimum of seven (7) consecutive days with no problems before claiming Contract Completion.
C.
Refer to Section 26 08 40, "Electrical Tests, Adjustments, Inspection."
EQUIPMENT DEMONSTRATION A.
After all system tests have been completed, schedule an instruction period with the Owner. Instruction to be provided by Manufacturer's authorized field technician.
B.
Instruction shall include: 1. Location of all components of the system and explanation of their function 2. Demonstration of equipment 3. Maintenance and repair procedures 4. Programming procedures 5. Review of documents in Record and Information Manuals
C.
Division 27 Contractor shall have all participants sign the Certificate of System Completion in Section 26 00 99, "Requirements for Contract Completion." END OF SECTION
CABLE TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
27 05 15 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
27 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 1.01
1.02
GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS A.
The Division 27 Contractor shall work with the Division 26 Contractor who shall be responsible for the grounding system and shall follow Section 26 05 26, "Grounding" requirements and include the telecommunications grounding listed in Section 1.02.B.1, below. The Division 27 Contractor shall be responsible for grounding work identified in Section 1.02.B.2 below.
B.
The Contractor shall supply a grounding system as shown on the Drawings, specified herein and per ANSI/TIA/EIA-J-STD-607.
SCOPE A.
The aim of this document is to install a proper grounding system to achieve the following needs: 1. Safety from electrical hazards. 2. Reliable signal reference within the network. 3. Satisfactory and/or enhanced electromagnetic performance of the network.
B.
The "Grounding System" shall be a shared responsibility between the Division 26 (Electrical) Contractor and Division 27 (Low Voltage) Contractor. See attached schematic diagram. The Division 27 Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating his/her work with the Division 26 Contractor and the General Contractor. 1. The Division 26 Contractor shall supply and install the grounding system as specified in Section 26 05 26, "Grounding" and is also to include the following: a. Provide the TMGB (Telecommunication Main Grounding Busbar) in the MTR (Main Technology Distribution Room/demark room). b. The TMGB shall be connected to an earth ground (ground loop surrounding the building, if available) and the building steel by the TBB (Telecommunications Bonding Backbone) a properly sized copper grounding conductor. c. Provide a TGB (Telecommunication Grounding Busbar) in each TR located throughout the facility. d. Provide and connect the TBB to all TGBs to the building steel and to the TMGB. 2. The Division 27 Contractor shall: a. Connect all equipment, ladder rack, basket rack, telecom racks, cabinets and other equipment, in each TR and/or MTR, via a #6 AWG, green insulated, stranded copper ground conductor to the TGB and/or TMGB located in each TR and/or MTR.
C.
The Division 27 Contractor shall work with and coordinate with the Division 26 Contractor to insure that all aspects of the grounding system is complete and operational.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
27 05 26 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING PART 2 2.01
2.02
PRODUCTS
BUSBAR A.
The TMGB (Telecommunication Main Grounding Busbar) shall be solid copper grounding busbar, 1/4 inch thick x 4 inches high x 8 inches (minimum) length, as required to be supplied by the Division 26 Contractor.
B.
The TGB (Telecommunication Grounding Busbar) shall be solid copper grounding busbar, 1/4 inch thick x 2 inches high x 6 inches (minimum) length, as required to be supplied by the Division 26 Contractor.
C.
The TMGB and TGB shall be drilled with holes per NEMA standard for attaching compression fittings to be supplied by the Division 26 Contractor.
COPPER CABLE A.
All wire used for telecommunications grounding purposes shall be identified with green insulation. Non-insulated wire shall use green tape wrap at each termination point.
B.
If not shown on Drawings, Division 26 Contractor shall size grounding conductors to be used for connecting the TGBs to the TMGB and the building steel.
C.
All equipment in the MTR and/or TR shall be grounded using a minimum of #6 AWG stranded copper conductor with green insulation and compression connectors.
PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
WORK TO BE DONE A.
The Division 26 Contractor shall provide the TMGB and the TGB in each room requiring grounding.
B.
The Division 26 Contractor shall provide all grounding cabling required to connect the TMGB to earth and building steel and all cabling required to connect the TGB to building steel and to the TMGB.
C.
The Division 27 Contractor shall provide and connect all grounding cables required in the MTR and TR to properly ground all equipment to the TMGB and TGB.
D.
The completed installation (from TGB to TMGB to ground) shall be tested by the Division 26 Contractor and a record of test supplied to the Division 27 Contractor and the Engineer. The Division 27 Contractor shall include these test results in the "Record and Information Manual." END OF SECTION
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
27 05 26 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
01-13-2012
27 05 26 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
27 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 1.01
REQUIREMENT A.
1.02
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing the hangers and support system specified herein and shown on the Drawings.
SCOPE OF WORK A.
It is the intent, of this Specification, to spell out the minimum acceptable requirements for the hanger and support for communication systems, to be used for the Division 27 and 28 cable requirements.
B.
Division 27 Contractor shall furnish and install a complete hanger and support for communication systems, providing all threaded rods, "J-hooks," splice hardware, wall brackets, anchor and other equipment/material as shown on the Drawings or required for a complete functional system.
C.
Generally, the Drawings will not show the hanger and support for communication systems location. They will show the general location of the major basket or cable tray routing. Any hangers or supports shown on the Drawings are for reference and understanding the scope, and are to be considered the minimum acceptable. Final sizing and location of Jhooks, hangers, and supports shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. However, NO increases to the bid price and/or the schedule extension shall be allowed due to equipment alterations.
D.
For new installations, "J-hooks," fill capacity, shall not exceed 70% of its rated cable fill capacity (i.e., if J-bracket is rated for 100 cables, no more than 70 shall be installed).
E.
J-hooks are intended for voice, data, video, audio, and security cables only. They are intended for cable routing in areas of less than 100 Cat 6 cables. All other low voltage cabling systems, such as building controls, shall have cabling run-ins separate raceway system.
F.
All hangers and support material shall be galvanized or stainless steel, rust free material.
PART 2 2.01
GENERAL
PRODUCTS
J-HOOKS A.
J-hooks shall be at least 1 inch hook size, minimum.
B.
J-hooks shall not be over 4 inch hook size (for locations requiring 100 PR Cat 6 cables or more, use basket tray).
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
27 05 29 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
2.02
C.
J-hooks shall be manufactured from Spring Steel. Securable to wall, beam, threaded rod, unistrut, or pipe.
D.
May utilize multi-tier configuration.
E.
J-hooks shall have no sharp edges.
F.
Approved J-Hook Manufacturers: 1. Cooper B-Line, type BCH 2. ERICO, type Cable Cat 21 and 32
BRIDLE RINGS A.
2.03
Bridle rings are acceptable for small installations (less than 25 Cat 6 cables) providing they contain a bridle ring saddle.
THREADED RODS A.
Threaded rod is to be attached to building steel in a permanent manner. Minimum size of threaded rod shall be 3/8.
B.
Threaded rods are to be used for J-hook support where required.
C.
When used for wire basket or cable tray support, use threaded rods with a hanger trapeze kit or unistrut to form a trapeze type support for the wire basket or cable tray.
PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Hangers and supports shall be installed at intervals required by the wire basket or cable tray requirement and by good judgment, but not less than every 8 feet.
B.
Threaded rod for support of hooks and/or trays shall be permanently fastened to structural steel.
C.
J-hooks shall be securely fastened to wall, steel, or pipe and shall not be spaced more than 4 feet on center.
D.
J-hooks shall not be filled to more than 70% of rated capacity. END OF SECTION
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
27 05 29 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
27 51 23 RESIDENT CALL INTERCOM SYSTEM
PART 1 1.01
1.02
DESCRIPTION A.
Division 27 Contractor shall furnish and install a complete Intercom System as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. Provide all accessories and equipment as necessary for a complete system.
B.
Residence master stations shall have door lock release capabilities.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.03
1.04
A.
For Review: 1. Product data sheets of all components 2. Wiring Diagrams
B.
To be included in Record and Information Manuals: 1. One (1) copy of each approved submittal 2. Test results 3. Certificate of System Completion
MANUFACTURERS
PART 2
Intercom System 1. Aiphone 2. Dukane 3. Executone
PRODUCTS
MASTER STATIONS A.
2.02
All equipment shall be UL listed and labeled and in accordance with applicable NEMA and ANSI Standards.
SUBMITTALS
A.
2.01
GENERAL
The wall mounted master station shall be hands free with push-button door release button. Unit shall feature a four-stroke chime and volume control.
REMOTE STATION A.
The wall mounted flush remote station shall have call button for each residence unit.
RESIDENT CALL INTERCOM SYSTEM
27 51 23 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING 2.03
POWER SUPPLY A.
2.04
PART 3
3.02
3.03
Power supply shall be plug-in type – Model PT-121ON by Aiphone Corporation.
CABLE A.
3.01
01-13-2012
Cables shall be plenum rated.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Division 27 Contractor shall install Intercom System as shown on the Drawings in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Coordinate exact wiring requirements with Equipment Manufacturer. Coordinate interface requirements to card key system in field.
C.
Provide conduit stub ups from each outlet location to above accessible ceiling space. Provide continuous conduits across exposed areas or areas of inaccessible ceilings. Provide conduits between isolated areas of accessible ceilings to provide a continuous pathway for wiring from main equipment location to each device.
TESTING A.
Division 27 Contractor shall provide a complete functional test of all components in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations.
B.
Operate system for a minimum of seven (7) consecutive days with no problems before final acceptance by Owner.
C.
Refer to 26 08 40, "Electrical Tests, Adjustments, Inspection."
EQUIPMENT DEMONSTRATION A.
After all system tests have been completed, schedule an instruction period with the Owner. Instruction to be provided by Manufacturer's authorized field technician.
B.
Instruction shall include: 1. Location of all components of the system and explanation of their function 2. Demonstration of equipment 3. Maintenance and repair procedures 4. Programming procedures 5. Review of documents in Record and Information Manuals
C.
Division 27 Contractor shall have all participants sign the Certificate of System Completion in Section 26 00 99, "Requirements for Contract Completion." END OF SECTION
RESIDENT CALL INTERCOM SYSTEM
27 51 23 - 2
28
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
28 00 00 DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY INTRODUCTORY STATEMENT
PART 1 1.01
1.02
GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS A.
All work included under this heading is subject to the Bidding Requirements, the Instructions to Bidders, the General Conditions, and the Division 1 General Requirements written for this entire Specification and shall apply to all work herein.
B.
In addition to conforming to the documents listed in Paragraph 1.01 A. above, the work performed by the Division 28 Contractor shall conform to all provisions of Sections 28 00 00 through 28 99 99 as included and made part of this Specification. The Division 28 Contractor is to consider the word "Contractor" when used in these Sections to mean himself/herself.
C.
The Division 28 Contractor must read the Specifications of all divisions, because they will be responsible for any and all work described in other Sections where reference is made to Division 28 and/or Electronic Safety and Security Contractor.
APPLICABLE SECTIONS A.
Division 28 Contractor shall perform work described in the preceding paragraphs, and as it relates to Division 28 work in the following Sections (as included): 27 00 00 27 00 01 27 05 26 27 05 27 27 05 28 28 26 30
B.
1.03
Communications Introductory Statement General Requirements Grounding & Bonding for Communications Systems Cable Tray (Ladder Rack & Wire Basket) Pathways for Communications Area of Rescue Assistance Intercom
Where reference is made to the Division 27 Contractor in the above applicable Division 27 Specification Sections, it shall be construed to mean Division 28 Contractor.
RESPONSIBILITY A.
The Engineer's efforts under this Contract are aimed at designing a project that will be safe after full completion. The Engineer has no expertise in, and assumes no responsibility for, construction means and methods, nor job site safety during construction. These are exclusively the Contractor's responsibility. Processing and/or approving submittals made by the Contractor which may contain information related to construction methods or safety issues, or participation in meetings where such issues might be discussed must not be construed as voluntary assumption by the Engineer of any responsibility for safety procedures. END OF SECTION
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY INTRODUCTORY STATEMENT 28 00 00 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
28 26 30 AREA OF RESCUE ASSISTANCE INTERCOM
PART 1 1.01
1.02
DESCRIPTION A.
Division 28 Contractor shall furnish and install Area of Rescue Assistance Intercom stations as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. Provide all accessories and equipment as necessary for a complete system.
B.
The Area of Rescue Station shall call pre-programmed phone numbers assigned to that station. The Area of Rescue Command unit shall be the primary number called by the Area of Rescue Station with automatic roll-over to the off-site monitoring center as the secondary number called.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.03
1.04
All equipment shall be UL listed and labeled and in accordance with applicable NEMA and ANSI Standards.
SUBMITTALS A.
For Review: 1. Product data sheets of all components 2. Wiring Diagrams 3. Layout Drawings locating all components of system
B.
To be included in Record and Information Manuals: 1. One (1) copy of each approved submittal 2. Test results 3. Certificate of System Completion
MANUFACTURERS A.
PART 2 2.01
GENERAL
Intercom System 1. Talk-A-Phone ETP-100EB 2. Code Blue 3. GAI-Tronics
PRODUCTS
INDOOR AREA OF RESCUE STATION A.
The flush mounted intercom station shall be an ADA compliant hands-free telephone access emergency phone. The emergency phone shall have a single call button to dial preprogrammed emergency numbers.
AREA OF RESCUE ASSISTANCE INTERCOM
28 26 30 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
2.02
2.03
B.
The emergency phone shall have the following features: 1. The faceplate shall be 12 gauge brushed stainless steel. 2. The faceplate shall be 9.25 inches wide and 11 inches tall. 3. Communication shall be hands-free two-way. 4. Power shall be via the phone line. (No external power supply will be needed.) 5. Non-volatile programming can be done from any telephone. 6. Minimum of two programmed calling numbers with automatic roll-over to secondary number if the primary number is unanswered. 7. The Area of Rescue Station shall include the capability to record a message identifying the location of the call. 8. The Area of Rescue Station shall be a Talk A Phone Model ETP-100EBV with a matching backbox.
C.
The illuminated Area of Rescue assistance sign shall be 12.5 inches by 13.5 inches and shall be wall or ceiling mounted as shown, 120 volt. The area of rescue assistance sign shall be a Talk A Phone ETP-SIGN/L.
D.
The Intercom station can be equipped with an optional relay to be used for gate or door control. The command center or answering phone shall have the ability to close this relay contact by pressing the #6 on the keypad.
AREA OF RESCUE COMMAND UNIT A.
The Area of Rescue Command Unit shall accommodate up to eight (8) Area of Rescue Stations. The unit shall indicate an incoming call with a strobe/sounder and call location LED.
B.
The Area of Rescue Command Unit shall have the following features: 1. Accommodates up to eight (8) stations 2. Provides power to the Area of Rescue Stations 3. LED on command unit indicates calling station location 4. Built-in four (4) hour battery backup in case of power failure 5. Built-in phone 6. Line seizure for off-sire calling lines eliminating the need for a dedicated phone line 7. The Area of Rescue Command Unit shall be a Talk A Phone model CU-8
CABLE A.
PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
Cable shall be shielded twisted 20 gauge pair terminating at a telephone junction block. The Area of Rescue Command Unit shall be connected to a standard telephone (voice) line for off-site calling.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Division 28 Contractor shall install Area of Rescue Stations and Command Unit as shown on the Drawings in accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions.
AREA OF RESCUE ASSISTANCE INTERCOM
28 26 30 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
3.02
3.03
01-13-2012
B.
Coordinate exact wiring requirements with Equipment Manufacturer.
C.
Provide conduit stub ups from each outlet location to above accessible ceiling space. Provide continuous conduits across exposed areas or areas of inaccessible ceilings. Provide conduits between isolated areas of accessible ceilings to provide a continuous pathway for wiring from main equipment location to each device.
D.
Wiring shall be run along building lines and supported by bridle rings every 5 feet.
E.
Use plenum rated cable in areas with plenum air return.
TESTING A.
Division 27 Contractor shall provide a complete functional test of all components in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations.
B.
Operate system for a minimum of seven (7) consecutive days with no problems before final acceptance by Owner.
C.
Refer to 26 08 40, "Electrical Tests, Adjustments, Inspection."
EQUIPMENT DEMONSTRATION A.
After all system tests have been completed, schedule an instruction period with the Owner. Instruction to be provided by Manufacturer's authorized field technician.
B.
Instruction shall include: 1. Location of all components of the system and explanation of their function 2. Demonstration of equipment 3. Maintenance and repair procedures 4. Review of documents in Record and Information Manuals END OF SECTION
AREA OF RESCUE ASSISTANCE INTERCOM
28 26 30 - 3
31
EARTHWORK
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Preparing subgrades. Exportation of fill and or topsoil materials necessary to achieve the final grades indicated on the Drawings. Excess excavated materials and topsoil shall be removed and disposed of off site. Redistribution of excess excavated material and topsoil off site. Excavating and backfilling. Drainage course for slabs-on-grade. Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements. Base course for asphalt paving. Preparing final grades. Provide a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.
B.
The Owner will provide a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.
C.
Existing on-site and imported topsoil materials analysis, amendment recommendations and materials provided under Division 32 Section “Turf and Grasses”.
1.2 A.
1.3
SUBMITTALS Three (3) copies of testing and inspection reports on subgrade conditions, foundation excavations, compaction operations, fill material and granular base. DEFINITIONS
A.
Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation.
B.
Base Course: Layer placed between the subbase course and asphalt paving.
C.
Bedding Course: Layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.
D.
Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
E.
Drainage Course: Layer supporting slab-on-grade used to minimize capillary flow of pore water.
F.
Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations.
EARTH MOVING
312000 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1.
2.
01/13/12
Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations as directed by Architect. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation.
G.
Excess Excavated Material: Subgrade material remaining after rough grading to establish elevations indicated is complete.
H.
Excess Topsoil: Topsoil material remaining after finish grading to established elevations is complete.
I.
Existing On-Site Topsoil: Natural soils from on-site sources, ASTM D 5268, with pH range of 5.5 to 7, minimum 2 percent minimum organic material content, free of stones and other materials 1” or larger in any dimension, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. 1. 2.
Verify suitability of stockpiled surface soils, if any, to produce adequate quantity of topsoil required. Supplement surface soil with imported or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources if existing on-site topsoil quantities are insufficient for quantity of topsoil required.
J.
Imported Topsoil: Natural or manufactured soils from off-site sources, ASTM D 5268, with pH range of 5.5 to 7, minimum 2 percent minimum organic material content, free of stones and other materials 1” or larger in any dimension, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.
K.
Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing subgrades.
L.
Remove and Dispose of: Excavate completely and deposit at an off-site location.
M.
Rock: Solid, hard, cementitious aggregate deposits, or solid boulders 1/2 cubic yard or more in volume.
N.
Rock Excavation: Excavation of buried boulders and rock in excess of 1/2 cubic yard that requires systematic drilling, ripping, or use of special equipment.
O.
Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.
P.
Subbase Course: Layer placed between the subgrade and base course for asphalt paving, or layer placed between the subgrade and a concrete pavement or walk.
Q.
Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
R.
Unsuitable Soils: Excavated non-topsoil materials that are unacceptable to the Soils Engineer as a fill material or bearing surface.
EARTH MOVING
312000 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE S.
1.4
01/13/12
Utilities: On-site above and underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings. PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Prior to starting any of the work, notify utility locator service for the area where Project is located. Clearly locate and identify existing underground and overhead utilities in areas of the work. If utilities are to remain, provide adequate means of protection during site work operations. Repair utilities damaged during site work operations to satisfaction of utility owner and at contractor's expense.
B.
Should uncharted or incorrectly charted underground piping or other utilities be encountered during the work, notify the applicable utility company immediately for procedures and directions. Cooperate with the applicable utility company in maintaining active service and facilities in operation.
C.
Should unknown or uncharted underground hazardous waste materials or suspected hazardous waste materials be encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. 1. 2.
Encountered materials will be tested by Owner under a separate contract. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.
D.
Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated.
E.
Site Conditions: 1. 2.
3. 4.
Protection for existing trees, plants, lawns, paving, and other features designated to remain provided under Division 01 Section, “Temporary Facilities and Controls”. Barricade open excavations and post warning lights at work adjacent to parking areas and streets outside the construction area. Comply with OSHA requirements for safety. Coordinate traffic control requirements with local authorities. All underground site utility, concrete and masonry installation work shall take place "in the dry". Dewatering Activities: Comply with EPA and local municipal requirements. Discharge water shall be disposed of in a manner that will not interfere with or damage adjacent construction activities, endanger public health or adjacent property, or contribute to soil erosion and the build-up of ice. Do not direct surface water drainage toward or across any excavation.
F.
Fill: There is insufficient on-site fill material to complete the work. Provide additional fill material required to establish indicated subgrades. Imported fill materials tested and approved by the Soils Engineer.
G.
Topsoil: Verify suitability of stockpiled surface soils, if any, to produce adequate quantity of topsoil required to establish indicated finish grades.
EARTH MOVING
312000 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1.
H.
01/13/12
Supplement surface topsoil with imported or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources if existing on-site topsoil quantities are insufficient for quantity of topsoil required.
Owner’s Soils Report: Refer to Owner’s soils report for anticipated subsurface conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
SOIL MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations.
B.
Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM, or a combination of these group symbols; free of rock or gravel larger than 3” in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.
C.
Unsatisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH, OL, OH, and PT, or a combination of these group symbols.
D.
Backfill and Fill: Satisfactory soil materials.
E.
On-Site or Imported Topsoil: Natural or manufactured soils, ASTM D 5268, with pH range of 5.5 to 7, minimum 2 percent minimum organic material content, free of stones and other materials 1” or larger in any dimension and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. 1.
2.
Topsoil Source: Import topsoil or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well-drained construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4" deep; do not obtain from agricultural land, bogs or marshes. Amendments: Includes soil amendment materials noted in topsoil analysis report.
F.
Subbase: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1½” sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
G.
Base: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1½” sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
H.
Bedding: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1” sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
I.
Drainage Fill: Washed, narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1½” sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve.
EARTH MOVING
312000 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
J.
Detectable Warning Tape: Polyethylene film warning tape encasing a metallic core, minimum 6” wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility.
K.
Subgrade Stabilization Materials: Refer to Owner’s Soils Report for subgrade stabilization materials required under indicated weather and subgrade conditions: Materials include: 1. 2. 3.
L. 2.2 A.
2.3 A.
Imported dry fill. Subgrade lime stabilization program. No. 2 stone subgrade bridge lift.
Bentonite: Powdered bentonite, as manufactured by Baroid Bentonite Inc. EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL Erosion and Sedimentation Control Measures: Comply with Ohio's Standards for Stormwater Management, Land Development and Urban Stream Protection, latest edition. ACCESSORIES Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6" wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility. 1.
Tape Colors: Provide tape colors to utilities as follows: a. b. c. d. e.
B.
Geotech Fabric for separation of aggregate base materials and soils in roadway or parking lot construction: Provide a woven geosynthetic with the minimum physical properties: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
C.
Red: Electric. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. Orange: Telephone and other communications. Blue: Water systems. Green: Sewer systems.
Minimum Tensile Strength: 200 pounds. Minimum Elongation: 20 percent. Minimum Puncture Strength: 80 psi. Minimum Burst Strength: 320 PSI. Water Flow Rate: 17 gpm/sq.ft. Permitivity: 0.13 per sec.
Geotech Fabric for underdrain or drainage systems: Provide a nonwoven geosynthetic with the minimum physical properties: 1. 2. 3.
Grab Tensile Strength: 135 pounds. Grab Elongation: 50 percent. Puncture Strength: 100 pounds.
EARTH MOVING
312000 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 4. 5. 6.
01/13/12
Mullen Burst Strength: 250 pounds. Water Flow Rate: 110 gpm/sq.ft. Permeability: 0.3 cm/s.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, freezing temperatures or frost, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary.
B.
Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
C.
Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.
D.
Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation.
E.
Provide necessary pumps and drainage lines to maintain excavations free from water, ice, snow at all times during earthwork operations.
3.2 A.
EXCAVATION Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered, including rock, soil materials, and obstructions. 1.
B.
If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.
Excavate for structures, pavements, and walks to indicated elevations and dimensions. Extend excavations for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. Foundations to bear on approved, dry, undisturbed, unfrozen bearing soil or approved compacted fill. 1.
2. 3.
Do not excavate to foundation or footing full depth when freezing temperatures may be expected, unless footings or slabs are poured immediately after the excavation completion. Protect excavation bottoms from freezing if concrete placing is delayed. Foundation excavations inspected and approved by the Soils Engineer before concrete placement. Excavation includes satisfactory removal and disposal of existing fill, buried topsoil, and other unsuitable materials encountered regardless of the nature of the
EARTH MOVING
312000 - 6
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
4.
5.
C.
materials, the condition of the materials when they are excavated, or the manner in which they are excavated. Extra Excavations: When excavations have reached indicated subgrade elevations and Soils Engineer determines the bearing materials to be unsatisfactory, excavate soils materials extending below required elevations to depth directed by Soils Engineer. Such extra excavations will be paid for as a change in the work. Obtain written authorization from the Owner before performing extra excavation work. Unauthorized Excavations: Fill and backfill unauthorized excavations to proper grades. Fill unauthorized excavation at footings with concrete listed in Section 03300. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Soils Engineer. Additional labor and material for unauthorized excavation and remedial work at contractor's expense.
Excavate utility trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and invert elevations of uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12” higher than top of pipe or conduit. 1.
D.
01/13/12
Excavate trenches deeper than bottom of pipe elevation, 6” deeper in rock, 4” deeper elsewhere, to allow for bedding course. Hand excavate for pipe bell.
Rock excavation is not anticipated. However, if required, rock excavation will be paid for as a change in work. Obtain written authorization prior to performing rock excavation work. 1.
The use of explosives will not be permitted.
E.
Proof roll subgrades, before filling or placing aggregate courses, with heavy pneumatictired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof roll wet or saturated subgrades.
F.
Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities.
G.
Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory soil materials, without intermixing, in shaped, graded, drained, and covered stockpiles. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations and outside drip line of remaining trees.
3.3 A.
BACKFILLS AND FILLS Utility Trench Backfill: Place, compact, and shape bedding course to provide continuous support for pipes and conduits over rock and other unyielding bearing surfaces and to fill unauthorized excavations. 1.
2. B.
Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil material or subbase material, free of particles larger than 1”, to a height of 12” over the utility pipe or conduit. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12” below finished grade, except 6” below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
Fill: Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations.
EARTH MOVING
312000 - 7
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE C.
Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1.
D.
Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.
Compaction Schedule: Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8” in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4” in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry density according to ASTM D 698 and as noted in the Owner’s soils report: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
E.
01/13/12
Roads, drives and parking areas: 98%/100% upper 12”. Under foundations and footings: 98%. Within 5’ of exterior side of foundation walls: 95%. Beyond 5’ of exterior side of foundation walls: 93%. Below slab-on-grade: 98%. Pipe bedding: 95%. Grass areas Rolled 98%. Landscaped areas: 93%. Over excavated areas: 98%. Utility trench backfill: 95%.
Grading: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines and elevations indicated. 1. 2.
Subgrades: Grade lawns, walks, and unpaved subgrades to tolerances of plus or minus 1” and pavements and areas within building lines to plus or minus ½”. Finish Grades: Grade lawn and planting areas to tolerances of plus or minus 0.10’. a. b. c.
3.
Provide 6” (minimum) topsoil materials unless noted otherwise. Fill in backs of curbs, sidewalks, paving, equipment pads and around building perimeter where required. Pavement Islands: Remove and dispose of portions of aggregate base required to install topsoil.
Imported Topsoil Amendments: Install amendment materials over topsoil areas at rates indicated in the imported topsoil analysis report. Thoroughly mix into topsoil.
F.
Subbase and Base Courses: Under pavements and walks, place subbase course on prepared subgrade. Place base course material over subbase. Compact to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness.
G.
Under slabs-on-grade, place drainage course on prepared subgrade.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
EARTH MOVING
312000 - 8
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE A.
The Contractor shall perform the following work and services in connection with required testing services. 1. 2. 3.
4. 5. 6.
7.
B.
Provide safe and unobstructed access to the work in areas to be tested or inspected. Furnish required labor, equipment, and materials to handle and obtain material samples at the site or at its source. Advise testing agencies sufficiently far in advance of operations to allow for completion of required tests, and for orderly assignment of testing agency personnel. Promptly furnish required material test copies of and other reports to the testing agency. Provide adequate facilities and shelter for performance of on-site testing, and storage of test specimens and samples. Allow testing agency to test and inspect subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
Soils Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports. 1.
2. 3. 4.
3.5
01/13/12
Compaction Operations: Full-time inspection and testing during filling and compaction operations. Test each lift of fill to verify compaction meets specified requirements. Periodic inspection and testing performed during other construction operations. Subgrade Surfaces: Inspect subgrade surfaces to verify subgrade surfaces are adequate. Foundation Excavations: Verify bearing surfaces are adequate and meet or exceed design bearing values. Fill and Granular Base Materials: Test proposed materials to verify suitability for use, gradation of material, moisture-density relation by ASTM D698 (Standard Proctor) and percent of organic materials.
PROTECTION AND DISPOSAL
A.
Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.
B.
Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction.
C.
Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
EARTH MOVING
312000 - 9
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE D.
01/13/12
Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory excavated soil, topsoil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 312000
EARTH MOVING
312000 - 10
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
31 41 00 SHORING AND BRACING
PART 1 1.01
1.02
GENERAL
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: Extent of shoring and bracing work includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Soil Retention: Shoring and bracing necessary to protect existing buildings, streets, walkways, utilities, and other improvements and excavation against loss of ground or caving embankments. 2. Shoring and bracing of existing building components associated with demolition work. 3. Maintenance of shoring and bracing. 4. Removal of bracing, as required, and removal of shoring.
B.
Related Sections: 1. Section 02 32 00, "Geotechnical Data" 2. Section 01 50 00, "Temporary shoring and bracing" 3. Section 02 41 16, "Demolition" 4. Section 31 00 01, "Building Excavation" 5. Section 03 30 00, "Cast-In-Place Concrete"
REFERENCES A.
American Concrete Institute (ACI): ACI 318-05
B.
Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, March 9, 2005.
1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.
Type of shoring and bracing system includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Lagging, sheeting, or soldier piles.
B.
Soil Retention: The system consists of soldier piles and wood lagging, or interlocking steel sheets. Tiebacks and walers to be used to retain the sheeting in place if required. Wherever sheeting and tiebacks are required, they shall be so located to clear all permanent construction and allow proper installation of foundations and associated work including, but not limited to, foundations, forming, finishing, waterproofing, drainage, insulation, and backfilling.
SHORING AND BRACING
31 41 00 - 1
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING C.
1.04
1.05
1.06
01-13-2012
Design: 1. Provide for design of system under this section. 2. The system, including all component members, shall be designed to safely support all earth and hydrostatic pressures, building dead weight, and traffic and construction loads, including the Contractor's machinery and equipment, without objectionable deflections of the members. 3. Design of the shoring shall conform to ACI 318-05 and AISC "Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings."
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Installer Qualifications: 1. Minimum five (5) years experience in shoring work similar to type required for this Work. 2. Submit evidence of successful completion of minimum five (5) similar projects. 3. Staff: a. Minimum one registered Professional Engineer licensed to perform work in state where project is located. b. A supervising Engineer for this project having at least five (5) years of design and construction experience in this type of work. c. An experienced foreman or superintendent on-site.
B.
Regulations: Comply with local codes and ordinances of governing authorities having jurisdiction.
SUBMITTALS A.
Design Drawings: Provide design drawings for shoring system and other data prepared and sealed by a registered Professional Engineer. System design and calculations must be acceptable to local authorities having jurisdiction before starting work. Include the following: 1. Materials. 2. Relation of components to property line, existing buildings structures, utilities, streets, and new construction. 3. Sequence of operations. 4. Sufficient detail to clearly illustrate scope of work.
B.
Review Disclaimer: Acceptance of the Contractor's plans and methods of construction by the Architect, Engineers, or reviewing authorities shall not be construed to relieve the Contractor in any way from his/her responsibility for the successful performance of the shoring, bracing or underpinning.
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Existing Conditions: See Section 02 32 00, "Soils Borings." It is the Contractor's responsibility to satisfy him/her regarding subgrade conditions and to provide a suitable shoring system.
SHORING AND BRACING
31 41 00 - 2
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING B.
Before starting work, check and verify governing dimensions and elevations. In company with Architect, jointly survey condition of adjoining properties. Take photographs, as directed by Architect, recording any previous settlement or cracking of structures, pavements, and other improvements. Prepare a list of such damages, verified by dated photographs, and signed by Contractor and Architect and other conducting the investigation.
C.
Survey adjacent structures and improvements, establishing exact elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations. Locate datum level used to establish benchmark elevations sufficiently distant so as not to be affected by movement resulting from excavation operations.
D.
During excavation, resurvey benchmarks as required but at least weekly, employing a licensed Land Surveyor or registered Professional Engineer. Maintain accurate log of surveyed elevations for comparison with original elevations. Promptly notify Architect if changes in elevations occur or if new cracks, sags or other damage is evident.
E.
Existing Utilities: Protect existing active sewer, water, gas, electricity, and other utility services and structures. 1. Utility Notification: See Section 00 73 00, "Supplementary Conditions," Article 10.2.2.1. Verify compliance before beginning work.
F.
Coordination with Other Operations: The scheduling and progress of the shoring and bracing work shall be coordinated with all the other related work such as dewatering, excavation foundation demolition work, installation, pouring of concrete walls and slabs, or any other operations that might be affected by this work.
PART 2 2.01
PRODUCTS
GENERAL A.
PART 3 3.01
01-13-2012
Provide suitable shoring and bracing materials which will support loads imposed. Materials need not be new, but should be in serviceable condition.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION A.
Soil Retention: Protect the site from caving and unacceptable soil movement. Wherever shoring is required, locate the system to clear permanent construction and to permit forming and finishing of concrete surfaces. Providing shoring system adequately anchored and braced to resist earth and hydrostatic pressures. Shoring systems retaining earth on which the support or stability of existing structures is dependent must be left in place at completion of work. If wood is part of the shoring system, use pressure preservative treated materials or remove before placement of backfill.
B.
Do not place bracing where it will be cast into or included in permanent concrete work, except as otherwise acceptable to Architect.
SHORING AND BRACING
31 41 00 - 3
LANE AVENUE MIXED USE BUILDING MULTI-USE APARTMENT BUILDING
01-13-2012
C.
Remove all sheeting and shoring to four (4) feet below grade in stages to avoid disturbance to underlying soils and damage to structures, pavements, facilities, and utilities. See Paragraph 3.01.A above for shoring to be left in place.
D.
Repair or replace, as directed by Architect, adjacent work damaged or displaced through the installation or removal of shoring and bracing work.
E.
Tiebacks: Install in accordance with accepted design drawings.
F.
As-built Drawings: Furnish in accordance with Section 01 70 00, "Execution Requirements," showing location and description of shoring or bracing to remain in place in the final work, if any. END OF SECTION
SHORING AND BRACING
31 41 00 - 4
32
EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 321216 - ASPHALT PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
1.2 A.
Owner will provide a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports. SUBMITTALS Products and Reports: 1. 2. 3.
1.3
Hot-mix asphalt paving. Extruded asphalt curbs. Parking blocks. Striping.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties. Job-Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each job mix proposed for the Work. Material Certificates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall be registered with and approved by authorities having jurisdiction and the Ohio Department of Transportation (ODOT).
B.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed hot-mix asphalt paving similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, and with a record of successful in-service performance.
C.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable standards of the Ohio Department of Transportation (ODOT).for asphalt paving work.
D.
Asphalt-Paving Publication: Comply with the Ohio Department of Transportation (ODOT) "Construction and Material Specifications", latest edition, and AI MS-22, "Construction of Hot Mix Asphalt Pavements," unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
1.4
PROJECT CONDITIONS
ASPHALT PAVING
321216 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE A.
01/13/12
Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively damp or if the following conditions are not met: 1. 2.
Prime Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 50 degrees F. Course Thickness Minimum Surface Temp. 3" and over 36 degrees F 1.5" to 2.9" 40 degrees F 1" to 1.4" 50 degrees F less than 1" 60 degrees F
B.
Integral Concrete Curbs: Proceed with paving after integral concrete curbs, provided under Division 32 Section "Concrete Pavement", are installed and properly cured.
C.
Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of for oil-based materials, or waterbased materials, and not exceeding manufacturer's installation requirements.
D.
Prime Coat: If aggregate base course surface conditions are such that the binder in the asphalt intermediate course would be absorbed into the base, install a prime coat over the aggregate base prior to intermediate course installation.
E.
Tack Coat: If surface asphalt concrete course is not placed within ten (10) days after completion of the intermediate asphalt concrete course, install a tack coat over intermediate course prior to surface course installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
ASPHALT MATERIALS
A.
Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by the Ohio Department of Transportation (ODOT).
B.
Bituminous Aggregate Base: ODOT Item 301. 1. 2. 3.
C.
Aggregate Base: ODOT Item 304. 1.
2. 3. D.
Aggregate: ODOT Item 703.04. Bituminous Materials: ODOT 702.01. Mineral Filler: ODOT 703.07.
Crushed carbonate stone, crushed gravel, crushed air-cooled blast furnace slag, and open hearth slag from approved sources and meeting the gradation requirements of 703.04 . Open-hearth slag: Conform to the stockpiling and aging requirements of 703.01. Granulated slag: Meet the requirements of 703.08.
Asphalt Concrete: Dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt, plant mixed and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 1.
Intermediate Course: ODOT Item 448.
ASPHALT PAVING
321216 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2. E.
2. 3.
2.
A.
Bituminous material meeting the applicable requirements of 702 and one of the following: 702.02 RC-70, RC-250, MC-30, MC-70, or MC-250; or 702.03 Primer 20. Application Rate: 0.4 gallons per square yard.
Extruded Asphalt Curbs: ODOT Item 609. 1.
2.2
Bituminous material meeting the applicable requirements of 702 and one of the following: 702.02 RC-70 or RC-250; 702.04 RS-1, SS-1, SS-1h, CRS-1, CSS-1 or CSS-1h; or 702.13. Cut-back asphalt 702.02 may only be used after September 15 and before May 15. Application Rate: 0.75 gallons per square yard.
Prime Coat: ODOT Item 408. 1.
G.
Surface Course: ODOT Item 446.
Tack Coat: ODOT Item 407. 1.
F.
Primer: Bituminous material meeting the requirements of 407.02 and applied at the rate of 0.15 gallons per square yard. Treat area under curbs only.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS On-Site Parking and Pavement-Marking Paints: Provide one of the following: 1.
"SetFast Acrylic Waterborne Traffic Marking Paint Lead Free by SherwinWilliams. a.
2. 3. B.
01/13/12
Materials: Waterborne acrylic conforming to U.S. Bureau of Public Roads colors and Federal Specifications TT-P-1952B, Type 1. Low VOC.
Color: White. Coats: One (1).
Concrete Parking Blocks: Precast, air-entrained concrete, 5,000 psi minimum compressive strength, natural color. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Size: 5½" high by 8" wide by 72" long with two (2) #3 reinforcing bars. Provide chamfered corners and drainage slots on underside and holes for anchoring to substrate. Dowels: Two (2) 5/8" diameter galvanized steel rods, 24"minimum length, per unit. Grout: Comply with ASTM C 476 and Division 04 Section “Unit Masonry".
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
SURFACE PREPARATION
ASPHALT PAVING
321216 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
A.
Saw cut existing pavement at new/existing pavement locations to provide a uniform straight line transition.
B.
Proof-roll subbase using heavy, pneumatic-tired rollers to locate areas that are unstable or that require further compaction.
C.
Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving. 1.
D.
Prime Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.15 to 0.25 gallons per square yard. 1. 2.
3.2 A.
Sweep loose granular particles from surface of unbound-aggregate base course. Do not dislodge or disturb aggregate embedded in compacted surface of base course.
Allow prime coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.
HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted. 1. 2.
Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 degrees. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and tears in asphalt-paving mat.
B.
Place paving in consecutive strips not less than wide unless infill edge strips of a lesser width are required.
C.
Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.
D.
Patch and repair existing street and on-site pavement damaged or removed for installation of new work to meet existing surface levels and drainage slopes.
E.
Tack Coat: If surface asphalt concrete course is not placed within ten (10) days after completion of the intermediate asphalt concrete course, install a tack coat over intermediate course prior to surface course installation.
3.3 A.
COMPACTION General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or vibratory-plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.
ASPHALT PAVING
321216 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1.
01/13/12
Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F.
B.
Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements.
C.
Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density: 1.
Average Density: 92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density according to ASTM D 2041, but not less than 90 percent nor greater than 96 percent.
D.
Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still warm.
E.
Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened.
F.
Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked.
3.4 A.
INSTALLATION TOLERANCES Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following tolerances: 1. 2.
B.
Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas: 1. 2. 3.
3.5
Base Course: Plus or minus ½". Surface Course: Plus ¼", no minus.
Base Course: ¼". Surface Course: 1/8". Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown. Maximum allowable variance from template is ¼".
PAVEMENT MARKING
A.
Allow paving to age for 30 days before sealing and pavement marking operations.
B.
Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust. Block all traffic to areas to be sealed and striped, and maintain barriers until sealing and striping is complete.
C.
Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Architect.
ASPHALT PAVING
321216 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE D.
Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions indicated, with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils minimum. 1.
3.6
01/13/12
Install diagonal striping and handicapped logo markings at noted locations.
WHEEL STOPS
A.
Align units straight, centered in each space, and anchored with steel rods driven through holes in each unit.
B.
Securely install dowels into pavement, and recess head of dowel beneath top of wheel stop. Grout holes solid and strike off even with top of unit.
3.7
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.
B.
Test in-place asphalt concrete courses for compliance with requirements for thickness and surface smoothness. Repair or remove and replace unacceptable paving as directed by Architect.
C.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
D.
Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.
3.8 A.
DISPOSAL Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove excavated materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
END OF SECTION 321216
ASPHALT PAVING
321216 - 6
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 321313 - CONCRETE PAVEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes cement concrete pavement for the following applications: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
1.2 A.
SUBMITTALS Data and Reports: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Product Data: For each manufactured material and product indicated. Concrete Design Mixes: For each concrete mix indicated. Material certificates.
ADA Detectable Warning Mats: 1. 2. 3. 4.
1.3
Driveway approach. Curbs and gutters. Walkways, ramps and steps Equipment and compactor pads. ADA detectable warning mats.
Shop Drawings for Mats. Show fabrication details, surface profile, placement plans, and joint and edge details. Samples: Three (3) samples of ADA detectable warning mats. Provide full range of available colors. Warranty: Copies of manufacturer’s warranty for each type of tile, mat and required accessory. Maintenance Instructions: Copies of manufacturer’s specified maintenance practices for each type of tile, mat and required accessory.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.
B.
ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified by the requirements of the Contract Documents.
C.
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): Detectable warning surfaces shall comply with detectable warnings on walking surfaces section of the Americans with Disabilities Act, Title 49 CFR Transportation, Part 37.9 “Standards for Accessible Transportation Facilities, Appendix A, Section 4.29.2 Detectable Warnings on Walking Surfaces”.
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
321313 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE D.
1.4 A.
01/13/12
Detectable Warnings: Detectable warning materials and installations within the City of Columbus public right-of-way areas shall comply with Transportation Division "Supplemental Specification 1551 Detectable Warnings". WARRANTY Detectable Warning System Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of mat warning surfaces that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.
Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.
B.
Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.
C.
Plain Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn.
D.
Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening steel reinforcement. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice.
2.2
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Comply with Division 03 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete”.
B.
Related Materials: 1.
Forms: Steel or wood of size and strength to resist movement during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until removal. Provide forms, free of distortion and defects, and of height equal to full depth of concrete work. a.
b. 2. 3.
Provide 2" nominal thickness, surfaced plank wood forms for straight section. Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form radius bends as required. Coat forms with a non-staining form release agent that will not discolor or deface the surface of the concrete.
Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork. Evaporation Retarder: As listed in Division 03 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete”.
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
321313 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 4.
2.3
Water Repellent: "Consolideck Saltguard" by ProSoCo, Inc. Single coat. Use "CurTo-Spec MS" as compatible with curing compound or a dissipating type as listed in Division 03 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete”.
CONCRETE MIXES AND MIXING
A.
Concrete Mixes: Comply with Division 03 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete”.
B.
Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements and with ASTM C 94.
C.
Project-Site Mixing: Not permitted.
2.4 A.
DETECTABLE WARNING SURFACES Polyurethane detectable warning mat by Detectable Warning Systems, Inc. (866-9997452) forms the basis-of-design. Products with comparable materials, performance characteristics and colors by the following manufacturers are also acceptable. 1. 2.
B.
01/13/12
Armor-Tile Tactile Systems. Advance Traffic Markings.
Detectable Warning Mats 1. 2.
Model: “Detectable Warning Mat”, raised truncated domes of 0.9” base diameter, 0.4” top diameter and 0.2” height as required by ADAAG. Pattern: a. b.
3. 4. 5. 6.
Offset Pattern with 2.35” and 1.66” spacing. In-line or square pattern with 2.35” spacing.
Mat Size: 24" X 48" and 36" X 48" with beveled edges in direction of travel. Color: Charcoal Gray or Brick Red Color homogenous throughout the mat. Verify color with the Architect and Owner before ordering. Material: Polyurethane with integral color as selected. Installation Materials: a. b. c. d.
Adhesive: DWS # 3549, heavy-duty elastomeric two-part polyurethane. Edge Sealer: DWS # ES10, cyanoacrylate. Seam Sealer: DWS # SS10, cyanoacrylate. Fasteners: DWS #NA25100Y, low profile nylon expansion anchors ¼” diameter by 1” long, located in molded recess area at the rate of 6 anchors per 24" x 48" mat, and 8 anchors per 36" x 48" mat.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
321313 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
A.
Surface Preparation: Proof-roll prepared subbase, and remove loose material from surface.
B.
Forms: Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to required lines, grades, and elevations.
C.
Reinforcement: Accurately position and support reinforcement, and secure against displacement. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete. 1. 2.
Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable; lap at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Install reinforcement supports or place welded wire fabric in center of slab during concrete placement.
D.
Joints: Locate and install construction, isolation, contraction, and expansion joints as indicated. Provide contraction joints with depth equal to one-quarter slab thickness, using radius tool. When required depth exceeds tool capability, sawcut balance of joint.
E.
Concrete Placement: Comply with recommendations in ACI 304R for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. Place concrete in a continuous operation within planned joints or sections. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Consolidate concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by handspading, rodding, or tamping according to recommendations in ACI 309R. Screed and initial-float concrete surfaces with darby or bull float before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Protect concrete from cold or hot weather during mixing, placing, and curing.
F.
Evaporation Retarder: Apply to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
G.
Pavement Tolerances: Comply with tolerances in ACI 330.1, "Specification for Plain Concrete Parking Lots."
3.2 A.
FINISHES AND CURING Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and the concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surfaces to true planes with gaps below 10-foot- long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed ¼”. Cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture. 1.
Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across floatfinished concrete surface, perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
321313 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2. B.
2.
3.
3.3 A.
Retrace edge tooling to provide a smooth perimeter and textured field at each control or construction joint.
Curing: Begin curing after finishing concrete, but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. Cure concrete by one or a combination of the following methods: 1.
C.
01/13/12
Moisture cure concrete by water, continuous fog spray, continuously wet absorptive cover, or by moisture-retaining-cover curing. Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. Cure areas schedule to receive water repellent treatment with dissipating type curing compound or wet cure.
Water Repellent: Apply one (1) coat of water repellent material over all exterior concrete paving, walks, and ramps after curing compound has dissipated and concrete is properly cured. DETECTABLE WARNING SURFACES Mat Detectable Warning Surfaces: Apply adhesives, sealants and mechanical fasteners in strict accordance with manufacturers written installation instructions. 1.
2.
Inspect application areas and verify they are clean, dry, free of voids, curing compounds, projections, loose material, dust, oils, grease and sealers, and are structurally sound. Verify concrete paving substrate cured for at least 21 days prior to start of installation. a. b. c.
3.
Environmental Conditions: a.
b. 4.
Remove, concrete curing compounds, if present, with light sandblasting. Patch cracks or holes larger than 1/8”. Clean dust and other contaminants from surfaces to be adhered.
Verify substrate and ambient air temperature are 60 degree F minimum and rising, and substrate is completely dry with no precipitation during 24 hours prior to installation. Verify sprinklers or other water sources will not be turned on during installation and adhesive curing process.
Cut and pre-position mats. Mask area 1/8” beyond the edge of the pre-positioned mats. Set mats square and aligned with each other. a.
Spread adhesive to provide complete 100% coverage over concrete substrate using manufacturer’s recommended notched trowel. Press mats
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
321313 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
b.
5. 6. 7.
3.4
01/13/12
firmly from the center out to remove air bubbles. Temporarily tape seams to hold them tight. After mats are in installed, remove perimeter tape from concrete substrate and firmly press down corners of each mat. Cover mats with plywood weighted down with several 25 lbs sand bags. Keep weighted plywood in place until adhesive has set,
Install nylon anchors. Drill holes true and straight and mechanically fasten tiles to concrete surface. Apply bead of seam seal adhesive along joint seams. Apply bead of edge sealer along outer mat edges. Clean mat surfaces following recommended maintenance and cleaning procedures.
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A.
Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective, or does not meet requirements in this Section.
B.
Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement.
C.
Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.
D.
Trim filler material flush with adjacent surfaces after concrete is fully cured.
END OF SECTION 321313
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
321313 - 6
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 321400 - UNIT PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3.
1.2 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: 1. 2.
B.
For materials other than water and aggregates. Paver manufacturer’s standard pattern layouts and standard available shapes and accessories.
Samples for unit pavers. 1.
1.3
Permeable concrete pavers set on gravel and structural soil. Installation accessories. Extra materials as indicated.
Unit Pavers: Include a minimum of five full size samples of concrete paver units showing the full range of shapes, exposed finish, color and texture proposed for the Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of unit paver, joint material and setting material from one source with resources to provide materials and products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.
B.
Mockups: Build mockups for each form and pattern of unit paver. 1. 2.
3. 4.
UNIT PAVING
Build mockups, 4’ x 4’ minimum, on site at locations designated by Architect. Use selected materials, bond patterns, joint sizes and cleaning requirements. Areas shall show full range of color, texture and workmanship proposed for the work. Remove and rebuild unacceptable work as required to achieve acceptable mockups. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
321400 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1.4 A.
1.5 A.
01/13/12
PROJECT CONDITIONS Cold-Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. EXTRA MATERIALS Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.
Paver Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern and size indicated.
B.
Excess Materials: Turn over unused extra materials to the Owner’s representative. Package materials with protective covers for storage and identify with labels describing contents and color.
C.
Provide a typed list of extra and excess materials and turn over to the Owner’s representative.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
CONCRETE PAVERS
A.
Solid, permeable interlocking concrete unit pavers by Oberfields Inc.form the basis-ofdesign. Products with comparable materials, performance characteristics, colors and finishes may be submitted to the Architect for review no later than ten (10) days prior to the Bid Date. Products with comparable materials, performance characteristics, colors and finishes by listed manufacturers are also acceptable.
B.
Concrete Unit Pavers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
2.2
Pavers: “Eco Friendly Solutions, Washington 10 permeable pavers. Size: Full, 4-1/8” x 5-1/2”. Pattern: Running bond and stack bond. Color: Two (2) colors to be selected. Bedding: Gravel and structural soil.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Cork Joint Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1752, Type II.
B.
Compressible Foam Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1.
UNIT PAVING
321400 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 2.3
01/13/12
AGGREGATE ON STRUCTURAL SOIL SETTING-BED MATERIALS
A.
Graded Aggregate for Base: Sound, crushed #9 limestone compacted into place.
B.
Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following: 1. 2.
Apparent Opening Size: No. 40 sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751. Permittivity: 0.5 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL Examine areas indicated to receive paving for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of colors and textures. 1.
Do not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations or other defects that will be visible in finished work.
C.
Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting where possible.
D.
Joint Pattern: As indicated on the Drawings.
E.
Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/16" unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage) nor 1/8" in 24" and ¼" in 10 feet from level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of paving.
F.
Expansion and Control Joints: Provide joint filler at locations and of widths indicated. Install joint filler before setting pavers. Make top of joint filler flush with top of pavers.
3.2
AGGREGATE ON STRUCTURAL SOIL SETTING-BED APPLICATIONS
A.
Compact structural soil uniformly to at least 95 percent of laboratory density.
B.
Place drainage geotextile over compacted base course, overlapping ends and edges at least 12".
C.
Place leveling course and screed to a thickness of 2”, taking care that moisture content remains constant and density is loose and constant until pavers are set and compacted to at least 98 percent.
UNIT PAVING
321400 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
D.
Treat leveling course with herbicide to inhibit growth of grass and weeds.
E.
Set pavers with a minimum joint width of 1/16" and a maximum of 1/8", being careful not to disturb leveling base. If pavers have spacer bars, place pavers hand tight against spacer bars.
F.
Vibrate pavers into leveling course with a low-amplitude plate vibrator capable of a 3500 to 5000-lbf compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz.
END OF SECTION 321400
UNIT PAVING
321400 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 323119 - ORNAMENTAL FENCES AND GATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3.
1.2
Metal ornamental fencing and mounting hardware. Metal swing gates and mounting hardware. Installation accessories.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show locations, components, materials, dimensions, sizes, component spacing, components finishes, installation and operational clearances, gate swings, and anchorage details and attachments to adjacent construction.
C.
Samples: 8” by 10” minimum size samples of fence panel and gate illustrating design, fabrication workmanship, and selected color coating.
D.
Warranties: Submit three (3) copies of manufacturer’s warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
METAL FENCING
A.
Metal ornamental prefinished fencing, gates and accessories by Fortin Iron Works (614-291-4342) form the basis-of-design. Products with comparable designs, materials, operational characteristics and finishes by other manufacturers may be submitted to the Architect for review at least ten (10) days prior to the Bid Date.
B.
Fencing and Gates: 1.
Fence Style: “F10”. a. b. c. d. e.
2.
Fence Pickets: ¾" square tubing. Intermediate Posts: 2" Newel Post, (P2N) with newel cap. Corner and Entry Posts: 2” Ball Post, (P2B) with ball cap Newel and Post Ball Caps: Manufacturer's standard designs. Panel Height: Refer to Drawings.
Gates: Panel material and gate ends with same outside cross-section dimensions as fence. a. b. c.
Rail and Upright Intersections: Welded. Picket and Rail Intersections: Welded. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard hinges, spring hinge, latch handles and (exterior type) exit device.
ORNAMENTAL FENCES AND GATES
323119 - 1
3. 4.
5.
NEW BUILDING FOR 01/13/12 LANE AVENUE MIXED USE Concrete: Comply with Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" requirements. Mounting Hardware: Provide fabricated brackets and coverings required to complete the work. Provide gate panic device if fence is used around restaurant patio. Steel Material for Fence Framework (tube pickets, tube rails and posts): Steel galvanized after forming, ASTM A1011. a.
6. 7. C.
Exterior Surface: Hot-dip galvanized.
Finish: Zinc-rich thermosetting epoxy powder base coat and "no-mar" TGIC polyester powder coat topcoat finish. Color: To be determined by the Owner. Touch-up paint: Provide materials for field application matching selected color.
Concrete: Class I, comply with Division 03 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete".
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.
INSTALLATION Metal Fence Installation: Install fencing to comply with fabricator’s written installation instructions, and more stringent requirements indicated. 1.
Core drill holes in existing slab for post foundations. a.
2. 3. B.
Metal Gate Installation: Install gates level, plumb and secured to mounting posts for full opening without interference. 1. 2.
3. C.
Verify posts are set plumb, aligned and at correct height and spacing. Hold in position during placement and finishing operations until concrete is sufficiently cured. b. Temporarily brace fence posts with wood supports until concrete is set. c. Protect portion of posts aboveground from concrete splatter. d. Place concrete around posts and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. e. Crown concrete around post to shed water. Install fence straight with posts plumb and level.. Do not install bent, bowed, or otherwise damaged panels. Remove such components from site and replace.
Attach hardware using tamper-resistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust gate to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly throughout entire operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding. Leave gates in the closed position.
Touch up all damaged, marred or scratched fence and gate areas. Materials field repaired beyond the Owner’s level of acceptance will be replaced at no cost to the Owner.
END OF SECTION 323119 ORNAMENTAL FENCES AND GATES
323119 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 329200 - TURF AND GRASSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2
SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Preparation of lawn and grass areas after finish grading including removal of rocks, debris, etc. 2. Seeding. 3. Continuous maintenance until lawn and grass areas are established and accepted. DEFINITIONS
A.
Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.
B.
Manufactured Soil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.
C.
Planting Soil: Native or imported topsoil, manufactured topsoil, or surface soil modified to become topsoil; mixed with soil amendments.
D.
Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately beneath planting soil.
E.
Topsoil: Natural or manufactured soils, ASTM D 5268, with pH range of 5.5 to 7, minimum 4 percent organic material content, free of stones and other materials 1” or larger in any dimension, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. 1. Soils testing and amendment materials as recommended by a qualified soilstesting laboratory.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Data and Reports: 1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 2. Product certificates. 3. Topsoil. 4. Seed mixture composition.
B.
Planting Schedule: Submit schedule Indicating anticipated planting dates at least one week prior to start of lawn installation operations.
C.
Maintenance Schedule: Submit three copies of written lawn maintenance instructions at least ten days prior to end of contractual maintenance period. Include requirements for proper lawn care, development and maintenance.
1.4 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer's Field Supervision: An experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when planting is in progress.
TURF AND GRASSES
329200 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1.5 A.
1.6
01/13/12
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Seed and Fertilizer: Deliver in original, unopened containers, and store in weatherproof locations and in such manner that they will be kept dry and their effectiveness not impaired. LAWN MAINTENANCE
A.
Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable lawn is established, but for not less than the following periods: 1. Seeded Lawns: 60 days after date of Substantial Completion.
B.
Mow lawns as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Remove no more than 40 percent of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings.
C.
Watering Equipment: 1. Provide necessary hoses and equipment to properly maintain lawns. Connect to building hose bibbs. Cost of water paid for by the Contractor.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Protect existing utilities, paving and other facilities from damage caused by lawn operations.
B.
Perform lawn work only after planting and other work affecting ground surface has been completed.
C.
Install lawns at optimal times of the year (April 15 thru June 15, or August 15 thru October 15) unless noted otherwise in writing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
SEED
A.
Seed Mixture: “Team Mates Plus” by Lesco Inc. Comparable mixtures by the following manufacturers may be submitted for review. 1. The Scotts Company.
B.
Composition: 1. 70% turf-type fescues (Titan II, Stetson, Lancer). 2. 20% perennial ryegrass (Wizard). 3. 10% Kentucky bluegrass (Merit, Baron, Shamrock, Wildwood).
C.
Rate: 8-10 lbs. per 1000 sq. ft.
D.
Water: Potable.
E.
Fertilizer: High phosphorus "starter" fertilizer that will stimulate root growth.
F.
Tackifier: Nonasphaltic, colloidal mixture nontoxic, free of plant growth or germination inhibitors for slurry application as recommended by mulch manufacturer.
TURF AND GRASSES
329200 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
G.
Mulch: Biodegradable dyed paper or wood product free of plant growth or germination inhibitors. 1. Color: Green. 2. Moisture Content: 15 percent, maximum. 3. pH Range: 4.5 to 6.5.
H.
Refer to Landscape Plan “Planting Notes” for additional requirements.
2.2
PLANTING MATERIALS
A.
Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 4 percent organic material content; free of stones 1” or larger in any dimension and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. 1. Topsoil Source: Reuse surface soil stockpiled on-site or supplemented with imported or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources provided under Division 31 Section “Earth Moving”. 2. Amend existing stockpiled on-site surface soil to produce topsoil according to topsoil requirements listed.
B.
Inorganic Soil Amendments: 1. Lime: ASTM C 602, Class T or O, agricultural limestone containing a minimum 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent. 2. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur, with a minimum 99 percent passing through No. 6 sieve and a maximum 10 percent passing through No. 40 sieve. 3. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10 percent sulfur. 4. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated.
C.
Organic Soil Amendments 1. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8. 2. Peat: Sphagnum peat moss, partially decomposed, finely divided or granular texture, with pH range of 3.4 to 4.8. 3. Peat: Finely divided or granular texture, with pH range of 6 to 7.5, containing partially decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed-sedge peat and having water-absorbing capacity of 1100 to 2000 percent. 4. Wood Derivatives: Decomposed, nitrogen-treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood waste; of uniform texture, free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic materials.
D.
Fertilizer: 1. Bonemeal: Commercial, raw or steamed, finely ground; a minimum of 4 percent nitrogen and 10 percent phosphoric acid. 2. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid. 3. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous and potassium. 4. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus and potassium.
TURF AND GRASSES
329200 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
LAWN PREPARATION
A.
Newly Graded Subgrades: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 4”. Remove stones larger than 1” in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off The Owners property. 1. Apply fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening.
B.
Unchanged Subgrades: If lawns are to be planted in areas unaltered or undisturbed by excavating, grading, or surface soil stripping operations, prepare surface soil as follows: 1. Remove existing grass, vegetation and turf. Do not mix into surface soil. 2. Loosen surface soil to a depth of at least of 6”. Apply soil amendments and fertilizers according to planting soil mix proportions and mix thoroughly into top 4” of soil. Till soil to a homogeneous mixture of fine texture. 3. Remove stones larger than 1” in any dimension and sticks, roots, trash and other extraneous matter. 4. Legally dispose of waste material, including grass, vegetation and turf, off The Owners property.
C.
Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus ½” of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit fine grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future. 1. Topsoil Amendments: Install amendment materials over topsoil areas at rates required to produce topsoil as noted in this Section. Thoroughly mix into topsoil.
D.
Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.
E.
Restore areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading and before planting.
3.2 A.
3.3
SEEDING Mix seed, fertilizer, tackifier and mulch in water using equipment designed for hydroseed application. Blend into homogenous slurry suitable for hydraulic application. 1. Apply slurry uniformly to seeded areas in a one step process. 2. Sow seed at the rate recommended by seed dealer. 3. Protect non-seeded areas from overspray. Wash off such areas immediately. SATISFACTORY LAWNS
A.
Satisfactory Seeded Lawn: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand of grass established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage exceeding 90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. and bare spots not exceeding 5” x 5”.
B.
Reestablish lawns that do not comply with requirements and continue maintenance until lawns are satisfactory.
TURF AND GRASSES
329200 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
END OF SECTION 329200
TURF AND GRASSES
329200 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 329300 - PLANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2
SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. Trees, shrubs, ground cover and plants. 2. Planting mixes, mulches and accessories. 3. Maintenance. 4. Planting installation record drawings. DEFINITIONS
A.
Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.
B.
Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.
C.
Planting Soil: Native or imported topsoil, manufactured topsoil, or surface soil modified to become topsoil; mixed with soil amendments.
D.
Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill, before placing planting soil.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples: Mineral mulch.
C.
Product certificates.
D.
Planting Schedule: Notify the Architect in writing at least one week prior to start of anticipated planting dates.
E.
Maintenance Instructions: Ten (10) days prior to end of contractual maintenance period, submit complete maintenance procedures, for the Owner's use, recommending proper development, watering, weeding, cultivating, mulching, fertilizing, spraying, and pruning of plants during a calendar year.
F.
Provide planting installation record drawings. 1. Legibly mark drawings to record actual material installation. 2. Indicate locations, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Identify field changes of materials, quantities, and changes made by substitution or Change Order. 4. Submit three (3) copies to Architect for review and approval.
PLANTS
329300 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE 1.4
01/13/12
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer who maintains an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when exterior planting is in progress.
B.
Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of exterior plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1, "American Standard for Nursery Stock."
C.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Prepare and transport plants using precautions customary in good trade practice. Cover plants transported in open vehicles with a protective covering to prevent wind burn.
B.
Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Do not drop exterior plants during delivery.
C.
Deliver exterior plants after preparations for planting have been completed and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set exterior plants trees in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist. 1. Plant or place in storage plants remaining on site longer than three (3) days. 2. Store plants in a compact group with suitable mulch or soil material placed around and between the balls so they are completely covered. Water plants daily.
1.6
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Warrant the following exterior plants, for the warranty period indicated, against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from lack of adequate maintenance, neglect, or abuse by Owner, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control. 1. Warranty Period for Trees and Shrubs: One year from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Ground Cover and Perennials: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
B.
Remove and replace plants that are dead, in an unhealthy or unsightly condition, or have lost their natural shape due to dead branches or other causes due to contractor's negligence. The cost of such replacement(s) is at the contractor's expense. Warrant all replacement plants for one (1) year after installation.
C.
Replacements plants shall be of the same kind and size as specified in the plant list. They shall be furnished and planted as specified herein.
1.7 A.
PLANTS
MAINTENANCE Trees and Shrubs: Maintain during warranty period by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, restoring planting saucers, tightening and repairing stakes and guy supports, and resetting to proper grades or vertical position, as required to establish
329300 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
healthy, viable plantings. Spray as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. B. 1.8
Ground Cover and Perennials: Maintain during warranty period by watering, weeding, fertilizing, and other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Unless otherwise specifically approved by the Architect, planting installed within the periods of the spring and fall planting seasons defined as follows for balled and burlapped material: 1. Plant between September 1 and November 1, or in the spring between March 1 and June 1. 2. Cease planting operations when soil is frozen or topsoil is muddy. 3. Planting times other than those indicated may be approved by the Architect.
B.
Make necessary advance arrangements to insure an adequate supply of water is available when required. 1. Provide required hose and watering equipment required to maintain plantings.
C.
Protect existing utilities, paving, curbs, and other facilities from damage caused by planting operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
EXTERIOR PLANTS
A.
Tree and Shrub Material: Furnish nursery-grown trees and shrubs complying with ANSI Z60.1, with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement. 1. Provide balled and burlapped, balled and potted, container-grown or fabric baggrown trees and shrubs as scheduled.
B.
Ground Cover: Provide ground cover of species indicated, established and well rooted in pots or similar containers, and complying with ANSI Z60.1.
C.
Annuals: Provide healthy, disease-free plants of species and variety shown or listed. Provide only plants that are acclimated to outdoor conditions before delivery and that are in bud but not yet in bloom.
D.
Perennials: Provide healthy, field-grown plants from a commercial nursery, of species and variety shown or listed.
2.2 A.
PLANTS
PLANTING MATERIALS Planting Soil: Existing, native surface topsoil formed under natural conditions with the duff layer retained during excavation process and stockpiled on-site. Verify suitability
329300 - 3
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
of native surface topsoil to produce viable planting soil. Clean soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. 1. 2.
Supplement with off-site planting soil when quantities are insufficient. Mix existing, native surface topsoil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the following quantities to produce planting soil: a. b. c.
B.
Imported topsoil or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well-drained construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches deep; do not obtain from agricultural land, bogs, or marshes. 1.
2.
Additional Properties of Imported Topsoil or Manufactured Topsoil: Screened and free of stones 1 inch or larger in any dimension; free of roots, plants, sod, clods, clay lumps, pockets of coarse sand, paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, acid, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth; free of obnoxious weeds and invasive plants including quackgrass, Johnsongrass, poison ivy, nutsedge, nimblewill, Canada thistle, bindweed, bentgrass, wild garlic, ground ivy, perennial sorrel, and bromegrass; not infested with nematodes; grubs; or other pests, pest eggs, or other undesirable organisms and disease-causing plant pathogens; friable and with sufficient structure to give good tilth and aeration. Continuous, air-filled pore space content on a volume/volume basis shall be at least 15 percent when moisture is present at field capacity. Soil shall have a field capacity of at least 15 percent on a dry weight basis. Mix imported topsoil or manufactured topsoil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the following quantities to produce planting soil: a. b. c.
C.
PLANTS
Ratio of Loose Compost to Topsoil by Volume: 4 parts topsoil to 1 part compost Slow-Release Fertilizer: ½ lb fertilizer or each cubic yard of topsoil/compost mixture Other material as recommended by soils report
Ratio of Loose Compost to Topsoil by Volume: 4 parts topsoil to 1 part compost Slow-Release Fertilizer: ½ lb fertilizer or each cubic yard of topsoil/compost mixture Other material as recommended by soils report
Fertilizer: 1. Bonemeal: Commercial, raw or steamed, finely ground; a minimum of 4 percent nitrogen and 10 percent phosphoric acid. 2. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid. 3. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium. 4. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium.
329300 - 4
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE D. 2.3
01/13/12
Mulches: Finely shredded hardwood bark or uniform texture and size. Use shredded bark aced at least once a year. ACCESSORIES
A.
Stakes for Supporting Trees: Hardwood posts 2" x 2" x 8'-0" in length.
B.
Stakes for Guying: Hardwood posts 2" x 2" x 3'-0" in length.
C.
Staking and Guying Wire: No. 10 or 12 gauge galvanized wire.
D.
Staking and Guying Hose: Two ply reinforced garden hose, not less than ½” in diameter.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXTERIOR PLANTING
A.
Bed Establishment: 1. Loosen subgrade of planting beds to a minimum depth of 6”. 2. Remove stones larger than 1” in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 3. Thoroughly blend planting soil mix off-site before spreading or spread topsoil, apply soil amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil mix. 4. Spread planting soil mix to a depth of 6” but not less than required to meet finish grades after natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. 5. Finish Grading: Grade planting beds to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.
B.
Trees and Shrubs: 1. Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular pits with sides sloped inward. Trim base leaving center area raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage. Do not further disturb base. Scarify sides of plant pit smeared or smoothed during excavation. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter. 2. Set trees and shrubs plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of root ball adjacent finish grades. a. Balled and Burlapped: Remove burlap and wire baskets from tops of root balls and partially from sides, but do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation. b. Balled and Potted or Container Grown: Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant. c. Fabric Bag Grown: Carefully remove root ball from fabric bag without damaging root ball or plant. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation. d. Place planting soil mix around root ball in layers, tamping to settle mix and eliminate voids and air pockets. When pit is approximately one-half backfilled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat
PLANTS
329300 - 5
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
3.
01/13/12
watering until no more water is absorbed. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of planting soil mix. Organic Mulching: Apply 3” average thickness of organic mulch extending 12” beyond edge of planting pit or trench. Do not place mulch within 3” of trunks or stems.
C.
Tree Guying and Staking by Tree Installer: 1. Trees are not to be wrapped with tree wrap unless specifically directed by the Architect. 2. Stake and guy trees before lawn seeding operations, and when high winds or other conditions which may affect tree survival or appearance occur. 3. Deciduous Trees: Stake trees under 2½” caliper; Guy trees 3” caliper and larger. 4. Evergreen Trees: Stake trees 8'-0" tall and under; Guy trees 8'-0" tall and greater.
D.
Tree and Shrub Pruning: Prune, thin, and shape trees and shrubs according to standard horticultural practice. Prune trees to retain required height and spread. Do not cut tree leaders; remove only injured or dead branches from flowering trees. Prune shrubs to retain natural character. Shrub sizes indicated are sizes after pruning.
E.
Ground Cover and Plant Planting: 1. Set out and space ground cover and plants as indicated. 2. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots, and backfill with planting soil. 3. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to hold water. 4. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil. 5. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery from transplanting shock.
F.
Planting Bed Mulching: 1. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting beds and other areas indicated. Apply 3” average thickness of mulch, and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch against plant stems.
G.
Protect exterior plants from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other contractors and trades, and others. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged exterior planting.
H.
Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 329300
PLANTS
329300 - 6
33
UTILITIES
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
SECTION 334600 - SUBDRAINAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
SUMMARY This Section includes subdrainage systems for the following locations: 1. 2.
1.2 A.
Foundations where indicated. Elevator pits.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For drainage conduit, drainage panels, and geotextile fabrics indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
MATERIALS PE Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 405, corrugated, for coupled joints. 1. 2. 3.
Perforated Pipe: Foundation perimeters and collection areas. Non-Perforated Pipe: Runout piping to interior sump or site storm water system. Couplings: Manufacturer's standard, band type. Provide: a. b. c. d.
B.
In-line splices. "T" and "Y" connectors. 90° and 45° corners. Cleanouts.
Soils Materials: 1. 2.
Impervious Fill: Clay, gravel, and sand mixture. Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, ASTM D 448, coarse aggregate, Size No. 57, with 100 percent passing 1½" sieve and not more than 5 percent passing No. 8 sieve.
C.
Geotextile Filter Fabric: Woven or nonwoven geotextile filter fabric of PP or polyester fibers, or combination of both. Flow rates range from 110 to 330 gpm per sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM D 4491. Flat or sock style at Contractor’s option.
D.
Detectable Warning Tape: Polyethylene film warning tape encasing a metallic core, minimum 6" wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility.
SUBDRAINAGE
334600 - 1
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE
01/13/12
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.
3.2 A.
EARTHWORK Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving". PIPING INSTALLATION Install piping beginning at low points of system, true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Bed piping with full bearing in filtering material. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions and other requirements indicated. 1.
Foundation Subdrainage: Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum slope of 0.5 percent and with a minimum cover of 36", unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Use increasers, reducers, and couplings made for different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings being connected. Reduction of pipe size in direction of flow is prohibited.
C.
Join perforated, PE pipe and fittings with couplings for soiltight joints according to ASTM D 2321.
3.3
FOUNDATION DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
A.
Bottom Impervious Fill: Place impervious fill material on subgrade adjacent to bottom of footing after concrete footings have been cured and forms removed. Place and compact impervious fill to dimensions indicated, but not less than 6" deep and 12" wide.
B.
Drainage Fill: Place supporting layer of drainage fill over compacted subgrade to compacted depth of not less than 4". After installing drainage piping, add drainage fill to width of at least 6" on side away from wall and to top of pipe to perform tests. After satisfactory testing, cover piping to width of at least 6" on side away from footing and above top of pipe to within 12" of finish grade. Place drainage fill in layers not exceeding 3" n loose depth; compact each layer placed. 1.
2. 3.
Before installing drainage fill, lay flat-style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench sides. After installing drainage fill, wrap top of drainage fill with flat-style geotextile filter fabric. Encase pipe with sock-style geotextile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock sections with electrical tape. After installing drainage fill, place one layer of flat-style geotextile filter fabric over top of drainage fill, overlapping edges at least 4".
SUBDRAINAGE
334600 - 2
NEW BUILDING FOR LANE AVENUE MIXED USE C.
3.4 A.
Fill to Grade: Place native fill material over compacted drainage fill. Place material in loose-depth layers not exceeding 6". Thoroughly compact each layer. Fill to finish elevations and slope away from building. IDENTIFICATION Materials and their installation are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving". Arrange for installation of green warning tapes directly over piping. 1. 2.
3.5 A.
3.6 A.
01/13/12
Install warning tape or detectable warning tape over ferrous piping. Install detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground structures.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing: After installing drainage fill to top of pipe, test drain piping with water to ensure free flow before backfilling. Remove obstructions, replace damaged components, and repeat test until results are satisfactory. CLEANING Clear interior of installed piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted pipe at end of each day or when work stops.
END OF SECTION 334600
SUBDRAINAGE
334600 - 3
